8DG61258GAAATMZZA - V1 - 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 7.0 Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide PDF

Title page
Alcatel-Lucent 1830
Photonic Service Switch (PSS) | Release 7.0
Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide
8DG-61258-GAAA-TMZZA
Issue 8 | February 2015
Legal notice
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright © 2015 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Conformance statement
Interference Information: Part 15 of FCC Rules

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the guidelines in this document, the
equipment may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference,
in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at the expense of the user.
Security Statement
In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through the use of remote access features. In such an event,
applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Alcatel-Lucent cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any
allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
Limited Warranty
For terms and conditions of sale, contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Team.
Contents
About this document

Purpose ................................................................................................................................................................................... lxxxvii
lxxxvii
What's new ............................................................................................................................................................................ lxxxvii

lxxxvii
Safety information ................................................................................................................................................................... xciv

xciv
Conventions used ..................................................................................................................................................................... xciv

xciv
Related information .................................................................................................................................................................. xcv

xcv
Technical support .................................................................................................................................................................. xcviii

xcviii
How to comment ................................................................................................................................................................... xcviii

xcviii
1 Safety
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1-1
General notes on safety
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-3

1-3
Structure of safety statements ............................................................................................................................................... 1-4

1-4
Basic safety aspects .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-7

1-7
Specific safety areas
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11

1-11
Potential sources of danger ................................................................................................................................................. 1-12

1-12
Laser safety ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-13

1-13
Laser product classification ................................................................................................................................................ 1-19

1-19
Equipment grounding ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-25

1-25
Electrostatic discharge .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-26

1-26
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-33

1-33
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS iii
8DG-61258-GAAA-TMZZA Release 7.0
Issue 8 February 2015
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Transportation .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-34
1-34
Storage ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-37

1-37
Installation ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-41

1-41
Taking into operation ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-47

1-47
Operation and maintenance ................................................................................................................................................ 1-51

1-51
Taking out of operation ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-61

1-61
Event of failure ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1-64

1-64
2 Alarm and condition details
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

2-1
Network element alarms
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-37

2-37
Abnormal Insertion ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-63

2-63
Active and standby main Equipment Controller databases not synchronized ................................................ 2-64
2-64
Active Loopback ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-65

2-65
Add Power Adjustment Failure ........................................................................................................................................ 2-67

2-67
Add power control failure ................................................................................................................................................... 2-70

2-70
AES FIPS Failure .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-71

2-71
AIS - TCM ............................................................................................................................................................................... 2-72

2-72
AIS is Detected at the BITS Port ...................................................................................................................................... 2-73

2-73
AIS Line/MS for OCn/STMn ............................................................................................................................................ 2-74

2-74
AIS Line/MS ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-75

2-75
Alarm Indication Signal ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-76

2-76
Alarm Indication Signal on HO Path .............................................................................................................................. 2-77

2-77
Alarm Indication Signal STS Path ................................................................................................................................... 2-79

2-79
All Channels Missing ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-81

2-81
All Outgoing Channels Missing ........................................................................................................................................ 2-83

2-83
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
iv Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
All selectable timing references fail ................................................................................................................................ 2-84
2-84
Amplifier disabled .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-85

2-85
Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended .................................................................................................................... 2-86

2-86
Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain too high ................................................................................. 2-87
2-87
Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain too low .................................................................................. 2-88
2-88
Application needs personal assistance ............................................................................................................................ 2-89

2-89
APR Active - invalid topology .......................................................................................................................................... 2-90

2-90
APR Active - Line .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-92

2-92
APR Active - Node ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-93

2-93
APR Active – port switch .................................................................................................................................................... 2-95

2-95
APR Limited ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-96

2-96
APR Forced .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-98

2-98
APR unavailable - monitoring card booting ................................................................................................................. 2-99

2-99
APS channel mismatch ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-100

2-100
APS mode mismatch .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-102

2-102
APS protection switching byte failure ......................................................................................................................... 2-104

2-104
Authentication Failure ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-105

2-105
Auto laser off due to upstream condition .................................................................................................................... 2-106

2-106
Auto Negotiation Mismatch ............................................................................................................................................. 2-107

2-107
Automatic In-Service .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-108

2-108
Automatic switching to a timing reference on the output timing selection process .................................... 2-110
2-110
Automatic switch of working entity to protection ................................................................................................... 2-111

2-111
Automatic switch to a timing reference ....................................................................................................................... 2-113

2-113
Automatic switch to protection ....................................................................................................................................... 2-114

2-114
Automatic switch to working ........................................................................................................................................... 2-116

2-116
Automatic system Synchronization Switch ................................................................................................................ 2-118

2-118
Automatic timing reference switch ................................................................................................................................ 2-119

2-119
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS v
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B1 Signal Degrade ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-120
2-120
Backward Defect Indication - ODU .............................................................................................................................. 2-121

2-121
Backward Defect Indication - OTU .............................................................................................................................. 2-122

2-122
Backward Defect Indication - Path ................................................................................................................................ 2-123

2-123
Backward Defect Indication - Section ......................................................................................................................... 2-124

2-124
Backward Defect Indication - TCM .............................................................................................................................. 2-125

2-125
Backward Defect Indication on TCM Layer .............................................................................................................. 2-126

2-126
Battery off or power filter off/Battery power at backplane off or voltage low ............................................. 2-127
2-127
Card clock frequency measured out of spec ............................................................................................................. 2-128

2-128
Card Autonomous Reset .................................................................................................................................................... 2-130

2-130
Card booting .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-131

2-131
Card Degrade - Device ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-132

2-132
Card degrade - Wavelength Tracker Channel ID Insertion ................................................................................... 2-133

2-133
Card failure - boot failure ................................................................................................................................................. 2-135

2-135
Card failure - communication .......................................................................................................................................... 2-136

2-136
Card failure - crypto .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-138

2-138
Card failure - device ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-139

2-139
Card Identification Event .................................................................................................................................................. 2-141

2-141
Card initializing .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-142

2-142
Card Inventory Error .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-143

2-143
Card Manual Reset .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-144

2-144
Card mismatch ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-145

2-145
Card missing/Card removal unseat ................................................................................................................................ 2-146

2-146
Card not allowed .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-147

2-147
Card over temperature ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-148

2-148
Card provisioning failure .................................................................................................................................................. 2-149

2-149
Card Under Temperature ................................................................................................................................................... 2-150

2-150
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vi Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card Unknown ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-151
2-151
Card Would Exceed Shelf Amperage Limit .............................................................................................................. 2-152

2-152
Channel Absent .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-154

2-154
Channel attempted escape from latchup routine failed .......................................................................................... 2-156

2-156
Channel Collision ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-158

2-158
Channel Collision Output Direction ............................................................................................................................. 2-159

2-159
Channel FDI ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-160

2-160
Channel optical power out of range .............................................................................................................................. 2-162

2-162
Channel OSNR is out of valid measurement range ................................................................................................. 2-164

2-164
Channel PDI ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-165

2-165
Channel Power Unachievable ......................................................................................................................................... 2-166

2-166
Channel Power Unstable ................................................................................................................................................... 2-168

2-168
Channel Unexpected ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-170

2-170
Channel Unexpected Out .................................................................................................................................................. 2-172

2-172
Client Signal Fail detected on the ODU ...................................................................................................................... 2-174

2-174
Client Signal Failure (GFP) ............................................................................................................................................. 2-176

2-176
Client Signal Failure - ODU ............................................................................................................................................ 2-178

2-178
Clock freq error > 54.6 ppm (>20 ppm causes OTN errors) ................................................................................ 2-180
2-180
Compact flash needs to be upgraded ........................................................................................................................... 2-182

2-182
Configuration mismatch ................................................................................................................................................... 2-183

2-183
Clock Adjustment ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-185

2-185
Cold Start ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-186

2-186
Control Card redundancy is compromised ................................................................................................................. 2-187

2-187
Control Communication Failure for FLC ................................................................................................................... 2-189

2-189
Control Communication Failure for MTX ................................................................................................................. 2-190

2-190
Control Communication Failure Quadrant 1 ............................................................................................................. 2-192

2-192

2-194
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS vii
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-196

2-198
CPU Performance Issue Detected .................................................................................................................................. 2-200

2-200
Critical Filter Clogging ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-201

2-201
Current Key Mismatch ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-203

2-203
Current Time Reference is Unstable ............................................................................................................................. 2-204

2-204
CWR Input LOS ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-205

2-205
Database Backup .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-206

2-206
Database invalid ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-207

2-207
Database Restore .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-209

2-209
Database Synchronization Failed ................................................................................................................................... 2-210

2-210
Data error or timeout ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-211

2-211
Data Link Down ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-212

2-212
DB Backup Failure .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-213

2-213
DB Failure Local - copy creation of processing failure ......................................................................................... 2-214

2-214
DB Failure Transport - file transport failure .............................................................................................................. 2-215

2-215
DB Restore Failure .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-216

2-216
Detected high voltage from on-board power supply ............................................................................................... 2-217

2-217
Device Not Reachable ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-218

2-218
Drop Power Adjustment Failure ..................................................................................................................................... 2-219

2-219
Drop Power Adjustment Required ................................................................................................................................. 2-221

2-221
Duplex Impaired ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-222

2-222
Duplex Not Aligned ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-223

2-223
Duplicate OCH Trail Name .............................................................................................................................................. 2-225

2-225
Duplicate Shelf ID ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-227

2-227
Duplicate Wave Key ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-228

2-228
DWDM-OCS audit discrepancy ..................................................................................................................................... 2-230

2-230
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
viii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DWDM-OCS full audit success - no discrepancies ................................................................................................ 2-231
2-231
DWDM-OCS link down .................................................................................................................................................... 2-232

2-232
DWDM-OCS provisioning failure ................................................................................................................................ 2-233

2-233
DWDM-OCS retrieve failure .......................................................................................................................................... 2-234

2-234
ECC Communication Failure with FLC A ................................................................................................................. 2-235

2-235
ECC Communication Failure with FLC B ................................................................................................................. 2-236

2-236
EDFA Input LOS ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-237

2-237
EDFA Input Power Margin Exceeded .......................................................................................................................... 2-238

2-238
Egress Backward Defect Indication - ODU ............................................................................................................... 2-239

2-239
Egress Client Signal Failure - ODU .............................................................................................................................. 2-241

2-241
Egress Locked - ODU ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-242

2-242
Egress Open Connection Indication - ODU ............................................................................................................... 2-243

2-243
Egress Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU ............................................................................................................. 2-244

2-244
Egress Server Signal Failure - Client ........................................................................................................................... 2-245

2-245
Egress Server Signal Failure - Client ........................................................................................................................... 2-247

2-247
Egress Server Signal Failure - ODU ............................................................................................................................. 2-249

2-249
Egress Signal Degrade - ODU ........................................................................................................................................ 2-251

2-251
Egress Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path ........................................................................................................... 2-252

2-252
Egress Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU ................................................................................................................... 2-254

2-254
Embedded Operations Channel failure detected ...................................................................................................... 2-256

2-256
Environmental Input [1-8] active ................................................................................................................................... 2-258

2-258
Ethernet Client Signal Failure ......................................................................................................................................... 2-259

2-259
Ethernet Ring Path Changes Its Forwarding State From Blocked to Unblocked or Unblocked to
Blocked ............................................................................................................................................................................ 2-260
2-260
Ethernet Ring Provisioning Mismatch is Detected ................................................................................................ 2-261

2-261
Excessive BER ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-262

2-262
Excessive Bit Error Ratio .................................................................................................................................................. 2-263

2-263
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ix
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Excessive Invalid Login Attempts ................................................................................................................................ 2-266
2-266
Exercise on the protection entity - Far End ................................................................................................................ 2-267

2-267
Exercise on the working entity ....................................................................................................................................... 2-268

2-268
Exercise on the working entity - Far End ................................................................................................................... 2-269

2-269
Extended Temp Range Violation: Non-ETR Card ................................................................................................... 2-270

2-270
Extended Temp Range Violation: Non-ETR Pluggable Module ........................................................................ 2-271

2-271
Extension Header (GFP) Mismatch .............................................................................................................................. 2-272

2-272
External and line synchronization out of service ..................................................................................................... 2-274

2-274
External LAN Failure ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-275

2-275
Failure Of Protocol - Inconsistent .................................................................................................................................. 2-276

2-276
Failure Of Protocol - No Response ............................................................................................................................... 2-277

2-277
Failure Of Protocol - Operation Mismatch ................................................................................................................. 2-279

2-279
Failure Of Protocol - Provisioning Mismatch ........................................................................................................... 2-280

2-280
Failure Of Protocol - Switch Mismatch ....................................................................................................................... 2-281

2-281
Failure Slave Tracking Synchronization ..................................................................................................................... 2-282

2-282
FAN32HRQD ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2-283

2-283
Fan at full speed, device on card over allowed temperature ............................................................................... 2-284
2-284
Fan speed is too high .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-285

2-285
Fan speed is too low ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-286

2-286
Fan speed manually set to maximum ........................................................................................................................... 2-287

2-287
Far End Local Fault ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-288

2-288
Far End Loss of Signal ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-289

2-289
Far End Loss of Synchronization ................................................................................................................................... 2-290

2-290
Far End Loss of Synchronization ................................................................................................................................... 2-291

2-291
Far End Port Mapping Mismatch ................................................................................................................................... 2-292

2-292
Far end protection line failure ......................................................................................................................................... 2-293

2-293
Far-End Unavailable Time Period ................................................................................................................................ 2-294

2-294
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
x Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Clear Far End Remote Fault ............................................................................................................................................ 2-296
2-296
Fiber connection mismatch .............................................................................................................................................. 2-297

2-297
Filter Blocked ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2-298

2-298
Filter Missing ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2-299

2-299
Firmware loaded is not the preferred version ............................................................................................................ 2-300

2-300
FIPS Selftest Squelch ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-302

2-302
FIPS Software Mismatch .................................................................................................................................................. 2-303

2-303
Firmware Upgrade Failed ................................................................................................................................................. 2-304

2-304
Firmware upgrade pending ............................................................................................................................................... 2-305

2-305
FLC temporarily in servicing state ................................................................................................................................ 2-306

2-306
Forced switch to a timing reference .............................................................................................................................. 2-307

2-307
Forced switch to a timing reference for the output timing selection process ............................................... 2-308
2-308
Forced Switch to Protection ............................................................................................................................................. 2-309

2-309
Forced Switch to Working ................................................................................................................................................ 2-311

2-311
Forward Defect Indication ................................................................................................................................................ 2-312

2-312
Forward Defect Indication - Client Failure ................................................................................................................ 2-313

2-313
FPGA Download or Programming Failure ................................................................................................................. 2-315

2-315
FPGA Initializing ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-316

2-316
FPGA Timeout ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-318

2-318
Free running synchronization mode .............................................................................................................................. 2-319

2-319
Freq err > 9.2 ppm ==> downstream wavetracker errors .................................................................................... 2-320
2-320
From DCM Input LOS ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-322

2-322
FTRUNNING state, PM Global File Collection ...................................................................................................... 2-323

2-323
Fuse Alarm ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-324

2-324
Gain Adjustment Exceeded Max Value ....................................................................................................................... 2-326

2-326
GFP Loss of Frame Delineation ..................................................................................................................................... 2-327

2-327
GFP User Payload Identifier Mismatch ....................................................................................................................... 2-328

2-328
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS xi
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GFP User Payload Mismatch ........................................................................................................................................... 2-329
2-329
Grandmaster clock class degrade ................................................................................................................................... 2-330

2-330
Hardware failure ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-331

2-331
Hardware Minor Circuit Pack Failure .......................................................................................................................... 2-333

2-333
Hardware not supported for current configuration .................................................................................................. 2-334

2-334
Hardware suspicious ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-335

2-335
High BER ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-337

2-337
High Filter Clogging ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-338

2-338
Holdover synchronization mode .................................................................................................................................... 2-340

2-340
HOPath Unequipped ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-341

2-341
IGMP Source Limit Exceeded ........................................................................................................................................ 2-342

2-342
Implicit TCA 24h clearing, PM TCA ........................................................................................................................... 2-343

2-343
Improper Removal ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-344

2-344
Incoming Payload LOS ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-346

2-346
Incoming SUPVY LOF ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-347

2-347
Incoming SUPVY LOS ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-348

2-348
Inhibit Switch for redundant equipment ...................................................................................................................... 2-350

2-350
Initialization ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-351

2-351
INPREP, PM Global File Collection ............................................................................................................................. 2-352

2-352
Input LOS ............................................................................................................................................................................... 2-353

2-353
Internal Clock signal of MTX missing ........................................................................................................................ 2-354

2-354
Internal Error to MTX A ................................................................................................................................................... 2-355

2-355
Internal Error to MTX B ................................................................................................................................................... 2-356

2-356
Internal LAN Failed ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-357

2-357
Internal LAN Redundancy Degraded ........................................................................................................................... 2-358

2-358
Internal Synch Channel of MTX A corrupted ........................................................................................................... 2-359

2-359
Internal Synch Channel of MTX B corrupted ........................................................................................................... 2-361

2-361
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Inter NE communication timeout blocking power adjustment ........................................................................... 2-363
2-363
Inter-shelf loss of communication ................................................................................................................................. 2-365

2-365
Intra-Nodal Topology Failure-Operator Action Required ..................................................................................... 2-366

2-366
Invalid or no egress port defined .................................................................................................................................... 2-367

2-367
Invalid Threshold ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-368

2-368
Invalid Topology .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-369

2-369
IPCP ECC Connection Failure ........................................................................................................................................ 2-370

2-370
JB Recentered ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-371

2-371
Link OAM Loss Of Protocol .......................................................................................................................................... 2-372

2-372
LAG port add failure .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-373

2-373
LAG Subgroup Selected .................................................................................................................................................... 2-374

2-374
Lan Cable Asymmetric connected ................................................................................................................................. 2-375

2-375
Lan Left Ring Failure ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-377

2-377
Lan Right Ring Failure ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-379

2-379
Laser Back-Facet Optical Power Cross Threshold .................................................................................................. 2-381

2-381
Laser Cooling Current Cross Threshold ...................................................................................................................... 2-382

2-382
Laser end of life .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-383

2-383
Latch Open ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-384

2-384
LCP ECC Connection Fail ................................................................................................................................................ 2-385

2-385
LD Input LOS ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-386

2-386
LD SIG Input LOS .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-387

2-387
Line Card Configuration Failed ...................................................................................................................................... 2-388

2-388
Line (Facility) loopback active ....................................................................................................................................... 2-389

2-389
Link Aggregation Degrade .............................................................................................................................................. 2-390

2-390
Link Aggregation Group Loss of Signal ..................................................................................................................... 2-391

2-391
Link Down .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-392

2-392
Link Up .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-393

2-393
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS xiii
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LAN Local Fault Indicator ............................................................................................................................................... 2-394
2-394
Local Packet Lost ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-395

2-395
Locked ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-396

2-396
Locked - ODU ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-398

2-398
Locked - TCM Layer .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-399

2-399
Locked - TCM ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-400

2-400
Lock out of a timing reference from selection .......................................................................................................... 2-401

2-401
Lockout of a timing reference for the output timing selection process ........................................................... 2-402
2-402
Lockout of Protection ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-403

2-403
Lockout of Protection - Far End ..................................................................................................................................... 2-406

2-406
Lockout of Timing Reference .......................................................................................................................................... 2-407

2-407
Lockout of Working ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-408

2-408
Log File Transfer Failure Local ..................................................................................................................................... 2-409

2-409
Log File Transfer Failure Transport ............................................................................................................................. 2-410

2-410
Log File Transfer in Progress .......................................................................................................................................... 2-411

2-411
Logical removal of a timing reference ......................................................................................................................... 2-412

2-412
Loss of 1588 Synchronization ......................................................................................................................................... 2-413

2-413
Loss of 1PPS Signal .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-414

2-414
Loss of Lane Alignment ................................................................................................................................................... 2-415

2-415
Loss of Alignment Marker Lock .................................................................................................................................... 2-416

2-416
Loss of Announce Messages on the Slave Port ....................................................................................................... 2-417

2-417
Loss of continuity ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-418

2-418
Loss of Continuity ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-419

2-419
Loss of Delay_Resp Messages on the Slave Port ................................................................................................... 2-420

2-420
Loss of Frame ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2-421

2-421
Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe ....................................................................................................................... 2-425

2-425
Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe (LOFLOM - ODU) ................................................................................ 2-427

2-427
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xiv Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Frame at the BITS Port ...................................................................................................................................... 2-428
2-428
Loss of Frame Egress ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-429

2-429
Loss Of Frames ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-430

2-430
Loss of GFP alignment ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-431

2-431
Loss of lane alignment ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-432

2-432
Loss of Link, GBE10 .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-433

2-433
Loss of Link, GBE100 ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-434

2-434
Loss of Multiframe .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-435

2-435
Loss of Multiframe - OTU ............................................................................................................................................... 2-436

2-436
Loss of Optical Signal, GBE ........................................................................................................................................... 2-437

2-437
Loss of Optical Signal, GBE10 ...................................................................................................................................... 2-438

2-438
Loss of Optical Signal, GBE100 .................................................................................................................................... 2-439

2-439
Loss of OPU Multiframe Identifier ............................................................................................................................... 2-440

2-440
Loss of Pointer HO Path .................................................................................................................................................... 2-441

2-441
Loss of Pointer STS Path .................................................................................................................................................. 2-442

2-442
Loss of Signal ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2-443

2-443
Loss of Signal at the BITS Input Port .......................................................................................................................... 2-448

2-448
Loss of Signal Payload ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-449

2-449
Loss of Subsystem Control of Shelf ............................................................................................................................. 2-450

2-450
Loss of Synchronisation (LSS) ....................................................................................................................................... 2-452

2-452
Loss of Synchronization (LANLSS) ............................................................................................................................. 2-453

2-453
Loss of Sync Messages on the Slave Port ................................................................................................................. 2-454

2-454
Loss of Tandem Connection on TCM Layer .............................................................................................................. 2-455

2-455
Loss of ToD Signal ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-456

2-456
Low input voltage floor defect ....................................................................................................................................... 2-457

2-457
Low Voltage Cut-Off .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-458

2-458
Manual (Management) Removal .................................................................................................................................... 2-459

2-459
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS xv
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manual switch from the Alternate path to the preferred path .............................................................................. 2-463
2-463
Manual switch from the protection entity to the working entity ........................................................................ 2-464
2-464
Manual switch from the protection entity to the working entity - Far End .................................................... 2-466
2-466
Manual switch from the protection path to the working path .............................................................................. 2-467
2-467
Manual switch of working entity to protection ......................................................................................................... 2-468

2-468
Manual switch of working entity to protection - Far End ..................................................................................... 2-470

2-470
Manual switch to a timing reference ............................................................................................................................. 2-471

2-471
Manual switch to a timing reference for the output timing selection process .............................................. 2-472
2-472
Manual switch to Internal Timing .................................................................................................................................. 2-473

2-473
Manual Switch to Protection .......................................................................................................................................... 2-474

2-474
Manual Switch to Working ............................................................................................................................................. 2-475

2-475
Manually Caused Abnormal Condition - Card In Maintenance ........................................................................ 2-476

2-476
MEP AIS ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-477

2-477
MEP AIS State Change ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-478

2-478
MEP CFM Fault ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-479

2-479
MEP Cross Connect CCM ................................................................................................................................................ 2-480

2-480
MEP DM Test Complete ................................................................................................................................................... 2-481

2-481
MEP Error CCM .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-482

2-482
MEP LBM Test Complete ................................................................................................................................................ 2-483

2-483
MEP LTM Test Complete ................................................................................................................................................. 2-484

2-484
MEP Mac Status ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-485

2-485
MEP RDI CCM .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-486

2-486
MEP Remote CCM ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-487

2-487
MEP SLM Test Complete ................................................................................................................................................. 2-488

2-488
Mismerge ............................................................................................................................................................................... 2-489

2-489
Mismerge ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-490

2-490
Mixed MTX Operation ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-491

2-491
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xvi Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Mixed types of power filters used .................................................................................................................................. 2-493
2-493
Modulator output power out of range ........................................................................................................................... 2-494

2-494
Multiplex Structure Identification Mismatch ............................................................................................................ 2-495

2-495
Multiplex Structure Indication Mismatch ................................................................................................................... 2-497

2-497
NE SSH Key Generation ................................................................................................................................................... 2-498

2-498
NE SSL Certificate Installation ...................................................................................................................................... 2-499

2-499
NE SSL CSR Generation .................................................................................................................................................. 2-500

2-500
NE SSL Key Generation ................................................................................................................................................... 2-501

2-501
Network Time Protocol is enabled - no server is reachable ................................................................................. 2-502

2-502
Network Time Protocol Loss of Redundancy ........................................................................................................... 2-504

2-504
NE unavailable ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-505

2-505
Near-End Unavailable Time Period ............................................................................................................................. 2-506

2-506
Next Key Mismatch ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-508

2-508
No Available Time References ........................................................................................................................................ 2-509

2-509
No available timing reference for the output timing selection process ........................................................... 2-510
2-510
No Device Found ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-511

2-511
No TDM Payload ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-512

2-512
No committed software load (Autoinstall disabled) .............................................................................................. 2-513

2-513
NTP Out of Sync .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-514

2-514
OA pump laser bias current high .................................................................................................................................... 2-515

2-515
OA pump laser temperature high ................................................................................................................................... 2-516

2-516
OCS card or port deleted ................................................................................................................................................... 2-517

2-517
ODU AIS ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-518

2-518
OMD Input LOS .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-519

2-519
OMS Server Signal Failure ............................................................................................................................................. 2-520

2-520
Open Connection Indication ............................................................................................................................................ 2-521

2-521
Open Connection Indication - ODU ............................................................................................................................. 2-523

2-523
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS xvii
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open Connection Indication - TCM ............................................................................................................................ 2-524
2-524
Open Connection Indication on TCM Layer ............................................................................................................. 2-525

2-525
Optical Intrusion Baseline Needed ................................................................................................................................ 2-526

2-526
Optical Intrusion - Detected ............................................................................................................................................. 2-527

2-527
Optical Intrusion - Monitoring Suspended ................................................................................................................. 2-528

2-528
Optical power received out of range ............................................................................................................................. 2-529

2-529
Optical supervision channel excessive BER .............................................................................................................. 2-531

2-531
Optics over temperature .................................................................................................................................................... 2-532

2-532
OSPF Adjacency Failure ................................................................................................................................................... 2-533

2-533
OSPF Adjacency Not Full ............................................................................................................................................... 2-534

2-534
OT Minor Circuit Pack Failure ....................................................................................................................................... 2-535

2-535
OTU AIS ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-536

2-536
Out of operational range - loss too high alarm ........................................................................................................ 2-537

2-537
Out of operational range - loss too low alarm .......................................................................................................... 2-538

2-538
Outgoing Channel Absent ................................................................................................................................................. 2-539

2-539
Outgoing Channel Optical Power Out of Range ...................................................................................................... 2-541

2-541
Outgoing Client Signal Fail detected on the GFP ................................................................................................... 2-542

2-542
Outgoing Client Signal Fail Detected on the ODU ................................................................................................ 2-543

2-543
Output LOS ............................................................................................................................................................................ 2-544

2-544
Outgoing Loss of Signal .................................................................................................................................................... 2-545

2-545
Outgoing Loss of Tones ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-546

2-546
Outgoing Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU ....................................................................................................... 2-548

2-548
Outgoing SUPVY LOS ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-549

2-549
Out of operational range - input power too high ...................................................................................................... 2-550

2-550
Out of operational range - input power too low ....................................................................................................... 2-551

2-551
Packet card initializing ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-552

2-552
Parameters for amplifier tilt adjustment unconfigured ......................................................................................... 2-553

2-553
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xviii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Payload Label Mismatch - Path ...................................................................................................................................... 2-554
2-554
PCS Generator active ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-556

2-556
Pluggable Module Discovered ........................................................................................................................................ 2-557

2-557
Pluggable Module Inserted ............................................................................................................................................... 2-558

2-558
Pluggable Module mismatch .......................................................................................................................................... 2-559

2-559
Pluggable Module missing .............................................................................................................................................. 2-560

2-560
Pluggable Module Removed ............................................................................................................................................ 2-561

2-561
Pluggable Module SEEP failure ..................................................................................................................................... 2-562

2-562
Pluggable Module Transmit Failure ............................................................................................................................ 2-564

2-564
Pluggable Module Unknown .......................................................................................................................................... 2-565

2-565
PM Baseline ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-566

2-566
Port degrade - wavelength tracker communication failure ................................................................................... 2-567

2-567
Port degrade - wavelength tracker detection failure ................................................................................................ 2-568

2-568
Port degrade - wavelength tracker encode degrade ................................................................................................. 2-569

2-569
Port failure - device ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-571

2-571
Port transmit failure ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-572

2-572
Post-FEC Signal Degrade ................................................................................................................................................. 2-573

2-573
Power Adjust Loss Margin Exceeded ......................................................................................................................... 2-574

2-574
Power Adjustment Failure ................................................................................................................................................ 2-575

2-575
Power Adjustment Required ............................................................................................................................................ 2-577

2-577
Power Failure ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2-579

2-579
Power filter mismatch ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-580

2-580
Power Management Suspended ...................................................................................................................................... 2-581

2-581
Power management topology invalid .......................................................................................................................... 2-584

2-584
Power Unbalance ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-585

2-585
Pre-FEC Signal Degrade ................................................................................................................................................... 2-586

2-586
Procedure Error ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-588

2-588
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS xix
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisioned firmware will be obsolete after sw upgrade ...................................................................................... 2-589
2-589
PTP Clock in the Free-Running Status ........................................................................................................................ 2-590

2-590
PTP Port Faulty ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-591

2-591
RA2P Gain Failure Detected .......................................................................................................................................... 2-592

2-592
Raman Suppress - Line ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-593

2-593
READY, PM Global File Collection ............................................................................................................................. 2-594

2-594
Received timing signal failure ........................................................................................................................................ 2-595

2-595
Receiver Optimization in Progress ............................................................................................................................... 2-596

2-596
Reference Clock - forced switch active ...................................................................................................................... 2-597

2-597
Remote Client Local Fault .............................................................................................................................................. 2-598

2-598
Remote Client Loss of Synchronization ..................................................................................................................... 2-599

2-599
Remote Defect Indication ................................................................................................................................................ 2-600

2-600
Remote Defect Indication ................................................................................................................................................. 2-601

2-601
Remote Failure Indication on HO path ........................................................................................................................ 2-602

2-602
Remote Failure Indication on line ................................................................................................................................. 2-604

2-604
Remote Failure Indication on OC-n .............................................................................................................................. 2-605

2-605
Remote Failure Indication on STS Path ...................................................................................................................... 2-606

2-606
Remote Fault ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-607

2-607
Remote Inventory Mismatch ........................................................................................................................................... 2-608

2-608
Remote Packet Lost ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-610

2-610
RFI Line/MS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-611

2-611
RMD Equipment Fail ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-612

2-612
RMD Power Fail ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-613

2-613
SAP Mac Limit .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-614

2-614
Security Intrusion Alarm ................................................................................................................................................... 2-615

2-615
Server Signal Failure - ODU .......................................................................................................................................... 2-616

2-616
Server Signal Failure - Optical Channel ...................................................................................................................... 2-618

2-618
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xx Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Server signal failure - OSC ............................................................................................................................................. 2-619
2-619
Server Signal Failure - Path ............................................................................................................................................. 2-620

2-620
Server Signal Failure - Section ....................................................................................................................................... 2-621

2-621
Server Signal Failure on ETH - Egress ........................................................................................................................ 2-622

2-622
Server Signal Failure on HO Path .................................................................................................................................. 2-624

2-624
Server Signal Failure on Section .................................................................................................................................... 2-626

2-626
Server Signal Failure on Section - Egress ................................................................................................................... 2-627

2-627
Server Signal Failure on Line .......................................................................................................................................... 2-628

2-628
Server Signal Failure on STS Path ................................................................................................................................ 2-629

2-629
Server Signal Failure on TCM Layer ........................................................................................................................... 2-631

2-631
Service FDB Full ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-632

2-632
Service MFIB Full .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-633

2-633
SFP Equipment Fail ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-634

2-634
SFP Loss Of Signal ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-635

2-635
Shelf data inconsistent ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-636

2-636
Shelf LAN (ES1 & ES2) cables are incorrectly connected .................................................................................. 2-637
2-637
Shelf mismatch ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-639

2-639
Shelf Transmission Fail .................................................................................................................................................... 2-640

2-640
Shelf unavailable .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-641

2-641
Signal Degrade ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-642

2-642
Signal Degrade - ODU ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-643

2-643
Signal Degrade - OTU ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-644

2-644
Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio ....................................................................................................................................... 2-645

2-645
Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path .......................................................................................................................... 2-648

2-648
Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Section .................................................................................................................... 2-650

2-650
Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - TCM Layer ........................................................................................................... 2-652

2-652
Signal Degrade - TCM ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-654

2-654
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS xxi
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Slipping Timing Signal ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-655
2-655
Software Download ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-656

2-656
Software Mismatch ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-657

2-657
Software Upgrade Failed ................................................................................................................................................. 2-658

2-658
Software Version Mismatch ............................................................................................................................................ 2-659

2-659
SSL CA Root Certificate Installation ............................................................................................................................ 2-660

2-660
Standby Database Corruption .......................................................................................................................................... 2-661

2-661
STS Path Idle ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-662

2-662
Subtended shelf cannot be assigned a shelf ID ........................................................................................................ 2-663

2-663
SUPVY Amplifier Input LOS ......................................................................................................................................... 2-665

2-665
SUPVY Signal Degrade ................................................................................................................................................... 2-666

2-666
Switching Matrix Module Failure .................................................................................................................................. 2-667

2-667
Synchronization Equipment (CRU) failure ................................................................................................................ 2-668

2-668
Synchronization Equipment Failure ............................................................................................................................ 2-669

2-669
System clock forced to internal clock .......................................................................................................................... 2-670

2-670
System clock in free running mode ............................................................................................................................... 2-671

2-671
System clock in holdover mode ...................................................................................................................................... 2-672

2-672
System Initialization New Failure ................................................................................................................................. 2-673

2-673
TCA 1 DAY – Average Bidirectional Frame Delay ................................................................................................ 2-674

2-674
TCA 1 DAY – Average Far-End Frame Delay Variation ...................................................................................... 2-675

2-675
TCA 1 DAY – Average Near-End Frame Delay Variation .................................................................................... 2-676

2-676
TCA 1 DAY – Average Far-End Frame Loss Ratio ................................................................................................. 2-677

2-677
TCA 1 DAY – Average Near-End Frame Loss Ratio ............................................................................................ 2-678

2-678
TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, Multiplex Section ................................................................................ 2-679

2-679
TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, ODU Layer ............................................................................................. 2-680

2-680
TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, OTU Layer .............................................................................................. 2-682

2-682
TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, Regenerator Section ............................................................................. 2-684

2-684
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, Regenerator Section ........................................................................... 2-685
2-685
TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds-Regenerator Section Threshold (Transmit Direction) ................................ 2-686
2-686
TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds Threshold (Transmit Direction) .......................................................................... 2-687

2-687
TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, TCM Layer ............................................................................................. 2-688

2-688
TCA 1 DAY Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds ........................................................................ 2-690

2-690
TCA 1 DAY Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds, TCM Facility ............................................ 2-691
2-691
TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds Threshold ................................................................................................................... 2-692

2-692
TCA 1 DAY Code Violation Threshold ...................................................................................................................... 2-693

2-693
TCA 1 DAY Code Violation Threshold (Receive Direction) ............................................................................. 2-694

2-694
TCA 1 DAY Code Violation Threshold (Receive Direction) ............................................................................. 2-695

2-695
TCA 1 DAY Code Violation-PCS layer (Receive Direction) .............................................................................. 2-696

2-696
TCA 1 DAY Code Violation-PCS layer (Transmit Direction) ............................................................................ 2-697

2-697
TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds-PCS layer Threshold (Receive Direction) ...................................................... 2-698
2-698
TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds-PCS layer Threshold (Transmit Direction) .................................................... 2-699
2-699
TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds, Regenerator Section ............................................................................................... 2-700

2-700
TCA 1 DAY Error Seconds, ODU Layer .................................................................................................................... 2-701

2-701
TCA 1 DAY Error Seconds, OTU Layer ..................................................................................................................... 2-703

2-703
TCA 1 DAY Error Seconds, TCM Layer .................................................................................................................... 2-705

2-705
TCA - Failed to Decrypt .................................................................................................................................................... 2-707

2-707
TCA 1 DAY Ethernet Packet Error Ratio ................................................................................................................... 2-708

2-708
TCA 1 DAY Ethernet Packet Error Ratio Threshold (Transmit Direction) .................................................... 2-709
2-709
TCA 1 DAY Far End Background Block Error, Multiplex Section .................................................................. 2-710
2-710
TCA 1 DAY Far End Background Block Error - ODUk ....................................................................................... 2-711
2-711
TCA 1 DAY Far End Background Block Error - OTUk ....................................................................................... 2-712
2-712
TCA 1 DAY Far End Background Block Error - TCM ......................................................................................... 2-713
2-713
TCA 1 DAY Far End Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section ................................................................................. 2-714
2-714
TCA 1 DAY Far End Errored Seconds, ODU .......................................................................................................... 2-715

2-715
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS xxiii
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Far End Errored Seconds, OTU .......................................................................................................... 2-716
2-716
TCA 1 DAY Far End Errored Seconds, TCM .......................................................................................................... 2-717

2-717
TCA 1 DAY Far End Severely Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section .............................................................. 2-718
2-718
TCA 1 DAY Far End Severely Errored Seconds, ODU ....................................................................................... 2-719
2-719
TCA 1 DAY Far End Severely Errored Seconds, OTU ........................................................................................ 2-720
2-720
TCA 1 DAY Far End Severely Errored Seconds, TCM ....................................................................................... 2-721
2-721
TCA 1 DAY Far End Unavailable Seconds, Multiplex Section ........................................................................ 2-722
2-722
TCA 1 DAY Far End Unavailable Seconds, ODU ................................................................................................. 2-723

2-723
TCA 1 DAY Far End Unavailable Seconds, OTU .................................................................................................. 2-724

2-724
TCA 1 DAY Far End Unavailable Seconds, TCM ................................................................................................. 2-725

2-725
TCA 1 DAY FEC Errors Corrected, OTU Layer ..................................................................................................... 2-726

2-726
TCA 1 DAY Forward Error Correction, Uncorrectable Block Counts ............................................................ 2-728
2-728
TCA 15 MIN Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds ............................................................................................. 2-729

2-729
TCA 15 MIN Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds - TCM .............................................................................. 2-730

2-730
TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Bidirectional Frame Delay ............................................................................................ 2-731

2-731
TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Far-End Frame Delay Variation .................................................................................. 2-732

2-732
TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Far-End Frame Loss Ratio ............................................................................................ 2-733

2-733
TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Near-End Frame Delay Variation ............................................................................... 2-734

2-734
TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Near-End Frame Loss Ratio ......................................................................................... 2-735

2-735
TCA 1 DAY - Optical Power Received - High ......................................................................................................... 2-736

2-736
TCA 1 DAY - Optical Power Received - Low .......................................................................................................... 2-737

2-737
TCA 1 DAY - Optical Power Transmitted - High .................................................................................................... 2-738

2-738
TCA 1 DAY - Optical Power Transmitted - Low ..................................................................................................... 2-739

2-739
TCA 1 DAY Out of Frame Seconds, Regenerator Section ................................................................................... 2-740

2-740
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Bidirectional Frame Delay ............................... 2-741
2-741
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement Average Far-end Frame Delay .................................................... 2-742
2-742
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Far-end Frame Delay Variation ...................... 2-743
2-743
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxiv Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Near-end Frame Delay ..................................... 2-744
2-744
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Near-end Frame Delay Variation ................... 2-745
2-745
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Bidirectional Frame Delay ......................... 2-746
2-746
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement Maximum Far-end Frame Delay ................................................. 2-747
2-747
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Far-end Frame Delay Variation ................. 2-748
2-748
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement Average Far-end Frame Delay .................................................... 2-749
2-749
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Near-end Frame Delay Variation ............. 2-750
2-750
TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Average Far-end Frame Loss Ratio ............................................... 2-751
2-751
TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Average Near-end Frame Loss Ratio ............................................ 2-752
2-752
TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Far-end High Loss Interval .............................................................. 2-753
2-753
TCA 1 DAY MIN PMON Loss Measurement Maximum Far-end Frame Loss Ratio ............................... 2-754
2-754
TCA 1 DAY MIN PMON Loss Measurement Maximum Near-end Frame Loss Ratio ............................ 2-755
2-755
TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Near-end High Loss Interval .......................................................... 2-756
2-756
TCA 1 DAY PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average Far-end Frame Loss Ratio ........................... 2-757
2-757
TCA 1 DAY PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average Near-end Frame Loss Ratio ........................ 2-758
2-758
TCA 1 DAY PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Near-end High Loss Interval ...................................... 2-759
2-759
TCA 1 DAY Post-FEC BER Threshold ...................................................................................................................... 2-760

2-760
TCA 1 DAY Pre-FEC BER Threshold ........................................................................................................................ 2-761

2-761
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section ............................................................................... 2-762

2-762
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, ODU Layer ............................................................................................. 2-763

2-763
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, OTU Layer ............................................................................................. 2-765

2-765
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds - PCS layer (Receive Direction) ...................................................... 2-767
2-767
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds - PCS layer (Transmit Direction) ..................................................... 2-768
2-768
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Frame Seconds - PCS layer (Receive Direction) ........................................ 2-769
2-769
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, Regenerator Section ............................................................................ 2-770

2-770
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, TCM Layer ............................................................................................. 2-771

2-771
TCA 1 DAY total number of errored packets at the receive port ...................................................................... 2-773
2-773
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS xxv
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY total number of errored packets at the transmit port ..................................................................... 2-774
2-774
TCA 1 DAY total number of High Capacity octets ................................................................................................. 2-775

2-775
TCA 1-DAY total number of High Capacity packets ............................................................................................. 2-776

2-776
TCA 1 DAY total number of octets received ............................................................................................................. 2-777

2-777
TCA 1 DAY total number of octets transmitted ....................................................................................................... 2-778

2-778
TCA 1 DAY total number of packets discarded at the receive port ................................................................. 2-779
2-779
TCA 1 DAY total number of packets discarded at the transmit port ................................................................. 2-780
2-780
TCA 1 DAY total number of packets received ........................................................................................................ 2-781

2-781
TCA 1 DAY total number of packets transmitted .................................................................................................... 2-782

2-782
TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, Regenerator Section ..................................................................................... 2-783

2-783
TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, Multiplex Section ......................................................................................... 2-784

2-784
TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, ODU Layer ....................................................................................................... 2-785

2-785
TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, OTU Layer ....................................................................................................... 2-787

2-787
TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, Regenerator Section ...................................................................................... 2-789

2-789
TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, TCM Layer ....................................................................................................... 2-790

2-790
TCA 15 MIN – Average Bidirectional Frame Delay .............................................................................................. 2-792

2-792
TCA 15 MIN – Average Far-End Frame Delay Variation .................................................................................... 2-793

2-793
TCA 15 MIN – Average Near-End Frame Delay Variation .................................................................................. 2-794

2-794
TCA 15 MIN – Average Far-End Frame Loss Ratio ............................................................................................... 2-795

2-795
TCA 15 MIN – Average Near-End Frame Loss Ratio .......................................................................................... 2-796

2-796
TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, Multiplex Section .............................................................................. 2-797

2-797
TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, ODU Layer ........................................................................................... 2-798

2-798
TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, OTU Layer ............................................................................................ 2-800

2-800
TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, Regenerator Section ........................................................................... 2-802

2-802
TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, Regenerator Section ......................................................................... 2-804

2-804
TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds-Regenerator Section Threshold (Transmit Direction) .............................. 2-805
2-805
TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds Threshold (Transmit Direction) ........................................................................ 2-806

2-806
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxvi Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, TCM Layer ........................................................................................... 2-807
2-807
TCA 15 MIN Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds ........................................................................ 2-809

2-809
TCA 15 MIN Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds, TCM Facility .......................................... 2-810
2-810
TCA 15 MIN Code Violation .......................................................................................................................................... 2-811

2-811
TCA 15 MIN Code Violation Threshold (Receive Direction) ........................................................................... 2-812

2-812
TCA 15 MIN Code Violation Threshold (Receive Direction) ........................................................................... 2-813

2-813
TCA 15 MIN Code Violation-PCS layer (Receive Direction) ............................................................................ 2-814

2-814
TCA 15 MIN Code Violation-PCS layer (Transmit Direction) .......................................................................... 2-815

2-815
TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds Threshold ................................................................................................................. 2-816

2-816
TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds-PCS layer Threshold (Receive Direction) .................................................... 2-817
2-817
TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds-PCS layer Threshold (Transmit Direction) .................................................. 2-818
2-818
TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds, Regenerator Section ............................................................................................. 2-819

2-819
TCA 15 MIN Error Seconds, ODU Layer .................................................................................................................. 2-820

2-820
TCA 15 MIN Error Seconds, OTU Layer ................................................................................................................... 2-822

2-822
TCA 15 MIN Error Seconds, TCM Layer .................................................................................................................. 2-824

2-824
TCA 15 MIN Ethernet Packet Error Ratio ................................................................................................................. 2-826

2-826
TCA 15 MIN Ethernet Packet Error Ratio Threshold (Transmit Direction) ................................................. 2-827
2-827
TCA 15 MIN Far End Background Block Error, Multiplex Section ............................................................... 2-828
2-828
TCA 15 MIN Far End Background Block Error - ODUk ..................................................................................... 2-829
2-829
TCA 15 MIN Far End Background Block Error - TCM ....................................................................................... 2-830
2-830
TCA 15 MIN Far End Background Block Error - OTUk ..................................................................................... 2-831
2-831
TCA 15 MIN Far End Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section ................................................................................ 2-832
2-832
TCA 15 MIN Far End Errored Seconds, ODU ......................................................................................................... 2-833

2-833
TCA 15 MIN Far End Errored Seconds, OTU .......................................................................................................... 2-834

2-834
TCA 15 MIN Far End Errored Seconds, TCM ......................................................................................................... 2-835

2-835
TCA 15 MIN Far End Severely Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section .............................................................. 2-836
2-836
TCA 15 MIN Far End Severely Errored Seconds, ODU ....................................................................................... 2-837
2-837
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS xxvii
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Far End Severely Errored Seconds, OTU ....................................................................................... 2-838
2-838
TCA 15 MIN Far End Severely Errored Seconds, TCM ....................................................................................... 2-839
2-839
TCA 15 MIN Far End Unavailable Seconds, Multiplex Section ....................................................................... 2-840
2-840
TCA 15 MIN Far End Unavailable Seconds, ODU ................................................................................................ 2-841

2-841
TCA 15 MIN Far End Unavailable Seconds, OTU ................................................................................................. 2-842

2-842
TCA 15 MIN Far End Unavailable Seconds, TCM ................................................................................................ 2-843

2-843
TCA 15 MIN FEC Errors Corrected, OTU Layer ................................................................................................... 2-844

2-844
TCA 15 MIN Forward Error Correction, Uncorrectable Block Counts .......................................................... 2-846
2-846
TCA 15 MIN Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds ............................................................................................. 2-847

2-847
TCA 15 MIN Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds - TCM .............................................................................. 2-848

2-848
TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Bidirectional Frame Delay .......................................................................................... 2-849

2-849
TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Far-End Frame Delay Variation ................................................................................ 2-850

2-850
TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Far-End Frame Loss Ratio .......................................................................................... 2-851

2-851
TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Near-End Frame Delay Variation ............................................................................. 2-852

2-852
TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Near-End Frame Loss Ratio ....................................................................................... 2-853

2-853
TCA 15 MIN - Optical Power Received - High ....................................................................................................... 2-854

2-854
TCA 15 MIN - Optical Power Received - Low ........................................................................................................ 2-855

2-855
TCA 15 MIN - Optical Power Transmitted - High .................................................................................................. 2-856

2-856
TCA 15 MIN - Optical Power Transmitted - Low ................................................................................................... 2-857

2-857
TCA 15 MIN Out of Frame Seconds, Regenerator Section ................................................................................. 2-858

2-858
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Bidirectional Frame Delay ............................. 2-859
2-859
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement Average Far-end Frame Delay ................................................... 2-860
2-860
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Far-end Frame Delay Variation .................... 2-861
2-861
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Near-end Frame Delay ................................... 2-862
2-862
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Near-end Frame Delay Variation ................. 2-863
2-863
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Bidirectional Frame Delay ....................... 2-864
2-864
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement Maximum Far-end Frame Delay .............................................. 2-865
2-865
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxviii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Far-end Frame Delay Variation ............... 2-866
2-866
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement Maximum Near-end Frame Delay ........................................... 2-867
2-867
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Near-end Frame Delay Variation ........... 2-868
2-868
TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Average Far-end Frame Loss Ratio ............................................. 2-869
2-869
TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Average Near-end Frame Loss Ratio .......................................... 2-870
2-870
TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Far-end High Loss Interval ............................................................ 2-871
2-871
TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Maximum Far-end Frame Loss Ratio ........................................ 2-872
2-872
TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Maximum Near-end Frame Loss Ratio ..................................... 2-873
2-873
TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Near-end High Loss Interval ........................................................ 2-874
2-874
TCA 15 MIN PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average Far-end Frame Loss Ratio ......................... 2-875
2-875
TCA 15 MIN PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average Near-end Frame Loss Ratio .................... 2-876
2-876
TCA 15 MIN PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Near-end High Loss Interval .................................... 2-877
2-877
TCA 15 MIN Post-FEC BER Threshold .................................................................................................................... 2-878

2-878
TCA 15 MIN Pre-FEC BER Threshold ...................................................................................................................... 2-879

2-879
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section ............................................................................... 2-880

2-880
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, ODU Layer ........................................................................................... 2-881

2-881
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, OTU Layer ........................................................................................... 2-883

2-883
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds - PCS layer (Receive Direction) .................................................... 2-885
2-885
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds - PCS layer (Transmit Direction) ................................................... 2-886
2-886
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Frame Seconds - PCS layer (Receive Direction) ...................................... 2-887
2-887
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Frame Seconds - PCS layer (Transmit Direction) ..................................... 2-888
2-888
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, Regenerator Section .......................................................................... 2-889

2-889
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, TCM Layer ........................................................................................... 2-891

2-891
TCA 15 MIN total number of errored packets at the receive port ..................................................................... 2-893
2-893
TCA 15 MIN total number of errored packets at the transmit port ................................................................... 2-894
2-894
TCA 15 MIN total number of High Capacity octets ............................................................................................... 2-895

2-895
TCA 15-MIN total number of High Capacity packets ........................................................................................... 2-896

2-896
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS xxix
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN total number of octets received .......................................................................................................... 2-897
2-897
TCA 15 MIN total number of octets transmitted ..................................................................................................... 2-898

2-898
TCA 15 MIN total number of packets discarded at the receive port ................................................................. 2-899
2-899
TCA 15 MIN total number of packets discarded at the transmit port ............................................................... 2-900
2-900
TCA 15 MIN total number of packets received ........................................................................................................ 2-901

2-901
TCA 15 MIN total number of packets transmitted .................................................................................................. 2-902

2-902
TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, Regenerator Section .................................................................................... 2-903

2-903
TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, Multiplex Section ........................................................................................ 2-904

2-904
TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, ODU Layer ..................................................................................................... 2-905

2-905
TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, OTU Layer ..................................................................................................... 2-907

2-907
TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, Regenerator Section .................................................................................... 2-909

2-909
TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, TCM Layer ..................................................................................................... 2-910

2-910
TCA - Code Violations, Section ..................................................................................................................................... 2-912

2-912
TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average Near-end Frame Loss Ratio ..... 2-913
2-913
TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average Far-end Frame Loss Ratio ........ 2-914
2-914
TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Far-end High Loss Interval ....................... 2-915
2-915
TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Maximum Far-end Frame Loss Ratio .... 2-916
2-916
TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Near-end Frame Loss Ratio ....................... 2-917
2-917
TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Near-end High Loss Interval .................... 2-918
2-918
TCA - Errored Seconds, Section .................................................................................................................................... 2-919

2-919
TCA - Optical Power Received - High ........................................................................................................................ 2-920

2-920
TCA - Optical Power Received - Low ......................................................................................................................... 2-921

2-921
TCA - Optical Power Transmitted - High ................................................................................................................... 2-922

2-922
TCA - Optical Power Transmitted - Low .................................................................................................................... 2-923

2-923
TCA - Severely Errored Frame Seconds, Section .................................................................................................... 2-924

2-924
TCA - Severely Errored Seconds, Section .................................................................................................................. 2-925

2-925
TCA - Unavailable Seconds, Section ........................................................................................................................... 2-926

2-926
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxx Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA Background Block Errors, ODU Layer ............................................................................................................ 2-927
2-927
TCA Background Block Errors, OTU Layer ............................................................................................................. 2-929

2-929
TCA Background Block Errors, TCM Layer ............................................................................................................. 2-931

2-931
TCA Error Seconds, ODU Layer ................................................................................................................................... 2-933

2-933
TCA Error Seconds, OTU Layer .................................................................................................................................... 2-935

2-935
TCA Error Seconds, TCM Layer ................................................................................................................................... 2-936

2-936
TCA FEC Errors Corrected, OTU Layer .................................................................................................................... 2-938

2-938
TCA Severely Errored Seconds, ODU Layer ............................................................................................................ 2-940

2-940
TCA Severely Errored Seconds, OTU Layer ............................................................................................................ 2-942

2-942
TCA Severely Errored Seconds, TCM Layer ............................................................................................................ 2-944

2-944
TCA Unavailable Seconds, ODU Layer ...................................................................................................................... 2-946

2-946
TCA Unavailable Seconds, OTU Layer ...................................................................................................................... 2-948

2-948
TCA Unavailable Seconds, TCM Layer ...................................................................................................................... 2-949

2-949
TDM (SONET/SDH) Loss of Signal .......................................................................................................................... 2-951

2-951
Temperature is critical ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-952

2-952
Temperature is high ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-953

2-953
Terminal loop active ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-955

2-955
Thermal Shutdown performed ........................................................................................................................................ 2-956

2-956
Time Slot Assignment Mismatch ................................................................................................................................... 2-958

2-958
Timing quality for output timing is insufficient ...................................................................................................... 2-959

2-959
Timing Reference Failure ................................................................................................................................................. 2-960

2-960
Timing reference is unassigned ...................................................................................................................................... 2-962

2-962
Timing reference out-of-frequency ............................................................................................................................... 2-963

2-963
Timing Reference Unequipped ....................................................................................................................................... 2-964

2-964
Timing selection was switched by a manual command to a timing reference ............................................. 2-965
2-965
Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU .................................................................................................................................. 2-966

2-966
Trace Identifier Mismatch - OTU ................................................................................................................................. 2-967

2-967
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS xxxi
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on HO Path ............................................................................................................. 2-968
2-968
Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on OTN Path .......................................................................................................... 2-969

2-969
Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section ................................................................................................................ 2-971

2-971
Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on TCM Layer ....................................................................................................... 2-973

2-973
Type Mismatch .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-974

2-974
Unavailable Time, ODUk ................................................................................................................................................. 2-975

2-975
Unavailable Time, OTUk .................................................................................................................................................. 2-977

2-977
Unavailable Time, Regenerator Section ...................................................................................................................... 2-979

2-979
Unavailable Time, TCM .................................................................................................................................................... 2-981

2-981
Underlying Resource is Unavailable - Path ............................................................................................................... 2-983

2-983
Underlying Resource is Unavailable - Section ......................................................................................................... 2-985

2-985
Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Optical Section ...................................................................................... 2-987

2-987
Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Section ...................................................................................................... 2-989

2-989
Underlying resource unavailable - OTS ...................................................................................................................... 2-991

2-991
Underlying resource unavailable - card ....................................................................................................................... 2-992

2-992
Underlying resource unavailable - OMS-RX ............................................................................................................ 2-993

2-993
Underlying resource unavailable - OMS-TX ............................................................................................................ 2-994

2-994
Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-LOS .......................................................................................................... 2-995

2-995
Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-RX ............................................................................................................ 2-996

2-996
Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-TX ............................................................................................................. 2-997

2-997
Underlying Resource Unavailable - Port .................................................................................................................... 2-998

2-998
Unexpected Level ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-999

2-999
Unexpected MEG Level ................................................................................................................................................. 2-1000

2-1000
Unexpected MEP ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-1001

2-1001
Unexpected MEP ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-1002

2-1002
Unexpected MEP or unexpected periodicity .......................................................................................................... 2-1003

2-1003
Unexpected Periodicity .................................................................................................................................................. 2-1005

2-1005
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unexpected Periodicity ................................................................................................................................................... 2-1006
2-1006
Unexpected Priority ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-1007

2-1007
Unit Not Inserted .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-1008

2-1008
Unknown ECID ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-1009

2-1009
Unknown OCH Trail for xconnect .............................................................................................................................. 2-1010

2-1010
Unsupported hardware version ..................................................................................................................................... 2-1011

2-1011
Upgrade MTX size ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-1012

2-1012
Upstream Channel Absent .............................................................................................................................................. 2-1014

2-1014
Upstream Channel collision ........................................................................................................................................... 2-1015

2-1015
User inactive ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2-1016

2-1016
User Payload type (GFP) Mismatch ........................................................................................................................... 2-1017

2-1017
Detected low voltage from on-board power supply ............................................................................................ 2-1018

2-1018
VCG Loss of alignment .................................................................................................................................................. 2-1019

2-1019
VCG Server Signal Failure ............................................................................................................................................ 2-1020

2-1020
VTS Forward Defect Indication ................................................................................................................................... 2-1021

2-1021
VTS Open Connection Indication ............................................................................................................................... 2-1022

2-1022
Wait to Restore ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1023

2-1023
Wait to Restore - Far End ............................................................................................................................................... 2-1025

2-1025
Warm Start ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1026

2-1026
Wave Key Not Available ............................................................................................................................................... 2-1027

2-1027
Wave Key Overlap ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-1029

2-1029
Wave Key pair re-used for channel on node .......................................................................................................... 2-1030

2-1030
Working entity forced to switch back to working ................................................................................................. 2-1032

2-1032
Working entity forced to switch back to working - Far End ............................................................................. 2-1034
2-1034
Working entity forced to switch to protection ........................................................................................................ 2-1035

2-1035
Working entity forced to switch to protection - Far End .................................................................................... 2-1037

2-1037
Working entity switched back to working ................................................................................................................ 2-1038

2-1038
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS xxxiii
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Working entity switched back to working - Far End ............................................................................................ 2-1040
2-1040
Working entity switched to protection - Far End ................................................................................................... 2-1041

2-1041
Wrong Dest Mac ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-1042

2-1042
Wrong Device Present ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-1043

2-1043
Wrong Unit Inserted ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-1044

2-1044
WTOCM Input LOS ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-1045

2-1045
Y-cable Switchover Timer Expired ............................................................................................................................. 2-1046

2-1046
Control plane alarms
Overview .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-1048

2-1048
Active Failed - APE failed ............................................................................................................................................. 2-1050

2-1050
Active Failed - Cross connection problem ............................................................................................................... 2-1051

2-1051
Active Failed - Endpoint failure ................................................................................................................................... 2-1052

2-1052
Active Failed - Preemption ............................................................................................................................................ 2-1053

2-1053
Active Failed - Transmission problem ....................................................................................................................... 2-1054

2-1054
Active failed - Unprotected ........................................................................................................................................... 2-1055

2-1055
APE in progress ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-1056

2-1056
Backup unavailable ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-1057

2-1057
Channel assignment violation ....................................................................................................................................... 2-1058

2-1058
Color violation .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1059

2-1059
DPR degraded ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1060

2-1060
DPR down ............................................................................................................................................................................ 2-1061

2-1061
DPR Network Version Mismatch ................................................................................................................................ 2-1062

2-1062
GMRE degraded ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-1063

2-1063
GMRE in active traffic migration state ..................................................................................................................... 2-1064

2-1064
GMRE in automatic restoration disabled mode ..................................................................................................... 2-1065

2-1065
InBandComm degraded .................................................................................................................................................. 2-1066

2-1066
InBandComm down ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-1067

2-1067
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxiv Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Latency violation ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-1068
2-1068
Link diversity violation ................................................................................................................................................... 2-1069

2-1069
Logical node not reachable ............................................................................................................................................ 2-1070

2-1070
NE not reachable ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-1071

2-1071
Nominal Unavailable - Communication problem ................................................................................................. 2-1072

2-1072
Nominal unavailable - Configuration problem ....................................................................................................... 2-1073

2-1073
Nominal Unavailable - Indeterminate problem ...................................................................................................... 2-1074

2-1074
Nominal unavailable - Reversion preempt ............................................................................................................... 2-1075

2-1075
Nominal Unavailable - TP Blocked ............................................................................................................................ 2-1076

2-1076
Nominal Unavailable - Transmission problem ....................................................................................................... 2-1077

2-1077
Optical feasibility violation ........................................................................................................................................... 2-1078

2-1078
Optical parameter file error ........................................................................................................................................... 2-1079

2-1079
OutbandComm degraded ................................................................................................................................................ 2-1080

2-1080
OutBandComm down ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-1081

2-1081
Ready to revert ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1082

2-1082
Rerouted ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-1083

2-1083
Reroute not possible ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-1084

2-1084
RSVP degraded .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-1085

2-1085
RSVP down ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1086

2-1086
SNC in automatic restoration disabled mode .......................................................................................................... 2-1087

2-1087
SNCP degraded .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-1088

2-1088
SRG violation ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1089

2-1089
TCA Channel Margin ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-1091

2-1091
Test Mode enabled ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-1092

2-1092
3 Trouble-clearing procedures
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS xxxv
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-19

3-19
Procedure 3-1: Clear Abnormal Insertion ...................................................................................................................... 3-36

3-36
Procedure 3-2: Clear active and standby Main EC databases not synchronized ............................................. 3-37
3-37
Procedure 3-3: Clear Add power control failure ......................................................................................................... 3-38

3-38
Procedure 3-4: Clear AIS is Detected at the BITS Port ............................................................................................ 3-40
3-40
Procedure 3-5: Clear AIS Line/MS .................................................................................................................................. 3-41

3-41
Procedure 3-6: Clear AIS Line/MS for OCn/STMn .................................................................................................. 3-42

3-42
Procedure 3-7: Clear Alarm Indication Signal ............................................................................................................. 3-43

3-43
Procedure 3-8: Clear Alarm Indication Signal on HO Path .................................................................................... 3-44

3-44
Procedure 3-9: Clear Alarm Indication Signal STS Path ......................................................................................... 3-45
3-45
Procedure 3-10: Clear All Channels Missing ............................................................................................................... 3-46

3-46
Procedure 3-11: Clear All Outgoing Channels Missing ........................................................................................... 3-48

3-48
Procedure 3-12: Clear All selectable timing references fail ................................................................................... 3-51
3-51
Procedure 3-13: Clear Amplifier disabled ..................................................................................................................... 3-52

3-52
Procedure 3-14: Clear Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended ....................................................................... 3-54
3-54
Procedure 3-15: Clear Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain too low alarm ......................... 3-57
3-57
Procedure 3-16: Clear Application needs personal assistance ............................................................................... 3-59

3-59
Procedure 3-17: Clear APR Active - Invalid Topology ............................................................................................ 3-60

3-60
Procedure 3-18: Clear APR Active - Line alarm ........................................................................................................ 3-62

3-62
Procedure 3-19: Clear APR Active - Node ................................................................................................................... 3-63

3-63
Procedure 3-20: Clear APR Limited .............................................................................................................................. 3-66

3-66
Procedure 3-21: Clear APR Forced ................................................................................................................................. 3-68

3-68
Procedure 3-22: Clear APS channel mismatch ............................................................................................................ 3-69

3-69
Procedure 3-23: Clear APS mode mismatch alarm .................................................................................................... 3-72

3-72
Procedure 3-24: Clear APS protection switching byte failure alarm ................................................................... 3-74
3-74
Procedure 3-25: Clear Auto Laser Shutoff Due to Upstream Fault alarm ......................................................... 3-76
3-76
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxvi Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-26: Clear Auto Negotiation Mismatch .................................................................................................. 3-78
3-78
Procedure 3-27: Clear Automatic switch to protection alarm ................................................................................ 3-79

3-79
Procedure 3-28: Clear Automatic switch to working alarm .................................................................................... 3-81

3-81
Procedure 3-29: Clear B1 Signal Degrade alarm ........................................................................................................ 3-84

3-84
Procedure 3-30: Clear Backward Defect Indication - ODU alarm ...................................................................... 3-85
3-85
Procedure 3-31: Clear Backward Defect Indication - OTU .................................................................................... 3-86

3-86
Procedure 3-32: Clear Backward Defect Indication - Path ..................................................................................... 3-87

3-87
Procedure 3-33: Clear Backward Defect Indication - Section ............................................................................... 3-88

3-88
Procedure 3-34: Clear Backward Defect Indication on TCM Layer ................................................................... 3-89
3-89
Procedure 3-35: Clear Battery off or power filter off/Battery power at backplane off or voltage
low alarm ........................................................................................................................................................................... 3-90
3-90
Procedure 3-36: Clear Card clock frequency measured out of spec ................................................................... 3-92
3-92
Procedure 3-37: Clear Card Degrade - Device ............................................................................................................ 3-93

3-93
Procedure 3-38: Clear Card degrade - Wavelength Tracker Channel ID Insertion ........................................ 3-95
3-95
Procedure 3-39: Clear Card failure - boot failure alarm .......................................................................................... 3-97
3-97
Procedure 3-40: Clear Card Failure - Communication alarm ................................................................................ 3-99

3-99
Procedure 3-41: Clear Card failure - device alarm .................................................................................................. 3-101

3-101
Procedure 3-42: Clear Card Inventory Error alarm ................................................................................................. 3-103

3-103
Procedure 3-43: Clear Card mismatch alarm ............................................................................................................. 3-104

3-104
Procedure 3-44: Clear Card missing/Card removal unseat alarm ...................................................................... 3-106
3-106
Procedure 3-45: Clear Card not allowed alarm ......................................................................................................... 3-108

3-108
Procedure 3-46: Clear Card over temperature ........................................................................................................... 3-109

3-109
Procedure 3-47: Clear Card provisioning failure alarm ......................................................................................... 3-111

3-111
Procedure 3-48: Clear Card under temperature alarm ............................................................................................ 3-113

3-113
Procedure 3-49: Clear Card unknown alarm .............................................................................................................. 3-114

3-114
Procedure 3-50: Clear Card would exceed shelf amperage limit ...................................................................... 3-116
3-116
Procedure 3-51: Clear Channel Absent ........................................................................................................................ 3-118

3-118
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS xxxvii
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-52: Clear Channel attempted escape from latchup routine failed ............................................ 3-120
3-120
Procedure 3-53: Clear Channel collision ................................................................................................................... 3-123

3-123
Procedure 3-54: Clear Channel Collision Output Direction ................................................................................ 3-126

3-126
Procedure 3-55: Clear Optical Channel Forward Defect Indication alarm ..................................................... 3-128
3-128
Procedure 3-56: Clear Channel optical power out of range ................................................................................ 3-130
3-130
Procedure 3-57: Clear Channel PDI .............................................................................................................................. 3-132

3-132
Procedure 3-58: Clear Channel Power Unachievable ............................................................................................ 3-134

3-134
Procedure 3-59: Clear Channel Power Unstable ...................................................................................................... 3-138

3-138
Procedure 3-60: Clear Channel Unexpected ............................................................................................................. 3-140

3-140
Procedure 3-61: Clear Channel Unexpected Out ..................................................................................................... 3-143

3-143
Procedure 3-62: Clear Client Signal Fail detected on the ODU ......................................................................... 3-145
3-145
Procedure 3-63: Clear Client Signal Failure (GFP) ................................................................................................ 3-147

3-147
Procedure 3-64: Clear Client Signal Failure - ODU ............................................................................................... 3-149

3-149
Procedure 3-65: Clear Clock freq error > 54.6 ppm (>20 ppm causes OTN errors) ................................. 3-150
3-150
Procedure 3-66: Clear Compact flash needs to be upgraded .............................................................................. 3-151

3-151
Procedure 3-67: Clear Configuration mismatch ...................................................................................................... 3-152

3-152
Procedure 3-68: Clear Control Card redundancy is compromised .................................................................... 3-154

3-154
Procedure 3-69: Clear Control Communication Failure for MTX .................................................................... 3-157
3-157
Procedure 3-70: Clear Control Communication Failure Quadrant 1 ................................................................ 3-158

3-158

3-162

3-166

3-170
Procedure 3-74: Clear CPU Performance Issue Detected ..................................................................................... 3-174

3-174
Procedure 3-75: Clear Critical Filter Clogging ......................................................................................................... 3-176

3-176
Procedure 3-76: Clear Current Key Mismatch .......................................................................................................... 3-177

3-177
Procedure 3-77: Clear Current Time Reference is Unstable ................................................................................ 3-179

3-179
Procedure 3-78: Clear CWR Input LOS .................................................................................................................... 3-180

3-180
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxviii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-79: Clear Data error or timeout ............................................................................................................ 3-182
3-182
Procedure 3-80: Clear Data link down ....................................................................................................................... 3-184

3-184
Procedure 3-81: Clear Database invalid alarm .......................................................................................................... 3-186

3-186
Procedure 3-82: Clear Database Synchronization Failed ..................................................................................... 3-188

3-188
Procedure 3-83: Clear DB Backup Failure ................................................................................................................. 3-189

3-189
Procedure 3-84: Clear DB Failure Local - copy creation of processing failure .......................................... 3-190
3-190
Procedure 3-85: Clear DB Failure Transport - file transport failure ................................................................. 3-191
3-191
Procedure 3-86: Clear DB Restore Failure ................................................................................................................. 3-192

3-192
Procedure 3-87: Clear Detected high voltage from on-board power supply ................................................ 3-193
3-193
Procedure 3-88: Clear Device Not Reachable ........................................................................................................... 3-194

3-194
Procedure 3-89: Clear Drop Power Adjustment Failure ....................................................................................... 3-195

3-195
Procedure 3-90: Clear Drop Power Adjustment Required .................................................................................... 3-196

3-196
Procedure 3-91: Clear Duplex Not Aligned ............................................................................................................... 3-197

3-197
Procedure 3-92: Clear Duplicate OCH Trail Name ............................................................................................... 3-200

3-200
Procedure 3-93: Clear Duplicate Shelf ID .................................................................................................................. 3-201

3-201
Procedure 3-94: Clear Duplicate Wave Key ............................................................................................................. 3-202

3-202
Procedure 3-95: Clear DWDM-OCS link down ....................................................................................................... 3-204

3-204
Procedure 3-96: Clear ECC Communication Failure with FLC A .................................................................... 3-205
3-205
Procedure 3-97: Clear ECC Communication Failure with FLC B .................................................................... 3-207
3-207
Procedure 3-98: EDFA Input LOS ................................................................................................................................. 3-209

3-209
Procedure 3-99: EDFA Input Power Margin Exceeded ......................................................................................... 3-212

3-212
Procedure 3-100: Clear Egress Backward Defect Indication - ODU .............................................................. 3-214
3-214
Procedure 3-101: Clear Egress Client Signal Failure - ODU ............................................................................. 3-215
3-215
Procedure 3-102: Clear Egress Locked - ODU ....................................................................................................... 3-216

3-216
Procedure 3-103: Clear Egress Open Connection Indication - ODU .............................................................. 3-217
3-217
Procedure 3-104: Clear Egress Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU ............................................................ 3-218
3-218
Procedure 3-105: Clear Egress Server Signal Failure - Client ........................................................................... 3-219
3-219
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS xxxix
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-106: Clear Egress Server Signal Failure-Client ............................................................................. 3-221
3-221
Procedure 3-107: Clear Egress Server Signal Failure - ODU ............................................................................ 3-222
3-222
Procedure 3-108: Clear Egress Signal Degrade - ODU ........................................................................................ 3-224

3-224
Procedure 3-109: Clear Egress Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path ............................................................ 3-225
3-225
Procedure 3-110: Clear Embedded Operations Channel failure detected ....................................................... 3-227
3-227
Procedure 3-111: Clear Environmental Input [1-8] active ................................................................................... 3-229

3-229
Procedure 3-112: Clear Ethernet Client Signal Failure ........................................................................................ 3-230

3-230
Procedure 3-113: Clear Ethernet Ring Provisioning Mismatch is Detected ................................................. 3-231
3-231
Procedure 3-114: Clear Excessive BER ..................................................................................................................... 3-232

3-232
Procedure 3-115: Clear Excessive Bit Error Ratio .................................................................................................. 3-233

3-233
Procedure 3-116: Clear Extended Temp Range Violation: Non-ETR Card .................................................. 3-238
3-238
Procedure 3-117: Clear Extension Header (GFP) Mismatch ............................................................................... 3-239

3-239
Procedure 3-118: Clear External and line synchronization out of service ...................................................... 3-240
3-240
Procedure 3-119: Clear External LAN Failure .......................................................................................................... 3-243

3-243
Procedure 3-120: Clear Failure Of Protocol - Inconsistent .................................................................................. 3-246

3-246
Procedure 3-121: Clear Failure Of Protocol - No Response ................................................................................ 3-250

3-250
Procedure 3-122: Clear Failure Of Protocol - Operation Mismatch ................................................................. 3-252

3-252
Procedure 3-123: Clear Failure Of Protocol - Provisioning Mismatch ............................................................ 3-254

3-254
Procedure 3-124: Clear Failure Of Protocol - Switch Mismatch ....................................................................... 3-256

3-256
Procedure 3-125: Clear Failure Slave Tracking Synchronization ...................................................................... 3-258

3-258
Procedure 3-126: Clear FAN32HRQD ....................................................................................................................... 3-261

3-261
Procedure 3-127: Clear Fan at full speed, device on card over allowed temperature ............................... 3-262
3-262
Procedure 3-128: Clear Card clock frequency measured out of spec .............................................................. 3-263
3-263
Procedure 3-129: Clear Fan speed is too high ........................................................................................................... 3-264

3-264
Procedure 3-130: Clear Fan speed is too low ............................................................................................................ 3-265

3-265
Procedure 3-131: Clear Fan speed manually set to maximum ............................................................................ 3-266
3-266
Procedure 3-132: Clear Far End Local Fault ............................................................................................................ 3-267

3-267
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xl Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-133: Clear Far End Loss of Signal ...................................................................................................... 3-268
3-268
Procedure 3-134: Clear Far End Loss of Synchronization alarm ....................................................................... 3-269
3-269
Procedure 3-135: Clear Far End Loss of Synchronization .................................................................................. 3-270

3-270
Procedure 3-136: Clear Far End Port Mapping Mismatch alarm ....................................................................... 3-271
3-271
Procedure 3-137: Clear Far End Protection Line Failure alarm ......................................................................... 3-272
3-272
Procedure 3-138: Clear Far-End Unavailable Time Period or Near-End Unavailable Time Period ..... 3-273
3-273
Procedure 3-139: Far End Remote Fault ..................................................................................................................... 3-274

3-274
Procedure 3-140: Clear Fiber connection mismatch .............................................................................................. 3-275

3-275
Procedure 3-141: Clear Filter Blocked ........................................................................................................................ 3-276

3-276
Procedure 3-142: Clear Filter Missing ......................................................................................................................... 3-277

3-277
Procedure 3-143: Clear Firmware loaded is not the preferred version ............................................................ 3-278
3-278
Procedure 3-144: Clear Firmware Upgrade Failed .................................................................................................. 3-281

3-281
Procedure 3-145: Clear Firmware upgrade pending .............................................................................................. 3-282

3-282
Procedure 3-146: Clear Forced switch to a timing reference .............................................................................. 3-283

3-283
Procedure 3-147: Clear Forced switch to protection ............................................................................................. 3-284

3-284
Procedure 3-148: Clear Forced switch to working .................................................................................................. 3-285

3-285
Procedure 3-149: Clear Forward Defect Indication ............................................................................................... 3-286

3-286
Procedure 3-150: Clear Forward Defect Indication - Client Failure ............................................................... 3-287
3-287
Procedure 3-151: Clear FPGA initializing ................................................................................................................ 3-288

3-288
Procedure 3-152: Clear FPGA timeout ....................................................................................................................... 3-289

3-289
Procedure 3-153: Clear Freq err > 9.2 ppm ==> downstream wavetracker errors ..................................... 3-290
3-290
Procedure 3-154: Clear From DCM Input LOS ...................................................................................................... 3-294

3-294
Procedure 3-155: Clear Fuse Alarm .............................................................................................................................. 3-296

3-296
Procedure 3-156: Clear Gain Adjustment Exceeded Max Value ....................................................................... 3-297
3-297
Procedure 3-157: Clear GFP Loss of Frame Delineation .................................................................................... 3-301

3-301
Procedure 3-158: Clear GFP User Payload Identifier Mismatch ...................................................................... 3-302
3-302
Procedure 3-159: Clear GFP User Payload Mismatch .......................................................................................... 3-303

3-303
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS xli
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-160: Clear Hardware failure ................................................................................................................... 3-304
3-304
Procedure 3-161: Clear Hardware Minor Circuit Pack Failure .......................................................................... 3-305
3-305
Procedure 3-162: Clear Hardware not supported for current configuration ................................................. 3-306
3-306
Procedure 3-163: Clear Hardware suspicious ........................................................................................................... 3-307

3-307
Procedure 3-164: Clear High BER ............................................................................................................................... 3-308

3-308
Procedure 3-165: Clear High Filter Clogging ........................................................................................................... 3-309

3-309
Procedure 3-166: Clear HOPath Unequipped ........................................................................................................... 3-310

3-310
Procedure 3-167: Clear Improper Removal ............................................................................................................... 3-311

3-311
Procedure 3-168: Clear Incoming payload LOS ...................................................................................................... 3-312

3-312
Procedure 3-169: Clear Incoming SUPVY LOF ..................................................................................................... 3-314

3-314
Procedure 3-170: Clear Incoming SUPVY LOS ...................................................................................................... 3-316

3-316
Procedure 3-171: Clear Input LOS ............................................................................................................................... 3-318

3-318
Procedure 3-172: Clear Internal Clock signal of MTX missing ......................................................................... 3-319
3-319
Procedure 3-173: Clear Internal Error to MTX A .................................................................................................... 3-323

3-323
Procedure 3-174: Clear Internal Error to MTX B .................................................................................................... 3-327

3-327
Procedure 3-175: Clear Internal LAN Failed ............................................................................................................ 3-331

3-331
Procedure 3-176: Clear Internal LAN Redundancy Degraded ........................................................................... 3-332

3-332
Procedure 3-177: Clear Internal Synch Channel of MTX A corrupted ............................................................ 3-333
3-333
Procedure 3-178: Clear Internal Synch Channel of MTX B corrupted ............................................................ 3-336
3-336
Procedure 3-179: Clear Inter NE communication timeout blocking power adjustment ........................... 3-339
3-339
Procedure 3-180: Clear Inter-shelf loss of communication alarm ..................................................................... 3-341

3-341
Procedure 3-181: Clear Intra-Nodal Topology Failure-Operator Action Required alarm ......................... 3-342
3-342
Procedure 3-182: Clear Invalid or no egress port defined alarm ........................................................................ 3-344
3-344
Procedure 3-183: Clear Invalid Threshold alarm ..................................................................................................... 3-345

3-345
Procedure 3-184: Clear Invalid Topology ................................................................................................................. 3-347

3-347
Procedure 3-185: Clear IPCP ECC Connection Failure ........................................................................................ 3-348

3-348
Procedure 3-186: Clear LAG port add failure ........................................................................................................... 3-350

3-350
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xlii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-187: Clear Lan Cable Asymmetric connected .................................................................................. 3-351
3-351
Procedure 3-188: Clear Lan Left Ring Failure ......................................................................................................... 3-352

3-352
Procedure 3-189: Clear Lan Right Ring Failure ....................................................................................................... 3-354

3-354
Procedure 3-190: Clear Laser Cooling Current Cross Threshold ...................................................................... 3-356
3-356
Procedure 3-191: Clear Laser end of life ................................................................................................................... 3-357

3-357
Procedure 3-192: Clear LCP ECC Connection Fail ................................................................................................ 3-358

3-358
Procedure 3-193: Clear LD Input LOS ....................................................................................................................... 3-360

3-360
Procedure 3-194: Clear Line (Facility) loopback active alarm ........................................................................... 3-362
3-362
Procedure 3-195: Clear Link Aggregation Degrade .............................................................................................. 3-363

3-363
Procedure 3-196: Clear Link Aggregation Group Loss of Signal ..................................................................... 3-364
3-364
Procedure 3-197: Clear Link OAM Loss Of Protocol ............................................................................................ 3-365

3-365
Procedure 3-198: Clear LD SIG Input LOS ............................................................................................................. 3-366

3-366
Procedure 3-199: Clear Link Down ............................................................................................................................. 3-368

3-368
Procedure 3-200: Clear Local Fault .............................................................................................................................. 3-370

3-370
Procedure 3-201: Clear Local Packet Lost ................................................................................................................ 3-372

3-372
Procedure 3-202: Clear Lock out of a timing reference from selection ......................................................... 3-373
3-373
Procedure 3-203: Clear Locked ...................................................................................................................................... 3-374

3-374
Procedure 3-204: Clear Locked - ODU ...................................................................................................................... 3-375

3-375
Procedure 3-205: Clear Locked - TCM Layer .......................................................................................................... 3-376

3-376
Procedure 3-206: Clear Lockout of Protection ......................................................................................................... 3-377

3-377
Procedure 3-207: Clear Log File Transfer Failure Transport ............................................................................. 3-379
3-379
Procedure 3-208: Clear Logical removal of a timing reference .......................................................................... 3-380

3-380
Procedure 3-209: Clear Loss of 1588 Synchronization ........................................................................................ 3-381

3-381
Procedure 3-210: Clear Loss of 1PPS Signal ........................................................................................................... 3-382

3-382
Procedure 3-211: Clear Loss of Alignment Marker Lock .................................................................................... 3-383

3-383
Procedure 3-212: Clear Loss of continuity ............................................................................................................... 3-385

3-385
Procedure 3-213: Clear Loss of Continuity ................................................................................................................ 3-386

3-386
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS xliii
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-214: Clear Loss of Delay_Resp Messages on the Slave Port .................................................... 3-387
3-387
Procedure 3-215: Clear Loss Of Frame (photonic applications) ........................................................................ 3-388

3-388
Procedure 3-216: Clear Loss of Frame (switching applications) ....................................................................... 3-389

3-389
Procedure 3-217: Clear Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe ........................................................................ 3-391
3-391
Procedure 3-218: Clear Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe (LOFLOM-ODU) ................................. 3-393
3-393
Procedure 3-219: Clear Loss of Frame at the BITS Port ....................................................................................... 3-396
3-396
Procedure 3-220: Clear Loss of Frame Egress ........................................................................................................ 3-397

3-397
Procedure 3-221: Clear Loss Of Frames .................................................................................................................... 3-398

3-398
Procedure 3-222: Clear Loss of GFP alignment ....................................................................................................... 3-399

3-399
Procedure 3-223: Clear Loss of lane alignment ...................................................................................................... 3-402

3-402
Procedure 3-224: Clear Loss of Link, GBE10/GBE100 ....................................................................................... 3-403

3-403
Procedure 3-225: Clear Loss of Multiframe .............................................................................................................. 3-405

3-405
Procedure 3-226: Clear Loss of Multiframe - OTU ............................................................................................... 3-407

3-407
Procedure 3-227: Clear Loss of Optical Signal, GBE ............................................................................................ 3-409

3-409
Procedure 3-228: Clear Loss of Optical Signal, GBE10 ....................................................................................... 3-411

3-411
Procedure 3-229: Clear Loss of Optical Signal, GBE100 .................................................................................... 3-413

3-413
Procedure 3-230: Clear Loss of OPU Multiframe Identifier ............................................................................... 3-415

3-415
Procedure 3-231: Clear Loss of Pointer HO Path .................................................................................................... 3-417

3-417
Procedure 3-232: Clear Loss of Pointer STS Path ................................................................................................... 3-418

3-418
Procedure 3-233: Clear Loss of Signal (LANLOS) ................................................................................................ 3-419

3-419
Procedure 3-234: Clear Loss of Signal (LOS) .......................................................................................................... 3-420

3-420
Procedure 3-235: Clear Loss of Signal (LOSOMS) ............................................................................................... 3-425

3-425
Procedure 3-236: Clear Loss of Signal at the BITS Input Port ........................................................................... 3-427
3-427
Procedure 3-237: Clear Loss of Subsystem Control of Shelf .............................................................................. 3-428

3-428
Procedure 3-238: Clear Loss of Synchronisation (LSS) ........................................................................................ 3-429

3-429
Procedure 3-239: Clear Loss of Synchronization (LANLSS) ............................................................................. 3-430

3-430
Procedure 3-240: Clear Loss of Sync Messages on the Slave Port .................................................................. 3-431
3-431
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xliv Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-241: Clear Loss of Tandem Connection on TCM Layer .............................................................. 3-432
3-432
Procedure 3-242: Clear Loss of ToD Signal ............................................................................................................. 3-433

3-433
Procedure 3-243: Clear Low input voltage floor defect ....................................................................................... 3-434
3-434
Procedure 3-244: Clear Low Voltage Cut-Off ........................................................................................................... 3-435

3-435
Procedure 3-245: Clear Manual (Management) Removal .................................................................................... 3-436

3-436
Procedure 3-246: Clear Manual switch to protection ............................................................................................ 3-437

3-437
Procedure 3-247: Clear Manual switch to working ............................................................................................... 3-438

3-438
Procedure 3-248: Clear Manually caused abnormal condition - card in maintenance .............................. 3-439
3-439
Procedure 3-249: Clear MEP AIS ................................................................................................................................. 3-440

3-440
Procedure 3-250: Clear MEP Cross Connect CCM ................................................................................................ 3-441

3-441
Procedure 3-251: Clear MEP Error CCM .................................................................................................................. 3-442

3-442
Procedure 3-252: Clear MEP Mac Status ................................................................................................................... 3-443

3-443
Procedure 3-253: Clear MEP RDI CCM .................................................................................................................... 3-444

3-444
Procedure 3-254: Clear MEP Remote CCM .............................................................................................................. 3-445

3-445
Procedure 3-255: Clear Mismerge ................................................................................................................................ 3-446

3-446
Procedure 3-256: Clear Mismerge ................................................................................................................................. 3-447

3-447
Procedure 3-257: Clear Mixed MTX Operation ....................................................................................................... 3-448

3-448
Procedure 3-258: Clear Mixed types of power filters used ................................................................................. 3-449
3-449
Procedure 3-259: Clear Modulator output power out of range .......................................................................... 3-450
3-450
Procedure 3-260: Clear Multiplex Structure Identification Mismatch ............................................................. 3-451

3-451
Procedure 3-261: Clear Multiplex Structure Indication Mismatch .................................................................. 3-454

3-454
Procedure 3-262: Clear NE unavailable ...................................................................................................................... 3-455

3-455
Procedure 3-263: Clear Network Time Protocol is enabled, but no NTP server is reachable ................ 3-457
3-457
Procedure 3-264: Clear Network Time Protocol Loss of Redundancy ............................................................ 3-459
3-459
Procedure 3-265: Clear Next Key Mismatch ............................................................................................................. 3-460

3-460
Procedure 3-266: Clear No Available Time References ........................................................................................ 3-462

3-462
Procedure 3-267: Clear No Device Found .................................................................................................................. 3-463

3-463
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS xlv
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-268: Clear No committed software load (Autoinstall disabled) ............................................... 3-464
3-464
Procedure 3-269: Clear NTP Out of Sync .................................................................................................................. 3-465

3-465
Procedure 3-270: Clear OA pump laser bias current high .................................................................................... 3-466
3-466
Procedure 3-271: Clear OCS card or port deleted ................................................................................................... 3-467

3-467
Procedure 3-272: Clear OMD Input LOS .................................................................................................................. 3-469

3-469
Procedure 3-273: Clear OMS Server Signal Failure ............................................................................................. 3-471

3-471
Procedure 3-274: Clear Open Connection Indication - ODU ............................................................................. 3-472

3-472
Procedure 3-275: Clear Open Connection Indication ............................................................................................. 3-473

3-473
Procedure 3-276: Clear Open Connection Indication on TCM Layer .............................................................. 3-474
3-474
Procedure 3-277: Clear Optical intrusion baseline needed ................................................................................... 3-476

3-476
Procedure 3-278: Clear Optical intrusion - detected alarm .................................................................................. 3-477

3-477
Procedure 3-279: Clear Optical power received out of range alarm ................................................................. 3-478
3-478
Procedure 3-280: Clear Optical supervision channel excessive BER alarm .................................................. 3-480
3-480
Procedure 3-281: Clear OSPF Adjacency Failure .................................................................................................... 3-482

3-482
Procedure 3-282: Clear OSPF Adjacency Not Full ................................................................................................. 3-483

3-483
Procedure 3-283: OT Minor Circuit Pack Failure ................................................................................................... 3-485

3-485
Procedure 3-284: Clear OTU AIS alarm ..................................................................................................................... 3-486

3-486
Procedure 3-285: Clear Out of operational range - loss too high alarm .......................................................... 3-487
3-487
Procedure 3-286: Clear Outgoing Channel Absent ................................................................................................. 3-489

3-489
Procedure 3-287: Clear Outgoing Loss of Signal .................................................................................................... 3-491

3-491
Procedure 3-288: Clear Output LOS ........................................................................................................................... 3-493

3-493
Procedure 3-289: Clear Outgoing Client Signal Fail detected on the GFP .................................................... 3-494
3-494
Procedure 3-290: Clear Outgoing Loss of Tones ..................................................................................................... 3-495

3-495
Procedure 3-291: Outgoing Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU .................................................................... 3-497

3-497
Procedure 3-292: Clear Outgoing SUPVY LOS ..................................................................................................... 3-498

3-498
Procedure 3-293: Clear Out of operational range - input power too high ....................................................... 3-499
3-499
Procedure 3-294: Clear Out of operational range - input power too low ........................................................ 3-501
3-501
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xlvi Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-295: Clear Parameters for amplifier tilt adjustment unconfigured .......................................... 3-503
3-503
Procedure 3-296: Clear Payload Label Mismatch - Path ...................................................................................... 3-504

3-504
Procedure 3-297: Clear Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU alarm ............................................................... 3-506
3-506
Procedure 3-298: Clear PCS Generator active ......................................................................................................... 3-507

3-507
Procedure 3-299: Clear Pluggable Module mismatch ........................................................................................... 3-508

3-508
Procedure 3-300: Clear Pluggable Module missing ................................................................................................ 3-510

3-510
Procedure 3-301: Clear Pluggable Module SEEP failure alarm ......................................................................... 3-512
3-512
Procedure 3-302: Clear Pluggable Module Transmit Failure ............................................................................. 3-514

3-514
Procedure 3-303: Clear Pluggable Module unknown ........................................................................................... 3-516

3-516
Procedure 3-304: Clear Port degrade - wavelength tracker communication failure .................................. 3-518
3-518
Procedure 3-305: Clear Port degrade - wavelength tracker detection failure ............................................... 3-520
3-520
Procedure 3-306: Clear Port degrade - wavelength tracker encode degrade ................................................. 3-522
3-522
Procedure 3-307: Clear Port failure - device ............................................................................................................ 3-526

3-526
Procedure 3-308: Clear Port transmit failure alarm ................................................................................................ 3-528

3-528
Procedure 3-309: Clear Post-FEC Signal Degrade ................................................................................................ 3-530

3-530
Procedure 3-310: Clear Power Adjust Loss Margin Exceeded .......................................................................... 3-531
3-531
Procedure 3-311: Clear Power Adjustment Failure ................................................................................................ 3-533

3-533
.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-538
3-538
Procedure 3-312: Clear PWRADJFAIL / PWRADJFAILADD (Aborted) ..................................................... 3-539

3-539
Procedure 3-313: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Action Not Supported for that Location) .................................... 3-540
3-540
Procedure 3-314: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Adjust Failed - Splice Margin Violated) ..................................... 3-541
3-541
Procedure 3-315: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Adjustment Using ASE Not Possible - Cross Connect
Provisioned) ................................................................................................................................................................... 3-543
3-543
Procedure 3-316: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Adjustment Not Possible - APR Condition Active) ................ 3-544
3-544
Procedure 3-317: Clear PWRADJFAIL / PWRADJFAILADD / PWRADJFAILDRP (Amplifier

Mid-Stage Loss Problem) ......................................................................................................................................... 3-545
3-545
Procedure 3-318: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Amplifier is Gain Limited) .............................................................. 3-546

3-546
Procedure 3-319: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Amplifier Signal Power Level Unavailable) ............................. 3-548
3-548
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS xlvii
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-320: Clear PWRADJFAIL (ASE Ingress Adjust Not Allowed On External - Raman
Amplifier Span) ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-550
3-550
Procedure 3-321: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Configuration Request Unsuccessful) ......................................... 3-551

3-551
Procedure 3-322: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Communication Timeout with Upstream Node) ...................... 3-552
3-552
Procedure 3-323: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Error) ....................................................................................................... 3-554

3-554
Procedure 3-324: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Fiber is Not Yet Commissioned) .................................................... 3-556
3-556
Procedure 3-325: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Ingress Amplifier Gain Exceeds Maximum Planned
Gain) or (Egress Amplifier Gain Exceeds Maximum Planned Gain) ....................................................... 3-557
3-557
Procedure 3-326: PWRADJFAIL (In Progress) ....................................................................................................... 3-559

3-559
Procedure 3-327: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Interrupted) ............................................................................................ 3-560

3-560
Procedure 3-328: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Loss Too High) ..................................................................................... 3-561

3-561
Procedure 3-329: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Loss Too Low) ..................................................................................... 3-563

3-563
Procedure 3-330: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Maximum Number of Iterations Reached) ................................ 3-566
3-566
Procedure 3-331: Clear PWRADJFAIL (No Lit Add/Mesh Channels for Add-Path Optimization) ..... 3-567
3-567
Procedure 3-332: Clear PWRADJFAIL (No Services in Appropriate State for Adjustment) or (No
Services in Appropriate State for Adjustment at MESH4) ........................................................................... 3-568
3-568
Procedure 3-333: PWRADJFAIL (No Services in Appropriate State for Adjustment at MESH4) ....... 3-570
3-570
Procedure 3-334: Clear PWRADJFAIL (No Services Present) .......................................................................... 3-571

3-571
Procedure 3-335: Clear PWRADJFAIL (No Services Provisioned) ................................................................. 3-573

3-573
Procedure 3-336: PWRADJFAIL (No Lit Add/Mesh Channels for Add-Path Optimization) ................. 3-574
3-574
Procedure 3-337: Clear PWRADJFAIL (No Through Services in Appropriate State for
Adjustment) ................................................................................................................................................................... 3-575
3-575
Procedure 3-338: Clear PWRADJFAIL (No Through Services Provisioned) ............................................... 3-578
3-578
Procedure 3-339: Clear PWRADJFAIL (No Through Services Provisioned) ............................................... 3-579
3-579
Procedure 3-340: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Power Changing; Cannot Adjust) .................................................. 3-580
3-580
Procedure 3-341: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Power Measurement is Unavailable) ........................................... 3-584

3-584
Procedure 3-342: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Raman Gain Too High); PWRADJFAIL (Raman Gain
Too Low) ......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-585
3-585
Procedure 3-343: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Raman Gain Unstable) ...................................................................... 3-587

3-587
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xlviii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-344: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Some Add Path Control Points Incomplete) .............................. 3-588
3-588
Procedure 3-345: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Timeout) ................................................................................................. 3-590

3-590
Procedure 3-346: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Topology Provisioning is Incomplete) ........................................ 3-591

3-591
Procedure 3-347: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Upstream Data Unavailable) ........................................................... 3-592

3-592
Procedure 3-348: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Upstream Software Incompatible) ................................................ 3-594

3-594
Procedure 3-349: Clear PWRADJFAILADD (Adjustment Not Possible - APR Condition Active) ..... 3-596
3-596
Procedure 3-350: Clear PWRADJFAIL / PWRADJFAILADD / PWRADJFAILDRP (Card

Required for Adjustment Not Present) ................................................................................................................. 3-597
3-597
Procedure 3-351: Clear PWRADJFAIL / PWRADJFAILADD / PWRADJFAILDRP (Local

Adjustment is Still in Progress) or (In Progress) .............................................................................................. 3-599
3-599
Procedure 3-352: Clear PWRADJFAILADD (Loss Too High) .......................................................................... 3-600

3-600
Procedure 3-353: Clear PWRADJFAILADD (Maximum Number of Iterations Reached) ..................... 3-601
3-601
Procedure 3-354: Clear PWRADJFAILADD (MESH4 OA Required Gain Exceeds Maximum

Planned Gain); (MESH4 OA Required Gain is Less Than Minimum Planned Gain) ........................ 3-603
3-603
Procedure 3-355: Clear PWRADJFAILADD (No Add Services Provisioned) ............................................ 3-605
3-605
Procedure 3-356: Clear PWRADJFAILADD (No Lit Channels For Add-Path CWR Optimization) 3-606
............................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-606
Procedure 3-357: Clear PWRADJFAILADD (No Lit Channels For Add-Path Optimization) ............... 3-607
3-607
Procedure 3-358: Clear PWRADJFAILADD (No Stable Add Channels For Add-Path
Optimization) ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-608
3-608
Procedure 3-359: Clear PWRADJFAILDRP (Adjustment Not Possible - APR Condition Active) ...... 3-610
3-610
Procedure 3-360: Clear PWRADJFAILDRP (Loss Too High) ........................................................................... 3-611

3-611
Procedure 3-361: Clear PWRADJFAILDRP (No Drop Services Provisioned) ............................................ 3-612
3-612
Procedure 3-362: Clear PWRADJFAILDRP (No Lit Channels for Drop-Path Optimization) ............... 3-613
3-613
Procedure 3-363: Clear PWRADJFAILDRP (No Stable Channels for Drop-Path Optimization) ......... 3-614
3-614
Procedure 3-364: Clear Power Adjustment Required ........................................................................................... 3-616

3-616
Procedure 3-365: Clear Power Failure ......................................................................................................................... 3-617

3-617
Procedure 3-366: Clear Power filter mismatch ......................................................................................................... 3-619

3-619
Procedure 3-367: Clear Power management suspended ...................................................................................... 3-621

3-621
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS xlix
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-368: Clear Power management topology invalid .......................................................................... 3-628
3-628
Procedure 3-369: Clear Power Unbalance ................................................................................................................ 3-630

3-630
Procedure 3-370: Clear Procedure Error ..................................................................................................................... 3-631

3-631
Procedure 3-371: Clear Provisioned firmware will be obsolete after sw upgrade ...................................... 3-634
3-634
Procedure 3-372: Clear PTP Clock in the Free-Running Status ......................................................................... 3-636
3-636
Procedure 3-373: Clear PTP Port Faulty .................................................................................................................... 3-637

3-637
Procedure 3-374: Clear Received timing signal failure ......................................................................................... 3-638

3-638
Procedure 3-375: Clear Receiver Optimization in Progress ................................................................................ 3-639

3-639
Procedure 3-376: Clear Reference Clock - forced switch active ...................................................................... 3-641
3-641
Procedure 3-377: Clear Remote Client Local Fault ............................................................................................... 3-642

3-642
Procedure 3-378: Clear Remote Client Loss of Synchronization ..................................................................... 3-643

3-643
Procedure 3-379: Clear Remote defect indication alarm ...................................................................................... 3-644

3-644
Procedure 3-380: Clear Remote Defect Indication .................................................................................................. 3-645

3-645
Procedure 3-381: Clear Remote Failure Indication on HO path ........................................................................ 3-646

3-646
Procedure 3-382: Clear Remote Failure Indication on line .................................................................................. 3-647

3-647
Procedure 3-383: Clear Remote Failure Indication on OC-n .............................................................................. 3-648

3-648
Procedure 3-384: Clear Remote Failure Indication on STS Path ....................................................................... 3-649
3-649
Procedure 3-385: Clear Remote Fault .......................................................................................................................... 3-650

3-650
Procedure 3-386: Clear Remote Inventory Mismatch ............................................................................................ 3-652

3-652
Procedure 3-387: Clear Remote Packet Lost ............................................................................................................ 3-654

3-654
Procedure 3-388: Clear RFI Line/MS ......................................................................................................................... 3-655

3-655
Procedure 3-389: Clear RMD Equipment Fail ........................................................................................................ 3-657

3-657
Procedure 3-390: Clear RMD Power Fail ................................................................................................................. 3-658

3-658
Procedure 3-391: Clear SAP Mac Limit .................................................................................................................... 3-659

3-659
Procedure 3-392: Clear Server Signal Failure on Line .......................................................................................... 3-660

3-660
Procedure 3-393: Clear Server Signal Failure - ODU ........................................................................................... 3-661

3-661
Procedure 3-394: Clear Server Signal Failure - Optical Channel ...................................................................... 3-663
3-663
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
l Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-395: Clear Server Signal Failure - Path .............................................................................................. 3-664
3-664
Procedure 3-396: Clear Server Signal Failure - Section ........................................................................................ 3-665

3-665
Procedure 3-397: Clear Server Signal Failure on ETH - Egress ........................................................................ 3-666
3-666
Procedure 3-398: Clear Server Signal Failure on HO Path .................................................................................. 3-667

3-667
Procedure 3-399: Clear Server Signal Failure on Section .................................................................................... 3-668

3-668
Procedure 3-400: Clear Server Signal Failure on Section - Egress ................................................................... 3-669
3-669
Procedure 3-401: Clear Server Signal Failure on STS Path ................................................................................. 3-670
3-670
Procedure 3-402: Clear Server Signal Failure on TCM Layer ............................................................................ 3-671
3-671
Procedure 3-403: Clear Service FDB Full ................................................................................................................. 3-672

3-672
Procedure 3-404: Clear Service MFIB Full .............................................................................................................. 3-673

3-673
Procedure 3-405: Clear SFP Equipment Fail ............................................................................................................ 3-674

3-674
Procedure 3-406: Clear SFP Loss Of Signal .............................................................................................................. 3-675

3-675
Procedure 3-407: Clear Shelf data inconsistent ........................................................................................................ 3-676

3-676
Procedure 3-408: Clear Shelf LAN (ES1 & ES2) Cables Are Incorrectly Connected ............................... 3-677
3-677
Procedure 3-409: Clear Shelf mismatch ...................................................................................................................... 3-678

3-678
Procedure 3-410: Clear Shelf Transmission Fail ...................................................................................................... 3-680

3-680
Procedure 3-411: Clear Shelf unavailable .................................................................................................................. 3-681

3-681
Procedure 3-412: Clear Signal Degrade alarm .......................................................................................................... 3-682

3-682
Procedure 3-413: Clear Signal Degrade - ODU alarm ........................................................................................... 3-683

3-683
Procedure 3-414: Clear Signal Degrade - OTU ....................................................................................................... 3-684

3-684
Procedure 3-415: Clear Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio ....................................................................................... 3-685
3-685
Procedure 3-416: Clear Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path .......................................................................... 3-690
3-690
Procedure 3-417: Clear Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Section .................................................................... 3-693
3-693
Procedure 3-418: Clear Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - TCM Layer ............................................................ 3-696
3-696
Procedure 3-419: Clear Slipping Timing Signal ....................................................................................................... 3-699

3-699
Procedure 3-420: Clear Software Mismatch .............................................................................................................. 3-700

3-700
Procedure 3-421: Clear Software Upgrade Failed .................................................................................................. 3-701

3-701
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS li
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-422: Clear Software version mismatch ............................................................................................. 3-707
3-707
Procedure 3-423: Clear Standby Database Corruption .......................................................................................... 3-708

3-708
Procedure 3-424: Clear STS Path Idle ......................................................................................................................... 3-709

3-709
Procedure 3-425: Clear Subtended shelf cannot be assigned a shelf ID ........................................................ 3-710
3-710
Procedure 3-426: Clear SUPVY Amplifier Input LOS .......................................................................................... 3-711

3-711
Procedure 3-427: Clear SUPVY Signal Degrade .................................................................................................... 3-713

3-713
Procedure 3-428: Clear Switching matrix module failure alarm ........................................................................ 3-715
3-715
Procedure 3-429: Clear Synchronization Equipment (CRU) failure ................................................................ 3-717

3-717
Procedure 3-430: Clear Synchronization Equipment failure .............................................................................. 3-718

3-718
Procedure 3-431: Clear System clock forced to internal clock ........................................................................... 3-719
3-719
Procedure 3-432: Clear System clock in free running mode ............................................................................... 3-720
3-720
Procedure 3-433: Clear System clock in holdover mode ..................................................................................... 3-721

3-721
Procedure 3-434: Clear System Initialization New Failure .................................................................................. 3-722

3-722
Procedure 3-435: Clear TDM (SONET/SDH) Loss of Signal ........................................................................... 3-723

3-723
Procedure 3-436: Clear Temperature is critical ........................................................................................................ 3-724

3-724
Procedure 3-437: Clear Temperature is high ............................................................................................................. 3-728

3-728
Procedure 3-438: Clear Terminal loop active ............................................................................................................ 3-732

3-732
Procedure 3-439: Clear Time Slot Assignment Mismatch alarm ....................................................................... 3-733
3-733
Procedure 3-440: Clear Timing quality for output timing is insufficient ....................................................... 3-734
3-734
Procedure 3-441: Clear Timing Reference Failure .................................................................................................. 3-735

3-735
Procedure 3-442: Clear Timing reference is unassigned alarm .......................................................................... 3-737

3-737
Procedure 3-443: Clear Timing reference out-of-frequency alarm ................................................................... 3-738

3-738
Procedure 3-444: Clear Timing Reference Unequipped ........................................................................................ 3-739

3-739
Procedure 3-445: Clear Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU alarm ...................................................................... 3-740
3-740
Procedure 3-446: Clear Trace Identifier Mismatch - OTU ................................................................................. 3-742

3-742
Procedure 3-447: Clear Timing selection was switched by a manual command to a timing
reference ......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-744
3-744
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-448: Clear Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on HO Path .............................................................. 3-745
3-745
Procedure 3-449: Clear Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on OTN Path ........................................................... 3-747
3-747
Procedure 3-450: Clear Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section ................................................................ 3-750
3-750
Procedure 3-451: Clear Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on TCM Layer ........................................................ 3-752
3-752
Procedure 3-452: Clear Type Mismatch ..................................................................................................................... 3-756

3-756
Procedure 3-453: Clear Underlying resource unavailable - card ...................................................................... 3-757

3-757
Procedure 3-454: Clear Underlying resource unavailable - OMS-TX ............................................................. 3-758

3-758
Procedure 3-455: Clear Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-LOS .......................................................... 3-759

3-759
Procedure 3-456: Clear Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-RX ............................................................. 3-760

3-760
Procedure 3-457: Clear Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-TX ............................................................. 3-761

3-761
Procedure 3-458: Clear Underlying Resource is Unavailable - Path ................................................................ 3-762

3-762
Procedure 3-459: Clear Underlying resource unavailable - port ........................................................................ 3-763

3-763
Procedure 3-460: Clear Underlying Resource is Unavailable - Section .......................................................... 3-764

3-764
Procedure 3-461: Clear Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Optical Section ....................................... 3-765
3-765
Procedure 3-462: Clear Unexpected Level ................................................................................................................. 3-767

3-767
Procedure 3-463: Clear Unexpected MEG Level ................................................................................................... 3-768

3-768
Procedure 3-464: Clear Unexpected MEP ................................................................................................................. 3-769

3-769
Procedure 3-465: Clear Unexpected MEP .................................................................................................................. 3-770

3-770
Procedure 3-466: Clear Unexpected MEP or unexpected periodicity ............................................................. 3-771

3-771
Procedure 3-467: Clear Unexpected Periodicity ...................................................................................................... 3-772

3-772
Procedure 3-468: Clear Unexpected Periodicity ...................................................................................................... 3-773

3-773
Procedure 3-469: Clear Unexpected Priority ............................................................................................................. 3-774

3-774
Procedure 3-470: Clear Unit Not Inserted .................................................................................................................. 3-775

3-775
Procedure 3-471: Clear Unknown ECID ................................................................................................................... 3-776

3-776
Procedure 3-472: Clear Unknown OCH Trail for xconnect alarm .................................................................... 3-777
3-777
Procedure 3-473: Clear Unsupported hardware version ...................................................................................... 3-779

3-779
Procedure 3-474: Clear Upstream Channel Absent alarm .................................................................................... 3-780

3-780
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS liii
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-475: Clear Upstream Channel collision ............................................................................................. 3-782
3-782
Procedure 3-476: Clear User inactive alarm .............................................................................................................. 3-784

3-784
Procedure 3-477: Clear Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Section ...................................................... 3-785

3-785
Procedure 3-478: Clear User Payload type (GFP) Mismatch .............................................................................. 3-786
3-786
Procedure 3-479: Clear Detected low voltage from on-board power supply ................................................. 3-788
3-788
Procedure 3-480: Clear VCG Loss of alignment alarm ......................................................................................... 3-790

3-790
Procedure 3-481: Clear VCG Server Signal Failure ............................................................................................... 3-792

3-792
Procedure 3-482: Clear VTS Forward Defect Indication ...................................................................................... 3-793

3-793
Procedure 3-483: Clear VTS Open Connection Indication .................................................................................. 3-794

3-794
Procedure 3-484: Clear Wave Key Not Available .................................................................................................. 3-795

3-795
Procedure 3-485: Clear Wave Key overlap alarm .................................................................................................... 3-797

3-797
Procedure 3-486: Clear Wave Key pair re-used for channel on node ............................................................... 3-798
3-798
Procedure 3-487: Clear Wrong Dest Mac .................................................................................................................. 3-801

3-801
Procedure 3-488: Clear Wrong Device Present ....................................................................................................... 3-802

3-802
Procedure 3-489: Clear Wrong Unit Inserted ............................................................................................................ 3-803

3-803
Procedure 3-490: Clear WTOCM Input LOS alarm ............................................................................................... 3-804

3-804
Procedure 3-491: Clear Y-cable Switchover Timer Expired ................................................................................ 3-805

3-805
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-806

3-806
Procedure 3-492: Clear Active Failed - APE failed ................................................................................................. 3-808

3-808
Procedure 3-493: Clear Active Failed - Cross connection problem ................................................................. 3-810
3-810
Procedure 3-494: Clear Active Failed - Endpoint failure ...................................................................................... 3-812

3-812
Procedure 3-495: Clear Active Failed - Preemption ............................................................................................... 3-814

3-814
Procedure 3-496: Clear Active Failed - Transmission problem .......................................................................... 3-815

3-815
Procedure 3-497: Clear Active failed - Unprotected ............................................................................................. 3-817

3-817
Procedure 3-498: Clear Backup unavailable .............................................................................................................. 3-818

3-818
Procedure 3-499: Clear Channel assignment violation .......................................................................................... 3-819

3-819
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
liv Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-500: Clear Color violation ....................................................................................................................... 3-821
3-821
Procedure 3-501: Clear DPR degraded ........................................................................................................................ 3-822

3-822
Procedure 3-502: Clear DPR down ............................................................................................................................... 3-823

3-823
Procedure 3-503: Clear DPR Network Version Mismatch ................................................................................... 3-824

3-824
Procedure 3-504: Clear GMRE degraded ................................................................................................................... 3-825

3-825
Procedure 3-505: Clear InBandComm degraded ..................................................................................................... 3-828

3-828
Procedure 3-506: Clear InBandComm down ............................................................................................................ 3-830

3-830
Procedure 3-507: Clear Latency violation .................................................................................................................. 3-832

3-832
Procedure 3-508: Clear Link diversity violation ...................................................................................................... 3-833

3-833
Procedure 3-509: Clear Logical node not reachable ............................................................................................... 3-834

3-834
Procedure 3-510: Clear NE not reachable .................................................................................................................. 3-835

3-835
Procedure 3-511: Clear Nominal Unavailable - Communication problem ..................................................... 3-837

3-837
Procedure 3-512: Clear Nominal unavailable - Configuration problem .......................................................... 3-838

3-838
Procedure 3-513: Clear Nominal Unavailable - Indeterminate problem ......................................................... 3-839

3-839
Procedure 3-514: Clear Nominal unavailable - Reversion preempt .................................................................. 3-840

3-840
Procedure 3-515: Clear Nominal Unavailable - TP Blocked ............................................................................... 3-841

3-841
Procedure 3-516: Clear Nominal Unavailable - Transmission problem .......................................................... 3-843

3-843
Procedure 3-517: Clear Optical feasibility violation .............................................................................................. 3-844

3-844
Procedure 3-518: Clear Optical parameter file error .............................................................................................. 3-845

3-845
Procedure 3-519: Clear OutbandComm degraded ................................................................................................... 3-846

3-846
Procedure 3-520: Clear OutBandComm down ......................................................................................................... 3-847

3-847
Procedure 3-521: Clear Ready to revert ...................................................................................................................... 3-848

3-848
Procedure 3-522: Clear Rerouted ................................................................................................................................... 3-849

3-849
Procedure 3-523: Clear Reroute not possible ............................................................................................................ 3-850

3-850
Procedure 3-524: Clear RSVP degraded ..................................................................................................................... 3-851

3-851
Procedure 3-525: Clear RSVP down ............................................................................................................................ 3-852

3-852
Procedure 3-526: Clear SNCP degraded ..................................................................................................................... 3-853

3-853
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS lv
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-527: Clear SRG violation ........................................................................................................................ 3-854
3-854
4 Supporting procedures
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4-1
Photonic application
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-4

4-4
Egress adjustment failure (TOADM/ROADM) ............................................................................................................ 4-6

4-6
Perform loopbacks on OT cards .......................................................................................................................................... 4-7

4-7
Loopback variation on OTs ................................................................................................................................................... 4-8

4-8
Considerations When Modifying an NTP Server Configuration .......................................................................... 4-19

4-19
Software Download in Network with GNEs and RNEs ......................................................................................... 4-20

4-20
Procedure 4-1: View alarms and logs using the WebUI ........................................................................................... 4-21
4-21
Procedure 4-2: Change an NE from a nonredundant to a redundant Equipment Controller (EC)

configuration .................................................................................................................................................................... 4-22
4-22
Procedure 4-3: Change an NE from a redundant to a nonredundant Equipment Controller (EC)

configuration .................................................................................................................................................................... 4-25
4-25
Procedure 4-4: Check for services on a port ................................................................................................................ 4-28

4-28
Procedure 4-5: Configure alarm severities using the WebUI ................................................................................. 4-30
4-30
Procedure 4-6: Configure alarm severities using the 1354 RM-PhM ................................................................. 4-31
4-31
Procedure 4-7: Perform a database backup ................................................................................................................... 4-33

4-33
Procedure 4-8: Restore a database ................................................................................................................................... 4-34

4-34
Procedure 4-9: Trouble-Clearing and Special Considerations for Raman-Amplified Spans ..................... 4-35
4-35
Procedure 4-10: Detecting OCC Failures on 100G Packs ....................................................................................... 4-38

4-38
Procedure 4-11: Perform troubleshooting diagnostics on the DCN ..................................................................... 4-40

4-40
Performance Monitoring ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-42

4-42
Procedure 4-12: Determine the far end of a service .................................................................................................. 4-43

4-43
Procedure 4-13: Select a specific firmware version .................................................................................................. 4-44

4-44
LED status behavior .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-46

4-46
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lvi Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-14: Perform a path power trace ................................................................................................................ 4-47
4-47
Procedure 4-15: Provision an SFD40/SFD40B in a FOADM node .................................................................... 4-49

4-49
Procedure 4-16: Perform a cold restart of a card with traffic ................................................................................. 4-50
4-50
Procedure 4-17: Reseat a card ........................................................................................................................................... 4-51

4-51
Procedure 4-18: Replacing a Card (General) ............................................................................................................... 4-53

4-53
Procedure 4-19: Replacing a 100G A/D CFP .............................................................................................................. 4-56

4-56
Procedure 4-20: Replacing a DCM .................................................................................................................................. 4-57

4-57
Procedure 4-21: Replacing a Power Filter (PF) ......................................................................................................... 4-58

4-58
Procedure 4-22: Replacing an SFP Module .................................................................................................................. 4-60

4-60
Procedure 4-23: Replacing an XFP Module ................................................................................................................. 4-63

4-63
Procedure 4-24: Replacing an OSC SFP Module ....................................................................................................... 4-68

4-68
Procedure 4-25: Replacing the User Panel .................................................................................................................... 4-70

4-70
Procedure 4-26: Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Redundant Shelf ................................................... 4-75

4-75
Procedure 4-27: Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Nonredundant Shelf ............................................ 4-78

4-78
Procedure 4-28: Replacing the Air Filter ....................................................................................................................... 4-87

4-87
Procedure 4-29: Replacing the Fan ................................................................................................................................ 4-90

4-90
Procedure 4-30: Restore an NE in DBINVALID state ............................................................................................. 4-93

4-93
Switching application
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-95

4-95
Procedure 4-31: Common card mounting rules .......................................................................................................... 4-96

4-96
Procedure 4-32: Replace First-level Controller (ECHC (FLC), FLC64, FLC36EA, FLC36) ................ 4-104
4-104
Procedure 4-33: Upgrade First-level Controller (ECHC (FLC), FLC36EA) to FLC36 and FLC64 .... 4-108
4-108
Procedure 4-34: Replace or clean the air filter (PSS-64 shelf) ........................................................................... 4-112
4-112
Procedure 4-35: Replace or clean the air filter (PSS-36 shelf) .......................................................................... 4-115
4-115
Procedure 4-36: Replace or install a Fan Unit FAN3T8 (PSS-64 shelf) ......................................................... 4-119
4-119
Procedure 4-37: Replace or install a Fan Unit FAN3T8 (PSS-36 shelf) ......................................................... 4-123
4-123
Procedure 4-38: Clean optical fiber connectors ........................................................................................................ 4-126

4-126
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS lvii
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-39: Clean optical fiber couplings .......................................................................................................... 4-128
4-128
Procedure 4-40: Initiate a circuit pack reset ............................................................................................................... 4-130

4-130
Procedure 4-41: Initiate an equipment protection switch manually .................................................................. 4-136

4-136
Parameters of equipment protection groups ............................................................................................................... 4-139

4-139
5 Exceptional situations not reflected by alarm messages
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5-1
4DPA4 Signal Rates ................................................................................................................................................................. 5-2

5-2
Procedure 5-1: Egress Adjustment Failure and Clock Source (WTOCM and PF) ........................................... 5-3
5-3
Resolving Ethernet Connectivity Issues ........................................................................................................................... 5-6

5-6
A Alarm lists
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... A-1

A-1
NE alarms for WDM .............................................................................................................................................................. A-2

A-2
NE alarms for OCS ............................................................................................................................................................... A-17

A-17
Control plane alarms ............................................................................................................................................................ A-28

A-28
B Alarm source list
Alarm source by condition type .......................................................................................................................................... B-1

B-1
C Technical support
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... C-1

C-1
Accessing and navigating the OLCS web site ............................................................................................................... C-2

C-2
Glossary
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lviii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
List of tables
1 Document changes from Release 7.0, Issue 5, October 2014 ............................................................ lxxxvii
2 Document changes from Release 7.0, Issue 3, July 2014 ..................................................................... lxxxix
3 Document changes from Release 7.0, Issue 2, April 2014 ........................................................................... xc
4 Document changes from Release 6.2, Issue 1, February 2014 .................................................................. xci
5 Information products related to Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ....................................................................... xcv
1-1 FDA/CDRH laser classifications ....................................................................................................................... 1-20
1-2 OFCS hazard levels ................................................................................................................................................ 1-20

1-20
1-3 Temperature and humidity levels for transportation (ETSI market) .................................................... 1-35
1-4 Environmental conditions for transportation (ANSI market) ................................................................. 1-36
1-5 Temperature and humidity levels for storage (ETSI market) .................................................................. 1-38
1-6 Environmental conditions for storage (ANSI market) .............................................................................. 1-40
1-7 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ETSI market) ............................................................. 1-57
1-8 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ANSI market) ............................................................ 1-58
2-1 System-defined ASAP instances .......................................................................................................................... 2-6
3-1 Corrective Actions for Equipment Controller Demerits ......................................................................... 3-155
3-2 Command input parameters of the CLR-RIMISMATCH TL1 command ....................................... 3-652
3-3 Software upgrade status and actions .............................................................................................................. 3-701
4-1 Database backup and restore parameters ........................................................................................................ 4-33
4-2 FTP Server Settings ................................................................................................................................................ 4-80

4-80
4-3 Applicability of restart types to circuit packs ............................................................................................. 4-133
A-1 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Release 7.0 list of NE alarms for WDM applications ............................. A-2
A-2 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Release 7.0 list of NE alarms for OCS applications .............................. A-17
A-3 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Release 7.0 list of control plane alarms ...................................................... A-28
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS lix
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lx Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
List of figures
1-1 Warning symbols defined for safety instructions: ......................................................................................... 1-6
1-2 Multilabel (1830 PSS-16/PSS-32) .................................................................................................................... 1-14
1-3 Multilabel (1830 PSS-36) ................................................................................................................................... 1-15
1-4 Multilabel (PSS-64) .............................................................................................................................................. 1-16

1-16
1-5 ESD bonding point at the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack .......................................................... 1-28
1-9 ESD bonding point at the ETSI One Rack .................................................................................................... 1-32
1-10 Temperature and humidity levels for storage (ETSI market) .................................................................. 1-39
1-11 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ETSI market) ............................................................. 1-58
1-12 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ANSI market) ............................................................ 1-59
2-1 Physical slot numbering scheme ..................................................................................................................... 2-192
3-1 Contributors to the loss of link alarming ..................................................................................................... 3-403
3-2 Example: Rotary switch on BT36 ................................................................................................................. 3-633
4-1 112SCX10 – loopback position ............................................................................................................................ 4-8
4-2 112SCA1 – loopback position .............................................................................................................................. 4-9
4-3 43STX4/43STX4P – loopback position .......................................................................................................... 4-10
4-4 43STA1PB – loopback position ......................................................................................................................... 4-11
4-5 11DPE12E – loopback position ......................................................................................................................... 4-12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS lxi
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-6 11DPM12 – loopback position ........................................................................................................................... 4-13
4-7 4DPA4 (No FEC) – loopback position ............................................................................................................ 4-14
4-8 4DPA4 – loopback position ................................................................................................................................. 4-15
4-9 11QPA4 – loopback position .............................................................................................................................. 4-16
4-10 11STAR1 – loopback position ............................................................................................................................ 4-17
4-11 11STMM10 – loopback position ....................................................................................................................... 4-18
4-12 Ping window ............................................................................................................................................................. 4-40

4-40
4-13 Traceroute window ................................................................................................................................................. 4-41

4-41
4-14 Push in wedge ........................................................................................................................................................... 4-60

4-60
4-15 Pull out SFP .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-61

4-61
4-16 XFP bail ...................................................................................................................................................................... 4-64

4-64
4-17 XFP bail pull ............................................................................................................................................................. 4-64

4-64
4-18 Service-Affecting Warning Window ................................................................................................................ 4-81
4-19 Unscrew Filter Retainer ........................................................................................................................................ 4-88

4-88
4-20 New Filter .................................................................................................................................................................. 4-88

4-88
4-21 New Filter Installed ................................................................................................................................................ 4-89

4-89
4-22 Fan Unit ...................................................................................................................................................................... 4-91

4-91
4-23 Correct insert operations ....................................................................................................................................... 4-97

4-97
4-24 Forbidden insertion operations ........................................................................................................................... 4-99
4-25 Slide latch usage ................................................................................................................................................... 4-100

4-100
4-26 Correct card extraction ....................................................................................................................................... 4-102
4-27 Air filter retainer tilted down .......................................................................................................................... 4-116
4-28 Air filter installed into retainer ....................................................................................................................... 4-117
4-29 Air filter installed ................................................................................................................................................ 4-117

4-117
4-30 Fan Unit positions ................................................................................................................................................. 4-119

4-119
4-31 Fan Unit fixing screws ........................................................................................................................................ 4-120
4-32 Fan Unit extraction ............................................................................................................................................... 4-121

4-121
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lxii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-33 Fan Unit insertion ................................................................................................................................................. 4-122
4-122
4-34 Fan Unit fastening ................................................................................................................................................ 4-122

4-122
4-35 Fan Unit fixing screws ........................................................................................................................................ 4-123
4-36 Fan Unit installation ........................................................................................................................................... 4-124

4-124
4-37 Fan Unit fixing bars ............................................................................................................................................. 4-125
4-38 Example for highlighted cards in the display pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC ........ 4-135
5-1 Lightpath Trace .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-3

5-3
5-2 Total Power at Monitored LD Power Level ..................................................................................................... 5-4
5-3 WTOCM and LD Total Power ............................................................................................................................ 5-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS lxiii
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lxiv Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
List of procedures
3 Trouble-clearing procedures
3-1 Clear Abnormal Insertion ..................................................................................................................................... 3-36
3-2 Clear active and standby Main EC databases not synchronized ............................................................ 3-37
3-3 Clear Add power control failure ........................................................................................................................ 3-38
3-4 Clear AIS is Detected at the BITS Port ........................................................................................................... 3-40
3-5 Clear AIS Line/MS ................................................................................................................................................. 3-41

3-41
3-6 Clear AIS Line/MS for OCn/STMn ................................................................................................................. 3-42
3-7 Clear Alarm Indication Signal ............................................................................................................................ 3-43
3-8 Clear Alarm Indication Signal on HO Path ................................................................................................... 3-44
3-9 Clear Alarm Indication Signal STS Path ........................................................................................................ 3-45
3-10 Clear All Channels Missing ................................................................................................................................. 3-46
3-11 Clear All Outgoing Channels Missing ............................................................................................................. 3-48
3-12 Clear All selectable timing references fail ..................................................................................................... 3-51
3-13 Clear Amplifier disabled ....................................................................................................................................... 3-52

3-52
3-14 Clear Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended ......................................................................................... 3-54
3-15 Clear Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain too low alarm ........................................... 3-57
3-16 Clear Application needs personal assistance ................................................................................................. 3-59
3-17 Clear APR Active - Invalid Topology .............................................................................................................. 3-60
3-18 Clear APR Active - Line alarm .......................................................................................................................... 3-62
3-19 Clear APR Active - Node ..................................................................................................................................... 3-63
3-20 Clear APR Limited ................................................................................................................................................ 3-66

3-66
3-21 Clear APR Forced ................................................................................................................................................... 3-68

3-68
3-22 Clear APS channel mismatch .............................................................................................................................. 3-69
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS lxv
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-23 Clear APS mode mismatch alarm ..................................................................................................................... 3-72
3-24 Clear APS protection switching byte failure alarm .................................................................................... 3-74
3-25 Clear Auto Laser Shutoff Due to Upstream Fault alarm ........................................................................... 3-76
3-26 Clear Auto Negotiation Mismatch .................................................................................................................... 3-78
3-27 Clear Automatic switch to protection alarm .................................................................................................. 3-79
3-28 Clear Automatic switch to working alarm ..................................................................................................... 3-81
3-29 Clear B1 Signal Degrade alarm ......................................................................................................................... 3-84
3-30 Clear Backward Defect Indication - ODU alarm ........................................................................................ 3-85
3-31 Clear Backward Defect Indication - OTU ..................................................................................................... 3-86
3-32 Clear Backward Defect Indication - Path ....................................................................................................... 3-87
3-33 Clear Backward Defect Indication - Section ................................................................................................. 3-88
3-34 Clear Backward Defect Indication on TCM Layer ..................................................................................... 3-89
3-35 Clear Battery off or power filter off/Battery power at backplane off or voltage low alarm ........ 3-90
3-36 Clear Card clock frequency measured out of spec .................................................................................... 3-92
3-37 Clear Card Degrade - Device .............................................................................................................................. 3-93
3-38 Clear Card degrade - Wavelength Tracker Channel ID Insertion .......................................................... 3-95
3-39 Clear Card failure - boot failure alarm ............................................................................................................ 3-97
3-40 Clear Card Failure - Communication alarm .................................................................................................. 3-99
3-41 Clear Card failure - device alarm .................................................................................................................... 3-101
3-42 Clear Card Inventory Error alarm ................................................................................................................... 3-103
3-43 Clear Card mismatch alarm .............................................................................................................................. 3-104
3-44 Clear Card missing/Card removal unseat alarm ........................................................................................ 3-106
3-45 Clear Card not allowed alarm .......................................................................................................................... 3-108
3-46 Clear Card over temperature ............................................................................................................................ 3-109
3-47 Clear Card provisioning failure alarm ........................................................................................................... 3-111
3-48 Clear Card under temperature alarm .............................................................................................................. 3-113
3-49 Clear Card unknown alarm ............................................................................................................................... 3-114
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lxvi Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-50 Clear Card would exceed shelf amperage limit ........................................................................................ 3-116
3-51 Clear Channel Absent .......................................................................................................................................... 3-118

3-118
3-52 Clear Channel attempted escape from latchup routine failed .............................................................. 3-120
3-53 Clear Channel collision ..................................................................................................................................... 3-123
3-54 Clear Channel Collision Output Direction .................................................................................................. 3-126
3-55 Clear Optical Channel Forward Defect Indication alarm ...................................................................... 3-128
3-56 Clear Channel optical power out of range .................................................................................................. 3-130
3-57 Clear Channel PDI ............................................................................................................................................... 3-132

3-132
3-58 Clear Channel Power Unachievable .............................................................................................................. 3-134
3-59 Clear Channel Power Unstable ........................................................................................................................ 3-138
3-60 Clear Channel Unexpected .............................................................................................................................. 3-140
3-61 Clear Channel Unexpected Out ....................................................................................................................... 3-143
3-62 Clear Client Signal Fail detected on the ODU ........................................................................................... 3-145
3-63 Clear Client Signal Failure (GFP) .................................................................................................................. 3-147
3-64 Clear Client Signal Failure - ODU ................................................................................................................. 3-149
3-65 Clear Clock freq error > 54.6 ppm (>20 ppm causes OTN errors) ................................................... 3-150
3-66 Clear Compact flash needs to be upgraded ................................................................................................ 3-151
3-67 Clear Configuration mismatch ........................................................................................................................ 3-152
3-68 Clear Control Card redundancy is compromised ...................................................................................... 3-154
3-69 Clear Control Communication Failure for MTX ...................................................................................... 3-157
3-70 Clear Control Communication Failure Quadrant 1 .................................................................................. 3-158
3-74 Clear CPU Performance Issue Detected ....................................................................................................... 3-174
3-75 Clear Critical Filter Clogging ........................................................................................................................... 3-176
3-76 Clear Current Key Mismatch ........................................................................................................................... 3-177
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS lxvii
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-77 Clear Current Time Reference is Unstable .................................................................................................. 3-179
3-78 Clear CWR Input LOS ...................................................................................................................................... 3-180
3-79 Clear Data error or timeout .............................................................................................................................. 3-182
3-80 Clear Data link down ......................................................................................................................................... 3-184
3-81 Clear Database invalid alarm ........................................................................................................................... 3-186
3-82 Clear Database Synchronization Failed ...................................................................................................... 3-188
3-83 Clear DB Backup Failure ................................................................................................................................... 3-189
3-84 Clear DB Failure Local - copy creation of processing failure ............................................................ 3-190
3-85 Clear DB Failure Transport - file transport failure ................................................................................... 3-191
3-86 Clear DB Restore Failure ................................................................................................................................... 3-192
3-87 Clear Detected high voltage from on-board power supply .................................................................. 3-193
3-88 Clear Device Not Reachable ............................................................................................................................ 3-194
3-89 Clear Drop Power Adjustment Failure ........................................................................................................ 3-195
3-90 Clear Drop Power Adjustment Required ..................................................................................................... 3-196
3-91 Clear Duplex Not Aligned ................................................................................................................................. 3-197
3-92 Clear Duplicate OCH Trail Name ................................................................................................................. 3-200
3-93 Clear Duplicate Shelf ID .................................................................................................................................... 3-201
3-94 Clear Duplicate Wave Key ............................................................................................................................... 3-202
3-95 Clear DWDM-OCS link down ........................................................................................................................ 3-204
3-96 Clear ECC Communication Failure with FLC A ...................................................................................... 3-205
3-97 Clear ECC Communication Failure with FLC B ...................................................................................... 3-207
3-98 EDFA Input LOS .................................................................................................................................................. 3-209
3-99 EDFA Input Power Margin Exceeded ........................................................................................................... 3-212
3-100 Clear Egress Backward Defect Indication - ODU ................................................................................... 3-214
3-101 Clear Egress Client Signal Failure - ODU ................................................................................................. 3-215
3-102 Clear Egress Locked - ODU ............................................................................................................................ 3-216
3-103 Clear Egress Open Connection Indication - ODU .................................................................................. 3-217
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lxviii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-104 Clear Egress Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU ................................................................................ 3-218
3-105 Clear Egress Server Signal Failure - Client ............................................................................................... 3-219
3-106 Clear Egress Server Signal Failure-Client ................................................................................................. 3-221
3-107 Clear Egress Server Signal Failure - ODU ................................................................................................ 3-222
3-108 Clear Egress Signal Degrade - ODU ............................................................................................................ 3-224
3-109 Clear Egress Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path ................................................................................ 3-225
3-110 Clear Embedded Operations Channel failure detected ........................................................................... 3-227
3-111 Clear Environmental Input [1-8] active ...................................................................................................... 3-229
3-112 Clear Ethernet Client Signal Failure ............................................................................................................. 3-230
3-113 Clear Ethernet Ring Provisioning Mismatch is Detected ..................................................................... 3-231
3-114 Clear Excessive BER ......................................................................................................................................... 3-232

3-232
3-115 Clear Excessive Bit Error Ratio ...................................................................................................................... 3-233
3-116 Clear Extended Temp Range Violation: Non-ETR Card ...................................................................... 3-238
3-117 Clear Extension Header (GFP) Mismatch ................................................................................................... 3-239
3-118 Clear External and line synchronization out of service .......................................................................... 3-240
3-119 Clear External LAN Failure .............................................................................................................................. 3-243
3-120 Clear Failure Of Protocol - Inconsistent ...................................................................................................... 3-246
3-121 Clear Failure Of Protocol - No Response .................................................................................................... 3-250
3-122 Clear Failure Of Protocol - Operation Mismatch ...................................................................................... 3-252
3-123 Clear Failure Of Protocol - Provisioning Mismatch ................................................................................ 3-254
3-124 Clear Failure Of Protocol - Switch Mismatch ............................................................................................ 3-256
3-125 Clear Failure Slave Tracking Synchronization .......................................................................................... 3-258
3-126 Clear FAN32HRQD ........................................................................................................................................... 3-261
3-127 Clear Fan at full speed, device on card over allowed temperature .................................................... 3-262
3-128 Clear Card clock frequency measured out of spec .................................................................................. 3-263
3-129 Clear Fan speed is too high ............................................................................................................................... 3-264
3-130 Clear Fan speed is too low ................................................................................................................................ 3-265
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS lxix
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-131 Clear Fan speed manually set to maximum ................................................................................................ 3-266
3-132 Clear Far End Local Fault ................................................................................................................................ 3-267
3-133 Clear Far End Loss of Signal .......................................................................................................................... 3-268
3-134 Clear Far End Loss of Synchronization alarm ........................................................................................... 3-269
3-135 Clear Far End Loss of Synchronization ...................................................................................................... 3-270
3-136 Clear Far End Port Mapping Mismatch alarm ........................................................................................... 3-271
3-137 Clear Far End Protection Line Failure alarm .............................................................................................. 3-272
3-138 Clear Far-End Unavailable Time Period or Near-End Unavailable Time Period .......................... 3-273
3-139 Far End Remote Fault ......................................................................................................................................... 3-274
3-140 Clear Fiber connection mismatch .................................................................................................................. 3-275
3-141 Clear Filter Blocked ............................................................................................................................................. 3-276

3-276
3-142 Clear Filter Missing ............................................................................................................................................. 3-277

3-277
3-143 Clear Firmware loaded is not the preferred version ................................................................................. 3-278
3-144 Clear Firmware Upgrade Failed ...................................................................................................................... 3-281
3-145 Clear Firmware upgrade pending .................................................................................................................. 3-282
3-146 Clear Forced switch to a timing reference ................................................................................................... 3-283
3-147 Clear Forced switch to protection ................................................................................................................. 3-284
3-148 Clear Forced switch to working ...................................................................................................................... 3-285
3-149 Clear Forward Defect Indication ................................................................................................................... 3-286
3-150 Clear Forward Defect Indication - Client Failure .................................................................................... 3-287
3-151 Clear FPGA initializing ..................................................................................................................................... 3-288

3-288
3-152 Clear FPGA timeout ........................................................................................................................................... 3-289

3-289
3-153 Clear Freq err > 9.2 ppm ==> downstream wavetracker errors ......................................................... 3-290
3-154 Clear From DCM Input LOS .......................................................................................................................... 3-294
3-155 Clear Fuse Alarm .................................................................................................................................................. 3-296

3-296
3-156 Clear Gain Adjustment Exceeded Max Value ........................................................................................... 3-297
3-157 Clear GFP Loss of Frame Delineation ......................................................................................................... 3-301
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lxx Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-158 Clear GFP User Payload Identifier Mismatch .......................................................................................... 3-302
3-159 Clear GFP User Payload Mismatch .............................................................................................................. 3-303
3-160 Clear Hardware failure ....................................................................................................................................... 3-304
3-161 Clear Hardware Minor Circuit Pack Failure ............................................................................................... 3-305
3-162 Clear Hardware not supported for current configuration ...................................................................... 3-306
3-163 Clear Hardware suspicious ................................................................................................................................ 3-307
3-164 Clear High BER ................................................................................................................................................... 3-308

3-308
3-165 Clear High Filter Clogging ............................................................................................................................... 3-309
3-166 Clear HOPath Unequipped ................................................................................................................................ 3-310
3-167 Clear Improper Removal .................................................................................................................................... 3-311
3-168 Clear Incoming payload LOS ........................................................................................................................... 3-312
3-169 Clear Incoming SUPVY LOF ......................................................................................................................... 3-314
3-170 Clear Incoming SUPVY LOS .......................................................................................................................... 3-316
3-171 Clear Input LOS ................................................................................................................................................... 3-318

3-318
3-172 Clear Internal Clock signal of MTX missing ............................................................................................. 3-319
3-173 Clear Internal Error to MTX A ........................................................................................................................ 3-323
3-174 Clear Internal Error to MTX B ........................................................................................................................ 3-327
3-175 Clear Internal LAN Failed ................................................................................................................................. 3-331
3-176 Clear Internal LAN Redundancy Degraded ................................................................................................ 3-332
3-177 Clear Internal Synch Channel of MTX A corrupted ................................................................................ 3-333
3-178 Clear Internal Synch Channel of MTX B corrupted ................................................................................ 3-336
3-179 Clear Inter NE communication timeout blocking power adjustment ............................................... 3-339
3-180 Clear Inter-shelf loss of communication alarm .......................................................................................... 3-341
3-181 Clear Intra-Nodal Topology Failure-Operator Action Required alarm ............................................. 3-342
3-182 Clear Invalid or no egress port defined alarm ............................................................................................ 3-344
3-183 Clear Invalid Threshold alarm ......................................................................................................................... 3-345
3-184 Clear Invalid Topology ...................................................................................................................................... 3-347
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS lxxi
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-185 Clear IPCP ECC Connection Failure ............................................................................................................. 3-348
3-186 Clear LAG port add failure ............................................................................................................................... 3-350
3-187 Clear Lan Cable Asymmetric connected ...................................................................................................... 3-351
3-188 Clear Lan Left Ring Failure .............................................................................................................................. 3-352
3-189 Clear Lan Right Ring Failure ........................................................................................................................... 3-354
3-190 Clear Laser Cooling Current Cross Threshold ........................................................................................... 3-356
3-191 Clear Laser end of life ....................................................................................................................................... 3-357
3-192 Clear LCP ECC Connection Fail .................................................................................................................... 3-358
3-193 Clear LD Input LOS ........................................................................................................................................... 3-360
3-194 Clear Line (Facility) loopback active alarm ............................................................................................... 3-362
3-195 Clear Link Aggregation Degrade ................................................................................................................... 3-363
3-196 Clear Link Aggregation Group Loss of Signal ......................................................................................... 3-364
3-197 Clear Link OAM Loss Of Protocol ................................................................................................................ 3-365
3-198 Clear LD SIG Input LOS .................................................................................................................................. 3-366
3-199 Clear Link Down ................................................................................................................................................. 3-368

3-368
3-200 Clear Local Fault .................................................................................................................................................. 3-370

3-370
3-201 Clear Local Packet Lost .................................................................................................................................... 3-372
3-202 Clear Lock out of a timing reference from selection .............................................................................. 3-373
3-203 Clear Locked .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-374

3-374
3-204 Clear Locked - ODU .......................................................................................................................................... 3-375
3-205 Clear Locked - TCM Layer ............................................................................................................................... 3-376
3-206 Clear Lockout of Protection .............................................................................................................................. 3-377
3-207 Clear Log File Transfer Failure Transport .................................................................................................. 3-379
3-208 Clear Logical removal of a timing reference .............................................................................................. 3-380
3-209 Clear Loss of 1588 Synchronization ............................................................................................................ 3-381
3-210 Clear Loss of 1PPS Signal ............................................................................................................................... 3-382
3-211 Clear Loss of Alignment Marker Lock ........................................................................................................ 3-383
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lxxii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-212 Clear Loss of continuity .................................................................................................................................... 3-385
3-213 Clear Loss of Continuity .................................................................................................................................... 3-386
3-214 Clear Loss of Delay_Resp Messages on the Slave Port ........................................................................ 3-387
3-215 Clear Loss Of Frame (photonic applications) ............................................................................................ 3-388
3-216 Clear Loss of Frame (switching applications) ........................................................................................... 3-389
3-217 Clear Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe ............................................................................................ 3-391
3-218 Clear Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe (LOFLOM-ODU) ...................................................... 3-393
3-219 Clear Loss of Frame at the BITS Port ........................................................................................................... 3-396
3-220 Clear Loss of Frame Egress ............................................................................................................................. 3-397
3-221 Clear Loss Of Frames ........................................................................................................................................ 3-398
3-222 Clear Loss of GFP alignment ........................................................................................................................... 3-399
3-223 Clear Loss of lane alignment ........................................................................................................................... 3-402
3-224 Clear Loss of Link, GBE10/GBE100 ............................................................................................................ 3-403
3-225 Clear Loss of Multiframe ................................................................................................................................... 3-405
3-226 Clear Loss of Multiframe - OTU ................................................................................................................... 3-407
3-227 Clear Loss of Optical Signal, GBE ................................................................................................................ 3-409
3-228 Clear Loss of Optical Signal, GBE10 ........................................................................................................... 3-411
3-229 Clear Loss of Optical Signal, GBE100 ......................................................................................................... 3-413
3-230 Clear Loss of OPU Multiframe Identifier .................................................................................................... 3-415
3-231 Clear Loss of Pointer HO Path ........................................................................................................................ 3-417
3-232 Clear Loss of Pointer STS Path ....................................................................................................................... 3-418
3-233 Clear Loss of Signal (LANLOS) .................................................................................................................... 3-419
3-234 Clear Loss of Signal (LOS) ............................................................................................................................... 3-420
3-235 Clear Loss of Signal (LOSOMS) .................................................................................................................... 3-425
3-236 Clear Loss of Signal at the BITS Input Port ............................................................................................... 3-427
3-237 Clear Loss of Subsystem Control of Shelf .................................................................................................. 3-428
3-238 Clear Loss of Synchronisation (LSS) ............................................................................................................ 3-429

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS lxxiii
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-239 Clear Loss of Synchronization (LANLSS) ................................................................................................. 3-430
3-240 Clear Loss of Sync Messages on the Slave Port ...................................................................................... 3-431
3-241 Clear Loss of Tandem Connection on TCM Layer .................................................................................. 3-432
3-242 Clear Loss of ToD Signal ................................................................................................................................. 3-433
3-243 Clear Low input voltage floor defect ........................................................................................................... 3-434
3-244 Clear Low Voltage Cut-Off ............................................................................................................................... 3-435
3-245 Clear Manual (Management) Removal ........................................................................................................ 3-436
3-246 Clear Manual switch to protection ................................................................................................................ 3-437
3-247 Clear Manual switch to working .................................................................................................................... 3-438
3-248 Clear Manually caused abnormal condition - card in maintenance .................................................. 3-439
3-249 Clear MEP AIS ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-440

3-440
3-250 Clear MEP Cross Connect CCM ..................................................................................................................... 3-441
3-251 Clear MEP Error CCM ...................................................................................................................................... 3-442
3-252 Clear MEP Mac Status ........................................................................................................................................ 3-443
3-253 Clear MEP RDI CCM ........................................................................................................................................ 3-444
3-254 Clear MEP Remote CCM .................................................................................................................................. 3-445
3-255 Clear Mismerge .................................................................................................................................................... 3-446

3-446
3-256 Clear Mismerge ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-447

3-447
3-257 Clear Mixed MTX Operation ........................................................................................................................... 3-448
3-258 Clear Mixed types of power filters used ..................................................................................................... 3-449
3-259 Clear Modulator output power out of range .............................................................................................. 3-450
3-260 Clear Multiplex Structure Identification Mismatch ................................................................................. 3-451
3-261 Clear Multiplex Structure Indication Mismatch ...................................................................................... 3-454
3-262 Clear NE unavailable .......................................................................................................................................... 3-455

3-455
3-263 Clear Network Time Protocol is enabled, but no NTP server is reachable .................................... 3-457
3-264 Clear Network Time Protocol Loss of Redundancy ................................................................................ 3-459
3-265 Clear Next Key Mismatch ................................................................................................................................. 3-460
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lxxiv Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-266 Clear No Available Time References ............................................................................................................ 3-462
3-267 Clear No Device Found ...................................................................................................................................... 3-463
3-268 Clear No committed software load (Autoinstall disabled) ................................................................... 3-464
3-269 Clear NTP Out of Sync ....................................................................................................................................... 3-465
3-270 Clear OA pump laser bias current high ........................................................................................................ 3-466
3-271 Clear OCS card or port deleted ........................................................................................................................ 3-467
3-272 Clear OMD Input LOS ...................................................................................................................................... 3-469
3-273 Clear OMS Server Signal Failure .................................................................................................................. 3-471
3-274 Clear Open Connection Indication - ODU ................................................................................................. 3-472
3-275 Clear Open Connection Indication ................................................................................................................. 3-473
3-276 Clear Open Connection Indication on TCM Layer .................................................................................. 3-474
3-277 Clear Optical intrusion baseline needed ....................................................................................................... 3-476
3-278 Clear Optical intrusion - detected alarm ...................................................................................................... 3-477
3-279 Clear Optical power received out of range alarm ..................................................................................... 3-478
3-280 Clear Optical supervision channel excessive BER alarm ...................................................................... 3-480
3-281 Clear OSPF Adjacency Failure ........................................................................................................................ 3-482
3-282 Clear OSPF Adjacency Not Full ..................................................................................................................... 3-483
3-283 OT Minor Circuit Pack Failure ........................................................................................................................ 3-485
3-284 Clear OTU AIS alarm ......................................................................................................................................... 3-486
3-285 Clear Out of operational range - loss too high alarm .............................................................................. 3-487
3-286 Clear Outgoing Channel Absent ...................................................................................................................... 3-489
3-287 Clear Outgoing Loss of Signal ........................................................................................................................ 3-491
3-288 Clear Output LOS ............................................................................................................................................... 3-493

3-493
3-289 Clear Outgoing Client Signal Fail detected on the GFP ......................................................................... 3-494
3-290 Clear Outgoing Loss of Tones ......................................................................................................................... 3-495
3-291 Outgoing Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU ........................................................................................ 3-497
3-292 Clear Outgoing SUPVY LOS ......................................................................................................................... 3-498
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS lxxv
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-293 Clear Out of operational range - input power too high ........................................................................... 3-499
3-294 Clear Out of operational range - input power too low ............................................................................ 3-501
3-295 Clear Parameters for amplifier tilt adjustment unconfigured .............................................................. 3-503
3-296 Clear Payload Label Mismatch - Path ........................................................................................................... 3-504
3-297 Clear Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU alarm ................................................................................... 3-506
3-298 Clear PCS Generator active ............................................................................................................................. 3-507
3-299 Clear Pluggable Module mismatch ............................................................................................................... 3-508
3-300 Clear Pluggable Module missing .................................................................................................................... 3-510
3-301 Clear Pluggable Module SEEP failure alarm ............................................................................................. 3-512
3-302 Clear Pluggable Module Transmit Failure ................................................................................................. 3-514
3-303 Clear Pluggable Module unknown ................................................................................................................ 3-516
3-304 Clear Port degrade - wavelength tracker communication failure ...................................................... 3-518
3-305 Clear Port degrade - wavelength tracker detection failure ................................................................... 3-520
3-306 Clear Port degrade - wavelength tracker encode degrade ...................................................................... 3-522
3-307 Clear Port failure - device ................................................................................................................................ 3-526
3-308 Clear Port transmit failure alarm ..................................................................................................................... 3-528
3-309 Clear Post-FEC Signal Degrade ..................................................................................................................... 3-530
3-310 Clear Power Adjust Loss Margin Exceeded .............................................................................................. 3-531
3-311 Clear Power Adjustment Failure .................................................................................................................... 3-533
3-312 Clear PWRADJFAIL / PWRADJFAILADD (Aborted) ......................................................................... 3-539
3-313 Clear PWRADJFAIL (Action Not Supported for that Location) ........................................................ 3-540
3-314 Clear PWRADJFAIL (Adjust Failed - Splice Margin Violated) ......................................................... 3-541
3-315 Clear PWRADJFAIL (Adjustment Using ASE Not Possible - Cross Connect Provisioned) ... 3-543
3-316 Clear PWRADJFAIL (Adjustment Not Possible - APR Condition Active) .................................... 3-544
3-317 Clear PWRADJFAIL / PWRADJFAILADD / PWRADJFAILDRP (Amplifier Mid-Stage Loss

Problem) ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-545
3-545
3-318 Clear PWRADJFAIL (Amplifier is Gain Limited) .................................................................................. 3-546
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lxxvi Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-319 Clear PWRADJFAIL (Amplifier Signal Power Level Unavailable) ................................................. 3-548
3-320 Clear PWRADJFAIL (ASE Ingress Adjust Not Allowed On External - Raman Amplifier Span)
....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-5503-550
3-550
3-321 Clear PWRADJFAIL (Configuration Request Unsuccessful) .............................................................. 3-551
3-322 Clear PWRADJFAIL (Communication Timeout with Upstream Node) .......................................... 3-552
3-323 Clear PWRADJFAIL (Error) ............................................................................................................................ 3-554
3-324 Clear PWRADJFAIL (Fiber is Not Yet Commissioned) ........................................................................ 3-556
3-325 Clear PWRADJFAIL (Ingress Amplifier Gain Exceeds Maximum Planned Gain) or (Egress
Amplifier Gain Exceeds Maximum Planned Gain) .............................................................................. 3-557
3-326 PWRADJFAIL (In Progress) ............................................................................................................................ 3-559
3-327 Clear PWRADJFAIL (Interrupted) ................................................................................................................ 3-560
3-328 Clear PWRADJFAIL (Loss Too High) ......................................................................................................... 3-561
3-329 Clear PWRADJFAIL (Loss Too Low) .......................................................................................................... 3-563
3-330 Clear PWRADJFAIL (Maximum Number of Iterations Reached) .................................................... 3-566
3-331 Clear PWRADJFAIL (No Lit Add/Mesh Channels for Add-Path Optimization) ......................... 3-567
3-332 Clear PWRADJFAIL (No Services in Appropriate State for Adjustment) or (No Services in
Appropriate State for Adjustment at MESH4) ........................................................................................ 3-568
3-333 PWRADJFAIL (No Services in Appropriate State for Adjustment at MESH4) ........................... 3-570
3-334 Clear PWRADJFAIL (No Services Present) .............................................................................................. 3-571
3-335 Clear PWRADJFAIL (No Services Provisioned) ..................................................................................... 3-573
3-336 PWRADJFAIL (No Lit Add/Mesh Channels for Add-Path Optimization) ..................................... 3-574
3-337 Clear PWRADJFAIL (No Through Services in Appropriate State for Adjustment) .................... 3-575
3-338 Clear PWRADJFAIL (No Through Services Provisioned) ................................................................... 3-578
3-339 Clear PWRADJFAIL (No Through Services Provisioned) ................................................................... 3-579
3-340 Clear PWRADJFAIL (Power Changing; Cannot Adjust) ...................................................................... 3-580
3-341 Clear PWRADJFAIL (Power Measurement is Unavailable) ................................................................ 3-584
3-342 Clear PWRADJFAIL (Raman Gain Too High); PWRADJFAIL (Raman Gain Too Low) ........ 3-585
3-343 Clear PWRADJFAIL (Raman Gain Unstable) .......................................................................................... 3-587
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS lxxvii
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-344 Clear PWRADJFAIL (Some Add Path Control Points Incomplete) .................................................. 3-588
3-345 Clear PWRADJFAIL (Timeout) ...................................................................................................................... 3-590
3-346 Clear PWRADJFAIL (Topology Provisioning is Incomplete) ............................................................. 3-591
3-347 Clear PWRADJFAIL (Upstream Data Unavailable) ............................................................................... 3-592
3-348 Clear PWRADJFAIL (Upstream Software Incompatible) .................................................................... 3-594
3-349 Clear PWRADJFAILADD (Adjustment Not Possible - APR Condition Active) ......................... 3-596
3-350 Clear PWRADJFAIL / PWRADJFAILADD / PWRADJFAILDRP (Card Required for Adjustment

Not Present) ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-597
3-597
3-351 Clear PWRADJFAIL / PWRADJFAILADD / PWRADJFAILDRP (Local Adjustment is Still in

Progress) or (In Progress) ............................................................................................................................... 3-599
3-352 Clear PWRADJFAILADD (Loss Too High) .............................................................................................. 3-600
3-353 Clear PWRADJFAILADD (Maximum Number of Iterations Reached) .......................................... 3-601
3-354 Clear PWRADJFAILADD (MESH4 OA Required Gain Exceeds Maximum Planned Gain);
(MESH4 OA Required Gain is Less Than Minimum Planned Gain) ............................................ 3-603
3-355 Clear PWRADJFAILADD (No Add Services Provisioned) ................................................................. 3-605
3-356 Clear PWRADJFAILADD (No Lit Channels For Add-Path CWR Optimization) ...................... 3-606
3-357 Clear PWRADJFAILADD (No Lit Channels For Add-Path Optimization) ................................... 3-607
3-358 Clear PWRADJFAILADD (No Stable Add Channels For Add-Path Optimization) ................... 3-608
3-359 Clear PWRADJFAILDRP (Adjustment Not Possible - APR Condition Active) .......................... 3-610
3-360 Clear PWRADJFAILDRP (Loss Too High) ............................................................................................... 3-611
3-361 Clear PWRADJFAILDRP (No Drop Services Provisioned) ................................................................ 3-612
3-362 Clear PWRADJFAILDRP (No Lit Channels for Drop-Path Optimization) ................................... 3-613
3-363 Clear PWRADJFAILDRP (No Stable Channels for Drop-Path Optimization) ............................. 3-614
3-364 Clear Power Adjustment Required ................................................................................................................ 3-616
3-365 Clear Power Failure ............................................................................................................................................. 3-617

3-617
3-366 Clear Power filter mismatch ............................................................................................................................. 3-619
3-367 Clear Power management suspended ........................................................................................................... 3-621
3-368 Clear Power management topology invalid ............................................................................................... 3-628
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lxxviii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-369 Clear Power Unbalance ..................................................................................................................................... 3-630
3-370 Clear Procedure Error ......................................................................................................................................... 3-631
3-371 Clear Provisioned firmware will be obsolete after sw upgrade .......................................................... 3-634
3-372 Clear PTP Clock in the Free-Running Status ............................................................................................. 3-636
3-373 Clear PTP Port Faulty ........................................................................................................................................ 3-637
3-374 Clear Received timing signal failure ............................................................................................................. 3-638
3-375 Clear Receiver Optimization in Progress ..................................................................................................... 3-639
3-376 Clear Reference Clock - forced switch active ........................................................................................... 3-641
3-377 Clear Remote Client Local Fault ................................................................................................................... 3-642
3-378 Clear Remote Client Loss of Synchronization ......................................................................................... 3-643
3-379 Clear Remote defect indication alarm ........................................................................................................... 3-644
3-380 Clear Remote Defect Indication ...................................................................................................................... 3-645
3-381 Clear Remote Failure Indication on HO path ............................................................................................. 3-646
3-382 Clear Remote Failure Indication on line ...................................................................................................... 3-647
3-383 Clear Remote Failure Indication on OC-n ................................................................................................... 3-648
3-384 Clear Remote Failure Indication on STS Path ........................................................................................... 3-649
3-385 Clear Remote Fault .............................................................................................................................................. 3-650

3-650
3-386 Clear Remote Inventory Mismatch ................................................................................................................ 3-652
3-387 Clear Remote Packet Lost ................................................................................................................................ 3-654
3-388 Clear RFI Line/MS ............................................................................................................................................. 3-655

3-655
3-389 Clear RMD Equipment Fail ............................................................................................................................. 3-657
3-390 Clear RMD Power Fail ...................................................................................................................................... 3-658
3-391 Clear SAP Mac Limit ......................................................................................................................................... 3-659

3-659
3-392 Clear Server Signal Failure on Line .............................................................................................................. 3-660
3-393 Clear Server Signal Failure - ODU ............................................................................................................... 3-661
3-394 Clear Server Signal Failure - Optical Channel .......................................................................................... 3-663
3-395 Clear Server Signal Failure - Path .................................................................................................................. 3-664
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS lxxix
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-396 Clear Server Signal Failure - Section ............................................................................................................ 3-665
3-397 Clear Server Signal Failure on ETH - Egress ............................................................................................. 3-666
3-398 Clear Server Signal Failure on HO Path ...................................................................................................... 3-667
3-399 Clear Server Signal Failure on Section ......................................................................................................... 3-668
3-400 Clear Server Signal Failure on Section - Egress ....................................................................................... 3-669
3-401 Clear Server Signal Failure on STS Path ..................................................................................................... 3-670
3-402 Clear Server Signal Failure on TCM Layer ................................................................................................ 3-671
3-403 Clear Service FDB Full ..................................................................................................................................... 3-672
3-404 Clear Service MFIB Full .................................................................................................................................. 3-673
3-405 Clear SFP Equipment Fail ................................................................................................................................ 3-674
3-406 Clear SFP Loss Of Signal .................................................................................................................................. 3-675
3-407 Clear Shelf data inconsistent ............................................................................................................................ 3-676
3-408 Clear Shelf LAN (ES1 & ES2) Cables Are Incorrectly Connected ................................................... 3-677
3-409 Clear Shelf mismatch .......................................................................................................................................... 3-678

3-678
3-410 Clear Shelf Transmission Fail .......................................................................................................................... 3-680
3-411 Clear Shelf unavailable ....................................................................................................................................... 3-681

3-681
3-412 Clear Signal Degrade alarm .............................................................................................................................. 3-682
3-413 Clear Signal Degrade - ODU alarm ............................................................................................................... 3-683
3-414 Clear Signal Degrade - OTU ........................................................................................................................... 3-684
3-415 Clear Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio ........................................................................................................... 3-685
3-416 Clear Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path .............................................................................................. 3-690
3-417 Clear Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Section ........................................................................................ 3-693
3-418 Clear Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - TCM Layer ................................................................................ 3-696
3-419 Clear Slipping Timing Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-699
3-420 Clear Software Mismatch .................................................................................................................................. 3-700
3-421 Clear Software Upgrade Failed ...................................................................................................................... 3-701
3-422 Clear Software version mismatch .................................................................................................................. 3-707
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lxxx Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-423 Clear Standby Database Corruption .............................................................................................................. 3-708
3-424 Clear STS Path Idle .............................................................................................................................................. 3-709

3-709
3-425 Clear Subtended shelf cannot be assigned a shelf ID ............................................................................. 3-710
3-426 Clear SUPVY Amplifier Input LOS .............................................................................................................. 3-711
3-427 Clear SUPVY Signal Degrade ........................................................................................................................ 3-713
3-428 Clear Switching matrix module failure alarm ............................................................................................ 3-715
3-429 Clear Synchronization Equipment (CRU) failure ..................................................................................... 3-717
3-430 Clear Synchronization Equipment failure .................................................................................................. 3-718
3-431 Clear System clock forced to internal clock ............................................................................................... 3-719
3-432 Clear System clock in free running mode .................................................................................................... 3-720
3-433 Clear System clock in holdover mode ......................................................................................................... 3-721
3-434 Clear System Initialization New Failure ...................................................................................................... 3-722
3-435 Clear TDM (SONET/SDH) Loss of Signal ............................................................................................... 3-723
3-436 Clear Temperature is critical ............................................................................................................................. 3-724

3-724
3-437 Clear Temperature is high .................................................................................................................................. 3-728
3-438 Clear Terminal loop active ................................................................................................................................ 3-732
3-439 Clear Time Slot Assignment Mismatch alarm ........................................................................................... 3-733
3-440 Clear Timing quality for output timing is insufficient ........................................................................... 3-734
3-441 Clear Timing Reference Failure ...................................................................................................................... 3-735
3-442 Clear Timing reference is unassigned alarm ............................................................................................... 3-737
3-443 Clear Timing reference out-of-frequency alarm ........................................................................................ 3-738
3-444 Clear Timing Reference Unequipped ............................................................................................................ 3-739
3-445 Clear Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU alarm .......................................................................................... 3-740
3-446 Clear Trace Identifier Mismatch - OTU ...................................................................................................... 3-742
3-447 Clear Timing selection was switched by a manual command to a timing reference .................. 3-744
3-448 Clear Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on HO Path .................................................................................. 3-745
3-449 Clear Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on OTN Path ............................................................................... 3-747
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS lxxxi
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-450 Clear Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section .................................................................................... 3-750
3-451 Clear Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on TCM Layer ............................................................................ 3-752
3-452 Clear Type Mismatch ......................................................................................................................................... 3-756

3-756
3-453 Clear Underlying resource unavailable - card .......................................................................................... 3-757
3-454 Clear Underlying resource unavailable - OMS-TX ................................................................................. 3-758
3-455 Clear Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-LOS ............................................................................... 3-759
3-456 Clear Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-RX ................................................................................. 3-760
3-457 Clear Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-TX ................................................................................. 3-761
3-458 Clear Underlying Resource is Unavailable - Path .................................................................................... 3-762
3-459 Clear Underlying resource unavailable - port ............................................................................................ 3-763
3-460 Clear Underlying Resource is Unavailable - Section .............................................................................. 3-764
3-461 Clear Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Optical Section ........................................................... 3-765
3-462 Clear Unexpected Level ..................................................................................................................................... 3-767
3-463 Clear Unexpected MEG Level ....................................................................................................................... 3-768
3-464 Clear Unexpected MEP ..................................................................................................................................... 3-769
3-465 Clear Unexpected MEP ...................................................................................................................................... 3-770
3-466 Clear Unexpected MEP or unexpected periodicity ................................................................................. 3-771
3-467 Clear Unexpected Periodicity .......................................................................................................................... 3-772
3-468 Clear Unexpected Periodicity .......................................................................................................................... 3-773
3-469 Clear Unexpected Priority ................................................................................................................................. 3-774
3-470 Clear Unit Not Inserted ...................................................................................................................................... 3-775
3-471 Clear Unknown ECID ....................................................................................................................................... 3-776
3-472 Clear Unknown OCH Trail for xconnect alarm ......................................................................................... 3-777
3-473 Clear Unsupported hardware version ........................................................................................................... 3-779
3-474 Clear Upstream Channel Absent alarm ......................................................................................................... 3-780
3-475 Clear Upstream Channel collision .................................................................................................................. 3-782
3-476 Clear User inactive alarm .................................................................................................................................. 3-784
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lxxxii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-477 Clear Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Section ........................................................................... 3-785
3-478 Clear User Payload type (GFP) Mismatch .................................................................................................. 3-786
3-479 Clear Detected low voltage from on-board power supply ..................................................................... 3-788
3-480 Clear VCG Loss of alignment alarm ............................................................................................................. 3-790
3-481 Clear VCG Server Signal Failure ................................................................................................................... 3-792
3-482 Clear VTS Forward Defect Indication .......................................................................................................... 3-793
3-483 Clear VTS Open Connection Indication ...................................................................................................... 3-794
3-484 Clear Wave Key Not Available ....................................................................................................................... 3-795
3-485 Clear Wave Key overlap alarm ........................................................................................................................ 3-797
3-486 Clear Wave Key pair re-used for channel on node ................................................................................... 3-798
3-487 Clear Wrong Dest Mac ...................................................................................................................................... 3-801
3-488 Clear Wrong Device Present ........................................................................................................................... 3-802
3-489 Clear Wrong Unit Inserted ................................................................................................................................ 3-803
3-490 Clear WTOCM Input LOS alarm ................................................................................................................... 3-804
3-491 Clear Y-cable Switchover Timer Expired .................................................................................................... 3-805
3-492 Clear Active Failed - APE failed ..................................................................................................................... 3-808
3-493 Clear Active Failed - Cross connection problem ..................................................................................... 3-810
3-494 Clear Active Failed - Endpoint failure .......................................................................................................... 3-812
3-495 Clear Active Failed - Preemption .................................................................................................................... 3-814
3-496 Clear Active Failed - Transmission problem .............................................................................................. 3-815
3-497 Clear Active failed - Unprotected .................................................................................................................. 3-817
3-498 Clear Backup unavailable .................................................................................................................................. 3-818
3-499 Clear Channel assignment violation .............................................................................................................. 3-819
3-500 Clear Color violation ........................................................................................................................................... 3-821

3-821
3-501 Clear DPR degraded ............................................................................................................................................ 3-822

3-822
3-502 Clear DPR down ................................................................................................................................................... 3-823

3-823
3-503 Clear DPR Network Version Mismatch ....................................................................................................... 3-824
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS lxxxiii
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-504 Clear GMRE degraded ....................................................................................................................................... 3-825
3-505 Clear InBandComm degraded .......................................................................................................................... 3-828
3-506 Clear InBandComm down ................................................................................................................................. 3-830
3-507 Clear Latency violation ...................................................................................................................................... 3-832

3-832
3-508 Clear Link diversity violation .......................................................................................................................... 3-833
3-509 Clear Logical node not reachable ................................................................................................................... 3-834
3-510 Clear NE not reachable ....................................................................................................................................... 3-835
3-511 Clear Nominal Unavailable - Communication problem ......................................................................... 3-837
3-512 Clear Nominal unavailable - Configuration problem .............................................................................. 3-838
3-513 Clear Nominal Unavailable - Indeterminate problem ............................................................................. 3-839
3-514 Clear Nominal unavailable - Reversion preempt ...................................................................................... 3-840
3-515 Clear Nominal Unavailable - TP Blocked ................................................................................................... 3-841
3-516 Clear Nominal Unavailable - Transmission problem .............................................................................. 3-843
3-517 Clear Optical feasibility violation ................................................................................................................... 3-844
3-518 Clear Optical parameter file error ................................................................................................................... 3-845
3-519 Clear OutbandComm degraded ....................................................................................................................... 3-846
3-520 Clear OutBandComm down ............................................................................................................................. 3-847
3-521 Clear Ready to revert ........................................................................................................................................... 3-848

3-848
3-522 Clear Rerouted ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-849

3-849
3-523 Clear Reroute not possible ................................................................................................................................ 3-850
3-524 Clear RSVP degraded ......................................................................................................................................... 3-851
3-525 Clear RSVP down ................................................................................................................................................. 3-852

3-852
3-526 Clear SNCP degraded ......................................................................................................................................... 3-853
3-527 Clear SRG violation ............................................................................................................................................. 3-854

3-854
4 Supporting procedures
4-1 View alarms and logs using the WebUI .......................................................................................................... 4-21
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lxxxiv Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-2 Change an NE from a nonredundant to a redundant Equipment Controller (EC) configuration
............................................................................................................................................................................ 4-224-22
4-22
4-3 Change an NE from a redundant to a nonredundant Equipment Controller (EC) configuration

............................................................................................................................................................................ 4-254-25
4-25
4-4 Check for services on a port ................................................................................................................................ 4-28
4-5 Configure alarm severities using the WebUI ................................................................................................ 4-30
4-6 Configure alarm severities using the 1354 RM-PhM ................................................................................ 4-31
4-7 Perform a database backup .................................................................................................................................. 4-33
4-8 Restore a database ................................................................................................................................................... 4-34

4-34
4-9 Trouble-Clearing and Special Considerations for Raman-Amplified Spans ..................................... 4-35
4-10 Detecting OCC Failures on 100G Packs ........................................................................................................ 4-38
4-11 Perform troubleshooting diagnostics on the DCN ...................................................................................... 4-40
4-12 Determine the far end of a service .................................................................................................................... 4-43
4-13 Select a specific firmware version .................................................................................................................... 4-44
4-14 Perform a path power trace .................................................................................................................................. 4-47
4-15 Provision an SFD40/SFD40B in a FOADM node ...................................................................................... 4-49
4-16 Perform a cold restart of a card with traffic ................................................................................................... 4-50
4-17 Reseat a card ............................................................................................................................................................. 4-51

4-51
4-18 Replacing a Card (General) ................................................................................................................................. 4-53
4-19 Replacing a 100G A/D CFP ................................................................................................................................ 4-56
4-20 Replacing a DCM ................................................................................................................................................... 4-57

4-57
4-21 Replacing a Power Filter (PF) ........................................................................................................................... 4-58
4-22 Replacing an SFP Module .................................................................................................................................... 4-60
4-23 Replacing an XFP Module ................................................................................................................................... 4-63
4-24 Replacing an OSC SFP Module ......................................................................................................................... 4-68
4-25 Replacing the User Panel ..................................................................................................................................... 4-70
4-26 Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Redundant Shelf ..................................................................... 4-75
4-27 Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Nonredundant Shelf .............................................................. 4-78

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS lxxxv
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-28 Replacing the Air Filter ......................................................................................................................................... 4-87
4-87
4-29 Replacing the Fan .................................................................................................................................................. 4-90

4-90
4-30 Restore an NE in DBINVALID state ............................................................................................................... 4-93
4-31 Common card mounting rules ............................................................................................................................ 4-96
4-32 Replace First-level Controller (ECHC (FLC), FLC64, FLC36EA, FLC36) .................................. 4-104
4-33 Upgrade First-level Controller (ECHC (FLC), FLC36EA) to FLC36 and FLC64 ...................... 4-108
4-34 Replace or clean the air filter (PSS-64 shelf) ............................................................................................. 4-112
4-35 Replace or clean the air filter (PSS-36 shelf) ............................................................................................ 4-115
4-36 Replace or install a Fan Unit FAN3T8 (PSS-64 shelf) ........................................................................... 4-119
4-37 Replace or install a Fan Unit FAN3T8 (PSS-36 shelf) ........................................................................... 4-123
4-38 Clean optical fiber connectors ......................................................................................................................... 4-126
4-39 Clean optical fiber couplings ............................................................................................................................ 4-128
4-40 Initiate a circuit pack reset ................................................................................................................................. 4-130

4-130
4-41 Initiate an equipment protection switch manually .................................................................................... 4-136
5 Exceptional situations not reflected by alarm messages
5-1 Egress Adjustment Failure and Clock Source (WTOCM and PF) .......................................................... 5-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lxxxvi Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
About this document
About this document
Purpose
This Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide (MTCG) provides information on the
alarm messages which can be generated by the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service
Switch (PSS) network elements. Furthermore, it provides procedures for routine
maintenance, troubleshooting, diagnostics, and component replacement.
What's new
The major changes introduced in this issue of the document are described in the following
paragraphs.
Document changes from previous software releases
The document changes from the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS)
Release Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide, Issue 3 are shown in the following
table.
Table 1 Document changes from Release 7.0, Issue 5, October 2014
Location Change
Chapter 2 - Alarm and condition details Added new alarm description of Compact
Flash needs to be upgraded (CFCAPACITY-
WARNING) (see “Compact flash needs to be
upgraded ” (p. 2-182)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS lxxxvii
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1 Document changes from Release 7.0, Issue 5, October 2014
(continued)
Location Change
Chapter 3 - Trouble-clearing procedures Added new alarm clearing procedure of
Compact Flash needs to be upgraded
(CFCAPACITYWARNING) (see Procedure
3-66: “Clear Compact flash needs to be
upgraded ” (p. 3-151)).
Changed alarm clearing procedure of Critical
Filter Clogging (see Procedure 3-75: “Clear
Critical Filter Clogging” (p. 3-176)).
Changed alarm clearing procedure of Filter
Missing (see Procedure 3-142: “Clear Filter
Missing” (p. 3-277)).
Changed alarm clearing procedure of High
High Filter Clogging” (p. 3-309)).
Changed alarm clearing procedure of
Temperature is high (see Procedure 3-437:
“Clear Temperature is high” (p. 3-728)).
Changed alarm clearing procedure of Critical
Critical Filter Clogging” (p. 3-176)).
Chapter 4 - Supporting procedures Changed procedure for replacing or cleaning
the air filter (PSS-64 shelf) (see Procedure
4-34: “ Replace or clean the air filter (PSS-64
shelf)” (p. 4-112)).
New procedure for replacing or cleaning the
air filter (PSS-36 shelf) (see Procedure 4-35: “
Replace or clean the air filter (PSS-36 shelf) ”
(p. 4-115)).
Changed procedure for replacing a Fan Unit
FAN3T8 (PSS-64 shelf) (see Procedure 4-36:
“Replace or install a Fan Unit FAN3T8
(PSS-64 shelf)” (p. 4-119)).
New procedure for replacing a Fan Unit
FAN3T8 (PSS-36 shelf) (see Procedure 4-37:
“Replace or install a Fan Unit FAN3T8
(PSS-36 shelf)” (p. 4-123)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lxxxviii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Release Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide, Issue 3 are shown in the following
table.
Table 2 Document changes from Release 7.0, Issue 3, July 2014
Location Change
Chapter 2 - Alarm and condition details Added new alarm description of
APRFORCED (see “APR Forced” (p. 2-98)).
Added new packs to the Alarm Source for
applicable alarms: 11QCE12X, A4PSWG,
AAR-8A, ASWG, MCS8-16, MSH8-FSM,
OTDR, and WR20-TFM.
Chapter 3 - Trouble-clearing procedures Added new alarm clearing procedures of
APRFORCED (see Procedure 3-21: “Clear
APR Forced” (p. 3-68)).
Chapter 4 - Supporting procedures Added new procedure for replacing a power
filter (see Procedure 4-21: “Replacing a Power
Filter (PF) ” (p. 4-58)).
Appendix B - Alarm source list Added a new appendix that lists alarm sources
by card type (see Appendix B, “Alarm source
list”).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS lxxxix
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Release 6.2 Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide, Issue 2 are shown in the following
table.
Table 3 Document changes from Release 7.0, Issue 2, April 2014
Location Change
Chapter 2 - Alarm and condition details Added new alarm description of
APRLIMITED for Release 7.0 (see “APR
Limited ” (p. 2-96)).
Added new alarm description of CONFIGMM
for Release 7.0 (see “Configuration mismatch
” (p. 2-183)).
Added new alarm description of EQUIP for
Release 7.0 (see “Shelf data inconsistent ”
(p. 2-636)).
Added new alarm description of
T-FTD-ENCRYPT for Release 7.0 (see “TCA
- Failed to Decrypt” (p. 2-707)).
Added new pack 11OPE8 to the Alarm Source
for applicable alarms.
Chapter 3 - Trouble-clearing procedures Added new alarm clearing procedure of
APRLIMITED for Release 7.0 (see Procedure
3-20: “Clear APR Limited ” (p. 3-66)).
Added new alarm clearing procedure of
CONFIGMM for Release 7.0 (see Procedure
3-67: “Clear Configuration mismatch ”
(p. 3-152)).
Added new alarm clearing procedure of
EQUIP for Release 7.0 (see Procedure 3-407:
“Clear Shelf data inconsistent” (p. 3-676)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xc Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Release 6.2 Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide, Issue 1 are shown in the following
table.
Table 4 Document changes from Release 6.2, Issue 1, February 2014
Location Change
Chapter 2 - Alarm and condition details Added new alarm descriptions for Release 7.0.
• AESFIPSFAILURE: “ AES FIPS Failure ” Added new packs 11DPM4E, 11DPM4M,
(p. 2-71) 11DPM8, 260SCX2, AM2032A, AM2625A,
• BADCLKFREQ: “Clock freq error > 54.6 PSC1-6, WR20-TF and WTOCMF to the
ppm (>20 ppm causes OTN errors)” Alarm Source for applicable alarms.
(p. 2-180)
• CARDCLKOFFFREQ: “Card clock
frequency measured out of spec ”
(p. 2-128)
• CARDTOOHOT: “Fan at full speed,
device on card over allowed temperature ”
(p. 2-284)
• ESCABLEMISMATCHX: Procedure
3-408: “Clear Shelf LAN (ES1 & ES2)
Cables Are Incorrectly Connected”
(p. 3-677)
• EQPTCRYPTO: “ Card failure - crypto ”
(p. 2-138)
• FAN32HRQD: “FAN32HRQD” (p. 2-283)
• FEUAT: “Far-End Unavailable Time
Period ” (p. 2-294)
• FIPSFAILURE: “ FIPS Selftest Squelch ”
(p. 2-302)
• FIPSSFMISMATCH:“FIPS Software
Mismatch” (p. 2-303)
• FRCRFCKSEL: “Reference Clock -
forced switch active ” (p. 2-597)
• JB Recentered: “JB Recentered ”
(p. 2-371)
• LOLA: “Loss of Lane Alignment ”
(p. 2-415)
• LOS-O-AMP: “SUPVY Amplifier Input
LOS” (p. 2-665)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS xci
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(continued)
Location Change
Chapter 2 - Alarm and condition details
(Continued)
• PACKETCARDINIT: “Packet card
initializing ” (p. 2-552)
• RmdCesChannelLPL: “Local Packet Lost
” (p. 2-395)
• RmdCesChannelRPL: “Remote Packet
Lost ” (p. 2-610)
• RmdCesChannelNoTdmPl: “No TDM
Payload” (p. 2-512)
• RmdIfLOS: “TDM (SONET/SDH) Loss
of Signal ” (p. 2-951)
• RmdNimLOF: “Loss Of Frames ”
(p. 2-430)
• SUSPECTCLKFREQ: “Freq err > 9.2
ppm ==> downstream wavetracker errors
” (p. 2-320)
• Type Mismatch: “Type Mismatch ”
(p. 2-974)
• UAT: “Near-End Unavailable Time Period
” (p. 2-506)
• Unknown ECID: “Unknown ECID”
(p. 2-1009)
• Wrong Dest Mac: “Wrong Dest Mac ”
(p. 2-1042)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xcii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(continued)
Location Change
Chapter 3 - Trouble-clearing procedures Added new alarm clearing procedures for
• BADCLKFREQ: Release 7.0.
Procedure 3-65: “Clear Clock freq error >
54.6 ppm (>20 ppm causes OTN errors) ”
(p. 3-150)
• CARDCLKOFFFREQ: Procedure 3-36:
“Clear Card clock frequency measured out
of spec ” (p. 3-92)
• CARDTOOHOT: Procedure 3-127: “Clear
Fan at full speed, device on card over
allowed temperature ” (p. 3-262)
• ESCABLEMISMATCHX: “Shelf LAN
(ES1 & ES2) cables are incorrectly
connected” (p. 2-637)
• FAN32HRQD: Procedure 3-126: “Clear
FAN32HRQD ” (p. 3-261)
• FEUAT: Procedure 3-138: “Clear Far-End
Unavailable Time Period or Near-End
Unavailable Time Period” (p. 3-273)
• FRCRFCKSEL: Procedure 3-376: “Clear
Reference Clock - forced switch active ”
(p. 3-641)
• LOS-O-AMP: Procedure 3-426: “Clear
SUPVY Amplifier Input LOS” (p. 3-711)
• RmdCesChannelLPL: Procedure 3-201:
“Clear Local Packet Lost ” (p. 3-372)
• RmdCesChannelRPL: Procedure 3-387:
“Clear Remote Packet Lost ” (p. 3-654)
• RmdIfLOS: Procedure 3-435: “Clear
TDM (SONET/SDH) Loss of Signal ”
(p. 3-723)
• RmdNimLOF: Procedure 3-221: “Clear
Loss Of Frames ” (p. 3-398)
• SUSPECTCLKFREQ: Procedure 3-153:
“Clear Freq err > 9.2 ppm ==>
downstream wavetracker errors ”
(p. 3-290)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS xciii
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(continued)
Location Change
Chapter 3 - Trouble-clearing procedures
(Continued)
• Type Mismatch: Procedure 3-452: “Clear
Type Mismatch ” (p. 3-756)
• Unknown ECID: Procedure 3-471: “Clear
Unknown ECID ” (p. 3-776)
• Wrong Dest Mac: Procedure 3-487: “Clear
Wrong Dest Mac ” (p. 3-801)
Safety information
For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are given at
points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist. Failure to
follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious consequences.
Conventions used
These conventions are used in this document:
Numbering
The chapters of this document are numbered consecutively. The page numbering restarts
at “1” in each chapter. To facilitate identifying pages in different chapters, the page
numbers are prefixed with the chapter number. For example, page 2-3 is the third page in
chapter 2.
Cross-references
Cross-reference conventions are identical with the conventions used for page numbering.
The first number in a reference to a particular page refers to the corresponding chapter.
Keyword blocks
This document contains so-called keyword blocks to facilitate the location of specific text
passages. The keyword blocks are placed to the left of the main text and indicate the
contents of a paragraph or group of paragraphs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xciv Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Typographical conventions
Special typographical conventions apply to elements of the graphical user interface
(GUI), file names and system path information, keyboard entries, alarm messages, and so
on:
• Text appearing on a graphical user interface (GUI), such as menu options, window
titles or push buttons:
– Provision…, Delete, Apply, Close, OK (push-button)
– Provision Timing/Sync (window title)
– Administration → Security → User Provisioning… (path for invoking a window)
• File names and system path information:
– setup.exe
– C:/Program Files/Alcatel-Lucent
• Keyboard entries:
– F1, Esc X, Alt-F, Ctrl-D, Ctrl-Alt-Del (simple keyboard entries)
A hyphen between two keys means that you have to press both keys. Otherwise,
you have to press a single key, or a number of keys in sequence.
– copy abc xyz (command)
A complete command that you enter.
• Alarms and error messages:
– Loss of Signal
– HP-UNEQ, MS-AIS, LOS, LOF
Abbreviations
Abbreviations used in this document can be found in the “Glossary” unless it can be
assumed that the reader is familiar with the abbreviation.
Related information
Table 5 Information products related to Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Document title Document code
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 7.0 Safety Guide 8DG-61258-GAAA-TAZZQ
Provides users of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems with the relevant information
and safety guidelines to safeguard against personal injury. Furthermore, the Safety
Guide is useful to prevent material damage to the equipment. The Safety Guide
must be read by the responsible technical personnel before performing relevant
work on the system. The valid version of the document must always be kept close
to the equipment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS xcv
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5 Information products related to Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS (continued)
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 7.0 Product 8DG-61258-GAAA-TQZZA
Information and Planning Guide
Presents a detailed overview of the system, describes its applications, gives
planning requirements, engineering rules, ordering information, and technical
specifications.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 7.0 User Provisioning 8DG-61258-GAAA-TCZZA
Guide
Provides step-by-step information for use in daily system operations. The manual
demonstrates how to perform system provisioning, operations, and administrative
tasks.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 7.0 Maintenance and 8DG-61258-GAAA-TMZZA
Trouble-Clearing Guide
Gives detailed information on each possible alarm message. Furthermore, it
provides procedures for routine maintenance, troubleshooting, diagnostics, and
component replacement.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 16/32 (PSS-16/PSS-32) Release 7.0 8DG-61258-GAAA-TJZZA
Installation and System Turn-Up Guide
A step-by-step guide to system installation and set up. It also includes information
needed for pre-installation site planning and post-installation acceptance testing.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36 (PSS-36) Release 7.0 Installation 8DG-61258-GAAA-TKZZA
and System Turn-Up Guide
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 64 (PSS-64) Release 7.0 Installation 8DG-61258-GAAA-TLZZA
and System Turn-Up Guide
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 7.0 Key Management 8DG-61258-GAAA-TIZZA
Tool (KMT) Installation Guide
Provides detailed step-by-step description of how to install the Key Management
Tool including prerequisite SW download and installation.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 7.0 Command Line 8DG-61258-GAAA-THZZA
Interface Guide
Provides information about the Command Line Interface (CLI) for Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS and describes the CLI attributes and commands.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 7.0 Engineering and 8DG-61258-GAAA-TEZZA
Planning Tool User Guide
Provides step-by-step information for use in daily system operations for the EPT.
The manual demonstrates how to perform system provisioning, operations, and
commissioning tasks.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 7.0 TL1 Commands 8DG-61258-GAAA-TFZZA
and Messages Guide (Switching Applications)
Describes the external TL1 interface for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS in terms of TL1
command, responses, and notification definitions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xcvi Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 7.0 TL1 Commands 8DG-61258-GAAA-TGZZA
and Messages Guide (Photonic Applications)
Describes the external TL1 interface for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS in terms of TL1
command, responses, and notification definitions.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 7.0 GMRE/GMPLS 8DG-61258-GAAA-TWZZA
Guide
Contains information about the GMPLS Routing Engine (GMRE) of the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS; it provides a high-level functional overview of the
GMRE and describes the steps to plan and set up a GMRE-controlled network.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 7.0 Quick Reference 8DG-61258-GAAA-TNZZA
Guide
Provides users of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS a streamlined, easy-to-use navigation
aid to facilitate the use of the system.
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM Release 12.2 Photonic Manager EMS Reference 8DG-61258-GCAA-TXZZA
Guide
Provides information for accessing the 1354 RM-PhM and using it to configure
and manage the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS network.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 7.0 DCN Planning 8DG-61258-GAAA-TPZZA
and Engineering Guide (Photonics Applications)
Provides information for the planning and configuration of a Data Communication
Network (DCN) for photonic applications, that is for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16
and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 systems (WDM).
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 7.0 DCN Planning 8DG-61258-GAAA-TRZZA
and Engineering Guide (Switching Applications)
Provides information for the planning and configuration of a Data Communication
Network (DCN) for switching applications, that is for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36
and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 systems (OCS).
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 7.0 Key Management 8DG-61258-GAAA-TUZZA
Tool (KMT) Administration Guide
Provides information about the steps that an administrator needs to take in order to
set up network sites and elements, and to assign priorities and privileges.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 7.0 Key Management 8DG-61258-GAAA-TVZZA
Tool (KMT) User Guide
Provides information about how a user can use the KMT to assign keys, rotate the
keys, and access security logs and alarms.
Alcatel-Lucent Smart Compact Ethernet Demarcation Device (Smart cEDD) User 8DG-61259-AAAA-TYZZA
Guide
Provides instructions for use and descriptions of the features of the Smart Compact
Ethernet Demarcation Device (Smart cEDD).
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 7.2 Commissioning 8DG-61258-GCAA-TBZZA
and Power Balancing Tool User Guide
Provides instructions for use and descriptions of the features of the Commissioning
and Power Balancing (CPB) Tool.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS xcvii
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 7.0 Federal 8DG-61258-GAAA-TSZZA
Information Processing Standards (FIPS) User Guide and Logbook
Describes the target FIPS configurations for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 7.0 Electronic 8DG-61258-GAAA-TYZZA
Documentation Library
Contains all documents related to Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS in electronic formats.
These documents can be downloaded from the Alcatel-Lucent Online Customer Support
Site (OLCS) (https://support.alcatel-lucent.com) or through your Local Customer
Support.
Technical support
For technical support, contact your local Alcatel-Lucent customer support team. See the
Alcatel-Lucent Support web site (http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/support/) for contact
information.
How to comment
To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.alcatel-
lucent.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline
(comments@alcatel-lucent.com).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xcviii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
1 Safety
1
Overview
Purpose
This chapter on safety provides users of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems with the
relevant information and safety guidelines to safeguard against personal injury.
Furthermore, this chapter may be useful to prevent material damage to the equipment.
This chapter on safety must be read by the responsible technical personnel before carrying
out relevant work on the system. The valid version of this document must always be kept
close to the equipment.
Contents
General notes on safety 1-3

Structure of safety statements 1-4
Basic safety aspects 1-7
Specific safety areas 1-11
Potential sources of danger 1-12
Laser safety 1-13
Laser product classification 1-19
Equipment grounding 1-25
Electrostatic discharge 1-26
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases 1-33
Transportation 1-34
Storage 1-37
Installation 1-41
Taking into operation 1-47
Operation and maintenance 1-51
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS 1-1
Safety Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Taking out of operation 1-61

Event of failure 1-64
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-2 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Safety Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section provides general information on the structure of safety instructions and
summarizes general safety requirements.
Contents
Structure of safety statements 1-4

Basic safety aspects 1-7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Structure of safety statements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Structure of safety statements

Overview
This topic describes the components of safety statements that appear in this document.
General structure
Safety statements include the following structural elements:
CAUTION
MP L E
Lifting hazard
SA
Lifting this equipment by yourself can result in injury
due to the size and weight of the equipment.
Always use three people or a lifting device to transport
and position this equipment. [ABC123]
Item Structure element Purpose

1 Safety alert symbol Indicates the potential for personal injury
(optional)
2 Safety symbol Indicates hazard type (optional)
3 Signal word Indicates the severity of the hazard
4 Hazard type Describes the source of the risk of damage or
injury
5 Safety message Consequences if protective measures fail
6 Avoidance message Protective measures to take to avoid the hazard
7 Identifier The reference ID of the safety statement
(optional)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Signal words
The signal words identify the hazard severity levels as follows:
Signal word Meaning

DANGER Indicates an extremely hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
WARNING Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE Indicates a hazardous situation not related to personal injury.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Warning symbols
Figure 1-1 Warning symbols defined for safety instructions:
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 g_sfg_0001
Legend
1 General warning of danger 13 Noxious substance

2 Electric shock 14 Explosion hazard
3 Hazard of laser radiation 15 Falling object hazard
4 Components sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD) 16 Risk of suffocation
5 Electromagnetic radiation 17 Pinch hazard

6 Flammable material / Risk of fire 18 Lifting hazard, heavy object
7 Service disruption hazard 19 Inhalation hazard
8 Laceration hazard 20 Slip hazard

9 Corrosive substance 21 Trip hazard
10 Hazard caused by batteries 22 Hazard of falling
11 Hot surface 23 Arc-flash hazard
12 Heavy overhead load 24 Equipment damage hazard
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Basic safety aspects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Basic safety aspects

Purpose
This topic covers basic safety aspects relating to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic
Service Switch (PSS) with which you must be familiar prior to installing or using the
product.
General safety requirements

To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to equipment, ensure that you read,
understand, and follow the following general safety requirements prior to installing or
using the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS).
• Ensure that transport, storage, installation, and operation of the system are conducted
only under specified permissible conditions. See the accompanying documentation
and information on the system.
• Ensure that installation, configuration, and disassembly of the system are conducted
only by suitably qualified personnel and with reference to the appropriate
documentation. Due to the complexity of the system, personnel require special
training.
• Identify potential hazards prior to starting the installation.
• Ensure that the system is operated only by trained and authorized users. The user must
operate the system only after having read and understood the chapter on safety and the
parts of the documentation relevant to operation. For complex systems, additional
training is recommended. Any obligatory training for operating and service personnel
must be completed and documented.
• Follow all instructions marked on the product, including both general instructions and
the stated methods for avoiding hazards.
• Do not operate the system unless all appropriate safety measures, precautions, and
instructions have been taken or followed. Any faults and errors that might affect
safety must be reported immediately by the user to appropriate personnel responsible
for safety.
• Operate the system only under the environmental conditions and with the connections
described in the documentation.
• Modifications to any part of the system, including software, should be conducted only
by trained and qualified personnel and only in a manner as authorized by
Alcatel-Lucent. Alcatel-Lucent disclaims liability for any damages arising from
unauthorized modifications, and unauthorized modifications may lead to a voiding of
any and all warranties.
• Ensure that only components that are recommended by the manufacturer and are
listed in the procurement documents are used.
• Avoid use of non-system software. The use or installation of non-system software can
adversely affect the normal functioning of the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Use tested and virus-free data carriers (memory sticks, DVDs, CDs, …) only.
• Ensure that any work that has any impact on safety facilities, the clearance of faults,
and the maintenance of equipment are carried out only by trained and qualified
personnel and in conjunction with the appropriate documentation. Use only approved
measuring and test equipment.
• Ensure that calibrations, special tests after repairs, and regular safety checks are
conducted, documented, and archived.
• Use only specified chemicals or materials.
• Consult material safety data sheets (MSDSs) or the equivalent information when
working with hazardous chemicals.
Summary of important safety instructions

Observe the following safety instructions, which are of particular importance for
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems:
• The equipment is to be installed only in Restricted Access Areas in business and
customer premises for applications in accordance with Articles 110-18, 110-26 and
110-27 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPANo.70, IEC 60950-1, IEC
60825-2, EN 60950-1 and EN 60825-2. Other installations exempt from the
enforcement of the National Electrical Code may be engineered according to the
accepted practices of the local telecommunications utility.
1830 PSS-36 and 1830 PSS-64 are also compliant to UL60950-1 and CSA60950-1.
• Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems contain optical circuit packs that can emit laser
radiation assessed as IEC Hazard Level 1M.
Therefore, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems must be installed in restricted locations,
according to IEC 60825-2 and EN 60825-2, where there is no ready access to the
general public, but only to authorized persons who have received adequate training in
laser safety.
• This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the
marking label.
• This equipment must be provided with a readily accessible disconnect device as part
of the building installation.
• This equipment is intended to be provided with an appropriate branch circuit
protection on both the A and B –48/–60 V DC input feeds as follows:
– 40 A (max.) for the 1830 PSS-16 system
– 80 A (max.) for the 1830 PSS-32 system
– 3 × 50 A (max.) for the 1830 PSS-36 system
– 3 × 100 A (max.) for the 1830 PSS-64 system
• To reduce the risk of injury disconnect all powerfeeders when removing power from
the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Installation must include an independent frame ground drop to the building ground.
• During installation and handling (for example transport), heavy equipment like racks
or pre-installed subracks must be secured to avoid tipping over.
• Install only equipment identified in the Installation and System Turn-Up Guides for
PSS-16/32, PSS-36, and PSS-64 provided with this product. Use of other equipment
may result in improper connection of circuitry leading to fire or injury to persons.
• To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not disassemble this product. Installation and
service should be performed by trained personnel only. Opening or removing covers
or circuit boards may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect
re-assembly can cause electrical shock when the unit is subsequently used.
If a system with dual power feed or dual fan units is operated with only one power
supply filter and one fan unit, the electrical connectors on the backplane in the empty
slot that carry a voltage of –48 / –60 V DC can be touched . This can cause electric
shocks. Always use both power supply filters and fan units to ensure safe operation.
• Slots and openings in this product are provided for ventilation. To protect the product
from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. This product
should not be placed in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided.
• Never push objects of any kind into this product through slots as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short-out parts, which could result in a risk of fire or
electrical shock.
• Never spill liquids of any kind on the product.
• Never install telecommunication wiring during a lightning storm.
• Never install telecommunication connections in wet locations.
Personal protective equipment
Protection against hazardous laser radiation

In DWDM systems which use Raman amplifiers hazard
levels in excess of 1M are very likely to occur, and the
use of appropriate protective glasses is strongly
recommended.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Protection against acoustic noise

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems are designed for the
operation in unattended offices. However, in lab
environments, where multiple systems are operated in
parallel, based on national regulations hearing protection
may be necessary.
To protect yourself against acoustic noise, wear hearing
protection.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
The aspects of “laser safety” and “handling of components sensitive to electrostatic
discharge (ESD)” are of vital importance for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS equipment.
Therefore, the key safety instructions for these subjects are summarized in the following.
Contents
Potential sources of danger 1-12

Laser safety 1-13
Laser product classification 1-19
Equipment grounding 1-25
Electrostatic discharge 1-26
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Potential sources of danger
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Potential sources of danger

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS equipment fulfils all national and international safety
requirements in the countries where the product is sold. The system is provided with a
high degree of operational safety resulting from many years of development experience
and continuous stringent quality checks in our company.
The equipment is safe in normal operation. There are, however, some potential sources of
danger that cannot be completely eliminated. In particular, these arise during the:
• opening of housings or equipment covers
• manipulation of any kind within the equipment, even if it has been disconnected from
the power supply
• transportation of subracks and racks
• disconnection of optical or electrical connections.
through the following:
• contact with live parts
• laser light
• contact with hot surfaces
• contact with sharp edges
• acoustic noise.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Laser safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Laser safety
System design
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system complies with the regulations FDA/CDRH 21 CFR
1040.10 and 1040.11 issued by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH)
of the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) as a Class I laser product and with the
IEC/UL/CSA/EN 60825-1 standards as a Class 1 Optical Fiber Telecommunication laser
product.
The system has been designed to help ensure that the operating personnel are not
endangered by laser radiation during normal system operation. The safety measures
specified in the FDA/CDRH regulations and the international standards IEC 60825-Part 1
and 2, respectively, are met.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Laser safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Labels
1830 PSS-16/PSS-32
The following figure shows the multilabel affixed on the rear of the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-16 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subrack. It includes the laser warning
label.
Figure 1-2 Multilabel (1830 PSS-16/PSS-32)
Note: Here, the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 shelf label is shown. Safety information
on shelf labels for 1830 PSS-16 and PSS-32 is identical, only the product names and
lists of supported power supplies are different.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Laser safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36
1830 PSS-36 subrack. It includes the laser warning label.
Figure 1-3 Multilabel (1830 PSS-36)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Laser safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-64
1830 PSS-64 subrack. It includes the laser warning label.
Figure 1-4 Multilabel (PSS-64)
Potential sources of danger

Beware of the following potential sources of danger which will remain despite all safety
measures taken:
• Laser radiation can cause damage to the skin and eyes.
• Laser radiation from optical transmission systems is in a wavelength range that is
invisible to the human eye.
Laser classes
The maximum output power of laser radiation depends on the type of laser diode used.
The international standards IEC/UL/CSA/EN 60825-1, respectively, as well as the
FDA/CDRH regulations define the maximum output power of laser radiation for each
laser class in accordance with the wavelength.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Laser safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The classification scheme is based on the ability of the laser emission or the reflected
laser emission to cause injury to the eye or skin during normal operating conditions.
The use of state-of-the-art optical amplification technologies enables some of the circuit
packs to reach laser class IV/4 levels.
Laser safety instructions

During normal operation, maintenance, or restoration, an optical fiber telecommunication
system is considered unenclosed.
When working at an unenclosed system, observe the following instructions to avoid
exposing yourself and others to risk:
• Only authorized, trained personnel must be permitted to do normal operation,
maintenance, and restoration. All unauthorized personnel must be excluded from the
immediate area of the optical fiber telecommunication systems during installation and
service.
• Read the relevant descriptions in the manuals before taking equipment into operation
or carrying out any installation and maintenance work on the optical port units, and
follow the instructions. Ignoring the instructions may result in hazardous laser
radiation exposure.
• Do not view directly into the laser beam with optical instruments such as a fiber
microscope, because viewing of laser emission in excess of Class 1 limits
significantly increases the risk of eye damage.
• Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector as long as the
optical source is still switched on.
• Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber
connectors.
• If you are not sure that the optical source is switched off, check to ensure that the
optical switch is switched off by measuring the output power with an optical power
meter.
Laser radiation
WARNING
Laser hazard
Devices that are designated as having hazard level 1M laser radiation can cause damage
to eyes.
Do not view directly with non-attenuating optical instruments.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Laser safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
Laser hazard
Use of controls, adjustments, and procedures other than those specified herein may result
in hazardous laser radiation exposure.
WARNING
Laser hazard
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 MDIO connections are not protected and may defeat the
Automatic (Optical) Power Reduction (APR) when a fault occurs in the power filter or
associated circuitry, and when repairs are being made to the power filter module on
which the MDIO connector is located.
Safety concerns on Automatic Power Reductions (APR) in 1830 PSS

APR brings the optical amplifier output power and Raman pump output power to safe
levels in the event of a fiber cut, removed connector, or equipment failure.
Certain laser circuit packs internal to Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS are capable of producing
laser emissions at class IV/4 levels. During normal operation, the system is
software-controlled. APR powers-down the system during fiber disconnect or break. The
optical power of the system is reduced to levels that are not hazardous to the unprotected
eye. APR is a safety feature of the system which is available during normal operation
Laser radiation without APR
WARNING
Laser hazard
Automatic Power Reduction (APR) is provided by the software in the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS and requires coordination across circuit packs in some instances. APR
functionality will not be available for a limited time during the reboot of specific key
controllers in the system. Activities that may result in opening of fibers can expose
personnel to laser emissions at class IV/4 levels when APR is not present.
However, during certain system assembly, test, installation, service, or maintenance
procedures, APR software may be absent or disabled. Personnel performing these types of
procedures has to avoid to be exposed to laser emissions at Class IV/4 levels and
previously has to verify that all light wave sources on the related fiber are turned off.
Once the reboot is complete, APR will again be available. Activities that may result in
opening of fibers should wait until the reboot is complete before proceeding.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Laser product classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Laser product classification

Standards compliance
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS product complies with the applicable IEC standards and the
Food and Drug Administration’s Center for Devices and Radiological Health
(FDA/CDRH) regulations. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS product conforms to Class 1
Laser Product according to IEC standards and FDA/CDRH regulations.
FDA/CDRH regulations
Laser products are classified in accordance with the FDA/CDRH - 21 CFR 1010 and
1040. The classification scheme is based on the ability of the laser emission to cause
injury to the eye or skin during normal operating conditions.
In the United States, lasers and laser systems in the infrared wavelength range (greater
than 700 nm) are assigned to one of the following classes. Please refer to “FDA/CDRH
laser classification” (p. 1-19):
• Class I
• Class IIIb
• Class IV
Laser classification is dependent upon operating wavelength, output power and fiber
mode field diameter or core diameter.
IEC requirements
The International Electro-Technical Commission (IEC) establishes standards for the
electrical and electronic industries. The IEC 60825-Part 1 and 2 have been established for
the worldwide safety of laser products.
According to the IEC classification, lasers and laser systems in the infrared wavelength
range (greater than 700 nm) are assigned to one of the following classes. Refer to “OFCS
hazard levels” (p. 1-20):
• Class 1
• Class 1M
• Class 3R
• Class 3B
• Class 4
FDA/CDRH laser classification

Laser classification is dependent upon the following: operating wavelength, output power,
mode field diameter or core diameter, and time base. Other parameters may be required
for non-fibered laser products, such as beam divergence/diameter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following table cites the FDA/CDRH classification of typical Alcatel-Lucent laser
products at the designated wavelengths that terminate into a single-mode 8.8 μm mode
field diameter fiber. Different mode field diameters and multimode fibers will yield
different optical power levels.
Table 1-1 FDA/CDRH laser classifications
Laser class Wavelength Max. output power of laser radiation

I 1310 nm 1.53 mW +1.85 dBm
1550 nm 8.52 mW +9.3 dBm
IIIb 1310 nm 500 mW +27 dBm
1550 nm 500 mW +27 dBm
IV 1310 nm > 500 mW > +27 dBm
1550 nm > 500 mW > +27 dBm
Explanatory note: In the United States, lasers and laser systems are assigned to one of the
following classes: Roman numerals I, IIa, II, IIIa, IIIb, and IV. Classes I, IIIb and IV
apply to lasers of all wavelengths. Classes IIa, II and IIIa apply only to those lasers
operating within the visible wavelength range (400-700 nm). Alcatel-Lucent laser
products typically operate in the infrared wavelength range (greater than 700 nm) and,
therefore, are primarily in the Class I or Class IIIb classifications.
OFCS hazard levels

The maximum mean power for each hazard level for the most important wavelengths and
optical fiber types used in optical fiber communications (OFCS) (see “Hazard level
assignment” (p. 1-21)) is presented in the following table from IEC 60825-2 standard. For
an OFCS, the hazard level from IEC 60825-2 is closely related to the laser classification
procedure in IEC 60825-1.
Table 1-2 OFCS hazard levels
Wavelength and Hazard level

fiber type
1 1M 2 2M 3R 3B
633 nm (MM) 1. 95 mW 3.9 mW 4.99 mW 9.63 mW 24.9 mW 500 mW

(+3 dBm) (+5.9 dBm) (+7 dBm) (+9.8 dBm) (+14 dBm) (+27 dBm)
780 nm (MM) 2.81 mW 5.6 mW - - 14.4 mW 500 mW

(+4.5 dBm) (+7.5 dBm) (+11.6 dBm) (+27 dBm)
850 nm (MM) 3.88 mW 7.8 mW - - 19.9 mW 500 mW
(+5.9 dBm) (+8.9 dBm) (+13 dBm) (+27 dBm)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-2 OFCS hazard levels (continued)
Wavelength and Hazard level

fiber type
1 1M 2 2M 3R 3B
980 nm (MM) 7.,06 mW 14.1 mW - - 36.2 mW 500 mW

(+8.5 dBm) (+11.5 dBm) (+15.6 dBm) (+27 dBm)
980 nm (SM) 1.8 mW 2.66 mW - - 9.21 mW 500 mW

(+2.6 dBm) (+4.2 dBm) (+9.6 dBm) (+27 dBm)
1310 nm (MM) 77.8 mW 156 mW - - 399 mW 500 mW

(+18.9 dBm) (+21.9 dBm) (+26 dBm) (+27 dBm)
1310 nm (SM) 25.8 mW 42.8 mW - - 129 mW 500 mW

(+14.1 dBm) (+16.3 dBm) (+21.1 dBm) (+27 dBm)
1400 nm ... 1600 nm 13.3 mW 384 mW - - See “Terms and 500 mW

(MM) (+11.2 dBm) (+25.8 dBm) Definitions” 3.9 in
(+27 dBm)
the Standard
1420 nm (SM) 10.1 mW 115 mW - - See “Terms and 500 mW

Definitions” 3.9 in
(+10 dBm) (+20.6 dBm) (+27 dBm)
the Standard
1550 nm (SM) 10.2 mW 136 mW - See “Terms and 500 mW

Definitions” 3.9 in
(+10.1 dBm) (+21.3 dBm) (+27 dBm)
the Standard
Notes:
1. Class 3R only exists if the maximum power is within five times the Accessible Emission Limit (AEL) of
Class 1. Please refer to the IEC 60825-1 Ed. 2.0 (2007) and IEC 60825-2 Ed. 3.2 (2010) standards for
detailed information.
2. The fibre parameters used are the most conservative case. Listed figures for the λ = 1310 and 1550 nm are
calculated for a fibre 11 microns mode field diameter (MFD) and those for λ = 980 nm are for 7 microns
MFD.
3. Many systems operating at 1550 nm with the use of erbium doped fibre amplifiers (EDFAs) pumped by 1480
nm or 980 nm lasers use transmission fibres with smaller MFDs. For example, 1550 nm dispersion shifted
fibre cables have upper limit values of MFD of 9,1 microns.
Hazard level assignment

“Hazard level” refers to the potential hazard from laser emission at any location in an
end-to-end optical fiber communication system that may be accessible during service or
in the event of a failure. The assignment of hazard level uses the AELs for the classes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hazard levels for optical transmission equipment are assigned in either of the following
two ways:
• The actual output power from the connector or the fiber cut.
• If automatic power reduction is used, the output power at the connector or fiber cut at
one second after automatic power reduction takes place, provided that maximum
output and restart conditions are met.
Classification of optical telecommunication equipment

Optical telecommunication equipment is generally classified as IEC Class 1 or
FDA/CDRH Class I, because under normal operating conditions the transmitter ports
terminate on optical fiber connectors. These are covered by a front panel to ensure
protection against emissions from any energized, unterminated transmitter.
The circuit packs themselves, however, may be IEC Class 1, 1M, 3B or 4 or FDA/CDRH
Class I, IIIb or IV. The determination of the hazard level is closely related to the laser
classification in IEC60825-1, but it takes the presence of the automatic power reduction
(APR) into account.
According to IEC 60825-1 Edition 2.0 (2007) standard, Class 1 laser products are safe
under reasonably foreseeable conditions, and according to the FDA/CDRH - 21 CFR
1040 standard, Class I levels of laser radiation are not considered to be hazardous.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WDM circuit pack classification

For the circuit pack classification it is necessary to clearly distinguish between the Hazard
Level with APR active and the Laser Class of a circuit pack itself (no APR mechanism is
present) or when the APR is disabled.
1. With APR present all listed packs have Hazard Level 1M and have the label shown
below.
• 112SCA1
• 112SCX10
• 130SCX10
• 130SNX10
• 260SCX2
• ALPHG
• AHPHG
• AHPLG
• CWR8
• CWR8B
• CWR8-88
• WR8-88A
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• WR8-88AF
• WR2-88
• ALPFGT
• AM2032A
• AM2125A
• AM2125B
• AM2318A
• AM2325A
• AM2625A
• A2P2125 Hybrid Amplifier
• MESH4
• RA2P
• MSH8-FSM
• WR20-TFM
• A4PSWG
2. With APR disabled or not present some amplifiers are Laser Class 3B (and
FDA/CDRH Class IIIb) or Class 4 (and FDA/CDRH Class IV):
Laser Class 3B and FDA/CDRH Class IIIb are:
• A2325A
• AM2125A
• AM2125B
• AM2318A
• AM2625A
Laser Class 4 and FDA/CDRH Class IV are:
• A2P2125
• A4PSWG
• RA2P
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Based on the above, individual packs are affixed with a small “Hazard Level 1M” label
shown in the following illustration. Additional laser safety warnings are listed on product
shelf labeling, see Figure 1-4, “Multilabel (PSS-64) ” (p. 1-16) Figure 1-2, “Multilabel
(1830 PSS-16/PSS-32)” (p. 1-14) .
All other Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WDM circuit packs are IEC Class 1 and FDA/CDRH
Class I and, therefore, are assigned a hazard level 1.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS TDM circuit pack and module classification

Classifications for the following Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS TDM circuit packs and
modules are IEC Class 1M and FDA/CDRH Class IIIb:
• 130SCUPB
• 130SCUP
• 11QCUPC
• 24ANMB
• 24ET1GB
• 8ET1GB
• 10SD10G
• 24SDM
• XS-64.2b
• CFP Single Rate 10x10G over ribbon cable
• X11MDTSZC
• SFP+ 10GE (–5/85°C) over MMF
• SFP+ 10GE (–5/85°C) over 10 km MMF
All other Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS TDM circuit packs are IEC Class 1 and FDA/CDRH
Class I and, therefore, are assigned a hazard level 1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Equipment grounding
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Equipment grounding
Importance of proper grounding
An essential aspect for both personal safety and equipment integrity is proper grounding.
To avoid differences of potential, a common ground (GRD) is used for all system part
including peripheral equipment, such as a craft terminal for example.
For safety reasons, each touchable metallic part is connected to GRD by design.
See the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up Guide for more
detailed information regarding grounding.
CAUTION
Electric-shock hazard
If the system is not installed in MESH-BN grounding environment but in a star grounding
scheme, all electrical cables such as LAN or timing cables can carry dangerous electrical
current on their shielding.
Take extreme care when plugging or unplugging electrical cables in installations with
star grounding. Never touch grounded parts of the system with one hand when plugging
or unplugging electrical cables with the other hand.
NOTICE
Equipment damage hazard
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system is designed to permit the connection of the grounded
conductor of the DC supply circuit to the grounding conductor at the equipment.
1. This equipment must be connected directly to the DC supply system grounding
electrode conductor or to a bonding jumper from a grounding terminal bar or bus to
which the DC supply system grounding electrode conductor is connected.
2. This equipment must be located in the same immediate area (such as, adjacent
cabinets) as any other equipment that has a connection between the grounded
conductor of the same DC supply circuit and the grounding conductor, and also the
point of grounding of the DC system. The DC system shall not be grounded elsewhere.
3. The DC supply source is to be located within the same premises as this equipment.
4. There must be no switching or disconnection devices in the grounded circuit
conductor between the DC source and the point of connection of the grounding
electrode conductor.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Electrostatic discharge
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Electrostatic discharge
Introduction
Electrostatic discharge (ESD), caused by touching with the hand for example, can destroy
semiconductor components. The correct operation of the complete system is then no
longer assured.
Industry experience has shown that all semiconductor components can be damaged by
static electricity that builds up on work surfaces and personnel. The electrostatic
discharge can also affect the components indirectly via contacts or conductor tracks. The
electrostatic charges are produced by various charging effects of movement and contact
with other objects. Dry air allows greater static charges to accumulate. Higher potentials
are measured in areas with low relative humidity, but potentials high enough to cause
damage can occur anywhere.
The barred-hand symbol

Circuit packs containing components that are especially sensitive to electrostatic
discharge are identified by warning labels bearing the barred-hand symbol.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ESD instructions
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can permanently destroy semiconductor components.
Observe the following ESD instructions to avoid damage to electrostatic-sensitive
components:
• Assume that all solid-state components and assemblies are sensitive to ESD.
• Wear working garment made of 100% cotton to avoid electrostatic charging.
• Touch the circuit packs at the edges or the insertion and removal facilities only.
• Touch the SFP or XFP modules at the edges only.
• Ensure that the rack is grounded.
• Wear a properly grounded ESD wrist strap (connected to the rack ESD bonding point,
for example).
• Work in an ESD safe work area or workstation. An ESD safe work area should be
equipped with a grounded ESD wrist strap and a grounded ESD mat or ESD
dissipative work surface.
A grounded ESD mat or work surface must have a ground cord with one end attached
to the mat or surface and the other end connected to a ground point (the rack ESD
bonding point, for example). Do not work with ESD sensitive devices unless the area
is properly equipped.
• Conductively connect all test equipment and trolleys to the rack ESD bonding point.
• Store and ship circuit packs and components in their shipping packaging. Circuit
packs and components must be packed and unpacked only at workplaces suitably
protected against build-up of charge.
• Whenever possible, maintain the relative humidity of air above 20%.
• Test and calibrate ESD safety equipment on a regular basis for a proper function.
Electric shock
DANGER
The 4-mm banana plug at the end of the ESD wrist-strap cord is intended to be only used
for connecting to the ESD jack on the rack/subrack ESD bonding point. Connecting the
banana plug to AC or DC wall sockets or any type of power supply units may lead to the
risk of electric shock.
Never connect the banana plug to AC or DC wall sockets or any type of power supply
units.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-5 ESD bonding point at the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack
Legend:
A ESD bonding point
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Legend:
A ESD bonding point
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Legend:
A ESD bonding point
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Legend:
A ESD bonding point
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-9 ESD bonding point at the ETSI One Rack
Legend:
2 ETSI One Rack bottom frame

A ESD bonding point
Note: For working on ANSI installation (SNBF rack) use the ESD bonding point at
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS subrack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
To enable rapid orientation, safety instructions are given on the following pages, which
are assigned to various stages in the life cycle of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS equipment
(“deployment phases”).
Deployment phases
The instructions are arranged according to the following deployment phases:
• “Transportation” (p. 1-34)
• “Storage” (p. 1-37)
• “Installation” (p. 1-41)
• “Taking into operation” (p. 1-47)
• “Operation and maintenance” (p. 1-51)
• “Taking out of operation” (p. 1-61)
• “Event of failure” (p. 1-64)
Contents
Transportation 1-34
Storage 1-37
Installation 1-41
Taking into operation 1-47
Operation and maintenance 1-51
Taking out of operation 1-61
Event of failure 1-64
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Transportation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Transportation
Weight
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unsecured rack or subrack
A fully equipped Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack weighs up to 125 kg (276 lbs), a
fully equipped rack up to 215 kg (474 lbs). A fully equipped Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36
subrack weighs up to 84.5 kg (186.3 lbs). A rack equipped with two Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-36 subracks weighs up to 259 kg (571 lbs). Although Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-16 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subracks weigh less, a fully equipped subrack
can still weigh more than 30 kg (66 lbs).
Such a fully equipped rack or subrack can cause considerable injuries if it is knocked
over or dropped.
Use a sturdy vehicle for transportation and secure the rack or subrack against dropping.
Always use a sufficient number of people and/or a lifting device to transport and position
the rack or subrack.
NOTICE
Damage to system components due to unsecured rack or subrack
A fully equipped rack or subrack can cause serious damage to the rack or subrack if it is
knocked over or dropped.
Always use a sufficient number of people or a lifting device to transport and position the
rack or subrack.
Packaging
NOTICE
Adverse effect on operation due to incorrect packaging
Dampness and soiling can cause corrosion or tracking paths which can result in
malfunctioning of the system components. Shocks can cause damage.
Protect the system components against dampness, soiling, and shocks. Use the original
dissipative packaging if possible.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Environmental conditions
NOTICE
Damage to system components under extreme environmental conditions
Extreme environmental conditions can damage system components and cause
malfunctioning.
Ensure that the climatic limits for transportation and storage of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
equipment are complied with during transportation; please see “Environmental
conditions for transportation” (p. 1-35).
Environmental conditions for transportation

ETSI market
For the transportation phase, the requirements according to the ETSI Standard
EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3 “Public transportation” are met. This class applies to
transportation where no special precautions have been taken. The conditions covered
include transportation in unventilated enclosures and in non-weather-protected conditions
with restrictions on the general open-air climates, excluding cold climates.
For quick reference, Table 1-3, “Temperature and humidity levels for transportation
(ETSI market)” (p. 1-35) shows the most important climatic values specified in the
requirement.
Table 1-3 Temperature and humidity levels for transportation (ETSI market)
Conditions Limits
Low air temperature –40°C (–40°F)

High air temperature in unventilated enclosures 70°C (158°F)
High air temperature in ventilated enclosures or outdoor 40°C (104°F)
air
Relative humidity not combined with rapid temperature 95% at 45°C (113°F)
changes
Relative humidity combined with rapid temperature 95% at –40°C to 30°C (–40 to 86°F)
changes air/air
Absolute humidity combined with rapid temperature 60 g/m3 at 70°C to 15°C (158 to 58°F)
changes air/air
ANSI market
For the transportation phase, the following specifics of Telcordia ® Requirement
GR-63-CORE are met:
• R4-3 [69]: Low-temperature exposure and shock (packaged equipment)
• R4-4 [71]: High relative humidity exposure (packaged)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• R4-5 [70]: High-temperature exposure and thermal shock (packaged equipment)
• R4-65 [107]: Category A containers (<100 kg), packaged shock/drop criteria
• R4-66 [108]: Category B containers (>100 kg), shock/drop criteria
• R4-67 [109]: Unpackaged shock/drop criteria
• R4-83 [124]: Transportation vibration, no physical damage
For quick reference, Table 1-4, “Environmental conditions for transportation (ANSI
market)” (p. 1-36) shows the most important limits specified in the requirement.
Table 1-4 Environmental conditions for transportation (ANSI market)
Conditions Limits
Low air temperature (uncontrolled humidity) –40°C (–40°F)
Low air temperature change (uncontrolled humidity) 23°C to –40°C (73°F to –40°F) with a change rate of
30°C (54°F) per hour
–40°C to 23°C (–40 °F to 73°F) within less than 5

minutes
High air temperature (uncontrolled humidity) 70°C (158°F)
High air temperature change (uncontrolled humidity) 23°C to 70°C (73°F to 158°F) with a change rate of 30°C
(54°F) per hour
70°C to 23°C (158°F to 73°F) within less than 5 minutes
Air temperature change (at a relative humidity of 50%) 23°C to 40°C (73°F to 104°F) with a change rate of 30°C
(54°F) per hour
40°C to 23°C (104°F to 73°F) with a change rate of 30°C

(54°F) per hour
changes
Relative humidity change 93% to 50% at 40°C (104°F) within less than 2 hours
50% to 93% at 40°C (104°F) within less than 2 hours

Robustness against mechanical shocks (fully equipped Permissible drop height for packaged equipment: 100
rack or subrack) mm (3.9 in)
Permissible drop height for unpackaged equipment: 2.5
mm (1 in)
Vibration levels which can typically be expected during

transportation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Storage
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Storage
Weight
WARNING
over or dropped.
NOTICE
rack or subrack.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Electronic components can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.
Circuit packs must therefore always be kept in antistatic covers. Use the original
dissipative packaging if possible. Always observe the ESD instructions (see “Electrostatic
discharge” (p. 1-26)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Storage
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Packaging
NOTICE
Adverse effect on operation due to incorrect packaging
Dampness and soiling can cause corrosion or tracking paths which can result in
malfunctioning of the system components. Shocks can cause damage.
Protect the system components against dampness, soiling, and shocks. Use the original
dissipative packaging if possible.
Environmental conditions
NOTICE
malfunctioning.
Ensure that the climatic limits for transportation and storage of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
equipment are complied with during storage; please see “Environmental conditions for
storage” (p. 1-38).
Environmental conditions for storage

ETSI market
For the storage phase, the requirements according to the ETSI Standard EN 300 019-1-1,
class 1.2 “Weather-protected, not temperature-controlled storage locations” are met. This
class applies to weather-protected storage having neither temperature nor humidity
control. The location may have openings directly to the open air, that means, it may be
only partly weather-protected.
For quick reference, Table 1-5, “Temperature and humidity levels for storage (ETSI
market)” (p. 1-38) shows the most important climatic values specified in the requirement.
The related climatogram is shown in Figure 1-10, “Temperature and humidity levels for
storage (ETSI market)” (p. 1-39).
Table 1-5 Temperature and humidity levels for storage (ETSI market)
Conditions Limits
Low air temperature –25°C (–13°F)
High air temperature 55°C (131°F)
Low relative humidity 10%
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Storage
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-5 Temperature and humidity levels for storage (ETSI market)
(continued)
Conditions Limits
High relative humidity 100%
Rate of temperature change 0.5 K/min (0.9°F/min)
Figure 1-10 Temperature and humidity levels for storage (ETSI market)
o o
F C
194 90
176 80
158 70
140 60
122 50
104 40
86 30 29
68 20
50 10 4
32 0
14 –10
–4 –20 3
0.5
–22 –30
–40 –40
–58 –50
1 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
2 g-pipg-0281
Legend:
1 Air temperature
2 Relative air humidity [%]
3 Absolute air humidity [g/m3]

4 Conditions for storage
ANSI market
For the storage phase, the following specifics of Telcordia ® Requirement GR-63-CORE
are met:
• R4-3 [69]: Low-temperature exposure and shock (packaged equipment)
• R4-4 [71]: High relative humidity exposure (packaged)
• R4-5 [70]: High-temperature exposure and thermal shock (packaged equipment)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Storage
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For quick reference, Table 1-6, “Environmental conditions for storage (ANSI market)”
(p. 1-40) shows the most important limits specified in the requirement.
Table 1-6 Environmental conditions for storage (ANSI market)
Conditions Limits
Low air temperature (uncontrolled humidity) –40°C (–40°F)
Low air temperature change (uncontrolled humidity) 23°C to –40°C (73°F to –40°F) with a change rate of
30°C (54°F) per hour
–40°C to 23°C (–40 °F to 73°F) within less than 5

minutes
High air temperature (uncontrolled humidity) 70°C (158°F)
High air temperature change (uncontrolled humidity) 23°C to 70°C (73°F to 158°F) with a change rate of 30°C
(54°F) per hour
70°C to 23°C (158°F to 73°F) within less than 5 minutes

Air temperature change (at a relative humidity of 50%) 23°C to 40°C (73°F to 104°F) with a change rate of 30°C
(54°F) per hour
40°C to 23°C (104°F to 73°F) with a change rate of 30°C

(54°F) per hour
changes
Relative humidity change 93% to 50% at 40°C (104°F) within less than 2 hours
50% to 93% at 40°C (104°F) within less than 2 hours
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Installation
Risk of electric shock
WARNING
Risk of short circuits when power is supplied to the High Power Connection, Fuse &
Alarm Panel (HPCFAP) during the installation of subrack power cables. Contact with
energized parts can cause serious personal injury.
Before connecting any subrack power cables be sure that all circuit breakers that are
located in the HPCFAP are in the OFF position.
Weight
WARNING
over or dropped.
NOTICE
rack or subrack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Laser warning labels
WARNING
Laser hazard
Warning labels on the system and especially on the optical components warn of the
dangers of invisible laser radiation. Removed, concealed or illegible labels can lead to
incorrect action and thus cause serious injuries to the eyes of operating staff.
Ensure that the laser warning labels are not removed or concealed and are always clearly
legible.
Acoustic noise
WARNING
Acoustic noise hazard
The operation of more than one system could cause noise levels in working environments
(for example system test floors) that are harmful to human beings.
The infrastructure of such facilities needs to take care for the protection of work force in
that environment. National laws and regulations for safe working places need to be taken
into account.
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Hold circuit packs only at the edges or on the insertion and removal facilities. Always
observe the ESD instructions (see “Electrostatic discharge” (p. 1-26)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Condensation
NOTICE
Condensation can occur in the network element or its components during transport,
especially on moving from outside to closed rooms; this can cause malfunctioning,
short-circuits or other damages of the circuit packs.
Ensure that circuit packs and subracks have reached at least the cold start temperature of
the system and are dry before taking them into operation. The cold start temperature of
the system is –5°C (+23°F); see the section “Climatic conditions for stationary
operation” (p. 1-56) .
Electric shock
DANGER
units.
Risk of pinching
CAUTION
Pinch hazard
Your fingers can be pinched when sliding in the fan unit.
Do not place your fingers on top/bottom of the fan unit when sliding it into the subrack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overcurrent protecting device
NOTICE
If the wrong type of circuit breaker is used with this equipment, the equipment may be
severely damaged due to overcurrent.
Always ensure that the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack is installed in combination
with a Power Distribution Unit - ETSI or Power Distribution Unit - ANSI (PDU1C,
PDU2C), respectively. The circuit breakers used in the PDU1C/PDU2C allow a
maximum current of 50 A.
Never install the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack in combination with a top rack unit
larger than 50 A. The circuit breakers used in the HPCFAP allow a maximum current of
100 A. Depending on system configuration, the use of circuit breakers smaller than 50 A
is possible (see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up Guide for
scalable circuit breakers).
Over-voltage damage
NOTICE
Potential over-voltage damage to equipment from OSP (outside plant) connections
The intra-building ports of the equipment or subassembly are suitable for connection to
intra-building or unexposed wiring or cabling only. The intra-building ports of the
equipment or subassembly MUST NOT be metallically connected to interfaces that
connect to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as intra-building
interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089) and require isolation
from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient
protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.
NOTICE
The intra-building ports of the equipment or subassembly must use shielded
intra-building cabling/wiring that is grounded at both ends.
If Type 2, 3a/5a, 4, or 4a ports of the equipment, or subassembly require a shielded cable,
intra-building ports of the equipment, or subassembly, are suitable only for connection to
shielded intra-building cabling that is grounded at both ends. This requirement applies to
paired conductor interfaces as well as coaxial interfaces.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Risk of fire due to overheating
NOTICE
Fire hazard
Inadequate heat dissipation can cause heat accumulation or even a fire in the network
element.
You must therefore ensure that:
• All the required fan units are installed ( Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16, Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 : one Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64: two)
• The individual fans are not obstructed
• That all of the following aids for cooling air flow are installed as needed for their
respective subracks:
– The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 air deflector (left side the subrack)
– The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 air deflector (above
the subrack)
– The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack bottom plate
– The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 air deflector (beneath the subrack)
• All empty slots are covered with the correct blank front plates; for details about the
recommended face plates for the different subrack types refer to the Product
• The covers and cable ducts are mounted (only valid in the case of BT/BTC removal)
• The air filter is not clogged
• That for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 the orientation of the air filter is correct, such
that the air filter carrier prevents the air filter from being sucked into the fan unit (see
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up Guide).
• For the installation of the half-slot adapter (8DG09811AAAA), the half-slot adapter
tool (8DG07796AA) must be used to avoid short cuts during half-slot adapter
insertion and installation.
Detector diodes
NOTICE
Destruction of the detector diodes caused by too high an input power
Connecting the output and input of optical circuit packs with a transmit power in excess
of –3 dBm over short distances will cause the destruction of the detector diodes, as the
input power is then too high.
Use an optical attenuator pad of approximately 10 to 20 dB when establishing
connections over short distances for test purposes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Receiver sensitivities
You can find the receiver sensitivities and the minimum overload thresholds in the
“Technical Specifications” chapter in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product Information
and Planning Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Taking into operation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Taking into operation

Invisible laser radiation
WARNING
Laser hazard
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems operate with invisible laser radiation. Laser radiation
can cause considerable injuries to the eyes.
Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or into an open optical connector as long as
the optical source is switched on. Always observe the laser warning instructions (see
“Laser safety” (p. 1-13)).
Acoustic noise
WARNING
into account.
Power wiring
NOTICE
Destruction of components due to incorrect power wiring
Incorrect power wiring can cause equipment damage.
All power wires must be properly connected before powering up the system by switching
on the circuit breakers. For details see Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System
Turn-Up Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Arcing
WARNING
Power Interface: Arcing on removing or inserting a live power supply
plug
Arcing can cause burns to the hands and damage to the eyes.
Before removing or connecting the power supply lugs at the Power Interface, ensure that
the line circuit breakers on the PDU1C/PDU2C are in the “OFF” position.
Before removing the power supply cable at a Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface
Card (PSF3T8), ensure that all associated circuit breakers that are located in the external
High Power Connection, Fuse and Alarm Panel (HPCFAP) are in the “OFF” position.
If power cables that are terminated with lugs are detached and the PSF is extracted,
circuit breakers must not be switched on again to avoid short circuits and arcing.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Electric shock
DANGER
If the system is operated with only one Power Interface Card (PFC), electrical
connectors on the backplane carry a voltage of –48 / –60 V DC which can cause electric
shocks if accidentally touched.
If the system is operated with only one Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Card
(PSF3T8) and Fan Unit (FAN3T8), electrical connectors on the backplane carry a
voltage of –48 / –60 V DC which can cause electric shocks if accidentally touched.
Always use the correct system configuration to ensure safe operation:
• Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36: Two Power Interface Cards (PFC), one Fan module
• Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64: Two Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Cards
(PSF3T8), two Fan Units (FAN3T8).
• Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 : Two PFDC DC Power
Filters of the appropriate capacity.
Supply voltage
NOTICE
Destruction of components due to a supply voltage of incorrect polarity or
too high
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS equipment operates at a nominal voltage of –48 V (–40.0 V to
–57 V) or –60 V (–50.0 V to –72.0 V) at the power supply filter input terminal. A supply
voltage outside these specifications or of incorrect polarity can lead to permanent
damage of system components.
Ensure that the supply voltage has the correct range and polarity before connecting the
voltage. Ensure also the correct polarity (sequence) of all power feeders.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fusing
NOTICE
Fire hazard
If the system is not secured by appropriate circuit breakers, a short-circuit can cause
severe damage to the system, for example a fire in the network element.
Protect all supply lines with line circuit breakers matched to the load of the subrack
equipment. Note the relevant guide values in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation
and System Turn-Up Guide.
Condensation
NOTICE
Condensation can occur in the network element or its components during transport,
especially on moving from outside to closed rooms; this can cause malfunctioning,
short-circuits or other damages of the circuit packs.
Ensure that circuit packs and subracks have reached at least the cold start temperature of
the system and are dry before taking them into operation. The cold start temperature of
the system is –5°C (+23°F); see the section “Climatic conditions for stationary
operation” (p. 1-56) .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Operation and maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Operation and maintenance

WARNING
Laser hazard
Arcing
WARNING
plug
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Electric shock
DANGER
If the system is operated with only one Power Interface Card (PFC), electrical
connectors on the backplane carry a voltage of –48 / –60 V DC which can cause electric
shocks if accidentally touched.
If the system is operated with only one Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Card
(PSF3T8) and Fan Unit (FAN3T8), electrical connectors on the backplane carry a
voltage of –48 / –60 V DC which can cause electric shocks if accidentally touched.
Always use the correct system configuration to ensure safe operation:
• Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36: Two Power Interface Cards (PFC), one Fan module
• Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64: Two Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Cards
(PSF3T8), two Fan Units (FAN3T8).
• Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 : Two PFDC DC Power
Filters of the appropriate capacity.
Laser warning labels
WARNING
Laser hazard
Warning labels on the system and especially on the optical components warn of the
dangers of invisible laser radiation. Removed, concealed or illegible labels can lead to
incorrect action and thus cause serious injuries to the eyes of operating staff.
Ensure that the laser warning labels are not removed or concealed and are always clearly
legible.
Acoustic noise
WARNING
into account.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Risk of burns due to hot surfaces
CAUTION
Hot-surface hazard
Hot surfaces of system components can cause burns to the hands.
Do not touch system components that are marked with the hot surfaces warning label.
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Electric shock
DANGER
units.
Risk of pinching
CAUTION
Pinch hazard
Your fingers can be pinched when sliding in the fan unit.
Do not place your fingers on top/bottom of the fan unit when sliding it into the subrack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Risk of fire due to overheating
NOTICE
Fire hazard
Inadequate heat dissipation can cause heat accumulation or even a fire in the network
element.
You must therefore ensure that:
• All the required fan units are installed ( Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16, Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 : one Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64: two)
• The individual fans are not obstructed
• That all of the following aids for cooling air flow are installed as needed for their
respective subracks:
– The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 air deflector (left side the subrack)
– The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 air deflector (above
the subrack)
– The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack bottom plate
– The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 air deflector (beneath the subrack)
• All empty slots are covered with the correct blank front plates; for details about the
recommended face plates for the different subrack types refer to the Product
• The covers and cable ducts are mounted (only valid in the case of BT/BTC removal)
• The air filter is not clogged
• That for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 the orientation of the air filter is correct, such
that the air filter carrier prevents the air filter from being sucked into the fan unit (see
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up Guide).
• For the installation of the half-slot adapter (8DG09811AAAA), the half-slot adapter
tool (8DG07796AA) must be used to avoid short cuts during half-slot adapter
insertion and installation.
Risk of system shut-down during maintenance activities
NOTICE
System shut-down when switching off all power supply feeders
Bringing the circuit breakers of all power supply feeders in the OFF position leads to a
shut-down of the complete system.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64: When carrying out maintenance work at one of the two
Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Cards (PSF3T8) A or B, switch off only those
circuit breakers that are directly associated to the corresponding PSF3T8. For each
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PSF3T8 there are three power supply feeders, and each power supply feeder has an
associated circuit breaker. The circuit breakers are located in the High Power
Connection, Fuse & Alarm Panel (HPCFAP).
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36: When carrying out maintenance work at one of the two
Power Filter Cards (PFC) A or B, switch off only those circuit breakers that are directly
associated to the corresponding PFC. For each PFC there are three power supply
feeders, and each power supply feeder has an associated circuit breaker. The circuit
breakers are located in the Power Distribution Unit (PDU).
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 and PSS-32: When carrying out maintenance work on one of
the two Power Supply Filters, A or B feeds, switch off only those circuit breakers that are
directly associated with the corresponding A or B side power filters. Switching both off at
the same time will result in loss of service.
Risk of equipment damage during maintenance activities
NOTICE
Equipment can be damaged during in-service replacement of components
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36: During in-service replacement of system components above
the Fan Unit, there is a risk that nuts, cable ends, or other objects may fall into the Fan
Unit.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64: During in-service replacement of the upper Power Supply,
Filter, and Clock Interface Card (PSF3T8) A, there is a risk that nuts, cable ends, or other
objects may fall into the upper fan unit (Fan Unit A).
Take utmost care to prevent nuts or cable ends from falling into the system.
Detector diodes
NOTICE
Destruction of the detector diodes caused by too high an input power
Connecting the output and input of optical circuit packs with a transmit power in excess
of –3 dBm over short distances will cause the destruction of the detector diodes, as the
input power is then too high.
Use an optical attenuator pad of approximately 10 to 20 dB when establishing
connections over short distances for test purposes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Receiver sensitivities
You can find the receiver sensitivities and the minimum overload thresholds in the
“Technical Specifications” chapter in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product Information
and Planning Guide.
Short-circuit
NOTICE
Destruction of circuit packs in the event of a short-circuit
A short-circuit in the network element can cause destruction of electronic components
and thus malfunctioning of the complete system.
You must therefore not handle objects such as a screwdriver in the circuit pack area of the
subrack.
Always use the special extraction tool for the insertion and the removal of bus
termination cards.
Climatic conditions
NOTICE
malfunctioning.
Ensure that the “Climatic conditions for stationary operation” (p. 1-56) are complied
with during operation.
Climatic conditions for stationary operation

The cold start temperature of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS is –5°C (+23°F).
ETSI market
For the stationary operation phase, the requirements according to the ETSI Standard EN
300 019-1-3, class 3.1E, “Temperature-controlled location with exceptional conditions”
are met. This class applies to a permanently temperature-controlled enclosed location.
Humidity is usually not controlled.
For quick reference, Table 1-7, “Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ETSI
market)” (p. 1-57) shows the most important climatic values specified in the requirement.
The related climatogram is shown in Figure 1-11, “Temperature and humidity levels for
operation (ETSI market)” (p. 1-58).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-7 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ETSI market)
Conditions Limits
Rack level (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64) Subrack level (Alcatel-Lucent

1830 PSS-36)
Minimum air temperature Normal operating: Normal operating:

5°C (41°F) 5°C (41°F)
Short term (extended): Short term (extended):
–5°C (28°F) –5°C (28°F)
Maximum air temperature Normal operating: Normal operating:

40°C (104°F) 40°C (104°F)
Short term (extended): Short term (extended):
45°C (113°F) 45°C (113°F)
Low relative humidity 5%
High relative humidity 85% (90% for short term)
Rate of temperature change 0.5 K/min (0.9°F/min)
Figure 1-11 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ETSI market)
o o
F C
140 60
122 50
6 5
104 40
86 30
25
20
68 20 4
50 10
32 0 6
14 –10
1.5 3
1.0
–4 –20
–22 –30
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
1
2
g-pipg-0282
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Legend:
1 Air temperature

4 Values outside of this field have a probability of occurrence of less than 10%
5 Normal operating conditions: values outside of this field have a probability of occurrence of less than 1%
6 Exceptional climatic limits
ANSI market
For the stationary operation phase, the following specifics of Telcordia ® Requirement
GR-63-CORE are met:
• R4-6 [72]: Ambient temperature and humidity limits as shown in Table 1-8,
“Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ANSI market)” (p. 1-58) and Figure
1-12, “Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ANSI market)” (p. 1-59)
• R4-8 [74], R4-9 [136], R4-10 [75]: Requirements for altitude
• R4-68 [110], R4-69 [111], R4-70 [112], R4-72 [114], R4-75 [117], R4-81 [122],
R4-82 [123]: Requirements for dynamic shock, vibration, and earthquake. The chassis
resistance of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS is compliant with zone 4 earthquake and office
vibrations.
Table 1-8 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ANSI market)
Conditions Limits
Rack level (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64) Subrack level (Alcatel-Lucent

1830 PSS-36)
Ambient1 temperature Range Range

• Operating (up to 1800 m) • 5°C to 40°C (41°F to 104°F) • 5°C to 45°C (41°F to 113°F)
• Short-term2 • –5°C to 50°C (23°F to 122°F) • –5°C to 55°C (23°F to 131°F)
Rate of temperature change 30 K/h (54°F/min)

1
Ambient relative humidity Range
• Operating • 5% to 85%
• Short-term • 5% to 90%, but not to exceed 0.024 kg water/kg of dry air
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Notes:
1. “Ambient” refers to conditions at a location 1.5 m (59 in) above the floor and 400 mm (15.8 in) in front of
the equipment.
2. “Short-term” refers to a period of not more than 96 consecutive hours and a total of not more than 15 days in
1 year. This refers to a total of 360 hours in any given year, but no more than 15 occurrences during that
1-year period. The long-term operating temperature range is 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F) on rack level and
0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F) on shelf level (see “ Frame/Shelf level according to Telcordia and ETSI”
(p. 1-59)). It is given for the purposes of reliability assessment.
Figure 1-12 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ANSI market)
o o
F C
158 70
140 60
5
122 50
104 40
86 30 24
68 20 4
50 10
3
32 0
14 –10
1 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
2 g-pipg-0280
Legend:
1 Air temperature
4 Normal operating conditions
5 Short-term conditions
Frame/Shelf level according to Telcordia and ETSI

The following describes the Frame/Shelf level according to Telcordia and ETSI
• Telcordia frame-level (subrack is more than 36” [=914.4 mm] in height)
All Telcordia GR-63-CORE environmental conditions apply to a 12" or 14” deep
SNBF (ANSI rack) with one installed subrack (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64),
including subrack covers.
• Telcordia shelf-level (subrack is less than or equal to 36” [=914.4 mm] in height)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
All Telcordia GR-63-CORE environmental conditions apply to a stand-alone subrack
(Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36). For certain tests the subrack may have to be mounted
into an open rack.
• ETSI rack-level
All ETSI EN 300 019 environmental conditions apply to a 300 mm ETSI rack with
one installed subrack (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64).
• ETSI subrack-level
All ETSI EN 300 019 environmental conditions apply to a stand-alone subrack
(Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36). For certain tests the subrack may have to be mounted
into an open rack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Taking out of operation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Taking out of operation

WARNING
Laser hazard
Arcing
WARNING
plug
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Weight
WARNING
over or dropped.
NOTICE
rack or subrack.
Risk of burns due to hot surfaces
CAUTION
Hot-surface hazard
Hot surfaces of system components can cause burns to the hands.
Do not touch system components that are marked with the hot surfaces warning label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Electric shock
DANGER
units.
Disposal
The equipment in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system series must be disposed of at the
end of its lifetime. Please contact us in this case and we will arrange for proper and
environment-friendly disposal of your equipment (most parts of the system can be
recycled).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety Event of failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Event of failure
Hazard levels
In the event of failure, the hazard levels given in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product
Information and Planning Guide apply. The hazard levels define the potential optical
hazard at any accessible location within an optical fiber telecommunication system. See
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product Information and Planning Guide.
WARNING
Laser hazard
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 2 larm and condition
A
details
Overview
Purpose
The present chapter contains information about the conditions that can be reported by
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS network elements.
Terminology
Note that the term “condition” is a generic term used to refer to a status condition
detected or existing at the NE. When a condition is detected, then the NE determines the
effect on service of the condition using internal rules and calculates the corresponding
notification level taking also the configuration data into account.
Notification level
If the notification level is one of Critical (CR), Major (MJ), Minor (MN) or Warning
(WR), the condition is called an “alarm”.
If the notification level is Not alarmed (NA), the condition is called an “event”.
If the notification level is Not reported (NR), then the condition is not reported, as the
name implies. Not-reported conditions are added to the NE’s log file and can be retrieved
from there.
Note furthermore that the terms board, card, circuit pack, or unit are used interchangeably
throughout this document. The terms shelf and subrack are also used synonymously.
Defects and alarms

Please note that there is a difference between defects and alarms which is described in
detail in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS User Provisioning Guide in the “Alarm
management procedures” chapter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
General alarm information
Each alarm description contains a brief alarm overview table of the main alarm
characteristics, for example:
Alarm identifier / Mnemonic “LOS”, “LOF”, or “HWFAIL”, for example

Applicability “Photonic applications” for example
SC/TC “Standing condition (SC)” or “Transient condition (TC)”
ASAP type “ASAPODUn” for example
Alarm category “Equipment” or “Transmission”, for example
Effect-on-service “Not service-affecting (NSA)” for example
Alarm severity (default setting) SA Default alarm severity for service-affecting
(SA) alarms, “Critical (CR)” for example
NSA Default alarm severity for not service-affecting
(NSA) alarms, “Not alarmed (NA)” for
example
Alarm source The alarm reporting entity, “Circuit pack”, “Shelf”, or
“OC-12”, for example.
Note: For control plane alarms, the structure of the brief alarm overview table
deviates from this example; see also “Control plane alarms” (p. 2-1048).
In the following, the general meaning of these characteristics will be described in more
detail.
Alarm identifier / Mnemonic

The “Alarm identifier / Mnemonic” entry in the alarm overview table gives the
abbreviated designation of the alarm, for example “SYNCOOS”.
Alphabetical index
Please see the alphabetical index provided with this document to find information
concerning alarms of which you only know the alarm short designation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Applicability
The “Applicability” entry in the alarm overview table indicates whether the alarm applies
to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Photonic applications or Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Switching applications, or both.
• Photonic applications include WDM, that is PSS-16 and PSS-32 nodes and their
associated functionality.
– WDM: PSS-16, PSS-32
• Switching applications include OCS, that is PSS-36 and PSS-64 nodes and their
associated functionality.
– OCS: PSS-36, PSS-64
SC/TC
The “SC/TC” entry in the alarm overview table indicates whether an alarm represents a
standing condition (SC) or transient condition (TC):
• A standing condition is an alarmed, not-alarmed, or not-reported condition that can be
obtained by interrogating the NE. A standing condition is a persistent state that must
be cleared.
• A transient condition is a not-alarmed condition. Like the standing condition it is
reported, but cannot be obtained by interrogating the NE. Unlike the standing
condition it does not require clearing.
ASAP type
The “ASAP type” entry in the alarm overview table indicates the type of alarm severity
assignment profile (ASAP) to which the corresponding alarm belongs.
Note: Alarms that are classified as transient conditions typically do not belong to any
ASAP.
Alarm severity assignment profiles (ASAP)
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports an ASAP type for each entity that supports conditions
with configurable severity. Each ASAP type contains only those conditions that apply to
the related entity.
ASAPs for photonic applications:
• 1GbE
• 10GbE
• 100GbE
• CBR2G5
• CBRAR
• COM
• EQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• FC100
• FC200
• FC400
• FC800
• FC1200
• FE
• LAG
• LINEREF
• MEP
• OC3/STM1
• OC12/STM4
• OC48/STM16
• OC192/STM64
• OC768/STM256
• OCH
• ODU0
• ODU1
• ODU2
• ODU2E
• ODU3
• ODU3E2
• ODU4
• ODUflex
• OMS
• OPTSG
• OTS
• OTU1
• OTU2
• OTU2E
• OTU3
• OTU3E2
• OTU4
• PLK
• SYNC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• TDM
• VTS
ASAPs for switching applications:
• ASAPEQPT
• ASAPFFP
• ASAPGBE
• ASAPGBE10
• ASAPGBE100
• ASAPIPIPT
• ASAPLAN
• ASAPNETIF
• ASAPOC3
• ASAPOC12
• ASAPOC48
• ASAPOC192
• ASAPOC768
• ASAPOCH
• ASAPODU0
• ASAPODU1
• ASAPODU2
• ASAPODU2E
• ASAPODU3
• ASAPODU3E2
• ASAPODU4
• ASAPOMS
• ASAPOTS
• ASAPOTU
• ASAPSECU
• ASAPSTM1
• ASAPSTM4
• ASAPSTM16
• ASAPSTM64
• ASAPSTM256
• ASAPSTS1
• ASAPSTS3C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• ASAPSTS12C
• ASAPSTS48C
• ASAPTCM
• ASAPTIMING
• ASAPVC4
• ASAPVC44C
• ASAPVC416C
Note: For each type of ASAP for switching applications, there are five system-defined
ASAP instances, containing the same set of alarms and conditions with predefined
alarm severity assignments; see Table 2-1, “System-defined ASAP instances” (p. 2-6).
Table 2-1 System-defined ASAP instances
Instance Userlabel Description

suffix
0 None All alarms and conditions have their alarm severity set to “Not
Reported”
1 SYSDFLT Factory default severities
2 NotPrimary Not primary conditions with severity disabled
3 FerfAis FERF and AIS conditions disabled
4 ALL All conditions enabled
Based on these system-defined ASAP instances, users with appropriate privileges are able
to create new user-defined ASAP instances (profiles) for each ASAP type.
Alarm category
The “Alarm category” entry in the alarm overview table indicates the functional area to
which the relevant alarm belongs.
The alarms and conditions can be classified according to the following alarm categories:
• Control plane
Conditions related to control plane applications; see “Control plane alarms”
(p. 2-1048).
• Equipment
Hardware- and configuration-related alarms and alarms concerning the NE-internal
communication.
• Management communication
Alarms concerning the management communication between NEs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Quality of Service (QOS)
Alarms related to performance monitoring measurements.
• Security
Alarms related to the NE access security.
• Synchronization
Alarms related to the NE synchronization.
• Transmission
Alarms concerning the transport functionality of an NE.
Note: In principle, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS alarms can be classified into NE alarms
and control plane alarms, for the reasons described in the corresponding sections; see:
• “Network element alarms” (p. 2-37)
• “Control plane alarms” (p. 2-1048)
Effect-on-service
To reflect the service state, an effect-on-service attribute is assigned to each alarm as far
as possible.
Possible values of the effect-on-service attribute are:
• Service-affecting (SA),
• Not service-affecting (NSA).
The effect-on-service attribute indicates if transmission on a path may be affected (SA) or
not (NSA).
Note that the effect-on-service attribute is assessed solely from a local point of view.
Network aspects outside the network element are not taken into consideration.
Default alarm severity

The “Alarm severity (default setting)” entry in the alarm overview table indicates the
factory settings of the corresponding alarm’s severity, making a distinction concerning the
effect on service (SA/NSA).
Alarm severities can be assigned by means of alarm severity assignment profiles
(ASAPs); see “ ASAP type” (p. 2-3). The default alarm severity listed in the alarm
overview table corresponds to the factory default setting as originally specified in the
system-default ASAP (SYSDFLT).
Note: Some alarms and conditions have fixed alarm severity assignments that cannot
be changed. A fixed alarm severity assignment is indicated in the alarm overview
table by means of a table note.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Meaning of the alarm severities
Critical (CR) A critical alarm is used to indicate that a severe, service-affecting

condition has occurred and that immediate corrective action is
imperative, regardless of the time of day or day of the week.
Major (MJ) A major alarm is used to indicate a serious disruption of service or the
malfunctioning or failure of an important NE entity. This alarm
requires the immediate attention and response of a crafts person to
restore or maintain system capability. The urgency is less than in
critical situations because of a lesser immediate or impending effect on
service or system performance.
Minor (MN) A minor alarm is used to indicate a condition that does not have a
serious effect on service or for a condition that is not essential to NE
operation.
Warning (WR) A warning alarm is used to indicate a condition that does not have a
serious effect on service or for a condition that is not essential to NE
operation. A warning alarm is less severe than a minor alarm.
Not alarmed (NA) A not-alarmed condition is one that does not require operator action. It
is reported via an autonomous message. A not-alarmed condition can
be either a standing or a transient condition. Visual and audible
indications are not triggered.
Not reported (NR) A not-reported condition is one that is detected by the system but not
reported via an autonomous message or any visual or audible
indication. However, it is logged by the system and then retrievable.
Notes:
1. Standing Condition (SC): A standing condition is an alarmed, not-alarmed, or not-reported
condition that can be obtained by interrogating the NE. A standing condition is a persistent
state that must be cleared.
2. Transient Condition (TC): A transient condition is a not-alarmed, or not-reported condition
that can be obtained by interrogating the NE. A transient condition is a non-persistent state
that does not require clearing.
Alarm source
The “Alarm source” entry in the alarm overview table specifies the alarm origination
point, i.e. the system component where the alarm has been detected or the affected signal
level in case of transmission alarms.
Local indications
Local indications are indications via the circuit pack faceplate LEDs, especially via the
red fault LED.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note that the local indications via the red fault LED on the circuit pack faceplate is
controlled by defects, not alarms.
Important! The signaling of the overall alarm status by means of the LED panel on
the FLC, the user panel LEDs, or the office alarm interfaces is not taken into
consideration in this Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide because the signaling
of alarms by means of the LED panel on the FLC, the user panel LEDs, or the office
alarm interfaces may vary depending on the actual value of the alarm severity
assigned.
Related information
See the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSSProduct Information and Planning Guide and
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS User Provisioning Guide for further information.
Consequent actions
Consequent actions mean the autonomous insertion of maintenance signals as the
consequence of a detected defect.
Note that the insertion of consequent actions, for example the insertion of a Backward
Defect Indication (BDI), is controlled by defects, not alarms.
Contents
Network element alarms 2-37

Abnormal Insertion 2-63
Active and standby main Equipment Controller databases not synchronized 2-64
Active Loopback 2-65
Add Power Adjustment Failure 2-67
Add power control failure 2-70
AES FIPS Failure 2-71
AIS - TCM 2-72
AIS is Detected at the BITS Port 2-73
AIS Line/MS for OCn/STMn 2-74
AIS Line/MS 2-75
Alarm Indication Signal 2-76
Alarm Indication Signal on HO Path 2-77
Alarm Indication Signal STS Path 2-79
All Channels Missing 2-81
All Outgoing Channels Missing 2-83
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
All selectable timing references fail 2-84

Amplifier disabled 2-85
Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended 2-86
Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain too high 2-87
Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain too low 2-88
Application needs personal assistance 2-89
APR Active - invalid topology 2-90
APR Active - Line 2-92
APR Active - Node 2-93
APR Active – port switch 2-95
APR Limited 2-96
APR Forced 2-98
APR unavailable - monitoring card booting 2-99
APS channel mismatch 2-100
APS mode mismatch 2-102
APS protection switching byte failure 2-104
Authentication Failure 2-105
Auto laser off due to upstream condition 2-106
Auto Negotiation Mismatch 2-107
Automatic In-Service 2-108
Automatic switching to a timing reference on the output timing selection 2-110
process
Automatic switch of working entity to protection 2-111
Automatic switch to a timing reference 2-113
Automatic switch to protection 2-114
Automatic switch to working 2-116
Automatic system Synchronization Switch 2-118
Automatic timing reference switch 2-119
B1 Signal Degrade 2-120
Backward Defect Indication - ODU 2-121
Backward Defect Indication - OTU 2-122
Backward Defect Indication - Path 2-123
Backward Defect Indication - Section 2-124
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Backward Defect Indication - TCM 2-125

Backward Defect Indication on TCM Layer 2-126
Battery off or power filter off/Battery power at backplane off or voltage low 2-127
Card clock frequency measured out of spec 2-128
Card Autonomous Reset 2-130
Card booting 2-131
Card Degrade - Device 2-132
Card degrade - Wavelength Tracker Channel ID Insertion 2-133
Card failure - boot failure 2-135
Card failure - communication 2-136
Card failure - crypto 2-138
Card failure - device 2-139
Card Identification Event 2-141
Card initializing 2-142
Card Inventory Error 2-143
Card Manual Reset 2-144
Card mismatch 2-145
Card missing/Card removal unseat 2-146
Card not allowed 2-147
Card over temperature 2-148
Card provisioning failure 2-149
Card Under Temperature 2-150
Card Unknown 2-151
Card Would Exceed Shelf Amperage Limit 2-152
Channel Absent 2-154
Channel attempted escape from latchup routine failed 2-156
Channel Collision 2-158
Channel Collision Output Direction 2-159
Channel FDI 2-160
Channel optical power out of range 2-162
Channel OSNR is out of valid measurement range 2-164
Channel PDI 2-165
Channel Power Unachievable 2-166
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Channel Power Unstable 2-168

Channel Unexpected 2-170
Channel Unexpected Out 2-172
Client Signal Fail detected on the ODU 2-174
Client Signal Failure (GFP) 2-176
Client Signal Failure - ODU 2-178
Clock freq error > 54.6 ppm (>20 ppm causes OTN errors) 2-180
Compact flash needs to be upgraded 2-182
Configuration mismatch 2-183
Clock Adjustment 2-185
Cold Start 2-186
Control Card redundancy is compromised 2-187
Control Communication Failure for FLC 2-189
Control Communication Failure for MTX 2-190
Control Communication Failure Quadrant 1 2-192
CPU Performance Issue Detected 2-200
Critical Filter Clogging 2-201
Current Key Mismatch 2-203
Current Time Reference is Unstable 2-204
CWR Input LOS 2-205
Database Backup 2-206
Database invalid 2-207
Database Restore 2-209
Database Synchronization Failed 2-210
Data error or timeout 2-211
Data Link Down 2-212
DB Backup Failure 2-213
DB Failure Local - copy creation of processing failure 2-214
DB Failure Transport - file transport failure 2-215
DB Restore Failure 2-216
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Detected high voltage from on-board power supply 2-217

Device Not Reachable 2-218
Drop Power Adjustment Failure 2-219
Drop Power Adjustment Required 2-221
Duplex Impaired 2-222
Duplex Not Aligned 2-223
Duplicate OCH Trail Name 2-225
Duplicate Shelf ID 2-227
Duplicate Wave Key 2-228
DWDM-OCS audit discrepancy 2-230
DWDM-OCS full audit success - no discrepancies 2-231
DWDM-OCS link down 2-232
DWDM-OCS provisioning failure 2-233
DWDM-OCS retrieve failure 2-234
ECC Communication Failure with FLC A 2-235
ECC Communication Failure with FLC B 2-236
EDFA Input LOS 2-237
EDFA Input Power Margin Exceeded 2-238
Egress Backward Defect Indication - ODU 2-239
Egress Client Signal Failure - ODU 2-241
Egress Locked - ODU 2-242
Egress Open Connection Indication - ODU 2-243
Egress Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU 2-244
Egress Server Signal Failure - Client 2-245
Egress Server Signal Failure - ODU 2-249
Egress Signal Degrade - ODU 2-251
Egress Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path 2-252
Egress Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU 2-254
Embedded Operations Channel failure detected 2-256
Environmental Input [1-8] active 2-258
Ethernet Client Signal Failure 2-259
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ethernet Ring Path Changes Its Forwarding State From Blocked to Unblocked 2-260
or Unblocked to Blocked
Ethernet Ring Provisioning Mismatch is Detected 2-261
Excessive BER 2-262
Excessive Bit Error Ratio 2-263
Excessive Invalid Login Attempts 2-266
Exercise on the protection entity - Far End 2-267
Exercise on the working entity 2-268
Exercise on the working entity - Far End 2-269
Extended Temp Range Violation: Non-ETR Card 2-270
Extended Temp Range Violation: Non-ETR Pluggable Module 2-271
Extension Header (GFP) Mismatch 2-272
External and line synchronization out of service 2-274
External LAN Failure 2-275
Failure Of Protocol - Inconsistent 2-276
Failure Of Protocol - No Response 2-277
Failure Of Protocol - Operation Mismatch 2-279
Failure Of Protocol - Provisioning Mismatch 2-280
Failure Of Protocol - Switch Mismatch 2-281
Failure Slave Tracking Synchronization 2-282
FAN32HRQD 2-283
Fan at full speed, device on card over allowed temperature 2-284
Fan speed is too high 2-285
Fan speed is too low 2-286
Fan speed manually set to maximum 2-287
Far End Local Fault 2-288
Far End Loss of Signal 2-289
Far End Loss of Synchronization 2-290
Far End Port Mapping Mismatch 2-292
Far end protection line failure 2-293
Far-End Unavailable Time Period 2-294
Clear Far End Remote Fault 2-296
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fiber connection mismatch 2-297

Filter Blocked 2-298
Filter Missing 2-299
Firmware loaded is not the preferred version 2-300
FIPS Selftest Squelch 2-302
FIPS Software Mismatch 2-303
Firmware Upgrade Failed 2-304
Firmware upgrade pending 2-305
FLC temporarily in servicing state 2-306
Forced switch to a timing reference 2-307
Forced switch to a timing reference for the output timing selection process 2-308
Forced Switch to Protection 2-309
Forced Switch to Working 2-311
Forward Defect Indication 2-312
Forward Defect Indication - Client Failure 2-313
FPGA Download or Programming Failure 2-315
FPGA Initializing 2-316
FPGA Timeout 2-318
Free running synchronization mode 2-319
Freq err > 9.2 ppm ==> downstream wavetracker errors 2-320
From DCM Input LOS 2-322
FTRUNNING state, PM Global File Collection 2-323
Fuse Alarm 2-324
Gain Adjustment Exceeded Max Value 2-326
GFP Loss of Frame Delineation 2-327
GFP User Payload Identifier Mismatch 2-328
GFP User Payload Mismatch 2-329
Grandmaster clock class degrade 2-330
Hardware failure 2-331
Hardware Minor Circuit Pack Failure 2-333
Hardware not supported for current configuration 2-334
Hardware suspicious 2-335
High BER 2-337
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
High Filter Clogging 2-338

Holdover synchronization mode 2-340
HOPath Unequipped 2-341
IGMP Source Limit Exceeded 2-342
Implicit TCA 24h clearing, PM TCA 2-343
Improper Removal 2-344
Incoming Payload LOS 2-346
Incoming SUPVY LOF 2-347
Incoming SUPVY LOS 2-348
Inhibit Switch for redundant equipment 2-350
Initialization 2-351
INPREP, PM Global File Collection 2-352
Input LOS 2-353
Internal Clock signal of MTX missing 2-354
Internal Error to MTX A 2-355
Internal Error to MTX B 2-356
Internal LAN Failed 2-357
Internal LAN Redundancy Degraded 2-358
Internal Synch Channel of MTX A corrupted 2-359
Internal Synch Channel of MTX B corrupted 2-361
Inter NE communication timeout blocking power adjustment 2-363
Inter-shelf loss of communication 2-365
Intra-Nodal Topology Failure-Operator Action Required 2-366
Invalid or no egress port defined 2-367
Invalid Threshold 2-368
Invalid Topology 2-369
IPCP ECC Connection Failure 2-370
JB Recentered 2-371
Link OAM Loss Of Protocol 2-372
LAG port add failure 2-373
LAG Subgroup Selected 2-374
Lan Cable Asymmetric connected 2-375
Lan Left Ring Failure 2-377
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Lan Right Ring Failure 2-379

Laser Back-Facet Optical Power Cross Threshold 2-381
Laser Cooling Current Cross Threshold 2-382
Laser end of life 2-383
Latch Open 2-384
LCP ECC Connection Fail 2-385
LD Input LOS 2-386
LD SIG Input LOS 2-387
Line Card Configuration Failed 2-388
Line (Facility) loopback active 2-389
Link Aggregation Degrade 2-390
Link Aggregation Group Loss of Signal 2-391
Link Down 2-392
Link Up 2-393
LAN Local Fault Indicator 2-394
Local Packet Lost 2-395
Locked 2-396
Locked - ODU 2-398
Locked - TCM Layer 2-399
Locked - TCM 2-400
Lock out of a timing reference from selection 2-401
Lockout of a timing reference for the output timing selection process 2-402
Lockout of Protection 2-403
Lockout of Protection - Far End 2-406
Lockout of Timing Reference 2-407
Lockout of Working 2-408
Log File Transfer Failure Local 2-409
Log File Transfer Failure Transport 2-410
Log File Transfer in Progress 2-411
Logical removal of a timing reference 2-412
Loss of 1588 Synchronization 2-413
Loss of 1PPS Signal 2-414
Loss of Lane Alignment 2-415
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Alignment Marker Lock 2-416

Loss of Announce Messages on the Slave Port 2-417
Loss of continuity 2-418
Loss of Continuity 2-419
Loss of Delay_Resp Messages on the Slave Port 2-420
Loss of Frame 2-421
Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe 2-425
Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe (LOFLOM - ODU) 2-427
Loss of Frame at the BITS Port 2-428
Loss of Frame Egress 2-429
Loss Of Frames 2-430
Loss of GFP alignment 2-431
Loss of lane alignment 2-432
Loss of Link, GBE10 2-433
Loss of Multiframe 2-435
Loss of Multiframe - OTU 2-436
Loss of Optical Signal, GBE 2-437
Loss of Optical Signal, GBE10 2-438
Loss of OPU Multiframe Identifier 2-440
Loss of Pointer HO Path 2-441
Loss of Pointer STS Path 2-442
Loss of Signal 2-443
Loss of Signal at the BITS Input Port 2-448
Loss of Signal Payload 2-449
Loss of Subsystem Control of Shelf 2-450
Loss of Synchronisation (LSS) 2-452
Loss of Synchronization (LANLSS) 2-453
Loss of Sync Messages on the Slave Port 2-454
Loss of Tandem Connection on TCM Layer 2-455
Loss of ToD Signal 2-456
Low input voltage floor defect 2-457
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Low Voltage Cut-Off 2-458

Manual (Management) Removal 2-459
Manual switch from the Alternate path to the preferred path 2-463
Manual switch from the protection entity to the working entity 2-464
Manual switch from the protection entity to the working entity - Far End 2-466
Manual switch from the protection path to the working path 2-467
Manual switch of working entity to protection 2-468
Manual switch of working entity to protection - Far End 2-470
Manual switch to a timing reference 2-471
Manual switch to a timing reference for the output timing selection process 2-472
Manual switch to Internal Timing 2-473
Manual Switch to Protection 2-474
Manual Switch to Working 2-475
Manually Caused Abnormal Condition - Card In Maintenance 2-476
MEP AIS 2-477
MEP AIS State Change 2-478
MEP CFM Fault 2-479
MEP Cross Connect CCM 2-480
MEP DM Test Complete 2-481
MEP Error CCM 2-482
MEP LBM Test Complete 2-483
MEP LTM Test Complete 2-484
MEP Mac Status 2-485
MEP RDI CCM 2-486
MEP Remote CCM 2-487
MEP SLM Test Complete 2-488
Mismerge 2-489
Mismerge 2-490
Mixed MTX Operation 2-491
Mixed types of power filters used 2-493
Modulator output power out of range 2-494
Multiplex Structure Identification Mismatch 2-495
Multiplex Structure Indication Mismatch 2-497
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NE SSH Key Generation 2-498

NE SSL Certificate Installation 2-499
NE SSL CSR Generation 2-500
NE SSL Key Generation 2-501
Network Time Protocol is enabled - no server is reachable 2-502
Network Time Protocol Loss of Redundancy 2-504
NE unavailable 2-505
Near-End Unavailable Time Period 2-506
Next Key Mismatch 2-508
No Available Time References 2-509
No available timing reference for the output timing selection process 2-510
No Device Found 2-511
No TDM Payload 2-512
No committed software load (Autoinstall disabled) 2-513
NTP Out of Sync 2-514
OA pump laser bias current high 2-515
OA pump laser temperature high 2-516
OCS card or port deleted 2-517
ODU AIS 2-518
OMD Input LOS 2-519
OMS Server Signal Failure 2-520
Open Connection Indication 2-521
Open Connection Indication - ODU 2-523
Open Connection Indication - TCM 2-524
Open Connection Indication on TCM Layer 2-525
Optical Intrusion Baseline Needed 2-526
Optical Intrusion - Detected 2-527
Optical Intrusion - Monitoring Suspended 2-528
Optical power received out of range 2-529
Optical supervision channel excessive BER 2-531
Optics over temperature 2-532
OSPF Adjacency Failure 2-533
OSPF Adjacency Not Full 2-534
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OT Minor Circuit Pack Failure 2-535

OTU AIS 2-536
Out of operational range - loss too high alarm 2-537
Out of operational range - loss too low alarm 2-538
Outgoing Channel Absent 2-539
Outgoing Channel Optical Power Out of Range 2-541
Outgoing Client Signal Fail detected on the GFP 2-542
Outgoing Client Signal Fail Detected on the ODU 2-543
Output LOS 2-544
Outgoing Loss of Signal 2-545
Outgoing Loss of Tones 2-546
Outgoing Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU 2-548
Outgoing SUPVY LOS 2-549
Out of operational range - input power too high 2-550
Out of operational range - input power too low 2-551
Packet card initializing 2-552
Parameters for amplifier tilt adjustment unconfigured 2-553
Payload Label Mismatch - Path 2-554
PCS Generator active 2-556
Pluggable Module Discovered 2-557
Pluggable Module Inserted 2-558
Pluggable Module mismatch 2-559
Pluggable Module missing 2-560
Pluggable Module Removed 2-561
Pluggable Module SEEP failure 2-562
Pluggable Module Transmit Failure 2-564
Pluggable Module Unknown 2-565
PM Baseline 2-566
Port degrade - wavelength tracker communication failure 2-567
Port degrade - wavelength tracker detection failure 2-568
Port degrade - wavelength tracker encode degrade 2-569
Port failure - device 2-571
Port transmit failure 2-572
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Post-FEC Signal Degrade 2-573

Power Adjust Loss Margin Exceeded 2-574
Power Adjustment Failure 2-575
Power Adjustment Required 2-577
Power Failure 2-579
Power filter mismatch 2-580
Power Management Suspended 2-581
Power management topology invalid 2-584
Power Unbalance 2-585
Pre-FEC Signal Degrade 2-586
Procedure Error 2-588
Provisioned firmware will be obsolete after sw upgrade 2-589
PTP Clock in the Free-Running Status 2-590
PTP Port Faulty 2-591
RA2P Gain Failure Detected 2-592
Raman Suppress - Line 2-593
READY, PM Global File Collection 2-594
Received timing signal failure 2-595
Receiver Optimization in Progress 2-596
Reference Clock - forced switch active 2-597
Remote Client Local Fault 2-598
Remote Client Loss of Synchronization 2-599
Remote Defect Indication 2-600
Remote Failure Indication on HO path 2-602
Remote Failure Indication on line 2-604
Remote Failure Indication on OC-n 2-605
Remote Failure Indication on STS Path 2-606
Remote Fault 2-607
Remote Inventory Mismatch 2-608
Remote Packet Lost 2-610
RFI Line/MS 2-611
RMD Equipment Fail 2-612
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RMD Power Fail 2-613

SAP Mac Limit 2-614
Security Intrusion Alarm 2-615
Server Signal Failure - ODU 2-616
Server Signal Failure - Optical Channel 2-618
Server signal failure - OSC 2-619
Server Signal Failure - Path 2-620
Server Signal Failure - Section 2-621
Server Signal Failure on ETH - Egress 2-622
Server Signal Failure on HO Path 2-624
Server Signal Failure on Section 2-626
Server Signal Failure on Section - Egress 2-627
Server Signal Failure on Line 2-628
Server Signal Failure on STS Path 2-629
Server Signal Failure on TCM Layer 2-631
Service FDB Full 2-632
Service MFIB Full 2-633
SFP Equipment Fail 2-634
SFP Loss Of Signal 2-635
Shelf data inconsistent 2-636
Shelf LAN (ES1 & ES2) cables are incorrectly connected 2-637
Shelf mismatch 2-639
Shelf Transmission Fail 2-640
Shelf unavailable 2-641
Signal Degrade 2-642
Signal Degrade - ODU 2-643
Signal Degrade - OTU 2-644
Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio 2-645
Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path 2-648
Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Section 2-650
Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - TCM Layer 2-652
Signal Degrade - TCM 2-654
Slipping Timing Signal 2-655
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software Download 2-656

Software Mismatch 2-657
Software Upgrade Failed 2-658
Software Version Mismatch 2-659
SSL CA Root Certificate Installation 2-660
Standby Database Corruption 2-661
STS Path Idle 2-662
Subtended shelf cannot be assigned a shelf ID 2-663
SUPVY Amplifier Input LOS 2-665
SUPVY Signal Degrade 2-666
Switching Matrix Module Failure 2-667
Synchronization Equipment (CRU) failure 2-668
Synchronization Equipment Failure 2-669
System clock forced to internal clock 2-670
System clock in free running mode 2-671
System clock in holdover mode 2-672
System Initialization New Failure 2-673
TCA 1 DAY – Average Bidirectional Frame Delay 2-674
TCA 1 DAY – Average Far-End Frame Delay Variation 2-675
TCA 1 DAY – Average Near-End Frame Delay Variation 2-676
TCA 1 DAY – Average Far-End Frame Loss Ratio 2-677
TCA 1 DAY – Average Near-End Frame Loss Ratio 2-678
TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, Multiplex Section 2-679
TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, ODU Layer 2-680
TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, OTU Layer 2-682
TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, Regenerator Section 2-684
TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds-Regenerator Section Threshold (Transmit 2-686
Direction)
TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds Threshold (Transmit Direction) 2-687
TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, TCM Layer 2-688
TCA 1 DAY Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds 2-690
TCA 1 DAY Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds, TCM Facility 2-691
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds Threshold 2-692

TCA 1 DAY Code Violation Threshold 2-693
TCA 1 DAY Code Violation Threshold (Receive Direction) 2-694
TCA 1 DAY Code Violation-PCS layer (Receive Direction) 2-696
TCA 1 DAY Code Violation-PCS layer (Transmit Direction) 2-697
TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds-PCS layer Threshold (Receive Direction) 2-698
TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds-PCS layer Threshold (Transmit Direction) 2-699
TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds, Regenerator Section 2-700
TCA 1 DAY Error Seconds, ODU Layer 2-701
TCA 1 DAY Error Seconds, OTU Layer 2-703
TCA 1 DAY Error Seconds, TCM Layer 2-705
TCA - Failed to Decrypt 2-707
TCA 1 DAY Ethernet Packet Error Ratio 2-708
TCA 1 DAY Ethernet Packet Error Ratio Threshold (Transmit Direction) 2-709
TCA 1 DAY Far End Background Block Error, Multiplex Section 2-710
TCA 1 DAY Far End Background Block Error - ODUk 2-711
TCA 1 DAY Far End Background Block Error - OTUk 2-712
TCA 1 DAY Far End Background Block Error - TCM 2-713
TCA 1 DAY Far End Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section 2-714
TCA 1 DAY Far End Errored Seconds, ODU 2-715
TCA 1 DAY Far End Errored Seconds, OTU 2-716
TCA 1 DAY Far End Errored Seconds, TCM 2-717
TCA 1 DAY Far End Severely Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section 2-718
TCA 1 DAY Far End Severely Errored Seconds, ODU 2-719
TCA 1 DAY Far End Severely Errored Seconds, OTU 2-720
TCA 1 DAY Far End Severely Errored Seconds, TCM 2-721
TCA 1 DAY Far End Unavailable Seconds, Multiplex Section 2-722
TCA 1 DAY Far End Unavailable Seconds, ODU 2-723
TCA 1 DAY Far End Unavailable Seconds, OTU 2-724
TCA 1 DAY Far End Unavailable Seconds, TCM 2-725
TCA 1 DAY FEC Errors Corrected, OTU Layer 2-726
TCA 1 DAY Forward Error Correction, Uncorrectable Block Counts 2-728
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds 2-729

TCA 15 MIN Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds - TCM 2-730
TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Bidirectional Frame Delay 2-731
TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Far-End Frame Delay Variation 2-732
TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Far-End Frame Loss Ratio 2-733
TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Near-End Frame Delay Variation 2-734
TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Near-End Frame Loss Ratio 2-735
TCA 1 DAY - Optical Power Received - High 2-736
TCA 1 DAY - Optical Power Received - Low 2-737
TCA 1 DAY - Optical Power Transmitted - High 2-738
TCA 1 DAY - Optical Power Transmitted - Low 2-739
TCA 1 DAY Out of Frame Seconds, Regenerator Section 2-740
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Bidirectional Frame 2-741
Delay
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement Average Far-end Frame Delay 2-742
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Far-end Frame Delay 2-743
Variation
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Near-end Frame Delay 2-744
Variation
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Bidirectional Frame 2-746
Delay
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement Maximum Far-end Frame Delay 2-747
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Far-end Frame Delay 2-748
Variation
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Near-end Frame 2-750
Delay Variation
TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Average Far-end Frame Loss Ratio 2-751
TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Average Near-end Frame Loss Ratio 2-752
TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Far-end High Loss Interval 2-753
TCA 1 DAY MIN PMON Loss Measurement Maximum Far-end Frame Loss 2-754
Ratio
TCA 1 DAY MIN PMON Loss Measurement Maximum Near-end Frame Loss 2-755
Ratio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Near-end High Loss Interval 2-756
TCA 1 DAY PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average Far-end Frame Loss 2-757
Ratio
TCA 1 DAY PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average Near-end Frame 2-758
Loss Ratio
TCA 1 DAY PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Near-end High Loss Interval 2-759
TCA 1 DAY Post-FEC BER Threshold 2-760
TCA 1 DAY Pre-FEC BER Threshold 2-761
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section 2-762
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, ODU Layer 2-763
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, OTU Layer 2-765
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds - PCS layer (Receive Direction) 2-767
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds - PCS layer (Transmit Direction) 2-768
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Frame Seconds - PCS layer (Receive Direction) 2-769
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, Regenerator Section 2-770
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, TCM Layer 2-771
TCA 1 DAY total number of errored packets at the receive port 2-773
TCA 1 DAY total number of errored packets at the transmit port 2-774
TCA 1 DAY total number of High Capacity octets 2-775
TCA 1-DAY total number of High Capacity packets 2-776
TCA 1 DAY total number of octets received 2-777
TCA 1 DAY total number of octets transmitted 2-778
TCA 1 DAY total number of packets discarded at the receive port 2-779
TCA 1 DAY total number of packets discarded at the transmit port 2-780
TCA 1 DAY total number of packets received 2-781
TCA 1 DAY total number of packets transmitted 2-782
TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, Regenerator Section 2-783
TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, Multiplex Section 2-784
TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, ODU Layer 2-785
TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, OTU Layer 2-787
TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, TCM Layer 2-790
TCA 15 MIN – Average Bidirectional Frame Delay 2-792
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN – Average Far-End Frame Delay Variation 2-793

TCA 15 MIN – Average Near-End Frame Delay Variation 2-794
TCA 15 MIN – Average Far-End Frame Loss Ratio 2-795
TCA 15 MIN – Average Near-End Frame Loss Ratio 2-796
TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, Multiplex Section 2-797
TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, ODU Layer 2-798
TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, OTU Layer 2-800
TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, Regenerator Section 2-802
TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds-Regenerator Section Threshold (Transmit 2-805
Direction)
TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds Threshold (Transmit Direction) 2-806
TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, TCM Layer 2-807
TCA 15 MIN Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds 2-809
TCA 15 MIN Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds, TCM Facility 2-810
TCA 15 MIN Code Violation 2-811
TCA 15 MIN Code Violation Threshold (Receive Direction) 2-812
TCA 15 MIN Code Violation-PCS layer (Receive Direction) 2-814
TCA 15 MIN Code Violation-PCS layer (Transmit Direction) 2-815
TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds Threshold 2-816
TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds-PCS layer Threshold (Receive Direction) 2-817
TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds-PCS layer Threshold (Transmit Direction) 2-818
TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds, Regenerator Section 2-819
TCA 15 MIN Error Seconds, ODU Layer 2-820
TCA 15 MIN Error Seconds, OTU Layer 2-822
TCA 15 MIN Error Seconds, TCM Layer 2-824
TCA 15 MIN Ethernet Packet Error Ratio 2-826
TCA 15 MIN Ethernet Packet Error Ratio Threshold (Transmit Direction) 2-827
TCA 15 MIN Far End Background Block Error, Multiplex Section 2-828
TCA 15 MIN Far End Background Block Error - ODUk 2-829
TCA 15 MIN Far End Background Block Error - TCM 2-830
TCA 15 MIN Far End Background Block Error - OTUk 2-831
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Far End Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section 2-832

TCA 15 MIN Far End Errored Seconds, ODU 2-833
TCA 15 MIN Far End Errored Seconds, OTU 2-834
TCA 15 MIN Far End Errored Seconds, TCM 2-835
TCA 15 MIN Far End Severely Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section 2-836
TCA 15 MIN Far End Severely Errored Seconds, ODU 2-837
TCA 15 MIN Far End Severely Errored Seconds, OTU 2-838
TCA 15 MIN Far End Severely Errored Seconds, TCM 2-839
TCA 15 MIN Far End Unavailable Seconds, Multiplex Section 2-840
TCA 15 MIN Far End Unavailable Seconds, ODU 2-841
TCA 15 MIN Far End Unavailable Seconds, OTU 2-842
TCA 15 MIN Far End Unavailable Seconds, TCM 2-843
TCA 15 MIN FEC Errors Corrected, OTU Layer 2-844
TCA 15 MIN Forward Error Correction, Uncorrectable Block Counts 2-846
TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Bidirectional Frame Delay 2-849
TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Far-End Frame Delay Variation 2-850
TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Far-End Frame Loss Ratio 2-851
TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Near-End Frame Delay Variation 2-852
TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Near-End Frame Loss Ratio 2-853
TCA 15 MIN - Optical Power Received - High 2-854
TCA 15 MIN - Optical Power Received - Low 2-855
TCA 15 MIN - Optical Power Transmitted - High 2-856
TCA 15 MIN - Optical Power Transmitted - Low 2-857
TCA 15 MIN Out of Frame Seconds, Regenerator Section 2-858
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Bidirectional Frame 2-859
Delay
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Far-end Frame Delay 2-861
Variation
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Near-end Frame 2-862
Delay
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Delay Variation
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Bidirectional Frame 2-864
Delay
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement Maximum Far-end Frame Delay 2-865
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Far-end Frame 2-866
Delay Variation
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement Maximum Near-end Frame Delay 2-867
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Near-end Frame 2-868
Delay Variation
TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Average Far-end Frame Loss Ratio 2-869
TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Average Near-end Frame Loss Ratio 2-870
TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Far-end High Loss Interval 2-871
TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Maximum Far-end Frame Loss Ratio 2-872
TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Maximum Near-end Frame Loss Ratio 2-873
TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Near-end High Loss Interval 2-874
TCA 15 MIN PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average Far-end Frame Loss 2-875
Ratio
TCA 15 MIN PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average Near-end Frame 2-876
Loss Ratio
TCA 15 MIN PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Near-end High Loss Interval 2-877
TCA 15 MIN Post-FEC BER Threshold 2-878

TCA 15 MIN Pre-FEC BER Threshold 2-879
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section 2-880
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, ODU Layer 2-881
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, OTU Layer 2-883
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds - PCS layer (Receive Direction) 2-885
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds - PCS layer (Transmit Direction) 2-886
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Frame Seconds - PCS layer (Receive Direction) 2-887
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Frame Seconds - PCS layer (Transmit Direction) 2-888
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, Regenerator Section 2-889
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, TCM Layer 2-891
TCA 15 MIN total number of errored packets at the receive port 2-893
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN total number of errored packets at the transmit port 2-894
TCA 15 MIN total number of High Capacity octets 2-895
TCA 15-MIN total number of High Capacity packets 2-896
TCA 15 MIN total number of octets received 2-897
TCA 15 MIN total number of octets transmitted 2-898
TCA 15 MIN total number of packets discarded at the receive port 2-899
TCA 15 MIN total number of packets discarded at the transmit port 2-900
TCA 15 MIN total number of packets received 2-901
TCA 15 MIN total number of packets transmitted 2-902
TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, Regenerator Section 2-903
TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, Multiplex Section 2-904
TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, ODU Layer 2-905
TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, OTU Layer 2-907
TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, TCM Layer 2-910
TCA - Code Violations, Section 2-912
TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average Near-end 2-913
Frame Loss Ratio
TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average Far-end 2-914
Frame Loss Ratio
TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Far-end High Loss 2-915
Interval
TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Maximum Far-end 2-916
Frame Loss Ratio
TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Near-end Frame 2-917
Loss Ratio
TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Near-end High Loss 2-918
Interval
TCA - Errored Seconds, Section 2-919
TCA - Optical Power Received - High 2-920
TCA - Optical Power Received - Low 2-921
TCA - Optical Power Transmitted - High 2-922
TCA - Optical Power Transmitted - Low 2-923
TCA - Severely Errored Frame Seconds, Section 2-924
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA - Severely Errored Seconds, Section 2-925

TCA - Unavailable Seconds, Section 2-926
TCA Background Block Errors, ODU Layer 2-927
TCA Background Block Errors, OTU Layer 2-929
TCA Background Block Errors, TCM Layer 2-931
TCA Error Seconds, ODU Layer 2-933
TCA Error Seconds, OTU Layer 2-935
TCA Error Seconds, TCM Layer 2-936
TCA FEC Errors Corrected, OTU Layer 2-938
TCA Severely Errored Seconds, ODU Layer 2-940
TCA Severely Errored Seconds, OTU Layer 2-942
TCA Severely Errored Seconds, TCM Layer 2-944
TCA Unavailable Seconds, ODU Layer 2-946
TCA Unavailable Seconds, OTU Layer 2-948
TCA Unavailable Seconds, TCM Layer 2-949
TDM (SONET/SDH) Loss of Signal 2-951
Temperature is critical 2-952
Temperature is high 2-953
Terminal loop active 2-955
Thermal Shutdown performed 2-956
Time Slot Assignment Mismatch 2-958
Timing quality for output timing is insufficient 2-959
Timing Reference Failure 2-960
Timing reference is unassigned 2-962
Timing reference out-of-frequency 2-963
Timing Reference Unequipped 2-964
Timing selection was switched by a manual command to a timing reference 2-965
Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU 2-966
Trace Identifier Mismatch - OTU 2-967
Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on HO Path 2-968
Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on OTN Path 2-969
Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section 2-971
Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on TCM Layer 2-973
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type Mismatch 2-974

Unavailable Time, ODUk 2-975
Unavailable Time, OTUk 2-977
Unavailable Time, Regenerator Section 2-979
Unavailable Time, TCM 2-981
Underlying Resource is Unavailable - Path 2-983
Underlying Resource is Unavailable - Section 2-985
Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Optical Section 2-987
Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Section 2-989
Underlying resource unavailable - OTS 2-991
Underlying resource unavailable - card 2-992
Underlying resource unavailable - OMS-RX 2-993
Underlying resource unavailable - OMS-TX 2-994
Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-LOS 2-995
Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-RX 2-996
Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-TX 2-997
Underlying Resource Unavailable - Port 2-998
Unexpected Level 2-999
Unexpected MEG Level 2-1000
Unexpected MEP 2-1001
Unexpected MEP or unexpected periodicity 2-1003
Unexpected Periodicity 2-1005
Unexpected Priority 2-1007
Unit Not Inserted 2-1008
Unknown ECID 2-1009
Unknown OCH Trail for xconnect 2-1010
Unsupported hardware version 2-1011
Upgrade MTX size 2-1012
Upstream Channel Absent 2-1014
Upstream Channel collision 2-1015
User inactive 2-1016
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Payload type (GFP) Mismatch 2-1017

Detected low voltage from on-board power supply 2-1018
VCG Loss of alignment 2-1019
VCG Server Signal Failure 2-1020
VTS Forward Defect Indication 2-1021
VTS Open Connection Indication 2-1022
Wait to Restore 2-1023
Wait to Restore - Far End 2-1025
Warm Start 2-1026
Wave Key Not Available 2-1027
Wave Key Overlap 2-1029
Wave Key pair re-used for channel on node 2-1030
Working entity forced to switch back to working 2-1032
Working entity forced to switch back to working - Far End 2-1034
Working entity forced to switch to protection 2-1035
Working entity forced to switch to protection - Far End 2-1037
Working entity switched back to working 2-1038
Working entity switched back to working - Far End 2-1040
Working entity switched to protection - Far End 2-1041
Wrong Dest Mac 2-1042
Wrong Device Present 2-1043
Wrong Unit Inserted 2-1044
WTOCM Input LOS 2-1045
Y-cable Switchover Timer Expired 2-1046
Control plane alarms 2-1048
Active Failed - APE failed 2-1050
Active Failed - Cross connection problem 2-1051
Active Failed - Endpoint failure 2-1052
Active Failed - Preemption 2-1053
Active Failed - Transmission problem 2-1054
Active failed - Unprotected 2-1055
APE in progress 2-1056
Backup unavailable 2-1057
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Channel assignment violation 2-1058

Color violation 2-1059
DPR degraded 2-1060
DPR down 2-1061
DPR Network Version Mismatch 2-1062
GMRE degraded 2-1063
GMRE in active traffic migration state 2-1064
GMRE in automatic restoration disabled mode 2-1065
InBandComm degraded 2-1066
InBandComm down 2-1067
Latency violation 2-1068
Link diversity violation 2-1069
Logical node not reachable 2-1070
NE not reachable 2-1071
Nominal Unavailable - Communication problem 2-1072
Nominal unavailable - Configuration problem 2-1073
Nominal Unavailable - Indeterminate problem 2-1074
Nominal unavailable - Reversion preempt 2-1075
Nominal Unavailable - TP Blocked 2-1076
Nominal Unavailable - Transmission problem 2-1077
Optical feasibility violation 2-1078
Optical parameter file error 2-1079
OutbandComm degraded 2-1080
OutBandComm down 2-1081
Ready to revert 2-1082
Rerouted 2-1083
Reroute not possible 2-1084
RSVP degraded 2-1085
RSVP down 2-1086
SNC in automatic restoration disabled mode 2-1087
SNCP degraded 2-1088
SRG violation 2-1089
TCA Channel Margin 2-1091
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Test Mode enabled 2-1092
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
The present section contains information about the network element alarms (NE alarms)
that can be reported by Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS network elements.
NE alarms
NE alarms are all alarms and conditions that pertain to alarm categories other than
“control plane”; see “Alarm category” (p. 2-6). In contrast to control plane alarms, NE
alarms can be reported by all Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS management systems.
Contents
Abnormal Insertion 2-63

Active and standby main Equipment Controller databases not synchronized 2-64
Active Loopback 2-65
Add Power Adjustment Failure 2-67
Add power control failure 2-70
AES FIPS Failure 2-71
AIS - TCM 2-72
AIS is Detected at the BITS Port 2-73
AIS Line/MS for OCn/STMn 2-74
AIS Line/MS 2-75
Alarm Indication Signal 2-76
Alarm Indication Signal on HO Path 2-77
Alarm Indication Signal STS Path 2-79
All Channels Missing 2-81
All Outgoing Channels Missing 2-83
All selectable timing references fail 2-84
Amplifier disabled 2-85
Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended 2-86
Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain too high 2-87
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain too low 2-88

Application needs personal assistance 2-89
APR Active - invalid topology 2-90
APR Active - Line 2-92
APR Active - Node 2-93
APR Active – port switch 2-95
APR Limited 2-96
APR Forced 2-98
APR unavailable - monitoring card booting 2-99
APS channel mismatch 2-100
APS mode mismatch 2-102
APS protection switching byte failure 2-104
Authentication Failure 2-105
Auto laser off due to upstream condition 2-106
Auto Negotiation Mismatch 2-107
Automatic In-Service 2-108
Automatic switching to a timing reference on the output timing selection 2-110
process
Automatic switch of working entity to protection 2-111
Automatic switch to a timing reference 2-113
Automatic switch to protection 2-114
Automatic switch to working 2-116
Automatic system Synchronization Switch 2-118
Automatic timing reference switch 2-119
B1 Signal Degrade 2-120
Backward Defect Indication - ODU 2-121
Backward Defect Indication - OTU 2-122
Backward Defect Indication - Path 2-123
Backward Defect Indication - Section 2-124
Backward Defect Indication - TCM 2-125
Backward Defect Indication on TCM Layer 2-126
Battery off or power filter off/Battery power at backplane off or voltage low 2-127
Card clock frequency measured out of spec 2-128
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card Autonomous Reset 2-130

Card booting 2-131
Card Degrade - Device 2-132
Card degrade - Wavelength Tracker Channel ID Insertion 2-133
Card failure - boot failure 2-135
Card failure - communication 2-136
Card failure - crypto 2-138
Card failure - device 2-139
Card Identification Event 2-141
Card initializing 2-142
Card Inventory Error 2-143
Card Manual Reset 2-144
Card mismatch 2-145
Card missing/Card removal unseat 2-146
Card not allowed 2-147
Card over temperature 2-148
Card provisioning failure 2-149
Card Under Temperature 2-150
Card Unknown 2-151
Card Would Exceed Shelf Amperage Limit 2-152
Channel Absent 2-154
Channel attempted escape from latchup routine failed 2-156
Channel Collision 2-158
Channel Collision Output Direction 2-159
Channel FDI 2-160
Channel optical power out of range 2-162
Channel OSNR is out of valid measurement range 2-164
Channel PDI 2-165
Channel Power Unachievable 2-166
Channel Power Unstable 2-168
Channel Unexpected 2-170
Channel Unexpected Out 2-172
Client Signal Fail detected on the ODU 2-174
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Client Signal Failure (GFP) 2-176

Client Signal Failure - ODU 2-178
Clock freq error > 54.6 ppm (>20 ppm causes OTN errors) 2-180
Compact flash needs to be upgraded 2-182
Configuration mismatch 2-183
Clock Adjustment 2-185
Cold Start 2-186
Control Card redundancy is compromised 2-187
Control Communication Failure for FLC 2-189
Control Communication Failure for MTX 2-190
CPU Performance Issue Detected 2-200
Critical Filter Clogging 2-201
Current Key Mismatch 2-203
Current Time Reference is Unstable 2-204
CWR Input LOS 2-205
Database Backup 2-206
Database invalid 2-207
Database Restore 2-209
Database Synchronization Failed 2-210
Data error or timeout 2-211
Data Link Down 2-212
DB Backup Failure 2-213
DB Failure Local - copy creation of processing failure 2-214
DB Failure Transport - file transport failure 2-215
DB Restore Failure 2-216
Detected high voltage from on-board power supply 2-217
Device Not Reachable 2-218
Drop Power Adjustment Failure 2-219
Drop Power Adjustment Required 2-221
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Duplex Impaired 2-222

Duplex Not Aligned 2-223
Duplicate OCH Trail Name 2-225
Duplicate Shelf ID 2-227
Duplicate Wave Key 2-228
DWDM-OCS audit discrepancy 2-230
DWDM-OCS full audit success - no discrepancies 2-231
DWDM-OCS link down 2-232
DWDM-OCS provisioning failure 2-233
DWDM-OCS retrieve failure 2-234
ECC Communication Failure with FLC A 2-235
ECC Communication Failure with FLC B 2-236
EDFA Input LOS 2-237
EDFA Input Power Margin Exceeded 2-238
Egress Backward Defect Indication - ODU 2-239
Egress Client Signal Failure - ODU 2-241
Egress Locked - ODU 2-242
Egress Open Connection Indication - ODU 2-243
Egress Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU 2-244
Egress Server Signal Failure - ODU 2-249
Egress Signal Degrade - ODU 2-251
Egress Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path 2-252
Egress Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU 2-254
Embedded Operations Channel failure detected 2-256
Environmental Input [1-8] active 2-258
Ethernet Client Signal Failure 2-259
Ethernet Ring Path Changes Its Forwarding State From Blocked to Unblocked 2-260
or Unblocked to Blocked
Ethernet Ring Provisioning Mismatch is Detected 2-261
Excessive BER 2-262
Excessive Bit Error Ratio 2-263
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Excessive Invalid Login Attempts 2-266

Exercise on the protection entity - Far End 2-267
Exercise on the working entity 2-268
Exercise on the working entity - Far End 2-269
Extended Temp Range Violation: Non-ETR Card 2-270
Extended Temp Range Violation: Non-ETR Pluggable Module 2-271
Extension Header (GFP) Mismatch 2-272
External and line synchronization out of service 2-274
External LAN Failure 2-275
Failure Of Protocol - Inconsistent 2-276
Failure Of Protocol - No Response 2-277
Failure Of Protocol - Operation Mismatch 2-279
Failure Of Protocol - Provisioning Mismatch 2-280
Failure Of Protocol - Switch Mismatch 2-281
Failure Slave Tracking Synchronization 2-282
FAN32HRQD 2-283
Fan at full speed, device on card over allowed temperature 2-284
Fan speed is too high 2-285
Fan speed is too low 2-286
Fan speed manually set to maximum 2-287
Far End Local Fault 2-288
Far End Loss of Signal 2-289
Far End Port Mapping Mismatch 2-292
Far end protection line failure 2-293
Far-End Unavailable Time Period 2-294
Clear Far End Remote Fault 2-296
Fiber connection mismatch 2-297
Filter Blocked 2-298
Filter Missing 2-299
Firmware loaded is not the preferred version 2-300
FIPS Selftest Squelch 2-302
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FIPS Software Mismatch 2-303

Firmware Upgrade Failed 2-304
Firmware upgrade pending 2-305
FLC temporarily in servicing state 2-306
Forced switch to a timing reference 2-307
Forced switch to a timing reference for the output timing selection process 2-308
Forced Switch to Protection 2-309
Forced Switch to Working 2-311
Forward Defect Indication 2-312
Forward Defect Indication - Client Failure 2-313
FPGA Download or Programming Failure 2-315
FPGA Initializing 2-316
FPGA Timeout 2-318
Free running synchronization mode 2-319
Freq err > 9.2 ppm ==> downstream wavetracker errors 2-320
From DCM Input LOS 2-322
FTRUNNING state, PM Global File Collection 2-323
Fuse Alarm 2-324
Gain Adjustment Exceeded Max Value 2-326
GFP Loss of Frame Delineation 2-327
GFP User Payload Identifier Mismatch 2-328
GFP User Payload Mismatch 2-329
Grandmaster clock class degrade 2-330
Hardware failure 2-331
Hardware Minor Circuit Pack Failure 2-333
Hardware not supported for current configuration 2-334
Hardware suspicious 2-335
High BER 2-337
High Filter Clogging 2-338
Holdover synchronization mode 2-340
HOPath Unequipped 2-341
IGMP Source Limit Exceeded 2-342
Implicit TCA 24h clearing, PM TCA 2-343
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Improper Removal 2-344

Incoming Payload LOS 2-346
Incoming SUPVY LOF 2-347
Incoming SUPVY LOS 2-348
Inhibit Switch for redundant equipment 2-350
Initialization 2-351
INPREP, PM Global File Collection 2-352
Input LOS 2-353
Internal Clock signal of MTX missing 2-354
Internal Error to MTX A 2-355
Internal Error to MTX B 2-356
Internal LAN Failed 2-357
Internal LAN Redundancy Degraded 2-358
Internal Synch Channel of MTX A corrupted 2-359
Internal Synch Channel of MTX B corrupted 2-361
Inter NE communication timeout blocking power adjustment 2-363
Inter-shelf loss of communication 2-365
Intra-Nodal Topology Failure-Operator Action Required 2-366
Invalid or no egress port defined 2-367
Invalid Threshold 2-368
Invalid Topology 2-369
IPCP ECC Connection Failure 2-370
JB Recentered 2-371
Link OAM Loss Of Protocol 2-372
LAG port add failure 2-373
LAG Subgroup Selected 2-374
Lan Cable Asymmetric connected 2-375
Lan Left Ring Failure 2-377
Lan Right Ring Failure 2-379
Laser Back-Facet Optical Power Cross Threshold 2-381
Laser Cooling Current Cross Threshold 2-382
Laser end of life 2-383
Latch Open 2-384
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LCP ECC Connection Fail 2-385

LD Input LOS 2-386
LD SIG Input LOS 2-387
Line Card Configuration Failed 2-388
Line (Facility) loopback active 2-389
Link Aggregation Degrade 2-390
Link Aggregation Group Loss of Signal 2-391
Link Down 2-392
Link Up 2-393
LAN Local Fault Indicator 2-394
Local Packet Lost 2-395
Locked 2-396
Locked - ODU 2-398
Locked - TCM Layer 2-399
Locked - TCM 2-400
Lock out of a timing reference from selection 2-401
Lockout of a timing reference for the output timing selection process 2-402
Lockout of Protection 2-403
Lockout of Protection - Far End 2-406
Lockout of Timing Reference 2-407
Lockout of Working 2-408
Log File Transfer Failure Local 2-409
Log File Transfer Failure Transport 2-410
Log File Transfer in Progress 2-411
Logical removal of a timing reference 2-412
Loss of 1588 Synchronization 2-413
Loss of 1PPS Signal 2-414
Loss of Lane Alignment 2-415
Loss of Alignment Marker Lock 2-416
Loss of Announce Messages on the Slave Port 2-417
Loss of continuity 2-418
Loss of Continuity 2-419
Loss of Delay_Resp Messages on the Slave Port 2-420
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Frame 2-421

Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe 2-425
Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe (LOFLOM - ODU) 2-427
Loss of Frame at the BITS Port 2-428
Loss of Frame Egress 2-429
Loss Of Frames 2-430
Loss of GFP alignment 2-431
Loss of lane alignment 2-432
Loss of Multiframe 2-435
Loss of Multiframe - OTU 2-436
Loss of Optical Signal, GBE 2-437
Loss of OPU Multiframe Identifier 2-440
Loss of Pointer HO Path 2-441
Loss of Pointer STS Path 2-442
Loss of Signal 2-443
Loss of Signal at the BITS Input Port 2-448
Loss of Signal Payload 2-449
Loss of Subsystem Control of Shelf 2-450
Loss of Synchronisation (LSS) 2-452
Loss of Synchronization (LANLSS) 2-453
Loss of Sync Messages on the Slave Port 2-454
Loss of Tandem Connection on TCM Layer 2-455
Loss of ToD Signal 2-456
Low input voltage floor defect 2-457
Low Voltage Cut-Off 2-458
Manual (Management) Removal 2-459
Manual switch from the Alternate path to the preferred path 2-463
Manual switch from the protection entity to the working entity 2-464
Manual switch from the protection entity to the working entity - Far End 2-466
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manual switch from the protection path to the working path 2-467
Manual switch of working entity to protection 2-468
Manual switch of working entity to protection - Far End 2-470
Manual switch to a timing reference 2-471
Manual switch to a timing reference for the output timing selection process 2-472
Manual switch to Internal Timing 2-473
Manual Switch to Protection 2-474
Manual Switch to Working 2-475
Manually Caused Abnormal Condition - Card In Maintenance 2-476
MEP AIS 2-477
MEP AIS State Change 2-478
MEP CFM Fault 2-479
MEP Cross Connect CCM 2-480
MEP DM Test Complete 2-481
MEP Error CCM 2-482
MEP LBM Test Complete 2-483
MEP LTM Test Complete 2-484
MEP Mac Status 2-485
MEP RDI CCM 2-486
MEP Remote CCM 2-487
MEP SLM Test Complete 2-488
Mismerge 2-489
Mismerge 2-490
Mixed MTX Operation 2-491
Mixed types of power filters used 2-493
Modulator output power out of range 2-494
Multiplex Structure Identification Mismatch 2-495
Multiplex Structure Indication Mismatch 2-497
NE SSH Key Generation 2-498
NE SSL Certificate Installation 2-499
NE SSL CSR Generation 2-500
NE SSL Key Generation 2-501
Network Time Protocol is enabled - no server is reachable 2-502
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network Time Protocol Loss of Redundancy 2-504

NE unavailable 2-505
Near-End Unavailable Time Period 2-506
Next Key Mismatch 2-508
No Available Time References 2-509
No available timing reference for the output timing selection process 2-510
No Device Found 2-511
No TDM Payload 2-512
No committed software load (Autoinstall disabled) 2-513
NTP Out of Sync 2-514
OA pump laser bias current high 2-515
OA pump laser temperature high 2-516
OCS card or port deleted 2-517
ODU AIS 2-518
OMD Input LOS 2-519
OMS Server Signal Failure 2-520
Open Connection Indication 2-521
Open Connection Indication - ODU 2-523
Open Connection Indication - TCM 2-524
Open Connection Indication on TCM Layer 2-525
Optical Intrusion Baseline Needed 2-526
Optical Intrusion - Detected 2-527
Optical Intrusion - Monitoring Suspended 2-528
Optical power received out of range 2-529
Optical supervision channel excessive BER 2-531
Optics over temperature 2-532
OSPF Adjacency Failure 2-533
OSPF Adjacency Not Full 2-534
OT Minor Circuit Pack Failure 2-535
OTU AIS 2-536
Out of operational range - loss too high alarm 2-537
Out of operational range - loss too low alarm 2-538
Outgoing Channel Absent 2-539
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Outgoing Channel Optical Power Out of Range 2-541

Outgoing Client Signal Fail detected on the GFP 2-542
Outgoing Client Signal Fail Detected on the ODU 2-543
Output LOS 2-544
Outgoing Loss of Signal 2-545
Outgoing Loss of Tones 2-546
Outgoing Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU 2-548
Outgoing SUPVY LOS 2-549
Out of operational range - input power too high 2-550
Out of operational range - input power too low 2-551
Packet card initializing 2-552
Parameters for amplifier tilt adjustment unconfigured 2-553
Payload Label Mismatch - Path 2-554
PCS Generator active 2-556
Pluggable Module Discovered 2-557
Pluggable Module Inserted 2-558
Pluggable Module mismatch 2-559
Pluggable Module missing 2-560
Pluggable Module Removed 2-561
Pluggable Module SEEP failure 2-562
Pluggable Module Transmit Failure 2-564
Pluggable Module Unknown 2-565
PM Baseline 2-566
Port degrade - wavelength tracker communication failure 2-567
Port degrade - wavelength tracker detection failure 2-568
Port degrade - wavelength tracker encode degrade 2-569
Port failure - device 2-571
Port transmit failure 2-572
Post-FEC Signal Degrade 2-573
Power Adjust Loss Margin Exceeded 2-574
Power Adjustment Failure 2-575
Power Adjustment Required 2-577
Power Failure 2-579
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power filter mismatch 2-580

Power Management Suspended 2-581
Power management topology invalid 2-584
Power Unbalance 2-585
Pre-FEC Signal Degrade 2-586
Procedure Error 2-588
Provisioned firmware will be obsolete after sw upgrade 2-589
PTP Clock in the Free-Running Status 2-590
PTP Port Faulty 2-591
RA2P Gain Failure Detected 2-592
Raman Suppress - Line 2-593
READY, PM Global File Collection 2-594
Received timing signal failure 2-595
Receiver Optimization in Progress 2-596
Reference Clock - forced switch active 2-597
Remote Client Local Fault 2-598
Remote Client Loss of Synchronization 2-599
Remote Failure Indication on HO path 2-602
Remote Failure Indication on line 2-604
Remote Failure Indication on OC-n 2-605
Remote Failure Indication on STS Path 2-606
Remote Fault 2-607
Remote Inventory Mismatch 2-608
Remote Packet Lost 2-610
RFI Line/MS 2-611
RMD Equipment Fail 2-612
RMD Power Fail 2-613
SAP Mac Limit 2-614
Security Intrusion Alarm 2-615
Server Signal Failure - ODU 2-616
Server Signal Failure - Optical Channel 2-618
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Server signal failure - OSC 2-619

Server Signal Failure - Path 2-620
Server Signal Failure - Section 2-621
Server Signal Failure on ETH - Egress 2-622
Server Signal Failure on HO Path 2-624
Server Signal Failure on Section 2-626
Server Signal Failure on Section - Egress 2-627
Server Signal Failure on Line 2-628
Server Signal Failure on STS Path 2-629
Server Signal Failure on TCM Layer 2-631
Service FDB Full 2-632
Service MFIB Full 2-633
SFP Equipment Fail 2-634
SFP Loss Of Signal 2-635
Shelf data inconsistent 2-636
Shelf LAN (ES1 & ES2) cables are incorrectly connected 2-637
Shelf mismatch 2-639
Shelf Transmission Fail 2-640
Shelf unavailable 2-641
Signal Degrade 2-642
Signal Degrade - ODU 2-643
Signal Degrade - OTU 2-644
Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio 2-645
Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path 2-648
Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Section 2-650
Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - TCM Layer 2-652
Signal Degrade - TCM 2-654
Slipping Timing Signal 2-655
Software Download 2-656
Software Mismatch 2-657
Software Upgrade Failed 2-658
Software Version Mismatch 2-659
SSL CA Root Certificate Installation 2-660
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Standby Database Corruption 2-661

STS Path Idle 2-662
Subtended shelf cannot be assigned a shelf ID 2-663
SUPVY Amplifier Input LOS 2-665
SUPVY Signal Degrade 2-666
Switching Matrix Module Failure 2-667
Synchronization Equipment (CRU) failure 2-668
Synchronization Equipment Failure 2-669
System clock forced to internal clock 2-670
System clock in free running mode 2-671
System clock in holdover mode 2-672
System Initialization New Failure 2-673
TCA 1 DAY – Average Bidirectional Frame Delay 2-674
TCA 1 DAY – Average Far-End Frame Delay Variation 2-675
TCA 1 DAY – Average Near-End Frame Delay Variation 2-676
TCA 1 DAY – Average Far-End Frame Loss Ratio 2-677
TCA 1 DAY – Average Near-End Frame Loss Ratio 2-678
TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, Multiplex Section 2-679
TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, ODU Layer 2-680
TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, OTU Layer 2-682
TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds-Regenerator Section Threshold (Transmit 2-686
Direction)
TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds Threshold (Transmit Direction) 2-687
TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, TCM Layer 2-688
TCA 1 DAY Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds 2-690
TCA 1 DAY Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds, TCM Facility 2-691
TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds Threshold 2-692
TCA 1 DAY Code Violation Threshold 2-693
TCA 1 DAY Code Violation-PCS layer (Receive Direction) 2-696
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Code Violation-PCS layer (Transmit Direction) 2-697

TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds-PCS layer Threshold (Receive Direction) 2-698
TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds-PCS layer Threshold (Transmit Direction) 2-699
TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds, Regenerator Section 2-700
TCA 1 DAY Error Seconds, ODU Layer 2-701
TCA 1 DAY Error Seconds, OTU Layer 2-703
TCA 1 DAY Error Seconds, TCM Layer 2-705
TCA - Failed to Decrypt 2-707
TCA 1 DAY Ethernet Packet Error Ratio 2-708
TCA 1 DAY Ethernet Packet Error Ratio Threshold (Transmit Direction) 2-709
TCA 1 DAY Far End Background Block Error, Multiplex Section 2-710
TCA 1 DAY Far End Background Block Error - ODUk 2-711
TCA 1 DAY Far End Background Block Error - OTUk 2-712
TCA 1 DAY Far End Background Block Error - TCM 2-713
TCA 1 DAY Far End Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section 2-714
TCA 1 DAY Far End Errored Seconds, ODU 2-715
TCA 1 DAY Far End Errored Seconds, OTU 2-716
TCA 1 DAY Far End Errored Seconds, TCM 2-717
TCA 1 DAY Far End Severely Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section 2-718
TCA 1 DAY Far End Severely Errored Seconds, ODU 2-719
TCA 1 DAY Far End Severely Errored Seconds, OTU 2-720
TCA 1 DAY Far End Severely Errored Seconds, TCM 2-721
TCA 1 DAY Far End Unavailable Seconds, Multiplex Section 2-722
TCA 1 DAY Far End Unavailable Seconds, ODU 2-723
TCA 1 DAY Far End Unavailable Seconds, OTU 2-724
TCA 1 DAY Far End Unavailable Seconds, TCM 2-725
TCA 1 DAY FEC Errors Corrected, OTU Layer 2-726
TCA 1 DAY Forward Error Correction, Uncorrectable Block Counts 2-728
TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Bidirectional Frame Delay 2-731
TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Far-End Frame Delay Variation 2-732
TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Far-End Frame Loss Ratio 2-733
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Near-End Frame Delay Variation 2-734

TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Near-End Frame Loss Ratio 2-735
TCA 1 DAY - Optical Power Received - High 2-736
TCA 1 DAY - Optical Power Received - Low 2-737
TCA 1 DAY - Optical Power Transmitted - High 2-738
TCA 1 DAY - Optical Power Transmitted - Low 2-739
TCA 1 DAY Out of Frame Seconds, Regenerator Section 2-740
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Bidirectional Frame 2-741
Delay
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Far-end Frame Delay 2-743
Variation
Variation
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Bidirectional Frame 2-746
Delay
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement Maximum Far-end Frame Delay 2-747
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Far-end Frame Delay 2-748
Variation
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Near-end Frame 2-750
Delay Variation
TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Average Far-end Frame Loss Ratio 2-751
TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Average Near-end Frame Loss Ratio 2-752
TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Far-end High Loss Interval 2-753
TCA 1 DAY MIN PMON Loss Measurement Maximum Far-end Frame Loss 2-754
Ratio
TCA 1 DAY MIN PMON Loss Measurement Maximum Near-end Frame Loss 2-755
Ratio
TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Near-end High Loss Interval 2-756
TCA 1 DAY PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average Far-end Frame Loss 2-757
Ratio
TCA 1 DAY PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average Near-end Frame 2-758
Loss Ratio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Near-end High Loss Interval 2-759
TCA 1 DAY Post-FEC BER Threshold 2-760
TCA 1 DAY Pre-FEC BER Threshold 2-761
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section 2-762
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, ODU Layer 2-763
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, OTU Layer 2-765
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds - PCS layer (Receive Direction) 2-767
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds - PCS layer (Transmit Direction) 2-768
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Frame Seconds - PCS layer (Receive Direction) 2-769
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, Regenerator Section 2-770
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, TCM Layer 2-771
TCA 1 DAY total number of errored packets at the receive port 2-773
TCA 1 DAY total number of errored packets at the transmit port 2-774
TCA 1 DAY total number of High Capacity octets 2-775
TCA 1-DAY total number of High Capacity packets 2-776
TCA 1 DAY total number of octets received 2-777
TCA 1 DAY total number of octets transmitted 2-778
TCA 1 DAY total number of packets discarded at the receive port 2-779
TCA 1 DAY total number of packets discarded at the transmit port 2-780
TCA 1 DAY total number of packets received 2-781
TCA 1 DAY total number of packets transmitted 2-782
TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, Multiplex Section 2-784
TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, ODU Layer 2-785
TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, OTU Layer 2-787
TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, TCM Layer 2-790
TCA 15 MIN – Average Bidirectional Frame Delay 2-792
TCA 15 MIN – Average Far-End Frame Delay Variation 2-793
TCA 15 MIN – Average Near-End Frame Delay Variation 2-794
TCA 15 MIN – Average Far-End Frame Loss Ratio 2-795
TCA 15 MIN – Average Near-End Frame Loss Ratio 2-796
TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, Multiplex Section 2-797
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, ODU Layer 2-798

TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, OTU Layer 2-800
TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds-Regenerator Section Threshold (Transmit 2-805
Direction)
TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds Threshold (Transmit Direction) 2-806
TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, TCM Layer 2-807
TCA 15 MIN Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds 2-809
TCA 15 MIN Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds, TCM Facility 2-810
TCA 15 MIN Code Violation 2-811
TCA 15 MIN Code Violation-PCS layer (Receive Direction) 2-814
TCA 15 MIN Code Violation-PCS layer (Transmit Direction) 2-815
TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds Threshold 2-816
TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds-PCS layer Threshold (Receive Direction) 2-817
TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds-PCS layer Threshold (Transmit Direction) 2-818
TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds, Regenerator Section 2-819
TCA 15 MIN Error Seconds, ODU Layer 2-820
TCA 15 MIN Error Seconds, OTU Layer 2-822
TCA 15 MIN Error Seconds, TCM Layer 2-824
TCA 15 MIN Ethernet Packet Error Ratio 2-826
TCA 15 MIN Ethernet Packet Error Ratio Threshold (Transmit Direction) 2-827
TCA 15 MIN Far End Background Block Error, Multiplex Section 2-828
TCA 15 MIN Far End Background Block Error - ODUk 2-829
TCA 15 MIN Far End Background Block Error - TCM 2-830
TCA 15 MIN Far End Background Block Error - OTUk 2-831
TCA 15 MIN Far End Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section 2-832
TCA 15 MIN Far End Errored Seconds, ODU 2-833
TCA 15 MIN Far End Errored Seconds, OTU 2-834
TCA 15 MIN Far End Errored Seconds, TCM 2-835
TCA 15 MIN Far End Severely Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section 2-836
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Far End Severely Errored Seconds, ODU 2-837

TCA 15 MIN Far End Severely Errored Seconds, OTU 2-838
TCA 15 MIN Far End Severely Errored Seconds, TCM 2-839
TCA 15 MIN Far End Unavailable Seconds, Multiplex Section 2-840
TCA 15 MIN Far End Unavailable Seconds, ODU 2-841
TCA 15 MIN Far End Unavailable Seconds, OTU 2-842
TCA 15 MIN Far End Unavailable Seconds, TCM 2-843
TCA 15 MIN FEC Errors Corrected, OTU Layer 2-844
TCA 15 MIN Forward Error Correction, Uncorrectable Block Counts 2-846
TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Bidirectional Frame Delay 2-849
TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Far-End Frame Delay Variation 2-850
TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Far-End Frame Loss Ratio 2-851
TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Near-End Frame Delay Variation 2-852
TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Near-End Frame Loss Ratio 2-853
TCA 15 MIN - Optical Power Received - High 2-854
TCA 15 MIN - Optical Power Received - Low 2-855
TCA 15 MIN - Optical Power Transmitted - High 2-856
TCA 15 MIN - Optical Power Transmitted - Low 2-857
TCA 15 MIN Out of Frame Seconds, Regenerator Section 2-858
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Bidirectional Frame 2-859
Delay
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Far-end Frame Delay 2-861
Variation
Delay
Delay Variation
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Bidirectional Frame 2-864
Delay
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement Maximum Far-end Frame Delay 2-865
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Far-end Frame 2-866
Delay Variation
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement Maximum Near-end Frame Delay 2-867
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Near-end Frame 2-868
Delay Variation
TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Average Far-end Frame Loss Ratio 2-869
TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Average Near-end Frame Loss Ratio 2-870
TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Far-end High Loss Interval 2-871
TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Maximum Far-end Frame Loss Ratio 2-872
TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Maximum Near-end Frame Loss Ratio 2-873
TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Near-end High Loss Interval 2-874
TCA 15 MIN PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average Far-end Frame Loss 2-875
Ratio
TCA 15 MIN PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average Near-end Frame 2-876
Loss Ratio
TCA 15 MIN PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Near-end High Loss Interval 2-877
TCA 15 MIN Post-FEC BER Threshold 2-878

TCA 15 MIN Pre-FEC BER Threshold 2-879
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section 2-880
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, ODU Layer 2-881
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, OTU Layer 2-883
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds - PCS layer (Receive Direction) 2-885
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds - PCS layer (Transmit Direction) 2-886
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Frame Seconds - PCS layer (Receive Direction) 2-887
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Frame Seconds - PCS layer (Transmit Direction) 2-888
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, Regenerator Section 2-889
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, TCM Layer 2-891
TCA 15 MIN total number of errored packets at the receive port 2-893
TCA 15 MIN total number of errored packets at the transmit port 2-894
TCA 15 MIN total number of High Capacity octets 2-895
TCA 15-MIN total number of High Capacity packets 2-896
TCA 15 MIN total number of octets received 2-897
TCA 15 MIN total number of octets transmitted 2-898
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN total number of packets discarded at the receive port 2-899
TCA 15 MIN total number of packets discarded at the transmit port 2-900
TCA 15 MIN total number of packets received 2-901
TCA 15 MIN total number of packets transmitted 2-902
TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, Multiplex Section 2-904
TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, ODU Layer 2-905
TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, OTU Layer 2-907
TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, TCM Layer 2-910
TCA - Code Violations, Section 2-912
TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average Near-end 2-913
Frame Loss Ratio
TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average Far-end 2-914
Frame Loss Ratio
TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Far-end High Loss 2-915
Interval
TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Maximum Far-end 2-916
Frame Loss Ratio
TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Near-end Frame 2-917
Loss Ratio
TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Near-end High Loss 2-918
Interval
TCA - Errored Seconds, Section 2-919
TCA - Optical Power Received - High 2-920
TCA - Optical Power Received - Low 2-921
TCA - Optical Power Transmitted - High 2-922
TCA - Optical Power Transmitted - Low 2-923
TCA - Severely Errored Frame Seconds, Section 2-924
TCA - Severely Errored Seconds, Section 2-925
TCA - Unavailable Seconds, Section 2-926
TCA Background Block Errors, ODU Layer 2-927
TCA Background Block Errors, OTU Layer 2-929
TCA Background Block Errors, TCM Layer 2-931
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA Error Seconds, ODU Layer 2-933

TCA Error Seconds, OTU Layer 2-935
TCA Error Seconds, TCM Layer 2-936
TCA FEC Errors Corrected, OTU Layer 2-938
TCA Severely Errored Seconds, ODU Layer 2-940
TCA Severely Errored Seconds, OTU Layer 2-942
TCA Severely Errored Seconds, TCM Layer 2-944
TCA Unavailable Seconds, ODU Layer 2-946
TCA Unavailable Seconds, OTU Layer 2-948
TCA Unavailable Seconds, TCM Layer 2-949
TDM (SONET/SDH) Loss of Signal 2-951
Temperature is critical 2-952
Temperature is high 2-953
Terminal loop active 2-955
Thermal Shutdown performed 2-956
Time Slot Assignment Mismatch 2-958
Timing quality for output timing is insufficient 2-959
Timing Reference Failure 2-960
Timing reference is unassigned 2-962
Timing reference out-of-frequency 2-963
Timing Reference Unequipped 2-964
Timing selection was switched by a manual command to a timing reference 2-965
Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU 2-966
Trace Identifier Mismatch - OTU 2-967
Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on HO Path 2-968
Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on OTN Path 2-969
Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section 2-971
Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on TCM Layer 2-973
Type Mismatch 2-974
Unavailable Time, ODUk 2-975
Unavailable Time, OTUk 2-977
Unavailable Time, Regenerator Section 2-979
Unavailable Time, TCM 2-981
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Underlying Resource is Unavailable - Path 2-983

Underlying Resource is Unavailable - Section 2-985
Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Optical Section 2-987
Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Section 2-989
Underlying resource unavailable - OTS 2-991
Underlying resource unavailable - card 2-992
Underlying resource unavailable - OMS-RX 2-993
Underlying resource unavailable - OMS-TX 2-994
Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-LOS 2-995
Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-RX 2-996
Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-TX 2-997
Underlying Resource Unavailable - Port 2-998
Unexpected Level 2-999
Unexpected MEG Level 2-1000
Unexpected MEP or unexpected periodicity 2-1003
Unexpected Priority 2-1007
Unit Not Inserted 2-1008
Unknown ECID 2-1009
Unknown OCH Trail for xconnect 2-1010
Unsupported hardware version 2-1011
Upgrade MTX size 2-1012
Upstream Channel Absent 2-1014
Upstream Channel collision 2-1015
User inactive 2-1016
User Payload type (GFP) Mismatch 2-1017
Detected low voltage from on-board power supply 2-1018
VCG Loss of alignment 2-1019
VCG Server Signal Failure 2-1020
VTS Forward Defect Indication 2-1021
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VTS Open Connection Indication 2-1022

Wait to Restore 2-1023
Wait to Restore - Far End 2-1025
Warm Start 2-1026
Wave Key Not Available 2-1027
Wave Key Overlap 2-1029
Wave Key pair re-used for channel on node 2-1030
Working entity forced to switch back to working 2-1032
Working entity forced to switch back to working - Far End 2-1034
Working entity forced to switch to protection 2-1035
Working entity forced to switch to protection - Far End 2-1037
Working entity switched back to working 2-1038
Working entity switched back to working - Far End 2-1040
Working entity switched to protection - Far End 2-1041
Wrong Dest Mac 2-1042
Wrong Device Present 2-1043
Wrong Unit Inserted 2-1044
WTOCM Input LOS 2-1045
Y-cable Switchover Timer Expired 2-1046
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Abnormal Insertion
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Abnormal Insertion
Meaning of the alarm
A module is available in a position but not provisioned.
Brief alarm overview

The following tabular overview summarizes important information concerning the
Abnormal Insertion alarm:
Alarm identifier / ABNORMAL

Mnemonic
Applicability Switching applications
SC/TC Standing condition (SC)
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm category Equipment
Effect on service Not service-affecting (NSA)
Alarm severity (default SA –
setting) NSA Minor (MN)
Alarm source Module
Related information
See “General alarm information” (p. 2-2) for a description of the meaning of the entries in
this brief alarm overview.
Local indications
LED 1 on the faceplate of the respective circuit pack is flashing red.
LED 8 (AB) on the faceplate of the (FLC64, ECHC (FLC), FLC36, or FLC36EA is lit
solid amber.
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-1: “Clear Abnormal Insertion” (p. 3-36).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Active and standby main Equipment Controller databases
Network element alarms not synchronized
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Active and standby main Equipment Controller databases not

synchronized
Meaning of alarm
The database on the active and standby equipment controllers are not in sync.

Active and standby main Equipment Controller databases not
synchronized alarm:
Alarm identifier / DBUNSYNC

Mnemonic
Applicability Photonic applications
ASAP type COM
setting) NSA Major (MJ)
Alarm source SYSTEM
Related information
Local indications
There are no local indications.
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-2: “Clear active and standby Main EC databases not
synchronized” (p. 3-37).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Active Loopback
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Active Loopback
The associated entity has a loopback activated at the near end.

Active Loopback condition:
Alarm identifier / ACTLPBK

Mnemonic
ASAP type Depending on the associated entity:
• ASAPGBE
• ASAPGBE10
• ASAPGBE100
• ASAPOC3
• ASAPOC12
• ASAPOC48
• ASAPOC192
• ASAPOC768
• ASAPSTM1
• ASAPSTM4
• ASAPSTM16
• ASAPSTM64
• ASAPSTM256
• ASAPOTU
Alarm category Transmission
setting)1 NSA Not alarmed (NA)
Alarm source GBE, GBE10, GBE100, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, OC-768,
STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64, STM-256, OTU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Active Loopback
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Notes:
1. The severity assignment is fixed and cannot be changed.
Related information
Local indications
There are no specific local indications.
Trouble clearing
Active Loopback is to be understood as an information rather than as an alarm and
will be cleared autonomously as soon as the loopback has been released.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Add Power Adjustment Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Add Power Adjustment Failure

Meaning of alarm
The various Add Power Adjustment Failure (PWRADJFAILADD) condition types
are described below.
Aborted
The adjustment was aborted. SCOT will abort the local ingress gain adjustment if the auto
gain adjustment enabling makes a True to False transition while the adjustment is in
progress.
Adjustment Not Possible - APR Condition Active
The Add/Drop Add LD for the Add block is in APR node. In this state the LD is disabled
and the adjustment cannot be executed.
Amplifier Mid-Stage Loss Problem
The loss from the LD DCM To to DCM From port is not within the expected range.
Card Required for Adjustment Not Present
A pack that is required for the adjustment is missing.
Local Adjustment is Still in Progress / In Progress
An adjustment is already in progress on the node.
Loss Too High
The loss is greater than allowed upstream of the AID message location.
Maximum Number of Iterations Reached
The adjustment was unable to complete in the allowed number of calculation iterations.
MESH4 OA Required Gain Exceeds Maximum Planned Gain / MESH4 OA Required
Gain is Less Than Minimum Planned Gain
The required gain is higher than expected and cannot be accommodated within the
planned gain range of the MESH4 OA.
No Add Services Provisioned
No Add services are provisioned for this Add block.
No Lit Channels For Add-Path CWR Optimization
The adjustment could not be completed because no provisioned channels are present at
WTD at the CWR Sig Out port.
No Lit Channels For Add-Path Optimization
specified positions within the Add block.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
No Stable Add Channels For Add-Path Optimization
Channel powers are not stable and the adjustment cannot be attempted.

Add Power Adjustment Failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / PWRADJFAILADD

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm category OTS
Alarm source See “PWRADJFAILADD” (p. B-40).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to the appropriate procedure:
• Procedure 3-312: “Clear PWRADJFAIL / PWRADJFAILADD (Aborted)” (p. 3-539)
• Procedure 3-349: “Clear PWRADJFAILADD (Adjustment Not Possible - APR
Condition Active)” (p. 3-596)
• Procedure 3-317: “Clear PWRADJFAIL / PWRADJFAILADD / PWRADJFAILDRP
(Amplifier Mid-Stage Loss Problem)” (p. 3-545)
(Card Required for Adjustment Not Present)” (p. 3-597)
(Local Adjustment is Still in Progress) or (In Progress)” (p. 3-599)
• Procedure 3-352: “Clear PWRADJFAILADD (Loss Too High)” (p. 3-600)
• Procedure 3-353: “Clear PWRADJFAILADD (Maximum Number of Iterations
Reached)” (p. 3-601)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Procedure 3-354: “Clear PWRADJFAILADD (MESH4 OA Required Gain Exceeds
Maximum Planned Gain); (MESH4 OA Required Gain is Less Than Minimum
Planned Gain)” (p. 3-603)
• Procedure 3-355: “Clear PWRADJFAILADD (No Add Services Provisioned)”
(p. 3-605)
• Procedure 3-356: “Clear PWRADJFAILADD (No Lit Channels For Add-Path CWR
Optimization)” (p. 3-606)
• Procedure 3-357: “Clear PWRADJFAILADD (No Lit Channels For Add-Path
• Procedure 3-358: “Clear PWRADJFAILADD (No Stable Add Channels For Add-Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Add power control failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Add power control failure

A card has detected a power control-related equipment failure.

The following tabular overview summarizes important information concerning the Add
power control failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / MTCESURV

Mnemonic
Applicability Photonic applications and Switching applications
ASAP type Photonic applications: EQPT
Switching applications: ASAPOCH
Alarm category Photonic applications: Equipment
Switching applications: Transmission
Alarm source See “MTCESURV” (p. B-33).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-3: “Clear Add power control failure” (p. 3-38).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details AES FIPS Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AES FIPS Failure

Meaning of alarm
The system has determined encryption algorithm used on OAMP interface does not match
expected self test result.

AES FIPS Failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / AESFIPSFAILURE

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Effect on service Service-affecting (SA)
Alarm severity (default SA Critical (CR)
setting) NSA –
Alarm source Equipment Controller
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 4-27: “Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Nonredundant Shelf
” (p. 4-78) or Procedure 4-26: “Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Redundant Shelf
” (p. 4-75).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details AIS - TCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AIS - TCM
Meaning of alarm
The received signal contains the Alarm Indication Signal (AIS).

The following tabular overview summarizes important information concerning the AIS
alarm:
Alarm identifier / AIS

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU2TCM{1-6}, ODU3TCM{1-3}
setting) NSA Not reported (NR)
Alarm source See “AIS-TCM” (p. B-2).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-402: “Clear Server Signal Failure on TCM Layer” (p. 3-671).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details AIS is Detected at the BITS Port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AIS is Detected at the BITS Port

Meaning of alarm
The BITSAIS alarm is raised when the card has detected a BITSAIS condition. The
BITSAIS alarm is raised on the BITS input port if the AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) was
detected. This may be caused when the input signal has an AIS pattern.

The following tabular overview summarizes important information concerning the AIS is
Detected at the BITS Port alarm:
Alarm identifier / BITSAIS

Mnemonic
ASAP type Timing
setting) NSA Critical (CR)
Alarm source See “BITSAIS” (p. B-5).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-4: “Clear AIS is Detected at the BITS Port” (p. 3-40).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details AIS Line/MS for OCn/STMn
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AIS Line/MS for OCn/STMn

Meaning of alarm
The card is receiving AIS for OCn/STMn for port type NORMALSO. This condition on a
network port occurs when some upstream line terminating equipment is exhibiting a
failure that sends an AIS signal to the downstream line terminating entity. This is a
non-reportable condition and the user must manually retrieve the condition from the NE
or card to view it.

AIS Line/MS alarm:
Alarm identifier / AISL

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPOCn/ASAPSTMn
Alarm source See “AISL” (p. B-2).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-6: “Clear AIS Line/MS for OCn/STMn” (p. 3-42).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details AIS Line/MS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AIS Line/MS
Meaning of alarm
The card is receiving AISL from the equipment connected to the client receive port. This
condition on a network port occurs when some upstream line terminating equipment is
exhibiting a failure that sends an AISL signal to the downstream line terminating entity.
This is a non-reportable condition and the user must manually retrieve the condition from
the NE or card to view it. This alarm applies to transparent services.

AIS Line/MS alarm:
Alarm identifier / AISL

Mnemonic
ASAP type CBR2G5, OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4, OC48/STM16,
OC192/STM64
Alarm source See “AISL” (p. B-2).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-5: “Clear AIS Line/MS” (p. 3-41).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Alarm Indication Signal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm Indication Signal

Meaning of alarm
The incoming signal at an external timing input port (BITS input port) contains the Alarm
Indication Signal (AIS), and thus cannot be used as a timing reference.

Alarm Indication Signal condition:
Alarm identifier / AIS

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPBITS
Alarm category Synchronization
Alarm source External timing input port (BITS input port)
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-7: “Clear Alarm Indication Signal” (p. 3-43).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Alarm Indication Signal on HO Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm Indication Signal on HO Path

Meaning of alarm
The receive signal on higher order VC-n path level contains the Alarm Indication Signal
(AIS, “all-ones”), and thus cannot be used.
One of the network elements in the upstream direction of the VC-n path has detected an
error in the incoming signal and, as a consequent action, has inserted the AIS into the
outgoing signal in the opposite direction.
AIS on VC-n path level is inserted as a result of a Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame
(LOF), Alarm Indication Signal on STM-N multiplex section (MS-AIS), Excessive Bit
Error Ratio (EBER), or Loss of Pointer (LOP).

Alarm Indication Signal on HO Path condition:
Alarm identifier / AIS-P

Mnemonic
ASAP type Depending on the VC-n path level:
• ASAPVC4
• ASAPVC44C
• ASAPVC416C
Alarm severity (default SA Not reported (NR)
Alarm source See “AIS-P” (p. B-2).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Alarm Indication Signal on HO Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-8: “Clear Alarm Indication Signal on HO Path” (p. 3-44).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Alarm Indication Signal STS Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm Indication Signal STS Path

Meaning of alarm
The receive signal on STS-n path level contains the Alarm Indication Signal (AIS,
“all-ones”), and thus cannot be used.
One of the network elements in the upstream direction of the STS-n path has detected an
error in the incoming signal and, as a consequent action, has inserted the AIS into the
outgoing signal in the opposite direction.
AIS on STS-n path level is inserted as a result of a Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame
(LOF), Alarm Indication Signal on OC-n line level (Line AIS), Excessive Bit Error Ratio
(EBER), or Loss of Pointer (LOP).

Alarm Indication Signal STS Path condition:
Alarm identifier / AIS-P

Mnemonic
ASAP type Depending on the STS-n path level:
• ASAPSTS1
• ASAPSTS3C
• ASAPSTS12C
• ASAPSTS48C
Alarm severity (default SA Not alarmed (NA)
setting) NSA Not alarmed (NA)
Alarm source See “AIS-P” (p. B-2).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Alarm Indication Signal STS Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-9: “Clear Alarm Indication Signal STS Path” (p. 3-45).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details All Channels Missing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
All Channels Missing

Meaning of alarm
The All channels missing defect (ALLCHANMISS and ALLCHANMISS-OUT) is
monitored at the OTS layer. ALLCHANMISS is raised when all cross connected optical
channels are reported missing by WaveTracker. This defect applies to all line driver (LD)
packs. It also applies to both ingress and egress amps.
At the ingress amp it is at LD-shelf-slot-LineIn. At the egress amp it is at
LD-shelf-slot-SigIn.
This defect is relative to those channels that have been provisioned and now, for whatever
reason, are no longer being detected. In order to look at the probable cause, by way of the
WEBUI or the PhM, retrieve all cross-connects and then look at the AZ , ZA or both
directions light path. If in CLI, enter sh xc * and then check the power levels for the
appropriate channels.
No C-band channels are detected at the LD Line or Sig port, but the NE has at least one
service successfully launched and the LD link has been successfully received.
ALLCHANMISS is reported if no C-Band channels are detected coming into (received
by) the amplifier Line or Sig port.

All Channels Missing alarm:
Alarm identifier / ALLCHANMISS

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “ALLCHANMISS” (p. B-2).
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details All Channels Missing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-10: “Clear All Channels Missing” (p. 3-46).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details All Outgoing Channels Missing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
All Outgoing Channels Missing

Meaning of alarm
No C-Band channels are detected leaving from (transmitted by) the amplifier SIG port,
but the NE has at least one service successfully launched and the amplifier link has been
successfully received.

All Outgoing Channels Missing alarm:
Alarm identifier / ALLCHANMISSOUT

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “ALLCHANMISSOUT” (p. B-2).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-11: “Clear All Outgoing Channels Missing” (p. 3-48).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details All selectable timing references fail
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
All selectable timing references fail

Meaning of alarm
One of two causes for SYNCOOS:
• The OT port has detected SYNCOOS at the LINEREF layer. A LINEREF detects
SYNCOOS when the timing reference failed, (not Protected or Protection not
Available).
• The OT port has detected an SYNCOOS at the SYNC layer. SYNC detects
SYNCOOS when all available timing references have failed and the system is going
into holdover.

All selectable timing references fail alarm:
Alarm identifier / SYNCOOS

Mnemonic
ASAP type LINEREF
Alarm severity (default SA Major (MJ)
setting) NSA –
Alarm source LINEREFSYS
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-12: “Clear All selectable timing references fail” (p. 3-51).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Amplifier disabled
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Amplifier disabled
Meaning of alarm
The amplifier was disabled because of a temperature problem.

Amplifier disabled alarm:
Alarm identifier / AMPDISABLED

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “AMPDISABLED” (p. B-2).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-13: “Clear Amplifier disabled” (p. 3-52).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended

Meaning of alarm
The PWRTILTSUSP alarm is raised when:
• the automatic amplifier gain tilt adjustments are suspended, in the direction of
transmission, for the optical multiplex section originating at the OADM line because
optical channel power measurement for the line is impaired. SCOT is unable to get
channel power information from the Line Out port of the LD.
• It is caused when the channel exceeds the number of attempts (OCM_Max_Retries
attempts) it can use to get power information from the Line Out port.

Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended alarm:
Alarm identifier / PWRTILTSUSP

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source See “PWRTILTSUSP” (p. B-41).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-14: “Clear Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended” (p. 3-54).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain too high
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain too high

Meaning of alarm
An amplifier is operating outside of the normal operating range. The ingress power to the
amplifier plus the programmed gain (both in dBs) has exceeded the maximum allowable
output power supported by the amplifier. This can occur only if the amplifier output
power limiting function and the output overload function have both failed.

Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain too high alarm:
Alarm identifier / HIGAIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source See “HIGAIN” (p. B-18).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-41: “Clear Card failure - device alarm” (p. 3-101).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain too low
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain too low

Meaning of alarm
The ingress power to the amplifier added to the programmed gain (both in dB's) is lower
than the minimum allowable power supported by the amplifier.

The following tabular overview summarizes important information concerning the alarm:
Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain too low alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOGAIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source See “LOGAIN” (p. B-25).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-15: “Clear Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain too
low alarm” (p. 3-57).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Application needs personal assistance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Application needs personal assistance

An application on a circuit pack does not react on requests from the system. Personal
assistance by the user is needed.

Application needs personal assistance alarm:
Alarm identifier / APPLPAN

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source MTX
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-16: “Clear Application needs personal assistance” (p. 3-59)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details APR Active - invalid topology
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APR Active - invalid topology

Meaning of alarm
When an LD is used that contains a high-power optical amplifier (>20 dBm), certain ports
within the add/drop node or ILA must be monitored for possible fiber breaks. These
monitored ports check for LOS, and upon detecting LOS, cause an APRNODE condition.
Software checks that a valid topology is in place (including all necessary monitoring
ports) before allowing the LD to turn on. When a topology has been provisioned and
validated by software, the alarm will clear and the optical amplifier in the LD will be
allowed to turn on. When a topology is first being entered, the alarm will be present until
all topological connections that must be monitored have been entered. If the optical
amplifier is on, but a monitored topological connection is deleted, the optical amplifier
will shut down. It will remain off until after a new topology is created and validated by
software.

APR Active - invalid topology alarm:
Alarm identifier / APRTOPO

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “APRTOPO” (p. B-3).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details APR Active - invalid topology
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-17: “Clear APR Active - Invalid Topology” (p. 3-60).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details APR Active - Line
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APR Active - Line

Meaning of alarm
The automatic power reduction mode has been invoked on the optical line. The APRLINE
condition is reported against the egress amplifier when a LOS is detected on the ingress
amplifier, or as a result of OSC failure or a combination of OSC failure and LOT-OUT,
when the span is equipped with a Raman amplifier (RA2P or A2P2125). The APRLINE
condition is raised against the output port of the egress amplifier. If the egress is a
unidirectional amplifier , the condition is raised against the LineOut port. If the egress is a
bidirectional amplifier, the condition is raised against the Sig port. The APRLINE
condition is also reported against the LineIn port of the Raman amplifier when it is on a
span whose ingress amplifier detects OSC failure or a combination of OSC failure and
LOT-OUT.

APR Active - Line alarm:
Alarm identifier / APRLINE

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “APRLINE” (p. B-3).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-18: “Clear APR Active - Line alarm” (p. 3-62).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details APR Active - Node
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APR Active - Node

Meaning of alarm
When an LD is used that contains a high-power optical amplifier (>20 dBm), if there is an
LOS condition within the node that could carry high power from the LD, then the output
power from the LD is reduced to a safe level. If amplifier power has been reduced to
eye-safe level, then restoration of power shall occur no earlier than 100 seconds after
detection of the defect set that triggers APRNODE. APRNODE can also occur if no
channels are present at the input to the optical amplifier, and it can occur briefly after
some other APR conditions clear.
After a condition that leads to the complete shutdown has cleared, the amplifier will
return to eye-safe level (≤ 10 dBm), then will go back up to the greater that 10 dBm level
before the failure. The software will check whether all monitored connections are
receiving power. APRNODE will be active during this time. Once the checks have been
completed, APRNODE will clear automatically.

APR Active - Node alarm:
Alarm identifier / APRNODE

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “APRNODE” (p. B-3).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details APR Active - Node
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-19: “Clear APR Active - Node” (p. 3-63).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details APR Active – port switch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APR Active – port switch

Meaning of alarm
Some EDFA and Raman amplifier circuit packs that are capable of producing high output
power, exceeding class 1M limits, are equipped with port switches on the high-power
ports.

APR Active – port switch alarm:
Alarm identifier / APRSWITCH

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “APRSWITCH” (p. B-3).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Before a fiber jumper can be disconnected from the high-power port, a cover must be
removed from the faceplate. A switch within the pack detects the cover removal and shuts
off the amplifier within the circuit pack. After the cover is reinstalled on the circuit pack,
the amplifier will restart and the alarm will clear automatically.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details APR Limited
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APR Limited
Meaning of alarm
APR Limited is raised when a card that monitors for APRLINE or APRNODE undergoes
a cold reboot, experiences certain types of pack failures, or has been removed.
Monitoring for APRLINE occurs at the line-terminating (ingress) LD at an ILA or
add/drop node. When the line-terminating LD experiences any of the conditions described
above, an APR Limited alarm is raised against the output port of the LD for the opposite
direction (egress LD). APRLIMITED can also be raised against the LineIn port of the
RA2P if it is present.
Since APRLINE works bidirectionally, when an APRLIMITED alarm is raised against an
egress LD, APR could be unavailable for both directions of the affected optical line.
Monitoring for APRNODE occurs at any card within the node that could receive high
power from an LD equipped with a high-power optical amplifier. The APR Limited alarm
is raised against the output port of the ingress LD in this case.
APRLIMITED is similar to APRUNAVAIL, which is raised when APR is unavailable due
to a warm reset of a monitoring card. The difference is that with APRLIMITED, the
defects that lead to the alarm have potential to interrupt traffic. Optical amplifiers will not
be shut down as a result of an APR Limited condition, but APR will not be available until
the cause of the APR Limited alarm has been addressed.

APR Limited alarm:
Alarm identifier / APRLIMITED

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “APRLIMITED” (p. B-3).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details APR Limited
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-20: “Clear APR Limited ” (p. 3-66).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details APR Forced
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APR Forced
Meaning of alarm
The APR Forced alarm is raised to indicate that a port has been placed in forced-APR
mode.
Users with administrative level access may put amplifier ports in forced-APR mode on
selected LD cards. When the LineOut port is put in forced-APR mode, the EDFA pumps
are shut down. When the LineIn port of a hybrid LD is put in forced-APR mode, the
Raman amplifier within the LD is shut down. In each case, the shutdown will occur even
if the LD is carrying traffic. The port must be put in the maintenance or down state prior
to setting it in forced-APR mode.

APR Forced alarm:
Alarm identifier / APRFORCED

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “APRFORCED” (p. B-3).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-21: “Clear APR Forced” (p. 3-68).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details APR unavailable - monitoring card booting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APR unavailable - monitoring card booting

Meaning of alarm
A card that is monitored for APRLINE or APRNODE undergoes a soft reboot. For
APRLINE, this means the line-terminating LD card, and only applies to ILAs or add/drop
nodes with egress LDs. For APRNODE, this means any card within a node that could
receive high power from an LD equipped with a high-power optical amplifier. The optical
amplifiers will remain turned on during this condition. Transmission is not affected, but
APR is not available until the reboot has been completed.

APR unavailable - monitoring card booting alarm:
Alarm identifier / APRUNAVAIL

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source See “APRUNAVAIL” (p. B-3).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
No corrective action is required. The alarm clears automatically after the reboot has been
completed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details APS channel mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APS channel mismatch

Meaning of alarm
The expected channel has not bridged onto the protection channel at the far end as per the
switch request from the near end.
The APS channel mismatch alarm applies only to protection groups configured to perform
bidirectional switching. This alarm indicates that the far end is not responding to near-end
switch requests as expected. This can occur under any the following situations:
• the protection group is not fully configured at the far end.
• the working and protected fibers are misconnected.
• there is a service mismatch.
• the far end is currently performing a software upgrade.

APS channel mismatch alarm:
Alarm identifier / APSCM

Mnemonic
ASAP type 1GbE, 10GbE, CBR2G5, FC100, FC200, FC400, FC1200, FE,
OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4, OC48/STM16, OC192/STM64, OTU1,
OTU2, OTU3
Alarm source See “APSCM” (p. B-3).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details APS channel mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-22: “Clear APS channel mismatch” (p. 3-69).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details APS mode mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APS mode mismatch

Meaning of alarm
An APS Mode Mismatch failure occurs when there is a mismatch of the protection
switching settings at the two ends of the span. The alarm is raised if one end is configured
for bi-directional switching while the other end is configured for unidirectional switching.
The system behavior in the alarmed state is as follows:
• The NE configured for bi-directional switching raises the APS Mode Mismatch alarm.
• The protection group operates in uni-directional switching mode until the alarm is
cleared.
The NEs must be provisioned to be either both uni-directional switching or both
bi-directional switching in order to remove the alarm.

APS mode mismatch alarm:
Alarm identifier / APSMM

Mnemonic
ASAP type 1GbE, 10GbE, CBR2G5, CBRAR, FC100, FC200, FC400,
FC1200, FE, OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4, OC48/STM16,
OC192/STM64, OTU1, OTU2, OTU3
Alarm source See “APSMM” (p. B-4).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details APS mode mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-23: “Clear APS mode mismatch alarm” (p. 3-72).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details APS protection switching byte failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APS protection switching byte failure

Meaning of alarm
An APS Protection Switching Byte Failure can occur only when the protection group is
configured for bi-directional switching. This condition indicates that the protection
switching bytes received on the protection channel contain an invalid or inconsistent
value.

APS protection switching byte failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / APSB

Mnemonic
ASAP type 1GbE, CBR2G5, FC100, FC200, FC400, FC1200, OC3/STM1,
OC12/STM4, OC48/STM16, OC192/STM64, OTU1
Alarm source See “APSB” (p. B-3).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-24: “Clear APS protection switching byte failure alarm” (p. 3-74).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Authentication Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Authentication Failure
Meaning of alarm
The AUTHFAIL autonomous message is issued after an invalid login attempt is detected.

The following tabular overview summarizes important information concerning
theAuthentication Failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / AUTHFAIL

Mnemonic
SC/TC Transient condition (TC)
ASAP type COM
Alarm category Transient
setting) NSA Transient condition (TC)
Alarm source SYSTEM
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
No corrective action is required. This is a normal report caused by an invalid login
attempt.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Auto laser off due to upstream condition
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Auto laser off due to upstream condition

Meaning of alarm
USALS is raised when the client port laser is turned off either because the network port of
this card has an optical LOS, or the corresponding client port at the far end of the service
has a fault.

Auto laser off due to upstream condition alarm:
Alarm identifier / USALS

Mnemonic
ASAP type 1GbE, 10GbE, 100GbE, CBR2G5, CBRAR, FC100, FC200,
FC400, FC800, FC1200, OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4,
OC48/STM16, OC192/STM64, OC768/STM256, OCH, OTU1,
OTU2, OTU3, OTU4
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “USALS” (p. B-79).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-25: “Clear Auto Laser Shutoff Due to Upstream Fault alarm”
(p. 3-76).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Auto Negotiation Mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Auto Negotiation Mismatch

Meaning of alarm

Auto Negotiation Mismatch alarm:
Alarm identifier / RmdIfMauANM

Mnemonic
ASAP type RMD
setting) NSA –
Alarm source 11QPE24-shelf-slot-RMD{1-32}-{Customer, Network}
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-26: “Clear Auto Negotiation Mismatch” (p. 3-78).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Automatic In-Service
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Automatic In-Service
The affected facility is in the Automatic In-Service (AINS) state.
AINS state
During pre-service provisioning of facilities, alarms, performance monitoring (PM)
messages and threshold crossing alerts (TCAs) are typically turned off (inhibited) to
prevent false messages from being reported to management systems. When the
provisioning activities are completed, alarms, PM messages and TCAs need to be turned
on again.
The AINS state is a means to turn on these messages automatically after provisioning
activities have been completed. For that purpose, a configurable AINS timer is used. Once
a good signal is detected, the system starts the AINS timer, which measures the interval
during which the signal is present. This is referred to as the “start–up state”. During this
start–up interval, the system monitors the input signal for a continuous signal with the
autonomous reporting of alarms, PM messages and TCAs still turned off. If the signal is
interrupted or lost (due to LOS, LOF or AIS–L, for instance) before reaching the end of
the start-up interval, the timer is automatically reset to its initial value and the process
starts over. When the timer expires without the signal being interrupted or lost, then the
respective facility is automatically taken into service, and the reporting of alarms, PM
messages and TCAs is automatically turned on again.

Automatic In-Service condition:
Alarm identifier / AINS

Mnemonic
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Automatic In-Service
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ASAP type Depending on the affected facility:

• ASAPGBE, ASAPGBE10, ASAPGBE100
• ASAPOC3, ASAPOC12, ASAPOC48, ASAPOC192,
ASAPOC768
• ASAPOCH
• ASAPODU0, ASAPODU1, ASAPODU2, ASAPODU2E,
ASAPODU3, ASAPODU3E2, ASAPODU4
• ASAPOTU
• ASAPSTM1, ASAPSTM4, ASAPSTM16, ASAPSTM64,
ASAPSTM256
• ASAPSTS1, ASAPSTS3C, ASAPSTS12C, ASAPSTS48C
• ASAPTCM
• ASAPVC4, ASAPVC44C, ASAPVC416C
Alarm source See “AINS” (p. B-1).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Automatic In-Service condition is to be understood as an information rather
than as an alarm and will be cleared autonomously as soon as the corresponding facility
leaves the AINS state.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Automatic switching to a timing reference on the output
Network element alarms timing selection process
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Automatic switching to a timing reference on the output

timing selection process
Meaning of alarm
The Automatic switching to a timing reference on the output timing selection process
alarm is raised when the card has detected an AUTOSWTIMREF-T4 condition at the
LINEREF layer. The AUTOSWTIMREF-T4 alarm is raised on the timing reference when
the output timing selection process automatically switches to it from another.
This may be caused by the following reasons:
• Failure, or quality change/priority changes of previous active timing reference.
• Quality change/priority changes of the current active timing reference.

Automatic switching to a timing reference on the output timing selection process alarm:
Alarm identifier / AUTOSWTIMREF-T4

Mnemonic
ASAP type LINEREF
Alarm category Timing
Alarm source See “AUTOSWTIMREF-T4” (p. B-4).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
No corrective action is required. This is a normal message.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Automatic switch of working entity to protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Automatic switch of working entity to protection

(Automatic) switch of service from working to protection facility.

Automatic switch of working entity to protection condition:
Alarm identifier / WKSWPR

Mnemonic
• ASAPFFP
Alarm source See “WKSWPR” (p. B-80).
Notes:
2. Alarms with a 1+1 ODUk SNCP as the source of alarm use the “TO” ODU connection point
as reporting entity.
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Automatic switch of working entity to protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
The Automatic switch of working entity to protection condition is to be
understood as an information rather than as an alarm and will be cleared autonomously as
soon as the switch request is cleared.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Automatic switch to a timing reference
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Automatic switch to a timing reference

Meaning of alarm
The AUTOSWTIMREF alarm is a normal condition to indicate that the clock switches to
the active timing reference. The OT port has detected an AUTOSWTIMREF condition at
the LINEREF layer. A LINEREF detects LINEREF during the automatic switch of a
timing reference due to failure, or quality change/priority changes of timing references.

Automatic switch to a timing reference condition:
Alarm identifier / AUTOSWTIMREF

Mnemonic
ASAP type LINEREF
Alarm category Synchronisation
Alarm source LINEREF
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Automatic switch to protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Automatic switch to protection

Meaning of alarm
Automatic switch to protection is a standing condition (for all card types except
OPS), indicating that the protection facility/equipment is active. This condition is raised
only when reversion is enabled.
For OPS non-revertive switch this is a transient condition, indicating there is a switching
event.
Note: After a warm reset of the OPS card, such condition might be raised even
without real switch occurred.
If the working facility/equipment is error-free then the condition automatically clears
once the wait-to-restore timer has expired.

Automatic switch to protection alarm:

Mnemonic
SC/TC OPS: Transient condition (TC)
All other cards:Standing condition (SC)
ASAP type 1GbE, 10GbE, CBR2G5, CBRAR, EQPT, FE, FC100, FC200,
FC400, FC800, FC1200, FE, OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4,
OC48/STM16, OC192/STM64, OCH, ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex,
OTU1, OTU2, OTU3
Alarm source See “WKSWPR” (p. B-80).
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Automatic switch to protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-27: “Clear Automatic switch to protection alarm” (p. 3-79).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Automatic switch to working
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Automatic switch to working

Meaning of alarm
The Automatic switch to working alarm indicates an automatic protection switch
from the protection side to the working side. As a result, the working side becomes the
active side. This can occur when a fault is detected on the protection side, or when the
user provisions the protection side to Admin Down.
The Automatic switch to working alarm applies to all protection schemes
(Y-cable, OPS, ESNCP) when the protection group is non-revertive. (Y-cable can be
provisioned to either revertive or non-revertive. OPS and ESNCP are always
non-revertive.)
For OPS non-revertive switch this is a transient condition, indicating there is a switching
event.
Note: After a warm reset of the OPS card, such condition might be raised even
without real switch occurred.

Automatic switch to working condition:
Alarm identifier / WKSWBK

Mnemonic
ASAP type 1GbE, 10GbE, CBR2G5, CBRAR, EQPT, FC100, FC200, FC400,
FC800, FC1200, FE, OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4, OC48/STM16,
OC192/STM64, OCH, ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex, OTU1, OTU2,
OTU3
Alarm source See “WKSWBK” (p. B-79).
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Automatic switch to working
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-28: “Clear Automatic switch to working alarm” (p. 3-81).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Automatic system Synchronization Switch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Automatic system Synchronization Switch

Meaning of alarm
An automatic timing reference switch for system timing has occurred.
Possible causes of an automatic timing reference switch include:
• A timing reference has failed.
• The quality of a timing reference has changed.
• The priority of a timing reference has changed.

Automatic system Synchronization Switch condition:
Alarm identifier / AUTOSYNCSW

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPTIMING
Alarm source External timing reference
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Automatic system Synchronization Switch condition is to be understood
as an information rather than as an alarm. As it is a transient condition, it does not require
clearing.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Automatic timing reference switch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Automatic timing reference switch

Meaning of alarm
The AUTOSYNCSW condition is a system timing switch state event that indicates the
Automatic Switch of a timing reference both for system input and output timing due to
failure or quality change or priority change of timing references.

Automatic timing reference switch condition:
Alarm identifier / AUTOSYNCSW

Mnemonic
ASAP type SYNC
Alarm source See “AUTOSYNCSW” (p. B-4).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
AUTOSYNCSW is an event. No corrective action is required.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details B1 Signal Degrade
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B1 Signal Degrade
Meaning of alarm
The OT port has detected Excessive BER on the OC-n/STM-n port of the 11STAR1 card.
This defect indicates that a local OC-n/STM-n port has detected a BER that exceeds
selected threshold. The default value is 10-6 for STM-64 (also from STM-16, STM-4,
STM-1), and 10-7 for STM-256.
• Damaged or dirty fiber connected to the local receiver
• Received power may not be within the acceptable range on local port input
• Damaged or dirty receiver inside pluggable module

B1 Signal Degrade alarm:
Alarm identifier / B1SD

Mnemonic
ASAP type OC192/STM64, TDM
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “B1SD” (p. B-4).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-29: “Clear B1 Signal Degrade alarm” (p. 3-84).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Backward Defect Indication - ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Backward Defect Indication - ODU

Meaning of alarm
The OT port has detected a Backward Defect Indication at the ODUk Path layer. This
defect indicates that the peer OTUk port has detected a condition that is treated as Server
Signal Failure (conditions such as LOS, LOF, LOM, TIM, ODU-AIS, ODU-OCI or
ODU-LCK would contribute to SSF).
• A misconnected, damaged or dirty fiber on the trail between the local OTUk port
transmitter and the far end receiver
• OTS/OMS layer failure on the OCh trail
• The received power may not be within the acceptable range on the Far end input

Backward Defect Indication - ODU alarm:
Alarm identifier / BDIODU

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU2, OTU3, OTU4
Alarm source See “BDIODU” (p. B-5).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-30: “Clear Backward Defect Indication - ODU alarm” (p. 3-85).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Backward Defect Indication - OTU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Backward Defect Indication - OTU

Meaning of alarm
The OT port has detected a Backward Defect Indication (BDI) at the OTUk Section layer.
This defect indicates that the peer OTUk port has detected a condition that is treated as
Server Signal Failure (conditions such as LOS, LOF or LOM would contribute to SSF)

Backward Defect Indication - OTU alarm:
Alarm identifier / BDI

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTU2, OTU3, OTU4
Alarm source See “BDI” (p. B-5).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-31: “Clear Backward Defect Indication - OTU” (p. 3-86).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Backward Defect Indication - Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Backward Defect Indication - Path

The ODUk receive signal contains the Backward Defect Indication (BDI).
BDI is an indication that a signal fail (SF) condition has been detected in the downstream
equipment.
Whether the alarm is related to the receive direction or transmit direction, is indicated in
the alarm message by means of the Direction parameter.

Backward Defect Indication - Path alarm:
Alarm identifier / BDI-P

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPODUn
Effect on service; identical Not service-affecting (NSA).
for both directions
setting); identical for both
directions NSA Not alarmed (NA)
Alarm source ODUk path: ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2E, ODU3, ODU3E2,
ODU4
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-32: “Clear Backward Defect Indication - Path” (p. 3-87).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Backward Defect Indication - Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Backward Defect Indication - Section

The receive signal at the affected OTUk port contains the Backward Defect Indication
(BDI).
equipment.

Backward Defect Indication - Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / BDI-S

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPOTU
Alarm source OTUk port (OTU2, OTU2E, OTU3, OTU3E2, OTU4 )
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-33: “Clear Backward Defect Indication - Section” (p. 3-88).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Backward Defect Indication - TCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Backward Defect Indication - TCM

Meaning of alarm
The monitored TCM has detected a Backward Defect Indication at the ODUk Path layer.
This defect indicates that the peer OTUk port has detected a condition that is treated as
Server Signal Failure (conditions such as LOS, LOF, LOM, TIM, ODU-AIS, ODU-OCI
or ODU-LCK would contribute to SSF).

Backward Defect Indication – TCM alarm:
Alarm identifier / BDITCM

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU2TCM{1-6}, ODU3TCM{1-3}
Alarm source 11QPA4
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-34: “Clear Backward Defect Indication on TCM Layer” (p. 3-89).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Backward Defect Indication on TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Backward Defect Indication on TCM Layer

The far-end receive signal contains the Backward Defect Indication (BDI).
equipment.

Backward Defect Indication on TCM Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / BDI-T

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPTCM
Alarm source See “BDI-T” (p. B-5).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-34: “Clear Backward Defect Indication on TCM Layer” (p. 3-89).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Battery off or power filter off/Battery power at backplane
Network element alarms off or voltage low
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Battery off or power filter off/Battery power at backplane off

or voltage low
Meaning of alarm
Either the voltage level of the external DC supply is low or the breaker switch has been
turned off. This alarm is raised if there is no voltage going to the breaker feed or the
voltage is below the threshold (35V). This could be due to the breaker being shut off, or
due to a problem with the power feed to the breaker card.

Battery off or power filter off/Battery power at backplane off
or voltage low alarm:
Alarm identifier / PWR

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source PF
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-35: “Clear Battery off or power filter off/Battery power at
backplane off or voltage low alarm” (p. 3-90).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card clock frequency measured out of spec
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card clock frequency measured out of spec

Meaning of alarm
The CARDCLKOFFFREQ alarm is raised when the periodic measurement indicates that
the non-high stability oscillator is more than 54.6 ppm different than the high stability
oscillator that it is measured against.
This alarm is reported against PFs on PSS-32 and on cards that support clock detection on
PSS-16.
PSS-32 supports automatic and manual switching for the following cards: 11STAR1,
11STMM10, 11QPA4, 11DPM12, 11DPE12A, 11DPE12E, 43SCA1, 43SCX4,
43SCX4E, 43STA1P, 43STA1PB, 43STX4, 43STX4P, A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG,
AM2032A, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A, AM2625A, CWR8, CWR8-88, WR2-88,
WR20-TF, WR8-88A, and WR8-88AF.
PSS-16 will only alarm and protect against clock failures if one of the following cards are
present: 11STAR1, 11STMM10, 11QPA4, 11DPM12, 11DPE12A, 11DPE12E, A2325A,
AHPHG, AHPLG, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A, AM2032A, AM2625A, and have
been upgraded to the latest FPGA firmware.
Note: All 100G OTs have their own on-board clock and do not use the shelf clock.

Card clock frequency measured out of spec alarm:
Alarm identifier / CARDCLKOFFFREQ

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source “CARDCLKOFFFREQ” (p. B-6)
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card clock frequency measured out of spec
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-36: “Clear Card clock frequency measured out of spec ” (p. 3-92).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card Autonomous Reset
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card Autonomous Reset

Meaning of alarm
The addressed card or slot is performing an autonomous reset.
The Card Autonomous Reset condition is issued as a transient condition to inform
you that a reset of a pack has started. There is no corrective action to perform. Any
failures on the pack will be reported after the reset completes.

Card Autonomous Reset condition:
Alarm identifier / AUTORESET

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “AUTORESET” (p. B-4).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
No corrective action is required for AUTORESET. However, if repeated AUTORESET
events are reported against a single card, reseat the card. If the condition persists, replace
the card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card booting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card booting
Meaning of alarm
The Card booting condition is raised when card is cold rebooted.

Card booting condition:
Alarm identifier / CARDBOOT

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source All cards
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
No corrective action is required. This alarm clears automatically once the card is booted.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card Degrade - Device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card Degrade - Device

The Card Degrade - Device alarm indicates a fault on the card that has caused the
system to declare a hardware failure. This condition may be declared due to a failure in
the SEEP or other unknown hardware failures depending on the card type the alarm is
raised against.
The Card Degrade - Device alarm indicates a lower priority fault on the card that
does not directly affect the traffic currently flowing through the device.

Card Degrade - Device alarm:
Alarm identifier / EQPTDGR

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “EQPTDGR” (p. B-11).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-37: “Clear Card Degrade - Device” (p. 3-93).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card degrade - Wavelength Tracker Channel ID Insertion
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card degrade - Wavelength Tracker Channel ID Insertion

The wavelength tracker encoder card has detected an internal fault and notifies the user
that the wavelength tracker information is not a reliable monitoring tool.
The internal fault can be a problem with the wavelength tracker encoder hardware, or the
problem can be low input channel optical power to the wavelength tracker encoder. The
latter is most likely the root cause when a pluggable SFP EVOA is used for the encoder
ports, as in an MVAC port, or VAn port of an OT card. Symptoms of this behavior
include channels that are incorrectly declared absent, and/or detected channels powers for
this channel instance may not accurately represent the actual channel power.
Note: Other wavelength tracker points downstream may generate alarms.
This alarm is supported by switchponder cards in OCS compounds. It is raised, however,
in the WDM compound for the connected SFD or CLS port.

Card degrade - Wavelength Tracker Channel ID Insertion alarm:
Alarm identifier / MOD

Mnemonic
ASAP type Photonic applications: OCH
Alarm category Photonic applications: OCH
Switching applications: Transmission (OCh)
Alarm source See “MOD” (p. B-32).
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card degrade - Wavelength Tracker Channel ID Insertion
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-38: “Clear Card degrade - Wavelength Tracker Channel ID Insertion”
(p. 3-95).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card failure - boot failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card failure - boot failure

Meaning of alarm

Card failure - boot failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / EQPTBOOT

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-39: “Clear Card failure - boot failure alarm” (p. 3-97).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card failure - communication
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card failure - communication

Meaning of alarm
The CONTCOM alarm is raised by the active EC when it cannot communicate to the
standby EC or any other card in the system that does not have a higher priority equipment
failure.
The NE has detected the presence of a card, but is unable to establish internal
communications with it. Possible causes for this alarm are:
• A faulty card
• A misconfigured/invalid shelf ID
• A problem with the backplane
• A cable has been cut or disconnected from one end or the other
• The subtended shelf has been turned off
• The user panel on the subtended shelf has been extracted
• Fan, OPS: card not communicating with the Equipment Controller
• LDs: sub-processor not communicating with main housekeeper processor on card
• Loss of power to 1/2 the shelf
This condition may be accompanied by system timing-related or card sanity conditions.

Card failure - communication alarm:
Alarm identifier / CONTCOM

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source All cards except Equipment Controller
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card failure - communication
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-40: “Clear Card Failure - Communication alarm” (p. 3-99).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card failure - crypto
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card failure - crypto

Meaning of alarm
Encryption self test functions on the card have failed.

Card failure - crypto alarm:
Alarm identifier / EQPTCRYPTO

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source 11QPEN4
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card failure - device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card failure - device

Meaning of alarm
The CONTEQPT condition indicates a fault on the Equipment Controller that has caused
the system to declare a hardware failure. This condition may be declared due to a failure
in the SEEP or other unknown hardware failures. This is a major non-service affecting
alarm for the Equipment Controller and causes a redundancy switch to the mate.
The EQPT condition indicates a fault on the card that has caused the system to declare a
hardware failure. This condition may be declared due to a failure in the SEEP or other
unknown hardware failures depending on the card type the alarm is raised against. This is
a critical service affecting alarm for cards carrying traffic and affects the traffic currently
flowing through the failed device.

Card failure - device alarm:
Alarm identifier / CONTEQPT

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA Major
Alarm source See “CONTEQPT” (p. B-7).

Card failure - device alarm:
Alarm identifier / EQPT

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card failure - device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

setting) NSA –
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
WTOCM and WTOCMA packs: If the Card failure - device alarm is raised and is
followed by Card Failure - clear (within 10 seconds), this alarm can be ignored because
the pack has been able to clear the problem by resetting a device on the pack. No
corrective action is required in this case. In addition, power adjustment suspension alarms
(PWRSUSP and PWRTILTSUSP) may be raised and cleared in conjunction with the
Card failure - device raise and clear (no corrective action is required).
Note: The Card failure - device alarm is reported against the AID of the
channel control point, while PWRSUSP and/or PWRTILTSUSP is reported against
the line LD for the degree(s) the WTOCM/A is monitoring when this
Card failure - device case occurs. These other conditions could be related to
root condition raised against the WTOCM/A.
For all other packs, proceed to Procedure 3-41: “Clear Card failure - device alarm”
(p. 3-101).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card Identification Event
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card Identification Event

Meaning of alarm
The CRDINIT transient condition indicates that a new card has been inserted in the 1830
PSS. It will be followed by the CARDINIT standing condition as the card begins
initialization.

Card Identification Event condition:
Alarm identifier / CRDINIT

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card initializing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card initializing
Meaning of alarm
The CARDINIT is raised when a card is in the process of initializing.

Card initializing condition:
Alarm identifier / CARDINIT

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source All cards except Uplink cards
Related information
Local indications
CARDINIT causes the card status LED to flash green.
Trouble clearing
This condition should clear by itself, or be replaced by another card alarm. No corrective
action is required.
If the alarm does not clear, do one of the following:
• Reset or replace the card as needed.
• Follow the procedure Procedure 3-41: “Clear Card failure - device alarm” (p. 3-101).
Note: To get correct PM counts after an MSC cold reboot, initialize the PM registers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card Inventory Error
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card Inventory Error

Meaning of alarm
The INVENTORYERROR alarm is raised when the device installed in the shelf has an
EEPROM that does not contain the correct or recognizable information.

Card Inventory Error alarm:
Alarm identifier / INVENTORYERROR

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-42: “Clear Card Inventory Error alarm” (p. 3-103).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card Manual Reset
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card Manual Reset

Meaning of alarm
The addressed card or slot is performing a manual reset. The MANRESET condition is
issued as a transient condition to inform you that a reset of a pack has started.

Card Manual Reset alarm:
Alarm identifier / MANRESET

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “MANRESET” (p. B-28).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
No corrective action is required. Any failures on the pack will be reported after the reset
completes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card mismatch
Meaning of alarm
The Card mismatch alarm is raised when the card inserted into the affected slot is of a
different type than that which was provisioned. This could occur when there is a card type
mismatch.

Card mismatch alarm:
Alarm identifier / MISMATCH

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Effect on service Service-affecting (NSA)
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “MISMATCH (Card)” (p. B-31).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-43: “Clear Card mismatch alarm” (p. 3-104).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card missing/Card removal unseat
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card missing/Card removal unseat

Meaning of alarm
The card missing condition is raised when a provisioned slot, that has both a programmed
card-type and an Admin state of In-Service, does not have a card in it. The slot has been
provisioned as such and no card has been inserted, or an inserted In-Service card has been
physically removed from that slot.

Card missing/Card removal unseat alarm:
Alarm identifier / REPLUNITMISS

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-44: “Clear Card missing/Card removal unseat alarm” (p. 3-106).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card not allowed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card not allowed

Meaning of alarm
The NOTALLOWED alarm indicates that the card is not allowed in the shelf or system.
• NE band type does not match the applicable band of the card.
• A card needing WT support is present in the shelf with Wavelength Tracker mode
disabled.

Card not allowed alarm:
Alarm identifier / NOTALLOWED

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-45: “Clear Card not allowed alarm” (p. 3-108).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card over temperature
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card over temperature

Meaning of alarm
A high temperature threshold on a card has been exceeded. There may be a fan failure,
fan blockage, site climate control failure, lack of filler cards in empty slots, or a failed
sensor. This alarm is raised when a card is over the specified operating temperature
(measured by temperature sensors on the card).

Card over temperature alarm:
Alarm identifier / INTTEMP [over], INTTEMPHIGH

Mnemonic (INTTEMP [over] applies to the Equipment Controller (EC) card,
INTTEMPHIGH applies to non-Controller cards)
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “INTTEMPHIGH” (p. B-20).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-46: “Clear Card over temperature” (p. 3-109).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card provisioning failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card provisioning failure

Meaning of alarm
The Card Provisioning Failure may be raised if a card rejects the provisioning parameters
given to it by the Equipment Controller upon a reset or due to a user provisioning action.
This may indicate a discrepancy on the database of the Equipment Controller or may
indicate a problem with the software.
The card, against which the DATAFLT condition is raised, may not be able to provide
services since some or all of the provisioning parameters were rejected.

Card provisioning failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / DATAFLT

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “DATAFLT” (p. B-8).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-47: “Clear Card provisioning failure alarm” (p. 3-111).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card Under Temperature
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card Under Temperature

Meaning of alarm
The card temperature is below operational limits. There may be a climate control or
sensor failure. This alarm is raised when the card is under the specified operating
temperature (measured by temperature sensors on the card). The network element
requires additional heating to bring it back to an acceptable operating temperature.

Card Under Temperature alarm:
Alarm identifier / INTTEMPLOW

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “INTTEMPLOW” (p. B-20).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-48: “Clear Card under temperature alarm” (p. 3-113).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card Unknown
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card Unknown
Meaning of alarm
The system does not recognize the inserted card. An unsupported card type, or faulty card
is present. This alarm is raised when a card has been inserted but never establishes
communications with the controller.

Card Unknown alarm:
Alarm identifier / UNKNOWN

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-49: “Clear Card unknown alarm” (p. 3-114).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card Would Exceed Shelf Amperage Limit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card Would Exceed Shelf Amperage Limit

Meaning of alarm
The EXCESSLOAD condition indicates the last card inserted draws an additional current
load on the shelf that exceeds the current limit of the equipped power filters. The pack in
the affected slot will not initialize and operate.
When the sum of the power required by all the cards in the shelf exceeds the rated
capacity of the power input cards, the EXCESSLOAD condition is raised against the
power input cards. While this condition will not immediately shut down the system, it
effectively causes a loss of redundancy. If one power input card should fail or trip its
circuit breaker, the entire load will be presented to the other power input card and it will
also trip its circuit breaker.

Card Would Exceed Shelf Amperage Limit alarm:
Alarm identifier / EXCESSLOAD

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “EXCESSLOAD” (p. B-12).
Related information
Local indications
Note: Where conditions such as low voltage in a power plant, or a high central office
(CO) temperature are expected, it is recommended to change the severity of the alarm
to Minor (MN) or Major (MJ) to alert users of possible issue in CO.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Card Would Exceed Shelf Amperage Limit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-50: “Clear Card would exceed shelf amperage limit ” (p. 3-116).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Channel Absent
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Channel Absent
Meaning of alarm
Wavelength Tracker could not detect the provisioned channel.
If... Then...
the port is not WTOCM monitored and the alarm is raised if the expected keys are not
expected keys and power are provisioned for a received. (This state also indictes optical
channel, power is absent for the channel).
the port is WTOCM monitored and expected the alarm is raised if optical power is absent
keys and power are provisioned for a channel, for the channel.
Possible reasons for this alarm may be:

• the channel is missing
• the channel is outside the detectable range
• the Wavekeys are not being correctly applied at the source OT or SVAC (does not
apply to WTOCM monitored case)
If the channel is missing it could be a provisioning error or fibering error.
At the end of each step wait for several seconds to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the
next step:
Note: It may take several seconds for channel power out of range and channel absent
alarms to clear when performing the corrective actions listed below.

Channel Absent alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOS

Mnemonic
ASAP type OCH
Alarm severity (default SA Critical
setting) NSA –
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Channel Absent
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm source See “LOS” (p. B-26).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-51: “Clear Channel Absent” (p. 3-118).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Channel attempted escape from latchup routine failed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Channel attempted escape from latchup routine failed

Meaning of alarm
The ESCLATCHFAIL alarm is raised for the following topologies/actions when the
escape from latchup routine fails:
• When SCOT cannot calculate the inferred PPC at the WR Thru In port
• For a CWR8/8-88 node
• For Thru and Mesh channels in a WR node
• For locally added channels at a WR Add port attenuation controller
• For the WSS controller in an A/D block of an anydir node (top WR8-88A)
• For Add In ports in the middle WR8-88A of an anydir node- raised at Sig Out of
bottom CWR8-88)
• When adding a new add-xc for a ROADM using a dangling OT

Channel attempted escape from latchup routine failed alarm:
Alarm identifier / ESCLATCHFAIL

Mnemonic
ASAP type OCH
Alarm source See “ESCLATCHFAIL” (p. B-11).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Channel attempted escape from latchup routine failed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-52: “Clear Channel attempted escape from latchup routine failed
” (p. 3-120).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Channel Collision
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Channel Collision
Meaning of alarm
Wavelength Tracker has detected more than one instance of the same channel at this port.
This is likely due to a fibering problem or equipment failure upstream from the alarmed
port.
Note: The alarmed port indicates the first occurrence of the collision along the path.
All downstream occurrences are flagged as conditions.
An OCHCOLLISION gets raised when a channel is present but the tones are
unexpected or, a channel is not present but there are more than 2 unexpected tones in
the upper or lower range for this channel.

Channel Collision alarm:
Alarm identifier / OCHCOLLISION

Mnemonic
ASAP type OCH
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “OCHCOLLISION” (p. B-34).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-53: “Clear Channel collision ” (p. 3-123).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Channel Collision Output Direction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Channel Collision Output Direction

Meaning of alarm
port.
Note: The alarmed port indicates the first occurrence of the collision along the path.
All downstream occurrences are flagged as conditions.

Channel Collision Output Direction alarm:
Alarm identifier / OCHCOLLISION-OUT

Mnemonic
ASAP type OCH
Alarm severity SA Critical (Not alarmed at ingress)
(default setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “OCHCOLLISION-OUT” (p. B-34).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-54: “Clear Channel Collision Output Direction” (p. 3-126).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Channel FDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Channel FDI
Meaning of alarm
When a photonic cross-connect is created on a network element and the cross-connect is
not the source node cross-connect for the lightpath, the Channel FDI condition will be
present at the input port from the external fiber connection. When the source node
photonic cross-connect is entered and the measured channel power reaches its target
power at the egress line, the nodes along the rest of the lightpath are notified to begin
counting down to clear their Channel FDI conditions. The Channel FDI condition clears
automatically 5 to 10 minutes after this notification (depending on provisioning of other
parameters).
Note: This not-reported condition masks other reported optical channel alarms to
effectively suppress alarms and transient alarms during cross-connect setup.
Note: If the photonic cross-connect is entered as with Wavelength Tracker Key
selection manual, a so-called manually keyed cross-connect, the countdown timer to
clear the Channel FDI condition begins immediately. The system assumes no control
network is available to distribute the notification to begin the countdown.

Channel FDI alarm:
Alarm identifier / OCHFDI

Mnemonic
ASAP type OCH
Alarm source See “OCHFDI” (p. B-34).
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Channel FDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-55: “Clear Optical Channel Forward Defect Indication alarm”
(p. 3-128).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Channel optical power out of range
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Channel optical power out of range

Meaning of alarm
The OPR condition is raised by a Wavelength Tracker decoder capable port when the
measured optical channel power value is outside the range defined by the provisioned
expected power plus/minus the provisioned deviation value for the channel.
There are several possible causes of this alarm:
• Loss change between components in the network
• Incomplete power adjustments for the channel
• Incorrect power settings for the channel at power control points in the network
• Incorrect provisioning of the expected power or deviation value
• Disturbance to channels in transmission due to network fault event such as a fiber cut
• Failure of the source encoder to properly encode Wave Keys (applies only if not
WTOCM monitored port)

Channel optical power out of range alarm:
Alarm identifier / OPR

Mnemonic
ASAP type OCH
Alarm source See “OPR” (p. B-37).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Channel optical power out of range
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-56: “Clear Channel optical power out of range ” (p. 3-130).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Channel OSNR is out of valid measurement range
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Channel OSNR is out of valid measurement range

Meaning of alarm
The OSNROOMR condition indicates that a WTOCMn card has a measured channel
OSNR lower than 10dB or higher than 25dB.

Channel OSNR is out of valid measurement range alarm:
Alarm identifier / OSNROOMR

Mnemonic
ASAP type OCH
Alarm severity (default NSA Warning (WR)
setting)
Alarm source See “OSNROOMR” (p. B-38).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Channel OSNR is out of valid measurement range alarm is cleared automatically at
the end of first complete interval during which the updated measuring OSNR value is in
the valid measuring range (from 10dB to 25dB).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Channel PDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Channel PDI
Meaning of alarm
When a photonic cross-connect is created on a network element and the cross-connect is
the source node cross connect for the lightpath, the Channel PDI condition will be present
at the source port for the lightpath. At the source node, after measured channel power
reaches its target power at the egress line, the nodes along the rest of the lightpath are
notified to begin counting down to clear their Channel FDI conditions. The source node
Channel PDI condition clears automatically 5 to 10 minutes after target power is reached
and the notification is sent (depending on provisionig of other parameters).
Note: This not-reported condition masks other reported optical channel alarms to
effectively suppress alarms and transient alarms during cross-connect setup.

Channel PDI alarm:
Alarm identifier / OCHPDI

Mnemonic
ASAP type OCH
Alarm source See “OCHPDI” (p. B-35).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-57: “Clear Channel PDI” (p. 3-132).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Channel Power Unachievable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Channel Power Unachievable

This condition is raised if the present network output power at the OT, SVAC, MVAC,
MVAC8B, or VAn port is less than the programmed network output power.
When this alarm is present there is a high probability that this service is not being
impacted. Therefore, immediate action is not required. If the port is an SVAC, MVAC or
VAn port encoder, there is a high probability the condition may be a result of low input
power due to high loss between components, or low output power from the source optical
interface. This situation should be investigated as soon as possible.

Channel Power Unachievable alarm:
Alarm identifier / OPRUNACHIEVE

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “OPRUNACHIEVE” (p. B-37).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Channel Power Unachievable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-58: “Clear Channel Power Unachievable” (p. 3-134).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Channel Power Unstable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Channel Power Unstable

Meaning of alarm
The Channel Power Unstable alarm is raised on cards with a Wavelength Tracker
detect point when the power is outside of the provisioned power range.
This alarm may be caused by one of the following:
• Introducing more or less attenuation in the fiber
• Adjusting the amplifier, which may have occurred elsewhere in the network, due to
fiber repair activity or network adjustments such as adding or deleting a node
• In the case of FOADM (running in manual mode) when channel power is not adjusted
to the expected power levels

Channel Power Unstable alarm:
Alarm identifier / OPRTX

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “OPRTX” (p. B-37).
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Channel Power Unstable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-59: “Clear Channel Power Unstable” (p. 3-138).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Channel Unexpected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Channel Unexpected
Meaning of alarm
Wavelength Tracker has detected an instance of a channel that was not provisioned at an
input port (unexpected channel). An OCHUNKNOWN alarm is raised when the
provisioning of a service is not yet complete, or there has been a misfibering.
The Channel Unexpected alarm is raised in the following cases:
If... Then...
the channel is not provisioned with expected the alarm is raised if keys are received
keys, corresponding to the channel.
the channel is provisioned with expected keys, the alarm is raised if a set of keys is detected
for the channel that does not match the
provisioned key values.
the port is monitored by the WTOCM and if the alarm can be raised if optical power is
the channel is not provisioned, detected at the channel frequency with no keys
detected.
This alarm may be the result of misdirected traffic or it may be a transient during service
creation. For this alarm to be raised, the power of the channel being received must be
above the WT Key detection limit.

Channel Unexpected alarm:
Alarm identifier / OCHUNKNOWN

Mnemonic
ASAP type OCH
Alarm source See “OCHUNKNOWN” (p. B-35).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Channel Unexpected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-60: “Clear Channel Unexpected ” (p. 3-140).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Channel Unexpected Out
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Channel Unexpected Out

Meaning of alarm
Wavelength Tracker has detected an instance of a channel that was not provisioned at the
output of a port. The provisioning of a service is not yet complete, or there has been a
misfibering. This alarm may be the result of misdirected traffic or it may be a transient
during service creation.
The Channel Unexpected alarm is raised in the following cases:
If... Then...
the channel is not provisioned with expected the alarm is raised if keys are received
keys, corresponding to the channel.
the channel is provisioned with expected keys, the alarm is raised if a set of keys is detected
for the channel that does not match the
provisioned key values.
the port is monitored by the WTOCM and if the alarm can be raised if optical power is
the channel is not provisioned, detected at the channel frequency with no keys
detected.

Channel Unexpected Out alarm:
Alarm identifier / OCHUNKNOWN-OUT

Mnemonic
ASAP type OCH
Alarm source See “OCHUNKNOWN-OUT” (p. B-35).
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Channel Unexpected Out
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-61: “Clear Channel Unexpected Out” (p. 3-143).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Client Signal Fail detected on the ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Client Signal Fail detected on the ODU

The receive signal in the ODUk path contains a Client Signal Fail (CSF) indication which
has been inserted in the upstream equipment due to a failure condition of the client signal.
The Client Signal Fail detected on the ODU alarm is relevant in the
following cases:
• 1 GbE transparently transported by ODU0
• 10 GbE transparently transported by ODU2 (GFP-F, AMCC, OLDAMCC, and
CAMCC mapping)
• 10 GbE transparently transported by ODU2E
• STM-16/OC-48 transparently transported by ODU1
As a consequent action, typically the LAN-side output is switched off, or a Local Fault
Indication (LFI) signal is inserted.
Note: In the case of 10 GbE transparently transported by ODU2 (GFP-F, AMCC,
OLDAMCC, and CAMCC mapping), the
Client Signal Fail detected on the ODU alarm does not cause consequent
actions.

Client Signal Fail detected on the ODU alarm:
Alarm identifier / ODUCSF

Mnemonic
ASAP type Depending on the ODU layer:
• ASAPODU0
• ASAPODU1
• ASAPODU2
• ASAPODU2E
Effect on service Always service-affecting (SA)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Client Signal Fail detected on the ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “ODUCSF” (p. B-36).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-62: “Clear Client Signal Fail detected on the ODU” (p. 3-145)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Client Signal Failure (GFP)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Client Signal Failure (GFP)

The received Generic-Framing-Procedure (GFP) frame contains a Client Signal Fail
(CSF) indication which has been inserted in the upstream equipment due to a failure
condition of the client signal.
The Client Signal Failure (GFP) alarm is relevant for GFP-F-mapped Ethernet
payload only, that is for:
• 10 GbE transparently transported by ODU2 (GFP-F mapping)
• 10 GbE transparently transported by ODU2 (GFP-F (Ethernet PP_OS) / AMCC
mapping, GFP-F (Ethernet PP_CIENA) / CAMCC mapping)
As a consequent action, typically the LAN-side output is switched off, or a Local Fault
Indication (LFI) signal is inserted.

Client Signal Failure (GFP) alarm:
Alarm identifier / GFPCSF

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPODU2
Alarm category Ethernet Communication (Transmission)
setting) NSA –
Alarm source ODU2 path termination
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Client Signal Failure (GFP)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-63: “Clear Client Signal Failure (GFP)” (p. 3-147).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Client Signal Failure - ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Client Signal Failure - ODU

Meaning of alarm
The receive signal in the ODUk path, contains a Client Signal Fail (CSF) indication in the
OPU overhead which has been inserted in the upstream equipment due to a failure
condition of the client signal.
The “Client Signal Failure- ODU” alarm is relevant in the following cases:
• GbE mapped to ODU0
• STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 mapped to ODU0 or ODU1
• FC-100/FC-200/FC-400 mapped to ODU0 or ODU1 or ODUflex
• SDSDI/HDSDI/3GSDI/FE mapped to ODU0 or ODU1 or ODUflex

Client Signal Failure - ODU alarm:
Alarm identifier / CSFODU

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU
Alarm source See “CSFODU” (p. B-8).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Client Signal Failure - ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-64: “Clear Client Signal Failure - ODU” (p. 3-149).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Clock freq error > 54.6 ppm (>20 ppm causes OTN errors)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Clock freq error > 54.6 ppm (>20 ppm causes OTN errors)
Meaning of alarm
A BADCLKFREQ alarm is raised against the PF cards when the periodic measurement
indicates that CLK38A or CLK38B is off nominal (that is, CLK A and B differ by more
than 54.6 ppm; the third source determines the faulted card).
See “Card clock frequency measured out of spec ” (p. 2-128) for additional details on
PSS-16 and PSS-32 support of clock failure protection, and automatic and manual
switching.

Clock freq error > 54.6 ppm (>20 ppm causes OTN errors) alarm:
Alarm identifier / BADCLKFREQ

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source PF
Local indications
Trouble clearing
When a BADCLKFREQ is raised, the shelf controller causes all cards in the shelf to
switch their backplane clock source to that provided by the other PF. A BADCLKFREQ
alarm clears when three consecutive measurements indicate that CLK38A and CLK38B
differ by less than 9.0 ppm, and the local unstabilized clock is measured less than 54.6
ppm from nominal.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Clock freq error > 54.6 ppm (>20 ppm causes OTN errors)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Proceed to Procedure 3-65: “Clear Clock freq error > 54.6 ppm (>20 ppm causes OTN
errors) ” (p. 3-150).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Compact flash needs to be upgraded
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Compact flash needs to be upgraded

Meaning of alarm
The CFCAPACITYWARNING alarm is raised when the size of compact flash is less than
the programmed capacity. For example, a 16G load is installed in a 4G compact flash (or
any load requiring more space than the actual compact flash installed).

Compact flash needs to be upgraded alarm:
Alarm identifier / CFCAPACITYWARNING

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source EC
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-66: “Clear Compact flash needs to be upgraded ” (p. 3-151).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Configuration mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration mismatch
Meaning of alarm
A provisioning command failed on an Ethernet switching data card, which resulted in a
configuration mismatch. This problem can occur using any 1830_PSS user interface
(CLI, WebUI, 1354_PhM, 5620_SAM, 1350_OMS). In the case of such a failure, it will
appear that the provisioning succeeded; the only indications of the failure would be this
alarm, a system log message, and possibly unexpected card behavior.
Until the failure is resolved, other provisioning commands for the same object may also
fail. If the line card undergoes a warm or cold reset while the failure is present, the
affected object could fail to be properly initiated, resulting in a prolonged traffic outage
until the mismatched fields are properly provisioned.
Only one instance of this alarm can be raised against a line card at any time, so if this
alarm is present, review system general log files to identify cases where multiple
provisioning commands have failed.

Configuration mismatch alarm:
Alarm identifier / CONFIGMM

Mnemonic
Ethernet (L2) Switching applications
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “CONFIGMM” (p. B-7).
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Configuration mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-67: “Clear Configuration mismatch ” (p. 3-152).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Clock Adjustment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Clock Adjustment
The system time of day was adjusted by more than 128 ms.

Clock Adjustment condition:
Alarm identifier / CLKADJ

Mnemonic
SC/TC Transient Condition (TC)
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source System timing
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Clock Adjustment condition is to be understood as information rather than as an
alarm.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Cold Start
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cold Start
Meaning of alarm
This is a normal report caused by user actions.

Cold Start condition:
Alarm identifier / SYSBOOT

Mnemonic
ASAP type COM
Alarm category COM
Alarm source SYSTEM
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
No action required. This is a normal report caused by user actions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Control Card redundancy is compromised
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Control Card redundancy is compromised

Meaning of alarm
The inactive controller is unable to provide redundancy protection. In some cases this is a
transitory alarm that occurs as redundant Equipment Controllers discover one another and
synchronize. Typical causes for the persistence of this alarm are:
• irreconcilable database schemas
• cannot support system timing
• system timing is compromised. The inactive controller system timing module is not
reporting the same status as the active controller or is reporting an error that the active
controller does not have.
Reasons that are generally transitory are:
• database not yet fully synched
• TIRS not yet synched
• subshelf link missing
• software loads are not yet synched.
Some or all of these may apply when the alarm is raised.

Control Card redundancy is compromised alarm:
Alarm identifier / SWEQPT

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “SWEQPT” (p. B-48).
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Control Card redundancy is compromised
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-68: “Clear Control Card redundancy is compromised” (p. 3-154).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Control Communication Failure for FLC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Control Communication Failure for FLC

Important! Although the Control Communication Failure for FLC alarm is
part of ASAPEQPT, it has no relevance for the present Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Release 7.0 because the detection of the alarm is not supported.
The Control Communication Failure for FLC alarm should be raised for several
failures concerning the communication between FLCs and other cards:
• SPI, CMISSSER communication to BTCs
• SPI communication to PSFs
• IPL LAN communication to the mate FLC
In particular for the SPI to BTC case, this yields the shelf inventory data unreadable, and
can cause FAN motors to be configured for full speed.
For the following hardware versions of FLCs, the SPI to BTC communication can be
disturbed temporarily:
• 8DG89216AAAA “SSY-CONTROLLER”, ICS01, ICS02
• 3AG34251AAAA “SSY-FLC64-FIRST LEVEL CONTROLLER”, ICS01
• 8DG89216ABAA “SSY-EC_HC-FIRST LEVEL CONTROLLER”, ICS01
• 3AG33727AAAA “SSY-FLC36EA-FIRST LEVEL CONTROLLER”, ICS01
• 3KC19489AAAA “SSY-FLC36-FIRST LEVEL CONTROLLER”, ICS01
• 8DG09217AAAA “SSY-FLC36LA-FIRST LEVEL CONTROLLER”, ICS01
As a result, the following situations may occur:
• Silent failures of some parts of the control infrastructure
• High acoustic noise due to the fan motors running at full speed
• Shelf RIM not available
If the SPI to BTC communication failure is temporary, that is in one of the FLC hardware
versions listed above, an FLC equipment protection switch may be used to solve the
problem.
In case of an SPI to BTC failure, the following indications are given to the operator:
• For extension shelves, a Remote Inventory Mismatch alarm is reported after an
FLC reboot.
• For the main shelf, the FLC stops in limited mode after reboot.
In case of an IPL LAN to mate FLC failure, an
Internal LAN Redundancy Degraded alarm is raised.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Control Communication Failure for MTX
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Control Communication Failure for MTX

A communication failure occurred on the internal bus system for the communication with
the matrix card.
Note: In case a Control Communication Failure for MTX alarm persists for
only a short duration and clears without user intervention, then probably the reason
for the communication problem could be identified system-internally and was clearly
attributable to an I/O card. In such a case, a Hardware failure alarm is reported
for the respective I/O card, and the Control Communication Failure for MTX
alarm is cleared.

Control Communication Failure for MTX alarm:
Alarm identifier / CONTCOM-MTX

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
setting) NSA –
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Control Communication Failure for MTX
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm source Although the monitoring point to detect communication failures

on the internal bus system is located on the matrix card itself, the
alarm is reported for the communication partner of the matrix card
in order to facilitate fault localization.
Possible communication partners of the matrix card are:
• Mate matrix card
• First-level Controllers (ECHC (FLC), FLC64 (FLC), FLC36,
FLC36EA)
• I/O cards
• Power Supply Filters (PSF3T8, PFC)
• Bus Termination cards (BTC3T8, BT3T8, BT36)
• Fan Unit (FAN3T8)
• High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel (HPCFAP)
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-69: “Clear Control Communication Failure for MTX” (p. 3-157).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Control Communication Failure Quadrant 1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Control Communication Failure Quadrant 1

A communication failure occurred in the internal communication between the
alarm-reporting matrix card and quadrant 1 of the system.
Figure 2-1 Physical slot numbering scheme

HPCFAP 90
PSF_A 91
FAN_A 92
Plenum
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Quadrant 1 Quadrant 2
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
MX_A
MX_B
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
BT_1 81 BT_2 82 BTC_1 83 BTC_2 84 BT_3 85 BT_4 86
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
71 72
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
FLC_A
FLC_B
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 73 74 75 76 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
Plenum
FAN_B 93
Air filter
PSF_B 94
g-pipg-0180
For units that occupy more than one slot, always the number of the upper left slot is used
for addressing.
As a consequence, the full-slot I/O cards can use the following slots:
• Quadrant 1: slot 1 to 8
Note: In case a Control Communication Failure Quadrant 1 alarm persists
for only a short duration and clears without user intervention, then probably the
reason for the communication problem could be identified system-internally and was
clearly attributable to an I/O card. In such a case, a Hardware failure alarm is
reported for the respective I/O card, and the
Control Communication Failure Quadrant 1 alarm is cleared.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Control Communication Failure Quadrant 1 alarm:
Alarm identifier / CONTCOM-Q1

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source The alarm is raised against the matrix card for which the
communication failure has been detected.
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-70: “Clear Control Communication Failure Quadrant 1” (p. 3-158).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


HPCFAP 90
PSF_A 91
FAN_A 92
Plenum
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
MX_A
MX_B
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
BT_1 81 BT_2 82 BTC_1 83 BTC_2 84 BT_3 85 BT_4 86
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
71 72
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
FLC_A
FLC_B
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 73 74 75 76 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
Plenum
FAN_B 93
Air filter
PSF_B 94
g-pipg-0180
for addressing.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
setting) NSA –
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


HPCFAP 90
PSF_A 91
FAN_A 92
Plenum
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
MX_A
MX_B
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
BT_1 81 BT_2 82 BTC_1 83 BTC_2 84 BT_3 85 BT_4 86
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
71 72
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
FLC_A
FLC_B
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 73 74 75 76 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
Plenum
FAN_B 93
Air filter
PSF_B 94
g-pipg-0180
for addressing.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
setting) NSA –
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


HPCFAP 90
PSF_A 91
FAN_A 92
Plenum
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
MX_A
MX_B
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
BT_1 81 BT_2 82 BTC_1 83 BTC_2 84 BT_3 85 BT_4 86
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
71 72
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
I/O card
FLC_A
FLC_B
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 73 74 75 76 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
Plenum
FAN_B 93
Air filter
PSF_B 94
g-pipg-0180
for addressing.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
setting) NSA –
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details CPU Performance Issue Detected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CPU Performance Issue Detected

Meaning of alarm
The CPUPERFORMANCE condition is triggered when the NE’s resources have
temporarily slowed during a system process such as an upgrade.

The following tabular overview summarizes important information concerning the CPU
Performance Issue Detected alarm:
Alarm identifier / CPUPERFORMANCE

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-74: “Clear CPU Performance Issue Detected” (p. 3-174).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Critical Filter Clogging
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Critical Filter Clogging

The air filter of the shelf is critically clogged.
Raise and clear conditions:
• The Critical Filter Clogging alarm is raised when the filter clogging rate is at
or above 100%.
• The Critical Filter Clogging alarm is cleared when the filter clogging rate is
below 80%.
Note: The Critical Filter Clogging alarm only represents the clogging of the
air filter caused by dust particles but not the blockage of the filter by a larger piece
(for example a piece of paper). The latter condition is represented by the
Filter Blocked alarm; see “Filter Blocked” (p. 2-298).

Critical Filter Clogging alarm:
Alarm identifier / FLTCLOGCRIT

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source Shelf
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Critical Filter Clogging
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-75: “Clear Critical Filter Clogging” (p. 3-176).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Current Key Mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Current Key Mismatch

Meaning of alarm
The Current Key Mismatch alarm indicates that the current encryption keys and WKAT
values do not match on both ends of an encrypted service circuit. If encryption has
already been enabled, this indicates that the payload will not be decrypted properly and is
service affecting. If encryption has not been enabled, then this CKM alarm will prevent
users from enabling encryption until this problem has been cleared.

Current Key Mismatch alarm:
Alarm identifier / CKM

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTU2
Effect on service Service-affecting (SA) or Not service-affecting (NSA)
setting) NSA Not alarmed
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-76: “Clear Current Key Mismatch” (p. 3-177).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Current Time Reference is Unstable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Current Time Reference is Unstable

Meaning of alarm
The PTPREF-UNUSABLE alarm is raised on the slave port when the timestamps of the
PTP port is consider unstable.
• SyncE is not synchronized between the master and slave nodes
• PDV on the PTP link is too large

Current Time Reference is Unstable alarm:
Alarm identifier / PTPREF-UNUSABLE

Mnemonic
ASAP type PTPPORT/TOD
Alarm source See “PTPREF-UNUSABLE” (p. B-40).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-77: “Clear Current Time Reference is Unstable” (p. 3-179).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details CWR Input LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CWR Input LOS

Meaning of alarm
The SIG port on one of the CWR8 cards has detected a Loss Of Signal. The LOS alarm is
raised if the power measured at the port input drops below a threshold.
• A misconnected, damaged or dirty fiber
• The received power may not be within the acceptable range

CWR Input LOS alarm:

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-78: “Clear CWR Input LOS ” (p. 3-180).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Database Backup
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Database Backup
Database backup is running.

Database Backup condition:
Alarm identifier / DB-BACKUP

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source System
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Database Backup condition is to be understood as information rather than as an
alarm and will be cleared autonomously as soon as the database backup has been
completed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Database invalid
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Database invalid
Meaning of alarm
When the DBINVALID condition is raised, the NE is not in a normal operating mode. As
a result, the NE does not boot normally and not all commands are allowed.
The DBINVALID condition may be raised as a result of the following:
• During initial installation, if the NE is not properly commissioned.
• The serial number in the database does not match that of the NE either because the
controller was replaced or the alarm card was replaced.
• A downgrade of NE software has occurred.
• EC is removed/reseated during a system process, causing file corruption.
• The database audit failed indicating some type of corruption of the database.

Database invalid alarm:
Alarm identifier / DBINVALID

Mnemonic
ASAP type COM
Alarm source See “DBINVALID” (p. B-9).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Database invalid
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-81: “Clear Database invalid alarm” (p. 3-186).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Database Restore
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Database Restore
Database Restore is running.

Database Restore condition:
Alarm identifier / DB-RESTORE

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source System
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Database Restore condition is to be understood as information rather than as an
alarm and will be cleared autonomously as soon as the database restore has been
completed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Database Synchronization Failed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Database Synchronization Failed

Meaning of alarm
The Active Equipment Controller is unable to synchronize its database with the inactive
Equipment Controller. This alarm may be raised under the following conditions:
• An incorrectly seated Equipment Controller
• The software loads on the active and inactive Equipment Controllers are not
compatible
• A hardware problem with one or both controllers

Database Synchronization Failed alarm:
Alarm identifier / DBMEMTRF

Mnemonic
ASAP type COM
Alarm source See “DBMEMTRF” (p. B-9).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-82: “Clear Database Synchronization Failed ” (p. 3-188).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Data error or timeout
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Data error or timeout

Meaning of alarm
The Data Error or Timeout condition is raised when the card software's CM Agent
receives one of three errors from the lower level software:
• Timeout (ProvFailTimeout) - it timed out before receiving a response
• Bad parameters (ProvFailBadParams) - the lower level software thinks the values sent
are invalid
• Failure (ProvFail) - the lower level software returns an error (this is the type of error
that is not definitely a hardware failure)

Data error or timeout alarm:
Alarm identifier / DATAERR

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “DATAERR” (p. B-8).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-79: “Clear Data error or timeout ” (p. 3-182).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Data Link Down
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Data Link Down

Meaning of alarm
The NET NR condition is raised when the EC (ES1 & ES2) and USRPNL (OAMP, VOIP,
E1 & E2) ports are administratively disabled. When these ports are administratively
enabled and no Ethernet link connectivity is established, these NR conditions would be
reported as MN alarms.
On a fiber span, the OSC mode should match on both ends. If the rates do not match,
LOS-O is raised on one end (see “Incoming SUPVY LOS” (p. 2-348)), and Data Link
Down is raised on the other end.

Data Link Down alarm:
Alarm identifier / NET

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS, OTU1, OTU2, PLK
Alarm source See “NET ” (p. B-33).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-80: “Clear Data link down ” (p. 3-184).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details DB Backup Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DB Backup Failure
Database Backup Failure, creation of local backup database failed.

DB Backup Failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / DBF

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source System
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-83: “Clear DB Backup Failure” (p. 3-189).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details DB Failure Local - copy creation of processing failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DB Failure Local - copy creation of processing failure

Meaning of alarm
A download of a database backup from the remote file server (part of the database restore
process) will fail if there is not enough free space on the Active Main Equipment
Controller’s flash memory. A database failure condition-local shall be raised (DBFL).
If the temporary database cannot be read (meaning that the database cannot be transported
to the RFS), a database failure condition-local shall be set.

DB Failure Local - copy creation of processing failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / DBFL

Mnemonic
ASAP type COM
Alarm source SYSTEM
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-84: “Clear DB Failure Local - copy creation of processing failure
” (p. 3-190).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details DB Failure Transport - file transport failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DB Failure Transport - file transport failure

Meaning of alarm
If the file transfer of the database to the remote file server does not succeed, a database
failure condition-transport shall be set.

DB Failure Transport - file transport failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / DBFT

Mnemonic
ASAP type COM
Alarm source SYSTEM
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-85: “Clear DB Failure Transport - file transport failure”
(p. 3-191).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details DB Restore Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DB Restore Failure
Database Restore Failure, restoration of local backup database failed.

DB Restore Failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / DRF

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source System
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-86: “Clear DB Restore Failure” (p. 3-192).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Detected high voltage from on-board power supply
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Detected high voltage from on-board power supply

Meaning of alarm
The voltage level of the external DC supply is high. This alarm is raised if there is too
much voltage going to the breaker feed or the voltage is above the threshold. This could
be due to a problem with the power feed to the breaker card.

Detected high voltage from on-board power supply alarm:
Alarm identifier / VOLTAGEHIGH

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-87: “Clear Detected high voltage from on-board power supply ”
(p. 3-193).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Device Not Reachable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Device Not Reachable

Meaning of alarm

Device Not Reachable alarm:
Alarm identifier / RmdDNR

Mnemonic
ASAP type RMD
setting) NSA –
Alarm source 11QPE24
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-88: “Clear Device Not Reachable” (p. 3-194).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Drop Power Adjustment Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Drop Power Adjustment Failure

Meaning of alarm
The various Drop Power Adjustment Failure (PWRADJFAILDRP) condition
types are described below.
Adjustment Not Possible - APR Condition Active
The Add/Drop Drop LD for the Add/Drop block is in APR node. In this state the LD is
disabled and the adjustment cannot be executed.
Amplifier Mid-Stage Loss Problem
The loss from the LD DCM To to DCM From port is not within the expected range.
Card Required for Adjustment Not Present
A pack that is required for the adjustment is missing.
Local Adjustment is Still in Progress / In Progress
An adjustment is already in progress on the node.
Loss Too High
The loss is greater than allowed upstream of the AID message location.
No Drop Services Provisioned
No Drop services are provisioned for this Add/Drop block.
No Lit Channels For Drop-Path Optimization
the adjustment point or there is an LOS condition within the Add/Drop block beyond the
adjustment point.
No Stable Add Channels For Drop-Path Optimization
Channel powers are not stable and the adjustment cannot be attempted.

Drop Power Adjustment Failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / PWRADJFAILDRP

Mnemonic
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Drop Power Adjustment Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ASAP type OTS

Alarm source See “PWRADJFAILDRP” (p. B-41).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to the appropriate procedure:
• Procedure 3-89: “Clear Drop Power Adjustment Failure ” (p. 3-195)
• Procedure 3-359: “Clear PWRADJFAILDRP (Adjustment Not Possible - APR
Condition Active)” (p. 3-610)
(Amplifier Mid-Stage Loss Problem)” (p. 3-545)
(Card Required for Adjustment Not Present)” (p. 3-597)
(Local Adjustment is Still in Progress) or (In Progress)” (p. 3-599)
• Procedure 3-360: “Clear PWRADJFAILDRP (Loss Too High)” (p. 3-611)
• Procedure 3-361: “Clear PWRADJFAILDRP (No Drop Services Provisioned)”
(p. 3-612)
• Procedure 3-362: “Clear PWRADJFAILDRP (No Lit Channels for Drop-Path
• Procedure 3-363: “Clear PWRADJFAILDRP (No Stable Channels for Drop-Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Drop Power Adjustment Required
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Drop Power Adjustment Required

Meaning of alarm

Drop Power Adjustment Required alarm:
Alarm identifier / PWRADJFAILREQDRP

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source See “PWRADJFAILREQDRP” (p. B-41).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-90: “Clear Drop Power Adjustment Required” (p. 3-196).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Duplex Impaired
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Duplex Impaired
An FLC or MTX 1+1 equipment protection group in the main or extension shelf has a
group state unequal to NOREQ (being either degraded by equipment failures or forced by
commands or recovery/alignment pending or in simplex operation).
This is independent from whether the MTX equipment protection group resides in the
main or extension shelf. In case of communication failures with an extension shelf, the
main shelf will report in delegation for that extension shelf a value that will generate the
alarm.
The alarm is reported for the active and the standby card.

Duplex Impaired alarm:
Alarm identifier / DXIMPAIRED

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Effect on service Not service-affecting
Alarm source Possible alarm sources are:
• Matrix cards (MT1T9, MT960C)
• First-level Controllers (ECHC (FLC), FLC36EA)
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
No corrective action is required.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Duplex Not Aligned
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Duplex Not Aligned

The predefined time for the initial alignment between the standby and the active card in a
1+1 equipment protection group has expired, and still no alignment could be achieved
between the standby and the active card.
The alarm is reported for the standby card.
Examples:
• For FLC equipment: for example the contents of the mass storage are not aligned;
• For MTX equipment: for example the PM current bins and the Transmission
Protection Selectors are not aligned.

Duplex Not Aligned alarm:
Alarm identifier / DXNOTALGND

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
• Matrix cards (MT960C, MT1T9C, MT1T9, MT3T8)
• First-level Controllers (FLC64, ECHC (FLC), FLC36,
FLC36EA)
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Duplex Not Aligned
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-91: “Clear Duplex Not Aligned” (p. 3-197).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Duplicate OCH Trail Name
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Duplicate OCH Trail Name

Meaning of alarm
The NE has detected that another NE in the network is sourcing an OCh trail which is
using the same OCh trail name as one of its own sourced (headed) trails.
This can happen if the loopback IP address of the sourcing NE was recently changed. In
the case of a loopback IP address change, the condition resolves itself after one hour.
This situation can also happen if one of the following situations occur:
• if a database with a duplicate Och-trail is restored on a NE
• if two Och Trails with the identical name are created at the same time within the
network
Having two different OCh-trails with the same name in the same optical network prevents
the ability to distinguish the two OCh-trails from each-other (with respect to Wavelength
Tracker monitoring capabilities).

Duplicate OCH Trail Name alarm:
Alarm identifier / OCHTRAILDUP

Mnemonic
ASAP type OCH
Alarm source See “OCHTRAILDUP” (p. B-35).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Duplicate OCH Trail Name
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-92: “Clear Duplicate OCH Trail Name ” (p. 3-200).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Duplicate Shelf ID
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Duplicate Shelf ID
There are two or more extension shelves with the same shelf ID.
Note: The Duplicate Shelf ID alarm does not apply to the main shelf but to the
extension shelves only.

Duplicate Shelf ID alarm:
Alarm identifier / DUPSHELFID

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source Shelf
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-93: “Clear Duplicate Shelf ID” (p. 3-201).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Duplicate Wave Key
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Duplicate Wave Key

Meaning of alarm
The NE has detected that another NE in the network is sourcing (heading) an OCh trail
which is using the same wavekeys as one of its own sourced (headed) trails.
The system is designed to prevent this under all normal operating conditions, however,
this situation can happen if the control network was segmented when the OCh trails were
created. If the control network is rejoined and any duplicates are discovered, this alarm
raised. The control network is segmented if the one or more amplifier CN links are down
such that a number of NEs cannot communicate to the remainder of the NEs in the
network.
Having two different OCh trails with the same wavekeys in the same optical network
prevents the ability to distinguish the two OCh trails from each-other with respect to
Wavelength Tracker monitoring capabilities.

Duplicate Wave Key alarm:
Alarm identifier / OCHKEYDUP

Mnemonic
ASAP type OCH
Alarm source See “OCHKEYDUP” (p. B-34).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Duplicate Wave Key
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-94: “Clear Duplicate Wave Key ” (p. 3-202).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details DWDM-OCS audit discrepancy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DWDM-OCS audit discrepancy

Meaning of alarm
The OCSAUDITFAIL condition is raised when the reachable OCSIP was configured.

DWDM-OCS audit discrepancy alarm:
Alarm identifier / OCSAUDITFAIL

Mnemonic
ASAP type COM
Alarm source SYSTEM
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details DWDM-OCS full audit success - no discrepancies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DWDM-OCS full audit success - no discrepancies

Meaning of alarm
The DWDM-OCS full audit success - no discrepancies condition indicates
that no event was raised when the reachable OCSIP was configured.

DWDM-OCS full audit success - no discrepancies condition:
Alarm identifier / OCSAUDITSUCCESS

Mnemonic
ASAP type COM
Alarm source SYSTEM
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details DWDM-OCS link down
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DWDM-OCS link down

Meaning of alarm

DWDM-OCS link down alarm:
Alarm identifier / OCSUNAVAIL

Mnemonic
ASAP type COM
Alarm source SYSTEM
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-95: “Clear DWDM-OCS link down” (p. 3-204).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details DWDM-OCS provisioning failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DWDM-OCS provisioning failure

Meaning of alarm
The OCSDATAFLT condition is raised when the reachable OCSIP was configured.

DWDM-OCS provisioning failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / OCSDATAFLT

Mnemonic
ASAP type COM
Alarm source SYSTEM
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details DWDM-OCS retrieve failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DWDM-OCS retrieve failure

Meaning of alarm
The OCSDATARTRV condition indicates that no event was raised when the reachable
OCSIP was configured.

DWDM-OCS retrieve failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / OCSDATARTRV

Mnemonic
ASAP type COM
Alarm source SYSTEM
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details ECC Communication Failure with FLC A
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ECC Communication Failure with FLC A

A communication failure has been detected on the internal embedded communication
channel (ECC) between the respective I/O cards and the FLC A.

ECC Communication Failure with FLC A alarm:
Alarm identifier / ECCCOM-A

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source I/O cards
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-96: “Clear ECC Communication Failure with FLC A” (p. 3-205).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details ECC Communication Failure with FLC B
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ECC Communication Failure with FLC B

A communication failure has been detected on the internal embedded communication
channel (ECC) between the respective I/O cards and the FLC B.

ECC Communication Failure with FLC B alarm:
Alarm identifier / ECCCOM-B

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
setting) NSA –
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-97: “Clear ECC Communication Failure with FLC B” (p. 3-207).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details EDFA Input LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EDFA Input LOS

Meaning of alarm
The input to the EDFA section of a hybrid LD card has detected a Loss of Signal for the
optical channels. The LOS alarm is raised if the power measured at the EDFA input
internal to the hybrid LD drops below a threshold.
This may be caused for the following reasons:
• The attenuation of the mid-pack EVOA is set to too high
• There is an internal fiber break, or a failure of the mid-pack EVOA

The following tabular overview summarizes important information concerning the EDFA
Input LOS alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOSEDFA

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
setting)
Alarm source See “LOSEDFA” (p. B-26).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-98: “EDFA Input LOS” (p. 3-209).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details EDFA Input Power Margin Exceeded
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EDFA Input Power Margin Exceeded

Meaning of alarm
The EDFA Input Power Margin Exceeded condition is raised when the input power to the
EDFA module of a hybrid LD is within the module’s operating gain range, but exceeds
the maximum planned value for operation. The LD may be operated under these
conditions if adequate margin remains for responding to network changes, such as an
increase in the number of channels. However, corrective action is recommended. The
condition could indicate that the mid-pack EVOA attenuation setting is too low or the
Raman gain is too high.

The following tabular overview summarizes important information concerning the EDFA
Input Power Margin Exceeded alarm:
Alarm identifier / PWREDFAMARGIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm severity (default NSA Minor
setting)
Alarm source See “PWREDFAMARGIN” (p. B-41).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-99: “EDFA Input Power Margin Exceeded” (p. 3-212).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Egress Backward Defect Indication - ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Egress Backward Defect Indication - ODU

Meaning of alarm
The OT port has detected a Backward Defect Indication at the OTUk Section layer
transmitting out of the client port. This defect indicates that the peer OTUk port has
detected a condition that is treated as Server Signal Failure (conditions such as LOS, LOF
or LOM would contribute to SSF).

Egress Backward Defect Indication - ODU alarm:
Alarm identifier / BDIEGR

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU2
Alarm source See “BDIEGR” (p. B-5).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Egress Backward Defect Indication - ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-100: “Clear Egress Backward Defect Indication - ODU ”
(p. 3-214).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Egress Client Signal Failure - ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Egress Client Signal Failure - ODU

Meaning of alarm
The CSFODUEGR condition indicates that the receive signal in the ODUk path contains
a Client Signal Fail (CSF) indication in the OPU overhead which has been inserted in the
upstream equipment due to a failure condition of the client signal. This alarm is reported
for the muxponder cards.
It is relevant in the following cases:

Egress Client Signal Failure - ODU alarm:
Alarm identifier / CSFODUEGR

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU
Alarm source See “CSFODUEGR” (p. B-8).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-101: “Clear Egress Client Signal Failure - ODU ” (p. 3-215).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Egress Locked - ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Egress Locked - ODU

Meaning of alarm
OT port has detected Locked condition at ODUk Path layer. This defect indicates that
network operator in an external multi-vendor OTU network has locked the ODUk
payload by user command. LCK maintenance signal is not sourced by 1830 PSS network.
This may be caused if the network operator in external OTU network has caused insertion
of LCK maintenance signal.

Egress Locked - ODU alarm:
Alarm identifier / LCKEGR

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU2
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “LCKEGR” (p. B-23).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-102: “Clear Egress Locked - ODU ” (p. 3-216).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Egress Open Connection Indication - ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Egress Open Connection Indication - ODU

Meaning of alarm
OT port has detected Open Connection Indication condition at ODUk Path layer. This
defect indicates that network operator in an external multi-vendor OTU network has not
provisioned at least one ODUk connection in an OT switched network. OCI maintenance
signal is not sourced by 1830 PSS network. This may be caused if the network operator in
external OT network has deleted or not yet provisioned a connection in OTU switched
network.

Egress Open Connection Indication - ODU alarm:
Alarm identifier / OCIEGR

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU2
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “OCIEGR” (p. B-36).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-103: “Clear Egress Open Connection Indication - ODU ”
(p. 3-217).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Egress Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Egress Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU

Meaning of alarm
The OT port has detected a Payload Type Mismatch condition at ODUk Path layer. This
defect indicates that the service and/or mapping types on two ends of the ODUkP link
don’t match. The Payload Type indicator is encoded in the Payload Structure Identifier
field of ODUkP. When expected and received PT values don’t match, a PLM condition is
declared. This condition is typically declared on both ends of the ODUkP path. This may
be caused due to inconsistent provisioning of service/mapping types on the two ends of
the ODUkP segment.

Egress Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU alarm:
Alarm identifier / PLMEGR

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU2
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “PLMEGR” (p. B-39).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-104: “Clear Egress Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU ”
(p. 3-218).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Egress Server Signal Failure - Client
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Egress Server Signal Failure - Client

Meaning of alarm
The Egress SSF-Client alarm would provide a clear indication that the outgoing service
has been failed because there are server layer faults on network side (from line to client
direction).
Possible network failure conditions that lead to an Egress Server Signal Failure-Client
alarm include:
• LOS-P (Loss of Signal –OTU)
• LOF (Loss of Frame –OTU)
• LOM (Loss of Multiframe –OTU)
• TIM-S (TRCCMP=ENABLED and TIMMRESP=ENABLED)
• ODU-AIS
• TIM-P (TRCCMP=ENABLED and TIMMRESP=ENABLED)
• OCI
• LCK

Egress Server Signal Failure - Client alarm:
Alarm identifier / SSF-e

Mnemonic
ASAP type 10GbE, FC800, FC1200, OC192/STM64, ODU2, ODU3, ODU4
Alarm source See “SSF-e” (p. B-47).
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-105: “Clear Egress Server Signal Failure - Client ” (p. 3-219).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Egress Server Signal Failure - Client

Meaning of alarm
The Egress SSF-Client alarm has been used to indicate the egress service is failure due to
server signal failures from line side. For 11DPM12 this alarm is also used to suppress
other client egress alarms such as LOFEGR, FELANSS and LFD.
The possible server signal failures are:
• LOS-P (Loss of Signal –OTU)
• LOF (Loss of Frame –OTU)
• LOM (Loss of Multiframe –OTU)
• TIM-S (TRCCMP=ENABLED and TIMMRESP=ENABLED)
• TIM-P (TRCCMP=ENABLED and TIMMRESP=ENABLED)
• OCI
• LCK

Egress Server Signal Failure - Client alarm:
Alarm identifier / SSFCLTEGR

Mnemonic
ASAP type 1GbE, CBRAR, FC100, FC200, FC400, OC3/STM12,
OC12/STM4, OC48/STM16
Alarm source 11DPM12
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-106: “Clear Egress Server Signal Failure-Client ” (p. 3-221).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Egress Server Signal Failure - ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Egress Server Signal Failure - ODU

Meaning of alarm
The OT port has detected a Server Signal Failure at the ODUk level exiting the client
port. Conditions that can cause an SSFODU are:
• LOS-P (Loss of Signal – OTU)
• LOF (Loss of Frame – OTU)
• LOM (Loss of Multiframe – OTU)
• ODU-AIS
These conditions may be caused by the following reasons:
• A misconnected, damaged or dirty fiber on the trail between the local OTUk receive
port and the far end transmitter

Egress Server Signal Failure - ODU alarm:
Alarm identifier / SSFODUEGR

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU2
Alarm source See “SSFODUEGR” (p. B-46).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Egress Server Signal Failure - ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-107: “Clear Egress Server Signal Failure - ODU ” (p. 3-222).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Egress Signal Degrade - ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Egress Signal Degrade - ODU

Meaning of alarm
The OT port has detected a Signal Degrade Bit Error Rate exiting the OT client port.

Egress Signal Degrade - ODU alarm:
Alarm identifier / SDEGR

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU2
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “SDEGR” (p. B-45).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-108: “Clear Egress Signal Degrade - ODU ” (p. 3-224).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Egress Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Egress Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path

The bit error ratio on the ODUk path layer equals or exceeds the provisioned threshold in
the egress direction.
Bit error monitoring
Bit error monitoring on the ODUk path layer operates in burst mode, that is you can
configure a burst threshold and a burst interval. The burst threshold defines the number of
errored blocks to declare a second as good or bad, repectively. The burst interval defines
the number of bad seconds that are needed to raise an
Egress Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path alarm.
For the ODUk path layer in the egress direction, dedicated configuration parameters are
available for the burst threshold and burst interval.

Egress Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path alarm:
Alarm identifier / SDBER-P

Mnemonic
• ASAPODU0
• ASAPODU1
• ASAPODU2
• ASAPODU2E
• ASAPODU3
Effect on service Service-affecting (SA) if transmission on a path is potentially
affected. Not service-affecting (NSA) otherwise.
Alarm severity (default SA Minor (MN)
Alarm source ODUk path (ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2E, ODU3)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Egress Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-109: “Clear Egress Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path” (p. 3-225).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Egress Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Egress Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU

Meaning of alarm
The TIM condition is typically raised when the received section trace does not match the
expected section trace. The TIMEGR alarm is a TIM condition detected exiting the client
port. This may be caused by either an error in the provisioning of the section trace, or an
error in the fibering. For the Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch condition (Network Ports)
the cause would be an error in the fibering at the near end or the far end.
This alarm is raised if:
• There is an error in the configuration of the trace at the transmit or receive end (TIM)
• There is an error in the fibering of compatible SONET sources (TIM or TTI
Mismatch)
• The trace is not being generated (TIM or TTI Mismatch)

Egress Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU alarm:
Alarm identifier / TIMEGR

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU2
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “TIMEGR” (p. B-50).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Egress Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
To clear the TIMEGR condition, perform the steps in the procedure, Procedure 3-446:
“Clear Trace Identifier Mismatch - OTU ” (p. 3-742).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Embedded Operations Channel failure detected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Embedded Operations Channel failure detected

Embedded Operations Channel failure. No adjacencies formed.
The Embedded Operations Channel failure detected alarm indicates the lack
of connectivity at Layer 3 (that is, no adjacency formed) over an ECC, independently of
the protocol (IPCP, OSPF) used to establish the communication. Note that the IPCP relies
on an intact LCP connection.
Therefore, together with an Embedded Operations Channel failure detected
alarm, one of the following alarms is reported at the same time, to indicate which protocol
is affected:
• IPCP ECC Connection Failure
• LCP ECC Connection Fail
• OSPF Adjacency Failure

Embedded Operations Channel failure detected alarm:
Alarm identifier / EOC

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPNETIF
Alarm category Management communication
Alarm source Network interface
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Embedded Operations Channel failure detected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-110: “Clear Embedded Operations Channel failure detected” (p. 3-227).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Environmental Input [1-8] active
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Environmental Input [1-8] active

Meaning of alarm
The ENV condition relates to housekeeping. The ENV inputs are user-defined sensors
that can be arbitrarily configured to set an alarm for such as actions as opening a door, or
a smoke detector.

Environmental Input [1-8] active alarm:
Alarm identifier / ENV

Mnemonic
ASAP type ENV
Alarm source See “ENV” (p. B-10).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-111: “Clear Environmental Input [1-8] active ” (p. 3-229).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Ethernet Client Signal Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ethernet Client Signal Failure

Meaning of alarm
The OT port has detected the ETHCSF condition at the MEP layer. A MEP detects the
ETHCSF condition when it receives a CCM frame with a interface status TLV of
“Down.” The alarm is cleared when the MEP receives a CCM frame with interface status
TLV of “Up.”

Ethernet Client Signal Failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / ETHCSF

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “ETHCSF” (p. B-11).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-112: “Clear Ethernet Client Signal Failure ” (p. 3-230).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Ethernet Ring Path Changes Its Forwarding State From
Network element alarms Blocked to Unblocked or Unblocked to Blocked
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ethernet Ring Path Changes Its Forwarding State From Blocked

to Unblocked or Unblocked to Blocked
Meaning of alarm
The ERP-PATH-FWD-STATE-CHG condition indicates that the ERP path has changed
between blocked or unblocked.

Ethernet Ring Path Changes Its Forwarding State From Blocked to
Unblocked or Unblocked to Blocked alarm:
Alarm identifier / ERP-PATH-FWD-STATE-CHG

Mnemonic
ASAP type ERP
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Ethernet Ring Provisioning Mismatch is Detected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ethernet Ring Provisioning Mismatch is Detected

Meaning of alarm
The ERP-APS-PROV-MISMATCH is raised when the reporting node is configured as
RPL owner, and it detects that another node is also configured to be RPL owner. Only one
node is allowed in the ring.

Ethernet Ring Provisioning Mismatch is Detected alarm:
Alarm identifier / ERP-APS-PROV-MISMATCH

Mnemonic
ASAP type ERP
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-113: “Clear Ethernet Ring Provisioning Mismatch is Detected ”
(p. 3-231).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Excessive BER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Excessive BER
Meaning of alarm
The OT port has detected Excessive BER on the OC-n/STM-n port of the 11QPA4,
11STMM10 or 11STAR1 card. This defect indicates that local OC-M/STM-N port has
detected a BER that exceeds selected threshold (default 10-3).
• The received power may not be within the acceptable range on local port input

Excessive BER alarm:
Alarm identifier / EBER

Mnemonic
ASAP type OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4, OC48/STM16, OC192/STM64
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “EBER” (p. B-10).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-114: “Clear Excessive BER ” (p. 3-232).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Excessive Bit Error Ratio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Excessive Bit Error Ratio

The bit error ratio in the receive signal is greater than or equal to the provisioned signal
fail threshold (SFTH).
The Excessive Bit Error Ratio alarm is used with the following different
facilities:
• OC-n (OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192)
• STM-n (STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64)
• STS-n (STS-1, STS-3C, STS-12C, STS-48C)
• VC-n (VC-4, VC-4-4c, VC-4-16c)

Excessive Bit Error Ratio alarm for OC-n facilities:

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPOC3. ASAPOC12, ASAPOC48, ASAPOC192
Alarm severity (default Depending on the effect on service:
setting) SA Critical (CR)
NSA Not Alarmed (NA)
Alarm source OC-n (OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192)

Excessive Bit Error Ratio alarm for STM-n facilities:

Mnemonic
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ASAP type ASAPSTM1, ASAPSTM4, ASAPSTM16, ASAPSTM64

setting) SA Major (MJ)
NSA Minor (MN)
Alarm source STM-n (STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64)

Excessive Bit Error Ratio alarm for STS-n facilities:

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPSTS1, ASAPSTS3C, ASAPSTS12C, ASAPSTS48C
Alarm source STS-n (STS-1, STS-3C, STS-12C, STS-48C)

Excessive Bit Error Ratio alarm for VC-n facilities:

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPVC4, ASAPVC44C, ASAPVC416C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

setting) SA Not reported (NR)
NSA Not reported (NR)
Alarm source VC-n (VC-4, VC-4-4c, VC-4-16c)
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-115: “Clear Excessive Bit Error Ratio” (p. 3-233).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Excessive Invalid Login Attempts
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Excessive Invalid Login Attempts

Meaning of alarm
The maximum number of invalid login attempts has been exceeded by a user and, hence,
this user was inhibited.

Excessive Invalid Login Attempts alarm:
Alarm identifier / INTRUSION

Mnemonic INTRUSIONEVT
ASAP type COM
setting) NSA INTRUSION: Not alarmed
INTRUSIONEVT: Major
Alarm source SYSTEM
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
This is a transient condition, which needs no clearing.
A security administrator can re-allow the user.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Exercise on the protection entity - Far End
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Exercise on the protection entity - Far End

In a 1:N ODUk SNC/S protection, the “Exercise” command is in use at the far end.
Exercise is a command to test if the APS protocol is operating correctly. It has a lower
priority than any other request/state that causes an actual switch. The Exercise command
does not change the current selection.

Exercise on the protection entity - Far End condition:
Alarm identifier / EXWKSWPR

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPFFP
Alarm source 1:N ODUk SNC/S protection
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Exercise on the protection entity - Far End condition is to be
soon as the Exercise request is cleared.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Exercise on the working entity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Exercise on the working entity

In a 1:N ODUk SNC/S protection, the “Exercise” command is in use at the local end.

Exercise on the working entity condition:
Alarm identifier / EXWKSWBK

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPFFP
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Exercise on the working entity - Far End condition is to be understood
as an information rather than as an alarm and will be cleared autonomously as soon as the
Exercise request is cleared.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Exercise on the working entity - Far End
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Exercise on the working entity - Far End

In a 1:N ODUk SNC/S protection, the “Exercise” command is in use at the far end.

Exercise on the working entity - Far End condition:
Alarm identifier / EXWKSWBK

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPFFP
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Exercise on the working entity - Far End condition is to be understood
as an information rather than as an alarm and will be cleared autonomously as soon as the
Exercise request is cleared.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Extended Temp Range Violation: Non-ETR Card
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Extended Temp Range Violation: Non-ETR Card

Meaning of alarm

Extended Temp Range Violation: Non-ETR Card alarm:
Alarm identifier / ETR-MISMATCH

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “ETR-MISMATCH” (p. B-12).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-116: “Clear Extended Temp Range Violation: Non-ETR Card ”
(p. 3-238).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Extended Temp Range Violation: Non-ETR Pluggable Module
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Extended Temp Range Violation: Non-ETR Pluggable Module

Meaning of alarm

Extended Temp Range Violation: Non-ETR Pluggable Module alarm:
Alarm identifier / ETR-MISMATCHMOD

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “ETR-MISMATCHMOD” (p. B-12).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Extension Header (GFP) Mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Extension Header (GFP) Mismatch

The value of the extension header identifier (EXI) field in the received GFP frame does
not match the expected value.
The EXI field identifies the type and usage of the GFP extension header.
Three kinds of extension headers are currently defined in the standards:
• Null extension header
• Linear extension header
• Ring extension header
Note: Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS only supports a null extension header. That means,
the system always transmits GFP frames with a null extension header and always
expects GFP frames with a null extension header.
The Extension Header (GFP) Mismatch alarm is relevant for GFP-F-mapped
Ethernet payload only, that is for:
• 10 GbE transparently transported by ODU2 (GFP-F (Ethernet PP_OS) mapping,
AMCC or OLDAMCC mapping)
• 10 GbE transparently transported by ODU2 (GFP-F (Ethernet PP) mapping, CAMCC
mapping)

Extension Header (GFP) Mismatch alarm:
Alarm identifier / GFPEXM

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPODU2
Effect on service Always Service-affecting (SA).
setting) NSA –
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Extension Header (GFP) Mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-117: “Clear Extension Header (GFP) Mismatch” (p. 3-239).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details External and line synchronization out of service
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
External and line synchronization out of service

All available timing references have failed, and the system is going into holdover
synchronization mode.

External and line synchronization out of service alarm:
Alarm identifier / SYNCOOS

Mnemonic
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-118: “Clear External and line synchronization out of service” (p. 3-240).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details External LAN Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
External LAN Failure

The LAN connection to the OAMP LAN connector of the FLC or the intershelf LAN
connections between the LAN ports ES1 and ES2 of the matrix card are not working
properly.

External LAN Failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / EXTLANFAIL

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPLAN
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “EXTLANFAIL” (p. B-12).
Related information
Local indications
LED 1 on the faceplate of the respective circuit pack is blinking amber.
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-119: “Clear External LAN Failure” (p. 3-243).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Failure Of Protocol - Inconsistent
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Failure Of Protocol - Inconsistent

In a 1:N ODUk SNC/S protection, the received APS protocol is not stable.

Failure Of Protocol - Inconsistent alarm:
Alarm identifier / FOP-INCON

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPODU2, ASAPODU2E
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-120: “Clear Failure Of Protocol - Inconsistent” (p. 3-246).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Failure Of Protocol - No Response
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Failure Of Protocol - No Response

In a 1:N ODUk SNC/S protection, one of the following “APS interaction failures” has
been detected:
• The sent “Requested entity” and the received (accepted) “Bridged entity” do not
match.
• The sent and the received (accepted) “Requested entity” do not match.
• The received (accepted) “Request/State” is not appropriate for the sent
“Request/State”.
Note: For the Failure Of Protocol - No Response alarm, a timeout of one
second is defined to receive an appropriate response from the remote end. Therefore,
this defect may be detected transiently if a hold-off time greater than one second is
provisioned. This effect is not very likely, but will occur when a new APS message is
sent by the local end just while a signal fail (SF) condition on protection is being
passing the hold-off timer at the remote end. In this case the remote end will ignore
the new APS message due to the SF on protection, but will not yet send the SF on
protection as the new highest priority request. Apart from a potential transient
alarming of Failure Of Protocol - No Response no malfunctions will result.
Example
A Failure Of Protocol - No Response alarm is reported, for example, if the size
of the protection groups at both ends A and B of the 1:N ODUk SNC/S protection scheme
is provisioned differently.
Assume that, at the A end, an additional working transport entity #q is provisioned which
is not known to the B end. This situation remains undiscovered as long as no request
occurs for #q. If in this situation (#q not known to B), for example, a manual switch of the
normal traffic signal #p had been applied at the B end, then this manual switch request is
handled correctly. Assume furthermore that now the A end detects a signal fail (SF)
condition for the working transport entity #q. As the SF condition has a higher priority
than the manual switch request, the A end sends an APS message with SF for #q. At the B
end, the requested entity #q is not known, and thus the new request is ignored. The B end
still uses the last known combination of the “Request/State” and “Requested Entity”
parameters. As the A end does not receive an appropriate response on its request, it raises
the Failure Of Protocol - No Response defect.
Note that in the given example, the normal traffic signal #p is not lost, but is transported
on the protection transport entity from A to B and on the working transport entity from B
to A.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Failure Of Protocol - No Response
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Failure Of Protocol - No Response alarm:
Alarm identifier / FOP-NR

Mnemonic
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-121: “Clear Failure Of Protocol - No Response” (p. 3-250).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Failure Of Protocol - Operation Mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Failure Of Protocol - Operation Mismatch

In a 1:N ODUk SNC/S protection, the provisioning of the APS protocol at the local and
remote end does not match concerning the provisioning for revertive or non-revertive
operation.
Note: In the current release, the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports bidirectional
switching and revertive operation only for 1:N ODUk SNC/S protection.

Failure Of Protocol - Operation Mismatch alarm:
Alarm identifier / FOP-OM

Mnemonic
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-122: “Clear Failure Of Protocol - Operation Mismatch” (p. 3-252).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Failure Of Protocol - Provisioning Mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Failure Of Protocol - Provisioning Mismatch

remote end does not match concerning the protocol usage and the provisioning for 1+1 or
1:N architecture.

Failure Of Protocol - Provisioning Mismatch alarm:
Alarm identifier / FOP-PM

Mnemonic
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-123: “Clear Failure Of Protocol - Provisioning Mismatch” (p. 3-254).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Failure Of Protocol - Switch Mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Failure Of Protocol - Switch Mismatch

remote end does not match concerning the provisioning for unidirectional or bidirectional
switching.
Note: In the current release, the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports bidirectional
switching and revertive operation only for 1:N ODUk SNC/S protection.

Failure Of Protocol - Switch Mismatch alarm:
Alarm identifier / FOP-SM

Mnemonic
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-124: “Clear Failure Of Protocol - Switch Mismatch” (p. 3-256).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Failure Slave Tracking Synchronization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Failure Slave Tracking Synchronization

The standby CRU is not tracking the active CRU. The alarm is declared against the
matrix board which hosts the standby CRU.

Failure Slave Tracking Synchronization alarm:
Alarm identifier / MISC-1

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Effect on service Not Service-affecting (NSA)
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-125: “Clear Failure Slave Tracking Synchronization” (p. 3-258).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details FAN32HRQD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FAN32HRQD
Meaning of alarm
A FAN32HRQD alarm is raised when the card is installed in a PSS-32 shelf is not
equipped with the FAN32H (high speed fan table). The alarm clears when the shelf is
equipped with the FAN32H or the affected card is removed from the shelf.

FAN32HRQD alarm:
Alarm identifier / FAN32HRQD

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm category Shelf
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “FAN32HRQD” (p. B-13).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-126: “Clear FAN32HRQD ” (p. 3-261).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Fan at full speed, device on card over allowed temperature
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fan at full speed, device on card over allowed temperature

Meaning of alarm
The Fan at full speed, device on card over allowed temperature
condition indicates that a device on the card identified by this alarm has risen above its
allowable operating temperature.

Fan at full speed, device on card over allowed temperature alarm:
Alarm identifier / CARDTOOHOT

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “CARDTOOHOT” (p. B-6).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-127: “Clear Fan at full speed, device on card over allowed
temperature ” (p. 3-262).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Fan speed is too high
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fan speed is too high

Meaning of alarm
This alarm indicates when the fan speed is too high based upon the current shelf cooling
requirements.

Fan speed is too high alarm:
Alarm identifier / FANSPEEDHIGH

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source FAN
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-129: “Clear Fan speed is too high” (p. 3-264).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Fan speed is too low
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fan speed is too low

Meaning of alarm
This alarm indicates when the fan speed is either too low based upon the current shelf
cooling requirements.

Fan speed is too low alarm:
Alarm identifier / FANSPEEDLOW

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source FAN
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-130: “Clear Fan speed is too low” (p. 3-265).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Fan speed manually set to maximum
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fan speed manually set to maximum

Meaning of alarm
The FANSPEEDMAN condition is raised when you manually set the fan speed to its
maximum. If a shelf contains the 100G packs, it is recommended that you increase the
airflow through the shelf.
Note: Any existing FANSPEEDMAN alarms may be suppressed by new
FANSPEEDHIGH or FANSPEEDLOW alarms.

Fan speed manually set to maximum alarm:
Alarm identifier / FANSPEEDMAN

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source FAN
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-131: “Clear Fan speed manually set to maximum” (p. 3-266).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Far End Local Fault
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Far End Local Fault

Meaning of alarm
The Far End OT port has detected a LAN Local Fault Indication ordered set at its input.
This condition typically indicates Ethernet link down condition on the client equipment
connected to the far-end port.
• Damaged or dirty fiber connected to the far-end client equipment receiver
• Damaged or dirty transmitter inside pluggable module on the far end
• Problem at the client equipment connected to the far-end OT

Far End Local Fault alarm:
Alarm identifier / FELANLFI

Mnemonic
ASAP type 10GbE
Alarm source See “FELANLFI” (p. B-13).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-132: “Clear Far End Local Fault ” (p. 3-267).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Far End Loss of Signal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Far End Loss of Signal

Meaning of alarm
The Far End OT port has detected LAN LOS at its input.
• Damaged or dirty fiber connected to the far-end receiver
• Received power may not be within the acceptable range on far-end port input

Far End Loss of Signal alarm:
Alarm identifier / FELANLOS

Mnemonic
ASAP type 1GbE, 10GbE, FC100, FC200, FC400, FC800
Alarm source See “FELANLOS” (p. B-13).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-233: “Clear Loss of Signal (LANLOS)” (p. 3-419).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Far End Loss of Synchronization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Far End Loss of Synchronization

Meaning of alarm
Far End OT port has detected LAN Loss of 64B/66B block synchronization at its input.

Far End Loss of Synchronization alarm:
Alarm identifier / FELOS

Mnemonic
ASAP type CBRAR
Alarm source 4DPA4
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-134: “Clear Far End Loss of Synchronization alarm” (p. 3-269).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Far End Loss of Synchronization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Far End Loss of Synchronization

Meaning of alarm
The Far End OT port has detected Loss of 64B/66B or 8B/10B block/character
synchronization on 10GbE, 1GbE or FC facility.

Far End Loss of Synchronization alarm:
Alarm identifier / FELANLSS

Mnemonic
ASAP type 1GbE, 10GbE, FC100, FC200, FC400, FC800
Alarm source See “FELANLSS” (p. B-14).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-135: “Clear Far End Loss of Synchronization ” (p. 3-270).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Far End Port Mapping Mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Far End Port Mapping Mismatch

Meaning of alarm
The Far End Port Mapping Mismatch alarm text for the FEPORTMISMATCH condition
indicates two client ports assigned to a Y-cable protection group are not provisioned the
same. Timeslot assignments are wrong, such that a service does not appear on the same
client ports at the two ends of a point-to-point link (applicable only to 11STMM10). Or
corresponding ports at the two ends are not provisioned for the same signal rate and
format. The condition is listed against the near end port.

Far End Port Mapping Mismatch alarm:
Alarm identifier / FEPORTMISMATCH

Mnemonic
ASAP type 1GbE, CBRAR, FC100, FC200, FC400, OC3/STM1,
OC12/STM4, OC48/STM16, OTU1
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “FEPORTMISMATCH” (p. B-14).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-136: “Clear Far End Port Mapping Mismatch alarm” (p. 3-271).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Far end protection line failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Far end protection line failure

Meaning of alarm
The FEPRLF condition is far end protection failure in Y-cable switching. The far end
node detects a problem on the protection side of a Y-cable protection group, and
communicates this fact to the near end node. The near end node raises the FEPRLF
condition. Troubleshooting should be done on the far end node.

Far end protection line failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / FEPRLF

Mnemonic
ASAP type 1GbE, 10GbE, FE, CBR2G5, CBRAR, FC100, FC200, FC400,
FC800, FC1200, OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4, OC48/STM16,
OC192/STM64, OTU1, OTU2, OTU3
Alarm source See “FEPRLF” (p. B-14).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-137: “Clear Far End Protection Line Failure alarm” (p. 3-272).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Far-End Unavailable Time Period
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Far-End Unavailable Time Period

Meaning of alarm
The Far-End Unavailable Time Period alarm is raised to declare the transition
from available time to unavailable time at the 11DPE12A proactive LM/SLM test level.
The alarm clears when the transition from unavailable time to available time is
completed.
A F_HLI, or far-end High Packet Loss interval has occurred, in which the packet loss is
greater than 50%. 10 consecutive F_HLIs indicates that the monitored end-to-end service
or synthetic test enters unavailable time, which begins with the first F_HLI detection. 10
consecutive non-F_HLIs indicates that the monitored end-to-end service or synthetic test
enters available time, which begins with the first non-F_HLI is detected.
When the monitored end-to-end service enters unavailable time, it means it suffers a high
packet loss, which may be caused by the following reasons
• failure in a network span or network element
• congestion in a network element
• remote LM/SLM function on remote peer network element fails or is not enabled

Far-End Unavailable Time Period alarm:
Alarm identifier / FEUAT

Mnemonic
ASAP type PROACTIVE TEST
Alarm category Proactive Test
setting) NSA –
Alarm source 11DPE12A-shelf-slot-PROACTIVE TEST ID
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Far-End Unavailable Time Period
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-138: “Clear Far-End Unavailable Time Period or Near-End
Unavailable Time Period” (p. 3-273).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Clear Far End Remote Fault
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Clear Far End Remote Fault

Meaning of alarm
The Far End OT port has detected a LAN Remote Fault Indication ordered set at its input.
This condition typically indicates Ethernet link down condition on the client equipment
connected to the far-end port.

Far End Remote Fault alarm:
Alarm identifier / FELANRFI

Mnemonic
ASAP type 1GbE, 10GbE
Alarm source See “FELANRFI” (p. B-14).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-139: “Far End Remote Fault” (p. 3-274).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Fiber connection mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fiber connection mismatch

Meaning of alarm
The Fiber connection mismatch alarm is detected when the WTOCM In port
assigned to monitor an LD card port detects a mismatch between the total power at the
LD port and the WTOCM In port. If the LD port is in LOS and the WTOCM In port is
not in LOS, the Fiber connection mismatch alarm is raised, indicating a potential
fiber cabling issue between the LD MON port and the WTOCM In port.

Fiber connection mismatch alarm:
Alarm identifier / MISMATCHFIBER

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source WTOCM
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-140: “Clear Fiber connection mismatch ” (p. 3-275).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Filter Blocked
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Filter Blocked
The air filter of the shelf is blocked by something.

Filter Blocked alarm:
Alarm identifier / FLTBLKD

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source Shelf
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-141: “Clear Filter Blocked” (p. 3-276).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Filter Missing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Filter Missing
The air filter is missing.

Filter Missing alarm:
Alarm identifier / FLTMISS

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source Shelf
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-142: “Clear Filter Missing” (p. 3-277).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Firmware loaded is not the preferred version
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Firmware loaded is not the preferred version

Meaning of alarm
The pack will have a FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT active if any firmware bundle it is
running is not the latest default bundle version listed for that pack in the active (running)
software release. This alarm condition occurs when the firmware loaded on the pack is
not the default firmware bundle for this pack in this software release and also if the
software release is upgraded but the firmware has not been upgraded.
The two 4DPA4 card modes (FlexMux and DualTran) each have their own separate
firmware lines. When the card mode is provisioned, the default version of the appropriate
firmware line is loaded automatically. Thus, FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT may also
apply to firmware that is not the default for the current card mode value of the 4DPA4
pack.
This alarm condition clears when the default firmware bundle for the active software
release is loaded on the programmable devices.

Firmware loaded is not the preferred version alarm:
Alarm identifier / FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “FWVERSIONNOTDEFAULT” (p. B-17).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Firmware loaded is not the preferred version
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-143: “Clear Firmware loaded is not the preferred version”
(p. 3-278).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details FIPS Selftest Squelch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FIPS Selftest Squelch

Meaning of alarm
Encryption traffic is blocked on ODU2 because at least one FIPS failure condition on the
system and the config general fipssquelch mode is enabled.

FIPS Selftest Squelch alarm:
Alarm identifier / FIPSFAILURE

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Clear any underlying FIPSSFMISMATCH, EQPTCRYPTO or AESFIPSFAILURE
conditions present, and the FIPSFAILURE alarm will clear autonomously.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details FIPS Software Mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FIPS Software Mismatch

Meaning of alarm
The FIPS Software Mismatch alarm is raised when at least one of the software files
does not match the expected files for this software version. It is indicative of corruption or
tampering.

FIPS Software Mismatch alarm:
Alarm identifier / FIPSSFMISMATCH

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source Equipment Controller
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 4-27: “Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Nonredundant Shelf
” (p. 4-78) or Procedure 4-26: “Replacing an Equipment Controller in a Redundant Shelf
” (p. 4-75).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Firmware Upgrade Failed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Firmware Upgrade Failed

The firmware upgrade for components of an I/O card failed.

Firmware Upgrade Failed alarm:
Alarm identifier / FWUPGRADEFAIL

Mnemonic
SC/TC Standing Condition (SC)
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Effect on service Service-affecting (SA.
setting) NSA –
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-144: “Clear Firmware Upgrade Failed” (p. 3-281).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Firmware upgrade pending
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Firmware upgrade pending

Meaning of alarm
A pack will have a FWUPGRADEPENDING active if the pack's firmware has been
provisioned, but not loaded. Thus, the provisioned firmware bundle is not the same as the
version currently in the FPGA.
The two 4DPA4 card modes (FlexMux and DualTran) each have their own separate
firmware lines. When card mode is provisioned, the default version of the appropriate
firmware line is loaded automatically. Thus, FWUPGRADEPENDING may also apply to
a mismatch between the provisioned 4DPA4 card mode value and the current FPGA
contents.

Firmware upgrade pending alarm:
Alarm identifier / FWUPGRADEPENDING

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “FWUPGRADEPENDING” (p. B-17).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-145: “Clear Firmware upgrade pending ” (p. 3-282).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details FLC temporarily in servicing state
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FLC temporarily in servicing state

The First-level Controller (FLC) is temporarily in servicing state.

FLC temporarily in servicing state condition:
Alarm identifier / SERVICING

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source First-level Controller (FLC64 (FLC), ECHC (FLC), FLC36,
FLC36EA)
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The FLC temporarily in servicing state condition is to be understood as
information rather than as an alarm and will be cleared autonomously as soon as the FLC
is available again.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Forced switch to a timing reference
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Forced switch to a timing reference

Meaning of alarm
Timing selection is forced to a timing reference.

Forced switch to a timing reference condition:
Alarm identifier / FRCDSWTIMREF

Mnemonic
ASAP type Photonic applications: LINEREF
Switching applications: ASAPTIMING
Alarm source Photonic applications: LINEREFSYS
Switching applications: External timing reference
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-146: “Clear Forced switch to a timing reference” (p. 3-283).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Forced switch to a timing reference for the output timing
Network element alarms selection process
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Forced switch to a timing reference for the output timing

selection process
Meaning of alarm
The card has detected an FRCDSWTIMREF-T4 condition at the LINEREF layer. The
FRCDSWTIMREF-T4 alarm is raised on the timing reference when the output timing is
forced to switch to it.

The following tabular overview summarizes important information concerning the Forced
switch to a timing reference for the output timing selection process alarm:
Alarm identifier / FRCDSWTIMREF-T4

Mnemonic
ASAP type LINEREF
Alarm source PTPCTL-shelf-slot-{LINEREF{0-3}}
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-440: “Clear Timing quality for output timing is insufficient ”
(p. 3-734).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Forced Switch to Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Forced Switch to Protection

Meaning of alarm
This is a standing condition indicating a forced switch to protect is active.
The forced switch of working facility/equipment to protection condition is raised when a
user initiates a forced switch to protect request within a protection group. A forced switch
to protect forces traffic onto the protect facility/equipment unless the protect facility is in
the signal fail state. A forced switch to protect also prevents reversion to the working path
from occurring. Clearing the forced switch clears the condition.
If reversion is enabled, a switch occurs to the work facility immediately after the forced
switch has cleared.

Forced Switch to Protection condition:
Alarm identifier / FRCDWKSWPR

Mnemonic
OC192/STM64, OC768/STM256, OCH, OTU1, OTU2, v
Alarm source See “FRCDWKSWPR” (p. B-16).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Forced Switch to Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-147: “Clear Forced switch to protection ” (p. 3-284).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Forced Switch to Working
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Forced Switch to Working

Meaning of alarm
This is a standing condition indicating that a forced switch back to the working is active.
The forced switch of working back to working condition occurs when a user initiates a
forced switch to work request within a protection group. A forced switch to working
forces traffic onto the working facility/equipment unless the working facility is in the
Signal-Fail state.
Clearing the manual switch clears the condition. In the absence of other outstanding
requests, a cleared forced switch back to work leaves the switch position on work.

Forced Switch to Working condition:
Alarm identifier / FRCDWKSWBK

Mnemonic
OC192/STM64, OC768/STM256, OCH, OTU1, OTU2, v
Alarm source See “FRCDWKSWBK” (p. B-16).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-148: “Clear Forced switch to working” (p. 3-285).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Forward Defect Indication
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Forward Defect Indication

Meaning of alarm

Forward Defect Indication alarm:
Alarm identifier / FDI

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-149: “Clear Forward Defect Indication ” (p. 3-286).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Forward Defect Indication - Client Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Forward Defect Indication - Client Failure

Meaning of alarm
The FDICLT condition indicates that the ODU signal contains a Forward Defect
Indication (FDI) in the PCC overheads, which has been inserted in the upstream
equipment due to a failure condition of the client signal.
The “Forward Defect Indication-Client Failure” alarm is relevant in the following cases:
• ODU0 within the Line side ODU2
• ODUFlex within the Line side ODU2

Forward Defect Indication - Client Failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / FDICLT

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Forward Defect Indication - Client Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-150: “Clear Forward Defect Indication - Client Failure ”
(p. 3-287).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details FPGA Download or Programming Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FPGA Download or Programming Failure

Meaning of alarm
The FPGA Download or Programming Failure alarm is raised when a corrupted
firmware file is downloaded to the card or the FPGA fails to program correctly.

FPGA Download or Programming Failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / FPGAFAIL

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “FPGAFAIL” (p. B-15).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details FPGA Initializing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FPGA Initializing
Meaning of alarm
The FPGA Initializing condition occurs when firmware for each programmable
device on a card is downloaded and FPGA programming is in progress.

FPGA Initializing condition:
Alarm identifier / FPGAINIT

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm severity (default SA A cold reset of the card issued to initiate FPGA
setting) programming is service affecting if the card is
currently carrying services.
Critical (CR) when in service and not a scheduled
firmware upgrade; otherwise MN
NSA Minor (MN)
Alarm source 112SCA1, 112SDX11, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 112SCX10,
10AN10G, 10SD10G, 11DPE12A, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12,
11QCUPC, 11QPA4, 11QPE24, 11QPEN4, 11STAR1,
11STAR1A, 11STMM10, 130SCUP, 130SCUPB, 130SCUPC,
130SCX10, 130SNX10, 24ANM, 24ANMB, 24ET1GB, 24SDM,
260SCX2, 4DPA2, 4DPA4, 43SCA1, 43SCX4, 43STA1PB,
43STX4, 43STX4P, 4AN10G, A2P2125, AHPHG, AHPLG,
AM2032A, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A, AM2625A,
CWR8, CWR8-88, MESH4, MVAC, MVAC8B, OPS, PTPCL,
RA2P, SVAC, WTOCM, WTOCMF
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details FPGA Initializing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-151: “Clear FPGA initializing ” (p. 3-288).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details FPGA Timeout
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FPGA Timeout
Meaning of alarm
The FPGA Timeout alarm is raised when the card fails to download firmware and
complete FPGA programming in a period of time (about 45 minutes).

FPGA Timeout alarm:
Alarm identifier / FPGATIMEOUT

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “FPGATIMEOUT” (p. B-15).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-152: “Clear FPGA timeout ” (p. 3-289).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Free running synchronization mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Free running synchronization mode

The system timing is in free running synchronization mode.

Free running synchronization mode condition:
Alarm identifier / FRNGSYNC

Mnemonic
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Free running synchronization mode condition is to be understood as an
information rather than as an alarm and will be cleared autonomously as soon as the
system clock is no longer in free running synchronization mode.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Freq err > 9.2 ppm ==> downstream wavetracker errors
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Freq err > 9.2 ppm ==> downstream wavetracker errors

Meaning of alarm
The SUSPECTCLKFREQ alarm indicates CLK38A and CLK38B differ by more than 9.2
ppm. It clears when three consecutive measurements indicate that the local clock is
within 54.6 ppm of the nominal range.
See “Card clock frequency measured out of spec ” (p. 2-128) for additional details on
PSS-16 and PSS-32 support of clock failure protection, and automatic and manual
switching.
Note: The SUSPECTCLKFREQ condition can produce wavekey errors (Missing
Wavekeys, or Unexpected Wavekeys) at either the source or detection point for
wavekeys. Switching to the new clock with a different frequency may also produce
transient wavekey errors. However, the link shall recover without external
assistance.

Freq err > 9.2 ppm ==> downstream wavetracker errors alarm:
Alarm identifier / SUSPECTCLKFREQ

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source PF
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Freq err > 9.2 ppm ==> downstream wavetracker errors
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-153: “Clear Freq err > 9.2 ppm ==> downstream wavetracker
errors ” (p. 3-290).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details From DCM Input LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From DCM Input LOS

Meaning of alarm
The From DCM port on one of the amplifier cards has detected a Loss Of Signal. The
LOS alarm is raised if the power measured at the port input drops below a threshold.

From DCM Input LOS alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOSDCM

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “LOSDCM” (p. B-26).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-154: “Clear From DCM Input LOS ” (p. 3-294).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details FTRUNNING state, PM Global File Collection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FTRUNNING state, PM Global File Collection

Entering the “file transfer running” (FTRUNNING) state of PM Global File Collection.

FTRUNNING state, PM Global File Collection condition:
Alarm identifier / PMGLBFTR

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source PM Global File Collection process
Notes:
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The FTRUNNING state, PM Global File Collection condition is to be
understood as information rather than as an alarm.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Fuse Alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fuse Alarm
A broken fuse has been detected.

Fuse Alarm alarm:
Alarm identifier / FA
Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Effect on service Service-affecting (SA) if power is interrupted, not
service-affecting (NSA) otherwise.
• First-level Controllers (ECHC (FLC), FLC64, FLC36EA,
FLC36)
• I/O cards
Related information
Local indications
If the alarm is major (MJ), LED 1 on the faceplate of the respective circuit pack is lit
solid red.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Fuse Alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the alarm is minor (MN), LED 1 on the faceplate of the respective circuit pack is lit
solid amber.
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-155: “Clear Fuse Alarm” (p. 3-296).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Gain Adjustment Exceeded Max Value
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Gain Adjustment Exceeded Max Value

Meaning of alarm
PWRMAXGAIN indicates the LD gain setting has been set higher than the maximum
value the EPT designed for this LD. This condition indicates that the loss between the
upstream NE line and the alarmed LD line is higher than expected. While the network can
continue to operate in this condition if sufficient margin exists for the lightpaths using the
LD, it is recommended the condition be corrected as soon as possible.
It is possible to exceed the maximum gain specified by EPT, but if too many amplifiers
are in this state it will result in BER performance degradation to services.

Gain Adjustment Exceeded Max Value alarm:
Alarm identifier / PWRMAXGAIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source See “PWRMAXGAIN” (p. B-41).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-156: “Clear Gain Adjustment Exceeded Max Value ” (p. 3-297).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details GFP Loss of Frame Delineation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GFP Loss of Frame Delineation

Meaning of alarm
OT port has detected Loss of GFP frame delineation. This defect indicates that bit stream
in the payload area used for GFP transport has degraded transmission to the point where
boundaries of GFP frames can no longer be reliably detected.
• Failure in the OCh trail used for transporting GFP layer
• Malfunction of source or sink GFP functions

GFP Loss of Frame Delineation alarm:
Alarm identifier / LFD

Mnemonic
ASAP type 1GbE, 10GbE, FC100, FC200, FC400, FC800, FC1200
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “LFD” (p. B-23).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-157: “Clear GFP Loss of Frame Delineation ” (p. 3-301).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details GFP User Payload Identifier Mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GFP User Payload Identifier Mismatch

Meaning of alarm
When using GFP to map Ethernet signals, the GFP User Payload Identifier Mismatch
condition indicates a mismatch of the accepted and expected user payload identifier
(UPI).

The following tabular overview summarizes important information concerning the GFP
User Payload Identifier Mismatch alarm:
Alarm identifier / GFPUPM

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU
setting) NSA –
Alarm source ODUk-shelf-slot-port, ODUk-shelf-71-ODU#
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details GFP User Payload Mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GFP User Payload Mismatch

Meaning of alarm
The OT has detected a GFP User Payload Mismatch. This condition is raised when the
encapsulation mode provisioning for the two OTs on opposite ends of an optical link do
not match.

GFP User Payload Mismatch alarm:
Alarm identifier / UPM

Mnemonic
ASAP type 1GbE, 10GbE, 100GbE, FC100, FC200, FC400, FC800, FC1200
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “UPM” (p. B-77).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-159: “Clear GFP User Payload Mismatch ” (p. 3-303).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Grandmaster clock class degrade
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Grandmaster clock class degrade

Meaning of alarm
The PTPGM-DEGRADE alarm is a normal condition to indicate that the PTP clock has
detected the grandmaster clock class degrade. This may be caused when the grandmaster
clock class degrades.

Grandmaster clock class degrade alarm:
Alarm identifier / PTPGM-DEGRADE

Mnemonic
ASAP type PTPCLOCK
Alarm source See “PTPGM-DEGRADE” (p. B-40).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Hardware failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware failure
A hardware error associated with a module is detected.

Hardware failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / HWFAIL

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Effect on service Service-affecting (SA) if protection is not available, not
FLC36)
• I/O cards
• I/O ports
• Optical modules (SFP/XFP)
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Hardware failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local indications
If the alarm is critical (CR), LED 1 on the faceplate of the respective circuit pack is lit
solid red.
If the alarm is minor (MN), LED 1 on the faceplate of the respective circuit pack is lit
solid amber.
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-160: “Clear Hardware failure” (p. 3-304).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Hardware Minor Circuit Pack Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware Minor Circuit Pack Failure

Parts of the optic (Rx/Tx) of a 130SCUP, 130SCUPB or 130SCUPC switchponder card
are at the edge of their lifetime and need replacement in the near future.
Note: The Hardware Minor Circuit Pack Failure alarm is meant as an early
indication of a lower priority fault on the card that does not immediately affect
transmission. However, the card should be replaced at the next available maintenance
opportunity.

Hardware Minor Circuit Pack Failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / HWMCPF

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source Switchponder card (130SCUP, 130SCUPB, 130SCUPC )
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-161: “Clear Hardware Minor Circuit Pack Failure” (p. 3-305).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Hardware not supported for current configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware not supported for current configuration

Meaning of alarm
The HWNOTSUPPORTED condition is raised during insertion of an Equipment
Controller in slots 1 or 18, when R1.0.5 software active is detected on the 1830 PSS-32.

Hardware not supported for current configuration alarm:
Alarm identifier / HWNOTSUPPORTED

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “HWNOTSUPPORTED” (p. B-18).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-162: “Clear Hardware not supported for current configuration ”
(p. 3-306).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Hardware suspicious
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware suspicious
A hardware defect has been detected, which does not directly lead to a
Hardware failure alarm or a transmission-related hardware defect.

Hardware suspicious alarm:
Alarm identifier / HWSUSP

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
FLC36)
• I/O cards
• I/O ports
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Hardware suspicious
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-163: “Clear Hardware suspicious” (p. 3-307).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details High BER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
High BER
Meaning of alarm
The OT port has detected a High BER on 10GbE LAN facility. This defect indicates that
local 10GbE LAN port has detected BER > 10-4 (high BER defect is triggered when
more than 16 invalid 64B/66B sync headers get detected within 125 us).

High BER alarm:
Alarm identifier / HIBER

Mnemonic
ASAP type 10GbE, FC800, FC1200
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “HIBER” (p. B-18).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-164: “Clear High BER ” (p. 3-308).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details High Filter Clogging
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
High Filter Clogging

The air filter of the shelf is highly clogged.
Raise and clear conditions:
• The High Filter Clogging alarm is raised when the filter clogging rate is at or
above 50%.
• The High Filter Clogging alarm is cleared when the filter clogging rate is below
30%.
Note: The High Filter Clogging alarm only represents the clogging of the air
filter caused by dust particles but not the blockage of the filter by a larger piece (for
example a piece of paper). The latter condition is represented by the
Filter Blocked alarm; see “Filter Blocked” (p. 2-298).

High Filter Clogging alarm:
Alarm identifier / FLTCLOGHIGH

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source Shelf
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details High Filter Clogging
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-165: “Clear High Filter Clogging” (p. 3-309).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Holdover synchronization mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Holdover synchronization mode

The system timing is in holdover synchronization mode.

Holdover synchronization mode condition:
Alarm identifier / HLDOVRSYNC

Mnemonic
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Holdover synchronization mode condition is to be understood as information
rather than as an alarm and will be cleared autonomously as soon as the system clock is
no longer in holdover synchronization mode.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details HOPath Unequipped
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HOPath Unequipped
The VC-n in the STM-N receive signal is not in use. Possibly, the cross-connections are
not consistently defined at both ends of the VC-n path.

HOPath Unequipped alarm:
Alarm identifier / UNEQ-P

Mnemonic
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-166: “Clear HOPath Unequipped” (p. 3-310).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details IGMP Source Limit Exceeded
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IGMP Source Limit Exceeded

Meaning of alarm
The IGMP Source Limit Exceeded alarm is raised when the maximum number of
multicast sources is exceeded per group allowed on this SAP.

IGMP Source Limit Exceeded alarm:
Alarm identifier / IGMP-SRC-LIMIT

Mnemonic
ASAP type IGMP
Alarm category Transient condition
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Implicit TCA 24h clearing, PM TCA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Implicit TCA 24h clearing, PM TCA

All the 24h threshold crossing alerts (TCAs) inside the NE have been cleared.

Implicit TCA 24h clearing, PM TCA condition:
Alarm identifier / PMCLR24HTC

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Effect on service Always not service-affecting (NSA).
Alarm source Shelf
Notes:
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Implicit TCA 24h clearing, PM TCA condition is to be understood as
information rather than as an alarm.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Improper Removal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Improper Removal
An equipment component has been removed from its slot or socket, but has not been
deprovisioned first.

Improper Removal alarm:
Alarm identifier / IMPROPRMVL

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Effect on service Service-affecting (SA) if no protection is available, not
• Matrix cards (MT3T8, MT1T9, MT1T9C, MT960C)
FLC36)
• I/O cards
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Improper Removal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-167: “Clear Improper Removal” (p. 3-311).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Incoming Payload LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Incoming Payload LOS

Meaning of alarm
The OT port has detected an Optical Channel Loss of Signal Failure.
Note: When a cross-connect is added, the LOS-P alarm is raised for ports A and B,
and then clears after a few seconds.

Incoming Payload LOS alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOS-P

Mnemonic
ASAP type OCH, OTS, OTU1, OTU2, OTU3, OTU4
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “LOS-P” (p. B-27).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-168: “Clear Incoming payload LOS” (p. 3-312).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Incoming SUPVY LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Incoming SUPVY LOF

Meaning of alarm
The OSC SFP receive port on one of the amplifier cards has detected a Loss Of Frame.
The LOF-O alarm is raised if the SONET framer detects framing errors in the A1/A2
overhead bytes as per the SONET specification
• The data rate may be inconsistent

Incoming SUPVY LOF alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOF-O

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source See “LOF-O” (p. B-25).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-169: “Clear Incoming SUPVY LOF ” (p. 3-314).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Incoming SUPVY LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Incoming SUPVY LOS

Meaning of alarm
The OSC SFP receive port on one of the amplifier cards has detected a Loss Of Signal.
The LOS-O alarm is raised if the SONET framer detects framing errors in the A1/A2
overhead bytes as per the SONET specification
On a fiber span, the OSC mode should match on both ends. If the rates do not match,
LOS-O is raised on one end, and Data Link Down (see “Data Link Down” (p. 2-212) is
raised on the other end.

Incoming SUPVY LOS alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOS-O

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source See “LOS-O” (p. B-26).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Incoming SUPVY LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-170: “Clear Incoming SUPVY LOS” (p. 3-316).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Inhibit Switch for redundant equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Inhibit Switch for redundant equipment

For the respective agnostic matrix 1+1 equipment protection group, automatic and manual
protection switching has been inhibited (disabled) by management command.

Inhibit Switch for redundant equipment condition:
Alarm identifier / INHSWDX

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source Agnostic matrix 1+1 equipment protection group
Notes:
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Inhibit Switch for redundant equipment condition is to be understood as
information rather than as an alarm and will be cleared autonomously as soon as
automatic and manual protection switching is enabled again for the respective agnostic
matrix 1+1 equipment protection group.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Initialization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Initialization
System initialization is currently in progress.

Initialization condition:
Alarm identifier / INIT

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source System
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Initialization condition is to be understood as an information rather than as an
alarm and will be cleared autonomously as soon as system initialization has been
completed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details INPREP, PM Global File Collection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INPREP, PM Global File Collection

Entering the “In Preparation” (INPREP) state of PM Global File Collection.

INPREP, PM Global File Collection condition:
Alarm identifier / PMGLBINPREP

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Notes:
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The INPREP, PM Global File Collection condition is to be understood as
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Input LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Input LOS
Meaning of alarm

Input LOS alarm:

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
setting) NSA –
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-171: “Clear Input LOS ” (p. 3-318).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Internal Clock signal of MTX missing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Internal Clock signal of MTX missing

The clock signal generated by the specified matrix card (MTX) is not distributed
internally.
“MTX” is the generic designation for all variants of matrix cards.

Internal Clock signal of MTX missing alarm:
Alarm identifier / INTCLOCKMISS

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source Matrix cards (MT960C, MT1T9C, MT1T9, MT3T8)
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-172: “Clear Internal Clock signal of MTX missing” (p. 3-319).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Internal Error to MTX A
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Internal Error to MTX A

Problem with the integrity of the internal payload links to the agnostic matrix A. “MTX”
is the generic designation for all variants of matrix cards.

Internal Error to MTX A alarm:
Alarm identifier / INTERR-A

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Effect on service Service-affecting
setting) NSA —
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-173: “Clear Internal Error to MTX A” (p. 3-323).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Internal Error to MTX B
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Internal Error to MTX B

Problem with the integrity of the internal payload links to the agnostic matrix B. “MTX”
is the generic designation for all variants of matrix cards.

Internal Error to MTX B alarm:
Alarm identifier / INTERR-B

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
setting) NSA —
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-174: “Clear Internal Error to MTX B” (p. 3-327).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Internal LAN Failed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Internal LAN Failed

Internal LAN connections failed. The connection of the alarmed equipment to the internal
LAN is no longer available.

Internal LAN Failed alarm:
Alarm identifier / INTLANFAIL

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
FLC36)
Related information
Local indications
LED 1 on the faceplate of the respective circuit pack is lit solid red.
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-175: “Clear Internal LAN Failed” (p. 3-331).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Internal LAN Redundancy Degraded
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Internal LAN Redundancy Degraded

Internal LAN redundancy is degraded. The connection of the alarmed equipment to the
internal LAN is no longer redundant.

Internal LAN Redundancy Degraded alarm:
Alarm identifier / INTLANDEGR

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source First-level Controller (ECHC (FLC), FLC64, FLC36EA, FLC36)
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-176: “Clear Internal LAN Redundancy Degraded” (p. 3-332).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Internal Synch Channel of MTX A corrupted
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Internal Synch Channel of MTX A corrupted

The internal synchronization signal generated by the matrix card A (MTX A) is corrupted
at the specified card.
MTX A is the matrix card in slot 71 in the PSS-64 subrack, or in slot 11 in the PSS-36
subrack, respectively.

Internal Synch Channel of MTX A corrupted alarm:
Alarm identifier / INTSYNCMISSA

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
FLC36)
• I/O cards
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Internal Synch Channel of MTX A corrupted
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-177: “Clear Internal Synch Channel of MTX A corrupted” (p. 3-333).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Internal Synch Channel of MTX B corrupted
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Internal Synch Channel of MTX B corrupted

The internal synchronization signal generated by the matrix card B (MTX B) is corrupted
at the specified card.
MTX B is the matrix card in slot 72 in the PSS-64 subrack, or in slot 15 in the PSS-36
subrack, respectively.

Internal Synch Channel of MTX B corrupted alarm:
Alarm identifier / INTSYNCMISSB

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
FLC36)
• I/O cards
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Internal Synch Channel of MTX B corrupted
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-178: “Clear Internal Synch Channel of MTX B corrupted” (p. 3-336).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Inter NE communication timeout blocking power
Network element alarms adjustment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Inter NE communication timeout blocking power adjustment

Meaning of alarm
The Power Adjust Communications condition is raised when the ingress optical line
adjustment algorithm is unable to retrieve information from the upstream optical line to
use in the adjustment calculations. Power adjustments are run during system initial
commissioning, and during in-service power balancing (which can be manually user
triggered, auto-triggered, or triggered by the commissioning and power balancing tool).
The most likely source of this condition is the upstream NE is busy processing other
requests.
PWRADJCOMMS is a non-reported non-service affecting condition. If the ingress
optical line adjustment was run automatically there is no corrective action required. The
adjustment will be run again at another point in the future. If the auto-triggered
adjustment is persistently resulting in PWRADJCOMMS, follow the corrective actions
below.
PWRADJFAIL is a related condition: When the ingress adjustment was not run
automatically and an upstream communication timeout occurs, the PWRADJFAIL
condition is raised as a reported condition in addition to the non-reported
PWRADJCOMMS condition. This allows the user to correct the failure, if necessary,
given the context the adjustment was triggered in.
If the PWRADJCOMMS alarm occurs during an automatic ingress adjustment then no
corrective action is required, unless the alarm does not clear after the adjustment has
completed.

Inter NE communication timeout blocking power adjustment alarm:
Alarm identifier / PWRADJCOMMS

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Inter NE communication timeout blocking power
Network element alarms adjustment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm source See “PWRADJCOMMS” (p. B-40).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-179: “Clear Inter NE communication timeout blocking power
adjustment ” (p. 3-339).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Inter-shelf loss of communication
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Inter-shelf loss of communication

Meaning of alarm
The active master shelf Equipment Controller has determined that the communications
link to a provisioned subtended shelf is down. This alarm may be raised for any of the
following reasons:
• Failure of the intershelf timing and control cable
• Disconnected or missing intershelf timing and control cable
• Subtended shelf loss of power
• Both subtended shelf Equipment Controllers are either failed or missing

Inter-shelf loss of communication alarm:
Alarm identifier / CONTCOM

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source SHELF-{2-8}
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-180: “Clear Inter-shelf loss of communication alarm” (p. 3-341).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Intra-Nodal Topology Failure-Operator Action Required
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Intra-Nodal Topology Failure-Operator Action Required

Meaning of alarm
The ASONTOPO alarm is a persistent alarm raised by facilities on which an expected
optical signal is no longer present. The alarm is maintained even if cross-connections
related to the signal are deleted.

Intra-Nodal Topology Failure-Operator Action Required alarm:
Alarm identifier / ASONTOPO

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS (LDs)
OCH (OTs)
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “ASONTOPO” (p. B-4).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-181: “Clear Intra-Nodal Topology Failure-Operator Action
Required alarm” (p. 3-342).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Invalid or no egress port defined
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Invalid or no egress port defined

Meaning of alarm
The INVALIDEGRESS condition is raised when a unidirectional LD has an external
topology provisioned on LineIn port, but no associated opposite direction port is defined.

Invalid or no egress port defined alarm:
Alarm identifier / INVALIDEGRESS

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “INVALIDEGRESS” (p. B-21).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-182: “Clear Invalid or no egress port defined alarm” (p. 3-344).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Invalid Threshold
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Invalid Threshold
Meaning of alarm
The OPS pack currently has an invalid switch threshold value provisioned. The threshold
must be greater than -30 dBm to clear the condition.
When a cross-connect is added for the first time, the Invalid Threshold alarm is
raised for ports A and B, and then clears after a few seconds. If the XC is deleted and
reentered, then the Invalid Threshold alarm is not raised.

Invalid Threshold alarm:
Alarm identifier / INVALIDTHRESHOLD

Mnemonic
ASAP type OCH
Alarm source OPS
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-183: “Clear Invalid Threshold alarm” (p. 3-345).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Invalid Topology
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Invalid Topology
Meaning of alarm
Valid cross-connects must terminate on one of the following end-points:
• a port marked as "External"
• a port marked as "No-connect"
• a transponder network port
Services that are running over invalid cross-connects may continue to operate, in which
case it may be best to wait for a maintenance window before performing this procedure,
or they may be interrupted, in which case a loss of service alarm is raised.

Invalid Topology alarm:
Alarm identifier / PRCDERR-TOPO

Mnemonic
ASAP type SYSTEM
Alarm source COM
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-184: “Clear Invalid Topology ” (p. 3-347).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details IPCP ECC Connection Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IPCP ECC Connection Failure

No IPCP connection could be established on an ECC provisioned for IP.
The alarm is raised after 10 unsuccessful attempts to establish the IPCP.

IPCP ECC Connection Failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / IPCPCONFAIL

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPNETIF
setting) NSA –
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-185: “Clear IPCP ECC Connection Failure” (p. 3-348).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details JB Recentered
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
JB Recentered
Meaning of alarm
The JB Recentered alarm is raised when the jitter buffer has been recentered.

JB Recentered alarm:
Alarm identifier / NA
Mnemonic
ASAP type NA
Alarm source See “JB Recentered” (p. B-21).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
If this condition occurs only occasionally, then this is a normal message. However, if this
condition is recurs or is persistent, verify that the SyncE is enabled at each end and both
are synchronized to the same source clock.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Link OAM Loss Of Protocol
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Link OAM Loss Of Protocol

Meaning of alarm

Link OAM Loss Of Protocol alarm:
Alarm identifier / RmdIfEFMLOP

Mnemonic
ASAP type RMD
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-197: “Clear Link OAM Loss Of Protocol” (p. 3-365).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details LAG port add failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LAG port add failure

Meaning of alarm
The LAG port add failure condition is raised if a port in a LAG fails to be added by
the LACP protocol because the LAG LACP attributes are mismatched between partners,
or the port link is down.

LAG port add failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / LAG-PORT-ADD-FAIL

Mnemonic
ASAP type LAG
Alarm source See “LAG-PORT-ADD-FAIL” (p. B-21).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-186: “Clear LAG port add failure” (p. 3-350).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details LAG Subgroup Selected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LAG Subgroup Selected

Meaning of alarm
The LAG Subgroup Selected alarm is raised when the LAG Group that is selected
has changed.

LAG Subgroup Selected alarm:
Alarm identifier / LAG-SUB-GRP-SEL

Mnemonic
ASAP type LAG
Alarm source See “LAG-SUB-GRP-SEL” (p. B-21).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Lan Cable Asymmetric connected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Lan Cable Asymmetric connected

The shelf LAN cables are asymmetrically connected.
The external LAN interfaces (ES1, ES2) in the left LAN ring and the external LAN
interfaces (ES1, ES2) of the right LAN ring are not connected to the same neighbors.
Interconnection of shelves in a multi-shelf configuration
When extension shelves are used then the main shelf and the extension shelves must be
interconnected by LAN cables in the following way:
• The external LAN interfaces (ES1, ES2) of the left matrix card must be connected to
the external LAN interfaces (ES1, ES2) of the left matrix card of the neighbor
shelves.
• The external LAN interfaces (ES1, ES2) of the right matrix card must be connected to
the external LAN interfaces (ES1, ES2) of the right matrix card of the neighbor
shelves
• The ES1 interfaces of a shelf are always connected to the ES2 interfaces of its
neighbor shelf.
• This must be done from one shelf to the next shelf until a ring closure is achieved.
Refer to the following figure for clarification:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Lan Cable Asymmetric connected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Lan Cable Asymmetric connected alarm:
Alarm identifier / LANASYM

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source Shelf
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-187: “Clear Lan Cable Asymmetric connected” (p. 3-351).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Lan Left Ring Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Lan Left Ring Failure

Shelf neighbors are missing in the left ring of the Shelf LAN; the left LAN is wrongly
connected.
shelves.
shelves
neighbor shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Lan Left Ring Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Lan Left Ring Failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / LANLEFTRING

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source System
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-188: “Clear Lan Left Ring Failure” (p. 3-352).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Lan Right Ring Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Lan Right Ring Failure

Shelf neighbors are missing in the right ring of the Shelf LAN; the right LAN is wrongly
connected.
shelves.
shelves
neighbor shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Lan Right Ring Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Lan Right Ring Failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / LANRIGHTRING

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source System
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-189: “Clear Lan Right Ring Failure” (p. 3-354).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Laser Back-Facet Optical Power Cross Threshold
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Laser Back-Facet Optical Power Cross Threshold

Meaning of alarm

Laser Back-Facet Optical Power Cross Threshold alarm:
Alarm identifier / LSPOW_ALM_W

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “LSPOW_ALM_W” (p. B-27).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-190: “Clear Laser Cooling Current Cross Threshold” (p. 3-356).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Laser Cooling Current Cross Threshold
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Laser Cooling Current Cross Threshold

Meaning of alarm

Laser Cooling Current Cross Threshold alarm:
Alarm identifier / LSTEMP_ALM_W

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “LSTEMP_ALM_W” (p. B-28).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-190: “Clear Laser Cooling Current Cross Threshold” (p. 3-356).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Laser end of life
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Laser end of life

Meaning of alarm
The OT port has detected laser end of life.

Laser end of life alarm:
Alarm identifier / LASEREOL

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “LASEREOL” (p. B-22).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-191: “Clear Laser end of life ” (p. 3-357).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Latch Open
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Latch Open
At least one of the two latches of the alarm-reporting unit is not closed.

Latch Open condition:
Alarm identifier / LATCHOPEN

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
FLC36)
• All I/O cards other than SFC8
Note that the SFC8 card does not support latch monitoring.
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Latch Open condition is to be understood as an information rather than as an alarm
and will be cleared autonomously as soon as either the respective unit is completely
removed or both latches are closed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details LCP ECC Connection Fail
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LCP ECC Connection Fail

Communication over an ECC is not possible because the link control protocol (LCP)
could not be established between the two ends of the link.
The alarm is raised after 10 unsuccessful attempts to establish the LCP.

LCP ECC Connection Fail alarm:
Alarm identifier / LCPCONFAIL

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPNETIF
setting) NSA –
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-192: “Clear LCP ECC Connection Fail” (p. 3-358).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details LD Input LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LD Input LOS
Meaning of alarm
The LINE port on one of the amplifier cards has detected a Loss Of Signal. The LOS
alarm is raised if the power measured at the port input drops below a threshold.

LD Input LOS alarm:

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
setting) NSA –
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-193: “Clear LD Input LOS ” (p. 3-360).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details LD SIG Input LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LD SIG Input LOS

Meaning of alarm
The SIG port on one of the amplifier cards has detected a Loss Of Signal. The LOS alarm
is raised if the power measured at the port input drops below a threshold.

LD SIG Input LOS alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOSLDSIG

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “LOSLDSIG” (p. B-26).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-198: “Clear LD SIG Input LOS ” (p. 3-366).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Line Card Configuration Failed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Line Card Configuration Failed

Meaning of alarm
The CONFIGFAIL condition is caused by a card boot failure.

Line Card Configuration Failed alarm:
Alarm identifier / CONFIGFAIL

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “CONFIGFAIL” (p. B-6).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
No corrective action is required. Troubleshoot the equipment alarms detected.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Line (Facility) loopback active
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Line (Facility) loopback active

Meaning of alarm
A line loopback is active on the specified port. Loopbacks are user-initiated and may only
be cleared by manually removing them from the port.
Note: It can take several minutes for transmission to be established on 40G OTs after
removing loopbacks.

Line (Facility) loopback active alarm:
Alarm identifier / LPBKLINE

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “LPBKLINE” (p. B-27).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-194: “Clear Line (Facility) loopback active alarm” (p. 3-362).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Link Aggregation Degrade
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Link Aggregation Degrade

Meaning of alarm
The Link Aggregation Degrade condition is raised when the LAG has more than one port
is in active state, but the active port is small than the configured supported port number.

The following tabular overview summarizes important information concerning the Link
Aggregation Degrade alarm:
Alarm identifier / LAGDEG

Mnemonic
ASAP type LAG
setting) NSA –
Alarm source 11DPE12A-shelf-slot-{LAG1-LAG4}
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-195: “Clear Link Aggregation Degrade ” (p. 3-363).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Link Aggregation Group Loss of Signal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Link Aggregation Group Loss of Signal

Meaning of alarm
The Link Aggregation Group Loss of Signal alarm is raised when all the ports
in the LAG are not in the active state.

Link Aggregation Group Loss of Signal alarm:
Alarm identifier / LAGLOS

Mnemonic
ASAP type PMD & PCS
setting) NSA –
Alarm source 11DPE12A-shelf-slot-{LAG1-LAG4}
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-196: “Clear Link Aggregation Group Loss of Signal ” (p. 3-364).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Link Down
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Link Down
Meaning of alarm
The NET NR condition is raised when the EC (ES1 & ES2) and USRPNL (OAMP, VOIP,
E1 & E2) ports are administratively disabled. When these ports are administratively
enabled and no Ethernet link connectivity is established, these NR conditions would be
reported as MN alarms.

Link Down alarm:
Alarm identifier / LINKDOWN

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS, OTU1, OTU2, PLK
setting) NSA Not reported (NR) or Minor (MN)
Alarm source See “LINKDOWN” (p. B-23).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-199: “Clear Link Down ” (p. 3-368).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Link Up
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Link Up
Meaning of alarm
The LINKUP autonomous message is issued after serial connection is established on the
CIT port.

The following tabular overview summarizes important information concerning the xyz
alarm:
Alarm identifier / LINKUP

Mnemonic
ASAP type EC: PLK
Alarm source EC, FAN
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details LAN Local Fault Indicator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LAN Local Fault Indicator

Meaning of alarm
A Local Fault (LANLFI) condition may be raised on a client or network port of an
Ethernet card and is attributed to a fault detected between the far-end transmitter and
near-end receiver. When an LANLFI is raised at the receive port, this serves to notify the
user of a fault somewhere upstream of the port where the LANLFI condition has been
raised.

LAN Local Fault Indicator alarm:
Alarm identifier / LANLFI

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “LANLFI” (p. B-21).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-200: “Clear Local Fault” (p. 3-370).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Local Packet Lost
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local Packet Lost

Meaning of alarm
The RmdCesChannelLPL alarm indicates that no TSoP packets are being received.

Local Packet Lost alarm:
Alarm identifier / RmdCesChannelLPL

Mnemonic
ASAP type RMD
Alarm category RmdCesChannel
setting) NSA –
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-201: “Clear Local Packet Lost ” (p. 3-372).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Locked
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Locked
The receive signal contains ODUk-LCK and cannot be used.
ODUk-LCK is a maintenance signal sent downstream an ODUk path as an indication that
upstream the connection is intentionally “locked” by the responsible network operator for
servicing purposes, and no signal is passed through.

Locked alarm:
Alarm identifier / LCK

Mnemonic
• ASAPODU0
• ASAPODU1
• ASAPODU2
• ASAPODU2E
• ASAPODU3
Effect on service in Service-affecting (SA) if transmission on a path is potentially
receive direction affected. Not service-affecting (NSA) otherwise.
Effect on service in Always not service-affecting (NSA).
transmit direction
setting) in receive
direction NSA Minor (MN)

setting) in transmit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Locked
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-203: “Clear Locked” (p. 3-374).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Locked - ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Locked - ODU
Meaning of alarm
OT port has detected Locked condition at ODUk Path layer. This defect indicates that
network operator in an external multi-vendor OTN network has locked the ODUk
payload by user command. LCK maintenance signal is not sourced by 1830 PSS network.
This may be caused if the network operator in external OTN network has caused insertion
of LCK maintenance signal.

Locked - ODU alarm:
Alarm identifier / LCK

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU0, ODU2, ODU3, ODU4
setting) NSA –
Alarm source 112SCX10, 112SDX11, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 11DPE12A,
11DPE12E, 11DPM4E, 11DPM4M, 11DPM8, 11DPM12,
11OPE8, 11QPA4, 11QPE24, 11QPEN4, , 11STAR1, 11STAR1A,
11STMM10, 130SCX10, 130SNX10, 260SCX2, 43SCA1,
43SCGE1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4E, 43STA1PB, 43STX4, 43STX4P,
4DPA4
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-204: “Clear Locked - ODU ” (p. 3-375).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Locked - TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Locked - TCM Layer

The receive signal contains ODUk-LCK and cannot be used.
ODUk-LCK is a maintenance signal sent downstream an ODUk path on a TCM layer as
an indication that upstream the connection is intentionally “locked” by the responsible
network operator for servicing purposes, and no signal is passed through.

Locked - TCM Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / LCK-T

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPTCM
affected, not service-affecting (NSA) otherwise.
Alarm source ODUk path on TCM layer (ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2E,
ODU3)
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-205: “Clear Locked - TCM Layer” (p. 3-376).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Locked - TCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Locked - TCM
Meaning of alarm
Monitored TCM has detected the Locked condition at ODUk Path layer. This defect
indicates that network operator in an external multi-vendor OTN network has locked the
ODUk payload by user command. LCK maintenance signal is not sourced by 1830 PSS
network. This may be caused if the network operator in external OTN network has caused
insertion of LCK maintenance signal.

Locked - TCM alarm:
Alarm identifier / LCKTCM

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU2TCMj, ODU3TCM{1-3}
setting) NSA –
Alarm source 11QPA4
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-205: “Clear Locked - TCM Layer” (p. 3-376).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Lock out of a timing reference from selection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Lock out of a timing reference from selection

Meaning of alarm

Lock out of a timing reference from selection alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOCKOUTOFTIMREF

Mnemonic
ASAP type LINEREF
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-202: “Clear Lock out of a timing reference from selection ”
(p. 3-373).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Lockout of a timing reference for the output timing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Lockout of a timing reference for the output timing selection

process
Meaning of alarm
The LOCKOUTOFTIMREF-T4 alarm is raised on the timing reference when it is locked
out for the output timing selection process.

Lockout of a timing reference for the output timing selection process alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOCKOUTOFTIMREF-T4

Mnemonic
ASAP type LINEREF
Local indications
Trouble clearing
(p. 3-734).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Lockout of Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Lockout of Protection
Meaning of alarm
Lockout of protection facility.
A user has initiated a lockout request for a facility protection group.
A lockout request is a manual protection switching operation to support facility
maintenance actions, it forces traffic onto the working facility and inhibits automatic
protection switching. Clearing the lockout request will again allow protection switching
to take place and will result in the lockout condition being cleared.
Brief alarm overview - Lockout of Protection (LOCKOUTOFPR) for photonic applications

Lockout of Protection condition for photonic applications:
Alarm identifier / LOCKOUTOFPR

Mnemonic
OC192/STM64, OC768/STM256, OCH, OTU1 OTU2
Alarm source 112SCX10, 112SNX10, 11DPE12A, 11DPE12E, 11QPA4,
11QPEN4,11STAR1, 11STAR1A, 11STMM10, 130SCX10,
43SCX4, 43SCX4E, 43STA1PB, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA2,
4DPA4, OPS
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Brief alarm overview - Lockout of Protection (LOCKOUTOFPR) for switching applications
Lockout of Protection condition for switching applications:

Mnemonic
ASAP type 1+1 ODUk SNCP:
• ASAPODU0
• ASAPODU1
• ASAPODU2
• ASAPODU2E
• ASAPODU3
• ASAPODU3E2
• ASAPODU4
1+1 SNCP of VC-n facilities:
• ASAPVC4
• ASAPVC44C
• ASAPVC416C
1+1 UPSR of STS-n facilities:
• ASAPSTS1
• ASAPSTS3C
• ASAPSTS12C
• ASAPSTS48C
1:N ODUk SNC/S protection:
• ASAPODU2
• ASAPODU2E
1+1 MSP
• ASAPFFP
Effect on service Not service-affecting (NSA).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm source 1+1 ODUk SNCP2

1+1 SNCP of VC-n facilities (VC-4, VC-4-4c, VC-4-16c)
1+1 UPSR of STS-n facilities (STS-1, STS-3c, STS-12c,
STS-48c)
1:N ODUk SNC/S protection
1+1 MSP
Notes:
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Lockout of Protection condition is to be understood as information rather than
as an alarm and will be cleared autonomously as soon as the lockout request is cleared.
For information how to clear a lockout request for photonic applications, see Procedure
3-206: “Clear Lockout of Protection” (p. 3-377).
For information how to clear a lockout request for switching applications, refer to the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS User Provisioning Guide (“Release an SNC protection switch”).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Lockout of Protection - Far End
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Lockout of Protection - Far End

Lockout of protection facility due to a request from the far end.

Lockout of Protection - Far End condition:

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPFFP
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Lockout of Protection condition is to be understood as information rather than
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Lockout of Timing Reference
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Lockout of Timing Reference

Lockout of a Timing Reference from Selection.

Lockout of Timing Reference condition:
Alarm identifier / LOCKOUTOFTIMREF

Mnemonic
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Lockout of Timing Reference condition is to be understood as information
rather than as an alarm and will be cleared autonomously as soon as the lockout request is
cleared.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Lockout of Working
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Lockout of Working
Lockout of working. The related normal traffic ODUn is not allowed to request usage of
protection.

Lockout of Working condition:
Alarm identifier / LOCKOUTWR

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPODUn
Notes:
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Lockout of Working condition is to be understood as an information rather than
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Log File Transfer Failure Local
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Log File Transfer Failure Local

Meaning of alarm
The TRANSFERLOGFL alarm is raised when the temporary log file cannot be read
(meaning that the log file cannot be transported to the RFS) or the tmp file cannot be
created.

Log File Transfer Failure Local alarm:
Alarm identifier / TRANSFERLOGFL

Mnemonic
ASAP type COM
Alarm source SYSTEM
Local indications
Trouble clearing
No corrective action is required. This alarm is cleared automatically when the log file
transfers successfully.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Log File Transfer Failure Transport
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Log File Transfer Failure Transport

Meaning of alarm

Log File Transfer Failure Transport alarm:
Alarm identifier / TRANSFERLOGFT

Mnemonic
ASAP type COM
Alarm source SYSTEM
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-207: “Clear Log File Transfer Failure Transport ” (p. 3-379).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Log File Transfer in Progress
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Log File Transfer in Progress

Meaning of alarm
The Log File Transfer in Progress alarm is raised during log file transfer to
RFS, at the start of the file transfer.

Log File Transfer in Progress alarm:
Alarm identifier / TRANSFERLOGIP

Mnemonic
ASAP type COM
Alarm source SYSTEM
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
No corrective action is required. The alarm clears automatically when the log file transfer
has completed successfully or failed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Logical removal of a timing reference
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Logical removal of a timing reference

Meaning of alarm
The MAN condition occurs when the OT port has detected a MAN at the LINEREF layer,
which indicates that a logical removal was performed on a timing reference.

Logical removal of a timing reference alarm:
Alarm identifier / MAN

Mnemonic
ASAP type LINEREF
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-208: “Clear Logical removal of a timing reference” (p. 3-380).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of 1588 Synchronization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of 1588 Synchronization

Meaning of alarm
The PTP clock on the card has detected a PTP clock loss of synchronization. The
PTP-LOC-LOS alarm is raised if the PTP clock is not in the locked state.
• The input ToD port is not enabled
• The PTP ports are not enabled or not configured properly
• Alarms on the ToD or PTP ports are detected
• No stabled clock reference with higher clock quality is connected to this clock

Loss of 1588 Synchronization alarm:
Alarm identifier / PTP-LOC-LOS

Mnemonic
ASAP type PTP
Alarm source PTPCLOCK
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-209: “Clear Loss of 1588 Synchronization ” (p. 3-381).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of 1PPS Signal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of 1PPS Signal

Meaning of alarm
An input ToD port on the card has detected a Loss of 1PPS. The PPS-LOS alarm is raised
if the 1PPS signal is not detected for 3 seconds.
• The port is not configured as input
• A misconnected or damaged or cable
• The received signal may not be within the acceptable range because the cable is too
long

The following tabular overview summarizes important information concerning the Loss
of 1PPS Signal alarm:
Alarm identifier / PPS-LOS

Mnemonic
ASAP type PTP
Alarm category TOD
Alarm source 11DPE12A-shelf-slot-{TOD1-TOD2}
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-210: “Clear Loss of 1PPS Signal ” (p. 3-382).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Lane Alignment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Lane Alignment

Meaning of alarm
The Loss of Lane Alignment condition is raised when the multi-lane alignment
process is in the out-of-alignment (OLA) state. If two or more logical lanes have the same
logical lane marker value, or if one or more logical lane marker recovery processes are in
the loss of range (LOR) state, or if the differential delay between two logical lanes
exceeds the maximum delay that can be compensated in accordance to the related sink
function, multi-lane alignment is not possible and the out-of-multi-lane-alignment state is
entered. The alarm clears when the multi-lane alignment process is in the ILA state. This
alarm is applied to 112SDX11 client 40GbE LAN as it is multi-lane interface.

Loss of Lane Alignment alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOLA

Mnemonic
ASAP type 40GBE
Alarm category 40GbE LAN PCS & MAC
setting) NSA –
Alarm source 112SDX11
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-211: “Clear Loss of Alignment Marker Lock ” (p. 3-383).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Alignment Marker Lock
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Alignment Marker Lock

Meaning of alarm
Each alignment marker lock process looks for two valid alignment markers 16384 66-bit
blocks apart to gain alignment marker lock. The Loss of Alignment Marker Lock
condition is raised when the system cannot detect the PCS lane marker. This condition
applies to the112SDX11 client 40GbE LAN.

Loss of Alignment Marker Lock alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOAM

Mnemonic
ASAP type 100GbE
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “LOAM” (p. B-24).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-211: “Clear Loss of Alignment Marker Lock ” (p. 3-383).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Announce Messages on the Slave Port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Announce Messages on the Slave Port

Meaning of alarm
The slave PTP port has detected a Loss of ANNOUNCE message. The
ANNOUNCE-LOSS alarm is raised if the slave port does not receive ANNOUNCE
message for N x Announce_message_interval. N is provisionable for the range of [2,255]
and the default value is 3.
• The connected master PTP port left from the master state.
• The ANNOUNCE messages were lost when across the network between the master
port and slave port.

of Announce Messages on the Slave Port alarm:
Alarm identifier / ANNOUNCE-LOSS

Mnemonic
ASAP type PTPPORT
Alarm source See “ANNOUNCE-LOSS” (p. B-2).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-240: “Clear Loss of Sync Messages on the Slave Port ”
(p. 3-431).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of continuity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of continuity
Meaning of alarm
The OT port has detected a loss of continuity at the MEP layer. A MEP detects LOC with
a peer MEP when it stops receiving CCM frames from that peer ME. Such a defect
condition can be caused by hard failures such as a link failure/device failure, or soft
failures such as memory corruption, or misconfigurations. This alarm is raised when an
MEP receives CCM frames with an incorrect MEG ID. The alarm is cleared when the
MEP does not receive CCM frames with the correct MEG ID.

Loss of continuity alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOC

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “LOC” (p. B-24).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-212: “Clear Loss of continuity ” (p. 3-385).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Continuity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Continuity
Meaning of alarm
A loss of CCM on the local MEP has occurred.

Loss Of Continuity alarm:
Alarm identifier / RmdMepLOC

Mnemonic
ASAP type RMD
setting) NSA –
Alarm source 11QPE24-shelf-slot-RMD{1-32}-MEP{1-8191}
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-213: “Clear Loss of Continuity” (p. 3-386).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Delay_Resp Messages on the Slave Port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Delay_Resp Messages on the Slave Port

Meaning of alarm
The DELAYRESP-LOSS alarm is raised if the slave port does not receive DELAY_RESP
message for 4 x DELAY_REQ_message_interval.
• The connected master PTP port left from the master state
• The DELAY_RESP messages were lost when across the network between the master
port and slave port

Loss of Delay_Resp Messages on the Slave Port alarm:
Alarm identifier / DELAYRESP-LOSS

Mnemonic
ASAP type PTP
Alarm source See “DELAYRESP-LOSS” (p. B-9).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
(p. 3-431).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Frame
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Frame
The meaning depends on the flavor of the Loss of Frame alarm.
Loss of Frame (LOF) for photonic applications
A receive port on one of the optical cards has detected a Loss Of Frame. The LOF alarm
is raised if:
• the SONET framer detects framing errors in the A1/A2 overhead bytes as per the
SONET specification
• the OTN framer detects corruption in the Framing Alignment Signal (FAS) bytes.
Loss of Frame (LOF) for switching applications
The position of the frame alignment signal cannot be detected correctly in the receive
signal. Frame alignment is not possible, the signal cannot be used.
The Loss of Frame alarm is used with the following different Alarm Severity
Assignment Profiles (ASAP):
• ASAPBITS
• ASAPOC3, ASAPOC12, ASAPOC48, ASAPOC192, ASAPOC768
• ASAPOTU
• ASAPSTM1, ASAPSTM4, ASAPSTM16, ASAPSTM64, ASAPSTM256
Important! If an optical module is created either explicitly by means of a
management command or via autoprovisioning (system is configured for
autoprovisioning and a circuit pack with equipped optical modules is plugged in),
then it can happen that for a short period of time false port alarms are raised. These
alarms get cleared within 15 seconds and can be ignored.
Brief alarm overview - Loss of Frame (LOF) for photonic applications

Loss of Frame alarm for photonic applications:
Alarm identifier / LOF

Mnemonic
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OC192/STM64, OC768/STM256
Effect on service for Service-affecting (NSA)
LOSOMS and LANLOS
setting) for LOSOMS and
LANLOS NSA –
Alarm source 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 11DPE12A, 11DPE12E,

11DPM12, 11QPA4, 11QPE24, 11QPEN4, 11STAR1, 11STAR1,
11STMM10, 43SCA1, 43SCGE1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4E,
43STA1PB, 43STX4, 43STX4P, 4DPA4
Related information
Brief alarm overview - Loss of Frame (LOF) for switching applications

Loss of Frame alarm for switching applications:
Alarm identifier / LOF

Mnemonic
• ASAPBITS
ASAPOC768
• ASAPOTU
ASAPSTM256
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm category Depending on the ASAP affiliation:

ASAPBITS Synchronization
ASAPOC3, Transmission
ASAPOC12,
ASAPOC48,
ASAPOC192,
ASAPOTU,
ASAPSTM1,
ASAPSTM4,
ASAPSTM16,
ASAPSTM64
Effect on service Depending on the alarm category:
• Synchronization: Not service-affecting (NSA)
• Transmission: Service-affecting (SA) if transmission on a
path is potentially affected. Not service-affecting (NSA)
otherwise.
setting) for external timing
input ports NSA Minor (MN)

setting) for SONET
SA Critical (CR)
transmission facilities
(OC-n) NSA Minor (MN)
setting) for OTU SA Critical (CR)
NSA Minor (MN)
setting) for SDH
SA Major (MJ)
(STM-n) NSA Minor (MN)
• Synchronization:
– BITS input port facilities (external timing inputs)
• Transmission facilities:
– OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192
– OTU2, OTU2E, OTU3, OTU3E2, OTU4
– STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Depending on the flavor of the Loss of Frame alarm, see:
• Procedure 3-215: “Clear Loss Of Frame (photonic applications)” (p. 3-388)
• Procedure 3-216: “Clear Loss of Frame (switching applications)” (p. 3-389)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe

A Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe has been detected in the receive
signal of the path. The signal cannot be used.
Note: The Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe alarm is valid for LO
ODU only.

Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOFLOM

Mnemonic
• ASAPODU0
• ASAPODU1
• ASAPODU2
• ASAPODU2E
• ASAPODU3
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-217: “Clear Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe” (p. 3-391).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe (LOFLOM - ODU)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe (LOFLOM - ODU)

Meaning of alarm
The LOFLOM alarm is raised at the low-order ODU entities of the MUX OT Line port
when the the frame and multiframe alignment process in ODU demultiplexing cannot find
the proper ODU framing patterns and mutliframe sequence.
This condition may be caused by the following reasons:
• Uucorrectable bit errors after the FEC, resulting in a high error ratio of ODU payload
• Signal failures reported at the high-order OTU or ODU layer
• Upstream OT outputs an OTU signal, but the ODU payload format is not compatible

Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe (LOFLOM - ODU) alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOFLOM

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODUflex
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “LOFLOM” (p. B-25).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-218: “Clear Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe
(LOFLOM-ODU) ” (p. 3-393).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Frame at the BITS Port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Frame at the BITS Port

Meaning of alarm
The BITSLOF alarm is raised when the card has detected a BITSLOF condition. The
BITSLOF alarm is raised on the BITS input port if the LOF (Loss of Frame) was
detected.
• A misconnected, damaged cable
• The received electrical level may not be within the acceptable range because of a too
long cable
• The signal format may be inconsistent

of Frame at the BITS Port alarm:
Alarm identifier / BITSLOF

Mnemonic
ASAP type BITS
Alarm source PTPCTL-shelf-slot-BITS{2}
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-219: “Clear Loss of Frame at the BITS Port” (p. 3-396).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Frame Egress
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Frame Egress

Meaning of alarm
OT port has detected Loss of Frame on CBR2G5 (transparent OC48/STM16) or CBR10G
(transparent STM64) service transported over OTUk in transmit direction.

Loss of Frame Egress alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOFEGR

Mnemonic
OC192/STM64
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “LOFEGR” (p. B-25).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-220: “Clear Loss of Frame Egress ” (p. 3-397).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss Of Frames
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss Of Frames
Meaning of alarm
The RmdNimLOF alarm indicates that an optical signal is present but the TDM signal is
not found.

Loss Of Frames alarm:
Alarm identifier / RmdNimLOF

Mnemonic
ASAP type RMD
setting) NSA –
Alarm source 11QPE24-shelf-slot-RMD{1-32}/network
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-221: “Clear Loss Of Frames ” (p. 3-398).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of GFP alignment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of GFP alignment

Loss of GFP alignment on the ODU path termination, the GFP delineation algorithm
failed to recover the framestart of the GFP frame.
The Loss of GFP alignment alarm is relevant for GFP-F-mapped Ethernet payload
only, that is for:
mapping)

Loss of GFP alignment alarm:
Alarm identifier / GFPLOF

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPODU2
setting) NSA –
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-222: “Clear Loss of GFP alignment” (p. 3-399).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of lane alignment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of lane alignment

Meaning of alarm
The Loss of lane alignment condition is raised for multilane interfaces of type
OPSMnk (OTL4.4) based on the lane alignment process of the multilane signals.
Possible causes for this alarm are:
• Two or more loginal lanes have the same logical lane marker value
• One or more logical lane marker recovery processes are in the loss of recovery (LOR)
state
• The differential delay between two logical lanes exceeds the maximum delay that can
be compensated in accordance to the related sink function.

Loss of lane alignment alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOL

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-223: “Clear Loss of lane alignment ” (p. 3-402).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Link, GBE10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Link, GBE10

The 10 GbE receive signal contains a local fault indication (LFI) or a remote fault
indication (RFI), indicating that the signal cannot be used.
Both fault indications are inserted in the transmit signal at the remote end of a 10 GbE
link when a corresponding failure condition is present. LFI is inserted in case the
transmitting equipment is defective at the remote NE, RFI is inserted in case a failure
condition has been detected in the receive signal at the remote NE; see also Figure 3-1,
“Contributors to the loss of link alarming” (p. 3-403).

Loss of Link, GBE10 alarm:

Mnemonic
ASAP type Transmission
Alarm category Always service-affecting (SA).
Effect on service SA Critical (CR)
Alarm severity (default
setting) NSA –
Alarm source GBE10 unit, GBE 100
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-224: “Clear Loss of Link, GBE10/GBE100” (p. 3-403).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Link, GBE100
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Link, GBE100

The 100 GbE receive signal contains a local fault indication (LFI) or a remote fault
indication (RFI), indicating that the signal cannot be used.
Both fault indications are inserted in the transmit signal at the remote end of a 100 GbE
link when a corresponding failure condition is present. LFI is inserted in case the
transmitting equipment is defective at the remote NE, RFI is inserted in case a failure
condition has been detected in the receive signal at the remote NE; see also Figure 3-1,
“Contributors to the loss of link alarming” (p. 3-403).

Loss of Link, GBE100 alarm:

Mnemonic
ASAP type Transmission
Alarm category Always service-affecting (SA).
Effect on service SA Critical (CR)
Alarm severity (default
setting) NSA –
Alarm source GBE100 unit
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-224: “Clear Loss of Link, GBE10/GBE100” (p. 3-403).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Multiframe
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Multiframe
No multiframe sequence can be derived from the received multiframe alignment signal
(MFAS) of the OTU overhead.

Loss of Multiframe alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOM

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPOTU
Alarm source OTU
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-225: “Clear Loss of Multiframe” (p. 3-405).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Multiframe - OTU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Multiframe - OTU

Meaning of alarm
This alarm is raised at an OT port when the OT receiver cannot synchronize to a
multiframe indicator of an incoming OTUk bit stream.
• Received power may not be within the acceptable range on OT port input
• Damaged or dirty transmitter inside pluggable module on the OT
• Problem at the upstream OT

Loss of Multiframe - OTU alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOM

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTU2, OTU3, OTU4
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “LOM” (p. B-25).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-226: “Clear Loss of Multiframe - OTU ” (p. 3-407).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Optical Signal, GBE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Optical Signal, GBE

Loss of optical signal on a GbE unit.
Possible causes of the alarm are:
• Optical connectors not or not properly connected
• Cable break along the GbE link
• Laser switched off at the remote equipment (for example as a consequent action in a
link pass through configuration)

Loss of Optical Signal, GBE alarm:

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPGBE
setting) NSA –
Alarm source GbE unit
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-227: “Clear Loss of Optical Signal, GBE” (p. 3-409).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Optical Signal, GBE10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Optical Signal, GBE10

Loss of optical signal on a 10 GbE unit.
• Cable break along the 10 GbE link

Loss of Optical Signal, GBE10 alarm:

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPGBE10
Effect on service Always service-affecting (SA).
setting) NSA –
Alarm source GBE10 unit, GBE 100
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-228: “Clear Loss of Optical Signal, GBE10” (p. 3-411).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Optical Signal, GBE100
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Optical Signal, GBE100

Loss of optical signal on a 100 GbE unit.
• Cable break along the 100 GbE link

Loss of Optical Signal, GBE10 alarm:

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPGBE10
Effect on service Always service-affecting (SA).
setting)
NSA –
Alarm source 100 GbE unit
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-229: “Clear Loss of Optical Signal, GBE100” (p. 3-413).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of OPU Multiframe Identifier
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of OPU Multiframe Identifier

The OPU Multiframe Identifier (OMFI) cannot be found in the higher order ODU4 on a
130SCUP switchponder card. The signal cannot be used.
Note: The Loss of OPU Multiframe Identifier alarm is reported for the
higher order ODU4 and affects all the contained lower order ODUs. As a consequent
action, a Server Signal Failure - Path alarm will be reported for the affected
lower order ODUs.

Loss of OPU Multiframe Identifier alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOOMFI

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPODU4
NSA Not alarmed (NA)
Alarm source Higher order ODU4 on a 130SCUP switchponder card
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-230: “Clear Loss of OPU Multiframe Identifier” (p. 3-415).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Pointer HO Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Pointer HO Path

The expected signal structure cannot be found in the receive signal on VC-n path level.

Loss of Pointer HO Path alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOP-P

Mnemonic
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-231: “Clear Loss of Pointer HO Path” (p. 3-417).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Pointer STS Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Pointer STS Path

The expected signal structure cannot be found in the receive signal on STS-n path level.

Loss of Pointer STS Path alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOP-P

Mnemonic
Alarm source STS-n (STS-1, STS-3c, STS-12c, STS-48c)
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See “” (p. 2-442).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Signal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Signal
The meaning depends on the flavor of the Loss of Signal alarm.
Loss of Signal (LANLOS)
OT port has detected LOS on Ethernet LAN or Fibre Channel facility. This defect
indicates loss of optical power at the input of the local LAN port.
• Damaged, cut or dirty fiber connected to the local receiver
• Damaged or dirty transmitter inside pluggable module
Loss of Signal (LOS)
Loss of signal at an input port related to the affected facility.
Affected facilities can be:
• Synchronization facilities:
– OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, OC-768
– Optical channel (OCh)
– STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64, STM-256
A Loss of Signal (LOS) alarm can have the following causes:
• Cable break along the route
• Connectors not terminated or featuring impurities
• Signal power outside the permissible range
• Defective optical receiver
• Defective optical transmitter at the far end
• Inputs and outputs mixed up
Important! If an optical module is created either explicitly by means of a
management command or via autoprovisioning (system is configured for
autoprovisioning and a circuit pack with equipped optical modules is plugged in),
then it can happen that for a short period of time false port alarms are raised. These
alarms get cleared within 15 seconds and can be ignored.
Loss of Signal (LOSOMS)
The LOSOMS condition indicates that an input loss of signal has occurred on the reported
OPSA input port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Brief alarm overview - Loss of Signal (LANLOS)
Loss of Signal (LANLOS) alarm:
Alarm identifier / LANLOS

Mnemonic
ASAP type 1GbE, 10GbE,100 GbE, CBRAR, FC100, FC200, FC400, FC800,
FC1200
Effect on service for Service-affecting (SA)
LOSOMS and LANLOS
setting) for LOSOMS and
LANLOS NSA –
Alarm source 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SNA1, 112SNX10, 11STAR1,

11STAR1A, 11STMM10, 43SCGE1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4E,
43STX4
Related information
Brief alarm overview - Loss of Signal (LOS)

Loss of Signal (LOS) alarm:

Mnemonic
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• ASAPBITS
ASAPOC768
• ASAPOCH
ASAPSTM256
ASAPBITS Synchronization
ASAPOC3, ASAPOC12, Transmission
ASAPOC48,
ASAPOC192,
ASAPOCH,
ASAPSTM1,
ASAPSTM4,
ASAPSTM16,
ASAPSTM64
Effect on service Depending on the alarm category:
• Synchronization: Not service-affecting (NSA)
• Transmission: Service-affecting (SA) if transmission on a path
is potentially affected. Not service-affecting (NSA) otherwise.
setting) for external timing
input ports NSA Minor (MN)
SA Critical (CR)
setting) for ASAPOCH SA Critical (CR)
NSA Minor (MN)
setting) for ASAPSTM1,
ASAPSTM4, SA Major (MJ)
ASAPSTM16, and
NSA Minor (MN)
ASAPSTM64
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192
– STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64
Related information
Brief alarm overview - Loss of Signal (LOSOMS)

Loss of Signal (LOSOMS) alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOSOMS

Mnemonic
ASAP type OMS
setting) NSA –
Alarm source OPS
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Depending on the flavor of the Loss of Signal alarm, see:
• Procedure 3-233: “Clear Loss of Signal (LANLOS)” (p. 3-419)
• Procedure 3-234: “Clear Loss of Signal (LOS)” (p. 3-420)
• Procedure 3-235: “Clear Loss of Signal (LOSOMS)” (p. 3-425)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Signal at the BITS Input Port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Signal at the BITS Input Port

Meaning of alarm
The BITSLOS alarm is raised on the BITS input port if the LOS (Loss of Signal) was
detected.
• A misconnected, damaged cable
• The received electrical level may not be within the acceptable range because of a too
long cable

of Signal at the BITS Input Port alarm:
Alarm identifier / BITSLOS

Mnemonic
ASAP type BITS
Alarm source See “BITSLOS” (p. B-6).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-236: “Clear Loss of Signal at the BITS Input Port” (p. 3-427).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Signal Payload
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Signal Payload

Loss of optical signal at the line side receiver of a CWDM channel on the SFC8.

Loss of Signal Payload alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOS-OTS

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPOTS
Alarm source Optical Transmission Section (OTS) on SFC8
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Perform the trouble clearing procedure for Loss of Signal analogously for the CWDM
client ports on the SFC8; see Procedure 3-234: “Clear Loss of Signal (LOS)” (p. 3-420).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Subsystem Control of Shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Subsystem Control of Shelf

The subsystem controlled by the equipment cannot be provisioned or supervised at the
moment.
This alarm can occur
• if the active FLC cannot control an SLC of the matrix cards, for example after a
power cycle of the standby matrix card.
• when an FLC to SLC configuration download is in progress.
• when a software initialization of the matrix card is in progress.
• if a main FLC cannot control an extension shelf FLC
• if an active MTX cannot control IO-Cards with uBCM within a shelf

Loss of Subsystem Control of Shelf alarm:
Alarm identifier / LSSC

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source Matrix cards (MT960C, MT1T9C, MT1T9, MT3T8)
First-Level Controllers FLCs (EC_HC, FLC36EA)
IO cards (43SCUP, 11QCUPC 130SCUP, 130SCUPB, 1AN100G)
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Subsystem Control of Shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-237: “Clear Loss of Subsystem Control of Shelf” (p. 3-428).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Synchronisation (LSS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Synchronisation (LSS)

Loss of character synchronization, it is not possible to synchronize on the Gigabit
Ethernet receive signal (1 GbE, 10 GbE or 100 GbE).
The Gigabit Ethernet client signal is faulty, and will be replaced.
Important! Please note that no Loss of Synchronisation alarm will be
reported when the loss of character synchronization condition is present at a 1 GbE
LAN port on a 24ANM or 24ANMB card.

Loss of Synchronisation alarm:
Alarm identifier / LSS

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPGBE, ASAPGBE10, ASAPGBE100
setting) NSA –
Alarm source GBE, GBE10, GBE100
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-238: “Clear Loss of Synchronisation (LSS)” (p. 3-429).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Synchronization (LANLSS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Synchronization (LANLSS)

Meaning of alarm
OT port has detected Loss of 64B/66B or 8B/10B block/character synchronization on
10GbE, 1GbE or FC facility.
• Damaged, cut or dirty fiber connected to the local receiver
• Damaged or dirty transmitter inside pluggable module

Loss of Synchronization (LANLSS) alarm:
Alarm identifier / LANLSS

Mnemonic
ASAP type 1GbE, 10GbE, 100 GbE, CBRAR, DDR, FC100, FC200, FC400,
FC800, FC1200
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “LANLSS” (p. B-22).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-239: “Clear Loss of Synchronization (LANLSS)” (p. 3-430).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Sync Messages on the Slave Port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Sync Messages on the Slave Port

Meaning of alarm
The SYNC-LOSS alarm is raised if the slave port does not receive SYNC message for 4 x
SYNC_message_interval.
• The connected master PTP port left from the master state
• The SYNC messages were lost when across the network between the master port and
slave port

of Sync Messages on the Slave Port alarm:
Alarm identifier / SYNC-LOSS

Mnemonic
ASAP type PTP
Alarm source See “SYNC-LOSS” (p. B-49).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
(p. 3-431).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of Tandem Connection on TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of Tandem Connection on TCM Layer

The Loss of Tandem Connection on TCM Layer is an open connection
indication, it typically indicates that tandem connection monitoring (TCM) is not
consistently configured at both ends of a TCM trail.
Tandem connection monitoring (TCM)
The system supports provisioning 3 levels of TCM freely to one of the 6 levels defined by
the ITU-T Recommendation G.709. For additional information, also refer to the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS TL1 Command Guide.

Loss of Tandem Connection on TCM Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / LTC-T

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPTCM
Alarm category Communication (Transmission)
Effect on service Service-affecting (SA) if the tandem connection is terminated. Not
service-affecting (NSA) if the tandem connection is not terminated
(non-intrusively monitored, NIM).
Alarm source TCM
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-241: “Clear Loss of Tandem Connection on TCM Layer” (p. 3-432).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Loss of ToD Signal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of ToD Signal

Meaning of alarm
An input ToD port on the card has detected a Loss of ToD. The TOD-LOS alarm is raised
if the 1PPS or the ToD signal is not detected for 3 seconds.
• The port is not configured as input
• A misconnected or damaged or cable
• The received signal may not be within the acceptable range because the cable is too
long

of ToD Signal alarm:
Alarm identifier / TOD-LOS

Mnemonic
ASAP type PTP
Alarm category TOD
Alarm source 11DPE12A-shelf-slot-{TOD1-TOD2}
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-242: “Clear Loss of ToD Signal ” (p. 3-433).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Low input voltage floor defect
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Low input voltage floor defect

Meaning of alarm
Indicates that the magnitude of the input voltage has fallen below the user-defined floor
voltage.

Low input voltage floor defect alarm:
Alarm identifier / ShelfInVoltMaxCur

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source PF-shelf-slot
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-243: “Clear Low input voltage floor defect ” (p. 3-434).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Low Voltage Cut-Off
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Low Voltage Cut-Off

The voltage of the connected battery is very low. If the battery voltage decreases, the
voltage will be switched off.
This alarm is reported per power feed. The system has two redundant Power feeds (A/B).
This alarm indicatse a serious Problem only when
• there is only power connected to a single Feed (PSF)
• there is NO redundant power supply (single office battery is powering both PSF with
too less Voltage)
• both power supply branches providing the same low voltage.

Low Voltage Cut-Off alarm:
Alarm identifier / LVCO

Mnemonic
setting) NSA –
Alarm source Power Supply Filter (PSF3T8, PFC)
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-244: “Clear Low Voltage Cut-Off” (p. 3-435).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Manual (Management) Removal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manual (Management) Removal

The respective facility or equipment component has manually been taken out of service
(by means of a management command).

Manual (Management) Removal alarm:

Mnemonic
ASAP type Depending on the affected facility or equipment component:
• ASAPBITS, ASAPTIMING,
• ASAPEQPT
• ASAPGBE, ASAPGBE10, ASAPGBE100
ASAPOC768
• ASAPOCH
• ASAPOMS
• ASAPOTS
• ASAPOTU
ASAPSTM256
• ASAPTCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ASAPEQPT Equipment
ASAPBITS, Synchronization
ASAPTIMING
ASAPGBE, Transmission
ASAPGBE10,
ASAPGBE100,
ASAPOC3,
ASAPOC12,
ASAPOC48,
ASAPOC192,
ASAPOC768 ,
ASAPOCH,
ASAPODU0,
ASAPODU1,
ASAPODU2,
ASAPODU2E,
ASAPODU3,
ASAPODU3E2,
ASAPODU4,
ASAPOMS,
ASAPOTS,
ASAPOTU,
ASAPSTM1,
ASAPSTM4,
ASAPSTM16,
ASAPSTM64,
ASAPSTM256 ,
ASAPSTS1,
ASAPSTS3C,
ASAPSTS12C,
ASAPSTS48C,
ASAPTCM,
ASAPVC4,
ASAPVC44C,
ASAPVC416C
setting) for SA Minor (MN)
synchronization
NSA –
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

setting) for equipment SA Critical (CR)
NSA Minor (MN)
setting) for SONET (OC-n
and STS-n), OTH, SA Critical (CR)
GBE/GBE10, and TCM
setting) for SDH
SA Not reported (NR)
(STM-n and VC-n) NSA Not reported (NR)
• Equipment:
– Matrix cards (MT960C, MT1T9C, MT1T9, MT3T8)
– First-level Controllers (ECHC (FLC), FLC64, FLC36EA,
FLC36)
– Power Supply Filters (PSF3T8, PFC)
– Bus Termination cards (BTC3T8, BT3T8, BT36)
– Fan Unit (FAN3T8)
– High Power Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel (HPCFAP)
– I/O cards
– I/O ports
– Optical modules (SFP/XFP)
– Timing reference facilities and system timing
– GBE, GBE10, GBE100
– OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, OC-768
– ODUk path (ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2E, ODU3,
ODU3E2, ODU4)
– Optical Multiplex Section (OMS)
– Optical Transmission Section (OTS)
– OTUk section (OTU2, OTU2E, OTU3, OTU3E2, OTU4)
– STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64, STM-256
– STS-1, STS-3c, STS-12c, STS-48c
– Tandem Connection Monitoring (TCM)
– VC-4, VC-4-4c, VC-4-16c
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Related information
Local indications
LED 1 on the faceplate of the respective circuit pack is lit solid amber. It is blinking
amber if the alarm is not critical.
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-245: “Clear Manual (Management) Removal” (p. 3-436).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Manual switch from the Alternate path to the preferred
Network element alarms path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manual switch from the Alternate path to the preferred path

Manual switch of service from protection back to working facility.

Manual switch from the Alternate path to the preferred path
condition:
Alarm identifier / MANWKSWBK

Mnemonic
Alarm source STS-n (STS-1, STS-3c, STS-12c, STS-48c) facility protection
group
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Manual switch from the Alternate path to the preferred path
condition is to be understood as information rather than as an alarm and will be cleared
autonomously as soon as the manual switch request is cleared.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Manual switch from the protection entity to the working
Network element alarms entity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manual switch from the protection entity to the working

entity
Manual switch of service from the protection back to the working facility at the local end
of a 1:N ODUk SNC/S, 1+1 UPSR, 1+1 SNCP or 1+1 MSP protection.

Manual switch from the protection entity to the working entity
condition:

Mnemonic
• ASAPFFP
Alarm source Depending on the affected facility:
• 1+1 ODUk SNCP2
• 1+1 UPSR of STS-n facilities (STS-1, STS-3c, STS-12c,
STS-48c)
• 1+1 SNCP of VC-n facilities (VC-4, VC-4-4c, VC-4-16c)
• 1+1 MSP
Notes:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network element alarms entity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Manual switch from the protection entity to the working entity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network element alarms entity - Far End
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manual switch from the protection entity to the working

entity - Far End
Manual switch of service from the protection back to the working facility due to a request
from the far end of a 1:N ODUk SNC/S protection.

Manual switch from the protection entity to the working entity -
Far End condition:

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPFFP
Notes:
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The
Far End condition is to be understood as information rather than as an alarm and will be
cleared autonomously as soon as the manual switch request is cleared.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Manual switch from the protection path to the working path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manual switch from the protection path to the working path

Manual switch of service from protection back to working facility.

Manual switch from the protection path to the working path
condition:

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPODUn
Alarm source ODUn SNCP
Notes:
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Manual switch from the protection path to the working path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Manual switch of working entity to protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manual switch of working entity to protection

Manual switch of service from the working to the protection facility.

Manual switch of working entity to protection condition:
Alarm identifier / MANWKSWPR

Mnemonic
• ASAPFFP
• 1+1 ODUk SNCP2
STS-48c)
• 1+1 MSP
Notes:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Manual switch of working entity to protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Manual switch of working entity to protection condition is to be
understood as information rather than as an alarm and will be cleared autonomously as
soon as the manual switch request is cleared.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Manual switch of working entity to protection - Far End
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manual switch of working entity to protection - Far End

Manual switch of service from the working to the protection facility at the far end of a
1:N ODUk SNC/S protection.

Manual switch of working entity to protection - Far End condition:

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPFFP
Notes:
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The
Far End condition is to be understood as information rather than as an alarm and will be
cleared autonomously as soon as the manual switch request is cleared.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Manual switch to a timing reference
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manual switch to a timing reference

Timing selection is switched via a manual command to a timing reference.

Manual switch to a timing reference condition:
Alarm identifier / MANSWTIMREF

Mnemonic
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Manual switch to a timing reference condition is to be understood as
manual switch request is cleared.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Manual switch to a timing reference for the output timing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manual switch to a timing reference for the output timing

selection process
Meaning of alarm
The MANSWTIMREF-T4 alarm is raised on the timing reference when the output timing
is manually switched to it.

Manual switch to a timing reference for the output timing
selection process alarm:
Alarm identifier / MANSWTIMREF-T4

Mnemonic
ASAP type LINEREF
Local indications
Trouble clearing
(p. 3-734).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Manual switch to Internal Timing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manual switch to Internal Timing

A manual switch to internal timing (i.e. forced free-running mode) has occurred.

Manual switch to Internal Timing condition:
Alarm identifier / MANSWTOINT

Mnemonic
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Manual switch to Internal Timing condition is to be understood as
manual switch request is cleared.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Manual Switch to Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manual Switch to Protection

Meaning of alarm
This is a standing condition indicating a manual switch to protect is active. The manual
switch of working facility/equipment to protection condition is raised when a user
initiates a manual switch to protect request within a protection group. A manual switch to
protect forces traffic onto the protect facility/equipment unless the protect facility is in the
signal fail or signal degrade state. A manual switch to protect also prevents reversion to
the working path from occurring. Clearing the manual switch will clear the condition. If
reversion is enabled, a switch will occur to the work facility immediately after the manual
switch has cleared.

Manual Switch to Protection alarm:

Mnemonic
ASAP type 11STMM10: 1GbE, CBR2G5, CBRAR, FC100, FC200, FC400,
OC192/STM64, OCH, ODUn, OTU1, OTU2, OTU3
Alarm source See “MANWKSWBK” (p. B-29).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-246: “Clear Manual switch to protection ” (p. 3-437).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Manual Switch to Working
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manual Switch to Working

Meaning of alarm
This is a standing condition indicating that a manual switch back to the working is active.
The manual switch of working back to working condition occurs when a user initiates a
manual switch to work request within a protection group. A manual switch to working
forces traffic onto the working facility/equipment unless the working facility is in the
Signal-Fail or Signal-Degrade state.
Clearing the manual switch will clear the condition. In the absence of other outstanding
requests, a cleared manual switch back to work will leave the switch position on work.

Manual Switch to Working alarm:

Mnemonic
ASAP type 11STMM10: 1GbE, CBR2G5, CBRAR, FC100, FC200, FC400,
OC192/STM64, OCH, ODUn, OTU1, OTU2, OTU3
Alarm source See “MANWKSWPR” (p. B-30).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-247: “Clear Manual switch to working ” (p. 3-438).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Manually Caused Abnormal Condition - Card In Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manually Caused Abnormal Condition - Card In Maintenance

Meaning of alarm
The MAN (card in maintenance) condition is raised on a card when the user has
purposefully placed the card into the maintenance state. Entities in maintenance still
provide service but don't report alarms. They monitor for faults and raise non-reported
conditions. The maintenance state provides access to service affecting commands like
port loop-backs.

Manually Caused Abnormal Condition - Card In Maintenance alarm:

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “MAN (Card)” (p. B-28).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-248: “Clear Manually caused abnormal condition - card in
maintenance ” (p. 3-439).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details MEP AIS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MEP AIS
Meaning of alarm
The MEP AIS alarm indicates that an upstream MEP has detected a fault and is sending
AIS to suppress downstream MEP-REM-CCM alarms that would occur as a result.

MEP AIS alarm:
Alarm identifier / MEP-AIS

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “MEP AIS” (p. B-30).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-249: “Clear MEP AIS ” (p. 3-440).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details MEP AIS State Change
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MEP AIS State Change

Meaning of alarm
The MEP AIS State Change alarm indicates that the state of the AIS defect has
changed.

MEP AIS State Change alarm:
Alarm identifier / MEP-AIS-STATE-CHG

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “MEP-AIS-STATE-CHG” (p. B-30).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details MEP CFM Fault
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MEP CFM Fault

Meaning of alarm
The MEP CFM Fault condition indicates that one of the MEP alarms has occurred.

MEP CFM Fault alarm:
Alarm identifier / MEP-CFM-FAULT

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “MEP-CFM-FAULT” (p. B-30).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details MEP Cross Connect CCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MEP Cross Connect CCM

Meaning of alarm
The MEP Cross Connect CCM condition indicates that CCM PDUs are being received
with a different MA-ID, or from a lower Maintenance Domain Level. These are the result
of misconfiguration of MEPs in the network.

MEP Cross Connect CCM alarm:
Alarm identifier / MEP-XCON-CCM

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “MEP-XCON-CCM” (p. B-31).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-250: “Clear MEP Cross Connect CCM” (p. 3-441).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details MEP DM Test Complete
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MEP DM Test Complete

Meaning of alarm
The MEP DM Test Complete condition indicates that a delay test has completed.

MEP DM Test Complete condition:
Alarm identifier / MEP-DM-TEST

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “MEP-DM-TEST” (p. B-30).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details MEP Error CCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MEP Error CCM

Meaning of alarm
The MEP Error CCM condition indicates that CCM PDUs are being received from an
unconfigured peer or self, or with a period different from local configuration.

MEP Error CCM condition:
Alarm identifier / MEP-ERR-CCM

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “MEP-ERR-CCM” (p. B-30).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-251: “Clear MEP Error CCM ” (p. 3-442).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details MEP LBM Test Complete
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MEP LBM Test Complete

Meaning of alarm
The MEP LBM Test Complete condition indicates that a CFM loopback test has
completed.

MEP LBM Test Complete condition:
Alarm identifier / MEP-LBM-TEST

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “MEP-LBM-TEST” (p. B-30).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details MEP LTM Test Complete
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MEP LTM Test Complete

Meaning of alarm
The MEP LTM Test Complete condition indicates that a CFM link trace test has
completed.

MEP LTM Test Complete condition:
Alarm identifier / MEP-LTM-TEST

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “MEP-LTM-TEST” (p. B-30).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details MEP Mac Status
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MEP Mac Status

Meaning of alarm
The MEP-MAC-STATUS condition indicates that a peer MEP’s interface is down.

MEP Mac Status alarm:
Alarm identifier / MEP-MAC-STATUS

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm category Standing condition
Alarm source See “MEP-MAC-STATUS” (p. B-30).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-252: “Clear MEP Mac Status” (p. 3-443).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details MEP RDI CCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MEP RDI CCM

Meaning of alarm
The MEP RDI CCM condition indicates that a peer MEP has a fault and is signaling the
Remote Defect Indication (RDI).

MEP RDI CCM alarm:
Alarm identifier / MEP-RDI-CCM

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “MEP-RDI-CCM” (p. B-31).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-253: “Clear MEP RDI CCM ” (p. 3-444).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details MEP Remote CCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MEP Remote CCM

Meaning of alarm
The MEP-REM-CCM condition indicates that the MEP is expecting to receive CCM
PDUs from a peer MEP but is not receiving them.

MEP Remote CCM alarm:
Alarm identifier / MEP-REM-CCM

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “MEP-REM-CCM” (p. B-31).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-254: “Clear MEP Remote CCM” (p. 3-445).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details MEP SLM Test Complete
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MEP SLM Test Complete

Meaning of alarm
The MEP SLM Test Complete condition indicates that Synthetic Loss Measurement
(SLM) test has completed.

MEP SLM Test Complete condition:
Alarm identifier / MEP-SLM-TEST

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “MEP-SLM-TEST” (p. B-31).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Mismerge
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Mismerge
Meaning of alarm
The OT port has detected a mismerge at the MEP layer. A MEP detects mismerge when it
receives a CCM frame with a correct MEG level that is, the MEG level is the same as the
MEP's own MEG level) but incorrect MEG ID (indicating that frames from a different
service instance are merged with the service instance represented by the MEP's own MEG
ID). Such a condition is most likely caused by misconfiguration, but could also be caused
by a hardware/software failure in the network.

Mismerge alarm:
Alarm identifier / MMG

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “MMG” (p. B-32).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-255: “Clear Mismerge ” (p. 3-446).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Mismerge
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Mismerge
Meaning of alarm

Mismerge alarm:
Alarm identifier / RmdMepMMG

Mnemonic
ASAP type RMD
setting) NSA –
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-256: “Clear Mismerge” (p. 3-447).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Mixed MTX Operation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Mixed MTX Operation

A mixed MTX configuration exists in the shelf, that is one of the following conditions is
present:
• The two matrix cards in the system have different capacities.
• The two matrix cards in the system have the same capacity but different part numbers.
Important! A mixed matrix configuration is allowed as a temporary mode of
operation but not for longterm operation.
Note: In case the two matrix cards have different capacities, only the smaller capacity
is usable.
“MTX” is the generic designation for all variants of matrix cards. For an overview of the
available matrix cards, please refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product Information
and Planning Guide – chapter “Product description” (Parts list).

Mixed MTX Operation alarm:
Alarm identifier / MIXOPERAT

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source Shelf
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Mixed MTX Operation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-257: “Clear Mixed MTX Operation” (p. 3-448).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Mixed types of power filters used
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Mixed types of power filters used

Meaning of alarm
The Mixed types of power filters used alarm indicates that two different types
of power filters are provisioned in the shelf.

Mixed types of power filters used alarm:
Alarm identifier / MIXEDPFUSED

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source SHELF
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-258: “Clear Mixed types of power filters used ” (p. 3-449).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Modulator output power out of range
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modulator output power out of range

Meaning of alarm
The OT port has detected Modulator output power out of range.

Modulator output power out of range alarm:
Alarm identifier / MODOUTOOR

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “MODOUTOOR” (p. B-32).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-259: “Clear Modulator output power out of range ” (p. 3-450).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Multiplex Structure Identification Mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Multiplex Structure Identification Mismatch

The ODU payload structure (multiplex structure) in the receive signal does not match the
expected value.
The expected ODU payload structure can be set during the creation or modification of an
ODU path termination by means of the ODUSTRUCT parameter. The ODU payload
structure of an existing ODU path termination can be modified using the ED-ODUPTF
TL1 command. The actual setting is transported by means of the Multiplex Structure
Identifier (MSI) in the Payload Structure Identifier (PSI) overhead.
Note: The Multiplex Structure Identification Mismatch alarm is valid
for LO ODU only. A separate alarm is reported for each affected timeslot (for
example: 4 separate alarms for ODU1 in ODU2, 8 separate alarms for ODU0 in
ODU2, or 32 separate alarms for ODU0 in ODU3).

Multiplex Structure Identification Mismatch alarm:
Alarm identifier / MSIM

Mnemonic
• ASAPODU0
• ASAPODU1
• ASAPODU2
• ASAPODU2E
• ASAPODU3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Multiplex Structure Identification Mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-260: “Clear Multiplex Structure Identification Mismatch” (p. 3-451).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Multiplex Structure Indication Mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Multiplex Structure Indication Mismatch

Meaning of alarm
The MUX OT Line port has detected the mismatch condition of the MSI bytes within the
OTU Signal payload. This may be caused by the following reasons:
• The input OTU signal is severely degraded
• High uncorrectable bit-error-ratio condition
• The input OTU signal has a different multiplex structure

Multiplex Structure Indication Mismatch alarm:
Alarm identifier / MSIM

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU3
setting) NSA –
Alarm source 43STX4P
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-261: “Clear Multiplex Structure Indication Mismatch ”
(p. 3-454).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details NE SSH Key Generation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NE SSH Key Generation

The NE SSH key generation has been executed.

NE SSH Key Generation condition:
Alarm identifier / SSHKEY

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPSECU
Alarm category Security
Alarm source System
Notes:
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The NE SSH Key Generation condition is to be understood as information rather than
as an alarm.
Note: SSH connections with the old public key will no longer be possible, the new
public key needs to be used for session authentication. If you try to connect with the
old public key, a warning message will appear indicating that the remote host
identification has changed. Please contact your system administrator.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details NE SSL Certificate Installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NE SSL Certificate Installation

A new signed SSL certificate has been installed.

NE SSL Certificate Installation alarm:
Alarm identifier / SSLCERT

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPSECU
Alarm source System
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The NE SSL Certificate Installation condition is to be understood as
Note: SSL connections with the old certificate will no longer be possible, the new
certificate needs to be used for session authentication.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details NE SSL CSR Generation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NE SSL CSR Generation

A new Certificate Signing Request (CSR) has been generated by the NE.

NE SSL CSR Generation alarm:
Alarm identifier / SSLCSR

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPSECU
Alarm source System
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The NE SSL CSR Generation condition is to be understood as information rather than
as an alarm.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details NE SSL Key Generation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NE SSL Key Generation

NE SSL Key generation has been executed.

NE SSL Key Generation alarm:
Alarm identifier / SSLKEY

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPSECU
Alarm source System
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The NE SSL Key Generation condition is to be understood as information rather than
as an alarm.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Network Time Protocol is enabled - no server is reachable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network Time Protocol is enabled - no server is reachable

Meaning of alarm
While NTP is enabled, if all provisioned servers become not reachable or fail to meet
minimum server standards, a NTPOOSYNC condition shall be raised. This alarm shall
clear when the NTP protocol is disabled or NTP server time synchronization is
reestablished.
Once the NE is power cycled, it takes approximately 20-30 minutes to initialize.
Thereafter, time synchronization will be completed, with a maximum delay time of 2-3
minutes.
Note: When configuring NTP servers on an NE network, the provisioned NTP server
IP addresses should be that of external NTP servers, not the IP addresses of GNEs.
Provision appropriate DCNs such that the external NTP servers are reachable from all
NEs within the network. This is especially important in the event of an EC cold reboot
or EC replacement. Do not use an NE as an NTP server by remote NEs.

Network Time Protocol is enabled - no server is reachable alarm:
Alarm identifier / NTPOOSYNC

Mnemonic
ASAP type COM
Alarm source SYSTEM
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Network Time Protocol is enabled - no server is reachable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-263: “Clear Network Time Protocol is enabled, but no NTP server
is reachable ” (p. 3-457).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Network Time Protocol Loss of Redundancy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network Time Protocol Loss of Redundancy

Meaning of alarm
The NTPLOR alarm is raised when none of the configured backup/redundant NTP
servers are valid, and/or none of the configured backup/redundant NTP servers are
communicating to the NE successfully. If all backup references become unavailable, the
NTPLOR condition will be raised. The alarm is cleared when contact is re-established
with one or more backup servers.

Network Time Protocol Loss of Redundancy alarm:
Alarm identifier / NTPLOR

Mnemonic
ASAP type COM
Alarm source SYSTEM
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-264: “Clear Network Time Protocol Loss of Redundancy”
(p. 3-459).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details NE unavailable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NE unavailable
The system indicates a temporary loss of communication with the NE. The NE equipment
cannot be provisioned or supervised at the moment.

NE unavailable alarm:
Alarm identifier / NEUNAVAIL

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source Shelf
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-262: “Clear NE unavailable” (p. 3-455).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Near-End Unavailable Time Period
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Near-End Unavailable Time Period

Meaning of alarm
The Near-End Unavailable Time Period alarm is raised to declare the transition
from available time to unavailable time at the 11DPE12A proactive LM/SLM test level.
The alarm clears when the transition from unavailable time to available time is
completed.
A N_HLI, or near-end High Packet Loss interval has occurred, in which the packet loss is
greater than 50%. 10 consecutive N_HLIs indicates that the monitored end-to-end service
or synthetic test enters unavailable time, which begins with the first N_HLI detection. 10
consecutive non-N_HLIs indicates that the monitored end-to-end service or synthetic test
enters available time, which begins with the first non-N_HLI is detected.
When the monitored end-to-end service enters unavailable time, it means it suffers a high
packet loss, which may be caused by the following reasons
• failure in a network span or network element
• congestion in a network element
• remote LM/SLM function on remote peer network element fails or is not enabled

Near-End Unavailable Time Period alarm:
Alarm identifier / UAT

Mnemonic
ASAP type PROACTIVE TEST
Alarm category Proactive Test
setting) NSA –
Alarm source 11DPE12A-shelf-slot-PROACTIVE TEST ID
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Near-End Unavailable Time Period
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-138: “Clear Far-End Unavailable Time Period or Near-End
Unavailable Time Period” (p. 3-273).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Next Key Mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Next Key Mismatch

Meaning of alarm
The Next Key Mismatch alarm is raised when the next encryption keys do not match on
both ends of an encrypted service. This alarm is not service affecting but will prevent the
switching to the next encryption keys.

The following tabular overview summarizes important information concerning the Next
Key Mismatch alarm:
Alarm identifier / NKM

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTU2
Alarm severity (default NSA Major
setting)
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-265: “Clear Next Key Mismatch” (p. 3-460).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details No Available Time References
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
No Available Time References

Meaning of alarm
The PTPREF-LOSS alarm is raised when all PTP time references are lost.
• PTP port failure
• Announce message loss
• Changes of clock priority and quality

The following tabular overview summarizes important information concerning the No
Available Time References alarm:
Alarm identifier / PTPREF-LOSS

Mnemonic
ASAP type PTPCLOCK
Alarm source 11DPE12A-shelf-slot-PTPCLOCK{1}, PTPCTL-shelf-slot-
PTPCLOCK{1}
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-266: “Clear No Available Time References” (p. 3-462).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details No available timing reference for the output timing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
No available timing reference for the output timing selection

process
Meaning of alarm
The SYNCOOS-T4alarm is raised when all available timing references for the output
timing process have failed.
• Signal failure of the physical port associated to the timing reference
• Timing reference is out of frequency
• SSM lost

The following tabular overview summarizes important information concerning the No
available timing reference for the output timing selection process alarm:
Alarm identifier / SYNCOOS-T4

Mnemonic
ASAP type SYNCOUT
Alarm source 11DPE12A-shelf-slot-PTPCLOCK{1}-PTPPORT{1-14},
PTPCTL-shelf-slot-PTPCLOCK{1}-PTPPORT{1-6}
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-12: “Clear All selectable timing references fail” (p. 3-51).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details No Device Found
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
No Device Found
Meaning of alarm

No Device Found alarm:
Alarm identifier / RmdNDF

Mnemonic
ASAP type RMD
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-267: “Clear No Device Found” (p. 3-463).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details No TDM Payload
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
No TDM Payload
Meaning of alarm
The RmdCesChannelNoTdmPl alarm is raised when TSoP packets being received
indicate an incoming TDM fault, such as RmdIfLOS or RmdNimLOF, at the far end.

No TDM Payload alarm:
Alarm identifier / RmdCesChannelNoTdmPl

Mnemonic
ASAP type RMD
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “RmdCesChannelNoTdmPl” (p. B-43).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Check for the cause of RmdIfLOS or RmdNimLOF at the far end. Proceed to Procedure
3-435: “Clear TDM (SONET/SDH) Loss of Signal ” (p. 3-723) or Procedure 3-221:
“Clear Loss Of Frames ” (p. 3-398), as applicable.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details No committed software load (Autoinstall disabled)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
No committed software load (Autoinstall disabled)

Meaning of alarm
The SWUPGCOMMIT alarm is raised after the database has been manually cleared or
restored.

No committed software load (Autoinstall disabled) alarm:
Alarm identifier / SWUPGCOMMIT

Mnemonic
ASAP type COM
Alarm source SYSTEM
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-268: “Clear No committed software load (Autoinstall disabled) ”
(p. 3-464).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details NTP Out of Sync
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NTP Out of Sync

Network Time Protocol is enabled, but no NTP server is reachable. This alarm clears
when the Network Time Protocol is disabled or NTP server time synchronization is
re-established.

NTP Out of Sync alarm:
Alarm identifier / NTPOOSYNC

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source Shelf
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-269: “Clear NTP Out of Sync” (p. 3-465).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details OA pump laser bias current high
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OA pump laser bias current high

The OA pump laser bias current high alarm is raised when the OA pump laser is reaching
its end of life.

OA pump laser bias current high alarm:
Alarm identifier / OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “OAPUMPBIASCURRHIGH” (p. B-34).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-270: “Clear OA pump laser bias current high” (p. 3-466).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details OA pump laser temperature high
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OA pump laser temperature high

The LD pack has detected pump laser temperature high.

OA pump laser temperature high alarm:
Alarm identifier / OAPUMPTEMPHIGH

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “OAPUMPTEMPHIGH” (p. B-34).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-46: “Clear Card over temperature” (p. 3-109).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details OCS card or port deleted
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCS card or port deleted

Meaning of alarm
The alarm indicates a disagreement between the OCS NE database and the WDM NE
database regarding the existence of an OCS uplink card or its facilities. The WDM NE
database contains reference to an OCS uplink card or facilities that do not currently exist
in the OCS NE database.

OCS card or port deleted alarm:
Alarm identifier / OCSUPLINKDELTED

Mnemonic
ASAP type COM
Alarm source SYSTEM
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-271: “Clear OCS card or port deleted” (p. 3-467).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details ODU AIS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ODU AIS
Meaning of alarm
The ODU AIS condition indicates that the OT port has detected an ODU-AIS at the
ODUk level.
• The far-end OT port has a LOS/LOF failure
• The local OT port receives a signal with ODU-AIS pattern

ODU AIS alarm:
Alarm identifier / AIS - ODU

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU
Alarm source See Appendix B, “Alarm source list”.
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-393: “Clear Server Signal Failure - ODU ” (p. 3-661).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details OMD Input LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OMD Input LOS

Meaning of alarm
The OMD port on one of the SFC cards has detected a Loss Of Signal. The LOS alarm is
raised if the power measured at the port input drops below a threshold.

OMD Input LOS alarm:

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
setting) NSA –
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-272: “Clear OMD Input LOS ” (p. 3-469).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details OMS Server Signal Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OMS Server Signal Failure

Meaning of alarm
The SSF-OMS alarm indicates that there is a service affecting failure in the OMS layer
which is a correlation alarm with OTSn_TT_Sk or OTSn/OMSn_A_Sk layer defects. The
OMS Server Signal Failure should report at the ROADM or FOADM node which
contains OMS section endpoint. ILA node should not raise OMS SSF alarm due to no
MUX endpoint existing.
Possible failure conditions on the OTS, that lead to a SSF-OMS alarm, include:
• AMPDISABLED
• LOSDCM
• LOS-OUT
• LOS-P

OMS Server Signal Failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / SSF-OMS

Mnemonic
ASAP type OMS
Alarm category OMS
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “SSF-OMS” (p. B-47).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-273: “Clear OMS Server Signal Failure ” (p. 3-471).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Open Connection Indication
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open Connection Indication

An Open Connection Indication (OCI) is a maintenance signal sent downstream an
ODUk path as an indication that upstream the signal is not connected.
TTI retrieval during an OCI condition
If an OCI condition is present, an empty trail trace identifier (TTI) string should be
replied for the incoming TTI condition as an indication, that the TTI string is unavailable.
Currently this is not the case, instead an undefined TTI string is replied. Therefore, please
ignore the content of the TTI string as long as an OCI condition is present.

Open Connection Indication alarm:
Alarm identifier / OCI

Mnemonic
• ASAPODU0
• ASAPODU1
• ASAPODU2
• ASAPODU2E
• ASAPODU3
• ASAPODU3E2
• ASAPODU4
transmit direction
setting) in receive
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Open Connection Indication
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm source ODUk path (ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2E, ODU3, ODU3E2,
ODU4)
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-275: “Clear Open Connection Indication” (p. 3-473).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Open Connection Indication - ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open Connection Indication - ODU

Meaning of alarm
OT port has detected Open Connection Indication condition at ODUk Path layer. This
defect indicates that network operator in an external multi-vendor OTN network has not
provisioned at least one ODUk connection in an OTN switched network. OCI
maintenance signal is not sourced by 1830 PSS network.
This may be caused if the network operator in external OTN network has deleted or not
yet provisioned a connection in OTN switched network.

Open Connection Indication - ODU alarm:
Alarm identifier / OCI

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU2, ODU3, ODU4
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “OCI” (p. B-36).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-274: “Clear Open Connection Indication - ODU ” (p. 3-472).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Open Connection Indication - TCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open Connection Indication - TCM

Meaning of alarm

Open Connection Indication - TCM alarm:
Alarm identifier / OCITCM

Mnemonic
setting) NSA v
Alarm source 11QPA4
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-276: “Clear Open Connection Indication on TCM Layer”
(p. 3-474).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Open Connection Indication on TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open Connection Indication on TCM Layer

An Open Connection Indication on TCM Layer alarm is a maintenance signal
sent downstream an ODUk path as an indication that upstream the signal is not connected
to a trail termination source.

Open Connection Indication on TCM Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / OCI-T

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPTCM
ODU3)
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-276: “Clear Open Connection Indication on TCM Layer” (p. 3-474).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Optical Intrusion Baseline Needed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical Intrusion Baseline Needed

Meaning of alarm
An optical intrusion baseline value other than the default (-1) is needed for proper optical
intrusion detection. Power fluctuation due to a fiber cut, an added or deleted channel,
pack cold reboot, or an internal fiber handling may result in unexpected “Optical
Intrusion” alarms in one or multiple fiber spans.

Optical Intrusion Baseline Needed alarm:
Alarm identifier / OPTINTBASE

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source See “OPTINTBASE” (p. B-38).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-277: “Clear Optical intrusion baseline needed” (p. 3-476).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Optical Intrusion - Detected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical Intrusion - Detected

Meaning of alarm
Optical intrusion to the line fiber is detected. Power fluctuation due to a fiber cut, an
added or deleted channel, pack cold reboot, or an internal fiber handling may result in
unexpected “Optical Intrusion” alarms in one or multiple fiber spans. At least one
cross-connection must be provisioned and set to Admin State Up for the OPTINTDET
alarm to be raised.

Optical Intrusion - Detected alarm:
Alarm identifier / OPTINTDET

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source See “OPTINTDET” (p. B-38).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-278: “Clear Optical intrusion - detected alarm” (p. 3-477).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Optical Intrusion - Monitoring Suspended
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical Intrusion - Monitoring Suspended

Meaning of alarm
Optical intrusion monitoring to the line fiber is suspended due to local or upstream NE
conditions. The alarm could be due to a variety of NE alarms such as NET, LOS-P, APR
and CARDINIT. Power fluctuation due to a fiber cut, an added or deleted channel, pack
cold reboot, or an internal fiber handling may result in unexpected “Optical Intrusion”
alarms in one or multiple fiber spans.

Optical Intrusion - Monitoring Suspended alarm:
Alarm identifier / OPTINTSUSP

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source See “OPTINTSUSP” (p. B-38).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The OPTINTSUSP alarm clears when the underlying cause clears. Follow the respective
procedure to clear the underlying cause alarms.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Optical power received out of range
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical power received out of range

Meaning of alarm
The OT port has detected a received optical power out of range at OCH layer. This defect
indicates that local port has detected that the input optical power is lower or higher than
specified value.
• Power level out of range on the associated OCh trail

Optical power received out of range alarm:
Alarm identifier / OPROOR

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTU
Alarm source See “OPROOR” (p. B-37).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Optical power received out of range
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-279: “Clear Optical power received out of range alarm”
(p. 3-478).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Optical supervision channel excessive BER
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical supervision channel excessive BER

Meaning of alarm
The OSC SFP receive port on one of the amplifier cards has detected an excessive BER.
The EBER-O alarm is raised if the SONET framer detects errors as per the SONET
specification.

Optical supervision channel excessive BER alarm:
Alarm identifier / EBER-O

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source See “EBER-O” (p. B-10).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-280: “Clear Optical supervision channel excessive BER alarm”
(p. 3-480).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Optics over temperature
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optics over temperature

Meaning of alarm
The optics on the card exceeded their high temperature limit, and the ability of the card to
provide service may be compromised.

Optics over temperature alarm:
Alarm identifier / INTTEMPOPT

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “INTTEMPOPT” (p. B-20).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Perform the steps in the procedure Procedure 3-46: “Clear Card over temperature”
(p. 3-109).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details OSPF Adjacency Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OSPF Adjacency Failure

OSPF is enabled in active mode, but no adjacency is formed via the interface.

OSPF Adjacency Failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / OSPFADJFAIL

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPIPIPT, ASAPLAN, ASAPNETIF
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-281: “Clear OSPF Adjacency Failure” (p. 3-482).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details OSPF Adjacency Not Full
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OSPF Adjacency Not Full

Meaning of alarm
The OSPFADJ condition indicates the OSPF Adjacency State of any Ethernet, OSC and
GCC interfaces such as OAMP, VOIP, E1, and E2. If the OSPF is enabled on any of these
interfaces, it always checks for the OSPF state of its adjacent interface. If OSPF is not
detected, the OSPFADJ alarm is raised.

The following tabular overview summarizes important information concerning the OSPF
Adjacency Not Full alarm:
Alarm identifier / OSPFADJ

Mnemonic
ASAP type PLK
Alarm source See “OSPFADJ” (p. B-38).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-282: “Clear OSPF Adjacency Not Full” (p. 3-483).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details OT Minor Circuit Pack Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OT Minor Circuit Pack Failure

Meaning of alarm
The OT Minor Circuit Pack Failure alarm indicates that a non-service affecting hardware
defect was detected on the card. This condition may be declared on the card due to one of
the following causes:
• detection of line side transmitter laser bias or optical output power nearing end-of-life,
or other defect
• detection of line receiver ITLA laser bias or output power nearing end-of-life, or other
defect
• detection of board-level ADCDSP device defect
• a device-to-device interface communication problem
The OT Minor Circuit Pack Failure alarm indicates a lower priority fault on the card that
does not directly affect the traffic currently flowing through the card. However, the card
should be replaced at the next available maintenance opportunity.

The following tabular overview summarizes important information concerning the OT
Minor Circuit Pack Failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / OTMCPF

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm severity (default NSA Minor
setting)
Alarm source See “OTMCFP” (p. B-38).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-283: “OT Minor Circuit Pack Failure” (p. 3-485).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details OTU AIS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OTU AIS
Meaning of alarm
The AISOTU condition indicates that the OT port has detected an OTU-AIS at the ODUk
level.
• The input signal has OTU-AIS pattern
• The input signal is severely degraded
• The local OT port receives a signal with ODU-AIS pattern

OTU AIS alarm:
Alarm identifier / AISOTU

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTU2, OTU3
Alarm source See “AISOTU” (p. B-2).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-284: “Clear OTU AIS alarm” (p. 3-486).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Out of operational range - loss too high alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Out of operational range - loss too high alarm

Meaning of alarm
The Out of operational range - loss too high alarm is raised when the loss
from the DCM OUT port to the DCM IN port is too high.
Acceptable loss ranges per LD:
• AHPHG, AHPLG and AM2325A: 10 +/- 2 dB
• AM2032A: 8 to 15 dB
• AM2625A: 3 to 10 dB

Out of operational range - loss too high alarm:
Alarm identifier / OPRLOSSHIGH

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source See “OPRLOSSHIGH” (p. B-37).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-293: “Clear Out of operational range - input power too high”
(p. 3-499).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Out of operational range - loss too low alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Out of operational range - loss too low alarm

Meaning of alarm
The Out of operational range - loss too low alarm is raised when the loss
from the DCM OUT port to the DCM IN port is too low.
Acceptable loss ranges per LD:
• AHPHG, AHPLG and AM2325A: 10 +/- 2 dB
• AM2032A: 8 to 15 dB
• AM2625A: 3 to 10 dB

Out of operational range - loss too low alarm:
Alarm identifier / OPRLOSSLOW

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source See “OPRLOSSLOW” (p. B-37).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
(p. 3-499).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Outgoing Channel Absent
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Outgoing Channel Absent

Meaning of alarm
The provisioned channel could not be detected at a Wavelength Tracker detect point. The
channel is either missing, operating at a power that is outside the detectable range, or
wavekeys are not being correctly applied at the source OT/SVAC.
If... Then...
the port is not WTOCM monitored and the alarm is raised if the expected keys are not
expected keys and power are provisioned for a received. (This state also indictes optical
channel, power is absent for the channel).
the port is WTOCM monitored and expected the alarm is raised if optical power is absent
keys and power are provisioned for a channel, for the channel.
Assuming that the Wavelength Tracker information is correctly provisioned, this alarm
may be raised if:
• the channel is not launched
• the received channel power is outside of the detectable power sensitivity range.
• the intra-node fiber connections do not match the physical topology.
• the fiber is damaged.
This alarm can also be raised in the following circumstances:
• the OT or SVAC fails to encode the correct wavekeys (does not apply to WTOCM
monitored case)
• a card capable of wavekey decoding is faulty
On the CWR (SigOut only), this alarm will only be reported when a CWR8-88 is used in
an Anydirection Add/Drop block. It will not be reported in a standard CWR8 or
CWR8-88 TOADM or ROADM configuration.

Outgoing Channel Absent alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOS-OUT

Mnemonic
ASAP type OCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Outgoing Channel Absent
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “LOS-OUT” (p. B-27).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-286: “Clear Outgoing Channel Absent” (p. 3-489).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Outgoing Channel Optical Power Out of Range
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Outgoing Channel Optical Power Out of Range

Meaning of alarm
The OPR-OUT condition is raised on cards with a Wavelength Tracker detect point when
the power of the outgoing channel is outside of the provisioned power range. This alarm
may be caused by the introduction of more or less attenuation in the fiber, or by an
amplifier adjust that may have occurred elsewhere in the network, due to fiber repair
activity or network adjustments such as adding or deleting a node.

Outgoing Channel Optical Power Out of Range alarm:
Alarm identifier / OPR-OUT

Mnemonic
ASAP type OCH
Alarm source See “OPR-OUT” (p. B-38).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Perform the steps in the procedure Procedure 3-59: “Clear Channel Power Unstable”
(p. 3-138).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Outgoing Client Signal Fail detected on the GFP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Outgoing Client Signal Fail detected on the GFP

Meaning of alarm

Outgoing Client Signal Fail detected on the GFP alarm:
Alarm identifier / CSFGFP-OUT

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting)
Alarm source OTUODUk-shelf-slot-port
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-289: “Clear Outgoing Client Signal Fail detected on the GFP”
(p. 3-494).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Outgoing Client Signal Fail Detected on the ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Outgoing Client Signal Fail Detected on the ODU

Meaning of alarm

Outgoing Client Signal Fail Detected on the ODU alarm:
Alarm identifier / CSFODU-OUT

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting)
Alarm source See “CSFODU-OUT” (p. B-8).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-64: “Clear Client Signal Failure - ODU” (p. 3-149).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Output LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Output LOS
Meaning of alarm
The LOS-OUT defect is detected by WTIPD monitoring the Sig Out port on the pack. It
is raised when the optical output power detected at this port falls below the threshold.

Output LOS alarm:

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
setting) NSA –
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-288: “Clear Output LOS ” (p. 3-493).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Outgoing Loss of Signal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Outgoing Loss of Signal

Meaning of alarm
The LOS-OUT alarm is raised when the measured total WDM band power has dropped
below a prescribed level.
This alarm can also be raised in the following circumstances:
• Output power does not reach the output power monitor on a pack due to a failure
within the pack.
• The input fiber cable to the pack is disconnected, in the case where there is no input
monitor to raise a loss of input condition.
• The loss between the upstream pack and the pack raising the condition is excessively
high, in the case where there is no input monitor to raise a loss of input condition.

Outgoing Loss of Signal alarm:

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
setting) NSA –
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-287: “Clear Outgoing Loss of Signal” (p. 3-491).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Outgoing Loss of Tones
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Outgoing Loss of Tones

Meaning of alarm
The LOT-OUT alarm is raised when the Wavelength Tracker no longer detects tones for
the expected channels. Either all channels are missing, or they are operating at powers
that are outside the detectable range, or wavekeys are not being correctly applied at the
source OT/SVAC/MVAC, or no keyed channels are provisioned. This alarm is only raised
if the LD pack is preceded by an RA2P.
Assuming that the Wavelength Tracker information is correctly provisioned, this alarm
may be raised if:
• No channels with wavekeys have been launched
• The received power for each channel is outside of the detectable power range
• The intranode fiber connections do not match the physical topology
• A fiber is damaged
• No channels with wavekeys have been provisioned
• All OTs, SVACs, or MVACs fail to encode the correct wavekeys

Outgoing Loss of Tones alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOT-OUT

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
setting)
Alarm source See “LOT-OUT” (p. B-27).
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Outgoing Loss of Tones
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-290: “Clear Outgoing Loss of Tones” (p. 3-495).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Outgoing Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Outgoing Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU

Meaning of alarm

theOutgoing Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU alarm:
Alarm identifier / PLM-OUT

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU
setting) NSA –
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-291: “Outgoing Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU” (p. 3-497).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Outgoing SUPVY LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Outgoing SUPVY LOS

Meaning of alarm
For uni-directional LDs, the OSC signal is fed, via a fiber jumper, from the OSCSFP Out
of the ingress LD to the OSC In of the egress LD for transmission towards the span fiber.
LOS-O-OUT (Outgoing SUPVY LOS) is raised when the OSC signal power falls below a
set threshold as monitored at the egress LD.

Outgoing SUPVY LOS alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOS-O-OUT

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source See “LOS-O-OUT” (p. B-26).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-292: “Clear Outgoing SUPVY LOS ” (p. 3-498).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Out of operational range - input power too high
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Out of operational range - input power too high

Meaning of alarm
The Out of operational range - input power too high alarm is raised
when the signal power into the LINE or SIG port of an amplifier is too high.

Out of operational range - input power too high alarm:
Alarm identifier / OPRPWRHIGH

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source See “OPRPWRHIGH” (p. B-37).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
(p. 3-499).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Out of operational range - input power too low
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Out of operational range - input power too low

Meaning of alarm
The Out of operational range - input power too low alarm is raised when
the signal power into the LINE or SIG port of an amplifier is too low.

Out of operational range - input power too low alarm:
Alarm identifier / OPRPWRLOW

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source See “OPRPWRLOW” (p. B-37).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-294: “Clear Out of operational range - input power too low”
(p. 3-501).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Packet card initializing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Packet card initializing

Meaning of alarm
The PACKETCARDINIT alarm is raised when a card is in the process of initializing.
Note: This alarm is specifically for card-level reboot of the data cards listed below.
Any reboot of the data cards listed below is service affecting. A warm reboot of the
NE indirectly causes a warm reboot of all cards.

Packet card initializing alarm:
Alarm identifier / PACKETCARDINIT

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “PACKETCARDINIT” (p. B-38).
Local indications
PACKETCARDINIT causes the card status LED to flash green.
Trouble clearing
No corrective action is required. This condition should clear by itself, or be replaced by
another card alarm. The internal defect that generates the PACKETCARDINIT condition
will also trigger the CARDBOOT condition, thus causing the URU-S alarm to be active
for GMRE notification.
If the alarm does not clear, do one of the following:
• Reset or replace the card as needed.
• Follow the procedure Procedure 3-41: “Clear Card failure - device alarm” (p. 3-101).
Note: To get correct PM counts after an MSC cold reboot, initialize the PM registers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Parameters for amplifier tilt adjustment unconfigured
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameters for amplifier tilt adjustment unconfigured

Meaning of alarm
The PWRTILTPARAMS alarm is raised at the LD LINE or LINEOUT port that is
externally connected in the transmit direction at ILA or OADM, when one or more
parameters required for automatic gain tilt adjustment are not configured for a line that
has automatic gain tilt adjustment enabled.

Parameters for amplifier tilt adjustment unconfigured alarm:
Alarm identifier / PWRTILTPARAMS

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm category OTS
Alarm source See “PWRTILTPARAMS” (p. B-41).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-295: “Clear Parameters for amplifier tilt adjustment unconfigured
” (p. 3-503).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Payload Label Mismatch - Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Payload Label Mismatch - Path

The incoming payload mapping value in the payload type bytes of the ODUk path does
not match the expected value; for example, a GFP-F mapped 10 GbE signal (10 GbE into
ODU2, payload type 0x05) is received, but an AMCC-mapped 10 GbE signal (10 GbE
into ODU2, payload type 0x09) is expected.
Payload type
The following payload types are supported:
Payload Hexadeci- Meaning

type mal value
ASCBR 02 Asynchronous constant bit rate (CBR) mapping,
STM-16/OC-48 into ODU1, STM-64/OC-192 into ODU2, or
STM-256/OC-768 into ODU3
BSCBR 03 Bit-synchronous constant bit rate (CBR) mapping,
STM-16/OC-48 into ODU1, STM-64/OC-192 into ODU2,
STM-256/OC-768 into ODU3 , or 10 GbE into ODU2E
GFP 05 GFP-F mapping, 10 GbE into ODU2
1000BASEX 07 GMP mapping with timing transparent transcoding (TTT),
1 GbE into ODU0
AMCC 09 AMCC mapping used for transparent mapping of 10 GbE into
ODU2 as defined in ITU-T Rec. G.709
STM1OC3 0A STM-1/OC-3 mapping into ODU0
STM4OC12 0B STM-4/OC-12 mapping into ODU0
ODUM 20 ODUk multiplex structure with 2.5 Gb/s tributary slots
ODUMPT21 21 ODUk multiplex structure with 1.25 Gb/s tributary slots
CAMCC 83 AMCC mapping used for transparent mapping of 10 GbE into
ODU2; for interworking with Ciena equipment.
OLDAMCC 87 AMCC mapping used for transparent mapping of 10 GbE into
ODU2 as defined in G.sup43; for backward compatibility
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Payload Label Mismatch - Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Payload Label Mismatch - Path alarm:
Alarm identifier / PLM-P

Mnemonic
• ASAPODU0
• ASAPODU1
• ASAPODU2
• ASAPODU2E
• ASAPODU3
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-296: “Clear Payload Label Mismatch - Path” (p. 3-504).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details PCS Generator active
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PCS Generator active

Meaning of alarm
The PCSGENERATOR condition is raised when the signal loopback test is in progress at
the 100GA/D client port.

PCS Generator active alarm:
Alarm identifier / PCSGENERATOR

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “PCSGENERATOR” (p. B-38).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-298: “Clear PCS Generator active ” (p. 3-507).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Pluggable Module Discovered
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Pluggable Module Discovered

Meaning of alarm
The DISCOVERMOD condition indicates that an inserted pluggable module has been
booted and recognized.

Pluggable Module Discovered alarm:
Alarm identifier / DISCOVERMOD

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “DISCOVERMOD” (p. B-9).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
No corrective action is required. This is a normal message. The DISCOVERMOD
condition only provides a sequential record in the system log for tracking changes in
pluggable module equipment inventory. These inventory changes are logged consistently
whether or not there is a defect condition.
Note: In cases where a defect is present that requires corrective action, the
REPLUNITMISSMOD alarm will also be raised (see Procedure 3-300: “Clear
Pluggable Module missing” (p. 3-510)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Pluggable Module Inserted
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Pluggable Module Inserted

Meaning of alarm
The INSERTMOD condition indicates that an pluggable module has been inserted into
the card.

Pluggable Module Inserted alarm:
Alarm identifier / INSERTMOD

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “INSERTMOD” (p. B-19).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
No corrective action is required. This is a normal message. The INSERTMOD condition
only provides a sequential record in the system log for tracking changes in pluggable
module equipment inventory. These inventory changes are logged consistently whether or
not there is a defect condition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Pluggable Module mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Pluggable Module mismatch

Meaning of alarm
Detected module type does not match provisioned module type, or detected module
frequency does not match provisioned channel frequency.

Pluggable Module mismatch alarm:
Alarm identifier / MISMATCHMOD

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “MISMATCHMOD” (p. B-32).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-299: “Clear Pluggable Module mismatch ” (p. 3-508).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Pluggable Module missing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Pluggable Module missing

Meaning of alarm
The optics module (pluggable module) for the port is missing or the card is not able to
successfully detect the presence of the module. The problem may be with the pluggable
module or the card. Typically, this alarm is raised if the pluggable module is not installed
or not properly seated.

Pluggable Module missing alarm:
Alarm identifier / REPLUNITMISSMOD

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Effect on service Service-affecting (SA) (Except when protected or inactive)
Alarm source See “REPLUNITMISSMOD” (p. B-42).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-300: “Clear Pluggable Module missing” (p. 3-510).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Pluggable Module Removed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Pluggable Module Removed

Meaning of alarm
The REMOVEMOD condition indicates that a pluggable module has been removed.

Pluggable Module Removed alarm:
Alarm identifier / REMOVEMOD

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source All cards with pluggable modules
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
No corrective action is required. This is a normal message. The REMOVEMOD
condition only provides a sequential record in the system log for tracking changes in
pluggable module equipment inventory. These inventory changes are logged consistently
whether or not there is a defect condition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Pluggable Module SEEP failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Pluggable Module SEEP failure

Meaning of alarm
The Pluggable Module SEEP failure alarm is raised when the system cannot
communicate with the pluggable module to determine such information as power level
and laser types. This condition is equivalent to a port degrade, and service is not impacted
until/unless a subsequent reset occurs.

Pluggable Module SEEP failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / FACTERM-DEV

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source 10AN10G, 10SD10G, 112SCA1, 112SCX10, 112SDX11,
112SNA1, 112SNX10, 11DPE12A, 11DPE12E, 11QCUPC,
11OPE8, 11QCE12X, 11QPA4, 11QPE24, 11QPEN4, 11STAR1,
11STAR1A, 11STMM10, 130SCUP, 130SCUPB, 130SCUPC,
130SCX10, 130SNX10, 24ANM, 24ANMB, 24ET1GB, 24SDM,
43SCGE1, 43SCX4, 43SCX4E, 43STA1PB, 43STX4, 43STX4P,
4DPA2, 4DPA4, A2P2125, A4PSWG, AHPHG, AHPLG,
AM2032A, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A, AM2625A,
ASWG, MVAC, OSCT, PTPCL, PTPIO
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Pluggable Module SEEP failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-297: “Clear Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU alarm”
(p. 3-506).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Pluggable Module Transmit Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Pluggable Module Transmit Failure

Meaning of alarm
The Pluggable Module Transmit Failure condition is raised at the pluggable module
equipment and indicates a fault on the transmit port of the pluggable module. This is
usually a laser failure where light is not detected at the transmit port.

Pluggable Module Transmit Failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / TRMTMOD

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “TRMTMOD” (p. B-51).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-302: “Clear Pluggable Module Transmit Failure ” (p. 3-514).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Pluggable Module Unknown
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Pluggable Module Unknown

Meaning of alarm
The UNKNOWNMOD alarm is raised in two cases:
• The pluggable type is not one that is officially supported by the 1830 PSS system and
therefore unrecognized. A module mnemonic may or may not be displayed. But if it
is, it does NOT indicate that the module is supported for that port or card.
• The pluggable is a supported and recognized module on the 1830 PSS system, but it
does not support the signal type of the port on which it was detected.

Pluggable Module Unknown alarm:
Alarm identifier / UNKNOWNMOD

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “UNKNOWNMOD” (p. B-76).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-303: “Clear Pluggable Module unknown ” (p. 3-516).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details PM Baseline
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PM Baseline
Meaning of alarm

PM Baseline alarm:
Alarm identifier / BASELINE

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “BASELINE” (p. B-5).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
No corrective action is required. This is a normal report caused by an analog PM baseline
operation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Port degrade - wavelength tracker communication failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port degrade - wavelength tracker communication failure

Meaning of alarm
Communications with the Wavelength Tracker feature on this card are unreliable. This
means that any Wavelength Tracker information sent (for example, configuration
changes) or generated may be incorrect.
Note: Until this alarm is cleared, Wavelength Tracker provisioning and information
on the card are invalid.

Port degrade - wavelength tracker communication failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / EQPTDGROCH

Mnemonic
ASAP type OCH
Alarm source See “EQPTDGROCH” (p. B-11).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-304: “Clear Port degrade - wavelength tracker communication
failure ” (p. 3-518).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Port degrade - wavelength tracker detection failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port degrade - wavelength tracker detection failure

Meaning of alarm
The Wavelength Tracker on this card has detected an internal fault. The Wavelength
Tracker information generated may be inaccurate. Channels may be declared absent
and/or detected channels powers for this channel instance may not accurately represent
the actual channel power.
Note: Until this alarm is cleared, Wavelength Tracker information for the detect points
on the card are invalid.

Port degrade - wavelength tracker detection failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / CONTR

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “CONTR, CONTR-OUT” (p. B-7).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-305: “Clear Port degrade - wavelength tracker detection failure ”
(p. 3-520).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Port degrade - wavelength tracker encode degrade
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port degrade - wavelength tracker encode degrade

This condition is raised if the present network output power at the OT, SVAC, MVAC or
VAn port is less than the programmed network output power. When this alarm is present
there is a high probability that this service is not being impacted. Therefore, immediate
action is not required. If the port is an SVAC, MVAC or VAn port encoder, there is a high
probability the condition may be a result of low input power due to high loss between
components, or low output power from the source optical interface. This situation should
be investigated as soon as possible.

Port degrade - wavelength tracker encode degrade alarm:
Alarm identifier / MTCESURVDGR

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “MTCESURVDGR” (p. B-33).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Port degrade - wavelength tracker encode degrade
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-306: “Clear Port degrade - wavelength tracker encode degrade”
(p. 3-522).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Port failure - device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port failure - device

Meaning of alarm
The Port failure - device alarm indicates a port initialization failure on the
network ports (10G ports).

Port failure - device alarm:
Alarm identifier / EQPTPORT

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “EQPTPORT” (p. B-12).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-307: “Clear Port failure - device ” (p. 3-526).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Port transmit failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port transmit failure

Meaning of alarm
The Port transmit failure alarm is valid on 10G network ports and may indicate
several different issues with the transmit port such as transmit lock detect, temperature
deviations, transmit laser failures, and so on.

Port transmit failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / TRMT

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “TRMT” (p. B-51).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-308: “Clear Port transmit failure alarm” (p. 3-528).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Post-FEC Signal Degrade
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Post-FEC Signal Degrade

Meaning of alarm
The OT port has detected uncorrectable bit errors after FEC. This defect indicates that
local OTUk port has detected FEC BER which exceeds 10-6.
• The input optical signal is severely degraded by the optical noise

Post-FEC Signal Degrade alarm:
Alarm identifier / FECUBCSD

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTU2
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “FECUBCSD” (p. B-13).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-309: “Clear Post-FEC Signal Degrade ” (p. 3-530).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Power Adjust Loss Margin Exceeded
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power Adjust Loss Margin Exceeded

Meaning of alarm
This condition is raised as a result of the gain, required to increase the power level at the
ingress port of an LD amplifier, being close to the maximum value as set by the
Engineering and Planning Tool (EPT). Without the ability to increase the gain any further,
the repair margin has been compromised and any additional loss would result in
power-adjust alarms.

Power Adjust Loss Margin Exceeded alarm:
Alarm identifier / PWRMARGIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm category OTS
Alarm source See “PWRMARGIN” (p. B-41).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-310: “Clear Power Adjust Loss Margin Exceeded ” (p. 3-531).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Power Adjustment Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power Adjustment Failure

Meaning of alarm
The PWRADJFAIL (Power Adjustment Failure) condition is raised when the system is
unable to adequately adjust the power levels when:
• the loss is too high or too low
• the amplifier is gain limited
• the maximum number of iterations has been reached
• the MESH4 OA required gain either exceeds the maximum planned gain or is less
than the minimum planned gain
Power adjustments are run during system initial commissioning and during in-service
power balancing. A rebalance is a user-initiated activity from a user interface and
performs adjustments on the OT, LDs, CWRs, and SVACs. This condition is also raised
during an EC reboot, LD warm reboot, and CWR88 warm reboot when automatic ingress
power adjustment is enabled on a network.

Power Adjustment Failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / PWRADJFAIL

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source See “PWRADJFAIL” (p. B-40).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Power Adjustment Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-311: “Clear Power Adjustment Failure ” (p. 3-533).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Power Adjustment Required
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power Adjustment Required

Meaning of alarm
A PWRADJREQ condition is raised when:
• Adding a channel on a non-commissioned network:
For example, a ring network can be commissioned with ASE power adjusts which
require no services to be added to power balance the network. When a service is
added after this type of commissioning is done, the PWRADJREQ alarm will not be
raised.
• Adding a service after an ingress or egress adjust failed because no service was
present or configured at the time:
Once the service has been provisioned, this alarm is raised and an adjustment of the
power is required.
• Reinserting a pack when services are present across the affected topology
• Changing the network EPT parameter values and breaking the line fiber into the
ingress LD
• Clearing a LOS condition on the LD
An ingress adjustment requires an ingress service (drop or through) to complete. An
egress adjustment requires a through service to complete; in the case of a terminal line
only an add path service is required. For a TOADM line both add path and through path
services are required to completely optimize the line; if services are provisioned across
only the add path or through path the PWRADJREQ condition is cleared only for that
path.
Masking of PWRADJREQ: If an event occurs on a network element that would cause
PWRADJREQ to be raised, but there are no channels provisioned at the affected optical
line, the PWRADJREQ condition is masked. The condition will only be raised when a
channel is provisioned that would allow the required SCOT power adjustment to be run to
clear the PWRADJREQ. This means that provisioning of a channel may result in
unmasking of one or more PWRADJREQ conditions.

Power Adjustment Required alarm:
Alarm identifier / PWRADJREQ

Mnemonic
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Power Adjustment Required
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ASAP type OTS

Alarm source See “PWRADJREQ” (p. B-40).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-364: “Clear Power Adjustment Required ” (p. 3-616).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Power Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power Failure
The alarming entity detects a power failure.

Power Failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / PWR

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source PSF, BT
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-365: “Clear Power Failure” (p. 3-617).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Power filter mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power filter mismatch

Meaning of alarm
The Power filter mismatch alarm indicates that the two power filters do not have
matching current carrying capacity or do not match the preprovisioned filter type. The
Power filter mismatch alarm could also indicate that power filter Wavelength
Tracker function does not match the shelf Wavelength Tracker mode. This alarm can also
occur after a new installation on a PSS-32 drop shelf configuration.

Power filter mismatch alarm:

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source PF
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-366: “Clear Power filter mismatch” (p. 3-619).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Power Management Suspended
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power Management Suspended

Meaning of alarm
Power management operations are suspended for the alarmed channel. The main purpose
of this condition is to help debug other problems. For example, if an alarm is present
indicating the power leaving a NE is too low, retrieve all conditions for the NE and check
if the PWRSUSP condition is present.
This condition applies to:
• OT line ports with Wavelength Tracker encoder
• OT VA ports with Wavelength Tracker encoder
• OPSA A/B ports
• CWR8, CWR8-88 THRU Out and CLS Out ports
• WR2-88, WR8-88A, and WR8-88A SIG Out ports
• SVAC, MVAC, MVAC8B line ports
The PWRSUSP-RX condition is applicable to the WR20-TFM SIG In port.
OT or VAC Type Packs
The measured loss from the input port to the egress LD is different from the theoretical
loss by 4dB or more. The alarm is raised when the power control loop for the card
attempts to change its power (to get the egress LD channel power to the correct value)
and reaches the 4dB clamp.
The cause of this condition may be one or more of the following:
• damaged fiber in the path between the OT or VAC line port and the egress point
• dirty fiber connector in the path between the OT or VAC line port and the egress point
• bent fiber in the path between the OT or VAC line port and the egress point
• dirty port connector on a pack in the path between the OT or VAC line port and the
egress point
• low channel input power into the VAC client port
CWR and WR Type Packs
The PWRSUSP alarm will be raised per channel on the CWR or WR pack. It indicates the
channel is suspended and the WSS attenuation controller for the channel will not change
the channel attenuation while in this state. The PWRSUSP - CWR/WR alarm is raised
when a setpoint adjustment is blocked for 10 consecutive iterations.
The PWRSUSP alarm is raised for the following topologies/actions (SIG port only):
• For the transmit ports of WR CLS, WR Thru when the WR WSS controller is disabled
due to channel reliability (includes anydir1 configurations)
• For SFD40/40B when the warm-up period is not complete
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• For a DWDM LOS on an SFD-terminal line
• When a DWDM LOS occurs at reverse ingress LD Line Out of an SFD-terminal line
(the local channel add control loop will raise alarm at local control points for all
locally added channels)
• For a WR8-88A in the top or middle position, or CWR8-88 on bottom of an anydir
node that has a WSS disabled because of channel reliability
• When in-service, a LOS is detected at the input of the add-amp for a CWR8/8-88
Possible general causes for PWRSUSP alarm on CWR or WR type packs:
1. The channel power is power out-of-range leaving the upstream degree where the
channel is transmitted to the local node raising the alarm. Inter network element
communication is used to determine the issue exists upstream, and the local NE power
management system suspends control of the channel until the upstream problem is
resolved.
2. The local node raising the alarm cannot determine the channel status at the upstream
node from where the channel transmits to the local node. In this case, the NE power
management system suspends control of the channel until communication can be
re-established with the upstream node.
3. The local node raising the alarm determines that the upstream node from where the
channel transmits to the local node cannot provide channel monitoring due to
equipment fault. In this case, the NE power management system suspends control of
the channel until the upstream fault is resolved.
4. The local node raising the alarm determines that the channel monitoring location
(used as feedback to adjust the channel attenuation in the WSS) is unreliable due to a
hardware fault, or in the case of WTOCM, WTOCMA or WTOCMF, a missing pack
or unplugged fiber. In this case, the NE power management system suspends control
of the channel until the channel monitoring returns to normal status.
5. The local node raising the alarm determines that the channel power is fluctuating by
more than 0.5 dB over a ten second period, a condition considered unstable. In this
case, the NE power management system suspends control of the channel until the
channel returns to a stable state. The alarm may clear autonomously.
OPS
PWRSUSP is raised when SCOT uses the OPSA A or B port as the power control port
and if either the required attenuation by SCOT would make the applied attenuation at the
A or B port negative, or if the required attenuation is greater than the maximum
operational attenuation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power Management Suspended alarm:
Alarm identifier / PWRSUSP

Mnemonic
ASAP type OCH
Alarm source See “PWRSUSP” (p. B-41) and “PWRSUSP-RX” (p. B-41).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-367: “Clear Power management suspended ” (p. 3-621).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Power management topology invalid
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power management topology invalid

Meaning of alarm
Power management egress power management operations are suspended after the
topology walk detects invalid power management topology. This alarm would be raised
at:
• Ingress LD Line Out if line external port is a AxPyG type LD
• Egress LD Line Out if unidirectional line topology and LD type is AM2125A
• Top WR8-88A Sig port in AnyDir1 configuration in the add direction of the A/D
block

Power management topology invalid alarm:
Alarm identifier / PRCDRERR-TOPO

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “PRCDRERR-TOPO” (p. B-40).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-368: “Clear Power management topology invalid ” (p. 3-628).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Power Unbalance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power Unbalance
Meaning of alarm
A Power Unbalance alarm would be raised when the difference of input power at A
and B ports on OPSA is more than 2 dB. It indicates that the user did not set the working
and protection path power in balance, and the protection for OMS path may fail under this
condition.

Power Unbalance alarm:
Alarm identifier / PWRUNBALANCE

Mnemonic
ASAP type OMS
Alarm source OPS
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-369: “Clear Power Unbalance ” (p. 3-630).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Pre-FEC Signal Degrade
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Pre-FEC Signal Degrade

Meaning of alarm
The OT port has detected a Signal Degrade Path layer. This defect indicates that local
OTUk port has detected FEC BER which exceeds 10-5.
• Power level out of range on the associated OCh trail

Pre-FEC Signal Degrade alarm:
Alarm identifier / FECECSD

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTU
Alarm source See “FECECSD” (p. B-13).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Pre-FEC Signal Degrade
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Perform the procedure, Procedure 3-413: “Clear Signal Degrade - ODU alarm”
(p. 3-683). Because it is FEC corrected BER, it does not affect service unless another
alarm exists on the port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Procedure Error
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure Error
A module that is not consistent with the hardware slot / software assignment (also
incompatible revision) or an incorrectly set shelf ID have been detected. “MTX” is the
generic designation for all variants of matrix cards.

Procedure Error alarm:
Alarm identifier / PRCDRERR

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source SFP, XFP, shelf, MTX, I/O cards
Related information
Local indications
For critical alarms, LED 1 on the faceplate of the respective circuit pack is blinking red.
For minor alarms, LED 1 on the faceplate of the respective circuit pack is blinking amber.
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-370: “Clear Procedure Error” (p. 3-631).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Provisioned firmware will be obsolete after sw upgrade
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisioned firmware will be obsolete after sw upgrade

Meaning of alarm
The Provisioned firmware will be obsolete after sw upgrade condition
is raised when the installed firmware in a card does not match any firmware profile in the
software release. This scenario occurs after a software upgrade from a release which has a
newer firmware profile than the current release. For example, software release R3.6.58
has newer firmware profiles than some higher-numbered releases, such as R5.1.6.

Provisioned firmware will be obsolete after sw upgrade alarm:
Alarm identifier / FWPENDINGOBSOLETE

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “FWPENDINGOBSOLETE” (p. B-17).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
If it is preferable to maintain the unknown (obsolete) firmware in the card, you may
ignore this condition. The FWPENDINGOBSOLETE condition clears automatically after
a software upgrade to a release which contains the latest firmware profiles. Otherwise,
proceed to Procedure 3-371: “Clear Provisioned firmware will be obsolete after sw
upgrade ” (p. 3-634).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details PTP Clock in the Free-Running Status
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PTP Clock in the Free-Running Status

Meaning of alarm
The PTP-FREERUN alarm is raised if the PTP clock has never synchronized to a time
reference after start up.

The following tabular overview summarizes important information concerning the PTP
Clock in the Free-Running Status alarm:
Alarm identifier / PTP-FREERUN

Mnemonic
ASAP type PTPCLOCK
Alarm source See “PTP-FREERUN” (p. B-40).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-372: “Clear PTP Clock in the Free-Running Status” (p. 3-636).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details PTP Port Faulty
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PTP Port Faulty

Meaning of alarm
The PTP clock on the card has detected faulty of a PTP port. The PTP-FAULTY alarm is
raised if a PTP port is in the faulty state. This may be caused because the physical port
that the PTP port is associated to is not operational.

PTP Port Faulty alarm:
Alarm identifier / FAULTY

Mnemonic
ASAP type PTP
Alarm source PTPPORT
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-373: “Clear PTP Port Faulty ” (p. 3-637).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details RA2P Gain Failure Detected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RA2P Gain Failure Detected

Meaning of alarm
The RAMANGAINFAIL condition is raised if the RA2P fails to start or restart properly
after the pumps have been turned off. When the pumps remain in the Off state, readings
of the RA2P gain return negative numbers, and readings of the pump powers return very
small or even negative values. The RAMANGAINFAIL condition is cleared by cold or
hard rebooting the pack. Pack software on the RA2P will poll for the signatures of this
problem, and will cause a cold reboot if the signatures are found.

RA2P Gain Failure Detected alarm:
Alarm identifier / RAMANGAINFAIL

Mnemonic
SC/TC Transient Condition (TC)
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source RA2P
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
No corrective action is required. This is a normal message..
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Raman Suppress - Line
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Raman Suppress - Line

Meaning of alarm
The LINE port on externally facing line cards has detected a Loss Of Signal on a line that
has an external Raman Amplifier connected. This RAMANSUP alarm would have an
associated LOS alarm is raised if the power measured at the port input drops below a
threshold.
• Received power may not be within the acceptable range

Raman Suppress - Line alarm:
Alarm identifier / RAMANSUP

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “RAMANSUP” (p. B-42).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Refer to the corrective action for the LINE port LOS alarm (see Procedure 3-193: “Clear
LD Input LOS ” (p. 3-360)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details READY, PM Global File Collection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
READY, PM Global File Collection

Entering the “READY” state of PM Global File Collection.

READY, PM Global File Collection condition:
Alarm identifier / PMGLBREADY

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Notes:
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The READY, PM Global File Collection condition is to be understood as
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Received timing signal failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Received timing signal failure

A received timing signal internally failed to be sent to the MTX card.

Received timing signal failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / RCVTIMFAIL

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source Bus termination, PSF3T8, I/O cards
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-374: “Clear Received timing signal failure” (p. 3-638).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Receiver Optimization in Progress
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Receiver Optimization in Progress

Meaning of alarm
An an FPGA initialization or LOF alarm can also cause RCVROPTPROG to be raised. In
addition, the RCVROPTPROG alarm is raised in the following scenarios:
• The 43STX4P pack is faulty.
• The Line input signal of the pack is tuning after recovering from an LOS and the
wavelength is not tuned to a proper value.

Receiver Optimization in Progress alarm:
Alarm identifier / RCVROPTPROG

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “RCVROPTPROG” (p. B-42).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-375: “Clear Receiver Optimization in Progress” (p. 3-639).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Reference Clock - forced switch active
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reference Clock - forced switch active

Meaning of alarm
The FRCRFCKSEL alarm indicates that a manual clock switch has been executed and
one or more cards in a shelf are locked to one of the redundant pair of reference clocks.
The alarm clears when the clock reference switch is returned to Automatic.

Reference Clock - forced switch active alarm:
Alarm identifier / FRCRFCKSEL

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “FRCRFCKSEL” (p. B-16).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-376: “Clear Reference Clock - forced switch active ” (p. 3-641).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Remote Client Local Fault
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remote Client Local Fault

Meaning of alarm
OT port has detected LFI ordered set on 10GBE LAN service transported over OTUk in
transmit direction. This may be caused if the remote client equipment is generating LFI
ordered set.

Remote Client Local Fault alarm:
Alarm identifier / LFIEGR

Mnemonic
ASAP type 10GbE, 40GbE, 100GbE
Alarm source See “LFIEGR” (p. B-23).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-377: “Clear Remote Client Local Fault ” (p. 3-642).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Remote Client Loss of Synchronization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remote Client Loss of Synchronization

Meaning of alarm
OT port has detected Loss of 64B/66B block synchronization on 10GbE facility in
transmit direction.

Remote Client Loss of Synchronization alarm:
Alarm identifier / LSSEGR

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “LSSEGR” (p. B-28).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-378: “Clear Remote Client Loss of Synchronization ” (p. 3-643).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Remote Defect Indication
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remote Defect Indication

Meaning of alarm
The OT port has detected a RDI at the MEP layer. A MEP detects RDI when it receives a
CCM frame with the RDI field set.

Remote Defect Indication alarm:
Alarm identifier / RDI

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “RDI” (p. B-42).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-379: “Clear Remote defect indication alarm” (p. 3-644).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Remote Defect Indication
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remote Defect Indication

Meaning of alarm

Remote Defect Indication alarm:
Alarm identifier / RmdMepRDI

Mnemonic
ASAP type RMD
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-380: “Clear Remote Defect Indication” (p. 3-645).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Remote Failure Indication on HO path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remote Failure Indication on HO path

The receive signal contains the Remote Failure Indication (RFI) on VC-n higher-order
path level.
The network element at the far end of the higher-order path (in the downstream direction)
has detected an error in the incoming signal and has inserted the RFI into the outgoing
signal in the upstream direction. RFI on VC-n higher-order path level is inserted as a
result of a Loss of Signal, Loss of Frame, Alarm Indication Signal,
Excessive Bit Error Ratio, AU-n Alarm Indication Signal, or
Loss of Pointer HO Path.

Remote Failure Indication on HO path alarm:
Alarm identifier / RFI

Mnemonic
Alarm source AU-n (AU-4, AU-4-4c, AU-4-16c) non-intrusive monitoring
(NIM) point
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Remote Failure Indication on HO path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-381: “Clear Remote Failure Indication on HO path” (p. 3-646).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Remote Failure Indication on line
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remote Failure Indication on line

The receive signal contains the Remote Failure Indication (RFI) on STM-n multiplex
section level.
The network element at the far end of the multiplex section (in the downstream direction)
has inserted the RFI into the outgoing signal in the upstream direction. RFI on multiplex
section level is inserted as a result of a Loss of Signal, Loss of Frame,
Alarm Indication Signal, or Excessive Bit Error Ratio.

Remote Failure Indication on line alarm:

Mnemonic
setting) SA Not alarmed (NA)
Alarm source STM-n port (STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64)
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-382: “Clear Remote Failure Indication on line” (p. 3-647).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Remote Failure Indication on OC-n
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remote Failure Indication on OC-n

The receive signal contains the Remote Failure Indication (RFI) on OC-n line level.
The network element at the far end of the OC-n line (in the downstream direction) has
inserted the RFI into the outgoing signal in the upstream direction. RFI on OC-n line
level is inserted as a result of a Loss of Signal, Loss of Frame,
Alarm Indication Signal, or Excessive Bit Error Ratio.

Remote Failure Indication on OC-n alarm:

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPOC3, ASAPOC12, ASAPOC48, ASAPOC192
Alarm source OC-n port (OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192)
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-383: “Clear Remote Failure Indication on OC-n” (p. 3-648).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Remote Failure Indication on STS Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remote Failure Indication on STS Path

The receive signal contains the Remote Failure Indication (RFI) on STS-n path level.
The network element at the far end of the STS-n path (in the downstream direction) has
detected an error in the incoming signal and has inserted the RFI into the outgoing signal
in the upstream direction. RFI on STS-n path level is inserted as a result of a
Loss of Signal, Loss of Frame, Alarm Indication Signal,
Excessive Bit Error Ratio, or Loss of Pointer STS Path.

Remote Failure Indication on STS Path alarm:

Mnemonic
Alarm source STS-n (STS-1, STS-3c, STS-12c, STS-48c) non-intrusive
monitoring (NIM) point
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-384: “Clear Remote Failure Indication on STS Path” (p. 3-649).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Remote Fault
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remote Fault
Meaning of alarm
An LANRFI condition may be raised on a client or network port of a transponder card
and may be attributed to a fault on the remote device (the equipment connected to the
client or network port). The remote device is either detecting a problem on its receive link
or has some sort of local fault and is generating an LANRFI in the downstream direction.

Remote Fault alarm:
Alarm identifier / LANRFI

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “LANRFI” (p. B-22).
4
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-385: “Clear Remote Fault” (p. 3-650).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Remote Inventory Mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remote Inventory Mismatch

Important! The Remote Inventory Mismatch alarming is supported for
extension shelves only.
The remote inventory data of the extension shelf, stored on the bus termination card
(BTC_2), do not match the redundant copy of that data on the main shelf FLC.
Remote inventory data
The remote inventory data of the shelfare kept redundantly on two locations to enhance
the reliability and to be able to perform consistency checks.
The remote inventory data are stored:
• On the second EEPROM of the BTC_2 in the extension shelf
• On the mass storage of the FLC (redundant copy) in the main shelf
Note: The bus termination cards BTC_1 and BTC_2 in extension shelves reside in
the following slot positions, depending on the type of subrack:
Bus termination Slot position

card PSS-36 extension shelf PSS-64 extension shelf
BTC_1 42 83
BTC_2 43 84
Due to the fact that the inventory data are kept redundantly, inconsistencies can occur
between the data stored on the two storage locations, for example when an FLC is
installed which previously had been used in another system. Note that the latter is valid
for the main shelf only, and that potential inconsistencies will not cause a
Remote Inventory Mismatch alarm.
The following is valid for the extension shelf if the FLC in the main shelf is up. As long
as the FLC is up and running and no defects are raised, the data of the mass storage are
handled as correct (master) version. Therefore, the BTC_2 automatically gets overwritten,
if a BTC_2 card with different or empty data is inserted while an active FLC is running.
A mismatch can only occur during a recovery of the active FLC, and if one of the
following conditions is present:
• The remote inventory data on the BTC_2 and the redundant copy on the FLC differ.
• The remote inventory data on the BTC_2 and/or the redundant copy on the FLC are
empty.
• The remote inventory data on the BTC_2 or the redundant copy on the FLC are not
readable (corrupted).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Remote Inventory Mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remote Inventory Mismatch alarm:
Alarm identifier / RIMISMATCH

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source PSS-36 or PSS-64 extension shelf
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-386: “Clear Remote Inventory Mismatch” (p. 3-652).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Remote Packet Lost
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remote Packet Lost

Meaning of alarm
TSoP packets being received indicating an LPL condition at far end.

Remote Packet Lost alarm:
Alarm identifier / RmdCesChannelRPL

Mnemonic
ASAP type RMD
Alarm severity (default SA Minor
setting) NSA –
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-387: “Clear Remote Packet Lost ” (p. 3-654).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details RFI Line/MS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RFI Line/MS
Meaning of alarm
An RFI-L condition may be raised on a client or network SDH port of the listed line cards
and may be attributed to a fault on the remote device (the equipment connected to the
client or network port). The remote device is either detecting a problem on its receive link
or has some sort of local fault and is generating an RFI in the downstream direction.

RFI Line/MS alarm:
Alarm identifier / RFI-L

Mnemonic
ASAP type CBR2G5, OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4, OC48/STM16
Alarm source See “RFI-L” (p. B-43).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-388: “Clear RFI Line/MS ” (p. 3-655).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details RMD Equipment Fail
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RMD Equipment Fail

Meaning of alarm

RMD Equipment Fail alarm:
Alarm identifier / RmdEQF

Mnemonic
ASAP type RMD
setting) NSA –
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-389: “Clear RMD Equipment Fail ” (p. 3-657).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details RMD Power Fail
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RMD Power Fail

Meaning of alarm

RMD Power Fail alarm:
Alarm identifier / RmdPWR

Mnemonic
ASAP type RMD
setting) NSA –
Alarm source 11QPE24-shelf-slot-RMD{1-32}
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-390: “Clear RMD Power Fail ” (p. 3-658).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details SAP Mac Limit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SAP Mac Limit

Meaning of alarm
The SAP Mac Limit alarm is raised when the utilization for the SAP FDB table reaches
75% of maximum number of FDB entries specified in the Maximum Number of MAC
Addresses parameter in the Modify FDB table.

The following tabular overview summarizes important information concerning the SAP
Mac Limit alarm:
Alarm identifier / SAP-MAC-LIMIT

Mnemonic
ASAP type SAP
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-391: “Clear SAP Mac Limit ” (p. 3-659).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Security Intrusion Alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Security Intrusion Alarm

Excessive invalid login attempts, or two consecutive invalid login attempts before the
minimum interval has elapsed.

Security Intrusion Alarm condition:
Alarm identifier / INTRUSION

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPSECU
Effect on service Not service affecting
Alarm source Security log
Notes:
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Security Intrusion Alarm condition is to be understood as information rather
than as an alarm.
The Security Intrusion Alarm condition is an indication to the system
administrator that the allowed number of invalid login attempts was exceeded by a certain
user and that, as a consequence, this user was disabled.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Server Signal Failure - ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Server Signal Failure - ODU

Meaning of alarm
The OT port has detected a Server Signal Failure at the ODUk level. Conditions that can
cause an SSFODU are:
• LOS-P (Loss of Signal – OTU)
• LOF (Loss of Frame – OTU)
• LOM (Loss of Multiframe – OTU)
• ODU-AIS

Server Signal Failure - ODU alarm:
Alarm identifier / SSFODU

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU4
Alarm source See “SSFODU” (p. B-46).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Server Signal Failure - ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-393: “Clear Server Signal Failure - ODU ” (p. 3-661).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Server Signal Failure - Optical Channel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Server Signal Failure - Optical Channel

A CWDM module (client port) on an SFC8 card has failed, has been physically removed
or is mismatched in its socket, and as a consequent action this
Server Signal Failure - Optical Channel alarm has been declared for the
respective CWDM channel of the SFC8 card.

Server Signal Failure - Optical Channel alarm:
Alarm identifier / SSF-OCH

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPOCH
Alarm source Optical Channel (OCh) on SFC8
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-394: “ Clear Server Signal Failure - Optical Channel” (p. 3-663).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Server signal failure - OSC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Server signal failure - OSC

Meaning of alarm
The LINE port on one of the AHPHG or AHPLG cards or the OSCSFP port on the OSCT
cards has detected a Loss Of Signal. The OSCSSF conditon is raised against the OSC or
OSCSFP port when the LOS alarm is raised against LINE port when the power measured
at the port input drops below a threshold.
• Received power may not be within the acceptable range

Server signal failure - OSC alarm:
Alarm identifier / OSCSSF

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source See “OSCSSF” (p. B-38).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
No corrective action is required. Refer to the corrective action for the LINE port LOS
alarm (see Procedure 3-193: “Clear LD Input LOS ” (p. 3-360)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Server Signal Failure - Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Server Signal Failure - Path

A Server Signal Failure - Path alarm on the ODUk path always results from some other
alarm(s) in the network. It refers to lower transport server layers in the upstream
direction.

Server Signal Failure - Path alarm:
Alarm identifier / SSF-P

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPODUn
Effect on service in the Not service-affecting
receive direction
Effect on service in the Service-affecting (SA) if transmission on a path is potentially
transmit direction affected. Not service-affecting (NSA) otherwise.
setting) in the receive
direction NSA Not reported (NR)

setting) in the transmit
direction NSA Not reported (NR)
Alarm source ODUn
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-395: “Clear Server Signal Failure - Path” (p. 3-664).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Server Signal Failure - Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Server Signal Failure - Section

A Server Signal Failure - Section alarm on the OTUk section or on the Optical Multiplex
Section (OMS) always results from some other alarm(s) in the network. It refers to lower
transport server layers in the upstream direction.
Note: When both matrix cards of the system are failed, which leads to a “loss of
system clock” condition, then this may cause a Loss of Frame (OTU) or
Loss of Multiframe alarm instead of an
Server Signal Failure - Section alarm.

Server Signal Failure - Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / SSF-S

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPOTU, ASAPOMS
Alarm source OTU, Optical Multiplex Section (OMS) on SFC8
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-396: “Clear Server Signal Failure - Section” (p. 3-665).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Server Signal Failure on ETH - Egress
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Server Signal Failure on ETH - Egress

The Gigabit Ethernet transport server layer has failed, that is a failure occurred on the
ODUk path carrying the Gigabit Ethernet client signal, and that failure is detected at the
ODUk path termination.
Possible failure conditions on the ODUk path, that lead to a
Server Signal Failure on ETH - Egress alarm, include:
• AIS-P (Server Signal Failure - Path)
• PLM-P (Payload Label Mismatch - Path)
• TIM-P (Trace Identifier Mismatch)
• OCI (Open Connection Indication)
• LCK (Locked)
In brackets, the alarm messages are given that can be observed at the ODUk path
termination.

Server Signal Failure on ETH - Egress alarm:
Alarm identifier / SSF-ETH

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPGBE, ASAPGBE10, ASAPGBE100
Alarm source GBE, GBE10, GBE100
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Server Signal Failure on ETH - Egress
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-397: “Clear Server Signal Failure on ETH - Egress” (p. 3-666).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Server Signal Failure on HO Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Server Signal Failure on HO Path

A failure occurred on a server layer of the higher order VC-n path.
Possible failure conditions, that lead to a Server Signal Failure on HO Path
alarm, include:
• Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Optical Section (URU-O)
• Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Section (URU-S)
• Loss of Signal (LOS)
• Loss of Frame (LOF)
• Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section (TIM-S)
• Alarm Indication Signal on STM-n Multiplex Section (MS-AIS)
• Alarm Indication Signal on HO Path (AIS-P)
• Loss of Pointer HO Path (LOP-P)

Server Signal Failure on HO Path alarm:

Mnemonic
Alarm source VC-n facilities (VC-4, VC-4-4C, VC-4-16C
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Server Signal Failure on HO Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-398: “Clear Server Signal Failure on HO Path” (p. 3-667).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Server Signal Failure on Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Server Signal Failure on Section

A Server Signal Failure on Section alarm on the transparently transported STM-n/OC-n
always results from some other alarm(s) in the network. It refers to lower transport server
layers in the upstream direction.

Server Signal Failure on Section alarm:

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPSTM1, ASAPSTM4, ASAPSTM16, ASAPSTM64,
ASAPSTM256 , ASAPOC3, ASAPOC12, ASAPOC48,
ASAPOC192, ASAPOC768
Alarm source STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64, STM-256 , OC-3, OC-12,
OC-48, OC-192, OC-768
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-399: “Clear Server Signal Failure on Section” (p. 3-668).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Server Signal Failure on Section - Egress
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Server Signal Failure on Section - Egress

A Server Signal Failure on Section - Egress alarm detected on transparently transported
STM-n/OC-n always results from some other alarm(s) in the network. It refers to lower
transport server layers in the upstream direction.

Server Signal Failure on Section - Egress alarm:

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPSTM1, ASAPSTM4, ASAPSTM16, ASAPSTM64,
ASAPSTM256 , ASAPOC3, ASAPOC12, ASAPOC48,
Alarm source STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64, STM-256 , OC-3, OC-12,
OC-48, OC-192, OC-768
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-400: “Clear Server Signal Failure on Section - Egress” (p. 3-669).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Server Signal Failure on Line
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Server Signal Failure on Line

Server signal failure

Server Signal Failure on Line alarm:
Alarm identifier / SSF-L

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPOC48, ASAPOC192, ASAPOC768, ASAPSTM16,
ASAPSTM64, ASAPSTM256
Alarm source OC-n and STM-nfacilities
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-392: “Clear Server Signal Failure on Line” (p. 3-660).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Server Signal Failure on STS Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Server Signal Failure on STS Path

A failure occurred on a server layer of the STS-n path.
Possible failure conditions, that lead to a Server Signal Failure on STS Path
alarm, include:
• Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Optical Section (URU-O)
• Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Section (URU-S)
• Loss of Signal (LOS)
• Loss of Frame (LOF)
• Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section (TIM-S)
• Alarm Indication Signal on OC-n Line (AIS-L)
• Alarm Indication Signal STS Path (AIS-P)
• Loss of Pointer STS Path (LOP-P)

Server Signal Failure on STS Path alarm:

Mnemonic
Effect on service Not service-affecting (SA)
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Server Signal Failure on STS Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-401: “Clear Server Signal Failure on STS Path” (p. 3-670).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Server Signal Failure on TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Server Signal Failure on TCM Layer

The Server Signal Failure on TCM Layer always results from some other
alarm(s) in the network. It refers to lower transport server layers in the upstream
direction.

Server Signal Failure on TCM Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / SSF-T - Switching applications

Mnemonic SSFTCM - Photonic applications
Photonic applications
ASAP type ASAPTCM
Alarm source ODUn facilities
Photonic applications: 11QPA4
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-402: “Clear Server Signal Failure on TCM Layer” (p. 3-671).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Service FDB Full
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Service FDB Full

Meaning of alarm
The he Service FDB Full alarm is raised when the utilization of the service FDB table
reaches 75% of the maximum number of FDB entries specified in FDB table size
parameter.

Service FDB Full alarm:
Alarm identifier / SVC-FDB-FULL

Mnemonic
ASAP type SVC
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-403: “Clear Service FDB Full ” (p. 3-672).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Service MFIB Full
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Service MFIB Full

Meaning of alarm
The Service MFIB Full alarm is raised when the utilization of the MFIB table reaches
95% of maximum number of MFIB entries specified in the MFIB table size parameter.

Service MFIB Full alarm:
Alarm identifier / SVC-MFIB-FULL

Mnemonic
ASAP type SVC
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-404: “Clear Service MFIB Full ” (p. 3-673).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details SFP Equipment Fail
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFP Equipment Fail

Meaning of alarm

SFP Equipment Fail alarm:
Alarm identifier / RmdIfMauEQF

Mnemonic
ASAP type RMD
setting) NSA –
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-405: “Clear SFP Equipment Fail ” (p. 3-674).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details SFP Loss Of Signal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFP Loss Of Signal

Meaning of alarm

SFP Loss Of Signal alarm:
Alarm identifier / RmdIfMauLOS

Mnemonic
ASAP type RMD
setting) NSA –
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-406: “Clear SFP Loss Of Signal” (p. 3-675).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Shelf data inconsistent
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Shelf data inconsistent

Meaning of alarm
Shelf data inconsistent alarm will be reported on a particular shelf when one or more
packs in that shelf are half seated. Also reported when bend pins are present in the shelf
Equipment Controller backplane. A warm or cold reboot of the Equipment Controller at
this point may result in NE connectivity loss.

Shelf data inconsistent alarm:
Alarm identifier / SHELFINCON

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source Equipment Controller or SHELF
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-407: “Clear Shelf data inconsistent” (p. 3-676).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Shelf LAN (ES1 & ES2) cables are incorrectly connected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Shelf LAN (ES1 & ES2) cables are incorrectly connected

Meaning of alarm
The EC-LAN interfaces (ES1, ES2) in the left LAN ring or the external LAN interfaces
(ES1, ES2) of the right LAN ring are not correctly connected to the same neighbor
interconnection of shelves in a multi-shelf configuration.
interconnected by LAN cables as follow:
• The external LAN interfaces (ES2) of the left matrix card from the main shelf must be
connected to the external LAN interfaces (ES1) of the left matrix card of the next
immediate neighbor extensive shelves.
• The external LAN interfaces (ES2) of the right matrix card from the main shelf must
be connected to the external LAN interfaces (ES1) of the right matrix card of the next
immediate neighbor extensive shelves.
• The ES1 interfaces of the main shelf are always connected to the ES2 interfaces of its
neighbor extensive shelf.
• These connections must be done from one shelf to the next until a ring closure is
achieved.

theShelf LAN (ES1 & ES2) cables are incorrectly connected alarm:
Alarm identifier / ESCABLEMISMATCH

Mnemonic
ASAP type COM
Alarm source ESCABLEMISMATCH: SYSTEM
ESCABLEMISMATCHx (x=ShelfID):
• ES1L, ES2L: Left LAN ring (EC slots 1 / 2)
• ES1R, ES2RL Right LAN ring (EC slots 18 / 12)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Shelf LAN (ES1 & ES2) cables are incorrectly connected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-408: “Clear Shelf LAN (ES1 & ES2) Cables Are Incorrectly
Connected” (p. 3-677).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Shelf mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Shelf mismatch
Meaning of alarm
The detected DCM or SFD44 shelf serial number does not match the provisioned serial
number.

Shelf mismatch alarm:

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source SHELF
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-409: “Clear Shelf mismatch” (p. 3-678).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Shelf Transmission Fail
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Shelf Transmission Fail

The SHTRANSMFAIL alarm is raised due to a complete outage of the shelf transmission
functionality because both matrix cards have failed. The signal degrade ODU alarm can
be caused by post FEC errors exceeding the established threshold.

Shelf Transmission Fail alarm:
Alarm identifier / SHTRANSMFAIL

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source Shelf
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-410: “Clear Shelf Transmission Fail” (p. 3-680).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Shelf unavailable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Shelf unavailable
The system indicates a temporary loss of communication with the shelf. The shelf
equipment cannot be provisioned or supervised at the moment.

Shelf unavailable alarm:
Alarm identifier / SHELFUNAVAIL

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source Shelf
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-411: “Clear Shelf unavailable” (p. 3-681).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Signal Degrade
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Signal Degrade
Meaning of alarm
The OT port has detected a Signal Degrade Bit Error Rate (SDBER) on the OC-n/STM-n
port of the applicable card. This defect indicates that local OC-n/STM-n port has detected
a BER that exceeds selected threshold (default 10-6).

Signal Degrade alarm:
Alarm identifier / SDBER

Mnemonic
ASAP type OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4, OC48/STM16, OC192/STM64
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “SDBER” (p. B-45).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-412: “Clear Signal Degrade alarm” (p. 3-682).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Signal Degrade - ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Signal Degrade - ODU

Meaning of alarm
The Signal Degrade - ODU alarm may be caused by the following reasons:

Signal Degrade - ODU alarm:
Alarm identifier / DEG

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU1, ODU2, ODU3, ODU4
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “DEG” (p. B-9).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-413: “Clear Signal Degrade - ODU alarm” (p. 3-683).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Signal Degrade - OTU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Signal Degrade - OTU

Meaning of alarm
The DEGOTU condition is raised when a high B1 error rate is detected on the OTU2/3/4
input line or client port.

Signal Degrade - OTU alarm:
Alarm identifier / DEGOTU

Mnemonic
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “DEGOTU” (p. B-9).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-414: “Clear Signal Degrade - OTU ” (p. 3-684).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio

The bit error ratio in the receive signal is greater than or equal to the provisioned signal
degrade threshold (SDTH).
The Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio alarm is supported for the following
different facilities:
• OC-n (OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192)
• STM-n (STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64)
• STS-n (STS-1, STS-3c, STS-12c, STS-48c)
• VC-n (VC-4, VC-4-4c, VC-4-16c)

Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio alarm for OC-n facilities:

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPOC3. ASAPOC12, ASAPOC48, ASAPOC192
setting) SA Minor (MN)
Alarm source OC-n (OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192)

Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio alarm for STM-n facilities:

Mnemonic
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

NSA Minor (MN)
Alarm source STM-n (STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64)

Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio alarm for STS-n facilities:

Mnemonic

Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio alarm for VC-n facilities:

Mnemonic
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-415: “Clear Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio” (p. 3-685).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path

The incoming bit error ratio on the ODUk path layer equals or exceeds the provisioned
threshold.
Bit error monitoring on the ODUk path layer operates in burst mode, that is you can
errored blocks to declare a second as good or bad, respectively. The burst interval defines
the number of bad seconds that are needed to raise a
Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path alarm.
For the ODUk path layer, dedicated configuration parameters are available for the burst
threshold and burst interval.

Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path alarm:
Alarm identifier / SDBER-P

Mnemonic
• ASAPODU0
• ASAPODU1
• ASAPODU2
• ASAPODU2E
• ASAPODU3
• ASAPODU3E2
• ASAPODU4
Effect on service Always not service-affecting (NSA).
Alarm source See “SDBER-P” (p. B-45).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-416: “Clear Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path” (p. 3-690).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Section

The incoming bit error ratio on the OTUk section layer equals or exceeds the provisioned
threshold.
Bit error monitoring on the OTUk section layer operates in burst mode, that is you can
errored blocks to declare a second as good or bad, repectively. The burst interval defines
the number of bad seconds that are needed to raise a
Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Section alarm.
For the OTUk section layer, dedicated configuration parameters are available for the burst
threshold and burst interval.

Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / SDBER-S

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPOTU
Alarm source OTUk section (OTU2, OTU2E, OTU3, OTU3E2, OTU4)
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-417: “Clear Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Section” (p. 3-693).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - TCM Layer

The incoming bit error ratio in the ODUk path on a TCM layer equals or exceeds the
provisioned threshold.
Bit error monitoring in the ODUk path on a TCM layer operates in burst mode, that is
you can configure a burst threshold and a burst interval. The burst threshold defines the
number of errored blocks to declare a second as good or bad, repectively. The burst
interval defines the number of bad seconds that are needed to raise a
Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - TCM Layer alarm.
For the ODUk path on a TCM layer, dedicated configuration parameters are available for
the burst threshold and burst interval.

Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - TCM Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / SDBER-T

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPTCM
ODU3, ODU3E2, ODU4)
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-418: “Clear Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - TCM Layer” (p. 3-696).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Signal Degrade - TCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Signal Degrade - TCM

Meaning of alarm
The Signal Degrade - TCM alarm may be caused by the following reasons:
• Damaged or dirty fiber connected to the local receiver at the OTU layer
• The received power at the OCH layer may not be within the acceptable range on local
port input

Signal Degrade - TCM alarm:
Alarm identifier / DEGTCM

Mnemonic
setting) NSA –
Alarm source 11QPA4
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-418: “Clear Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - TCM Layer”
(p. 3-696).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Slipping Timing Signal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Slipping Timing Signal

The timing reference frequency has moved off the required accuracy limits.

Slipping Timing Signal alarm:
Alarm identifier / SLTMSIG

Mnemonic
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-419: “Clear Slipping Timing Signal” (p. 3-699).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Software Download
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software Download
The respective system component is being downloaded with a software.
Note: Please note that no Software Download condition will be reported when a
second FLC is plugged in and booting. However, the status of the just plugged-in FLC
indicates that a software download is in progress, that is the primary/secondary state
of the FLC is “OOS-AU,SDWL”.

Software Download condition:
Alarm identifier / SWDWN

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source PSF, FAN, BT3T8, BTC3T8, BT36, HPCFAP, SFP, XFP, FLC,
MTX, I/O cards, port
Notes:
Related information
Local indications
LED 1 on the faceplate of the respective circuit pack is blinking green.
Trouble clearing
The Software Download condition is to be understood as information rather than as an
alarm and will be cleared autonomously as soon as the software download is completed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Software Mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software Mismatch
The identified modules have an application software version mismatch

Software Mismatch alarm:
Alarm identifier / SWMISM

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source FLC
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-420: “Clear Software Mismatch” (p. 3-700).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Software Upgrade Failed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software Upgrade Failed

Meaning of alarm
The SWUPGFAIL alarm is applicable at the NE-level and/or the card-level. This alarm is
raised when the NE or card fails to upgrade to the designated load.

Software Upgrade Failed alarm:
Alarm identifier / SWUPGFAIL

Mnemonic
ASAP type COM
EQPT
Alarm source See “SWUPGFAIL” (p. B-49).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-421: “Clear Software Upgrade Failed ” (p. 3-701).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Software Version Mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software Version Mismatch

Meaning of alarm
The SFMISMATCH condition indicates a software version mismatch. This alarm may be
raised under the following conditions:
• The software (application and boot only, not FPGA) on the alarmed card does not
match the software on the nearest EC card because the card failed to update
successfully
• When all cards are not running the same software release

Software Version Mismatch alarm:
Alarm identifier / SFMISMATCH

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm severity (default SA Critical (CR), (except EC)
setting) NSA Major (MJ), (EC only)
Alarm source See “SFMISMATCH” (p. B-46).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-422: “Clear Software version mismatch ” (p. 3-707).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details SSL CA Root Certificate Installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SSL CA Root Certificate Installation

An SSL CA root certificate for the CP Manager has been installed.

SSL CA Root Certificate Installation alarm:
Alarm identifier / SSLMGRCACERT

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPSECU
Alarm source System
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The SSL CA Root Certificate Installation condition is to be understood as
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Standby Database Corruption
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Standby Database Corruption

The contents of the mass storage device on the inactive FLC is corrupted and cannot be
repaired. The inactive FLC is unusable.

Standby Database Corruption alarm:
Alarm identifier / STBYDBC

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source Inactive FLC
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-423: “Clear Standby Database Corruption” (p. 3-708).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details STS Path Idle
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
STS Path Idle

The STS path is idle (unequipped). The STS-n in the OC-N receive signal is not in use.
Possibly, the cross-connections are not consistently defined at both ends of the STS-n
path.

STS Path Idle alarm:
Alarm identifier / UNEQ-P

Mnemonic
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-424: “Clear STS Path Idle” (p. 3-709).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Subtended shelf cannot be assigned a shelf ID
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Subtended shelf cannot be assigned a shelf ID

Meaning of alarm
The maximum supported number of shelves would be exceeded by a newly discovered
shelf. The maximum for universal shelves is 8, the maximum for SFD44 shelves is 8, and
the maximum for DCM shelves is 16. The maximum numbers include all provisioned
shelves, whether physically connected or not.
The network element supports up to seven subtended universal shelves. These are given
subtended shelf IDs two through eight, and the rotary dial on the backplane must be set
equal to the shelf ID.
If a subtended shelf is discovered with an invalid or non-unique rotary dial setting, then
no shelf ID can be assigned to that shelf and this alarm is raised.

Subtended shelf cannot be assigned a shelf ID alarm:
Alarm identifier / PRCDRERR

Mnemonic
ASAP type COM
Alarm source SHELF
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Subtended shelf cannot be assigned a shelf ID
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-425: “Clear Subtended shelf cannot be assigned a shelf ID ”
(p. 3-710).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details SUPVY Amplifier Input LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SUPVY Amplifier Input LOS

Meaning of alarm
The SUPVY Amplifier Input LOS condition occurs when the OSC port threshold value
on the supervisory channel is less than or equal to the range of 10 dBm to -10 dBm.

SUPVY Amplifier Input LOS alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOS-O-AMP

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source AM2625A-shelf-slot-LINEOUT
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-426: “Clear SUPVY Amplifier Input LOS” (p. 3-711).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details SUPVY Signal Degrade
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SUPVY Signal Degrade

Meaning of alarm
The OSC SFP receive port on one of the amplifier cards has detected a signal degrade.
The SDEG-O alarm is raised if the SONET framer detects errors in the as per the SONET
specification

SUPVY Signal Degrade alarm:
Alarm identifier / SDEG-O

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source See “SDEG-O” (p. B-45).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-427: “Clear SUPVY Signal Degrade ” (p. 3-713).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Switching Matrix Module Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Switching Matrix Module Failure

Meaning of alarm
This condition is applicable to CWR8 cards when the channels going through the card are
not being routed correctly. In addition, this condition may apply to line cards in the case
where there is optical splitter protection. Communications is present between the working
and protection cards, however, requests (such as a request to turn the laser off) is not
implemented. In this case this condition is raised against the card that is not complying
with the request.

Switching Matrix Module Failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / SWMTXMOD

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “SWMTXMOD” (p. B-48).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-428: “Clear Switching matrix module failure alarm” (p. 3-715).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Synchronization Equipment (CRU) failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Synchronization Equipment (CRU) failure

Failure of the Clock Reference Unit (CRU) on one or both matrix boards. The alarm is
declared against the matrix board which hosts the failed CRU.

Synchronization Equipment (CRU) failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / SYNCEQPT

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Effect on service Not service-affecting (NSA) if one CRU has failed.
Service-affecting (SA) if both CRUs have failed.
Alarm source Clock Recovery Unit (CRU) on a matrix board.
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-429: “Clear Synchronization Equipment (CRU) failure” (p. 3-717).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Synchronization Equipment Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Synchronization Equipment Failure

Meaning of alarm
If an equipment failure of a CRU is detected, then the SYNCEQPT Condition Type shall
be declared against the board which hosts this CRU.

Synchronization Equipment Failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / SYNCEQPT

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “SYNCEQPT” (p. B-49).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-430: “Clear Synchronization Equipment failure ” (p. 3-718).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details System clock forced to internal clock
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
System clock forced to internal clock

Meaning of alarm
The OT port detects the MANSWTOINT condition when a manual switch to Internal
Timing (forced Free-Running mode) has occurred.

System clock forced to internal clock alarm:
Alarm identifier / MANSWTOINT

Mnemonic
ASAP type SYNC
Alarm source SYNC
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-431: “Clear System clock forced to internal clock” (p. 3-719).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details System clock in free running mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
System clock in free running mode

Meaning of alarm
The OT port has detects the FRNGSYNC condition when the system clock in free
running mode.

System clock in free running mode alarm:
Alarm identifier / FRNGSYNC

Mnemonic
ASAP type SYNC
Alarm source SYNC
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-432: “Clear System clock in free running mode” (p. 3-720).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details System clock in holdover mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
System clock in holdover mode

Meaning of alarm
The OT port detects the HLDOVRSYNC condition when none of the provisioned timing
references can be reached or when no reference has sufficient quality to be used the clock
recovery circuit will enter System clock in holdover mode.

System clock in holdover mode alarm:
Alarm identifier / HLDOVRSYNC

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source SYNC
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-433: “Clear System clock in holdover mode ” (p. 3-721).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details System Initialization New Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
System Initialization New Failure

Initialization failure of FLC with new SW image.

System Initialization New Failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / INITNF

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source System
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-434: “Clear System Initialization New Failure” (p. 3-722).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY – Average Bidirectional Frame Delay
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY – Average Bidirectional Frame Delay

Meaning of alarm
The T-ABFD-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of Delay
Measurement Average Bidirectional Frame Delay counter is exceeded for the proactive
two-way DM test during a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY – Average Bidirectional Frame Delay alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ABFD-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Applicability Data applications
ASAP type Data applications: ETH
Alarm category Quality of Service (QoS)
setting) NSA Warning (WR)
Alarm source See “T-ABFD-1-DAY” (p. B-51).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The alarm is cleared automatically at the end of the first complete interval during which
no threshold crossing occurred.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY – Average Far-End Frame Delay Variation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY – Average Far-End Frame Delay Variation

Meaning of alarm
The T-AFFDV-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of Delay
Measurement Average Far-end Frame Delay Variation counter is exceeded for the
proactive two-way DM test in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY – Average Far-End Frame Delay Variation alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-AFFDV-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-AFFDV-1-DAY” (p. B-52).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY – Average Near-End Frame Delay Variation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY – Average Near-End Frame Delay Variation

Meaning of alarm
The T-ANFDV-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of Delay
Measurement Average Near-end Frame Delay Variation counter is exceeded for the

TCA 1 DAY – Average Near-End Frame Delay Variation alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ANFDV-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-ANFDV-1-DAY” (p. B-52).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY – Average Far-End Frame Loss Ratio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY – Average Far-End Frame Loss Ratio

Meaning of alarm
T-AFFLR-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of Synthetic Loss
Measurement (SLM) Average Far-end Frame Loss Ratio counter is exceeded for the
proactive two-way SLM test in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY – Average Far-End Frame Loss Ratio alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-AFFLR-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-AFFLR-1-DAY” (p. B-52).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY – Average Near-End Frame Loss Ratio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY – Average Near-End Frame Loss Ratio

Meaning of alarm
The T-ANFLR-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of Synthetic
Loss Measurement (SLM) Average Near-end Frame Loss Ratio counter is exceeded for
the proactive two-way SLM test in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY – Average Near-End Frame Loss Ratio alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ANFLR-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-ANFLR-1-DAY” (p. B-52).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, Multiplex Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, Multiplex Section

Meaning of alarm
The T-BBE-MS-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold Background
Block Error, Multiplex Section counter is exceeded in a 24-hour period.
This alarm is relevant for NEs operating in ETSI mode.

TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, Multiplex Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-BBE-MS-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type Photonic applications: STM1, STM4, STM16, STM64
Alarm source See “T-BBE-MS-1-DAY” (p. B-52).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The alarm is cleared automatically at the end of the same measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, ODU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, ODU Layer

The threshold of the background block errors counter is exceeded for the ODUk path
layer.
Whether the alarm is related to the near end or far end, is indicated in the alarm message
by means of the Location parameter.
Related information
See the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS User Provisioning Guide for further information about
the performance monitoring (PM) functions of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems.

TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, ODU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-BBE-ODU-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Applicability Switching applications and Photonic applications
ASAP type Photonic applications: ODU
Switching applications - Depending on the ODU layer:
• ASAPODU0
• ASAPODU1
• ASAPODU2
• ASAPODU2E
• ASAPODU3
• ASAPODU3E2
• ASAPODU3
• ASAPODU4
Effect on service; identical Not service-affecting (NSA)
for both directions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, ODU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

setting); identical for both
directions NSA Warning (WR)
Alarm source See “T-BBE-ODU-1-DAY” (p. B-53).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, OTU Layer

The threshold of the background block errors counter is exceeded for the OTUk section
layer.
Related information

TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, OTU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-BBE-OTU-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPOTU
Alarm source See “T-BBE-OTU-1-DAY” (p. B-53).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, Regenerator Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, Regenerator Section

The threshold of the background block errors counter is exceeded for the STM
regenerator section. The measurement point is an STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 or STM-64
RS-TTP.
Related information

TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, Regenerator Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-BBE-RS-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPSTMn
Alarm source STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64, or STM-256 Regenerator
Section Trail Termination Point (RS-TTP)
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, Regenerator Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, Regenerator Section

Meaning of alarm
The T-BBE-RST-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
background block errors counter is exceeded for the STM regenerator section in a
24-hour period. The measurement point is an STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 or STM-64
RS-TTP.

TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, Regenerator Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-BBE-RST-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type Photonic applications: TDM
Alarm source See “T-BBE-RST-1-DAY” (p. B-54).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds-Regenerator Section Threshold
Network element alarms (Transmit Direction)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds-Regenerator Section Threshold

(Transmit Direction)
Meaning of alarm
The T-ES-RST-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the Errored
Seconds-Regenerator Section counter (in the transmit direction) is exceeded in a 24-hour
period.

Errored Seconds-Regenerator Section Threshold alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ES-RST-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-ES-RST-1-DAY” (p. B-58).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds Threshold (Transmit Direction)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds Threshold (Transmit Direction)

Meaning of alarm
The T-ESST-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the Errored
Seconds counter (in the transmit direction) is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds Threshold alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ESST-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-ESST-1-DAY” (p. B-59).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, TCM Layer

The threshold of the background block errors counter is exceeded for the ODUk TCM
layer.
Related information

TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, TCM Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-BBE-TCM-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type Switching applications:ASAPTCM
Photonic applications: ODUTCMj
Alarm source See “T-BBE-TCM-1-DAY” (p. B-54).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Background Block Errors, TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds

Meaning of alarm
The T-BIAES-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-BIAES-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-BIAES-1-DAY” (p. B-55).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds,
Network element alarms TCM Facility
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds,

TCM Facility
Meaning of alarm
The T-BIAES-TCM-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds for the TCM facility is exceeded in a
24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds, TCM
Facility alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-BIAES-TCM-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-BIAES-TCM-1-DAY” (p. B-55).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds Threshold
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds Threshold

Meaning of alarm
The T-ES-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the error second
counter for the OSC is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds Threshold alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ES-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-ES-1-DAY ” (p. B-56).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Code Violation Threshold
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Code Violation Threshold

Meaning of alarm
The T-CV-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the code
violation counter for the OSC is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY Code Violation Threshold alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-CV-1–DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-CV-1-DAY” (p. B-55).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Code Violation Threshold (Receive Direction)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Code Violation Threshold (Receive Direction)

Meaning of alarm
The T-CVS-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the code
violation counter (in the receive direction) is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

Alarm identifier / T-CVS-1–DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-CVS-1-DAY” (p. B-55).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Code Violation Threshold (Receive Direction)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Code Violation Threshold (Receive Direction)

Meaning of alarm
The T-CVS-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the code
violation counter (in the receive direction) is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

Alarm identifier / T-CVS-1–DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-CVS-1-DAY” (p. B-55).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Code Violation-PCS layer (Receive Direction)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Code Violation-PCS layer (Receive Direction)

Meaning of alarm
The T-CV-PCS-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the code
violation-PCS layer counter (in the receive direction) in a 24-hour period.

TCA 15 MIN Code Violation-PCS layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-CV-PCS-1–DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-CV-PCS-1-DAY” (p. B-55).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Code Violation-PCS layer (Transmit Direction)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Code Violation-PCS layer (Transmit Direction)

Meaning of alarm
The T-CV-PCST-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the code
violation-PCS layer counter (in the transmit direction) in a 24-hour period.

Alarm identifier / T-CV-PCST-1–DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-CV-PCST-1-DAY” (p. B-55).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds-PCS layer Threshold (Receive
Network element alarms Direction)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds-PCS layer Threshold (Receive

Direction)
Meaning of alarm
The T-ES-PCS-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the Errored
Seconds-PCS layer counter (in the receive direction) is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds-PCS layer Threshold alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ES-PCS-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-ES-PCS-1-DAY” (p. B-57).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds-PCS layer Threshold (Transmit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds-PCS layer Threshold (Transmit

Direction)
Meaning of alarm
The T-ES-PCST-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Errored Seconds-PCS layer counter (in the transmit direction) is exceeded in a 24-hour
period.

TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds-PCS layer Threshold alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ES-PCST-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-ES-PCST-1-DAY ” (p. B-57).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds, Regenerator Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds, Regenerator Section

The threshold of the errored seconds counter is exceeded for the STM regenerator section.
The measurement point is an STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 or STM-64 RS-TTP.
Related information

TCA 1 DAY Errored Seconds, Regenerator Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ES-RS-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type Switching applications: ASAPSTMn
Photonic applications: PMD & PCS, STMn, TDM
Alarm source See “T-ES-RS-1-DAY” (p. B-58).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Error Seconds, ODU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Error Seconds, ODU Layer

The threshold of the errored seconds counter is exceeded for the ODUk path layer.
Related information

TCA 1 DAY Error Seconds, ODU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ES-ODU-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type Switching applications: ASAPODUn
Photonic applications: ODU
Alarm source See “T-ES-ODU-1-DAY” (p. B-56).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Error Seconds, ODU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Error Seconds, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Error Seconds, OTU Layer

The threshold of the errored seconds counter is exceeded for the OTUk section layer.
Related information

TCA 1 DAY Error Seconds, OTU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ES-OTU-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type Switching applications: ASAPOTU
Photonic applications: OTU
Alarm source See “T-ES-OTU-1-DAY” (p. B-57).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Error Seconds, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Error Seconds, TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Error Seconds, TCM Layer

The threshold of the errored seconds counter is exceeded for the ODUk TCM layer.
Related information
See the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSSUser Provisioning Guide for further information about

TCA 1 DAY Error Seconds, TCM Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ES-TCM-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type Switching applications: ASAPTCM
Alarm source See “T-ES-TCM-1-DAY” (p. B-58).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Error Seconds, TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA - Failed to Decrypt
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA - Failed to Decrypt

Meaning of alarm
The FTD-ENCRYPT Threshold Crossing detection indicates the count of blocks that
failed to decrypt for the 15 minute and 1 day registers for Rx Decrypt Failed Count
Parameter.

Failed-to-Decrypt alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FTD-ENCRYPT-15-MIN

Mnemonic T-FTD-ENCRYPT-1DAY
ASAP type ENCRYPT
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Ethernet Packet Error Ratio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Ethernet Packet Error Ratio

Meaning of alarm
The T-ETHPKTER-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Ethernet Packet Error Ratio calculation is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY Ethernet Packet Error Ratio alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ETHPKTER-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type Photonic applications: 1GbE, 10GbE, 40GbE
Alarm source See “T-ETHPKTER-1-DAY ” (p. B-59).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Ethernet Packet Error Ratio Threshold (Transmit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Ethernet Packet Error Ratio Threshold (Transmit

Direction)
Meaning of alarm
The T-ETHPKTERT-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Ethernet Packet Error Ratio calculation (in the transmit direction) is exceeded in a
24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY Ethernet Packet Error Ratio Threshold alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ETHPKTERT-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-ETHPKTER-15-MIN, T-ETHPKTER-1-DAY,
T-ETHPKTERT-15-MIN” (p. B-59).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Far End Background Block Error, Multiplex
Network element alarms Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Far End Background Block Error, Multiplex Section

Meaning of alarm
The T-FEBBE-MS-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the Far
End Background Block Error, Multiplex Section counter is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1-Day Far End Background Block Error, Multiplex Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FEBBE-MS-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FEBBE-MS-1-DAY” (p. B-59).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Far End Background Block Error - ODUk
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Far End Background Block Error - ODUk

Meaning of alarm
The T-FEBBE-ODU-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Far End Background Block Error-ODUk counter is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1-Day Far End Background Block Error - ODUk alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FEBBE-ODU-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type Photonic applications: ODU1, ODU2, ODU3
Alarm source See “T-FEBBE-ODU-1-DAY” (p. B-59).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Far End Background Block Error - OTUk
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Far End Background Block Error - OTUk

Meaning of alarm
The T-FEBBE-OTU-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Far End Background Block Error-OTUk counter is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1-Day Far End Background Block Error - OTUk alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FEBBE-OTU-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type Photonic applications: OTU
Alarm source See “T-FEBBE-OTU-1-DAY” (p. B-60).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Far End Background Block Error - TCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Far End Background Block Error - TCM

Meaning of alarm
The T-FEBBE-TCM-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Far End Background Block Error-TCM counter is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1-Day Far End Background Block Error - TCM alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FEBBE-TCM-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type Photonic applications: ODUTCM
Alarm source See “T-FEBBE-TCM-1-DAY ” (p. B-60).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Far End Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Far End Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section

Meaning of alarm
The T-FEES-MS-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the Far
End Errored Seconds – Multiplex Section counter is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY Far End Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FEES-MS-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FEES-MS-1-DAY” (p. B-61).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Far End Errored Seconds, ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Far End Errored Seconds, ODU

Meaning of alarm
The T-FEES-ODU-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the Far
End Errored Seconds – ODU counter is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY Far End Errored Seconds, ODU alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FEES-ODU-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FEES-ODU-1-DAY” (p. B-61).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Far End Errored Seconds, OTU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Far End Errored Seconds, OTU

Meaning of alarm
The T-FEES-OTU-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the Far
End Errored Seconds – OTU counter is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY Far End Errored Seconds, OTU alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FEES-OTU-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FEES-OTU-1-DAY” (p. B-61).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Far End Errored Seconds, TCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Far End Errored Seconds, TCM

Meaning of alarm
The T-FEES-TCM-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the Far
End Errored Seconds – TCM counter is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY Far End Errored Seconds, TCM alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FEES-TCM-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FEES-TCM-1-DAY” (p. B-61).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Far End Severely Errored Seconds, Multiplex
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Far End Severely Errored Seconds, Multiplex

Section
Meaning of alarm
The T-FESES-MS-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the Far
End Severely Errored Seconds – Multiplex Section counter is exceeded in a 24-hour
period.

TCA 1 DAY Far End Severely Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section
alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FESES-MS-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FESES-MS-1-DAY” (p. B-61).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Far End Severely Errored Seconds, ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Far End Severely Errored Seconds, ODU

Meaning of alarm
The T-FESES-ODU-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Far End Severely Errored Seconds – ODU counter is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY Far End Severely Errored Seconds, ODU alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FESES-ODU-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FESES-ODU-1-DAY” (p. B-62).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Far End Severely Errored Seconds, OTU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Far End Severely Errored Seconds, OTU

Meaning of alarm
The T-FESES-OTU-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Far End Severely Errored Seconds – OTU counter is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY Far End Severely Errored Seconds, OTU alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FESES-OTU-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FESES-OTU-1-DAY” (p. B-62).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Far End Severely Errored Seconds, TCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Far End Severely Errored Seconds, TCM

Meaning of alarm
The T-FESES-TCM-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Far End Severely Errored Seconds – TCM counter is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY Far End Severely Errored Seconds, TCM alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FESES-TCM-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FESES-TCM-1-DAY” (p. B-62).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Far End Unavailable Seconds, Multiplex Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Far End Unavailable Seconds, Multiplex Section

Meaning of alarm
The T-FEUAS-MS-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the Far
End Unavailable Seconds – Multiplex Section counter is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY Far End Unavailable Seconds, Multiplex Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FEUAS-MS-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FEUAS-MS-1-DAY” (p. B-62).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Far End Unavailable Seconds, ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Far End Unavailable Seconds, ODU

Meaning of alarm
The T-FEUAS-ODU-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Far End Unavailable Seconds – ODU counter is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY Far End Unavailable Seconds, ODU alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FEUAS-ODU-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FEUAS-ODU-1-DAY” (p. B-63).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Far End Unavailable Seconds, OTU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Far End Unavailable Seconds, OTU

Meaning of alarm
The T-FEUAS-OTU-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Far End Unavailable Seconds – OTU counter is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY Far End Unavailable Seconds, OTU alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FEUAS-OTU-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FEUAS-OTU-1-DAY” (p. B-63).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Far End Unavailable Seconds, TCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Far End Unavailable Seconds, TCM

Meaning of alarm
The T-FEUAS-TCM-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Far End Unavailable Seconds – TCM counter is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY Far End Unavailable Seconds, TCM alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FEUAS-TCM-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FEUAS-TCM-1-DAY” (p. B-63).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY FEC Errors Corrected, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY FEC Errors Corrected, OTU Layer

The threshold of the FEC errors corrected counter is exceeded for the OTUk section
layer.
Related information

TCA 1 DAY FEC Errors Corrected, OTU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FECC-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FECC-1-DAY” (p. B-60).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY FEC Errors Corrected, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Forward Error Correction, Uncorrectable Block
Network element alarms Counts
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Forward Error Correction, Uncorrectable Block

Counts
Meaning of alarm
The T-FECUBC-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Forward Error Correction Uncorrectable Block counter is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY Forward Error Correction, Uncorrectable Block Counts
alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FECUBC-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Applicability l
ASAP type Photonic applications: OTU1, OTU2, OTU3, OTU4
Alarm source See “T-FECUBC-1-DAY” (p. B-60).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds

Meaning of alarm
The T-IAES-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Incoming Alignment Error Second is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-IAES-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-IAES-15-MIN” (p. B-63).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The alarm is cleared if the clear threshold value (RTR) is not crossed during a subsequent
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds - TCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds - TCM

Meaning of alarm
The T-IAES-TCM-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds - TCM counter is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds - TCM alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-IAES-TCM-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-IAES-TCM-15-MIN” (p. B-64).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Bidirectional Frame Delay
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Bidirectional Frame Delay

Meaning of alarm
The T-XBFD-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of Delay
Measurement Maximum Bidirectional Frame Delay counter is exceeded for the proactive
two-way DM test in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Bidirectional Frame Delay alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-XBFD-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-XBFD-1-DAY ” (p. B-75).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Far-End Frame Delay Variation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Far-End Frame Delay Variation

Meaning of alarm
The T-XFFDV-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of Delay
Measurement Maximum Far-end Frame Delay Variation counter is exceeded for the

TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Far-End Frame Delay Variation alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-XFFDV-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-XFFDV-1-DAY ” (p. B-75).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Far-End Frame Loss Ratio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Far-End Frame Loss Ratio

Meaning of alarm
T-XFFLR-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of Synthetic Loss
Measurement (SLM) Maximum Far-end Frame Loss Ratio counter is exceeded for the
proactive two-way SLM test in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Far-End Frame Loss Ratio alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-XFFLR-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-XFFLR-1-DAY ” (p. B-75).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Near-End Frame Delay Variation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Near-End Frame Delay Variation

Meaning of alarm
The T-XNFDV-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of Delay
Measurement Maximum Near-end Frame Delay Variation counter is exceeded for the

TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Near-End Frame Delay Variation alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-XNFDV-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-XNFDV-1-DAY” (p. B-75).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Near-End Frame Loss Ratio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Near-End Frame Loss Ratio

Meaning of alarm
The T-XNFLR-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of Synthetic
Loss Measurement (SLM) Maximum Near-end Frame Loss Ratio counter is exceeded for
the proactive two-way SLM test in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY – Maximum Near-End Frame Loss Ratio alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-XNFLR-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-XNFLR-1-DAY ” (p. B-76).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY - Optical Power Received - High
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY - Optical Power Received - High

It indicates that an OPR-H tidemark threshold crossing was detected on the OCH
near-end section layer in the receive direction.
Related information

TCA 1 DAY - Optical Power Received - High alarm:
Alarm identifier / Switching applications: T-OPR-H-1-DAY

Mnemonic Photonic applications: T-OPRH-1-DAY
ASAP type Switching applications: ASAPOCH
Photonic applications: PMD & PCS
Alarm source See “T-OPRH-15-MIN” (p. B-65).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY - Optical Power Received - Low
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY - Optical Power Received - Low

It indicates that an OPR-L tidemark threshold crossing was detected on the OCH near-end
section layer in the receive direction.
Related information

TCA 1 DAY - Optical Power Received - Low alarm:
Alarm identifier / Switching applications: T-OPR-L-1-DAY

Mnemonic Photonic applications: T-OPRL-1-DAY
Alarm source See “T-OPRL-1-DAY” (p. B-66).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY - Optical Power Transmitted - High
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY - Optical Power Transmitted - High

It indicates that an OPT-H tidemark threshold crossing was detected on the OCH near-end
section layer in the transmit direction.
Related information

TCA 1 DAY - Optical Power Transmitted - High alarm:
Alarm identifier / Switching applications: T-OPT-H-1-DAY

Mnemonic Photonic applications: T-OPRT-1-DAY
Alarm source See “T-OPTH-1-DAY” (p. B-66).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY - Optical Power Transmitted - Low
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY - Optical Power Transmitted - Low

It indicates that an OPT-L tidemark threshold crossing was detected on the OCH near-end
Related information

TCA 1 DAY - Optical Power Transmitted - Low alarm:
Alarm identifier / Switching applications: T-OPT-L-1-DAY

Mnemonic Photonic applications: T-OPTL-1-DAY
Alarm source See “T-OPTL-1-DAY” (p. B-66).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Out of Frame Seconds, Regenerator Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Out of Frame Seconds, Regenerator Section

The threshold of the out of frame seconds counter is exceeded for the STM regenerator
section. The measurement point is an STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 or STM-64 RS-TTP.
Related information

TCA 1 DAY Out of Frame Seconds, Regenerator Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-OFS-RS-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPSTMn
Alarm source STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, or STM-64 Regenerator Section Trail
Termination Point (RS-TTP)
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average
Network element alarms Bidirectional Frame Delay
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average

Bidirectional Frame Delay
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-DMABFD-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of
Delay Measurement Average Bidirectional Frame Delay counter is exceeded for the
proactive two-way DM test in a 24-hour period. The measurement point is a proactive
two-way DM test session running over a MEP. This alarm is relevant for 11DPE12A pack
operating in ETSI mode.

TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Bidirectional
Frame Delay alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-DMABFD-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-DMABFD-1-DAY” (p. B-67).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement Average Far-end
Network element alarms Frame Delay
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement Average Far-end Frame

Delay
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-DMAFFD-1-DAY threshold of Delay Measurement Average Far-end
Frame Delay counter is exceeded for the proactive two-way DM test in a 24-hour period.
The measurement point is a proactive two-way DM test session running over a MEP.
This alarm is relevant for 11DPE12A pack operating in ETSI mode.

TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement Average Far-end Frame Delay
alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-DMAFFD-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-DMAFFD-1-DAY” (p. B-67).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Far-end
Network element alarms Frame Delay Variation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Far-end

Frame Delay Variation
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-DMAFFDV-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of
Delay Measurement Average Far-end Frame Delay Variation counter is exceeded for the
two-way DM test session running over a MEP.

TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Far-end Frame
Delay Variation alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-DMAFFDV-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-DMAFFDV-1-DAY” (p. B-67).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Near-end
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Near-end

Frame Delay
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-DMANFD-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of
Delay Measurement Average Near-end Frame Delay counter is exceeded for the proactive
two-way DM test in a 24-hour period. The measurement point is a proactive two-way DM
test session running over a MEP.

TCA 1 DAY MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Near-end Frame
Delay alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-DMANFD-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-DMANFD-1-DAY ” (p. B-67).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Near-end
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Near-end

Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-DMANFDV-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold
of Delay Measurement Average Near-end Frame Delay Variation counter is exceeded for
the proactive two-way DM test in a 24-hour period. The measurement point is a proactive

TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Near-end Frame
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-DMANFDV-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-DMANFDV-1-DAY ” (p. B-67).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum

Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-DMXBFD-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of
Delay Measurement Maximum Bidirectional Frame Delay counter is exceeded for the

TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Bidirectional
Frame Delay alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-DMXBFD-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-DMXBFD-1-DAY” (p. B-67).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement Maximum Far-end
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement Maximum Far-end Frame

Delay
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-DMXFFD-1-DAY threshold of Delay Measurement Maximum Near-end

TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement Maximum Far-end Frame Delay alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-DMXFFD-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-DMXFFD-1-DAY” (p. B-68).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network element alarms Far-end Frame Delay Variation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Far-end

Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-DMXFFDV-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of
Delay Measurement Maximum Far-end Frame Delay Variation counter is exceeded for
the proactive two-way DM test in a 24-hour period. The measurement point is a proactive

TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Far-end Frame
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-DMXFFDV-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-DMXFFDV-1-DAY” (p. B-68).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delay
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-DMXNFD-1-DAY threshold of Delay Measurement Maximum Near-end

alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-DMXNFD-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-DMXNFD-1-DAY” (p. B-68).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network element alarms Near-end Frame Delay Variation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Near-end

Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-DMXNFDV-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold
of Delay Measurement Maximum Near-end Frame Delay Variation counter is exceeded
for the proactive two-way DM test in a 24-hour period. The measurement point is a
proactive two-way DM test session running over a MEP.

TCA 1 DAY PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Near-end Frame
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-DMXNFDV-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-DMXNFDV-1-DAY” (p. B-68).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Average Far-end Frame
Network element alarms Loss Ratio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Average Far-end Frame

Loss Ratio
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-LMAFFLR-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of
Loss Measurement (LM) Average Far-end Frame Loss Ratio counter is exceeded for the
proactive two-way LM test in a 24-hour period. The measurement point is a proactive
two-way LM test session running over a MEP.

TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Average Far-end Frame Loss Ratio
alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-LMAFFLR-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-LMAFFLR-1-DAY” (p. B-68).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Average Near-end
Network element alarms Frame Loss Ratio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Average Near-end Frame

Loss Ratio
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-LMANFLR-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of
Loss Measurement (LM) Average Near-end Frame Loss Ratio counter is exceeded for the
proactive two-way LM test in a 24-hour period. The measurement point is a proactive

TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Average Near-end Frame Loss Ratio
alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-LMANFLR-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-LMANFLR-1-DAY” (p. B-68).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Far-end High Loss
Network element alarms Interval
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Far-end High Loss Interval

Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-LMFHLI-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of
Loss Measurement (LM) Far-end Frame High Loss Interval (HLI) counter is exceeded for
the proactive two-way LM test in a 24-hour period. The measurement point is a proactive

TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Far-end High Loss Interval alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-LMFHLI-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-LMFHLI-1-DAY” (p. B-69).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY MIN PMON Loss Measurement Maximum Far-end
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY MIN PMON Loss Measurement Maximum Far-end

Frame Loss Ratio
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-LMXFFLR-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of
Loss Measurement (LM) Maximum Far-end Frame Loss Ratio counter is exceeded for

TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Maximum Far-end Frame Loss Ratio
alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-LMXFFLR-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-LMXFFLR-1-DAY” (p. B-69).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY MIN PMON Loss Measurement Maximum Near-end
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY MIN PMON Loss Measurement Maximum Near-end

Frame Loss Ratio
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-LMXNFLR-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of
Loss Measurement (LM) Maximum Near-end Frame Loss Ratio counter is exceeded for

TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Maximum Near-end Frame Loss Ratio
alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-LMXNFLR-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-LMXNFLR-1-DAY” (p. B-69).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Near-end High Loss
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Near-end High Loss

Interval
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-LMNHLI-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of
Loss Measurement (LM) Near-end Frame High Loss Interval (HLI) counter is exceeded
for the proactive two-way LM test in a 24-hour period. The measurement point is a
proactive two-way LM test session running over a MEP.

TCA 1 DAY PMON Loss Measurement Near-end High Loss Interval alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-LMNHLI-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-LMNHLI-1-DAY” (p. B-69).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average
Network element alarms Far-end Frame Loss Ratio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average Far-end

Frame Loss Ratio
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-SLMAFFLR-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold
of Synthetic Loss Measurement (SLM) Average Far-end Frame Loss Ratio counter is
exceeded for the proactive two-way SLM test in a 24-hour period. The measurement
point is a proactive two-way SLM test session running over a MEP.

TCA 1 DAY PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average Far-end Frame
Loss Ratio alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-SLMAFFLR-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-SLMAFFLR-1-DAY” (p. B-69).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average
Network element alarms Near-end Frame Loss Ratio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average

Near-end Frame Loss Ratio
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-SLMANFLR-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the The
threshold of Synthetic Loss Measurement (SLM) Average Near-end Frame Loss Ratio
counter is exceeded for the proactive two-way SLM test in a 24-hour period. The
measurement point is a proactive two-way SLM test session running over a MEP.

TCA 1 DAY PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average Near-end Frame
Loss Ratio alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-SLMANFLR-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-SLMANFLR-1-DAY” (p. B-70).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Near-end High
Network element alarms Loss Interval
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Near-end High

Loss Interval
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-SLMNHLI-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of
Synthetic Loss Measurement (SLM) Near-end Frame High Loss Interval (HLI) counter is
exceeded for the proactive two-way SLM test in a 24-hour period. The measurement

TCA 1 DAY PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Near-end High Loss
Interval alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-SLMNHLI-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-SLMNHLI-1-DAY” (p. B-70).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Post-FEC BER Threshold
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Post-FEC BER Threshold

Meaning of alarm
The T-BERPOSTFEC-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Post-FEC BER is exceeded for the OTUk interface in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY Post-FEC BER Threshold alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-BERPOSTFEC-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-BERPOSTFEC-1-DAY” (p. B-54).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Pre-FEC BER Threshold
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Pre-FEC BER Threshold

Meaning of alarm
The T-BERPREFEC-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Pre-FEC BER is exceeded for the OTUk interface in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY Pre-FEC BER Threshold alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-BERPREFEC-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-BERPREFEC-1-DAY” (p. B-54).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section

Meaning of alarm
The T-SES-MS-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Severely Errored Seconds – Multiplex Section counter is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-SES-MS-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-SES-MS-1-DAY” (p. B-70).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, ODU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, ODU Layer

The threshold of the severely errored seconds counter is exceeded for the ODUk path
layer.
Related information

TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, ODU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-SES-ODU-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-SES-ODU-1-DAY” (p. B-71).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, ODU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, OTU Layer

The threshold of the severely errored seconds counter is exceeded for the OTUk section
layer.
Related information

TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, OTU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-SES-OTU-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-SES-OTU-1-DAY” (p. B-71).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds - PCS layer (Receive
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds - PCS layer (Receive

Direction)
Meaning of alarm
The T-SES-PCS-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Severely Errored Seconds - PCS layer counter (in the receive direction) in a 24-hour
period.

TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds - PCS layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-SES-PCS-1–DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type Photonic applications: 1GBE, 10GbE
Alarm source See “T-SES-PCS-1-DAY ” (p. B-71).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds - PCS layer (Transmit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds - PCS layer (Transmit

Direction)
Meaning of alarm
The T-SES-PCST-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Severely Errored Seconds - PCS layer counter (in the transmit direction) in a 24-hour
period.

Alarm identifier / T-SES-PCST-1–DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type Photonic applications: 1GbE, 10GbE
Alarm source See “T-SES-PCST-1-DAY ” (p. B-72).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Frame Seconds - PCS layer
Network element alarms (Receive Direction)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Frame Seconds - PCS layer

(Receive Direction)
Meaning of alarm
The T-SEFS-PCS-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Severely Errored Frame Seconds - PCS layer counter (in the receive direction) in a
24-hour period.

TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Frame Seconds - PCS layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-SEFS-PCS-1–DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-SEFS-PCS-1-DAY ” (p. B-72).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, Regenerator Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, Regenerator Section

The threshold of the severely errored seconds counter is exceeded for the STM
regenerator section. The measurement point is an STM-16 or STM-64 RS-TTP.
Related information

TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, Regenerator Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-SES-RS-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-SES-RS-1-DAY” (p. B-72).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, TCM Layer

The threshold of the severely errored seconds counter is exceeded for the ODUk TCM
layer.
Related information

TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, TCM Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-SES-TCM-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Photonic applications: TDM
Alarm source See “T-SES-TCM-1-DAY” (p. B-73).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Severely Errored Seconds, TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY total number of errored packets at the receive
Network element alarms port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY total number of errored packets at the receive port

Meaning of alarm
The T-IFINERR-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates the number of received frames
that contain errors in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY total number of errored packets at the receive port
alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-IFINERR-1-DAY

Mnemonic
ASAP type 10GBE or 1GBE (depending on the interface)
Alarm source See “T-IFINERR-1-DAY” (p. B-64).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY total number of errored packets at the transmit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY total number of errored packets at the transmit

port
Meaning of alarm
The T-IFOUTERR-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates the number of transmitted
frames that contain errors in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY total number of errored packets at the transmit port
alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-IFOUTERR-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-IFOUTERR-1-DAY ” (p. B-65).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY total number of High Capacity octets
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY total number of High Capacity octets

Meaning of alarm
The T-HICAPOCT-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates the number of octets of data
(including those in bad frames) received in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY total number of High Capacity octets alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-HICAPOCT-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-HICAPOCT-1-DAY” (p. B-63).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1-DAY total number of High Capacity packets
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1-DAY total number of High Capacity packets

Meaning of alarm
The T-HICAPPKTS-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates the number of frames
(including bad, broadcast and multicast frames) received in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1-DAY total number of High Capacity packets alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-HICAPPKTS-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-HICAPPKTS-1-DAY ” (p. B-63).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY total number of octets received
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY total number of octets received

Meaning of alarm
The T-IFINOCT-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates the number of octets received
(in valid MAC frames) in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY total number of octets received alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-IFINOCT-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-IFINOCT-1-DAY ” (p. B-64).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY total number of octets transmitted
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY total number of octets transmitted

Meaning of alarm
The T-IFOUTOCT-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates the number of octets
transmitted (in valid MAC frames) in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY total number of octets transmitted alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-IFOUTOCT-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-IFOUTOCT-1-DAY ” (p. B-65).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY total number of packets discarded at the receive
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY total number of packets discarded at the receive

port
Meaning of alarm
The T-IFINDIS-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates the number of received frames
discarded (including valid frames) in a 24-hour period, due to lack of resources.

TCA 1 DAY total number of packets discarded at the receive port
alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-IFINDIS-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-IFINDIS-1-DAY” (p. B-64).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY total number of packets discarded at the
Network element alarms transmit port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY total number of packets discarded at the transmit

port
Meaning of alarm
The T-IFOUTDIS-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates the number of transmitted
frames discarded (including valid frames) in a 24-hour period, due to lack of resources.

TCA 1 DAY total number of packets discarded at the transmit port
alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-IFOUTDIS-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-IFOUTDIS-1-DAY” (p. B-65).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY total number of packets received
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY total number of packets received

Meaning of alarm
The T-IFINPKTS-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates the number of valid frames
received in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY total number of packets received alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-IFINPKTS-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-IFINPKTS-1-DAY ” (p. B-64).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY total number of packets transmitted
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY total number of packets transmitted

Meaning of alarm
The T-IFOUTPKTS-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates the number of valid
transmitted frames in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY total number of packets transmitted alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-IFOUTPKTS-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-IFOUTPKTS-1-DAY ” (p. B-65).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, Regenerator Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, Regenerator Section

Meaning of alarm
The T-UAS-RST-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Unavailable Seconds – Regenerator Section counter is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, Regenerator Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-UAS-RST-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-UAS-RST-1-DAY” (p. B-74).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, Multiplex Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, Multiplex Section

Meaning of alarm
The T-UAS-MS-1-DAY threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Unavailable Seconds – Multiplex Section counter is exceeded in a 24-hour period.

TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, Multiplex Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-UAS-MS-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-UAS-MS-1-DAY” (p. B-73).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, ODU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, ODU Layer

The threshold of the unavailable seconds counter is exceeded for the ODUk path layer.
Whether the alarm is related to the receive direction or the transmit direction , is indicated
in the alarm message by means of the Direction parameter.
Related information

TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, ODU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-UAS-ODU-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-UAS-ODU-1-DAY” (p. B-73).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, ODU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, OTU Layer

The threshold of the unavailable seconds counter is exceeded for the OTUk section layer.
Related information

TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, OTU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-UAS-OTU-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-UAS-OTU-1-DAY” (p. B-74).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, Regenerator Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, Regenerator Section

The threshold of the unavailable seconds counter is exceeded for the STM regenerator
Related information

TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, Regenerator Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-UAS-RS-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-UAS-RS-1-DAY” (p. B-74).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, TCM Layer

The threshold of the unavailable seconds counter is exceeded for the ODUk TCM layer.
Related information

TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, TCM Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-UAS-TCM-1-DAY

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-UAS-TCM-1-DAY” (p. B-75).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 1 DAY Unavailable Seconds, TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN – Average Bidirectional Frame Delay
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN – Average Bidirectional Frame Delay

Meaning of alarm
The T-ABFD-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of Delay
Measurement Average Bidirectional Frame Delay counter is exceeded for the proactive
two-way DM test during a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN – Average Bidirectional Frame Delay alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ABFD-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-ABFD-15-MIN” (p. B-51).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN – Average Far-End Frame Delay Variation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN – Average Far-End Frame Delay Variation

Meaning of alarm
The T-AFFDV-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of Delay
Measurement Average Far-end Frame Delay Variation counter is exceeded for the
proactive two-way DM test in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN – Average Far-End Frame Delay Variation alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-AFFDV-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-AFFDV-15-MIN” (p. B-51).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN – Average Near-End Frame Delay Variation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN – Average Near-End Frame Delay Variation

Meaning of alarm
The T-ANFDV-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of Delay
Measurement Average Near-end Frame Delay Variation counter is exceeded for the

TCA 15 MIN – Average Near-End Frame Delay Variation alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ANFDV-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-ANFDV-15-MIN” (p. B-52).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN – Average Far-End Frame Loss Ratio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN – Average Far-End Frame Loss Ratio

Meaning of alarm
The T-AFFLR-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of Synthetic
Loss Measurement (SLM) Average Far-end Frame Loss Ratio counter is exceeded for the
proactive two-way SLM test in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN – Average Far-End Frame Loss Ratio alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-AFFLR-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-AFFLR-15-MIN” (p. B-52).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN – Average Near-End Frame Loss Ratio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN – Average Near-End Frame Loss Ratio

Meaning of alarm
The T-ANFLR-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of Synthetic
Loss Measurement (SLM) Average Near-end Frame Loss Ratio counter is exceeded for
the proactive two-way SLM test in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN – Average Near-End Frame Loss Ratio alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ANFLR-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-PMON-SLMANFLR-15-MIN” (p. B-69).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, Multiplex Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, Multiplex Section

Meaning of alarm
The T-BBE-MS-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Background Block Error, Multiplex Section counter is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, Multiplex Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-BBE-MS-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-BBE-MS-15-MIN” (p. B-52).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, ODU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, ODU Layer

layer.
Related information

TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, ODU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-BBE-ODU-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-BBE-ODU-15-MIN” (p. B-52).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, ODU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, OTU Layer

layer.
Related information

TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, OTU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-BBE-OTU-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-BBE-OTU-15-MIN” (p. B-53)s.
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, Regenerator Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, Regenerator Section

The threshold of the background block errors counter is exceeded for the STM
RS-TTP.
Related information

TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, Regenerator Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-BBE-RS-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-BBE-RS-1-DAY” (p. B-53).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, Regenerator Section

Meaning of alarm
The T-BBE-RST-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
background block errors counter is exceeded for the STM regenerator section in a
15-minute period. The measurement point is an STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 or STM-64
RS-TTP.

TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, Regenerator Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-BBE-RST-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-BBE-RST-15-MIN” (p. B-53).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds-Regenerator Section Threshold
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds-Regenerator Section Threshold

Meaning of alarm
The T-ES-RST-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Errored Seconds-Regenerator Section counter (in the transmit direction) is exceeded in a
15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds-Regenerator Section Threshold alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ES-RST-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-ES-RST-15-MIN” (p. B-58).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds Threshold (Transmit Direction)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds Threshold (Transmit Direction)

Meaning of alarm
The T-ESST-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the Errored
Seconds counter (in the transmit direction) is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds Threshold alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ESST-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-ESST-15-MIN” (p. B-58).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, TCM Layer

The threshold of the background block errors counter is exceeded for the ODUk TCM
layer.
Related information

TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, TCM Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-BBE-TCM-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-BBE-TCM-15-MIN” (p. B-54).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Background Block Errors, TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds

Meaning of alarm
The T-BIAES-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-BIAES-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-BIAES-15-MIN” (p. B-54).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds,
Network element alarms TCM Facility
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds,

TCM Facility
Meaning of alarm
The T-BIAES-TCM-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds for the TCM facility is exceeded in a
15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Backward Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds, TCM
Facility alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-BIAES-TCM-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-BIAES-TCM-15-MIN” (p. B-55).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Code Violation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Code Violation

Meaning of alarm
The T-CV-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the code
violation counter for the OSC is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Code Violation alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-CV-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-CV-15-MIN” (p. B-55).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Code Violation Threshold (Receive Direction)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Code Violation Threshold (Receive Direction)

Meaning of alarm
The T-CVS-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the code
violation counter (in the receive direction) is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Code Violation Threshold alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-CVS-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-CVS-15-MIN” (p. B-55).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Code Violation Threshold (Receive Direction)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Code Violation Threshold (Receive Direction)

Meaning of alarm
The T-CVS-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the code
violation counter (in the receive direction) is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Code Violation Threshold alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-CVS-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-CVS-15-MIN” (p. B-55).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Code Violation-PCS layer (Receive Direction)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Code Violation-PCS layer (Receive Direction)

Meaning of alarm
The T-CV-PCS-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the code
violation-PCS layer counter (in the receive direction) in a 15-minute period.

Alarm identifier / T-CV-PCS-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-CV-PCS-15-MIN” (p. B-55).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Code Violation-PCS layer (Transmit Direction)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Code Violation-PCS layer (Transmit Direction)

Meaning of alarm
The T-CV-PCST-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the code
violation-PCS layer counter (in the transmit direction) in a 15-minute period.

Alarm identifier / T-CV-PCST-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-CV-PCST-15-MIN” (p. B-55).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds Threshold
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds Threshold

Meaning of alarm
The T-ES-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the error
second counter for the OSC is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds Threshold alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ES-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-ES-15-MIN” (p. B-56).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds-PCS layer Threshold (Receive
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds-PCS layer Threshold (Receive

Direction)
Meaning of alarm
The T-ES-PCS-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Errored Seconds-PCS layer counter (in the receive direction) is exceeded in a 15-minute
period.

TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds-PCS layer Threshold alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ES-PCS-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-ES-PCS-15-MIN ” (p. B-57).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds-PCS layer Threshold (Transmit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds-PCS layer Threshold (Transmit

Direction)
Meaning of alarm
The T-ES-PCST-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Errored Seconds-PCS layer counter (in the transmit direction) is exceeded in a 15-minute
period.

TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds-PCS layer Threshold alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ES-PCST-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-ES-PCST-15-MIN” (p. B-57).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds, Regenerator Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds, Regenerator Section

The threshold of the errored seconds counter is exceeded for the STM regenerator section.
The measurement point is an STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 or STM-64 RS-TTP.
Related information

TCA 15 MIN Errored Seconds, Regenerator Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ES-RS-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Photonic applications: PMD & PCS, TDM
Alarm source See “T-ES-RS-15-MIN” (p. B-58).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Error Seconds, ODU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Error Seconds, ODU Layer

Related information

TCA 15 MIN Error Seconds, ODU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ES-ODU-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-ES-ODU-15-MIN” (p. B-56).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Error Seconds, ODU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Error Seconds, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Error Seconds, OTU Layer

Related information

TCA 15 MIN Error Seconds, OTU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ES-OTU-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-ES-OTU-15-MIN” (p. B-57).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Error Seconds, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Error Seconds, TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Error Seconds, TCM Layer

The threshold of the errored seconds counter is exceeded for the ODUk TCM layer.
Related information

TCA 15 MIN Error Seconds, TCM Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ES-TCM-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-ES-TCM-15-MIN” (p. B-58).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Error Seconds, TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Ethernet Packet Error Ratio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Ethernet Packet Error Ratio

Meaning of alarm
The T-ETHPKTER-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Ethernet Packet Error Ratio calculation is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Ethernet Packet Error Ratio alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ETHPKTER-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-ETHPKTER-15-MIN ” (p. B-59).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Ethernet Packet Error Ratio Threshold (Transmit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Ethernet Packet Error Ratio Threshold (Transmit

Direction)
Meaning of alarm
The T-ETHPKTERT-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Ethernet Packet Error Ratio calculation (in the transmit direction) is exceeded in a
15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Ethernet Packet Error Ratio Threshold alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ETHPKTERT-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-ETHPKTERT-15-MIN” (p. B-59).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Far End Background Block Error, Multiplex
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Far End Background Block Error, Multiplex Section

Meaning of alarm
The T-FEBBE-MS-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Far End Background Block Error, Multiplex Section counter is exceeded in a 15-minute
period.

TCA 15 MIN Far End Background Block Error, Multiplex Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FEBBE-MS-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FEBBE-MS-15-MIN” (p. B-59).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Far End Background Block Error - ODUk
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Far End Background Block Error - ODUk

Meaning of alarm
The T-FEBBE-ODU-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Far End Background Block Error-ODUk counter is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Far End Background Block Error - ODUk alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FEBBE-ODU-15-MIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type Photonic applications: ODU1, ODU2, ODU3
Alarm source See “T-FEBBE-ODU-15-MIN” (p. B-59).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Far End Background Block Error - TCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Far End Background Block Error - TCM

Meaning of alarm
The T-FEBBE-TCM-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Far End Background Block Error - TCM counter is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Far End Background Block Error - TCM alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FEBBE-TCM-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FEBBE-TCM-15-MIN” (p. B-60).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Far End Background Block Error - OTUk
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Far End Background Block Error - OTUk

Meaning of alarm
The T-FEBBE-OTU-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Far End Background Block Error-OTUk counter is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Far End Background Block Error - OTUk alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FEBBE-OTU-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FEBBE-OTU-15-MIN” (p. B-60).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Far End Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Far End Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section

Meaning of alarm
The T-FEES-MS-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the Far
End Errored Seconds – Multiplex Section counter is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Far End Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FEES-MS-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FEES-MS-15-MIN” (p. B-61).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Far End Errored Seconds, ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Far End Errored Seconds, ODU

Meaning of alarm
The T-FEES-ODU-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Far End Errored Seconds – ODU counter is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Far End Errored Seconds, ODU alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FEES-ODU-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FEES-ODU-15-MIN” (p. B-61).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Far End Errored Seconds, OTU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Far End Errored Seconds, OTU

Meaning of alarm
The T-FEES-OTU-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Far End Errored Seconds – OTU counter is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Far End Errored Seconds, OTU alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FEES-OTU-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FEES-OTU-15-MIN” (p. B-61).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Far End Errored Seconds, TCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Far End Errored Seconds, TCM

Meaning of alarm
The T-FEES-TCM-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Far End Errored Seconds – TCM counter is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Far End Errored Seconds, TCM alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FEES-TCM-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FEES-TCM-15-MIN” (p. B-61).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Far End Severely Errored Seconds, Multiplex
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Far End Severely Errored Seconds, Multiplex

Section
Meaning of alarm
The T-FESES-MS-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Far End Severely Errored Seconds – Multiplex Section counter is exceeded in a
15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Far End Severely Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section
alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FESES-MS-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FESES-MS-15-MIN” (p. B-61).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Far End Severely Errored Seconds, ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Far End Severely Errored Seconds, ODU

Meaning of alarm
The T-FESES-ODU-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Far End Severely Errored Seconds – ODU counter is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Far End Severely Errored Seconds, ODU alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FESES-ODU-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FESES-ODU-15-MIN” (p. B-62).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Far End Severely Errored Seconds, OTU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Far End Severely Errored Seconds, OTU

Meaning of alarm
The T-FESES-OTU-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Far End Severely Errored Seconds – OTU counter is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Far End Severely Errored Seconds, OTU alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FESES-OTU-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FESES-OTU-15-MIN” (p. B-62).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Far End Severely Errored Seconds, TCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Far End Severely Errored Seconds, TCM

Meaning of alarm
The T-FESES-TCM-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Far End Severely Errored Seconds – TCM counter is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Far End Severely Errored Seconds, TCM alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FESES-TCM-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FESES-TCM-15-MIN” (p. B-62).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Far End Unavailable Seconds, Multiplex Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Far End Unavailable Seconds, Multiplex Section

Meaning of alarm
The T-FEUAS-MS-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Far End Unavailable Seconds – Multiplex Section counter is exceeded in a 15-minute
period.

TCA 15 MIN Far End Unavailable Seconds, Multiplex Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FEUAS-MS-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FEUAS-MS-15-MIN” (p. B-62).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Far End Unavailable Seconds, ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Far End Unavailable Seconds, ODU

Meaning of alarm
The T-FEUAS-ODU-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Far End Unavailable Seconds – ODU counter is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Far End Unavailable Seconds, ODU alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FEUAS-ODU-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FEUAS-ODU-15-MIN” (p. B-62).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Far End Unavailable Seconds, OTU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Far End Unavailable Seconds, OTU

Meaning of alarm
The T-FEUAS-OTU-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Far End Unavailable Seconds – OTU counter is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Far End Unavailable Seconds, OTU alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FEUAS-OTU-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FESES-OTU-15-MIN” (p. B-62).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Far End Unavailable Seconds, TCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Far End Unavailable Seconds, TCM

Meaning of alarm
The T-FEUAS-TCM-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Far End Unavailable Seconds – TCM counter is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Far End Unavailable Seconds, TCM alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FEUAS-TCM-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FEUAS-TCM-15-MIN” (p. B-63).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN FEC Errors Corrected, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN FEC Errors Corrected, OTU Layer

layer.
Related information

TCA 15 MIN FEC Errors Corrected, OTU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FECC-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-FECC-15-MIN” (p. B-60).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN FEC Errors Corrected, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Forward Error Correction, Uncorrectable Block
Network element alarms Counts
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Forward Error Correction, Uncorrectable Block

Counts
Meaning of alarm
The T-FECUBC-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Forward Error Correction Uncorrectable Block counter is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Forward Error Correction, Uncorrectable Block Counts
alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FECUBC-15-MIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type Photonic applications: OTU1, OTU2, OTU3, OTU4
Alarm source See “T-FECUBC-15-MIN” (p. B-60).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds

Meaning of alarm
The T-IAES-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Incoming Alignment Error Second is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-IAES-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-IAES-15-MIN” (p. B-63).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds - TCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds - TCM

Meaning of alarm
The T-IAES-TCM-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds - TCM counter is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Incoming Alignment Errored Seconds - TCM alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-IAES-TCM-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-IAES-TCM-15-MIN” (p. B-64).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Bidirectional Frame Delay
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Bidirectional Frame Delay

Meaning of alarm
The T-XBFD-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of Delay
Measurement Maximum Bidirectional Frame Delay counter is exceeded for the proactive
two-way DM test in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Bidirectional Frame Delay alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-XBFD-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-XBFD-15-MIN” (p. B-75).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Far-End Frame Delay Variation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Far-End Frame Delay Variation

Meaning of alarm
The T-XFFDV-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of Delay
Measurement Maximum Far-end Frame Delay Variation counter is exceeded for the

TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Far-End Frame Delay Variation alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-XFFDV-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-XFFDV-15-MIN” (p. B-75).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Far-End Frame Loss Ratio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Far-End Frame Loss Ratio

Meaning of alarm
The T-XFFLR-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of Synthetic
Loss Measurement (SLM) Maximum Far-end Frame Loss Ratio counter is exceeded for

TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Far-End Frame Loss Ratio alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-XFFLR-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-XFFLR-15-MIN” (p. B-75).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Near-End Frame Delay Variation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Near-End Frame Delay Variation

Meaning of alarm
The T-XNFDV-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of Delay
Measurement Maximum Near-end Frame Delay Variation counter is exceeded for the

TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Near-End Frame Delay Variation alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-XNFDV-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-XNFDV-15-MIN” (p. B-75).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Near-End Frame Loss Ratio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Near-End Frame Loss Ratio

Meaning of alarm
The T-XNFLR-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of Synthetic
Loss Measurement (SLM) Maximum Near-end Frame Loss Ratio counter is exceeded for

TCA 15 MIN – Maximum Near-End Frame Loss Ratio alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-XNFLR-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-XNFLR-15-MIN ” (p. B-75).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN - Optical Power Received - High
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN - Optical Power Received - High

Related information

TCA 15 MIN - Optical Power Received - High alarm:
Alarm identifier / Switching applications: T-OPR-H-15-MIN

Mnemonic Photonic applications: T-OPRH-15-MIN
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN - Optical Power Received - Low
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN - Optical Power Received - Low

Related information

TCA 15 MIN - Optical Power Received - Low alarm:
Alarm identifier / Switching applications: T-OPR-L-15-MIN

Mnemonic Photonic applications: T-OPRL-15-MIN
Photonic applications: OCH
Alarm source See “T-OPRL-15-MIN” (p. B-66).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN - Optical Power Transmitted - High
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN - Optical Power Transmitted - High

near-end section layer in the transmit direction.
Related information

TCA 15 MIN - Optical Power Transmitted - High alarm:
Alarm identifier / Switching applications: T-OPT-H-15-MIN

Mnemonic Photonic applications: T-OPTH-15-MIN
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN - Optical Power Transmitted - Low
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN - Optical Power Transmitted - Low

Related information

TCA 15 MIN - Optical Power Transmitted - Low alarm:
Alarm identifier / Switching applications: T-OPT-L-15-MIN

Mnemonic Photonic applications: T-OPTL-15-MIN
Alarm source See “T-OPTL-15-MIN” (p. B-66).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Out of Frame Seconds, Regenerator Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Out of Frame Seconds, Regenerator Section

The threshold of the out of frame seconds counter is exceeded for the STM regenerator
Related information

TCA 15 MIN Out of Frame Seconds, Regenerator Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-OFS-RS-15-MIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPSTMn
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average

Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-DMABFD-15MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of
Delay Measurement Average Bidirectional Frame Delay counter is exceeded for the
proactive two-way DM test in a 15-minute period. The measurement point is a proactive

TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Bidirectional
Frame Delay alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-DMABFD-15-MIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-DMABFD-15-MIN” (p. B-67).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delay
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-DMAFFD-15-MIN threshold of Delay Measurement Average Far-end
Frame Delay counter is exceeded for the proactive two-way DM test in a 15-minute
period. The measurement point is a proactive two-way DM test session running over a
MEP.

alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-DMAFFD-15-MIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-DMAFFD-15-MIN” (p. B-67).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Far-end
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Far-end

Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-DMAFFDV-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold
of Delay Measurement Average Far-end Frame Delay Variation counter is exceeded for
the proactive two-way DM test in a 15-minute period. The measurement point is a

TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Far-end Frame
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-DMAFFDV-15-MIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-DMAFFDV-15-MIN” (p. B-67).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network element alarms Near-end Frame Delay
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Near-end

Frame Delay
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-DMANFD-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of
Delay Measurement Average Near-end Frame Delay counter is exceeded for the proactive
two-way DM test in a 15-minute period. The measurement point is a proactive two-way
DM test session running over a MEP.

TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Near-end Frame
Delay alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-DMANFD-15-MIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-DMANFD-15-MIN ” (p. B-67).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Near-end

Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-DMANFDV-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold
of Delay Measurement Average Near-end Frame Delay Variation counter is exceeded for

TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Average Near-end Frame
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-DMANFDV-15-MIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-DMANFDV-15-MIN ” (p. B-67).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum

Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-DMXBFD-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of
Delay Measurement Maximum Bidirectional Frame Delay counter is exceeded for the
proactive two-way DM test in a 15-minute period. The measurement point is a proactive

TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Bidirectional
Frame Delay alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-DMXBFD-15-MIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-DMXBFD-15-MIN” (p. B-67).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement Maximum Far-end
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement Maximum Far-end

Frame Delay
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-DMXFFD-15-MIN threshold of Delay Measurement Maximum Near-end
MEP.

TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement Maximum Far-end Frame Delay
alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-DMXFFD-15-MIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-DMXFFD-15-MIN” (p. B-68).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network element alarms Far-end Frame Delay Variation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Far-end

Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-DMXFFDV-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold
of Delay Measurement Maximum Far-end Frame Delay Variation counter is exceeded for

TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Far-end Frame
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-DMXFFDV-15-MIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-DMXFFDV-15-MIN” (p. B-68).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement Maximum Near-end
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement Maximum Near-end

Frame Delay
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-DMXNFD-15-MIN threshold of Delay Measurement Maximum Near-end
MEP.

TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement Maximum Near-end Frame Delay
alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-DMXNFD-15-MIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-DMXNFD-15-MIN” (p. B-68).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum

Near-end Frame Delay Variation
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-DMXNFDV-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold
of Delay Measurement Maximum Near-end Frame Delay Variation counter is exceeded
for the proactive two-way DM test in a 15-minute period. The measurement point is a

TCA 15 MIN PMON Delay Measurement (DM) Maximum Near-end Frame
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-DMXNFDV-15-MIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-DMXNFDV-15-MIN” (p. B-68).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Average Far-end Frame
Network element alarms Loss Ratio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Average Far-end Frame

Loss Ratio
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-LMAFFLR-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold
of Loss Measurement (LM) Average Far-end Frame Loss Ratio counter is exceeded for
the proactive two-way LM test in a 15-minute period. The measurement point is a

TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Average Far-end Frame Loss Ratio
alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-LMAFFLR-15-MIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-LMAFFLR-15-MIN” (p. B-68).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Average Near-end
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Average Near-end Frame

Loss Ratio
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-LMANFLR-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold
of Loss Measurement (LM) Average Near-end Frame Loss Ratio counter is exceeded for

TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Average Near-end Frame Loss
Ratio alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-LMANFLR-15-MIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-LMANFLR-15-MIN” (p. B-68).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Far-end High Loss
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Far-end High Loss

Interval
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-LMFHLI-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of
Synthetic Loss Measurement (LM) Far-end Frame High Loss Interval (HLI) counter is
exceeded for the proactive two-way LM test in a 15-minute period. The measurement
point is a proactive two-way LM test session running over a MEP.

TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Far-end High Loss Interval alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-LMFHLI-15-MIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-LMFHLI-15-MIN” (p. B-69).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Maximum Far-end
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Maximum Far-end Frame

Loss Ratio
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-LMXFFLR-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold
of Loss Measurement (LM) Maximum Far-end Frame Loss Ratio counter is exceeded for

TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Maximum Far-end Frame Loss Ratio
alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-LMXFFLR-15-MIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-LMXFFLR-15-MIN” (p. B-69).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Maximum Near-end
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Maximum Near-end

Frame Loss Ratio
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-LMXNFLR-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold
of Loss Measurement (LM) Maximum Near-end Frame Loss Ratio counter is exceeded
for the proactive two-way LM test in a 15-minute period. The measurement point is a

TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Maximum Near-end Frame Loss
Ratio alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-LMXNFLR-15-MIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-LMXNFLR-15-MIN” (p. B-69).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Near-end High Loss
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Near-end High Loss

Interval
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-SLMNHLI-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of
Loss Measurement (LM) Near-end Frame High Loss Interval (HLI) counter is exceeded
for the proactive two-way LM test in a 15-minute period. The measurement point is a

TCA 15 MIN PMON Loss Measurement Near-end High Loss Interval alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-LMNHLI-15-MIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-LMNHLI-15-MIN” (p. B-69).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average
Network element alarms Far-end Frame Loss Ratio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average

Far-end Frame Loss Ratio
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-SLMAFFLR-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold
of Synthetic Loss Measurement (SLM) Average Far-end Frame Loss Ratio counter is
exceeded for the proactive two-way SLM test in a 15-minute period. The measurement

TCA 15 MIN PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average Far-end Frame
Loss Ratio alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-SLMAFFLR-15-MIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-SLMAFFLR-15-MIN” (p. B-69).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average

Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-SLMANFLR-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold
of Synthetic Loss Measurement (SLM) Average Near-end Frame Loss Ratio counter is

TCA 15 MIN PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average Near-end
Frame Loss Ratio alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-SLMANFLR-15-MIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-SLMANFLR-15-MIN” (p. B-69).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Near-end
Network element alarms High Loss Interval
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Near-end High

Loss Interval
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-SLMNHLI-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of
Synthetic Loss Measurement (SLM) Near-end Frame High Loss Interval (HLI) counter is

TCA 15 MIN PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Near-end High Loss
Interval alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-SLMNHLI-15-MIN

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-SLMNHLI-15-MIN” (p. B-70).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Post-FEC BER Threshold
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Post-FEC BER Threshold

Meaning of alarm
The T-BERPOSTFEC-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Post-FEC BER is exceeded for the OTUk interface in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Post-FEC BER Threshold alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-BERPOSTFEC-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-BERPOSTFEC-15-MIN” (p. B-54).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Pre-FEC BER Threshold
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Pre-FEC BER Threshold

Meaning of alarm
The T-BERPREFEC-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Pre-FEC BER is exceeded for the OTUk interface in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Pre-FEC BER Threshold alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-BERPREFEC-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-BERPREFEC-15-MIN” (p. B-54).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section

Meaning of alarm
The T-SES-MS-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Severely Errored Seconds – Multiplex Section counter is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, Multiplex Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-SES-MS-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-SES-MS-15-MIN” (p. B-70).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, ODU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, ODU Layer

layer.
Related information

TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, ODU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-SES-ODU-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-SES-ODU-15-MIN” (p. B-71).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, ODU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, OTU Layer

layer.
Related information

TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, OTU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-SES-OTU-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-SES-OTU-15-MIN” (p. B-71).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds - PCS layer (Receive
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds - PCS layer (Receive

Direction)
Meaning of alarm
The T-SES-PCS-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Severely Errored Seconds - PCS layer counter (in the receive direction) in a 15-minute
period.

Alarm identifier / T-SES-PCS-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-SES-PCS-15-MIN” (p. B-71).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds - PCS layer (Transmit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds - PCS layer (Transmit

Direction)
Meaning of alarm
The T-SES-PCST-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Severely Errored Seconds - PCS layer counter (in the transmit direction) in a 15-minute
period.

Alarm identifier / T-SES-PCST-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-SES-PCST-15-MIN” (p. B-72).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Frame Seconds - PCS layer
Network element alarms (Receive Direction)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Frame Seconds - PCS layer

(Receive Direction)
Meaning of alarm
The T-SEFS-PCS-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Severely Errored Frame Seconds - PCS layer counter (in the receive direction) in a
15-minute period.

Alarm identifier / T-SEFS-PCS-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-SEFS-PCS-15-MIN ” (p. B-71).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Frame Seconds - PCS layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Frame Seconds - PCS layer

Meaning of alarm
The T-SEFS-PCST-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Severely Errored Frame Seconds - PCS layer counter (in the transmit direction) in a
15-minute period.

Alarm identifier / T-SEFS-PCST-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-SEFS-PCST-15-MIN ” (p. B-72).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, Regenerator Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, Regenerator Section

The threshold of the severely errored seconds counter is exceeded for the STM
RS-TTP.
Related information

TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, Regenerator Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-SES-RS-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-SES-RS-15-MIN” (p. B-72).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, Regenerator Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, TCM Layer

The threshold of the severely errored seconds counter is exceeded for the ODUk TCM
layer.
Related information

TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, TCM Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-SES-TCM-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-SES-TCM-15-MIN” (p. B-73).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Severely Errored Seconds, TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN total number of errored packets at the receive
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN total number of errored packets at the receive

port
Meaning of alarm
The T-IFINERR-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates the number of received
frames that contain errors in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN total number of errored packets at the receive port
alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-IFINERR-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-IFINERR-15-MIN ” (p. B-64).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN total number of errored packets at the transmit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN total number of errored packets at the transmit

port
Meaning of alarm
The T-IFOUTERR-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates the number of transmitted
frames that contain errors in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN total number of errored packets at the transmit port
alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-IFOUTERR-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-IFOUTERR-15-MIN” (p. B-65).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN total number of High Capacity octets
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN total number of High Capacity octets

Meaning of alarm
The T-HICAPOCT-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates the number of octets of
data (including those in bad frames) received in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN total number of High Capacity octets alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-HICAPOCT-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-HICAPOCT-15-MIN” (p. B-63).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15-MIN total number of High Capacity packets
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15-MIN total number of High Capacity packets

Meaning of alarm
The T-HICAPPKTS-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates the number of frames
(including bad, broadcast and multicast frames) received in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15-MIN total number of High Capacity packets alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-HICAPPKTS-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-HICAPPKTS-15-MIN” (p. B-63).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN total number of octets received
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN total number of octets received

Meaning of alarm
The T-IFINOCT-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates the number of octets received
(in valid MAC frames) in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN total number of octets received alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-IFINOCT-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-IFINOCT-15-MIN ” (p. B-64).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN total number of octets transmitted
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN total number of octets transmitted

Meaning of alarm
The T-IFOUTOCT-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates the number of octets
transmitted (in valid MAC frames) in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN total number of octets transmitted alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-IFOUTOCT-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-IFOUTOCT-15-MIN” (p. B-65).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN total number of packets discarded at the
Network element alarms receive port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN total number of packets discarded at the receive

port
Meaning of alarm
The T-IFINDIS-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates the number of received
frames discarded (including valid frames) in a 15-minute period, due to lack of resources.

TCA 15 MIN total number of packets discarded at the receive port
alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-IFINDIS-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-IFINDIS-15-MIN” (p. B-64).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN total number of packets discarded at the
Network element alarms transmit port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN total number of packets discarded at the transmit

port
Meaning of alarm
The T-IFOUTDIS-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates the number of transmitted
frames discarded (including valid frames) in a 15-minute period, due to lack of resources.

TCA 15 MIN total number of packets discarded at the transmit port
alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-IFOUTDIS-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-IFOUTDIS-15-MIN” (p. B-64).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN total number of packets received
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN total number of packets received

Meaning of alarm
The T-IFINPKTS-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates the number of valid frames
received in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN total number of packets received alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-IFINPKTS-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-IFINPKTS-15-MIN” (p. B-64).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN total number of packets transmitted
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN total number of packets transmitted

Meaning of alarm
The T-IFOUTPKTS-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates the number of valid
transmitted frames in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN total number of packets transmitted alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-IFOUTPKTS-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-IFOUTPKTS-15-MIN” (p. B-65).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, Regenerator Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, Regenerator Section

Meaning of alarm
The T-UAS-RST-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Unavailable Seconds – Regenerator Section counter is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, Regenerator Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-UAS-RST-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-UAS-RST-15-MIN” (p. B-74).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, Multiplex Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, Multiplex Section

Meaning of alarm
The T-UAS-MS-15-MIN threshold crossing alarm indicates that the threshold of the
Unavailable Seconds – Multiplex Section counter is exceeded in a 15-minute period.

TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, Multiplex Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-UAS-MS-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-UAS-MS-15-MIN” (p. B-73).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
measurement period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, ODU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, ODU Layer

Whether the alarm is related to the receive direction or the transmit direction , is indicated
in the alarm message by means of the Direction parameter.
Related information

TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, ODU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-UAS-ODU-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-UAS-ODU-15-MIN” (p. B-73).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, ODU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, OTU Layer

Related information

TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, OTU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-UAS-OTU-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-UAS-OTU-15-MIN” (p. B-74).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, Regenerator Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, Regenerator Section

The threshold of the unavailable seconds counter is exceeded for the STM regenerator
Related information

TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, Regenerator Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-UAS-RS-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-UAS-RS-15-MIN” (p. B-74).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, TCM Layer

The threshold of the unavailable seconds counter is exceeded for the ODUk TCM layer.
Related information

TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, TCM Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-UAS-TCM-15-MIN

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “T-UAS-TCM-15-MIN” (p. B-75).
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA 15 MIN Unavailable Seconds, TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA - Code Violations, Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA - Code Violations, Section

This alarm is relevant for NEs operating in ANSI mode.
The threshold of the code violations counter is exceeded for the monitored OC-n facility.
Related information

TCA - Code Violations, Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-CVS

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPOC3, ASAPOC12, ASAPOC48, ASAPOC192,
.ASAPOC768.
Alarm source OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, OC-768
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement
Network element alarms Average Near-end Frame Loss Ratio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average

Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-SLMANFLR-CONTINUOUS threshold of Synthetic Loss Measurement
(SLM) Average Near-end Frame Loss Ratio counter is exceeded for the proactive
two-way SLM test running continuously. The measurement point is a proactive two-way
SLM test session running over a MEP.

TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average Near-end
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-SLMANFLR-CONTINUOUS

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-SLMANFLR_CONTINUOUS” (p. B-70).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network element alarms Average Far-end Frame Loss Ratio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average

Far-end Frame Loss Ratio
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-SLMAFFLR-CONTINUOUS threshold of Synthetic Loss Measurement
(SLM) Average Far-end Frame Loss Ratio counter is exceeded for the proactive two-way
SLM test running continuously. The measurement point is a proactive two-way SLM test
session running over a MEP.

TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Average Far-end
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-SLMAFFLR-CONTINUOUS

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-SLMAFFLR_CONTINUOUS” (p. B-69).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network element alarms Far-end High Loss Interval
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Far-end

High Loss Interval
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-SLMFHLI-CONTINUOUS threshold of Synthetic Loss Measurement
(SLM) Far-end Frame High Loss Interval (HLI) counter is exceeded for the proactive

TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Far-end High Loss
Interval alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-SLMFHLI-CONTINUOUS

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-SLMFHLI_CONTINUOUS” (p. B-70).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network element alarms Maximum Far-end Frame Loss Ratio
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement

Maximum Far-end Frame Loss Ratio
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-SLMXFFLR-CONTINUOUS threshold of Synthetic Loss Measurement
(SLM) Maximum Far-end Frame Loss Ratio counter is exceeded for the proactive

TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Maximum Far-end
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-SLMXFFLR-CONTINUOUS

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-SLMXFFLR_CONTINUOUS” (p. B-70).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-SLMXNFLR-CONTINUOUS threshold of Synthetic Loss Measurement
(SLM) Near-end Frame Loss Ratio counter is exceeded for the proactive two-way SLM
test running continuously. The measurement point is a proactive two-way SLM test
session running over a MEP.

TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Near-end Frame
Loss Ratio alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-SLMXNFLR-CONTINUOUS

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-SLMXNFLR_CONTINUOUS” (p. B-70).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network element alarms Near-end High Loss Interval
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Near-end High Loss Interval
Meaning of alarm
The T-PMON-SLMNHLI-CONTINUOUS threshold of Synthetic Loss Measurement
(SLM) Near-end Frame High Loss Interval (HLI) counter is exceeded for the proactive

TCA CONTINUOUS PMON Synthetic Loss Measurement Near-end High
Loss Interval alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-PMON-SLMNHLI-CONTINUOUS

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “T-PMON-SLMNHLI_CONTINUOUS” (p. B-70).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA - Errored Seconds, Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA - Errored Seconds, Section

The threshold of the errored seconds counter is exceeded for the monitored OC-n facility.
Related information

TCA - Errored Seconds, Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ESS

Mnemonic
ASAPOC768.
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA - Optical Power Received - High
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA - Optical Power Received - High

Related information

TCA - Optical Power Received - High alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-OPR-H

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPOCH
Alarm source DWDM uplink OCH on OTU2, OTU2e, OTU3E2, OTU4 ports.
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA - Optical Power Received - Low
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA - Optical Power Received - Low

Related information

TCA - Optical Power Received - Low alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-OPR-L

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPOCH
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA - Optical Power Transmitted - High
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA - Optical Power Transmitted - High

It indicates that an OPT-H tidemark threshold crossing was detected on the OCH near-end
Related information

TCA - Optical Power Transmitted - High alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-OPT-H

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPOCH
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA - Optical Power Transmitted - Low
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA - Optical Power Transmitted - Low

Related information

TCA - Optical Power Transmitted - Low alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-OPT-L

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPOCH
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA - Severely Errored Frame Seconds, Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA - Severely Errored Frame Seconds, Section

The threshold of the severely errored frame seconds counter is exceeded for the
monitored OC-n facility.
Related information

TCA - Severely Errored Frame Seconds, Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-SEFSS

Mnemonic
ASAPOC768.
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA - Severely Errored Seconds, Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA - Severely Errored Seconds, Section

The threshold of the severely errored seconds counter is exceeded for the monitored
OC-n facility.
Related information

TCA - Severely Errored Seconds, Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-SESS

Mnemonic
ASAPOC768.
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA - Unavailable Seconds, Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA - Unavailable Seconds, Section

The threshold of the unavailable seconds counter is exceeded for the monitored OC-n
facility.
Related information

TCA - Unavailable Seconds, Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-UASS

Mnemonic
ASAPOC768.
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA Background Block Errors, ODU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA Background Block Errors, ODU Layer

layer.
Related information

TCA Background Block Errors, ODU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-BBE-ODU

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPODUn
ODU4
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA Background Block Errors, ODU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA Background Block Errors, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA Background Block Errors, OTU Layer

layer.
Related information

TCA Background Block Errors, OTU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-BBE-OTU

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPOTU
Alarm source OTUk section: OTU2, OTU2E, OTU3, OTU3E2, OTU4
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA Background Block Errors, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA Background Block Errors, TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA Background Block Errors, TCM Layer

The threshold of the background block errors counter is exceeded for the OTUk TCM
layer.
Related information

TCA Background Block Errors, TCM Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-BBE-TCM

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPTCM
Alarm source ODUk TCM layer : ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2E, ODU3,
ODU3E2, ODU4
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA Background Block Errors, TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA Error Seconds, ODU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA Error Seconds, ODU Layer

Related information

TCA Error Seconds, ODU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ES-ODU

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPODUn
ODU4
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA Error Seconds, ODU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA Error Seconds, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA Error Seconds, OTU Layer

Related information

TCA Error Seconds, OTU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ES-OTU

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPOTU
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA Error Seconds, TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA Error Seconds, TCM Layer

The threshold of the errored seconds counter is exceeded for the OTUk TCM layer.
Related information

TCA Error Seconds, TCM Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-ES-TCM

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPTCM
ODU3E2, ODU4
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA Error Seconds, TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA FEC Errors Corrected, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA FEC Errors Corrected, OTU Layer

layer.
Related information

TCA FEC Errors Corrected, OTU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-FECC

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPOTU
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA FEC Errors Corrected, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA Severely Errored Seconds, ODU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA Severely Errored Seconds, ODU Layer

layer.
Related information

TCA Severely Errored Seconds, ODU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-SES-ODU

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPODUn
ODU4
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA Severely Errored Seconds, ODU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA Severely Errored Seconds, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA Severely Errored Seconds, OTU Layer

layer.
Related information

TCA Severely Errored Seconds, OTU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-SES-OTU

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPOTU
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA Severely Errored Seconds, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA Severely Errored Seconds, TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA Severely Errored Seconds, TCM Layer

The threshold of the severely errored seconds counter is exceeded for the OTUk TCM
layer.
Related information

TCA Severely Errored Seconds, TCM Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-SES-TCM

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPTCM
ODU3E2, ODU4
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA Severely Errored Seconds, TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA Unavailable Seconds, ODU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA Unavailable Seconds, ODU Layer

Related information

TCA Unavailable Seconds, ODU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-UAS-ODU

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPODUn
ODU4
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA Unavailable Seconds, ODU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA Unavailable Seconds, OTU Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA Unavailable Seconds, OTU Layer

Related information

TCA Unavailable Seconds, OTU Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-UAS-OTU

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPOTU
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA Unavailable Seconds, TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA Unavailable Seconds, TCM Layer

The threshold of the unavailable seconds counter is exceeded for the OTUk TCM layer.
Related information

TCA Unavailable Seconds, TCM Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / T-UAS-TCM

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPTCM
ODU3E2, ODU4
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA Unavailable Seconds, TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TDM (SONET/SDH) Loss of Signal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TDM (SONET/SDH) Loss of Signal

Meaning of alarm

TDM (SONET/SDH) Loss of Signal alarm:
Alarm identifier / RmdIfLOS

Mnemonic
ASAP type RMD
Alarm category RmdIf
setting) NSA –
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-435: “Clear TDM (SONET/SDH) Loss of Signal ” (p. 3-723).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Temperature is critical
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Temperature is critical
The temperature in the system has exceeded the critical temperature threshold.
All cards and the fan unit measure their own temperature, the shelf measures the ambient
temperature of the cooling air.
The Temperature is critical alarm indicates that the system operates in a
critically high temperature range, and that the risk of overheating and resulting thermal
damages is significantly increased. Cooling down of the system is urgently required.

Temperature is critical alarm:
Alarm identifier / CRITICALTEMP

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source Shelf, FLC, MTX, PSF3T8, PSFC, FAN3T8, I/O cards
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-436: “Clear Temperature is critical” (p. 3-724).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Temperature is high
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Temperature is high
The temperature in the system has exceeded the high temperature threshold.
All cards and the fan unit measure their own temperature, the shelf measures the ambient
temperature of the cooling air.
The Temperature is high alarm indicates that the system operates above the normal
temperature range, it is an early warning of a beginning temperature problem and gives
the opportunity to take countermeasures at an early stage.
The shelf inlet temperature is measured using a temperature sensor that is located in the
air flow of FAN_B (slot 93) for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack. In the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack, the temperature sensor is located on the active
matrix. The shelf measures the ambiance temperature of the cooling air. Fan and cards
measure their own temperature.

Temperature is high alarm:
Alarm identifier / HIGHTEMP

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source Shelf, FLC, MTX, PSF3T8, PSFC, FAN3T8, I/O cards
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Temperature is high
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-437: “Clear Temperature is high” (p. 3-728).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Terminal loop active
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Terminal loop active

Meaning of alarm
A terminal loopback is active on the specified port. Loopbacks are user-initiated and may
only be cleared by manually removing them from the port.
Note: It can take several minutes for transmission to be established on 40G OTs after
removing loopbacks.

Terminal loop active alarm:
Alarm identifier / LPBKTERM

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
Alarm source See “LPBKTERM” (p. B-27).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-438: “Clear Terminal loop active” (p. 3-732).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Thermal Shutdown performed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Thermal Shutdown performed

The temperature of heat-sensitive hardware components has exceeded a critical threshold
and as a result, a thermal shutdown of the affected equipment has been performed.
Thermal shutdown behavior
Generally, if the temperature of a heat-sensitive hardware component on a card exceeds
the thermal shutdown threshold, then the related card is switched off to avoid heat
damage.
Beyond that general behavior, the detailed thermal shutdown behavior depends on the
affected card and the thermal conditions of the other system components; the following
applies:
• For the FLCs:
If the active FLC is switched off then an equipment protection switch to the standby
FLC is performed.
• For matrix cards:
– If the thermal shutdown threshold is exceeded for the first of two matrix cards in
an equipment protected configuration then this matrix card is switched off, and if
it is the active card, then an equipment protection switch to the standby card is
performed.
– If the thermal shutdown threshold is exceeded for the second of two matrix cards
in an equipment protected configuration or for the only matrix card in an
unprotected configuration then the system behavior depends on whether the FLC
reports an additional temperature alarm or not.
If an additional temperature alarm is present at the same time then the entire
system is switched off. An automatic restart of the system is not possible, the
system must be restarted manually.
If no additional temperature alarm is present then all I/O cards are switched off,
and the affected matrix card is temporarily switched off for approximately 7
minutes, that is the matrix card runs through a power cycle. FLCs are not switched
off in that case.
If the temperature of heat-sensitive components is acceptable after the power
cycle of the matrix card then the I/O cards are restarted. However, if the
temperature is still unacceptable and no additional temperature alarm is present
then the entire system is switched off. An automatic restart of the system is not
possible, the system must be restarted manually. In case the temperature is still
unacceptable and an additional temperature alarm is present then the matrix card
runs through a power cycle again.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Thermal Shutdown performed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Thermal Shutdown performed alarm:
Alarm identifier / THERMSHUTD

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
Alarm source FLC, MTX, I/O cards
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Perform the same steps that apply to a Temperature is critical alarm; see
Procedure 3-436: “Clear Temperature is critical” (p. 3-724).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Time Slot Assignment Mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Time Slot Assignment Mismatch

Meaning of alarm
The Time Slot Assignment Mismatch alarm is raised when the Far End and Near End OT
Client Ports have different time slots.

Time Slot Assignment Mismatch alarm:
Alarm identifier / TSMISMATCH

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU0, ODUflex, OPTSG
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “TSMISMATCH” (p. B-51).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-439: “Clear Time Slot Assignment Mismatch alarm” (p. 3-733).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Timing quality for output timing is insufficient
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Timing quality for output timing is insufficient

Meaning of alarm
The card has detected an SYNCT4OUT condition. The SYNCT4OUT alarm is raised
when timing quality for output timing is under the threshold and the BITS output is
squelched.

Timing quality for output timing is insufficient alarm:
Alarm identifier / SYNCT4OUT

Mnemonic
ASAP type SYNCOUT
Alarm source PTPCTL-shelf-slot-SYNCOUT
Local indications
Trouble clearing
(p. 3-734).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Timing Reference Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Timing Reference Failure

The meaning depends on the flavor of the Timing Reference Failure alarm.
Timing Reference Failure (SYNCREFFAIL) for photonic applications
The OT port has detected an SYNCREFFAIL at the LINEREF layer. A LINEREF detects
SYNCREFFAIL when the timing reference failed, (not Protected or Protection not
Available).
Timing Reference Failure (SYNCREFFAIL) for switching applications
One of the assigned timing references has failed.
Possible timing references are:
• External timing reference from either of two BITS external timing input ports
• Line timing reference from up to 6 STM- 64 transmission ports
Brief alarm overview - Timing Reference Failure (SYNCREFFAIL) for photonic applications
Timing Reference Failure alarm for photonic applications:
Alarm identifier / SYNCREFFAIL

Mnemonic
ASAP type LINEREF
Alarm source LINEREF-shelf-slot-{0-1}, LINEREFSYS
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Timing Reference Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Brief alarm overview - Timing Reference Failure (SYNCREFFAIL) for switching applications
Timing Reference Failure alarm for switching applications:
Alarm identifier / SYNCREFFAIL

Mnemonic
Effect on service Service-affecting (SA) if protection not available. Not
setting) SA Major (MJ)
NSA Minor (MN)
Alarm source External timing reference or line timing reference
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-441: “Clear Timing Reference Failure” (p. 3-735).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Timing reference is unassigned
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Timing reference is unassigned

Meaning of alarm
The OT port has detected an SYNCREFUNEQ at the LINEREF layer. A LINEREF
detects SYNCREFUNEQ when the timing reference is unassigned.

Timing reference is unassigned alarm:
Alarm identifier / SYNCREFUNEQ

Mnemonic
ASAP type LINEREF
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-442: “Clear Timing reference is unassigned alarm” (p. 3-737).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Timing reference out-of-frequency
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Timing reference out-of-frequency

Meaning of alarm
The SLTMSIG condition occurs when the OT port detects SLTMSIG at the LINEREF
layer. A LINEREF detects SLTMSIG when the timing reference frequency has moved off
the required accuracy limits .

Timing reference out-of-frequency alarm:
Alarm identifier / SLTMSIG

Mnemonic
ASAP type LINEREF
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-443: “Clear Timing reference out-of-frequency alarm” (p. 3-738).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Timing Reference Unequipped
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Timing Reference Unequipped

The respective external timing reference is unassigned.

Timing Reference Unequipped alarm:
Alarm identifier / SYNCREFUNEQ

Mnemonic
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-444: “Clear Timing Reference Unequipped” (p. 3-739).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Timing selection was switched by a manual command to a
Network element alarms timing reference
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Timing selection was switched by a manual command to a

timing reference
Meaning of alarm
The MANSWTIMREF condition occurs when OT port detects MANSWTIMREF at the
LINEREF layer. A LINEREF detects MANSWTIMREF when the timing selection is
switched by a manual command to a timing reference.

Timing selection was switched by a manual command to a timing
reference alarm:
Alarm identifier / MANSWTIMREF

Mnemonic
ASAP type LINEREF
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-447: “Clear Timing selection was switched by a manual
command to a timing reference ” (p. 3-744).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU

Meaning of alarm
This alarm is raised when the incoming optical channel trail trace message does not match
the expected incoming optical channel trail trace message.
• Mis-fibering
• Improper provisioning

Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU alarm:
Alarm identifier / TIMODU

Mnemonic
ASAP type ODU4
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “TIMODU” (p. B-50).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-445: “Clear Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU alarm” (p. 3-740).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Trace Identifier Mismatch - OTU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trace Identifier Mismatch - OTU

Meaning of alarm

Trace Identifier Mismatch - OTU alarm:
Alarm identifier / TIM

Mnemonic
OC192/STM64, OC768/STM256, OTU, OTU1f, OTU2, OTU2e,
OTU4
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “TIM” (p. B-50).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-446: “Clear Trace Identifier Mismatch - OTU ” (p. 3-742).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on HO Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on HO Path

The received path trace identifier in the J1 byte of the VC-n (VC-4, VC-4-4c, VC-4-16c)
Path Overhead (POH) does not match the expected path trace identifier provisioned for
the corresponding path termination.

Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on HO Path alarm:
Alarm identifier / TIM-P

Mnemonic
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-448: “ Clear Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on HO Path” (p. 3-745).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on OTN Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on OTN Path

Trail trace identifier mismatch on an OTN path. The received trail trace is not the same as
the expected trail trace. The trail trace identifier is transmitted in the TTI byte of the
OTU/ODU path monitoring overhead.

Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on OTN Path alarm:
Alarm identifier / TIM-P

Mnemonic
• ASAPODU0
• ASAPODU1
• ASAPODU2
• ASAPODU2E
• ASAPODU3
• ASAPODU3E2
• ASAPODU4
transmit direction
setting) in receive

Alarm source ODUk path (ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2E, ODU3, ODU3E2,
ODU4)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on OTN Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-449: “Clear Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on OTN Path” (p. 3-747).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section

Trail trace identifier mismatch on a section. The received trail trace is not the same as the
expected trail trace.
Trail trace identifier
For SDH the trail trace identifier is transmitted in the J0 byte of the regenerator section
overhead.
For SONET the trail trace identifier is transmitted in the J0 byte of the section overhead.
For OTH the trail trace identifier is transmitted in the TTI byte of the OTU/ODU section
monitoring overhead.

Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / TIM-S

Mnemonic
ASAP type For the SDH regenerator section: ASAPSTM1, ASAPSTM4,
ASAPSTM16, ASAPSTM64, ASAPSTM256
For the SONET section: ASAPOC3, ASAPOC12, ASAPOC48,
For the OTU section: ASAPOTU
Alarm source SDH: Regenerator Section (STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64)
SONET: Section (OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192)
OTH: OTUk section (OTU2, OTU2E, OTU3, OTU3E2, OTU4)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-450: “Clear Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section” (p. 3-750).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on TCM Layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on TCM Layer

The received trail trace is not the same as the expected trail trace. The trail trace identifier
is transmitted in the TTI byte of the OTU/ODU path monitoring overhead on a TCM
layer.

Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on TCM Layer alarm:
Alarm identifier / TIM-T - Switching applications

Mnemonic TIMTCM - Photonic applications
ASAP type ASAPTCM
Alarm severity (default SA Switching applications: Not reported (NR)
setting) Photonic applications: Critical (CR)
NSA Switching applications: Not reported (NR)
ODU3, ODU3E2, ODU4)
Photonic applications: 11QPA4
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-451: “ Clear Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on TCM Layer” (p. 3-752).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Type Mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type Mismatch
Meaning of alarm
Packets are received with an Ethertype indicating payload other than TSoP or RMD
management.

Type Mismatch alarm:
Mnemonic
ASAP type NA
Alarm source 11QCE12X-shelf-slot-RMD{1-32}/{customer}
11QPE24-shelf-slot-RMD{1-32}/{customer}
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-452: “Clear Type Mismatch ” (p. 3-756).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Unavailable Time, ODUk
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unavailable Time, ODUk

A period of unavailable time has been detected on the ODUk path layer.
A period of unavailable time begins at the onset of ten consecutive severely errored
second events. These ten seconds are considered to be part of unavailable time. A new
period of available time begins at the onset of ten consecutive non severely errored
second events. These ten seconds are considered to be part of available time.
Related information

Unavailable Time, ODUk alarm:
Alarm identifier / UAT-ODU

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPODUn
affected. Not service-affecting (NSA)
ODU4
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Unavailable Time, ODUk
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local indications
Trouble clearing
no unavailable time has been detected.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Unavailable Time, OTUk
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unavailable Time, OTUk

A period of unavailable time has been detected on the OTUk section layer.
Related information

Unavailable Time, OTUk alarm:
Alarm identifier / UAT-OTU

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPOTU
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Unavailable Time, OTUk
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Unavailable Time, Regenerator Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unavailable Time, Regenerator Section

A period of unavailable time has been detected on the STM-n regenerator section layer.
Related information

Unavailable Time, Regenerator Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / UAT-RS

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPSTMn
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Unavailable Time, Regenerator Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Unavailable Time, TCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unavailable Time, TCM

A period of unavailable time has been detected on the ODUk TCM layer.
Related information

Unavailable Time, TCM alarm:
Alarm identifier / UAT-TCM

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPTCM
ODU3E2, ODU4
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Unavailable Time, TCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Underlying Resource is Unavailable - Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Underlying Resource is Unavailable - Path

An I/O card has failed, and as a result, traffic over one or more ODUn paths is affected.
The alarm is reported against the path-level facilities (ODUn path termination functions
(PTF)) related to the card.
This alarm is not service-affecting if the path is
• not terminated, active or busy OR
• it is protected and the protection is available.
This alarm is service-affecting if the path is
• terminated, active or busy AND
• it is not protected or the protection is not available.

Underlying Resource is Unavailable - Path alarm:
Alarm identifier / URU-P

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPODUn
Alarm source I/O card
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Underlying Resource is Unavailable - Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-458: “Clear Underlying Resource is Unavailable - Path” (p. 3-762).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Underlying Resource is Unavailable - Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Underlying Resource is Unavailable - Section

An I/O card has failed, and as a result one or more OTU ports are affected.
The alarm is reported for all OTU ports related to the card.
This alarm is not service-affecting if the port is
• not terminated OR
This alarm is service-affecting if the port is
• terminated AND

Underlying Resource is Unavailable - Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / URU-S

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPOTU
Alarm source I/O card
Related information
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Underlying Resource is Unavailable - Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-460: “Clear Underlying Resource is Unavailable - Section” (p. 3-764).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Optical Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Optical Section

An SFP/XFP module has failed.
Likely causes
• No SFP/XFP module is present in the respective OM socket.
• A wrong SFP/XFP module is present in the respective OM socket.
• A hardware failure has been detected for the respective SFP/XFP module.
• The supporting SFC8 host of the optical multiplex section (OMS) or of the physical
interface of an Optical Channel member of an OMS has failed, has been physically
removed or is mismatched in the slot.
• The SFC8 host module of the optical transmission section (OTS) has failed, has been
physically removed or is mismatched in its slot.

Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Optical Section alarm:
Alarm identifier / URU-O

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPOCH
None for ASAPGBE, ASAPGBE10. GBE/GBE10
is transparently mapped into ODUn.
Alarm source Port (STM-n, OC-M, GbE, 10 GbE, OCh) related to the respective
XFP/SFP module.
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Optical Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-461: “Clear Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Optical Section”
(p. 3-765).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Section

An I/O card or server card has failed, and as a result, one or more ports (STM-N, OC-M,)
are affected.
The alarm is reported for all ports (STM-N, OC-M) related to the card.
This alarm is not service-affecting if the port is
• not terminated OR
This alarm is service-affecting if the port is
• terminated AND
Note: The Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Section alarm relates
to SDH/SONET ports. The corresponding alarm for OTU ports is
Underlying Resource is Unavailable - Section (see “Underlying
Resource is Unavailable - Section” (p. 2-985)).

Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Section alarm:

Mnemonic
ASAP type For SDH/SONET ports: ASAPOC48, ASAPOC192, ASAPOC768,
ASAPSTM16, ASAPSTM64, ASAPSTM256
Alarm source I/O card or server card.
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Section
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-477: “Clear Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Section” (p. 3-785).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Underlying resource unavailable - OTS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Underlying resource unavailable - OTS

Meaning of alarm

Underlying resource unavailable - OTS alarm:
Alarm identifier / URU-OCH-LOS

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTU1, OTU2, OTU3, OTU4
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “URU-OCH-LOS (LOS at Line Input)” (p. B-77).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Perform corrective action as described in the appropriate LOS alarm trouble-clearing
procedure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Underlying resource unavailable - card
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Underlying resource unavailable - card

Meaning of alarm
• The URU-S condition is raised against the Line In port of an LD when equipment
defects are present in the ingress or egress LD.
• The URU-S condition is raised against the Sig In port of a WR/CWR when equipment
defects are present in the WR/CWR.
• The URU-S condition is raised against the L1 port of an OT when equipment defects
are present in the OT.
The APRLINE alarm can also trigger the URU-S condition.

Underlying resource unavailable - card alarm:

Mnemonic
ASAP type Ingress LDs: OTS
MCS8-16 and OTs: OCH
All others: OMS
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “URU-S ” (p. B-78).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-453: “Clear Underlying resource unavailable - card ” (p. 3-757).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Underlying resource unavailable - OMS-RX
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Underlying resource unavailable - OMS-RX

Meaning of alarm
The URU-OMS-RX alarm condition indicates that there is an active LOSCWRSIG alarm
at the Sig In port of a CWR or WR card.

Underlying resource unavailable - OMS-RX alarm:
Alarm identifier / URU-OMS-RX

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
setting) NSA Not Alarmed (NA)
Alarm source See “URU-OMS-RX” (p. B-77).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-78: “Clear CWR Input LOS ” (p. 3-180)(LOSCWRSIG) at the
CWR/WR Sig In port. URU-OMS-RX will clear as LOSCWRSIG clears.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Underlying resource unavailable - OMS-TX
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Underlying resource unavailable - OMS-TX

Meaning of alarm
The URU-OMS-TX alarm condition indicates that there is an active LOSCWRSIG alarm
at the Sig In port of a WR8-88 card.

Underlying resource unavailable - OMS-TX alarm:
Alarm identifier / URU-OMS-TX

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source See “URU-OMS-TX” (p. B-77).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-454: “Clear Underlying resource unavailable - OMS-TX”
(p. 3-758).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-LOS

Meaning of alarm

Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-LOS alarm:
Alarm identifier / URU-OTS-LOS

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source See “URU-OTS-LOS” (p. B-78).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-455: “Clear Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-LOS ”
(p. 3-759).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-RX
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-RX

Meaning of alarm
The Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-RX alarm is raised if ingress
signal path alarms are detected when LOS-P is not active at the line interface.

Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-RX alarm:
Alarm identifier / URU-OTS-RX

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source See “URU-OTS-RX” (p. B-78).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-456: “Clear Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-RX ”
(p. 3-760).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-TX
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-TX

Meaning of alarm
The Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-TX alarm is raised when egress
signal path alarms are detected.

Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-TX alarm:
Alarm identifier / URU-OTS-TX

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source See “URU-OTS-TX” (p. B-78).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-457: “Clear Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-TX ”
(p. 3-761).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Underlying Resource Unavailable - Port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Underlying Resource Unavailable - Port

Meaning of alarm
The URU-OTU condition indicates that a pluggable module failure has occurred on the
OT card.

Underlying Resource Unavailable - Port alarm:
Alarm identifier / URU-OTU

Mnemonic
Alarm source See “URU-OTU (Port)” (p. B-78).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-459: “Clear Underlying resource unavailable - port” (p. 3-763).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Unexpected Level
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unexpected Level
Meaning of alarm

Unexpected Level alarm:
Alarm identifier / RmdMepUNL

Mnemonic
ASAP type RMD
setting) NSA –
Alarm source 11QPE24-shelf-slot-RMD{1-32}-Level{1-8191}
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-462: “Clear Unexpected Level” (p. 3-767).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Unexpected MEG Level
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unexpected MEG Level

Meaning of alarm
The UNL condition indicates that the 11DPE12A card received a first CCM frame with an
incorrect MEG level.
The OT port has detected a UNL at the MEP layer. A MEP detects UNL when it receives
a CCM frame with a incorrect MEG level (i.e., MEG level is lower than MEP's own
MEG level .Such a defect condition is most likely caused by misconfiguration, but could
also be caused by a hardware/software failure in the network.

Unexpected MEG Level alarm:
Alarm identifier / UNL

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “UNL” (p. B-77).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-463: “Clear Unexpected MEG Level ” (p. 3-768).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Unexpected MEP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unexpected MEP
Meaning of alarm
The UNM condition indicates that an OT port has detected a UNM at the MEP layer. A
MEP detects UNM when it receives a CCM frame with a correct MEG level (that is, a
MEG level equal to the MEP's own MEG level), or a correct MEG ID but an Unexpected
MEP ID which includes the MEP's own MEP ID. Determination of Unexpected MEP ID
is possible when the MEP maintains a list of its peer MEP IDs. A list of peer MEP IDs
must be configured on each MEP during provisioning. This defect condition is most likely
caused by misconfiguration.

Unexpected MEP alarm:
Alarm identifier / UNM

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “UNM” (p. B-77).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-464: “Clear Unexpected MEP ” (p. 3-769).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Unexpected MEP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unexpected MEP
Meaning of alarm

Unexpected MEP alarm:
Alarm identifier / RmdMepUNM

Mnemonic
ASAP type RMD
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-465: “Clear Unexpected MEP” (p. 3-770).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Unexpected MEP or unexpected periodicity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unexpected MEP or unexpected periodicity

Meaning of alarm
The OT port has detected a UNG or UNP at the MEP layer.
A MEP detects Unexpected MEP or “unexpected period” when it receives one of the
following:
• CCM frame with a correct MEG level (that is, the MEG level is the same as the
MEP's own MEG level) and a correct MEG ID, but an Unexpected MEP ID which
includes the MEP's own MEP ID
• CCM frame with a correct MEG level (that is, the MEG level is equal to the MEP's
own MEG level), a correct MEG ID, a correct MEP ID, but with period field value
different than the MEP's own CCM transmission period
Determining the unexpected MEP ID is possible when the MEP maintains a list of its peer
MEP IDs. A list of peer MEP IDs must be configured on each MEP during provisioning.
This condition is most likely caused by misconfiguration.
The alarm is cleared when the MEP does not receive CCM frames an expected MEP ID,
or MEP does not receive a CCM frame with an incorrect period field value.

Unexpected MEP or unexpected periodicity alarm:
Alarm identifier / UNG/UNP

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source See “UNG/UNP” (p. B-76).
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Unexpected MEP or unexpected periodicity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-466: “Clear Unexpected MEP or unexpected periodicity ”
(p. 3-771).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Unexpected Periodicity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unexpected Periodicity
Meaning of alarm
The UNP condition indicates that an OT port has detected a UNP at the MEP layer. A
MEP detects UNP when it receives a CCM frame with a correct MEG level (that is, a
MEG level equal to the MEP's own MEG level), a correct MEG ID, or a correct MEP ID,
but with period field value different than the MEP's own CCM transmission period. This
defect condition is most likely caused by misconfiguration.

Unexpected Periodicity alarm:
Alarm identifier / UNP

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source 11DPE12A-shelf-slot-{MD1-MD32}-{MA1-MA312}-MEP ID
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-467: “Clear Unexpected Periodicity” (p. 3-772).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Unexpected Periodicity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unexpected Periodicity
Meaning of alarm

Unexpected Periodicity alarm:
Alarm identifier / RmdMepUNP

Mnemonic
ASAP type RMD
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-468: “Clear Unexpected Periodicity” (p. 3-773).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Unexpected Priority
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unexpected Priority
Meaning of alarm
The UNPr condition indicates that an OT port has detected a UNP at the MEP layer. A
MEP detects UNPr when it receives a CCM frame with a correct MEG level (that is, a
MEG level equal to the MEP's own MEG level), a correct MEG ID, or a correct MEP ID,
but with period field value different than the MEP's own CCM transmission period. This
defect condition is most likely caused by misconfiguration.

Unexpected Priority alarm:
Alarm identifier / UNPr

Mnemonic
ASAP type MEP
Alarm source 11DPE12A-shelf-slot-{MD1-MD32}-{MA1-MA312}-MEP ID
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-469: “Clear Unexpected Priority” (p. 3-774).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Unit Not Inserted
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unit Not Inserted

Meaning of alarm

Unit Not Inserted alarm:
Alarm identifier / RmdIfMauUNI

Mnemonic
ASAP type RMD
setting) NSA –
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-470: “Clear Unit Not Inserted” (p. 3-775).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Unknown ECID
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unknown ECID
Meaning of alarm
The Unknown ECID alarm is raised when TSoP packets are received with an ECID not
matching the local ECID configuration.

Unknown ECID alarm:
Mnemonic
ASAP type NA
Alarm source See “Unknown ECID” (p. B-76).
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-471: “Clear Unknown ECID ” (p. 3-776).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Unknown OCH Trail for xconnect
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unknown OCH Trail for xconnect

Meaning of alarm
The NE has not received the OCh trail information for this Cross-Connect from the trail's
head NE. While this condition is asserted, Wavelength Tracker monitoring for this
channel is not active on this NE. This alarm may be raised for the following reasons:
• The head NE X-Connect for this OCh trail may not have been created.
• There may not be proper CN/OSPF connectivity between the NEs to allow for the
distribution of trail information.

Unknown OCH Trail for xconnect alarm:
Alarm identifier / OCHTRAILUNKNOWN

Mnemonic
ASAP type OCH
Alarm source See “OCHTRAILUNKNOWN ” (p. B-35).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-472: “Clear Unknown OCH Trail for xconnect alarm” (p. 3-777).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Unsupported hardware version
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unsupported hardware version

Meaning of alarm

Unsupported hardware version alarm:

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Alarm source FAN
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-473: “Clear Unsupported hardware version ” (p. 3-779).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Upgrade MTX size
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Upgrade MTX size

The Upgrade MTX size condition is an indication that the preconditions for a matrix
size upgrade are fulfilled, and that the upgrade is possible.
Matrix size upgrade
The matrix size upgrade is controlled by the MTXSIZE parameter of a PSS-36 or PSS-64
shelf. When the MTXSIZE parameter is increased then the provisioned type of matrix card
is changed accordingly.
Note: Due to the fact, that the matrix cards are mandatory equipment, the provisioned
type of matrix card cannot be changed directly by a user command.
These matrix size upgrades are supported:
• For a PSS-64 shelf, the MTXSIZE parameter can be increased from 1920 to 3840.
• For a PSS-36 shelf, the MTXSIZE parameter can be increased from 960 to 1920.
Important! The MTXSIZE parameter can only be increased, decreasing of the
parameter is not possible.
These are the preconditions for a matrix size upgrade:
• Both matrix cards that are physically present in the shelf must support the higher
capacity, that is:
– In a PSS-64 shelf, matrix cards of type MT3T8 must be present.
– In a PSS-36 shelf, matrix cards of type MT1T9C must be present.
• The MTXSIZE parameter is currently set to the lower capacity, that is:
– For a PSS-64 shelf, the MTXSIZE parameter is set to 1920.
– For a PSS-36 shelf, the MTXSIZE parameter is set to 960.
When these preconditions are fulfilled, then the MTXSIZE parameter can be increased and
thus a matrix size upgrade be performed.

Upgrade MTX size alarm:
Alarm identifier / UPGSWITCH

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPEQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Upgrade MTX size
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm source System
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Upgrade MTX size is to be understood as an information rather than as an alarm; no
corrective action is required.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Upstream Channel Absent
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Upstream Channel Absent

Meaning of alarm
The Upstream Channel Absent condition occurs when the Wavelength Tracker
cannot detect the provisioned channel going through the amplifier and is raising a
non-alarmed condition to indicate that an upstream failure exists.
Possible reasons for this condition may be:
• the channel is missing (possibly due to a provisioning or fibering error)
• the channel is outside the detectable range
• the Wavekeys are not being correctly applied at the source OT or SVAC

Upstream Channel Absent alarm:
Alarm identifier / USLOS

Mnemonic
ASAP type OCH
Alarm source See “USLOS” (p. B-79).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-474: “Clear Upstream Channel Absent alarm” (p. 3-780).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Upstream Channel collision
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Upstream Channel collision

Meaning of alarm
port.

Upstream Channel collision alarm:
Alarm identifier / USOCHCOLLISION

Mnemonic
ASAP type OCH
Alarm source See “OCHCOLLISION” (p. B-34).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-475: “Clear Upstream Channel collision” (p. 3-782).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details User inactive
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User inactive
Meaning of alarm
The DORMANTUSER condition is a user login inactivity timeout (maximum interval
that the user is inactive, without logging into the NE, before the userID is disabled).

User inactive alarm:
Alarm identifier / DORMANTUSER

Mnemonic
ASAP type COM
Alarm source SYSTEM
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-476: “Clear User inactive alarm” (p. 3-784).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details User Payload type (GFP) Mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Payload type (GFP) Mismatch

The received user payload identifier (UPI) does not match the expected value.
The User Payload type (GFP) Mismatch alarm is relevant for GFP-F-mapped
Ethernet payload only, that is for:
mapping)

User Payload type (GFP) Mismatch alarm:
Alarm identifier / GFPUPM

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPODU2
setting) NSA –
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-478: “Clear User Payload type (GFP) Mismatch” (p. 3-786).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Detected low voltage from on-board power supply
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Detected low voltage from on-board power supply

Meaning of alarm
Either the voltage level of the external DC supply is low or the breaker switch has been
turned off. This alarm is raised if there is no voltage going to the breaker feed or the
voltage is below the threshold. This could be due to the breaker being shut off, or due to a
problem with the power feed to the breaker card.

Detected low voltage from on-board power supply alarm:
Alarm identifier / VOLTAGELOW

Mnemonic
ASAP type EQPT
setting) NSA –
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-479: “Clear Detected low voltage from on-board power supply”
(p. 3-788).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details VCG Loss of alignment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VCG Loss of alignment

Meaning of alarm
A loss of alignment has occurred in the virtual concatenation (mapping of a 1GbE signal
from a 11STMM10 client port into 24 STS-1s for 11STMM10 network port
transmission). The VCGLOA condition is masked by any higher level SONET section or
line alarms, so if this alarm is present it means that the 11STMM10 is receiving a valid,
error-free OC-48 network signal.

VCG Loss of alignment alarm:
Alarm identifier / VCGLOA

Mnemonic
ASAP type 1GbE, FC100, FC200, FC400
setting) NSA –
Alarm source 11STMM10
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-480: “Clear VCG Loss of alignment alarm” (p. 3-790).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details VCG Server Signal Failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VCG Server Signal Failure

The OT has detected a VCG Server Signal Failure. This rare condition is raised
when the time slots are incorrect.

VCG Server Signal Failure alarm:
Alarm identifier / VCGSSF

Mnemonic
ASAP type 1GbE, FC100, FC200, FC400
setting) NSA –
Alarm source 11STMM10
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-481: “Clear VCG Server Signal Failure” (p. 3-792).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details VTS Forward Defect Indication
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VTS Forward Defect Indication

The OT has detected a VTS Forward Defect Indication. This condition is raised when a
problem has occurred upstream that causes an APS/PCC failure indication on the Virtual
Time Slot [n] received by the 11DPE12A/11DPE12E.

VTS Forward Defect Indication alarm:
Alarm identifier / VTSFDI

Mnemonic
ASAP type VTS
Alarm source See “VTSFDI” (p. B-79).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-482: “Clear VTS Forward Defect Indication” (p. 3-793).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details VTS Open Connection Indication
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VTS Open Connection Indication

The OT has detected a Virtual Time Slot Open Connection Indication on an associated
VTS. This condition is raised when the downstream 11DPE12A/11DPE12E OT receives
an APS/PCC message indicating an OCI from the upstream OT. The
VTS Open Connection Indication alarm is raised at the downstream OT on the
Virtual Time Slot [n] which has an established connection.

VTS Open Connection Indication alarm:
Alarm identifier / VTSOCI

Mnemonic
ASAP type VTS
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “VTSOCI” (p. B-79).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-483: “Clear VTS Open Connection Indication” (p. 3-794).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Wait to Restore
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wait to Restore
The Wait to Restore alarm is used with the following alarm sources:
• STSn (switching application)
• VCn (switching application)
• ODUn (switching application)
• Timing reference signals (switching and photonic applications)
Depending on the alarm source, the meaning of the alarm is different.
Meaning of the alarm for STSn (Switching applications)
(Automatic) Set on Preferred path of a UPSR when switching is revertive and alarms
have cleared on Preferred and the Wait to Restore to Preferred period is in effect.
Meaning of the alarm for VCn (Switching applications)
(Automatic) set on working path of an SNCP when switching is revertive and defects
have cleared on the working path and the Wait-to-Restore timer is in effect.
Meaning of the alarm for ODUn (Switching applications)
(Automatic) set on working path of an SNCP when switching is revertive and defects
have cleared on the working path and the Wait-to-Restore timer is in effect.
Meaning of the alarm for timing reference signals (Photonic applications and
Switching applications)
Photonic applications:
The OT port has detected WTR at the LINEREF layer. A LINEREF detects WTR when
on a timing reference and defects have cleared and the Wait to Restore timer is in effect
Switching applications:
(Automatic) Set on a timing reference and defects have cleared and the Wait-to-Restore
timer is in effect.

Wait to Restore condition for STSn, VCn, ODUn:
Alarm identifier / WTR

Mnemonic
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Wait to Restore
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ASAP type ASAPSTSn, ASAPVCn, ASAPODUn,

Alarm source STSn, VCn, ODUn
Notes:

Wait to Restore condition for timing reference signals:

Mnemonic
ASAP type Photonic applications: LINEREF
Switching applications: ASAPTIMING
Alarm source Timing reference signal: PTPCTL
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Wait to Restore event is to be understood as an information rather than as an
alarm and corresponds to the time to wait before switching back after a failure has
cleared. It will be cleared autonomously after expiry of the wait to restore timer.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Wait to Restore - Far End
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wait to Restore - Far End

In a 1:N ODUk SNC/S protection, a facility is in the wait to restore (WTR) state due to a
request from the far end.

Wait to Restore - Far End condition:

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPFFP
Notes:
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Wait to Restore - Far End condition is to be understood as an information
rather than as an alarm and corresponds to the time to wait before switching back after a
failure has cleared. It will be cleared autonomously after expiry of the wait to restore
timer.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Warm Start
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Warm Start
Meaning of alarm
This is a normal report caused by user actions.

Warm Start alarm:
Alarm identifier / SYSBOOT

Mnemonic
ASAP type COM
Alarm source SYSTEM
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
No action required. This is a normal report caused by user actions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Wave Key Not Available
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wave Key Not Available

Meaning of alarm
The Wave Key Not Available alarm is raised when the NE is unable to select
wavekeys for the interface based on the Wavelength Tracker keying preference for the
OCh cross-connect, and the usage of wave keys within the network.
• Wave key preference of none for cross-connect: No wave keys are available in the
network (for the OCh frequency of the cross-connect) to be allocated to the Wave key
encoder. For this case to occur the OCh frequency is still locked for Wave key pair
duplicate reuse.
• Wave key preference of force no duplicates for cross-connect: No unique wave keys
are available in the network (for the OCh frequency of the cross-connect) to be
allocated to the Wave key encoder. This case can occur regardless of whether the OCh
frequency is locked for Wavekey pair duplicate reuse.
When this condition occurs, the Wave key encoder cannot be assigned keys and remains
unkeyed. Until this situation is resolved the service cannot launch properly, be power
controlled correctly, nor be monitored normally.

Wave Key Not Available alarm:
Alarm identifier / OCHKEYUNAVAIL

Mnemonic
ASAP type OCH
setting) NSA –
Alarm source See “OCHKEYUNAVAIL” (p. B-35).
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Wave Key Not Available
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-484: “Clear Wave Key Not Available ” (p. 3-795).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Wave Key Overlap
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wave Key Overlap

Meaning of alarm
This NE has detected that the service which is raising this condition has experienced a
provisioning problem. The Wavelength Tracker wavekeys which are configured during
service creation need to be rekeyed. This is a non-service impacting event. Potential
transient Wavelength Tracker wavekey conditions may be created and then cleared as a
result of the rekey operation.

Wave Key Overlap alarm:
Alarm identifier / OCHKEYOVERLAP

Mnemonic
ASAP type OCH
Alarm source See “OCHKEYOVERLAP” (p. B-34).
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-485: “Clear Wave Key overlap alarm” (p. 3-797).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Wave Key pair re-used for channel on node
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wave Key pair re-used for channel on node

Meaning of alarm
The Wave Key pair re-used for channel on node alarm is raised when the NE
determines there are two or more OCH cross-connects on the node that are assigned the
same wave key pair. The alarm is provided to indicate if a situation is developing where it
may be difficult to fault isolate a miscabling or equipment failure that results in channels
being directed off their expected path.
Generally this situation may be ignored because there are usually several channels on
each WDM port, and unless the set of wave keys assigned to channels on one port exactly
matches those assigned on another port, some unique wave keys exist which can be used
to determine a mis-route between ports.
The alarm is raised at the port at the end-point of the OCH cross-connect corresponding
to the direction the wave keys are used as a duplicate pair. In the case of the add
cross-connect, the alarm is raised at the encoder port if the duplication occurs in that
direction. There will be two such alarms on the NE if there is one pair reused on the NE,
thus indicating both OCH cross-connects involved.

Wave Key pair re-used for channel on node alarm:
Alarm identifier / OCHKEYSREUSED

Mnemonic
ASAP type OCH
Alarm source See “OCHKEYSREUSED” (p. B-34).
Local indications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Wave Key pair re-used for channel on node
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-486: “Clear Wave Key pair re-used for channel on node”
(p. 3-798).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Working entity forced to switch back to working
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Working entity forced to switch back to working

Forced switch of service from protection back to working facility.

Working entity forced to switch back to working condition:

Mnemonic
• ASAPFFP
• 1+1 ODUk SNCP2
STS-48c)
• 1+1 MSP
Notes:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Working entity forced to switch back to working
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Working entity forced to switch back to working condition is to be
soon as the forced switch request is cleared.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Working entity forced to switch back to working - Far End
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Working entity forced to switch back to working - Far End

Forced switch of service from the protection back to the working facility at the far end of
a 1:N ODUk SNC/S protection.

Working entity forced to switch back to working - Far End condition:

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPFFP
Notes:
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Working entity forced to switch back to working - Far End
autonomously as soon as the forced switch request is cleared.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Working entity forced to switch to protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Working entity forced to switch to protection

Forced switch of service from working to protection facility.

Working entity forced to switch to protection condition:

Mnemonic
• ASAPFFP
• 1+1 ODUk SNCP2
STS-48c)
• 1+1 MSP
Notes:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Working entity forced to switch to protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Working entity forced to switch to protection condition is to be
soon as the forced switch request is cleared.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Working entity forced to switch to protection - Far End
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Working entity forced to switch to protection - Far End

Forced switch of service from the working to the protection facility due to a request from
the far end of a 1:N ODUk SNC/S protection.

Working entity forced to switch to protection - Far End condition:

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPFFP
Notes:
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Working entity forced to switch to protection - Far End condition
is to be understood as an information rather than as an alarm and will be cleared
autonomously as soon as the forced switch request is cleared.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Working entity switched back to working
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Working entity switched back to working

(Automatic) switch of service from protection back to working facility.

Working entity switched back to working condition:

Mnemonic
• ASAPFFP
• 1+1 ODUk SNCP2
STS-48c)
• 1+1 MSP
Notes:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Working entity switched back to working
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Working entity switched back to working condition is to be understood
as information rather than as an alarm and will be cleared autonomously as soon as the
switch request is cleared.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Working entity switched back to working - Far End
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Working entity switched back to working - Far End

(Automatic) switch of service from the protection back to the working facility at the far
end of a 1:N ODUk SNC/S protection.

Working entity switched back to working - Far End condition:

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPFFP
Notes:
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Working entity switched back to working - Far End condition is to be
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Working entity switched to protection - Far End
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Working entity switched to protection - Far End

(Automatic) switch of service from the working to the protection facility at the far end of
a 1:N ODUk SNC/S protection.

Working entity switched to protection - Far End condition:

Mnemonic
ASAP type ASAPFFP
Notes:
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Working entity switched to protection - Far End condition is to be
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Wrong Dest Mac
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wrong Dest Mac

Meaning of alarm
The Wrong Dest Mac alarm is raised when TSoP packets are received with a
destination address not matching the SFP MAC address.

Wrong Dest Mac alarm:
Mnemonic
ASAP type NA
Alarm source 11QPE24-shelf-slot-RMD{1-32}/{customer}
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-487: “Clear Wrong Dest Mac ” (p. 3-801).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Wrong Device Present
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wrong Device Present

Meaning of alarm

Wrong Device Present alarm:
Alarm identifier / RmdWDP

Mnemonic
ASAP type RMD
Alarm source 11QPE24-shelf-slot-RMD{1-32}
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-488: “Clear Wrong Device Present ” (p. 3-802).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Wrong Unit Inserted
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wrong Unit Inserted

Meaning of alarm

Wrong Unit Inserted alarm:
Alarm identifier / RmdIfMauWUP

Mnemonic
ASAP type RMD
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-489: “Clear Wrong Unit Inserted” (p. 3-803).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details WTOCM Input LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WTOCM Input LOS

Meaning of alarm
The LOSOCM condition indicates that a input loss of signal has occurred on the reported
WTOCM input port.

WTOCM Input LOS alarm:
Alarm identifier / LOSOCM

Mnemonic
ASAP type OTS
Alarm source WTOCM
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
Proceed to Procedure 3-490: “Clear WTOCM Input LOS alarm” (p. 3-804).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Y-cable Switchover Timer Expired
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Y-cable Switchover Timer Expired

The Y-cable Switchover Timer Expired alarm applies to line cards in the case
where there is optical splitter protection. Communications is present between the working
and protection cards, however, requests (such as a request to turn the laser off) is not
implemented. In this case this condition is raised against the card that is not complying
with the request.

Y-cable Switchover Timer Expired alarm:
Alarm identifier / SWMTXMOD

Mnemonic
ASAP type Depending on the affected line card:
• 1GBE, 10GBE, CBR2G5, CBRAR, FC100, FC200, FC400,
FE, OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4, OC48/STM16,
OC192/STM64, OC768/STM256, OTU1, OTU2, OTU3
Effect on service Depending on the affected line card:
• Service-affecting (SA): 11DPE12E (1GBE, FE), 11DPM12
(OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4, OC48/STM16, 1GBE, FC100,
FC200, FC400, CBRAR), 11QPA4 (OC192/STM64, 10GBE,
FC800, FC1200), 11STAR1 (OC192/STM64, 10GBE,
FC1200), 11STAR1A (OTU2, OC192/STM64, 10GBE,
FC1200), 11STMM10 (OTU1, CBR2G5, 1GBE, FC100,
FC200, FC400, OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4, OC48/STM16)
• Not service-affecting (NSA): 112SCX10 (OTU2,
OC192/STM64, 10GBE, FC800), 112SNX10, 43SCX4
(OTU2, OC192/STM64, 10GBE, FC800), 43SCX4E (OTU2,
OC192/STM64, 10GBE, FC800), 43STA1PB (OTU3,
OC768/STM256), 43STX4 (OTU2, OC192/STM64, 10GBE),
43STX4P (OTU2, OC192/STM64, 10GBE)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Y-cable Switchover Timer Expired
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm source 112SCX10, 112SNX10, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11QPA4,

11STAR1, 11STMM10, 43SCX4, 43SCX4E, 43STA1PB,
43STX4, 43STX4P
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-491: “Clear Y-cable Switchover Timer Expired” (p. 3-805).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
The present section contains information about the control plane alarms that can be
reported by Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS network elements.

Control plane alarms are reported by means of a notification channel on the
CORBA-based TMF MTNM network management interface (NMI) toward the
Alcatel-Lucent 1350 OMS network management system (NMS). Hence, control plane
alarms are not visible at the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC but only at the Alcatel-Lucent
1350 OMS. Moreover, control plane alarms do not have an alarm short designation, and
they are not part of any alarm severity assignment profile (ASAP).
Therefore, the brief alarm overview table as it is used for other alarms does not apply to
control plane alarms. A shortened variant of alarm overview table is used for control
plane alarms, indicating the “Applicability” for switching applications or photonic
applications or both, the “Alarm category”, the “Alarm severity”, and the “Alarm source”.
The alarm severity of control plane alarms is the perceived severity as reported by the NE
in the alarm notification toward the Alcatel-Lucent 1350 OMS. Control plane alarms
typically have a perceived severity of Major (MJ) in case they indicate that a control
plane interface is down, or Warning (WR) otherwise.
Contents
Active Failed - APE failed 2-1050

Active Failed - Cross connection problem 2-1051
Active Failed - Endpoint failure 2-1052
Active Failed - Preemption 2-1053
Active Failed - Transmission problem 2-1054
Active failed - Unprotected 2-1055
APE in progress 2-1056
Backup unavailable 2-1057
Channel assignment violation 2-1058
Color violation 2-1059
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DPR degraded 2-1060

DPR down 2-1061
DPR Network Version Mismatch 2-1062
GMRE degraded 2-1063
GMRE in active traffic migration state 2-1064
GMRE in automatic restoration disabled mode 2-1065
InBandComm degraded 2-1066
InBandComm down 2-1067
Latency violation 2-1068
Link diversity violation 2-1069
Logical node not reachable 2-1070
NE not reachable 2-1071
Nominal Unavailable - Communication problem 2-1072
Nominal unavailable - Configuration problem 2-1073
Nominal Unavailable - Indeterminate problem 2-1074
Nominal unavailable - Reversion preempt 2-1075
Nominal Unavailable - TP Blocked 2-1076
Nominal Unavailable - Transmission problem 2-1077
Optical feasibility violation 2-1078
Optical parameter file error 2-1079
OutbandComm degraded 2-1080
OutBandComm down 2-1081
Ready to revert 2-1082
Rerouted 2-1083
Reroute not possible 2-1084
RSVP degraded 2-1085
RSVP down 2-1086
SNC in automatic restoration disabled mode 2-1087
SNCP degraded 2-1088
SRG violation 2-1089
TCA Channel Margin 2-1091
Test Mode enabled 2-1092
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Active Failed - APE failed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Active Failed - APE failed

Important! This alarm applies to photonic applications only.
The active route of a control plane service, with a protection type of source-based
restoration (SBR), guaranteed restoration (GR), or 1+1 protection and restoration
combined (PRC), has failed due to a failure of the Automatic Power Equalization (APE).
As a result, the system tries to establish a backup path in order to reroute the traffic.

Active Failed - APE failed alarm:
Applicability Photonic applications only

Alarm category Control plane
Alarm severity Warning (WR)
Alarm source Control plane subnetwork connection
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-492: “Clear Active Failed - APE failed” (p. 3-808).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Active Failed - Cross connection problem
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Active Failed - Cross connection problem

combined (PRC), has failed due to a problem with a cross-connection of the actual path.
As a result, the system tries to establish a backup path in order to reroute the traffic.

Active Failed - Cross connection problem alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-493: “Clear Active Failed - Cross connection problem ” (p. 3-810).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Active Failed - Endpoint failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Active Failed - Endpoint failure

combined (PRC), has failed due to a SNC if the SNC drop port(s) at A-End and/or Z-End
has a transmission alarm. In this case the SNC is failed but GMRE cannot restore the
SNC. GMRE will not teardown the SNC

Active Failed - Endpoint failure alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-494: “Clear Active Failed - Endpoint failure” (p. 3-812).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Active Failed - Preemption
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Active Failed - Preemption

combined (PRC), has been preempted by another control plane service with a higher
priority. As a result, the system tries to establish a backup path for the preempted service.

Active Failed - Preemption alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-495: “Clear Active Failed - Preemption” (p. 3-814).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Active Failed - Transmission problem
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Active Failed - Transmission problem

combined (PRC), has failed due to a transmission problem. As a result, the system tries to
establish a backup path in order to reroute the traffic.

Active Failed - Transmission problem alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-496: “Clear Active Failed - Transmission problem” (p. 3-815).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Active failed - Unprotected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Active failed - Unprotected

The active route of an unprotected control plane service has failed. There is no protection
or restoration mechanism available.
Note: As the alarm relates to an unprotected service, the traffic is interrupted.

Active failed - Unprotected alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-497: “Clear Active failed - Unprotected ” (p. 3-817).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details APE in progress
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APE in progress
Important! This condition applies to photonic applications only.
Automatic Power Equalization (APE) is in progress.
Note: As long as the APE in progress condition is present, the service is not
operational.

The following tabular overview summarizes important information concerning the APE in
progress condition:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The APE in progress condition is to be understood as an information rather than as an
alarm and will be cleared autonomously as soon as the APE is complete.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Backup unavailable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Backup unavailable
Note: This alarm is relevant for subnetwork connections with a service type of
guaranteed restoration (GR) only.
There is no precalculated backup path available for the respective subnetwork connection.
In case of failures, source-based restoration (SBR) will be used.

Backup unavailable alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-498: “Clear Backup unavailable” (p. 3-818).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Channel assignment violation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Channel assignment violation

The active route of the alarm-reporting label-switched path (LSP) uses a channel that
violates the allowed wavelength set of a link. There is the risk of a signal degradation due
to cross-phase modulation (XPM).
Typical causes of the Channel assignment violation alarm are:
• After a GMRE network version upgrade, already existent LSPs use channels that are
no longer allowed.
This may especially be the case when upgrading from a network version that has no
allowed wavelength sets defined to a network version supporting allowed wavelength
sets. Allowed wavelength sets are introduced with the GMRE network version 6.0.0,
corresponding to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Release 6.0.0.
• After a modification of the allowed wavelength sets, already existent LSPs use
channels that are no longer allowed.
Important! Existent traffic is preserved in case of violations, and the GMRE
performs a soft-reroute for the affected channels, if possible.
For additional information, also see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS GMPLS/GMRE Guide.

Channel assignment violation alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-499: “Clear Channel assignment violation” (p. 3-819).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Color violation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Color violation
The current route of the label-switched path (LSP) breaks the link color constraints
regarding the specified include or exclude colors.
Possible causes for a Color violation alarm are:
• A nominal route has been specified that violates the link color contraints (nevertheless
the service will be setup).
• For an existing service the link color contraints have been modified in such a way that
the current route of that service now violates the link color contraints.

The following tabular overview summarizes important information concerning the Color
violation alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-500: “Clear Color violation” (p. 3-821).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details DPR degraded
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DPR degraded
The OSPF routing protocol, which is used for data plane routing (DPR) between the
adjacent nodes, is not fully operational.
The DPR degraded alarm typically occurs during the start up phase of the OSPF
protocol, when OSPF Hellos are already working, but no OSPF database exchange has
been done.

DPR degraded alarm:

Alarm source Control plane protocol (DPR)
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-501: “Clear DPR degraded” (p. 3-822).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details DPR down
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DPR down
The data plane routing (DPR) control plane communication interface is down. The
communication to the adjacent node for OSPF data plane routing is not working.
The supervision of the OSPF data plane routing interface is realized by means of OSPF
Hellos. A timeout of OSPF Hellos sets the interface to down.
Typical causes of the alarm are:
• IP communication problem between neighbor nodes
• Incompatible DPR timer configuration between adjacent nodes
• Administrative state of the DPR interface is down
Note: When enabling or disabling the DPR control plane protocol, this alarm will
almost inevitably come up, as it is practically impossible to enable or disable the
protocol at both sides of the communication link at the same moment.

DPR down alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-502: “Clear DPR down” (p. 3-823).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details DPR Network Version Mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DPR Network Version Mismatch

The GMRE active network version of the adjacent node does not match the active
network version of the local node.

DPR Network Version Mismatch alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-503: “Clear DPR Network Version Mismatch” (p. 3-824).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details GMRE degraded
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GMRE degraded
The GMRE is currently degraded and not fully operational.
This alarm is raised if
• Any of the GMRE processes is down
• The communication between GMRE processes is disturbed
• The communication between the GMRE and the NE is disturbed
• The SLC is not reachable or not loaded.

GMRE degraded alarm:

Alarm source Control plane
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-504: “Clear GMRE degraded” (p. 3-825).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details GMRE in active traffic migration state
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GMRE in active traffic migration state

The GMRE is currently in the migration preparation state.
This condition is raised when the administrative state of the GMRE node is set to
MigrationPreparation, and cleared when the migration is either cancelled or
successfully finished after takeover.

GMRE in active traffic migration state condition:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The GMRE in active traffic migration state condition is to be understood as
an information rather than as an alarm and will be cleared autonomously as soon as the
migration is either cancelled or successfully finished after takeover.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details GMRE in automatic restoration disabled mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GMRE in automatic restoration disabled mode

The restoration mode of the GMRE node is set to manual restoration.
Manual restoration is typically used during maintenance activities or in disaster recovery
scenarios to inhibit automatic restoration.

GMRE in automatic restoration disabled mode condition:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The GMRE in automatic restoration disabled mode condition is to be
soon as the automatic restoration mode is enabled again.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details InBandComm degraded
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
InBandComm degraded
The IP communication via embedded communication channels (ECCs) is not fully
operational. There is a problem on at least one embedded communication channel (ECC)
of the ECC protection group, the ECC might not be protected anymore. ECC problems
are derived from problems of the corresponding OTH link.

InBandComm degraded alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-505: “Clear InBandComm degraded” (p. 3-828).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details InBandComm down
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
InBandComm down
The IP communication via embedded communication channels (ECCs) is not working, all
ECCs of the ECC protection group have failed.

InBandComm down alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-506: “Clear InBandComm down” (p. 3-830).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Latency violation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Latency violation
During service setup, one of the specified nominal paths violates the end-to-end latency
constraint.
Note: In spite of the latency violation, the service will be setup.
Number of nominal paths
The number of nominal paths depends on the type of service:
• For unprotected, source-based restoration (SBR), and guaranteed restoration (GR)
services, there is one nominal path.
• For subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) and 1+1 protection and restoration
combined (PRC) services, there are two nominal paths, main and spare.

Latency violation alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-507: “Clear Latency violation” (p. 3-832).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Link diversity violation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Link diversity violation

For the current route of the label-switched path (LSP), no fully link-diverse backup route
could be found.

Link diversity violation alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-508: “Clear Link diversity violation” (p. 3-833).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Logical node not reachable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Logical node not reachable

A logical node (PSS-36 or PSS-64 shelf) is not reachable, that is, the communication to
this shelf is disturbed.
Typically this alarm is caused if the shelf has a problem, for example due to a process
restart.
The logical node ID (shelf ID) is indicated in the alarm notification.

Logical node not reachable alarm:

Alarm source Control plane node
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-509: “Clear Logical node not reachable” (p. 3-834).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details NE not reachable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NE not reachable
The communication between the GMRE and the managed NE is disturbed. Typically this
alarm is caused if the NE has a problem, for example due to a process restart.
Note: The GMRE will recalculate inactive backups of guaranteed restoration (GR)
services that are crossing this NE.

The following tabular overview summarizes important information concerning the NE not
reachable alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-510: “Clear NE not reachable” (p. 3-835).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Nominal Unavailable - Communication problem
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Nominal Unavailable - Communication problem

The nominal path of a control plane service is not available, because there is a
communication problem which makes it impossible to instantiate the nominal path.

Nominal Unavailable - Communication problem alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-511: “Clear Nominal Unavailable - Communication problem” (p. 3-837).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Nominal unavailable - Configuration problem
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Nominal unavailable - Configuration problem

For a service with nominal path, the active service is not on the nominal path, because the
nominal route is not valid due to a configuration problem.

Nominal unavailable - Configuration problem alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-512: “Clear Nominal unavailable - Configuration problem” (p. 3-838).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Nominal Unavailable - Indeterminate problem
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Nominal Unavailable - Indeterminate problem

The nominal path of a control plane service is not available, because there is an
indeterminate problem on the nominal path. “Indeterminate” in this case means that the
problem cannot be classified as either Nominal Unavailable - Communication
problem, Nominal unavailable - Configuration problem,
Nominal unavailable - Reversion preempt, Nominal Unavailable - TP
Blocked, or Nominal Unavailable - Transmission problem.

Nominal Unavailable - Indeterminate problem alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-513: “Clear Nominal Unavailable - Indeterminate problem” (p. 3-839).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Nominal unavailable - Reversion preempt
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Nominal unavailable - Reversion preempt

For a control plane service with nominal path, the active service is not on the nominal
path, and reversion is not possible because the nominal resources are blocked by a lower
priority path.

Nominal unavailable - Reversion preempt alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-514: “Clear Nominal unavailable - Reversion preempt” (p. 3-840).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Nominal Unavailable - TP Blocked
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Nominal Unavailable - TP Blocked

The nominal path of a control plane service is not available, because the resources on the
nominal path are currently in use by other services.

Nominal Unavailable - TP Blocked alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-515: “Clear Nominal Unavailable - TP Blocked” (p. 3-841).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Nominal Unavailable - Transmission problem
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Nominal Unavailable - Transmission problem

The nominal path of a control plane service is not available, because there is a
transmission problem on the nominal path.

Nominal Unavailable - Transmission problem alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-516: “Clear Nominal Unavailable - Transmission problem” (p. 3-843).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Optical feasibility violation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical feasibility violation

The nominal route of the label-switched path (LSP) breaks the constraints of optical
feasibility calculated by the path computation.
Note: The nominal route overrules the optical feasibility, that is the LSP will be
activated although the optical target has been exceeded.

Optical feasibility violation alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-517: “Clear Optical feasibility violation” (p. 3-844).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Optical parameter file error
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical parameter file error

The last downloaded file with optical feasibility target values (from the Engineering and
Planning Tool, EPT), is not valid.
The Optical parameter file error alarm indicates that a corrupted file was downloaded
from the EPT, or that the file got corrupted during the download.

Optical parameter file error alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-518: “Clear Optical parameter file error” (p. 3-845).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details OutbandComm degraded
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OutbandComm degraded
Important! This alarm applies to switching applications only.
The IP communication to the control plane neighbor via an out-of-band IP tunnel is not
fully operational.

Applicability Switching applications only

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-519: “Clear OutbandComm degraded” (p. 3-846).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details OutBandComm down
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OutBandComm down
Important! This alarm applies to switching applications only.
The IP communication to the control plane neighbor via an out-of-band IP tunnel is not
working.

Applicability Switching applications only

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-520: “Clear OutBandComm down” (p. 3-847).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Ready to revert
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ready to revert
Control plane subnetwork connection (SNC) service is ready for reversion back to main
or spare nominal.

Ready to revert alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-521: “Clear Ready to revert” (p. 3-848).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Rerouted
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Rerouted
The current route of the label-switched path (LSP) is not the nominal route.

Rerouted alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-522: “Clear Rerouted” (p. 3-849).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Reroute not possible
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reroute not possible

For a control plane service with a protection type of source-based restoration (SBR),
guaranteed restoration (GR), or 1+1 protection and restoration combined (PRC), the
actual path is failed and no backup route could be found due to lack of resources.

Reroute not possible alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-523: “Clear Reroute not possible” (p. 3-850).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details RSVP degraded
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RSVP degraded
The RSVP communication to the neighbor is degraded.
The alarm is reported when the RSVP Hellos time out (hello dead timer expired).
Typical causes are:
• IP communication problem between adjacent nodes
• Incompatible configuration of RSVP timers between adjacent nodes

RSVP degraded alarm:

Alarm source Control plane protocol (RSVP)
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-524: “Clear RSVP degraded” (p. 3-851).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details RSVP down
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RSVP down
The RSVP communication to the neighbor is down.
Note: When enabling or disabling the Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP), this
alarm will almost inevitably come up, as it is practically impossible to enable or
disable RSVP at both sides of the communication link at the same moment.

RSVP down alarm:

Alarm severity Major (MJ)
Alarm source Control plane protocol (RSVP)
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-525: “Clear RSVP down” (p. 3-852).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details SNC in automatic restoration disabled mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SNC in automatic restoration disabled mode

Automatic restoration has been disabled for the alarm-reporting label-switched path
(LSP), the restoration mode of the LSP is set to manual restoration.
This alarm is suppressed by the GMRE for 60 to 240 seconds after the GMRE receives
the command to switch to manual restoration mode.

SNC in automatic restoration disabled mode condition:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The SNC in automatic restoration disabled mode condition is to be
soon as the automatic restoration mode is enabled again.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details SNCP degraded
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SNCP degraded
Note: This alarm is relevant for subnetwork connections with subnetwork connection
protection (SNCP) or 1+1 protection and restoration combined (PRC) service type
only.
The control plane service is degraded because one of the nominal paths has failed.
Number of nominal paths
The number of nominal paths depends on the type of service:
• For unprotected, source-based restoration (SBR), and guaranteed restoration (GR)
services, there is one nominal path.
• For subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) and 1+1 protection and restoration
combined (PRC) services, there are two nominal paths, main and spare.

SNCP degraded alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-526: “Clear SNCP degraded” (p. 3-853).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details SRG violation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SRG violation
Control plane subnetwork connection (SNC) service violates the SRG diversity
constraints.
Typical causes of the SRG violation alarm are:
• The nominal route of a control plane service (with service type unprotected,
source-based restoration (SBR), or guaranteed restoration (GR)) does not match the
exclude criteria of the service.
• Either the main or the spare nominal route of a control plane service (with service
type subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) or 1+1 protection and restoration
combined (PRC)) does not match the exclude criteria of the service.
• Main and spare nominal routes of an SNCP or 1+1 protection and restoration
combined (PRC) service are not SRG diverse.
• The exclude criteria of an existing service have been modified, and as a consequence
of this modification, SRG diversity constraints are violated.
Note: In an MLN/MRN context, the SRG violation alarm may also be caused by
the restoration of an FA-UNTERM tunnel service when the physical signal is
rerouted.
Exclude criteria of a service
The exclude criteria of a service define to which nodes and/or TE links the service shall
be diverse. The corresponding exclude list is a configuration parameter during the
creation or modification of a control plane service.
SRG diversity
Each TE link can be assigned a list of SRG values. SRG diversity means, a control plane
service shall not contain any two or more TE links that share the same risk, that is the TE
links that form the label-switched path (LSP) shall have no SRG values in common.

SRG violation alarm:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details SRG violation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See Procedure 3-527: “Clear SRG violation” (p. 3-854).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details TCA Channel Margin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA Channel Margin

The TCA Channel Margin alarm is a quality of service (QoS) alarm which indicates
that the QoS threshold of the path has been exceeded.
Retuning of the optical path is needed.

TCA Channel Margin alarm:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
See “” (p. 2-1091).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and condition details Test Mode enabled
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Test Mode enabled

The label-switched path (LSP) is in test mode and “frozen” to its current route.
Enabling the test mode implies the enabling of PM data collection along the current route.

Test Mode enabled condition:

Related information
Local indications
Trouble clearing
The Test Mode enabled condition is to be understood as an information rather than as
an alarm and will be cleared autonomously as soon as the test mode is disabled again.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 3rouble-clearing
T
procedures
Overview
Purpose
The present chapter contains trouble-clearing procedures.
Contents
Network element alarms 3-19

Procedure 3-1: Clear Abnormal Insertion 3-36
Procedure 3-2: Clear active and standby Main EC databases not synchronized 3-37
Procedure 3-3: Clear Add power control failure 3-38
Procedure 3-4: Clear AIS is Detected at the BITS Port 3-40
Procedure 3-5: Clear AIS Line/MS 3-41
Procedure 3-6: Clear AIS Line/MS for OCn/STMn 3-42
Procedure 3-7: Clear Alarm Indication Signal 3-43
Procedure 3-8: Clear Alarm Indication Signal on HO Path 3-44
Procedure 3-9: Clear Alarm Indication Signal STS Path 3-45
Procedure 3-10: Clear All Channels Missing 3-46
Procedure 3-11: Clear All Outgoing Channels Missing 3-48
Procedure 3-12: Clear All selectable timing references fail 3-51
Procedure 3-13: Clear Amplifier disabled 3-52
Procedure 3-14: Clear Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended 3-54
Procedure 3-15: Clear Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain too 3-57
low alarm
Procedure 3-16: Clear Application needs personal assistance 3-59
Procedure 3-17: Clear APR Active - Invalid Topology 3-60
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-18: Clear APR Active - Line alarm 3-62

Procedure 3-19: Clear APR Active - Node 3-63
Procedure 3-20: Clear APR Limited 3-66
Procedure 3-21: Clear APR Forced 3-68
Procedure 3-22: Clear APS channel mismatch 3-69
Procedure 3-23: Clear APS mode mismatch alarm 3-72
Procedure 3-24: Clear APS protection switching byte failure alarm 3-74
Procedure 3-25: Clear Auto Laser Shutoff Due to Upstream Fault alarm 3-76
Procedure 3-26: Clear Auto Negotiation Mismatch 3-78
Procedure 3-27: Clear Automatic switch to protection alarm 3-79
Procedure 3-28: Clear Automatic switch to working alarm 3-81
Procedure 3-29: Clear B1 Signal Degrade alarm 3-84
Procedure 3-30: Clear Backward Defect Indication - ODU alarm 3-85
Procedure 3-31: Clear Backward Defect Indication - OTU 3-86
Procedure 3-32: Clear Backward Defect Indication - Path 3-87
Procedure 3-33: Clear Backward Defect Indication - Section 3-88
Procedure 3-34: Clear Backward Defect Indication on TCM Layer 3-89
Procedure 3-35: Clear Battery off or power filter off/Battery power at backplane 3-90
off or voltage low alarm
Procedure 3-36: Clear Card clock frequency measured out of spec 3-92
Procedure 3-37: Clear Card Degrade - Device 3-93
Procedure 3-38: Clear Card degrade - Wavelength Tracker Channel ID Insertion 3-95
Procedure 3-39: Clear Card failure - boot failure alarm 3-97
Procedure 3-40: Clear Card Failure - Communication alarm 3-99
Procedure 3-41: Clear Card failure - device alarm 3-101
Procedure 3-42: Clear Card Inventory Error alarm 3-103
Procedure 3-43: Clear Card mismatch alarm 3-104
Procedure 3-44: Clear Card missing/Card removal unseat alarm 3-106
Procedure 3-45: Clear Card not allowed alarm 3-108
Procedure 3-46: Clear Card over temperature 3-109
Procedure 3-47: Clear Card provisioning failure alarm 3-111
Procedure 3-48: Clear Card under temperature alarm 3-113
Procedure 3-49: Clear Card unknown alarm 3-114
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-50: Clear Card would exceed shelf amperage limit 3-116
Procedure 3-51: Clear Channel Absent 3-118
Procedure 3-52: Clear Channel attempted escape from latchup routine failed 3-120
Procedure 3-53: Clear Channel collision 3-123
Procedure 3-54: Clear Channel Collision Output Direction 3-126
Procedure 3-55: Clear Optical Channel Forward Defect Indication alarm 3-128
Procedure 3-56: Clear Channel optical power out of range 3-130
Procedure 3-57: Clear Channel PDI 3-132
Procedure 3-58: Clear Channel Power Unachievable 3-134
Procedure 3-59: Clear Channel Power Unstable 3-138
Procedure 3-60: Clear Channel Unexpected 3-140
Procedure 3-61: Clear Channel Unexpected Out 3-143
Procedure 3-62: Clear Client Signal Fail detected on the ODU 3-145
Procedure 3-63: Clear Client Signal Failure (GFP) 3-147
Procedure 3-64: Clear Client Signal Failure - ODU 3-149
Procedure 3-65: Clear Clock freq error > 54.6 ppm (>20 ppm causes OTN 3-150
errors)
Procedure 3-66: Clear Compact flash needs to be upgraded 3-151
Procedure 3-67: Clear Configuration mismatch 3-152
Procedure 3-68: Clear Control Card redundancy is compromised 3-154
Procedure 3-69: Clear Control Communication Failure for MTX 3-157
Procedure 3-70: Clear Control Communication Failure Quadrant 1 3-158
Procedure 3-74: Clear CPU Performance Issue Detected 3-174
Procedure 3-75: Clear Critical Filter Clogging 3-176
Procedure 3-76: Clear Current Key Mismatch 3-177
Procedure 3-77: Clear Current Time Reference is Unstable 3-179
Procedure 3-78: Clear CWR Input LOS 3-180
Procedure 3-79: Clear Data error or timeout 3-182
Procedure 3-80: Clear Data link down 3-184
Procedure 3-81: Clear Database invalid alarm 3-186
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-82: Clear Database Synchronization Failed 3-188

Procedure 3-83: Clear DB Backup Failure 3-189
Procedure 3-84: Clear DB Failure Local - copy creation of processing failure 3-190
Procedure 3-85: Clear DB Failure Transport - file transport failure 3-191
Procedure 3-86: Clear DB Restore Failure 3-192
Procedure 3-87: Clear Detected high voltage from on-board power supply 3-193
Procedure 3-88: Clear Device Not Reachable 3-194
Procedure 3-89: Clear Drop Power Adjustment Failure 3-195
Procedure 3-90: Clear Drop Power Adjustment Required 3-196
Procedure 3-91: Clear Duplex Not Aligned 3-197
Procedure 3-92: Clear Duplicate OCH Trail Name 3-200
Procedure 3-93: Clear Duplicate Shelf ID 3-201
Procedure 3-94: Clear Duplicate Wave Key 3-202
Procedure 3-95: Clear DWDM-OCS link down 3-204
Procedure 3-96: Clear ECC Communication Failure with FLC A 3-205
Procedure 3-97: Clear ECC Communication Failure with FLC B 3-207
Procedure 3-98: EDFA Input LOS 3-209
Procedure 3-99: EDFA Input Power Margin Exceeded 3-212
Procedure 3-100: Clear Egress Backward Defect Indication - ODU 3-214
Procedure 3-101: Clear Egress Client Signal Failure - ODU 3-215
Procedure 3-102: Clear Egress Locked - ODU 3-216
Procedure 3-103: Clear Egress Open Connection Indication - ODU 3-217
Procedure 3-104: Clear Egress Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU 3-218
Procedure 3-105: Clear Egress Server Signal Failure - Client 3-219
Procedure 3-106: Clear Egress Server Signal Failure-Client 3-221
Procedure 3-107: Clear Egress Server Signal Failure - ODU 3-222
Procedure 3-108: Clear Egress Signal Degrade - ODU 3-224
Procedure 3-109: Clear Egress Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path 3-225
Procedure 3-110: Clear Embedded Operations Channel failure detected 3-227
Procedure 3-111: Clear Environmental Input [1-8] active 3-229
Procedure 3-112: Clear Ethernet Client Signal Failure 3-230
Procedure 3-113: Clear Ethernet Ring Provisioning Mismatch is Detected 3-231
Procedure 3-114: Clear Excessive BER 3-232
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-115: Clear Excessive Bit Error Ratio 3-233

Procedure 3-116: Clear Extended Temp Range Violation: Non-ETR Card 3-238
Procedure 3-117: Clear Extension Header (GFP) Mismatch 3-239
Procedure 3-118: Clear External and line synchronization out of service 3-240
Procedure 3-119: Clear External LAN Failure 3-243
Procedure 3-120: Clear Failure Of Protocol - Inconsistent 3-246
Procedure 3-121: Clear Failure Of Protocol - No Response 3-250
Procedure 3-122: Clear Failure Of Protocol - Operation Mismatch 3-252
Procedure 3-123: Clear Failure Of Protocol - Provisioning Mismatch 3-254
Procedure 3-124: Clear Failure Of Protocol - Switch Mismatch 3-256
Procedure 3-125: Clear Failure Slave Tracking Synchronization 3-258
Procedure 3-126: Clear FAN32HRQD 3-261
Procedure 3-127: Clear Fan at full speed, device on card over allowed 3-262
temperature
Procedure 3-129: Clear Fan speed is too high 3-264
Procedure 3-130: Clear Fan speed is too low 3-265
Procedure 3-131: Clear Fan speed manually set to maximum 3-266
Procedure 3-132: Clear Far End Local Fault 3-267
Procedure 3-133: Clear Far End Loss of Signal 3-268
Procedure 3-134: Clear Far End Loss of Synchronization alarm 3-269
Procedure 3-135: Clear Far End Loss of Synchronization 3-270
Procedure 3-136: Clear Far End Port Mapping Mismatch alarm 3-271
Procedure 3-137: Clear Far End Protection Line Failure alarm 3-272
Procedure 3-138: Clear Far-End Unavailable Time Period or Near-End 3-273
Unavailable Time Period
Procedure 3-139: Far End Remote Fault 3-274
Procedure 3-140: Clear Fiber connection mismatch 3-275
Procedure 3-141: Clear Filter Blocked 3-276
Procedure 3-142: Clear Filter Missing 3-277
Procedure 3-143: Clear Firmware loaded is not the preferred version 3-278
Procedure 3-144: Clear Firmware Upgrade Failed 3-281
Procedure 3-145: Clear Firmware upgrade pending 3-282
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-146: Clear Forced switch to a timing reference 3-283

Procedure 3-147: Clear Forced switch to protection 3-284
Procedure 3-148: Clear Forced switch to working 3-285
Procedure 3-149: Clear Forward Defect Indication 3-286
Procedure 3-150: Clear Forward Defect Indication - Client Failure 3-287
Procedure 3-151: Clear FPGA initializing 3-288
Procedure 3-152: Clear FPGA timeout 3-289
Procedure 3-153: Clear Freq err > 9.2 ppm ==> downstream wavetracker errors 3-290
Procedure 3-154: Clear From DCM Input LOS 3-294
Procedure 3-155: Clear Fuse Alarm 3-296
Procedure 3-156: Clear Gain Adjustment Exceeded Max Value 3-297
Procedure 3-157: Clear GFP Loss of Frame Delineation 3-301
Procedure 3-158: Clear GFP User Payload Identifier Mismatch 3-302
Procedure 3-159: Clear GFP User Payload Mismatch 3-303
Procedure 3-160: Clear Hardware failure 3-304
Procedure 3-161: Clear Hardware Minor Circuit Pack Failure 3-305
Procedure 3-162: Clear Hardware not supported for current configuration 3-306
Procedure 3-163: Clear Hardware suspicious 3-307
Procedure 3-164: Clear High BER 3-308
Procedure 3-165: Clear High Filter Clogging 3-309
Procedure 3-166: Clear HOPath Unequipped 3-310
Procedure 3-167: Clear Improper Removal 3-311
Procedure 3-168: Clear Incoming payload LOS 3-312
Procedure 3-169: Clear Incoming SUPVY LOF 3-314
Procedure 3-170: Clear Incoming SUPVY LOS 3-316
Procedure 3-171: Clear Input LOS 3-318
Procedure 3-172: Clear Internal Clock signal of MTX missing 3-319
Procedure 3-173: Clear Internal Error to MTX A 3-323
Procedure 3-174: Clear Internal Error to MTX B 3-327
Procedure 3-175: Clear Internal LAN Failed 3-331
Procedure 3-176: Clear Internal LAN Redundancy Degraded 3-332
Procedure 3-177: Clear Internal Synch Channel of MTX A corrupted 3-333
Procedure 3-178: Clear Internal Synch Channel of MTX B corrupted 3-336
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-179: Clear Inter NE communication timeout blocking power 3-339

adjustment
Procedure 3-180: Clear Inter-shelf loss of communication alarm 3-341
Procedure 3-181: Clear Intra-Nodal Topology Failure-Operator Action Required 3-342
alarm
Procedure 3-182: Clear Invalid or no egress port defined alarm 3-344
Procedure 3-183: Clear Invalid Threshold alarm 3-345
Procedure 3-184: Clear Invalid Topology 3-347
Procedure 3-185: Clear IPCP ECC Connection Failure 3-348
Procedure 3-186: Clear LAG port add failure 3-350
Procedure 3-187: Clear Lan Cable Asymmetric connected 3-351
Procedure 3-188: Clear Lan Left Ring Failure 3-352
Procedure 3-189: Clear Lan Right Ring Failure 3-354
Procedure 3-190: Clear Laser Cooling Current Cross Threshold 3-356
Procedure 3-191: Clear Laser end of life 3-357
Procedure 3-192: Clear LCP ECC Connection Fail 3-358
Procedure 3-193: Clear LD Input LOS 3-360
Procedure 3-194: Clear Line (Facility) loopback active alarm 3-362
Procedure 3-195: Clear Link Aggregation Degrade 3-363
Procedure 3-196: Clear Link Aggregation Group Loss of Signal 3-364
Procedure 3-197: Clear Link OAM Loss Of Protocol 3-365
Procedure 3-198: Clear LD SIG Input LOS 3-366
Procedure 3-199: Clear Link Down 3-368
Procedure 3-200: Clear Local Fault 3-370
Procedure 3-201: Clear Local Packet Lost 3-372
Procedure 3-202: Clear Lock out of a timing reference from selection 3-373
Procedure 3-203: Clear Locked 3-374
Procedure 3-204: Clear Locked - ODU 3-375
Procedure 3-205: Clear Locked - TCM Layer 3-376
Procedure 3-206: Clear Lockout of Protection 3-377
Procedure 3-207: Clear Log File Transfer Failure Transport 3-379
Procedure 3-208: Clear Logical removal of a timing reference 3-380
Procedure 3-209: Clear Loss of 1588 Synchronization 3-381
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-210: Clear Loss of 1PPS Signal 3-382

Procedure 3-211: Clear Loss of Alignment Marker Lock 3-383
Procedure 3-212: Clear Loss of continuity 3-385
Procedure 3-213: Clear Loss of Continuity 3-386
Procedure 3-214: Clear Loss of Delay_Resp Messages on the Slave Port 3-387
Procedure 3-215: Clear Loss Of Frame (photonic applications) 3-388
Procedure 3-216: Clear Loss of Frame (switching applications) 3-389
Procedure 3-217: Clear Loss of Frame and Loss of Multiframe 3-391
(LOFLOM-ODU)
Procedure 3-219: Clear Loss of Frame at the BITS Port 3-396
Procedure 3-220: Clear Loss of Frame Egress 3-397
Procedure 3-221: Clear Loss Of Frames 3-398
Procedure 3-222: Clear Loss of GFP alignment 3-399
Procedure 3-223: Clear Loss of lane alignment 3-402
Procedure 3-224: Clear Loss of Link, GBE10/GBE100 3-403
Procedure 3-225: Clear Loss of Multiframe 3-405
Procedure 3-226: Clear Loss of Multiframe - OTU 3-407
Procedure 3-227: Clear Loss of Optical Signal, GBE 3-409
Procedure 3-228: Clear Loss of Optical Signal, GBE10 3-411
Procedure 3-230: Clear Loss of OPU Multiframe Identifier 3-415
Procedure 3-231: Clear Loss of Pointer HO Path 3-417
Procedure 3-232: Clear Loss of Pointer STS Path 3-418
Procedure 3-233: Clear Loss of Signal (LANLOS) 3-419
Procedure 3-234: Clear Loss of Signal (LOS) 3-420
Procedure 3-235: Clear Loss of Signal (LOSOMS) 3-425
Procedure 3-236: Clear Loss of Signal at the BITS Input Port 3-427
Procedure 3-237: Clear Loss of Subsystem Control of Shelf 3-428
Procedure 3-238: Clear Loss of Synchronisation (LSS) 3-429
Procedure 3-239: Clear Loss of Synchronization (LANLSS) 3-430
Procedure 3-240: Clear Loss of Sync Messages on the Slave Port 3-431
Procedure 3-241: Clear Loss of Tandem Connection on TCM Layer 3-432
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-242: Clear Loss of ToD Signal 3-433

Procedure 3-243: Clear Low input voltage floor defect 3-434
Procedure 3-244: Clear Low Voltage Cut-Off 3-435
Procedure 3-245: Clear Manual (Management) Removal 3-436
Procedure 3-246: Clear Manual switch to protection 3-437
Procedure 3-247: Clear Manual switch to working 3-438
Procedure 3-248: Clear Manually caused abnormal condition - card in 3-439
maintenance
Procedure 3-249: Clear MEP AIS 3-440
Procedure 3-250: Clear MEP Cross Connect CCM 3-441
Procedure 3-251: Clear MEP Error CCM 3-442
Procedure 3-252: Clear MEP Mac Status 3-443
Procedure 3-253: Clear MEP RDI CCM 3-444
Procedure 3-254: Clear MEP Remote CCM 3-445
Procedure 3-255: Clear Mismerge 3-446
Procedure 3-257: Clear Mixed MTX Operation 3-448
Procedure 3-258: Clear Mixed types of power filters used 3-449
Procedure 3-259: Clear Modulator output power out of range 3-450
Procedure 3-260: Clear Multiplex Structure Identification Mismatch 3-451
Procedure 3-261: Clear Multiplex Structure Indication Mismatch 3-454
Procedure 3-262: Clear NE unavailable 3-455
Procedure 3-263: Clear Network Time Protocol is enabled, but no NTP server is 3-457
reachable
Procedure 3-264: Clear Network Time Protocol Loss of Redundancy 3-459
Procedure 3-265: Clear Next Key Mismatch 3-460
Procedure 3-266: Clear No Available Time References 3-462
Procedure 3-267: Clear No Device Found 3-463
Procedure 3-268: Clear No committed software load (Autoinstall disabled) 3-464
Procedure 3-269: Clear NTP Out of Sync 3-465
Procedure 3-270: Clear OA pump laser bias current high 3-466
Procedure 3-271: Clear OCS card or port deleted 3-467
Procedure 3-272: Clear OMD Input LOS 3-469
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-273: Clear OMS Server Signal Failure 3-471

Procedure 3-274: Clear Open Connection Indication - ODU 3-472
Procedure 3-275: Clear Open Connection Indication 3-473
Procedure 3-276: Clear Open Connection Indication on TCM Layer 3-474
Procedure 3-277: Clear Optical intrusion baseline needed 3-476
Procedure 3-278: Clear Optical intrusion - detected alarm 3-477
Procedure 3-279: Clear Optical power received out of range alarm 3-478
Procedure 3-280: Clear Optical supervision channel excessive BER alarm 3-480
Procedure 3-281: Clear OSPF Adjacency Failure 3-482
Procedure 3-282: Clear OSPF Adjacency Not Full 3-483
Procedure 3-283: OT Minor Circuit Pack Failure 3-485
Procedure 3-284: Clear OTU AIS alarm 3-486
Procedure 3-285: Clear Out of operational range - loss too high alarm 3-487
Procedure 3-286: Clear Outgoing Channel Absent 3-489
Procedure 3-287: Clear Outgoing Loss of Signal 3-491
Procedure 3-288: Clear Output LOS 3-493
Procedure 3-289: Clear Outgoing Client Signal Fail detected on the GFP 3-494
Procedure 3-290: Clear Outgoing Loss of Tones 3-495
Procedure 3-291: Outgoing Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU 3-497
Procedure 3-292: Clear Outgoing SUPVY LOS 3-498
Procedure 3-293: Clear Out of operational range - input power too high 3-499
Procedure 3-294: Clear Out of operational range - input power too low 3-501
Procedure 3-295: Clear Parameters for amplifier tilt adjustment unconfigured 3-503
Procedure 3-296: Clear Payload Label Mismatch - Path 3-504
Procedure 3-297: Clear Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU alarm 3-506
Procedure 3-298: Clear PCS Generator active 3-507
Procedure 3-299: Clear Pluggable Module mismatch 3-508
Procedure 3-300: Clear Pluggable Module missing 3-510
Procedure 3-301: Clear Pluggable Module SEEP failure alarm 3-512
Procedure 3-302: Clear Pluggable Module Transmit Failure 3-514
Procedure 3-303: Clear Pluggable Module unknown 3-516
Procedure 3-304: Clear Port degrade - wavelength tracker communication 3-518
failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-305: Clear Port degrade - wavelength tracker detection failure 3-520
Procedure 3-306: Clear Port degrade - wavelength tracker encode degrade 3-522
Procedure 3-307: Clear Port failure - device 3-526
Procedure 3-308: Clear Port transmit failure alarm 3-528
Procedure 3-309: Clear Post-FEC Signal Degrade 3-530
Procedure 3-310: Clear Power Adjust Loss Margin Exceeded 3-531
Procedure 3-311: Clear Power Adjustment Failure 3-533
3-538
Procedure 3-312: Clear PWRADJFAIL / PWRADJFAILADD (Aborted) 3-539
Procedure 3-313: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Action Not Supported for that 3-540
Location)
Procedure 3-314: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Adjust Failed - Splice Margin Violated) 3-541
Procedure 3-315: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Adjustment Using ASE Not Possible - 3-543
Cross Connect Provisioned)
Procedure 3-316: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Adjustment Not Possible - APR 3-544
Condition Active)
Procedure 3-317: Clear PWRADJFAIL / PWRADJFAILADD / 3-545
PWRADJFAILDRP (Amplifier Mid-Stage Loss Problem)
Procedure 3-318: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Amplifier is Gain Limited) 3-546
Procedure 3-319: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Amplifier Signal Power Level 3-548
Unavailable)
Procedure 3-320: Clear PWRADJFAIL (ASE Ingress Adjust Not Allowed On 3-550
External - Raman Amplifier Span)
Procedure 3-321: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Configuration Request Unsuccessful) 3-551
Procedure 3-322: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Communication Timeout with 3-552
Upstream Node)
Procedure 3-323: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Error) 3-554
Procedure 3-324: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Fiber is Not Yet Commissioned) 3-556
Procedure 3-325: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Ingress Amplifier Gain Exceeds 3-557
Maximum Planned Gain) or (Egress Amplifier Gain Exceeds Maximum
Planned Gain)
Procedure 3-326: PWRADJFAIL (In Progress) 3-559
Procedure 3-327: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Interrupted) 3-560
Procedure 3-328: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Loss Too High) 3-561
Procedure 3-329: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Loss Too Low) 3-563
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-330: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Maximum Number of Iterations 3-566

Reached)
Procedure 3-331: Clear PWRADJFAIL (No Lit Add/Mesh Channels for 3-567
Add-Path Optimization)
Procedure 3-332: Clear PWRADJFAIL (No Services in Appropriate State for 3-568
Adjustment) or (No Services in Appropriate State for Adjustment at MESH4)
Procedure 3-333: PWRADJFAIL (No Services in Appropriate State for 3-570
Adjustment at MESH4)
Procedure 3-334: Clear PWRADJFAIL (No Services Present) 3-571
Procedure 3-335: Clear PWRADJFAIL (No Services Provisioned) 3-573
Procedure 3-336: PWRADJFAIL (No Lit Add/Mesh Channels for Add-Path 3-574
Optimization)
Procedure 3-337: Clear PWRADJFAIL (No Through Services in Appropriate 3-575
State for Adjustment)
Procedure 3-338: Clear PWRADJFAIL (No Through Services Provisioned) 3-578
Procedure 3-340: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Power Changing; Cannot Adjust) 3-580
Procedure 3-341: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Power Measurement is Unavailable) 3-584
Procedure 3-342: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Raman Gain Too High); 3-585
PWRADJFAIL (Raman Gain Too Low)
Procedure 3-343: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Raman Gain Unstable) 3-587
Procedure 3-344: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Some Add Path Control Points 3-588
Incomplete)
Procedure 3-345: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Timeout) 3-590
Procedure 3-346: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Topology Provisioning is Incomplete) 3-591
Procedure 3-347: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Upstream Data Unavailable) 3-592
Procedure 3-348: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Upstream Software Incompatible) 3-594
Procedure 3-349: Clear PWRADJFAILADD (Adjustment Not Possible - APR 3-596
Condition Active)
PWRADJFAILDRP (Card Required for Adjustment Not Present)
PWRADJFAILDRP (Local Adjustment is Still in Progress) or (In Progress)
Procedure 3-352: Clear PWRADJFAILADD (Loss Too High) 3-600
Procedure 3-353: Clear PWRADJFAILADD (Maximum Number of Iterations 3-601
Reached)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-354: Clear PWRADJFAILADD (MESH4 OA Required Gain 3-603

Exceeds Maximum Planned Gain); (MESH4 OA Required Gain is Less Than
Minimum Planned Gain)
Procedure 3-355: Clear PWRADJFAILADD (No Add Services Provisioned) 3-605
Procedure 3-356: Clear PWRADJFAILADD (No Lit Channels For Add-Path 3-606
CWR Optimization)
Optimization)
Procedure 3-358: Clear PWRADJFAILADD (No Stable Add Channels For 3-608
Procedure 3-359: Clear PWRADJFAILDRP (Adjustment Not Possible - APR 3-610
Condition Active)
Procedure 3-360: Clear PWRADJFAILDRP (Loss Too High) 3-611
Procedure 3-361: Clear PWRADJFAILDRP (No Drop Services Provisioned) 3-612
Procedure 3-362: Clear PWRADJFAILDRP (No Lit Channels for Drop-Path 3-613
Optimization)
Procedure 3-363: Clear PWRADJFAILDRP (No Stable Channels for Drop-Path 3-614
Optimization)
Procedure 3-364: Clear Power Adjustment Required 3-616
Procedure 3-365: Clear Power Failure 3-617
Procedure 3-366: Clear Power filter mismatch 3-619
Procedure 3-367: Clear Power management suspended 3-621
Procedure 3-368: Clear Power management topology invalid 3-628
Procedure 3-369: Clear Power Unbalance 3-630
Procedure 3-370: Clear Procedure Error 3-631
Procedure 3-371: Clear Provisioned firmware will be obsolete after sw upgrade 3-634
Procedure 3-372: Clear PTP Clock in the Free-Running Status 3-636
Procedure 3-373: Clear PTP Port Faulty 3-637
Procedure 3-374: Clear Received timing signal failure 3-638
Procedure 3-375: Clear Receiver Optimization in Progress 3-639
Procedure 3-376: Clear Reference Clock - forced switch active 3-641
Procedure 3-377: Clear Remote Client Local Fault 3-642
Procedure 3-378: Clear Remote Client Loss of Synchronization 3-643
Procedure 3-379: Clear Remote defect indication alarm 3-644
Procedure 3-380: Clear Remote Defect Indication 3-645
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-381: Clear Remote Failure Indication on HO path 3-646

Procedure 3-382: Clear Remote Failure Indication on line 3-647
Procedure 3-383: Clear Remote Failure Indication on OC-n 3-648
Procedure 3-384: Clear Remote Failure Indication on STS Path 3-649
Procedure 3-385: Clear Remote Fault 3-650
Procedure 3-386: Clear Remote Inventory Mismatch 3-652
Procedure 3-387: Clear Remote Packet Lost 3-654
Procedure 3-388: Clear RFI Line/MS 3-655
Procedure 3-389: Clear RMD Equipment Fail 3-657
Procedure 3-390: Clear RMD Power Fail 3-658
Procedure 3-391: Clear SAP Mac Limit 3-659
Procedure 3-392: Clear Server Signal Failure on Line 3-660
Procedure 3-393: Clear Server Signal Failure - ODU 3-661
Procedure 3-394: Clear Server Signal Failure - Optical Channel 3-663
Procedure 3-395: Clear Server Signal Failure - Path 3-664
Procedure 3-396: Clear Server Signal Failure - Section 3-665
Procedure 3-397: Clear Server Signal Failure on ETH - Egress 3-666
Procedure 3-398: Clear Server Signal Failure on HO Path 3-667
Procedure 3-399: Clear Server Signal Failure on Section 3-668
Procedure 3-400: Clear Server Signal Failure on Section - Egress 3-669
Procedure 3-401: Clear Server Signal Failure on STS Path 3-670
Procedure 3-402: Clear Server Signal Failure on TCM Layer 3-671
Procedure 3-403: Clear Service FDB Full 3-672
Procedure 3-404: Clear Service MFIB Full 3-673
Procedure 3-405: Clear SFP Equipment Fail 3-674
Procedure 3-406: Clear SFP Loss Of Signal 3-675
Procedure 3-407: Clear Shelf data inconsistent 3-676
Procedure 3-408: Clear Shelf LAN (ES1 & ES2) Cables Are Incorrectly 3-677
Connected
Procedure 3-409: Clear Shelf mismatch 3-678
Procedure 3-410: Clear Shelf Transmission Fail 3-680
Procedure 3-411: Clear Shelf unavailable 3-681
Procedure 3-412: Clear Signal Degrade alarm 3-682
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-413: Clear Signal Degrade - ODU alarm 3-683

Procedure 3-414: Clear Signal Degrade - OTU 3-684
Procedure 3-415: Clear Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio 3-685
Procedure 3-416: Clear Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path 3-690
Procedure 3-417: Clear Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Section 3-693
Procedure 3-418: Clear Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - TCM Layer 3-696
Procedure 3-419: Clear Slipping Timing Signal 3-699
Procedure 3-420: Clear Software Mismatch 3-700
Procedure 3-421: Clear Software Upgrade Failed 3-701
Procedure 3-422: Clear Software version mismatch 3-707
Procedure 3-423: Clear Standby Database Corruption 3-708
Procedure 3-424: Clear STS Path Idle 3-709
Procedure 3-425: Clear Subtended shelf cannot be assigned a shelf ID 3-710
Procedure 3-426: Clear SUPVY Amplifier Input LOS 3-711
Procedure 3-427: Clear SUPVY Signal Degrade 3-713
Procedure 3-428: Clear Switching matrix module failure alarm 3-715
Procedure 3-429: Clear Synchronization Equipment (CRU) failure 3-717
Procedure 3-430: Clear Synchronization Equipment failure 3-718
Procedure 3-431: Clear System clock forced to internal clock 3-719
Procedure 3-432: Clear System clock in free running mode 3-720
Procedure 3-433: Clear System clock in holdover mode 3-721
Procedure 3-434: Clear System Initialization New Failure 3-722
Procedure 3-435: Clear TDM (SONET/SDH) Loss of Signal 3-723
Procedure 3-436: Clear Temperature is critical 3-724
Procedure 3-437: Clear Temperature is high 3-728
Procedure 3-438: Clear Terminal loop active 3-732
Procedure 3-439: Clear Time Slot Assignment Mismatch alarm 3-733
Procedure 3-440: Clear Timing quality for output timing is insufficient 3-734
Procedure 3-441: Clear Timing Reference Failure 3-735
Procedure 3-442: Clear Timing reference is unassigned alarm 3-737
Procedure 3-443: Clear Timing reference out-of-frequency alarm 3-738
Procedure 3-444: Clear Timing Reference Unequipped 3-739
Procedure 3-445: Clear Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU alarm 3-740
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-446: Clear Trace Identifier Mismatch - OTU 3-742

Procedure 3-447: Clear Timing selection was switched by a manual command to 3-744
a timing reference
Procedure 3-448: Clear Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on HO Path 3-745
Procedure 3-449: Clear Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on OTN Path 3-747
Procedure 3-450: Clear Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section 3-750
Procedure 3-451: Clear Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on TCM Layer 3-752
Procedure 3-452: Clear Type Mismatch 3-756
Procedure 3-453: Clear Underlying resource unavailable - card 3-757
Procedure 3-454: Clear Underlying resource unavailable - OMS-TX 3-758
Procedure 3-455: Clear Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-LOS 3-759
Procedure 3-456: Clear Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-RX 3-760
Procedure 3-457: Clear Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-TX 3-761
Procedure 3-458: Clear Underlying Resource is Unavailable - Path 3-762
Procedure 3-459: Clear Underlying resource unavailable - port 3-763
Procedure 3-460: Clear Underlying Resource is Unavailable - Section 3-764
Procedure 3-461: Clear Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Optical Section 3-765
Procedure 3-462: Clear Unexpected Level 3-767
Procedure 3-463: Clear Unexpected MEG Level 3-768
Procedure 3-464: Clear Unexpected MEP 3-769
Procedure 3-466: Clear Unexpected MEP or unexpected periodicity 3-771
Procedure 3-467: Clear Unexpected Periodicity 3-772
Procedure 3-469: Clear Unexpected Priority 3-774
Procedure 3-470: Clear Unit Not Inserted 3-775
Procedure 3-471: Clear Unknown ECID 3-776
Procedure 3-472: Clear Unknown OCH Trail for xconnect alarm 3-777
Procedure 3-473: Clear Unsupported hardware version 3-779
Procedure 3-474: Clear Upstream Channel Absent alarm 3-780
Procedure 3-475: Clear Upstream Channel collision 3-782
Procedure 3-476: Clear User inactive alarm 3-784
Procedure 3-477: Clear Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Section 3-785
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-478: Clear User Payload type (GFP) Mismatch 3-786

Procedure 3-479: Clear Detected low voltage from on-board power supply 3-788
Procedure 3-480: Clear VCG Loss of alignment alarm 3-790
Procedure 3-481: Clear VCG Server Signal Failure 3-792
Procedure 3-482: Clear VTS Forward Defect Indication 3-793
Procedure 3-483: Clear VTS Open Connection Indication 3-794
Procedure 3-484: Clear Wave Key Not Available 3-795
Procedure 3-485: Clear Wave Key overlap alarm 3-797
Procedure 3-486: Clear Wave Key pair re-used for channel on node 3-798
Procedure 3-487: Clear Wrong Dest Mac 3-801
Procedure 3-488: Clear Wrong Device Present 3-802
Procedure 3-489: Clear Wrong Unit Inserted 3-803
Procedure 3-490: Clear WTOCM Input LOS alarm 3-804
Procedure 3-491: Clear Y-cable Switchover Timer Expired 3-805
Control plane alarms 3-806
Procedure 3-492: Clear Active Failed - APE failed 3-808
Procedure 3-493: Clear Active Failed - Cross connection problem 3-810
Procedure 3-494: Clear Active Failed - Endpoint failure 3-812
Procedure 3-495: Clear Active Failed - Preemption 3-814
Procedure 3-496: Clear Active Failed - Transmission problem 3-815
Procedure 3-497: Clear Active failed - Unprotected 3-817
Procedure 3-498: Clear Backup unavailable 3-818
Procedure 3-499: Clear Channel assignment violation 3-819
Procedure 3-500: Clear Color violation 3-821
Procedure 3-501: Clear DPR degraded 3-822
Procedure 3-502: Clear DPR down 3-823
Procedure 3-503: Clear DPR Network Version Mismatch 3-824
Procedure 3-504: Clear GMRE degraded 3-825
Procedure 3-505: Clear InBandComm degraded 3-828
Procedure 3-506: Clear InBandComm down 3-830
Procedure 3-507: Clear Latency violation 3-832
Procedure 3-508: Clear Link diversity violation 3-833
Procedure 3-509: Clear Logical node not reachable 3-834
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-510: Clear NE not reachable 3-835

Procedure 3-511: Clear Nominal Unavailable - Communication problem 3-837
Procedure 3-512: Clear Nominal unavailable - Configuration problem 3-838
Procedure 3-513: Clear Nominal Unavailable - Indeterminate problem 3-839
Procedure 3-514: Clear Nominal unavailable - Reversion preempt 3-840
Procedure 3-515: Clear Nominal Unavailable - TP Blocked 3-841
Procedure 3-516: Clear Nominal Unavailable - Transmission problem 3-843
Procedure 3-517: Clear Optical feasibility violation 3-844
Procedure 3-518: Clear Optical parameter file error 3-845
Procedure 3-519: Clear OutbandComm degraded 3-846
Procedure 3-520: Clear OutBandComm down 3-847
Procedure 3-521: Clear Ready to revert 3-848
Procedure 3-522: Clear Rerouted 3-849
Procedure 3-523: Clear Reroute not possible 3-850
Procedure 3-524: Clear RSVP degraded 3-851
Procedure 3-525: Clear RSVP down 3-852
Procedure 3-526: Clear SNCP degraded 3-853
Procedure 3-527: Clear SRG violation 3-854
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
The present section contains trouble-clearing procedures for network element alarms (NE
alarms).
NE alarms
NE alarms are all alarms and conditions that pertain to alarm categories other than
“control plane”; see “Alarm category” (p. 2-6). In contrast to control plane alarms, NE
alarms can be reported by all Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS management systems.
Contents
Procedure 3-1: Clear Abnormal Insertion 3-36

Procedure 3-2: Clear active and standby Main EC databases not synchronized 3-37
Procedure 3-3: Clear Add power control failure 3-38
Procedure 3-4: Clear AIS is Detected at the BITS Port 3-40
Procedure 3-5: Clear AIS Line/MS 3-41
Procedure 3-6: Clear AIS Line/MS for OCn/STMn 3-42
Procedure 3-7: Clear Alarm Indication Signal 3-43
Procedure 3-8: Clear Alarm Indication Signal on HO Path 3-44
Procedure 3-9: Clear Alarm Indication Signal STS Path 3-45
Procedure 3-10: Clear All Channels Missing 3-46
Procedure 3-11: Clear All Outgoing Channels Missing 3-48
Procedure 3-12: Clear All selectable timing references fail 3-51
Procedure 3-13: Clear Amplifier disabled 3-52
Procedure 3-14: Clear Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended 3-54
Procedure 3-15: Clear Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain too 3-57
low alarm
Procedure 3-16: Clear Application needs personal assistance 3-59
Procedure 3-17: Clear APR Active - Invalid Topology 3-60
Procedure 3-18: Clear APR Active - Line alarm 3-62
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-19: Clear APR Active - Node 3-63

Procedure 3-20: Clear APR Limited 3-66
Procedure 3-21: Clear APR Forced 3-68
Procedure 3-22: Clear APS channel mismatch 3-69
Procedure 3-23: Clear APS mode mismatch alarm 3-72
Procedure 3-24: Clear APS protection switching byte failure alarm 3-74
Procedure 3-25: Clear Auto Laser Shutoff Due to Upstream Fault alarm 3-76
Procedure 3-26: Clear Auto Negotiation Mismatch 3-78
Procedure 3-27: Clear Automatic switch to protection alarm 3-79
Procedure 3-28: Clear Automatic switch to working alarm 3-81
Procedure 3-29: Clear B1 Signal Degrade alarm 3-84
Procedure 3-30: Clear Backward Defect Indication - ODU alarm 3-85
Procedure 3-31: Clear Backward Defect Indication - OTU 3-86
Procedure 3-32: Clear Backward Defect Indication - Path 3-87
Procedure 3-33: Clear Backward Defect Indication - Section 3-88
Procedure 3-34: Clear Backward Defect Indication on TCM Layer 3-89
Procedure 3-35: Clear Battery off or power filter off/Battery power at backplane 3-90
off or voltage low alarm
Procedure 3-37: Clear Card Degrade - Device 3-93
Procedure 3-38: Clear Card degrade - Wavelength Tracker Channel ID Insertion 3-95
Procedure 3-39: Clear Card failure - boot failure alarm 3-97
Procedure 3-40: Clear Card Failure - Communication alarm 3-99
Procedure 3-41: Clear Card failure - device alarm 3-101
Procedure 3-42: Clear Card Inventory Error alarm 3-103
Procedure 3-43: Clear Card mismatch alarm 3-104
Procedure 3-44: Clear Card missing/Card removal unseat alarm 3-106
Procedure 3-45: Clear Card not allowed alarm 3-108
Procedure 3-46: Clear Card over temperature 3-109
Procedure 3-47: Clear Card provisioning failure alarm 3-111
Procedure 3-48: Clear Card under temperature alarm 3-113
Procedure 3-49: Clear Card unknown alarm 3-114
Procedure 3-50: Clear Card would exceed shelf amperage limit 3-116
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-51: Clear Channel Absent 3-118

Procedure 3-52: Clear Channel attempted escape from latchup routine failed 3-120
Procedure 3-53: Clear Channel collision 3-123
Procedure 3-54: Clear Channel Collision Output Direction 3-126
Procedure 3-55: Clear Optical Channel Forward Defect Indication alarm 3-128
Procedure 3-56: Clear Channel optical power out of range 3-130
Procedure 3-57: Clear Channel PDI 3-132
Procedure 3-58: Clear Channel Power Unachievable 3-134
Procedure 3-59: Clear Channel Power Unstable 3-138
Procedure 3-60: Clear Channel Unexpected 3-140
Procedure 3-61: Clear Channel Unexpected Out 3-143
Procedure 3-62: Clear Client Signal Fail detected on the ODU 3-145
Procedure 3-63: Clear Client Signal Failure (GFP) 3-147
Procedure 3-64: Clear Client Signal Failure - ODU 3-149
Procedure 3-65: Clear Clock freq error > 54.6 ppm (>20 ppm causes OTN 3-150
errors)
Procedure 3-66: Clear Compact flash needs to be upgraded 3-151
Procedure 3-67: Clear Configuration mismatch 3-152
Procedure 3-68: Clear Control Card redundancy is compromised 3-154
Procedure 3-69: Clear Control Communication Failure for MTX 3-157
Procedure 3-74: Clear CPU Performance Issue Detected 3-174
Procedure 3-75: Clear Critical Filter Clogging 3-176
Procedure 3-76: Clear Current Key Mismatch 3-177
Procedure 3-77: Clear Current Time Reference is Unstable 3-179
Procedure 3-78: Clear CWR Input LOS 3-180
Procedure 3-79: Clear Data error or timeout 3-182
Procedure 3-80: Clear Data link down 3-184
Procedure 3-81: Clear Database invalid alarm 3-186
Procedure 3-82: Clear Database Synchronization Failed 3-188
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-83: Clear DB Backup Failure 3-189

Procedure 3-84: Clear DB Failure Local - copy creation of processing failure 3-190
Procedure 3-85: Clear DB Failure Transport - file transport failure 3-191
Procedure 3-86: Clear DB Restore Failure 3-192
Procedure 3-87: Clear Detected high voltage from on-board power supply 3-193
Procedure 3-88: Clear Device Not Reachable 3-194
Procedure 3-89: Clear Drop Power Adjustment Failure 3-195
Procedure 3-90: Clear Drop Power Adjustment Required 3-196
Procedure 3-91: Clear Duplex Not Aligned 3-197
Procedure 3-92: Clear Duplicate OCH Trail Name 3-200
Procedure 3-93: Clear Duplicate Shelf ID 3-201
Procedure 3-94: Clear Duplicate Wave Key 3-202
Procedure 3-95: Clear DWDM-OCS link down 3-204
Procedure 3-96: Clear ECC Communication Failure with FLC A 3-205
Procedure 3-97: Clear ECC Communication Failure with FLC B 3-207
Procedure 3-98: EDFA Input LOS 3-209
Procedure 3-99: EDFA Input Power Margin Exceeded 3-212
Procedure 3-100: Clear Egress Backward Defect Indication - ODU 3-214
Procedure 3-101: Clear Egress Client Signal Failure - ODU 3-215
Procedure 3-102: Clear Egress Locked - ODU 3-216
Procedure 3-103: Clear Egress Open Connection Indication - ODU 3-217
Procedure 3-104: Clear Egress Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU 3-218
Procedure 3-105: Clear Egress Server Signal Failure - Client 3-219
Procedure 3-106: Clear Egress Server Signal Failure-Client 3-221
Procedure 3-107: Clear Egress Server Signal Failure - ODU 3-222
Procedure 3-108: Clear Egress Signal Degrade - ODU 3-224
Procedure 3-109: Clear Egress Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path 3-225
Procedure 3-110: Clear Embedded Operations Channel failure detected 3-227
Procedure 3-111: Clear Environmental Input [1-8] active 3-229
Procedure 3-112: Clear Ethernet Client Signal Failure 3-230
Procedure 3-113: Clear Ethernet Ring Provisioning Mismatch is Detected 3-231
Procedure 3-114: Clear Excessive BER 3-232
Procedure 3-115: Clear Excessive Bit Error Ratio 3-233
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-116: Clear Extended Temp Range Violation: Non-ETR Card 3-238
Procedure 3-117: Clear Extension Header (GFP) Mismatch 3-239
Procedure 3-118: Clear External and line synchronization out of service 3-240
Procedure 3-119: Clear External LAN Failure 3-243
Procedure 3-120: Clear Failure Of Protocol - Inconsistent 3-246
Procedure 3-121: Clear Failure Of Protocol - No Response 3-250
Procedure 3-122: Clear Failure Of Protocol - Operation Mismatch 3-252
Procedure 3-123: Clear Failure Of Protocol - Provisioning Mismatch 3-254
Procedure 3-124: Clear Failure Of Protocol - Switch Mismatch 3-256
Procedure 3-125: Clear Failure Slave Tracking Synchronization 3-258
Procedure 3-126: Clear FAN32HRQD 3-261
Procedure 3-127: Clear Fan at full speed, device on card over allowed 3-262
temperature
Procedure 3-129: Clear Fan speed is too high 3-264
Procedure 3-130: Clear Fan speed is too low 3-265
Procedure 3-131: Clear Fan speed manually set to maximum 3-266
Procedure 3-132: Clear Far End Local Fault 3-267
Procedure 3-133: Clear Far End Loss of Signal 3-268
Procedure 3-134: Clear Far End Loss of Synchronization alarm 3-269
Procedure 3-135: Clear Far End Loss of Synchronization 3-270
Procedure 3-136: Clear Far End Port Mapping Mismatch alarm 3-271
Procedure 3-137: Clear Far End Protection Line Failure alarm 3-272
Procedure 3-138: Clear Far-End Unavailable Time Period or Near-End 3-273
Unavailable Time Period
Procedure 3-139: Far End Remote Fault 3-274
Procedure 3-140: Clear Fiber connection mismatch 3-275
Procedure 3-141: Clear Filter Blocked 3-276
Procedure 3-142: Clear Filter Missing 3-277
Procedure 3-143: Clear Firmware loaded is not the preferred version 3-278
Procedure 3-144: Clear Firmware Upgrade Failed 3-281
Procedure 3-145: Clear Firmware upgrade pending 3-282
Procedure 3-146: Clear Forced switch to a timing reference 3-283
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-147: Clear Forced switch to protection 3-284

Procedure 3-148: Clear Forced switch to working 3-285
Procedure 3-149: Clear Forward Defect Indication 3-286
Procedure 3-150: Clear Forward Defect Indication - Client Failure 3-287
Procedure 3-151: Clear FPGA initializing 3-288
Procedure 3-152: Clear FPGA timeout 3-289
Procedure 3-153: Clear Freq err > 9.2 ppm ==> downstream wavetracker errors 3-290
Procedure 3-154: Clear From DCM Input LOS 3-294
Procedure 3-155: Clear Fuse Alarm 3-296
Procedure 3-156: Clear Gain Adjustment Exceeded Max Value 3-297
Procedure 3-157: Clear GFP Loss of Frame Delineation 3-301
Procedure 3-158: Clear GFP User Payload Identifier Mismatch 3-302
Procedure 3-159: Clear GFP User Payload Mismatch 3-303
Procedure 3-160: Clear Hardware failure 3-304
Procedure 3-161: Clear Hardware Minor Circuit Pack Failure 3-305
Procedure 3-162: Clear Hardware not supported for current configuration 3-306
Procedure 3-163: Clear Hardware suspicious 3-307
Procedure 3-164: Clear High BER 3-308
Procedure 3-165: Clear High Filter Clogging 3-309
Procedure 3-166: Clear HOPath Unequipped 3-310
Procedure 3-167: Clear Improper Removal 3-311
Procedure 3-168: Clear Incoming payload LOS 3-312
Procedure 3-169: Clear Incoming SUPVY LOF 3-314
Procedure 3-170: Clear Incoming SUPVY LOS 3-316
Procedure 3-171: Clear Input LOS 3-318
Procedure 3-172: Clear Internal Clock signal of MTX missing 3-319
Procedure 3-173: Clear Internal Error to MTX A 3-323
Procedure 3-174: Clear Internal Error to MTX B 3-327
Procedure 3-175: Clear Internal LAN Failed 3-331
Procedure 3-176: Clear Internal LAN Redundancy Degraded 3-332
Procedure 3-177: Clear Internal Synch Channel of MTX A corrupted 3-333
Procedure 3-178: Clear Internal Synch Channel of MTX B corrupted 3-336
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-179: Clear Inter NE communication timeout blocking power 3-339

adjustment
Procedure 3-180: Clear Inter-shelf loss of communication alarm 3-341
Procedure 3-181: Clear Intra-Nodal Topology Failure-Operator Action Required 3-342
alarm
Procedure 3-182: Clear Invalid or no egress port defined alarm 3-344
Procedure 3-183: Clear Invalid Threshold alarm 3-345
Procedure 3-184: Clear Invalid Topology 3-347
Procedure 3-185: Clear IPCP ECC Connection Failure 3-348
Procedure 3-186: Clear LAG port add failure 3-350
Procedure 3-187: Clear Lan Cable Asymmetric connected 3-351
Procedure 3-188: Clear Lan Left Ring Failure 3-352
Procedure 3-189: Clear Lan Right Ring Failure 3-354
Procedure 3-190: Clear Laser Cooling Current Cross Threshold 3-356
Procedure 3-191: Clear Laser end of life 3-357
Procedure 3-192: Clear LCP ECC Connection Fail 3-358
Procedure 3-193: Clear LD Input LOS 3-360
Procedure 3-194: Clear Line (Facility) loopback active alarm 3-362
Procedure 3-195: Clear Link Aggregation Degrade 3-363
Procedure 3-196: Clear Link Aggregation Group Loss of Signal 3-364
Procedure 3-197: Clear Link OAM Loss Of Protocol 3-365
Procedure 3-198: Clear LD SIG Input LOS 3-366
Procedure 3-199: Clear Link Down 3-368
Procedure 3-200: Clear Local Fault 3-370
Procedure 3-201: Clear Local Packet Lost 3-372
Procedure 3-202: Clear Lock out of a timing reference from selection 3-373
Procedure 3-203: Clear Locked 3-374
Procedure 3-204: Clear Locked - ODU 3-375
Procedure 3-205: Clear Locked - TCM Layer 3-376
Procedure 3-206: Clear Lockout of Protection 3-377
Procedure 3-207: Clear Log File Transfer Failure Transport 3-379
Procedure 3-208: Clear Logical removal of a timing reference 3-380
Procedure 3-209: Clear Loss of 1588 Synchronization 3-381
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-210: Clear Loss of 1PPS Signal 3-382

Procedure 3-211: Clear Loss of Alignment Marker Lock 3-383
Procedure 3-212: Clear Loss of continuity 3-385
Procedure 3-213: Clear Loss of Continuity 3-386
Procedure 3-214: Clear Loss of Delay_Resp Messages on the Slave Port 3-387
Procedure 3-215: Clear Loss Of Frame (photonic applications) 3-388
Procedure 3-216: Clear Loss of Frame (switching applications) 3-389
(LOFLOM-ODU)
Procedure 3-219: Clear Loss of Frame at the BITS Port 3-396
Procedure 3-220: Clear Loss of Frame Egress 3-397
Procedure 3-221: Clear Loss Of Frames 3-398
Procedure 3-222: Clear Loss of GFP alignment 3-399
Procedure 3-223: Clear Loss of lane alignment 3-402
Procedure 3-224: Clear Loss of Link, GBE10/GBE100 3-403
Procedure 3-225: Clear Loss of Multiframe 3-405
Procedure 3-226: Clear Loss of Multiframe - OTU 3-407
Procedure 3-227: Clear Loss of Optical Signal, GBE 3-409
Procedure 3-230: Clear Loss of OPU Multiframe Identifier 3-415
Procedure 3-231: Clear Loss of Pointer HO Path 3-417
Procedure 3-232: Clear Loss of Pointer STS Path 3-418
Procedure 3-233: Clear Loss of Signal (LANLOS) 3-419
Procedure 3-234: Clear Loss of Signal (LOS) 3-420
Procedure 3-235: Clear Loss of Signal (LOSOMS) 3-425
Procedure 3-236: Clear Loss of Signal at the BITS Input Port 3-427
Procedure 3-237: Clear Loss of Subsystem Control of Shelf 3-428
Procedure 3-238: Clear Loss of Synchronisation (LSS) 3-429
Procedure 3-239: Clear Loss of Synchronization (LANLSS) 3-430
Procedure 3-240: Clear Loss of Sync Messages on the Slave Port 3-431
Procedure 3-241: Clear Loss of Tandem Connection on TCM Layer 3-432
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-242: Clear Loss of ToD Signal 3-433

Procedure 3-243: Clear Low input voltage floor defect 3-434
Procedure 3-244: Clear Low Voltage Cut-Off 3-435
Procedure 3-245: Clear Manual (Management) Removal 3-436
Procedure 3-246: Clear Manual switch to protection 3-437
Procedure 3-247: Clear Manual switch to working 3-438
Procedure 3-248: Clear Manually caused abnormal condition - card in 3-439
maintenance
Procedure 3-249: Clear MEP AIS 3-440
Procedure 3-250: Clear MEP Cross Connect CCM 3-441
Procedure 3-251: Clear MEP Error CCM 3-442
Procedure 3-252: Clear MEP Mac Status 3-443
Procedure 3-253: Clear MEP RDI CCM 3-444
Procedure 3-254: Clear MEP Remote CCM 3-445
Procedure 3-257: Clear Mixed MTX Operation 3-448
Procedure 3-258: Clear Mixed types of power filters used 3-449
Procedure 3-259: Clear Modulator output power out of range 3-450
Procedure 3-260: Clear Multiplex Structure Identification Mismatch 3-451
Procedure 3-261: Clear Multiplex Structure Indication Mismatch 3-454
Procedure 3-262: Clear NE unavailable 3-455
Procedure 3-263: Clear Network Time Protocol is enabled, but no NTP server is 3-457
reachable
Procedure 3-264: Clear Network Time Protocol Loss of Redundancy 3-459
Procedure 3-265: Clear Next Key Mismatch 3-460
Procedure 3-266: Clear No Available Time References 3-462
Procedure 3-267: Clear No Device Found 3-463
Procedure 3-268: Clear No committed software load (Autoinstall disabled) 3-464
Procedure 3-269: Clear NTP Out of Sync 3-465
Procedure 3-270: Clear OA pump laser bias current high 3-466
Procedure 3-271: Clear OCS card or port deleted 3-467
Procedure 3-272: Clear OMD Input LOS 3-469
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-273: Clear OMS Server Signal Failure 3-471

Procedure 3-274: Clear Open Connection Indication - ODU 3-472
Procedure 3-275: Clear Open Connection Indication 3-473
Procedure 3-276: Clear Open Connection Indication on TCM Layer 3-474
Procedure 3-277: Clear Optical intrusion baseline needed 3-476
Procedure 3-278: Clear Optical intrusion - detected alarm 3-477
Procedure 3-279: Clear Optical power received out of range alarm 3-478
Procedure 3-280: Clear Optical supervision channel excessive BER alarm 3-480
Procedure 3-281: Clear OSPF Adjacency Failure 3-482
Procedure 3-282: Clear OSPF Adjacency Not Full 3-483
Procedure 3-283: OT Minor Circuit Pack Failure 3-485
Procedure 3-284: Clear OTU AIS alarm 3-486
Procedure 3-285: Clear Out of operational range - loss too high alarm 3-487
Procedure 3-286: Clear Outgoing Channel Absent 3-489
Procedure 3-287: Clear Outgoing Loss of Signal 3-491
Procedure 3-288: Clear Output LOS 3-493
Procedure 3-289: Clear Outgoing Client Signal Fail detected on the GFP 3-494
Procedure 3-290: Clear Outgoing Loss of Tones 3-495
Procedure 3-291: Outgoing Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU 3-497
Procedure 3-292: Clear Outgoing SUPVY LOS 3-498
Procedure 3-293: Clear Out of operational range - input power too high 3-499
Procedure 3-294: Clear Out of operational range - input power too low 3-501
Procedure 3-295: Clear Parameters for amplifier tilt adjustment unconfigured 3-503
Procedure 3-296: Clear Payload Label Mismatch - Path 3-504
Procedure 3-297: Clear Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU alarm 3-506
Procedure 3-298: Clear PCS Generator active 3-507
Procedure 3-299: Clear Pluggable Module mismatch 3-508
Procedure 3-300: Clear Pluggable Module missing 3-510
Procedure 3-301: Clear Pluggable Module SEEP failure alarm 3-512
Procedure 3-302: Clear Pluggable Module Transmit Failure 3-514
Procedure 3-303: Clear Pluggable Module unknown 3-516
Procedure 3-304: Clear Port degrade - wavelength tracker communication 3-518
failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-305: Clear Port degrade - wavelength tracker detection failure 3-520
Procedure 3-306: Clear Port degrade - wavelength tracker encode degrade 3-522
Procedure 3-307: Clear Port failure - device 3-526
Procedure 3-308: Clear Port transmit failure alarm 3-528
Procedure 3-309: Clear Post-FEC Signal Degrade 3-530
Procedure 3-310: Clear Power Adjust Loss Margin Exceeded 3-531
Procedure 3-311: Clear Power Adjustment Failure 3-533
3-538
Procedure 3-312: Clear PWRADJFAIL / PWRADJFAILADD (Aborted) 3-539
Procedure 3-313: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Action Not Supported for that 3-540
Location)
Procedure 3-314: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Adjust Failed - Splice Margin Violated) 3-541
Procedure 3-315: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Adjustment Using ASE Not Possible - 3-543
Cross Connect Provisioned)
Procedure 3-316: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Adjustment Not Possible - APR 3-544
Condition Active)
PWRADJFAILDRP (Amplifier Mid-Stage Loss Problem)
Procedure 3-318: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Amplifier is Gain Limited) 3-546
Procedure 3-319: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Amplifier Signal Power Level 3-548
Unavailable)
Procedure 3-320: Clear PWRADJFAIL (ASE Ingress Adjust Not Allowed On 3-550
External - Raman Amplifier Span)
Procedure 3-321: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Configuration Request Unsuccessful) 3-551
Procedure 3-322: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Communication Timeout with 3-552
Upstream Node)
Procedure 3-323: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Error) 3-554
Procedure 3-324: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Fiber is Not Yet Commissioned) 3-556
Procedure 3-325: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Ingress Amplifier Gain Exceeds 3-557
Maximum Planned Gain) or (Egress Amplifier Gain Exceeds Maximum
Planned Gain)
Procedure 3-326: PWRADJFAIL (In Progress) 3-559
Procedure 3-327: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Interrupted) 3-560
Procedure 3-328: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Loss Too High) 3-561
Procedure 3-329: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Loss Too Low) 3-563
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-330: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Maximum Number of Iterations 3-566

Reached)
Procedure 3-331: Clear PWRADJFAIL (No Lit Add/Mesh Channels for 3-567
Procedure 3-332: Clear PWRADJFAIL (No Services in Appropriate State for 3-568
Adjustment) or (No Services in Appropriate State for Adjustment at MESH4)
Procedure 3-333: PWRADJFAIL (No Services in Appropriate State for 3-570
Adjustment at MESH4)
Procedure 3-334: Clear PWRADJFAIL (No Services Present) 3-571
Procedure 3-335: Clear PWRADJFAIL (No Services Provisioned) 3-573
Procedure 3-336: PWRADJFAIL (No Lit Add/Mesh Channels for Add-Path 3-574
Optimization)
Procedure 3-337: Clear PWRADJFAIL (No Through Services in Appropriate 3-575
State for Adjustment)
Procedure 3-340: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Power Changing; Cannot Adjust) 3-580
Procedure 3-341: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Power Measurement is Unavailable) 3-584
Procedure 3-342: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Raman Gain Too High); 3-585
PWRADJFAIL (Raman Gain Too Low)
Procedure 3-343: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Raman Gain Unstable) 3-587
Procedure 3-344: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Some Add Path Control Points 3-588
Incomplete)
Procedure 3-345: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Timeout) 3-590
Procedure 3-346: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Topology Provisioning is Incomplete) 3-591
Procedure 3-347: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Upstream Data Unavailable) 3-592
Procedure 3-348: Clear PWRADJFAIL (Upstream Software Incompatible) 3-594
Procedure 3-349: Clear PWRADJFAILADD (Adjustment Not Possible - APR 3-596
Condition Active)
PWRADJFAILDRP (Card Required for Adjustment Not Present)
PWRADJFAILDRP (Local Adjustment is Still in Progress) or (In Progress)
Procedure 3-352: Clear PWRADJFAILADD (Loss Too High) 3-600
Procedure 3-353: Clear PWRADJFAILADD (Maximum Number of Iterations 3-601
Reached)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-354: Clear PWRADJFAILADD (MESH4 OA Required Gain 3-603

Exceeds Maximum Planned Gain); (MESH4 OA Required Gain is Less Than
Minimum Planned Gain)
Procedure 3-355: Clear PWRADJFAILADD (No Add Services Provisioned) 3-605
CWR Optimization)
Optimization)
Procedure 3-358: Clear PWRADJFAILADD (No Stable Add Channels For 3-608
Procedure 3-359: Clear PWRADJFAILDRP (Adjustment Not Possible - APR 3-610
Condition Active)
Procedure 3-360: Clear PWRADJFAILDRP (Loss Too High) 3-611
Procedure 3-361: Clear PWRADJFAILDRP (No Drop Services Provisioned) 3-612
Procedure 3-362: Clear PWRADJFAILDRP (No Lit Channels for Drop-Path 3-613
Optimization)
Procedure 3-363: Clear PWRADJFAILDRP (No Stable Channels for Drop-Path 3-614
Optimization)
Procedure 3-364: Clear Power Adjustment Required 3-616
Procedure 3-365: Clear Power Failure 3-617
Procedure 3-366: Clear Power filter mismatch 3-619
Procedure 3-367: Clear Power management suspended 3-621
Procedure 3-368: Clear Power management topology invalid 3-628
Procedure 3-369: Clear Power Unbalance 3-630
Procedure 3-370: Clear Procedure Error 3-631
Procedure 3-371: Clear Provisioned firmware will be obsolete after sw upgrade 3-634
Procedure 3-372: Clear PTP Clock in the Free-Running Status 3-636
Procedure 3-373: Clear PTP Port Faulty 3-637
Procedure 3-374: Clear Received timing signal failure 3-638
Procedure 3-375: Clear Receiver Optimization in Progress 3-639
Procedure 3-376: Clear Reference Clock - forced switch active 3-641
Procedure 3-377: Clear Remote Client Local Fault 3-642
Procedure 3-378: Clear Remote Client Loss of Synchronization 3-643
Procedure 3-379: Clear Remote defect indication alarm 3-644
Procedure 3-380: Clear Remote Defect Indication 3-645
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-381: Clear Remote Failure Indication on HO path 3-646

Procedure 3-382: Clear Remote Failure Indication on line 3-647
Procedure 3-383: Clear Remote Failure Indication on OC-n 3-648
Procedure 3-384: Clear Remote Failure Indication on STS Path 3-649
Procedure 3-385: Clear Remote Fault 3-650
Procedure 3-386: Clear Remote Inventory Mismatch 3-652
Procedure 3-387: Clear Remote Packet Lost 3-654
Procedure 3-388: Clear RFI Line/MS 3-655
Procedure 3-389: Clear RMD Equipment Fail 3-657
Procedure 3-390: Clear RMD Power Fail 3-658
Procedure 3-391: Clear SAP Mac Limit 3-659
Procedure 3-392: Clear Server Signal Failure on Line 3-660
Procedure 3-393: Clear Server Signal Failure - ODU 3-661
Procedure 3-394: Clear Server Signal Failure - Optical Channel 3-663
Procedure 3-395: Clear Server Signal Failure - Path 3-664
Procedure 3-396: Clear Server Signal Failure - Section 3-665
Procedure 3-397: Clear Server Signal Failure on ETH - Egress 3-666
Procedure 3-398: Clear Server Signal Failure on HO Path 3-667
Procedure 3-399: Clear Server Signal Failure on Section 3-668
Procedure 3-400: Clear Server Signal Failure on Section - Egress 3-669
Procedure 3-401: Clear Server Signal Failure on STS Path 3-670
Procedure 3-402: Clear Server Signal Failure on TCM Layer 3-671
Procedure 3-403: Clear Service FDB Full 3-672
Procedure 3-404: Clear Service MFIB Full 3-673
Procedure 3-405: Clear SFP Equipment Fail 3-674
Procedure 3-406: Clear SFP Loss Of Signal 3-675
Procedure 3-407: Clear Shelf data inconsistent 3-676
Procedure 3-408: Clear Shelf LAN (ES1 & ES2) Cables Are Incorrectly 3-677
Connected
Procedure 3-409: Clear Shelf mismatch 3-678
Procedure 3-410: Clear Shelf Transmission Fail 3-680
Procedure 3-411: Clear Shelf unavailable 3-681
Procedure 3-412: Clear Signal Degrade alarm 3-682
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-413: Clear Signal Degrade - ODU alarm 3-683

Procedure 3-414: Clear Signal Degrade - OTU 3-684
Procedure 3-415: Clear Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio 3-685
Procedure 3-416: Clear Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Path 3-690
Procedure 3-417: Clear Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - Section 3-693
Procedure 3-418: Clear Signal Degrade Bit Error Ratio - TCM Layer 3-696
Procedure 3-419: Clear Slipping Timing Signal 3-699
Procedure 3-420: Clear Software Mismatch 3-700
Procedure 3-421: Clear Software Upgrade Failed 3-701
Procedure 3-422: Clear Software version mismatch 3-707
Procedure 3-423: Clear Standby Database Corruption 3-708
Procedure 3-424: Clear STS Path Idle 3-709
Procedure 3-425: Clear Subtended shelf cannot be assigned a shelf ID 3-710
Procedure 3-426: Clear SUPVY Amplifier Input LOS 3-711
Procedure 3-427: Clear SUPVY Signal Degrade 3-713
Procedure 3-428: Clear Switching matrix module failure alarm 3-715
Procedure 3-429: Clear Synchronization Equipment (CRU) failure 3-717
Procedure 3-430: Clear Synchronization Equipment failure 3-718
Procedure 3-431: Clear System clock forced to internal clock 3-719
Procedure 3-432: Clear System clock in free running mode 3-720
Procedure 3-433: Clear System clock in holdover mode 3-721
Procedure 3-434: Clear System Initialization New Failure 3-722
Procedure 3-435: Clear TDM (SONET/SDH) Loss of Signal 3-723
Procedure 3-436: Clear Temperature is critical 3-724
Procedure 3-437: Clear Temperature is high 3-728
Procedure 3-438: Clear Terminal loop active 3-732
Procedure 3-439: Clear Time Slot Assignment Mismatch alarm 3-733
Procedure 3-440: Clear Timing quality for output timing is insufficient 3-734
Procedure 3-441: Clear Timing Reference Failure 3-735
Procedure 3-442: Clear Timing reference is unassigned alarm 3-737
Procedure 3-443: Clear Timing reference out-of-frequency alarm 3-738
Procedure 3-444: Clear Timing Reference Unequipped 3-739
Procedure 3-445: Clear Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU alarm 3-740
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-446: Clear Trace Identifier Mismatch - OTU 3-742

Procedure 3-447: Clear Timing selection was switched by a manual command to 3-744
a timing reference
Procedure 3-448: Clear Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on HO Path 3-745
Procedure 3-449: Clear Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on OTN Path 3-747
Procedure 3-450: Clear Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section 3-750
Procedure 3-451: Clear Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch on TCM Layer 3-752
Procedure 3-452: Clear Type Mismatch 3-756
Procedure 3-453: Clear Underlying resource unavailable - card 3-757
Procedure 3-454: Clear Underlying resource unavailable - OMS-TX 3-758
Procedure 3-455: Clear Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-LOS 3-759
Procedure 3-456: Clear Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-RX 3-760
Procedure 3-457: Clear Underlying resource unavailable - OTS-TX 3-761
Procedure 3-458: Clear Underlying Resource is Unavailable - Path 3-762
Procedure 3-459: Clear Underlying resource unavailable - port 3-763
Procedure 3-460: Clear Underlying Resource is Unavailable - Section 3-764
Procedure 3-461: Clear Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Optical Section 3-765
Procedure 3-462: Clear Unexpected Level 3-767
Procedure 3-463: Clear Unexpected MEG Level 3-768
Procedure 3-466: Clear Unexpected MEP or unexpected periodicity 3-771
Procedure 3-469: Clear Unexpected Priority 3-774
Procedure 3-470: Clear Unit Not Inserted 3-775
Procedure 3-471: Clear Unknown ECID 3-776
Procedure 3-472: Clear Unknown OCH Trail for xconnect alarm 3-777
Procedure 3-473: Clear Unsupported hardware version 3-779
Procedure 3-474: Clear Upstream Channel Absent alarm 3-780
Procedure 3-475: Clear Upstream Channel collision 3-782
Procedure 3-476: Clear User inactive alarm 3-784
Procedure 3-477: Clear Underlying Resource is Unavailable on Section 3-785
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-478: Clear User Payload type (GFP) Mismatch 3-786

Procedure 3-479: Clear Detected low voltage from on-board power supply 3-788
Procedure 3-480: Clear VCG Loss of alignment alarm 3-790
Procedure 3-481: Clear VCG Server Signal Failure 3-792
Procedure 3-482: Clear VTS Forward Defect Indication 3-793
Procedure 3-483: Clear VTS Open Connection Indication 3-794
Procedure 3-484: Clear Wave Key Not Available 3-795
Procedure 3-485: Clear Wave Key overlap alarm 3-797
Procedure 3-486: Clear Wave Key pair re-used for channel on node 3-798
Procedure 3-487: Clear Wrong Dest Mac 3-801
Procedure 3-488: Clear Wrong Device Present 3-802
Procedure 3-489: Clear Wrong Unit Inserted 3-803
Procedure 3-490: Clear WTOCM Input LOS alarm 3-804
Procedure 3-491: Clear Y-cable Switchover Timer Expired 3-805
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-1: Clear Abnormal Insertion
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-1: Clear Abnormal Insertion

Purpose
Use this procedure to clear an Abnormal Insertion alarm.
Related information
Please also see the corresponding alarm description “Abnormal Insertion” (p. 2-63).
Before you begin

You or a service technician should be on-site at the NE to clear an
Abnormal Insertion alarm.
Trouble clearing procedure

Proceed as follows to clear an Abnormal Insertion alarm:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the module slot position.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Extract the module or provision it.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Refresh the list of current alarms.
If … then …
the alarm has cleared Stop! You have completed this procedure.
the alarm persists contact next level of technical support for
assistance.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-2: Clear active and standby Main EC databases
Network element alarms not synchronized
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-2: Clear active and standby Main EC databases

not synchronized
Purpose
Use this procedure to clear the Active and standby main EC databases not synchronized
alarm.
Related information
See the corresponding alarm description “Active and standby main Equipment Controller
databases not synchronized ” (p. 2-64).

Proceed as follows to clear the Active and standby main EC databases not synchronized
alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a warm reset of the standby controller.

CLI config card card_type shelf slot reset warm
WEBUI Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Warm Reboot >Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If... then...
the alarm persists contact Alcatel-Lucent technical support
(http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/contact-us) for
assistance.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-3: Clear Add power control failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-3: Clear Add power control failure

Purpose
Use this procedure to clear the Add power control failure alarm.
Related information
See the corresponding alarm description “Add power control failure” (p. 2-70).

Proceed as follows to clear the Add power control failure alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 There are two possible causes of this condition:

• The alarmed card has detected an equipment problem and this means that the
Wavelength Tracker encode power control is compromised. If this occurs during
steady state operation, there is a high probability that the services carried by this card
are unaffected.
• There is a misfibering problem such that a light-emitting fiber has been plugged into
the Tx port of a Wavelength Tracker encoder-equipped transponder card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Determine what type of card is reporting the condition.
If... Then...
the card is a transponder card that is equipped check to see that the fibering for that card is
with a Wavelength Tracker encoder, correct. Remove the fiber from the Tx port on
the transponder card. If the condition clears
after 20 seconds, then this is a misfibering
problem.
the card is an SVAC, or if there is no fibering continue with Step 3.
problem on the transponder card,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Confirm that replacement card supports the same band as the alarmed card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Label all fibers connected to the alarmed card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Disconnect all fibers on the alarmed card and cap the ends to protect them from dirt and
damage.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-3: Clear Add power control failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the card. Refer to Procedure 4-18: “Replacing a Card (General)” (p. 4-53).
Contact Alcatel-Lucent technical support (http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/contact-us).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Clean and connect all fibers to the replacement card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Once the software on the card is successfully upgraded (this happens automatically), the
alarm should clear.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-4: Clear AIS is Detected at the BITS Port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-4: Clear AIS is Detected at the BITS Port

Purpose
Use this procedure to clear the AIS is Detected at the BITS Port alarm.
Related information
See the corresponding alarm description “AIS is Detected at the BITS Port” (p. 2-73).

Proceed as follows to clear the AIS is Detected at the BITS Port alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the alarms/conditions on the far-end node.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Correct any problems identified in Step 1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Replace the cable.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Replace the card on local node or card on far-end node.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-5: Clear AIS Line/MS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-5: Clear AIS Line/MS

Purpose
Use this procedure to clear the AIS Line/MS alarm.
Related information
See the corresponding alarm description “AIS Line/MS ” (p. 2-75)
Before you begin

Make sure you have management access to all network elements along the upstream
direction.

Proceed as follows to clear the AIS Line/MS.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify the alarm or condition raised on the upstream line terminating equipment. Follow
the procedure for clearing the identified alarm or condition.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-6: Clear AIS Line/MS for OCn/STMn
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-6: Clear AIS Line/MS for OCn/STMn

Purpose
Use this procedure to clear an AIS Line/MS for OCn/STMn alarm.
Related information
Please also see the corresponding alarm description “AIS Line/MS for OCn/STMn”
(p. 2-74).
Before you begin

AIS Line/MS for OCn/STMn alarm.

Proceed as follows to clear an AIS Line/MS for OCn/STMn alarm:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Analyze the alarm state of the equipment along the path in the upstream direction of the
path, and clear any alarms.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-7: Clear Alarm Indication Signal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-7: Clear Alarm Indication Signal

Purpose
Use this procedure to clear an Alarm Indication Signal.
Related information
Please also see the corresponding alarm description “Alarm Indication Signal” (p. 2-76).
Before you begin

You or a service technician should be on-site at the NE to clear an Alarm Indication
Signal.

Proceed as follows to clear an Alarm Indication Signal:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Analyze the alarm state of the BITS equipment and take appropriate measures.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-8: Clear Alarm Indication Signal on HO Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-8: Clear Alarm Indication Signal on HO Path

Purpose
Use this procedure to clear an Alarm Indication Signal on HO Path alarm.
Related information
Please also see the corresponding alarm description “Alarm Indication Signal on HO
Path” (p. 2-77).
Before you begin

Alarm Indication Signal on HO Path alarm.

Proceed as follows to clear an Alarm Indication Signal on HO Path alarm:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Analyze the alarm state of the equipment along the VC-n path in the upstream direction
of the path, and clear any alarms.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-9: Clear Alarm Indication Signal STS Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-9: Clear Alarm Indication Signal STS Path

Purpose
Use this procedure to clear an Alarm Indication Signal STS Path alarm.
Related information
Please also see the corresponding alarm description “Alarm Indication Signal STS Path”
(p. 2-79).
Before you begin

Alarm Indication Signal STS Path alarm.

Proceed as follows to clear an Alarm Indication Signal STS Path alarm:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Analyze the alarm state of the equipment along the STS-n path in the upstream direction
of the path, and clear any alarms.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-10: Clear All Channels Missing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-10: Clear All Channels Missing

Purpose
Use this procedure to clear the All Channels Missing alarm.
Related information
See the corresponding alarm description “All Channels Missing” (p. 2-81).
Before you begin

This alarm is the result of a problem at an upstream NE or upstream span.

Proceed as follows to clear the All Channels Missing alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure Procedure 4-14: “Perform a path power trace” (p. 4-47) to identify
the probable network trouble point for the lightpath and resolve issues/alarms at the
trouble point. This may involve performing the steps in Procedure 3-11: “Clear All
Outgoing Channels Missing” (p. 3-48) at the NE containing the trouble point(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the problem persists, attempt an egress adjust on the egress amplifier on the NE
identified in Step 1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 The gain range provisioned by the EPT for this amplifier is insufficient to accommodate
the unexpected change in loss in the network. Refer the problem to network planning.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Clear All Channels Missing with Power Trace

If the NE has any channel mismatch or channel missing alarms, and is running the Power
Filter Clock in a redundant power filter (PF) system, you can troubleshoot and remove
one PF from the shelf. Proceed as follows.
The following procedure applies to the PSS-32 and PSS-16 only.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the upstream node, select the shelf with OT that is exhibiting the All Channels Missing
condition with the power trace completely blank.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-10: Clear All Channels Missing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Turn power off and then remove the redundant PF in slot 36. Be sure to turn off mains
feed (MSB) connected to the PF in slot 36 to avoid a short circuit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check the service to determine whether the alarm has cleared.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the problem persists, then insert the PF into the slot 36 and turn on power.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Once the PF in slot 36 is up and running, remove the redundant PF in slot 19.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Check the service to determine whether the alarm is cleared.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-11: Clear All Outgoing Channels Missing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-11: Clear All Outgoing Channels Missing

Purpose
Use this procedure to clear the All Outgoing Channels Missing alarm.
Related information
See the corresponding alarm description “All Outgoing Channels Missing” (p. 2-83).
Before you begin

This alarm is the result of a problem internal to this NE.
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset, reseat, or replacement of a card is service impacting if the card is currently
carrying services. To determine if any services are currently carried over a card, perform
the procedure Procedure 4-4: “Check for services on a port” (p. 4-28).
If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or reseating the card.
Proceed as follows to clear the All Outgoing Channels Missing alarm.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure Procedure 4-14: “Perform a path power trace” (p. 4-47) to identify
the probable network trouble point for the lightpath. This will identify the cards and ports
on this NE to look at first during this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Identify the cards that are in the NE through path and confirm that all ports and cards on
the through path are administratively up
1. To examine the card state, enter the following command. Observe the admin state and
operational state of each of the cards along the THRU path:
CLI show slot *
2. Set any of the cards that are administratively down to up. To bring a card Admin Up:
CLI config slot shelf slot state up
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3. To examine the port state, enter the following command. Observe the administrative
state and operational state of each of the ports along the THRU path:
CLI show interface brief

WEBUI From the Equipment Tree, select the card, and select the desired port.
4. Set any of the ports that are administratively down to up. To bring a port Admin Up:
CLI config interface <shelf slot port> state up
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Examine the status of the cross-connects that pass through the port
1. List the cross-connects:
CLI show xc brief

WEBUI Select Connections > Cross-Connects.
2. Confirm that all cross-connects are administratively up. To bring a cross-connect

Admin Up:
CLI config xc a-end shelf slot port z-end shelf slot port
band channel state up
3. Check for any channel alarms and resolve.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Verify that the cards and ports upstream of the LD's DCM or Line In port (that is, within
the NE for Egress amp, line port faces external to the NE for Ingress amp) are alarm free.
Resolve any alarms on cards/ports that are upstream of the LD pack, using the
information gathered in Step 1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Verify that there is a fiber properly plugged into the LD's DCM or Line In port, that the
fiber is the correct type, and that the other end of the fiber is connected properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Verify that the input power to the alarmed port is within limits:
CLI show interface card <shelf slot port>

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the power is too low, verify that the fiber is not damaged or dirty, and clean or replace if
necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If the problem is not resolved, then replace the card. Refer to Procedure 4-18: “Replacing
a Card (General)” (p. 4-53).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Clear All Channels Missing with Power Trace

If the NE has any channel mismatch or channel missing alarms, and is running the Power
Filter Clock in a redundant power filter (PF) system, you can troubleshoot and remove
one PF from the shelf. Proceed as follows.
The following procedure applies to the PSS-32 and PSS-16 only.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the upstream node, select the shelf with OT that is exhibiting the All Outgoing
Channels Missing condition with the power trace completely blank.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Turn power off and then remove the redundant PF in slot 36. Be sure to turn off mains
feed (MSB) connected to the PF in slot 36 to avoid a short circuit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check the service to determine whether the alarm has cleared.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the problem persists, then insert the PF into the slot 36 and turn on power.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Once the PF in slot 36 is up and running, remove the redundant PF in slot 19.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Check the service to determine whether the alarm is cleared.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-12: Clear All selectable timing references fail
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-12: Clear All selectable timing references fail

Purpose
Use this procedure to clear the All selectable timing references fail alarm.
Related information
See the corresponding alarm description “All selectable timing references fail” (p. 2-84).

Proceed as follows to clear the All selectable timing references fail alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check whether at least one LINEREF is enabled and its priority for the system timing is
higher than 0.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 For the enabled LINEREF, check whether there are SLTMSIG or SYNCREFFAIL alarms
present. If so, clear them first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the alarm persists, contact Alcatel-Lucent technical support (http://www.alcatel-lucent.

com/contact-us).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-13: Clear Amplifier disabled
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-13: Clear Amplifier disabled

Purpose
Use this procedure to clear the Amplifier disabled alarm.
Related information
See the corresponding alarm description “Amplifier disabled” (p. 2-85).
NOTICE
Proceed as follows to clear the Amplifier disabled alarm.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine if there are any temperature alarms on the shelf. If so, check the airflow of the
shelf, filler card presence, and ambient air temperature. Resolve any air flow obstructions
or air-conditioner issues.
CLI alm
WEBUI Select Reports > Alarm List > Total or Reports > Condition List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a warm reset of the card.
CLI config card card type shelf slot reset warm

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a cold reset of the card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-13: Clear Amplifier disabled
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
CLI config card card_type shelf slot reset cold

WEBUI Select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Cold Reboot >Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Reseat the card. Refer to Procedure 4-17: “Reseat a card” (p. 4-51).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-14: Clear Amplifier gain tilt adjustments
Network element alarms suspended
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-14: Clear Amplifier gain tilt adjustments

suspended
Purpose
Use this procedure to clear the Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended alarm.
Related information
See the corresponding alarm description “Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended”
(p. 2-86).
Before you begin

The PWRTILTSUSP condition notifies the user that alarms present in the system have
caused the automatic adjustments to be suspended.

Proceed as follows to clear the Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended alarm.
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the PWRTILTSUSP condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the Auto Tilt Adjustment type at the local node. If the local node uses manual tilt
adjustment, then the upstream node must also be set to manual tilt adjustment. If the local
node uses auto tilt adjustment, then the upstream LD may use either manual or auto tilt
adjustment without fault.
CLI config interface powermgmt sh/sl/pt tiltadjtype

WEBUI From the Equipment Tree, select the LD, then select LINE, then click on the
Power Management tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Attempt an adjustment at the LD where the alarm is raised. Then wait 2 seconds for
channel power to update and then recheck the power per channel readings at the external
Line Out port.
CLI config powermgmt ingress/egress sh sl adjust

config interface amplifier type sh/sl/Line detail
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WEBUI From the Equipment Tree, select Administration > Power Commissioning >
Power Adjustment > Ingress/Egress.
Select the LD, Side and Topology fields to view, and click Retrieve.
Select Connections > OCH Cross Connects. Select the path and select A-Z
Power or Z-A Power.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check for any alarms raised against the ingress LD. Troubleshoot those before
proceeding. Pay particular attention to any upstream alarms or conditions, as these may
mask the source of the PWRTILTSUSP problem.
CLI alm
WEBUI From the Equipment Tree, select Reports > Alarm List > Total orReports >
Condition List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check if the WTOCM card is admin up and functioning correctly. If there are any other
alarms raised at the WTOCM, troubleshoot those first before proceeding.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Verify that the LD is functioning correctly, is receiving power and is admin up.
CLI config interface amplifier type sh/sl/Sig detail

WEBUI From the Equipment Tree, select the amplifier card and check the power
settings at the Sig port and Line port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Verify that the LD Sig Out port (for a bidirectional LD) or the Line Out port (for a
unidirectional LD) is receiving wavekey powers.
CLI show wavekey monitor sh/sl/pt out frequency

WEBUI From the Equipment Tree, select the card and then the port. Select the Wave
Keys In or Wave Keys Out tab.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Verify that the WTOCM card is able to see wavekey and power information for all the
channels. Use the “Wave Key Presence State” in WEBUI Reports > Wavelength Tracker
to help troubleshoot any channels which are not reliable.
CLI To get total power information:

config interface wtocm sh/sl/IN[1-4] detail
config interface wtocm sh/sl/IN[1-4] channel frequency
summary
WEBUI From the Equipment Tree, select the card and then the port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Perform a warm reset of the WTOCM pack.
CLI config card WTOCM shelf slot reset warm

WEBUI From the Equipment Tree, select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Warm
Reboot > Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Check if the CWR8-88 or WR8-88A card is admin up and functioning properly. If not,
then perform a warm reset.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Check if there are any other cards in the NE that are not admin up or functioning properly
and perform a warm reset of the card as required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 If there is still no power at the Line Out port, then perform a cold reset of the WTOCM
pack.
CLI config card WTOCM shelf slot reset cold

WEBUI From the Equipment Tree, select the card, click the Reboot tab, select Cold
Reboot > Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 If there is still no power at the Line Out port, try replacing the card. Refer to Procedure
4-18: “Replacing a Card (General)” (p. 4-53).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-15: Clear Amplifier out of operational range -
Network element alarms amplifier gain too low alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-15: Clear Amplifier out of operational range -

amplifier gain too low alarm
Purpose
Use this procedure to clear the Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain too low
alarm.
Related information
See the corresponding alarm description “Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier
gain too low” (p. 2-88).
NOTICE
Proceed as follows to clear the Amplifier out of operational range - amplifier gain too low
alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure Procedure 4-14: “Perform a path power trace” (p. 4-47) and locate
the likely point that is the cause of the LOGAIN alarm. This may be on the upstream NE
or the local one. Retrieve alarms and conditions and, using the appropriate corrective
actions, resolve these issues first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Attempt an egress or ingress amplifier adjust, depending on the type of amplifier that is
raising this alarm. If any adjust fails, there may be other optical power related alarms that
are raised as a result. Resolve these issues by following the appropriate procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 It is possible that the gain range provisioned by the EPT for this amplifier is insufficient
to accommodate the unexpected change in loss in the network. Capture the current
operating state of the network, using the 1354 RM-PhM XML network export feature.
Refer the problem to network planning for analysis.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-15: Clear Amplifier out of operational range -
Network element alarms amplifier gain too low alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If this does not resolve the issue, then the problem may be with the card itself. Perform a
warm reset on the card where the OPR condition is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-16: Clear Application needs personal assistance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-16: Clear Application needs personal assistance

Purpose
Use this procedure to clear an Application needs personal assistance alarm.
Related information
Please also see the corresponding alarm description “Application needs personal
assistance” (p. 2-89).
Before you begin

Make sure you have management access to the NE to clear an
Application needs personal assistance alarm. The
Application needs personal assistance and NE unavailable alarms are
reported at the same time, but the NE unavailable alarm is also reported in other
situations.

Proceed as follows to clear an Application needs personal assistance alarm:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 The trouble clearing for this alarm requires to proceed in an iterative way, possibly
including various types of resets. As a deep knowledge of the system behavior is essential
for performing this trouble clearing procedure, we recommend to contact next level of
technical support for assistance.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-17: Clear APR Active - Invalid Topology
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-17: Clear APR Active - Invalid Topology

Purpose
Use this procedure to clear the APR Active - Invalid Topology alarm.
Related information
See the corresponding alarm description “APR Active - invalid topology” (p. 2-90).

Proceed as follows to clear the APR Active - Invalid Topology alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Create a new topology. The topology must include all topological links that must be
monitored for possible fiber cuts.
CLI config interface topology

WEBUI Select Connections > Physical Topology > Create.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the alarm is raised against a unidirectional egress LD card, then the topology must
include a link from the output of the card to an external fiber, and there must be an ingress
LD provisioned for the opposite direction.
CLI config interface {card name} shelf/slot/

LineOut oppdirection
WEBUI In the Equipment Tree, select System, Shelf, the affected card and slot.
Click the LINEOUT port.
The Port Details tab is displayed.
In the Opposite Direction Port field, enter the shelf, slot and port for the
ingress LD, and click Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If … then …
assistance.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-17: Clear APR Active - Invalid Topology
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-18: Clear APR Active - Line alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-18: Clear APR Active - Line alarm

Purpose
Use this procedure to clear the APR Active - Line alarm.
Note: The following procedure for the egress LD will also clear the APRLINE
condition on:
• the LineIn port of an RA2P if it is connected to the ingress LD that has detected
the defect
• the A2P2125 or A4PSWG if it is connected to the ingress LD that has detected the
defect
Related information
See the corresponding alarm description “APR Active - Line” (p. 2-92).

Proceed as follows to clear the APR Active - Line alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine the ingress amplifier that is connected to the egress amplifier reporting the
APR condition.
CLI show interface topology
WEBUI Select Connections > Physical Topology.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Confirm the LOS condition on the ingress amplifier.
CLI alm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check that the OSCs at both ends of the span are set to OC3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check that there are no OSC failures (LOS, LOF, LOL). Correct any alarms found.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Proceed to the appropriate LOS trouble-clearing procedure to clear the LOS condition.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-19: Clear APR Active - Node
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-19: Clear APR Active - Node

Purpose
Use this procedure to clear the APR Active - Node alarm.
Related information
See the corresponding alarm description “APR Active - Node” (p. 2-93).

Proceed as follows to clear the APR Active - Node alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the topology to see which pack follows the LD pack.
CLI show interface topology

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Do one of the following, depending on what type of pack has APR node:
If... then...
Unidirectional ingress LD (A4PSWG, check the LineOut port.
AM2125A/B, A2P2125A, AM2318A)
Bidirectional ingress LD (A2325A). check the SIG port and what it is connected to.
It will either be connected to the SIG port of
an egress LD or to the SIG port of a CWR or
WR card.
If the SIG port is connected to the SIG port of
an egress LD, then also check the topology of
the LINE port of the egress LD, to see what
CWR or WR card it is connected to.
Bidirectional egress LD (A2325A) check the SIG port and what it is connected to.
This will be the ingress LD.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check the output power of the LD.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI For unidirectional LD’s:

• show interface card type shelf/slot/ LineOut detail.
• Look at the total power out.
For the A2325A amplifier, do the same as above, but check the SIG port.
WEBUI In the Equipment Tree, select the applicable shelf/slot/port.
Click the Line Out tab.
Check the value in the Total Output Power field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Do one of the following, depending on what type of pack has APR node:
If... then...
the LD has output power check for a broken or disconnected fiber
between the LD output port and the pack that
follows.
the LD has no output power the likely cause is an LOS condition at the
input of the amplifier.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Check whether LOS or LOS-P alarms are present, because the amplifiers shut down when
they have no DWDM channels at the input.
CLI alm
WEBUI In the Equipment Tree, select the applicable shelf/slot.
Select Function: Fault.
The Alarm List is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Check for OSC failure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If the LOS or LOS-P alarms are present, clear these alarms, then repeat this procedure
from Step 2.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If … then …
assistance.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-20: Clear APR Limited
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-20: Clear APR Limited

Purpose
Use this procedure to clear the APR Limited alarm.
Related information
See the corresponding alarm description “APR Limited ” (p. 2-96).

Proceed as follows to clear the APR Limited alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine the topology of the node where the APR Limited alarm is raised.
CLI show interface topology shelf/slot/port
or
show interface topology *
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the topology, identify the card which is experiencing the defects that are the source
of the APR Limited alarm.
Location of APR Limited Alarm Source Card

Card Port
Unidirectional (egress) LD LineOut Line-terminating (ingress) LD
that launches into a span for the same optical line
Bidirectional LD that Sig Line-terminating LD for the
launches into a span same optical line
RA2P LineIn Line-terminating LD for the
same optical line; or RA2P
Hybrid line-terminating LD LineIn Hybrid line-terminating LD
Unidirectional LineOut CWR or WR that is fibered to
line-terminating LD LD LineOut
A2325A line-terminating LD Sig LD for reverse direction; or,
at add/drop node, CWR or
WR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-20: Clear APR Limited
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Location of APR Limited Alarm Source Card

Card Port
Unidirectional LD in LineOut WR that is fibered to LineOut
Add/Drop block of "config
D" anydirection node
Bidirectional LD in Add/Drop Sig WR that is fibered to Sig out
block of "config D"
anydirection node
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Determine the alarm or alarms that are causing the APR Limited condition by examining
the alarms that are present at the source card that was identified in Step 2.
CLI show condition

WEBUI Select Reports > Condition List.
Determine which alarms are present on the source card. One or more of the following
alarms will be present:
• CARDBOOT (Card booting)
No corrective action is required for CARDBOOT. After the source card has finished
booting, the CARDBOOT condition will clear at the source card, and the
APRLIMITED alarm will also clear.
• EQPTBOOT (Card failure – boot failure)
EQPTBOOT indicates a pack failure. If EQPTBOOT is raised on the source card,
follow the steps of the trouble-clearing procedure (refer to Procedure 3-39: “Clear
Card failure - boot failure alarm” (p. 3-97)). Once EQPTBOOT has been cleared at
the source card, the APRLIMITED alarm will also clear.
• REPLUNITMISS (Card missing)
REPLUNITMISS indicates that the source card has been removed. It is possible for
the REPLUNITMISS alarm to be raised on the source card without triggering an
APRLIMITED alarm. Software combines the check for REPLUNITMISS with an
additional check of whether the source card’s slot is equipped before raising
APRLIMITED. If REPLUNITMISS is raised, follow the steps of the trouble
clearing-procedure (refer to Procedure 3-44: “Clear Card missing/Card removal
unseat alarm” (p. 3-106)).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-21: Clear APR Forced
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-21: Clear APR Forced

Purpose
Use this procedure to clear the APR Forced alarm.
Related information
See the corresponding alarm description “APR Forced” (p. 2-98).

Proceed as follows to clear the APR Forced alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 At the port that is reporting the alarm, set the APR mode to Auto.
CLI config interface <shelf/slot/port> aprmode auto

WEBUI In the Equipment Tree, select the shelf, slot and port of the affected LD.
In the APR Mode field, select Auto and click Submit.
The APRFORCED condition will automatically clear after this provisioning step is
completed. Amplifier pumps will automatically restart if the fiber is determined to be
intact. In some cases, another APR alarm will be reported, but it will clear
automatically once the conditions that caused the APR alarm have cleared.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-22: Clear APS channel mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-22: Clear APS channel mismatch

Purpose
Use this procedure to clear the APS channel mismatch alarm.
Related information
See the corresponding alarm description “APS channel mismatch” (p. 2-100).
NOTICE
Replacing and reconnecting optical patch cords may be service affecting. It is
recommended to replace and reconnect optical patch cords during a maintenance
window.
Proceed as follows to clear the APS channel mismatch alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Observe the protection information presented in the APSCM condition. Note the
protection group information and the cards involved.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Login to the near end NE and perform the procedure Procedure 4-12: “Determine the far
end of a service” (p. 4-43) to determine the NE and card that link directly to the
(near-end) card reporting the APSCM alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Open a new window and log into the far-end NE identified in Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter the following commands on both the near-end and far-end NEs to confirm that the
protection group is configured as desired.
CLI config aps group <group_id> detail
1. Ensure that the near-end and far-end interfaces are in the same protection group.
2. Check the direction of the protection group.
3. Validate that the protection group has a valid working and protection path.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Using the data obtained in Step 1 and Step 4, confirm that the working cards are paired up
and that the protection cards are paired up.
1. Confirm that the topology matches the programmed topology.
CLI show interface topology *

2. Verify that the optical patch cord to the protect interface at the near end is connected
to the protect interface at the far end. Reconfigure and reconnect the optical patch
cords to the protect members if they are not.
3. Verify that the optical patch cord to the working interface at the near end is connected
to the working interface at the far end. Reconfigure and reconnect the optical patch
cords to the working members if they are not.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Enter the following commands at both the near-end and far-end NEs to confirm that the
card types at the near end and far end are the same.
CLI show slot slot number
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Determine whether the card on the far-end NE is currently being upgraded.
CLI show software upgrade status brief

WEBUI Select Administration > Software > Upgrade and view the Status field.
If the card is in the upgrade state then wait for upgrade to complete. The upgrade is
complete when the action progress is 100% and the action status is complete. The near
end alarm should clear after the upgrade is complete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 If the problem persists, invoke a manual switch onto the currently active line.
1. Determine the currently active line:
CLI config aps group [x] detail
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2. Perform a manual switch to the active line. For example, if the working path is
currently active then the following commands would be used.
CLI config aps group [x] manualSwitchtoworking
If the protection path is currently active then the following commands would be used.
CLI config aps group [x] manualSwitchtoprotection
3. Clear the manual switch:
CLI config aps group [x] clear
Log out of the far end NE if this solves the problem.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If the problem persists, perform a warm reset on both protection cards:


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-23: Clear APS mode mismatch alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-23: Clear APS mode mismatch alarm

Purpose
Use this procedure to clear the APS mode mismatch alarm.
Related information
See the corresponding alarm description “APS mode mismatch” (p. 2-102).

Proceed as follows to clear the APS mode mismatch alarm.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine the port that is reporting the APSMM alarm. This is the port at the end of the
protection group currently configured for bidirectional switching.
CLI alm
Select Function: Fault.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Display the protection group for the associated shelf/slot/port that is raising the Mode
Mismatch alarm:
CLI config aps group [x] detail

Click the Port Protection tab.
The Create APS Group window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check the network plan to determine the desired direction for the protection group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the desired directionality for the protection group is unidirectional, change the
protection mode at the near end to uni-directional:
CLI config aps group [x] direction uni

WEBUI In the Switch Direction field, select Unidirectional.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-23: Clear APS mode mismatch alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If the desired directionality for the protection group is bi-directional, change the
protection mode at the far end to bi-directional:
1. Determine the NE and card that link directly to the (near-end) card reporting the
APSMM alarm. Perform the procedure Procedure 4-12: “Determine the far end of a
service” (p. 4-43).
2. Login to the far-end NE.
3. Display the protection group for the associated shelf/slot/port on the far end NE, as
determined in item1 above. This is the port at the end of the protection group
currently configured for uni-directional switching.
CLI config aps group [y] detail

The Create APS Group window is displayed.
4. Change the protection mode to bi-directional.
CLI config aps group [y] direction bi

WEBUI In the Switch Direction field, select Bidirectional.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-24: Clear APS protection switching byte failure
Network element alarms alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-24: Clear APS protection switching byte failure

alarm
Purpose
Use this procedure to clear the APS protection switching byte failure alarm.
Related information
See the corresponding alarm description “APS protection switching byte failure”
(p. 2-104).
NOTICE
Proceed as follows to clear the APS protection switching byte failure alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Observe the protection information presented in the APSB condition. Note the protection
group information and the cards involved.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Login to the near end NE and perform the procedure Procedure 4-12: “Determine the far
end of a service” (p. 4-43) to determine the NE and card that link directly to the
(near-end) card reporting the APSB alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Open a new window and log into the far-end NE identified in Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter the following commands on both the near-end and far-end NEs to confirm that the
protection group is configured as desired.
CLI config aps group <group_id> detail
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-24: Clear APS protection switching byte failure
Network element alarms alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WEBUI Select Reports > APS Groups.

The Automatic Protection Switch Groups window is displayed.
1. Ensure that the near-end and far-end interfaces are in the same protection group.
2. Check the direction of the protection group.
3. Validate that the protection group has a valid working and protection path.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Using the data obtained in Step 1 and Step 4, confirm that the working cards are paired up
and that the protection cards are paired up.
1. Confirm that the topology matches the programmed topology.
CLI show interface topology *

2. Verify that the optical patch cord to the protect interface at the near end is connected
to the protect interface at the far end. Reconfigure and reconnect the optical patch
cords to the protect members if they are not.
3. Verify that the optical patch cord to the working interface at the near end is connected
to the working interface at the far end. Reconfigure and reconnect the optical patch
cords to the working members if they are not.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Enter the following commands at both the near-end and far-end NEs to confirm that the
card types at the near end and far end are the same.
CLI show slot slot number

WEBUI In the Equipment Tree, select the applicable shelf/slot for each NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If the problem persists, warm reset both protection cards:


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-25: Clear Auto Laser Shutoff Due to Upstream
Network element alarms Fault alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-25: Clear Auto Laser Shutoff Due to Upstream

Fault alarm
Purpose
Use this procedure to clear the Auto Laser Shutoff Due to Upstream Fault alarm.
Related information
See the corresponding alarm description “Auto laser off due to upstream condition”
(p. 2-106).
NOTICE
Proceed as follows to clear the Auto Laser Shutoff Due to Upstream Fault alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine which network port on the near-end card is associated with the client port that
has raised the USALS condition. Network ports for this product are usually port 1. Look
for LOS, LOC or LOF alarm at the network port or Out of Service type alarms at the
associated client port(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Using the applicable procedure for the fault detected in Step 1, clear the fault.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 To inject an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), idle frames, or an invalid signal and not to
shut the laser off in reaction to the upstream fault at the near end client port, change the
LOS Propagation setting.
CLI config interface <shelf slot port> losprop laseron
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-25: Clear Auto Laser Shutoff Due to Upstream
Network element alarms Fault alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WEBUI In the Equipment Tree, select the applicable shelf/slot/port for the near end
client port.
The Client Details tab is displayed.
In the Los Propagation field, select Laser On.
Click Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Using the procedure Procedure 4-12: “Determine the far end of a service” (p. 4-43),
determine the nature of the fault at the far end. Look for LOS or Out of Service type
alarms at the associated client port(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Using the applicable procedure for the fault detected in Step 4, clear the fault.
If the condition does not clear, perform the following steps on the near end card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a warm reset of the card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Repeat Step 6 to Step 9 for the associated card at the far-end of the service.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-26: Clear Auto Negotiation Mismatch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-26: Clear Auto Negotiation Mismatch

Purpose
Use this procedure to clear the Auto Negotiation Mismatch alarm.
Related information
See the corresponding alarm description “Auto Negotiation Mismatch” (p. 2-107).

Proceed as follows to clear the Auto Negotiation Mismatch alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Correct the Auto-negotiation setting.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-27: Clear Automatic switch to protection alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-27: Clear Automatic switch to protection alarm

Purpose
Use this procedure to clear the Automatic switch to protection alarm.
Related information
See the corresponding alarm description “Automatic switch to protection” (p. 2-114).

Proceed as follows to clear the Automatic switch to protection alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Wait for the wait-to-restore timer to expire.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Display the protection group for the associated shelf/slot/port.
CLI config aps group group detail

The APS Group Details window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Initiate a manual switch to working.
CLI config aps group group manualSwitchtoWorking

WEBUI In the Protection Switch field, select Manual Switch to Working.
Click Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Clear the manual switch.
CLI config aps group group clearSwitch

WEBUI In the Switch Status field, select Clear.
Click Submit.
Note: If there are faults against working facility/equipment: At the end of each step
wait to see if the fault clears. If not, continue with the next step.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-27: Clear Automatic switch to protection alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Resolve the fault(s) against working facility/equipment.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Repeat Step 2, then continue with step Step 7.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Initiate a lockout of protection.
CLI config aps group <group> lockout

WEBUI In the Protection Switch field, select Protection Lockout.
Click Submit.
Result: The LOCKOUTOFPR standing condition is raised (see Procedure 3-206:

“Clear Lockout of Protection” (p. 3-377)).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-28: Clear Automatic switch to working alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-28: Clear Automatic switch to working alarm

Purpose
Use this procedure to clear the Automatic switch to working alarm.
Related information
See the corresponding alarm description “Automatic switch to working” (p. 2-116).

Proceed as follows to clear the Automatic switch to working alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Wait for the wait-to-restore timer to expire.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Determine which side is the working side and which side is the protection side.
CLI show aps
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Display the protection group for the associated shelf/slot/port.
CLI config aps group group detail

WEBUI Select the port of the card, and click the Port tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check the administrative state on the protection side client/line ports.
CLI show interface

If the state is down, the switch may have been caused by user administrative provisioning.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Check for faults on the protection side card, or the protection side client/line ports.
CLI alm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-28: Clear Automatic switch to working alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If... Then...
faults are present, proceed to the appropriate procedure for
clearing the faults.
no faults are present, the switch may have occurred due to a
transient defect that has since cleared. The
action required to clear this condition depends
on whether or not there are outstanding
problems against the working

8DG61258GAAATMZZA - V1 - 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 7.0 Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

8DG61258GAAATMZZA - V1 - 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 7.0 Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Title page

Interference Information: Part 15 of FCC Rules

About this document

What's new ............................................................................................................................................................................ lxxxvii

Safety information ................................................................................................................................................................... xciv

Conventions used ..................................................................................................................................................................... xciv

Related information .................................................................................................................................................................. xcv

Technical support .................................................................................................................................................................. xcviii

How to comment ................................................................................................................................................................... xcviii

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

General notes on safety

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-3

Structure of safety statements ............................................................................................................................................... 1-4

Basic safety aspects .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-7

Specific safety areas

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11

Potential sources of danger ................................................................................................................................................. 1-12

Laser safety ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-13

Laser product classification ................................................................................................................................................ 1-19

Equipment grounding ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-25

Electrostatic discharge .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-26

Safety requirements in specific deployment phases

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-33

Storage ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-37

Installation ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-41

Taking into operation ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-47

Operation and maintenance ................................................................................................................................................ 1-51

Taking out of operation ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-61

Event of failure ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1-64

2 Alarm and condition details

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

Network element alarms

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-37

Abnormal Insertion ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-63

Active Loopback ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-65

Add Power Adjustment Failure ........................................................................................................................................ 2-67

Add power control failure ................................................................................................................................................... 2-70

AES FIPS Failure .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-71

AIS - TCM ............................................................................................................................................................................... 2-72

AIS is Detected at the BITS Port ...................................................................................................................................... 2-73

AIS Line/MS for OCn/STMn ............................................................................................................................................ 2-74

AIS Line/MS ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-75

Alarm Indication Signal ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-76

Alarm Indication Signal on HO Path .............................................................................................................................. 2-77

Alarm Indication Signal STS Path ................................................................................................................................... 2-79

All Channels Missing ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-81

All Outgoing Channels Missing ........................................................................................................................................ 2-83

Amplifier disabled .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-85

Amplifier gain tilt adjustments suspended .................................................................................................................... 2-86

Application needs personal assistance ............................................................................................................................ 2-89

APR Active - invalid topology .......................................................................................................................................... 2-90

APR Active - Line .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-92

APR Active - Node ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-93

APR Active – port switch .................................................................................................................................................... 2-95

APR Limited ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-96

APR Forced .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-98

APR unavailable - monitoring card booting ................................................................................................................. 2-99

APS channel mismatch ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-100

APS mode mismatch .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-102

APS protection switching byte failure ......................................................................................................................... 2-104

Authentication Failure ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-105

Auto laser off due to upstream condition .................................................................................................................... 2-106

Auto Negotiation Mismatch ............................................................................................................................................. 2-107